MASTER NEGATIVE 


NO. 93-81335-21 





MICROFILMED 1993 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 


as part of the | | 
"Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project” 


Funded by the 
NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 


Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
Columbia University Library 





COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 


The copyright law of the United States - Title 17, United 
States Code - concerns the making of photocopies or 
other reproductions of copyrighted material. 


Under certain conditions specified in the law, libraries and 
archives are authorized to furnish a photocopy or other 
reproduction. One of these specified conditions is that the 
photocopy or other reproduction is not to be "used for any 
purpose other than private study, scholarship, or 
research." If a user makes a request for, or later uses, a 
photocopy or reproduction for purposes in excess of "fair 
use, that user may be liable for copyright infringement. 


This institution reserves the right to refuse to accept a 
copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
would involve violation of the copyright law. 





AUTHOR: 


HARPER, WILLIAM 
RAINEY 


TITLE: 


AN INDUCTIVE GREEK 


METHOD 


PLACE: 


NEW YORK 


DATE: 


[1888] 





Master Negative # 


COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 








Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 


ele ne 


ee 
a 
- 


887.482 
H23 





Harper, William Rainey, 1856-1906. 


An inductive Greek method, by William R. Harper ... 
and William E. Waters ... New York and Chicago, Ivi- 
son, Blakeman, and company (1888, 


vili p., 2 1., 113:-355 p. 184°*. 











1. Greek language—Composition and exercises. 1. Waters, Williain 
Everett, 1856- 74 jOint author. πω 


᾿ 10-24159¢ | 
Library of Congress ( } PA258.H45 1888 


© 1889: 24388 








TECHNICAL MICROFORM DATA 


FILM SIZE: ep he REDUCTION RATIO: 
IMAGE PLACEMENT: IA dIA’ 1Β IIB 
DATE FILMED: 9 INITIALS____ /7 4% 


FILMED BY: RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS, INC_ WOODBRIDGE, ¢ 








BIBLIOGRAPHIC IRREGULARITIES 


MAIN 
ENTRY: arper US Iliam ay? Oe 
‘at  ddchve Greek 22) 


Bibliographic Irregularities in the Original Documen 
List volumes and pages affected; include name of institution if filming borrowed text. 





Page(s) missing/not available: 








Volumes(s) missing ποῖ available: 











F Illegible and/or damaged page(s): fp. 20-50 





Page(s) or volumes(s) misnumbered: 








Bound out of sequence: 











Page(s) or illustration(s) filmed from copy borrowed from: L rb rory 


of Elmira College 


Other: 




















FILMED IN WHOLE 
OR PART FROM A 
COPY BORROWED 


FROM LIBRARY OF 
ELMIRA COLLEGE 





lz 
2 
2 

















Suite 1100. 





nd Image Management 
28 5 
sin 2 
0 


36 
40 











ll 
l 
| 
Ι 
Ὁ 





Association for Information a 
301/587-8202 





e Avenue, 











Silver Spring, Maryland 20910 


1100 Wayn 


1.25 





BY APPLIED IMAGE, INC. 














MANUFACTURED TO AIIM STANDARDS 


3 


2 


1 


Centimeter 


~ “pb 
ep “t 
wy a “4: 


7) 


“2 








Ad 

1 
ce ς 
an 
is 

; 
“4 
an) 














mecee 8 8=6—| He 


| 
| 
| 
| 


Columbia College 
in the Wity of Tew ork 














Library. 


GIVEN BY 


Am. Book Co. 





























INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD 


Zz 
«- 











AN INDUCTIV# 





GRHHK METHOD 





BY 


WILLIAM R. HARPER, Pa.D. 


PROFESSOR IN YALE UNIVERSITY 





AND 


WILLIAM E. WATERS, ΡΗ.Ὁ. 


CINCINNATI, OHIO 


NEW YORK .:: CINCINNATI -:- CHICAGO 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 








Copyright, 1888, 
Br Ivison, BLAKEMAN, AND COMPANY. 








Printed by 
Wim. vison 
Rew Work, U.S. A, 








PREFACE. 


THERE is clearly no demand for a new Introductory Greek 
book, unless it is one which differs essentially from those which 
are already in use. The score or more of methods which have 
appeared in this country are constructed according to the same 
idea. Though many of them are scholarly and progressive, all 
are merely companions to the grammar, and not guides to the 
language. 

The existence of so many “methods ” indicates a feeling that, 
thus far, an entirely satisfactory introductory book has not been 
found. If anything additional were needed to justify the exist- 
ence of this feeling, it would be found in the lack of interest 
which characterizes the average student of Greek, and in the 
confessedly small results accomplished in college. 

The method presented in this book claims to overcome both 
of these difficulties. It will arouse enthusiasm; it will increase 
results. It is not supposed that this claim will be accepted until 
the merits of the method have been tested in the class-room, but 
the following outline of the plan of work which it advocates may, 
perhaps, show the value of the principles on which the claim is 
based. 

1. A sentence of the original text, or part of a sentence (in 
later work, even a section), is placed before the pupil. The pro- 
nunciation and exact translation of each word are furnished him. 
By the aid which the teacher gives him in advance, and with the 


material given in the book, he thoroughly masters the words and 


1 R601 

















vi PREFACE. 


phrases of this sentence or section. His knowledge is tested by 
requiring him to recite or write the Greek sentence with only 
the translation before his eye. 

2. In connection with this mastery of the words and phrases 
of the sentence assigned, the pupil reads and digests the contents 
of the “ Notes” on these words. ‘This study accomplishes two 
things, — first, the careful examination of each remark, with its 
application to the work in hand, aids in fixing more firmly in 
mind the word sought to be mastered; second, grammatical ma- 
terial from the very beginning is being collected. 

8. The “Text” and “ Notes” having been learned, the next 
step is one of a more general character. Out of the material 
which has thus far been mastered, those principles which are of 
most importance, and which the pupil himself will be most likely 
to recognize, are pointed out under the head of “ Observations.” 
The pupil may be brought to see these points himself before 
having his attention called to them in the Lesson. 

4. The grammatical material obtained in the Lesson is now 


systematized and arranged with reference to the two leading 


grammars. ‘This not only furnishes a review of what already 
has been done, but also enables the pupil to see the connection 
of each new fact or principle with the others to which it stands 
related. 

5. The words of the sentence or section are now separated 
from their context and placed in alphabetical order. Thus sepa- 
rated, they form the basis of additional study. In some cases 
words similar in form and meaning to familiar English words 
are inserted in order to allow a greater variety in the exercise. 

6. In order to prevent the memorizing of the Greek text 
without a clear idea of the force of each word, to impress more 
firmly on the mind the words and phrases of the text, and to 
drill the pupil in prose composition, “ Exercises,” Greek into 
English and English into Greek, are given. These are always 
hased upon the sentence or section which furnishes the basis of 
the Lesson. Prose composition taught in this manner ceases 








PREFACE. 


to be dreaded by the pupil, and becomes, indeed, a source of 
delight. 

7. Once more the leading points of the entire Lesson, whether 
suggested in the “ Notes,” the “ Observations,” or the “ Gram- 
mar Lesson,” come up for consideration under the head of 
“Topics for Study.” Upon each topic the student is expected 
to make a statement of what he knows (not of what has been 
said in the book). If his statement is not sufficiently full, it 
will be criticised by the class. 

From this outline the idea of the method will be apparent. It 
proposes, first, to gain an accurate and thorough knowledge of 
some of the facts of the language; second, to learn from these 
facts the principles which they illustrate, and by which they are 
regulated ; third, to apply these principles in the further progress 
of the work. A few words in explanation of this statement are 
needed. 

1. The method employed is inductive, and yet a slight depart- 
ure is made at times to allow a more complete treatment of a 
subject, in order to elucidate some detail of which an example 
has not occurred. 

2. The term “facts,” as used, includes data from every source. 
Special emphasis is laid upon the collecting of facts from the liy- 
ing page of the original text: but paradigms and vocabularies are 
also to be used for this purpose. 

3. It is not to be supposed that a long time must elapse be- 
fore the beginner is ready to take hold of principles. As a 
matter of fact, he is taught important principles, and that, too, 
inductively, during the first hour’s work. The three processes 
are all the while going on together. He is increasing the store 
of facts at his command, learning from the facts thus acquired 
new principles, and applying these principles to the new forms 
continually coming to his notice. 

4. The memorizing of the facts of a language before a knowl- 
edge of the principles has been acquired is, indeed, a piece of 
drudgery, and yet not so great as is the memorizing of grammar 








Se ee ON ne --- -οο ς τοὶ 


er an We 




















PREFACE. 


without a knowledge of the facts. Nor will it long remain 
drudgery ; for very soon the student begins to see analogies, and 
to compare this word with that, and, in short, to make his own 


grammar. 

The Lessons cover Book-I. of Xenophon’s Anabasis, and in- 
clude a formal study of almost every portion of the grammar. 
Special attention is given to review, lessons for the purpose be- 


ing frequently inserted. Some additional items of interest to 
teachers will be found elsewhere. 

To Professor W. R. Crabbe, of Shadyside Academy, Pitts- 
burgh, the authors are under obligation for his kindness in con- 
senting to examine the proof-sheets. and for the very valuable 
suggestions and criticisms which have been received from him. 

The List of Words arranged in the order of their first oc- 
currence has been prepared by Professor James Wallace, of 
Macalister College, Minn., who is engaged in the preparation 
of a second book upon the Anabasis to accompany the present 
volume. 

Suggestions, corrections, and criticisms will gladly be received, 
and in each case proper acknowledgment will be made. It is 
the hope of those engaged in the preparation of this method, 
that by its publication a greater interest in the study of the 
Greek language may be awakened. 

WILLIAM R. HARPER, 
WILLIAM E. WATERS. 


Avucust 18, 1888. 








ὧν τ 3S 2 bel pe 2... 


ae 


ae 


SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 


1. Use twenty minutes of every hour in explaining to the class the new 
points of the advance-lesson ; and in no case ask a class to prepare a lesson 
which has not thus been explained. 

2. Do not fail to require the pupil so to master the text that, with the Eng- 
lish translation before his eye, he can repeat or write the original with accu- 
racy and without hesitation ; and with every advance-lesson let the text of 
the ten or twelve preceding lessons be reviewed. 

3. Let every point referred to in the ‘* Notes” be called up in one form or 
another in the class-room. 

4. In teaching the ‘‘Observations,” let the words or phrases which serve as 
the basis of the ‘‘ Observations” be written upon the board. 

5. Insist upon the thorough mastery of the ‘‘ Vocabularies,” not only from 
the Greek into English, but also from the English into Greek. 

6. In the translation of the English sentences into Greek, the following 
order is suggested: (1) The pupil will write the exercise in a blank-book ; 
(2) He will copy it upon the blackboard ; (3) The instructor will read and 
correct the work on the board, the pupil at the same time incorporating the 
corrections in his blank book ; (4) The instructor will examine the book and 
mark all words which contain an error ; (5) The pupil will take the book and 
correct all words so marked. To carry out this plan two blank books are 
required. 

7. The Review lessons are very important, and should be dwelt upon until 
thoroughly mastered. 

8. Much time can be saved and much good accomplished by having the 
class do a portion of the work in concert. This is especially helpful in repro- 
ducing the original text from the English translation and in reviewing the 
‘** English Exercises into Greek.” 

9. It is unnecessary, indeed harmful, to tell the pupil everything that may 
be said concerning a word or form, when it first occurs. Nor should one feel 
obliged, when a general statement is made concerning a given point, to indi- 
cate all the exceptions which exist. 

10. Require the mastery of the paradigms, but not merely that they may 
be recited by rote. The pupil should study and compare them, with a view 
to ascertaining the principles in accordance with which they are constructed. 
As paradigms are commonly studied, they work more injury than benefit. 

11. Introduce conversation in Greek upon the text if possible ; it relieves 
the monotony of a recitation; it fixes the text more firmly in mind; it 
teaches the pupil to think in the language which he is studying. Every 
teacher knows the common stock of interrogative words and phrases, or can 
get them from a grammar. 

12. It is not supposed that an ordinary class will learn one lesson a day. 
If the seventy lessons can be covered in one hundred or one hundred and 
twenty recitations, the prozress should be regarded as satisfactory. 





OF CONTENTS. 





PREFACE . 


SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS 


imenoms T-LARTE 1. Cs 


Text or Anapasis Book I. 





A Litera, TRANSLATION oF Cuapters [--1]. . . 879-988 
A Free TRANSLATION or Cuapters J.-Il. ... . 289-294 


Worps or AnasBasis Boox I. In orperR or First Occur- 


RENCE ; 905-- 897 


VOCABULARY. 329-355 


3 
Γ 
᾿ 
᾿ 
ἢ 
i 
} 
: 
Ἱ 
q 





eee A RO HT Oa eral eas 








— 
Fionn 











INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 





LESSON I. 
ANABASIS, I. 1. 1. 


Nore. — In studying the “ Text” and “ Notes” the pupil will observe 
the following suggestions : — 

(1) Take up first the word Aa-pei-ov, and notice the form of each 
letter, the marks of accent, the transliteration given below it, the number 
of syllables, and the translation. After reading carefully what is said 
about it in Note 1, (a), (6), (c), copy it on paper two or three times, 
each time pronouncing it aloud; write it from memory two or three 
times, comparing the result with the printed form; pronounce it (always 
aloud) until it can be uttered without hesitation, and in pronouncing 
associate the meaning with the sound. 

(2) Treat in the same manner the remaining words of the lesson, but 
in no case take up a new word until the word preceding it has been 
thoroughly mastered. 

(3) Having mastered the words separately, study the sentence as a 
whole, pronouncing the Greek, and writing it out from the English 
translation (p. 279). 

(4) Understand from the beginning that every sentence of the Greek 
text is to be mastered. Nothing short of absolute mastery will answer 
the purpose. 


1. TEXT. 


[For the first few lessons the words will be divided into syllables, to 
facilitate reading.] 


Aa-pei-ov καὶ Πᾶ-ρῦὕ-σἄ-τὶ-δὸς yi-yvov-rat παῖ-δὲς 
Da-rei-ou kai Pa-ry-sa-ti-dos gi-gnon-tai pai-des 
Of-Davius and  of-Pariysatis are-born boys 





14 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


60-6, mpé-o Bu-Te-pos μὲν “Ap-ta-ep-Ens, ve-G-TE- pds 
dy-o, pre-sby-te-ros men Ar-ta-xer-xés, ne-6-te-ros 
two elder indeed Artaxerxes, younger 


δὲ Κῦσρος. 
de Cy-ros. 


however Cyrus. 
2. NOTES. 


1. Aa-pei-ov, of Darius: (a) three vowel sounds: a=a in father, 
ει = οἱ in pine, ov = ow in uncouth; (b) the mark (7) over the second 
syllable from the end, or penult, is the acute accent, indicating where the 
vocal stress is to be laid ;1 (c) ending ov indicates gen. sing. 

2. καὶ, and: (a) one vowel sound, = αὖ in aisle; (δ) the mark (7) 
drawn from left to right is called the grave accent, indicating an absence 
of vocal stress. 

3. Πᾶρὕσατϊδ-ὅς of Parisatis: (a) five vowel sounds: a=a in art, 
v=y, made by placing the lips for 00 in moot and sounding ee in thee 
(like the Germ. #), «=7in pit, o=0 in obey; (b) two characters, o 
and ς for 8, the latter being used at the end of the word ; (c) end. os 
indicates gen. sing.; cf. also ov in Aapeiov. 

4. yiyvivra, (they) are born ; for γι-γέντ-ονται cf. gen-esis, birth, creation : 
(a) y=g in give; (6) vr indicates 3d plur., they; cf. Lat. incolu-nt ; 
(c) vra indicates 3d plur. pass., cf. nascu-ntur, 

5. maid-*s, boys; cf. Eng. ped-agogue: (a) two vowel sounds: αἱ Ξε αἱ 
in aisle, e=e in met; ες ΞΞ 68 in yes, never ez; (b) the accent (7) over the 
penult is called circwmflex, practically the same as the acute so far as 
concerns pronunciation ; (6) ¢f. Δαρείου and note that either the acute 
or the circumflex accent may stand over the penult; and that when a 
diphthong is accented, the mark is over the second vowel; (d) end. 
es indicates nom. plur., cf. Lat. honor-es, Eng. boz-es. 

6. δύδ, two; Lat. duo. 

7. mpé-oBv-ré-pos, elder ; cf. presbyter, presbyterian: (a) end. os (Lat. 
us as in servus) indicates nom. sing. masc.; but note different use of the 

1 In reality the acute accent indicated a higher pitch of the voice. The matter 


of accent is, however, no more important than that of quantity ; the pupil should 
never fail to give to long vowels and diphthongs their full, complete value. 


LESSON T. 15 


same end. in Παρυσάτιδος (3c); (b) cf. place of accent in this and the 
preceding words, and note that the accent does not go before the third 
syllable from the end, or antepenult. 

8. μὲν, on the one hand, indeed: followed immediately by another 
word, hence μὲν, not μέν; cf. καὶ (2 ὃ). 

9. ᾿Αρτἄξέρξῆς, Artaxerxes: (a) & == in exert, ks in barks ; (Ὁ) ἡ = ey 
in prey; (c) two e characters: e=e in met, ἡ = ey in prey; (d) end. ns 
indicates nom. sing. mas., cf. similar use of os in πρεσβύτερος (7 a). 

10. védrépos, younger: (a) one new vowel : w, = 0 in prone ; (b) two 
o characters, — o = 0 in obey, ὦ = 0 in prone; cf. Παρυσάτιδος, γίγνον- 
ται, πρεσβύτερος ; (c) note that the accent over the antepenult is the 
acute ; («/) os indicates nom. sing. mas., ¢f πρεσβύτερος (7 a). 

11. δὲ, on the other hand, but: (a) in contrast with μέν, indeed ; 
(δὴ why δὲ and not d¢?! see 8. 

12. Κῦρος, Cyrus: the accent over the penult is circumflex, cf. παῖ- 
des (5) ; note that in these two words the circumflex stands over a full 
vowel sound (a long vowel or a diphthong). 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The vowels in this lesson are: A a, ¢, ἡ, t, 0, v,@; the diphthongs : 
αι, εἰ, OV. 

2. The consonants are: β, γ, Δ ὃ, Kx, pw, v, ἕξ, Π π, p, σ ς, τ. 

To be carefully distinguished are ε and η, ο and ὠ. 

o stands for the s-sound except at the end of words. 

The three kinds of accent are, acute, grave, and circumflex. 
The acute stands over one of the last three syllables. 

The acute or circumflex may stand over the penult. 

8. The circumflex stands only over long vowels or diphthongs; while 
the aeute stands over short and long. 

9. καί, μέν, δέ become καὶ, μὲν, δὲ (grave accent) when words imme- 
diately follow in the same clause. 

10. -ov indicates gen. sing., so also -os in some nouns (like is in Lat. 
honor-is, of honor); but -os also indicates nom. sing. (like us in Lat. 
servus, a slave). 

11, Ending -es indicates nom. plural. 

12. In Greek, as in Latin, there are different declensions, and the 
same ending may have different uses. 

13. μέν ... δέ indicate a contrast ; they do not stand first in their 
clauses. 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


pev, indeed, on the one hand. 


γίγνονται, they are born. 
νεώτερος, younger. 


γίγνεται, he rs born. 
δύο, two. . παῖδες, boys. 


δέ, but, on the other hand. 9. πρεσβύτερος, older. 


καί, and, 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) 1 Kai ᾿Αρταξέρξης γίγνεται. () Avo δὲ παῖδες γί- 
γνονται. (0) Κῦρος μὲν Παρυσάτιδος γίγνεται. (cd) Γΐγνονται δὲ παῖδες 
Παρυσάτιδος καὶ Δαρείου. (6) Tiyverar δέ. (7) Γίγνονται δὲ παῖδες δύο. 

2. Translate: (a) He is born. (6) Artaxerxes indeed is bern. 
(c) But Artaxerxes and Cyrus are born of Darius and Parysatis. 
(4) Cyrus indeed [was] younger, Artaxerxes, however, [was] older. 
(6) And two boys are born. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
1. Endings -ov, -os, -es. 2. Plave of the accent for diphthongs. 3. Use 
of grave accent for the acute. 4. End. -vr, -νται. 5. Sound of vowel v. 


6. Long and short ὁ and ὁ sounds. 7. [7865 οἵ ς ἀπά σ. 8. Use of μέν 
and δέ. 9. Accent of the antepenult, of the penult. 10. Length of 


vowel over which the circumflex stands. 





LESSON II. 


ANABASIS I. τ 1. 
1. TEXT. 


(In the study of the “text” and “notes,” follow closely the directions 


given with Lesson I.] 


- \ ‘ ἢ , - A ‘ & , 

ἐπε δὲ ἠ-σθέννει Δᾶρειος καὶ ὕ-πώωπ-τευ-ε 
e-pei de διβίῃθ- μοὶ Dareios kai hy-pop-teu-e 
When however was-sick Darius and was-suspecting 


1 Be prepared to pronounce these Greek exercises in the class room. This 
direction applies to subsequent exercises also. 





LESSON IL. 


τελευτὴν ToD βίου, é-Bov-he-ro τὼ παῖδε 
te-leu-tén tou bi-ou, e-bou-le-to td pai-de 
an-end of-the (of)-life, he-was-wishing the-two two-boys 


du-po-Té-pw παρ-εῖ-ναι. 
am-pho-te-r6_—_— par-ei-nai. 
buth to-be-present. 


Note that the quantities of ¢, 9,0, , are no longer indicated. 


2. NOTES. 


1. ἐπεί, when: (a) becomes ἐπεὶ when followed immediately by 
another word ; (ὁ) εἰ =7 in pine, cf. Adpetov 1.1 Ν. 1. 

2. δέ, but: cf. μέν, δέ]. N. 8,11; note that these words do not stand 
first in their clauses. Cf. Lat. cum autem, but when. 

3. Adpeios, Darius: (a) end. -os indicates nom. sing., cf. us in Lat. 
servus ; ()) -s is case end. nom., o- being the stem end.; in Greek as 
in Latin, nouns whose stem ends in ὁ belong to the o, or 2d, declens. ; 
(c) uf. Δαρείου, παῖδες I. N. 1 and 5; note, when the penult has the cir- 
cumflex accent, the ultima is short. 

4. ἠσθένει, (he) was sick: (a) 0= thin thin; (Ὁ) from ἄσθενέ-ω, I am 
sick ; (0) initial a has been lengthened or augmented to η, ὃ; (d) this 
augment of a short initial vowel to a long one increases the time of pro- 
nouncing it; such augment is called a temporal augment; (6) -e isa 
contraction of e-e. 

5. ὑπ-ώπτευ-ε, he was suspecting : (a) the apostrophe mark turning to 
the right is written with an initial vowel to indicate that it is pronounced 
with an introductory h sound ; it is called the rough breathing; turning 
to the left, it indicates that the vowel is not thus pronounced, and is 
called the smooth breathing, cf. ἐπεί, ἠσθένει; (b) ev= ew in feud; (c) from 
ὑπ-οπτεύ-ω, I suspect; (d) vr shortened from ὑπό, hypo, is a prepositional 
prefix; cf. sub in suspicio, I look under, suspect ; (6) o has been aug- 
mented to ὦ ; this augment of a short initial vowel to a long one in- 
creases the time of pronouncing it, and is called temporal augment, cf. ἡ 
in ἠσθένει (4 c,d); (f) -ε indicates 3d sing. ; οὗ, εἰ in ἠσθένει (=e-e). 


1 This and similar references are to preceding Lessons. 
2 








18 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD, 


6. τελευτή-ν, end: (a) nom. τελευτή ; (δ) -n is here the stem end., just 
aso in Adpetos, AGpeivy ; (¢) as nouns whose stem ends in ὁ belong to 
the o, or 2d, decl. in both Greek and Latin, so those whose stem ends 
in η (in Lat. a) belong to the a, or Ist, decl.; (d) end. -ν indicates ace. 
sing., οὐ. -m in Lat. mensa-m. 

7. toi, of the: («) the end.-ov as in Δαρείου indicates gen. sing. ; 
(b) in -ov note stem end. o, which indicates 2d decl. 

8. Biov, of life ; cf. bio-logy, bio-graphy: (a) ending -ov indicates gen. 
sing. 2d decl., cf. τοῦ, Aapeiov; (b) gen. Δαρείου, nom. Δαρεῖος ; gen. 
βίου, nom. Bios. 

9. ἐ-βούλ-ετο, he was wishing: (a) from BuvdA-opar, 7 wish ; Lat. vol-o ; 
(+) the syllable e- is an augment; since it makes an additional syllable 
it is called the syllabic augment, cf. ἠσθένει, ὑπώπτευε; note that the 
augment indicates past time ; (c) end. -ero! indicates 3d sing. passive, 
cf. active end. -e in ὑπώπτευ-ε, ἠσθένει. 

10. τώ, the two: this form of the art., indicating two, is dual; οὐ, 
singular, plural. 

11. παῖδε, two boys: (a) end. -e also indicates dual number ; (0) ef. 
Δαρείου, παῖδες, Kipos, Adpetos ; note, when the penult has the circumflex 
accent the ultima is short, cf. 3 6. 

12. ἀμφοτέρω, both; Lat. ambo : end. indicates dual number. cf. 
τώ, παῖδε. 

13. παρ-εῖναι, to be present: (a) παρ, for παρί, prepos. prefix, by the 
side of, present ; cf. par-allel; (b) accent circumflex over the penult, ef. 
παῖδε (11 δ) ; as regards accent the final a is treated as short. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


Two new consonants, 6 and A; new diphthong, ev. 
A breathing is placed over every initial vowel or diphthong. 
The Greek has two breathings, called rough and smooth. 
The Greek has a definite article, but no indefinite article. 
The augment indicates past time ; there are two kinds, temporal 
and svllabic. 
6. Endings -e (active) and -ero (passive) indicate 3d sing. past 


time. 


1 This passive ending does not make the meaning of βούλομαι passive ; the sub- 
ject of deponents is reserved for a later lesson. 





LESSON II. 19 


7. With verbs having prepositional prefix, the augment comes be- 
tween prefix and verb. 

8. The Greek has a dual number. 

9. Ending -ν indicates accus. sing. 

10. [Final -a treated as short so far as regards accent. 

11. When the penult has the circumflex accent, the ultima is short. 

12. e-e contracts to εἰ. 

“13. μέν and δέ do not stand first in their clauses. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Breathings. H. 17. G. 4. 
Accent ἃ H.96 anda, 99,100 G. 21, 22N.1, 23. 
a and 6, 102, a, 108. 
Augment H. 354, 355, 356, G. 99 a and 6, 100, 105. 
360. 
Number H. 123. G. 33. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


ἀμφοτέρω, both. . παρ-εῖναι, to be present. 
ἀσθενέ-ω, I am sick. . τελευτή, end. 

Bios, life. τοῦ, of the (mase. sing.). 
BovA-opat, I wish. . τώ, the two. 

ἐπεί, when. 2. ὑπό, under. 

παῖδ-ε, two boys. ὑπ-οπτεύω, I suspect. 


παρά, beside. 4. ποιέ-ω, I make. 


PRESENT. 





βούλομαι," I wish. βούλεται, he wishes. βούλονται, they wish. 


| γίγνομαι, Iam born. | γίγνεται, he vs born. γίγνονται, they are born. 
| 











1 The pupil meeting the word oxyfoxe in the grammar will understand by it 


accented acute on the last syllable. 
2 Remember that this word, though passive in form, is active in signification. 














INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 
IMPERFECT. 


ἐβούλετο, he was wishing. ἐβούλοντο, they were wishing. 








ἐγίγνετο, he was born. ἐγίγνοντο, they were born. 





9. EXERCISES, 


1. Translate: (a) ᾿Επεὶ δὲ ἐγίγνοντο παῖδες δύο. (b) Τελευτὴν τοῦ βίου 
βούλομαι. (c) Biov τελευτή. (cd) Παρεῖναι τὼ παῖδε ἐβούλετο. (¢) Καὶ 
ἠσθένει ᾿Λρταξέρξης. (f) Γίγνομαι δὲ Δαρείου. (y) Ὑποπτεύίω τελευτὴν τοῦ 
βίου Κύρου. (h)’EBovAero, ὑπώπτευε, ἠσθένει, ἐποίει. (Explain each aug- 
ment and personal ending.) 

2. Translate: (4) But when they wished to be present, Darius was 
sick, (b) And Darius suspected [the] end of his (= of the) life to be 
near (= present). (c) I wish the two boys to be present. (d) Cyrus 
indeed is born of Parysatis. (¢) But when I suspect an end of life, I 
wish my two (= the-two) boys (= two-boys) to be present, 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
1. Place of the augment. 2. The augment and prepositional prefix. 
3. Terms augment, syllabic augment, temporal augment. 4. Number. 
5. Augment of a, o. 6. Contraction of e-e. 7. Noun endings τος, -y, -ov, 
τω, -ε- 8. The marks’ and‘, 9. The verb endings -o-pat, -€-rat, -o-vrat, 
-€-ro, -0-vTo, -€; Which belong to the present tense? 10, Position of μέν 
and δέ, 11. Meaning of ocytone, 





LESSON III. 
ANABASIS 1. 


L. San Ss 


[Easy words are no longer divided into syllables.] 
ε 


ὁ μὲν οὖ πρεσβὕτερος πὰρὼν 
ho men oun  presbyteros  paron 
The on-the-one-hand now elder being-present 











LESSON III. 21 


΄“ vv 2 4 ~ 
é-TUy-ya-veE Κῦρον δὲ με-ιτὰ-πέμ-πετται ATO τὴς 


e-tyng-cha-ne- Cyron de me-ta-pem-pe-tal apo tés 
happened ; Cyrus however he-sends-after from the 


“ v & 2 4 
ἄρχῆς ἧς αὐτὸν σᾶ-τρᾶ-πην ἐ-ποιη-σε. 
arches hés auton sa-tra-pén — e-pole-se. 
government of-which him salrup he-(had)-made. 


2. NOTES. 


1. 6, ho, the: (4) the article, nom. sing. mase. ; what is the genitive ¢ 
(b) 6 has no accent ; it is read as if part of the following wort, 

2. μὲν, indeed, on the one hand: of. πρεσβύτερος μὲν “Apt. 1.; μέν 
stands second in its clause er sentence; ¢f. δέ Il. 

3. οὖν, accordingly, now (logical, not temporal): the circumflex accent 
stands over the breathing when they are written together ; on accented 
diphthongs, οἱ. παῖδες I. N. 5. 

4. πρεσβύτερος : accent on the antepenult, cf. Παρυσάτιδος, νεώτερος, 
ὑπώπτευε, ἐβούλετο ; When the acute accent stands over the antepenult, the 
final syllable is short. 

5. παρ-ὧν, being present: (a) παρ for παρά, prepositional prefix, by the 
side of ; cf. map-ewa 11. N. 13 ; (Ὁ) oy, participle, being: of. εἶναι in παρ- 
eivat, to be present. 

6. ἐ-τύγχαν-ε, (he) happened: (a) from τυγχάντ-ω, I happen; (0) é-, syl- 
labic augment ; οὐ, ἐβούλετο, ἠσθένει 11. ν. 9; (0) x = chin Scotch loch, 
yx = πεῖν in anchor; (1) final -e indicates 3d sing., past tense ; cf. ὑπώ- 
πτευε, ἠσθένει 11. N.5; (6) the English is “ happened to be present,” 
the Greek, “ happened being present.” 

7. Κῦρον, Cyrus: end, o-v indicates accus. sing. 2d declension, ¢f. um 
in Lat. servum ; ven. and ace. sing. of Bios t 

8. μετα-πέμπ-εται, he sends after:? («) from πέμπω, I send, with pre- 
positional prefix pera, after ; (b) on the accent, cf. πρεσβύτερος 4, and 
παρεῖναι 11. ν. 13 ὁ. 

1 He sends would really be πέμπ-ει, ποῦ πέμπ-εται; but the ending -erat, though 
a passive ending, may represent the actor as acting for his own benefit; thus, 


πέμπεται, he is sent, or he sends for his own sake or benefit. This latter use is 
technically called the Widdle Voice. 


ee a saepeneaiaseainel 
<r 


ice Ne lah Madan Atetnda tis a anal σιν eb hs 


— 





ee oe ναινπηλυασδιακεσοσιναν του σνα οτος, 
ee 


INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. LESSON IIL. 93 


9. ἀπό, from, away from; of. Lat. ab : (1. may be used as a prepo- 10. The acute accent stands over the antepenult only when the 
sitional prefix ; thus, ἀπ-ών, being away (absent) ; (0) what would ἀπ- ultima is short. 
εἶναι, ἀποπέμπω mean ἢ 11. μέν and δέ do not stand first in their clauses or sentences. 

10. τῆς, of the: (a) -n-s indicates fem. gen. sing. Ist declension ; 12. οὖν does not stand first in its clause or sentence. 

(ὁ) ef. -ov, which indicates gen. sing. 2d declension. 

11. ἀρχῆς, of [the] province, government; ef. Eng. an-archy, mon-archy- 
(4) nom. ἀρχή, cf. τελευτήν 11. N. 6; (b) venitive governed by, or follow- 
ing ἀπό; (0) of. -ns in τῆς 10. . Gamma nasal... . 1.920. (i. 6, 1. 

12. ἧς, of which: (ὦ) fem. gen. sing., cf. τῆς, ἀρχῆς ; (>) correspond- 2 θῶ .. _ . I 99, 100, 108. (i. 21, 22, 23. 
ing masculine form is οὗ, uf. τοῦ, Atipetov. 3. Declension. . . If. 131, 132,134. ὦ. 34, 35. 

13. αὐτόν, him: (a) -o-v indicates mase. sing. acc. 2d declension, . The Article ... . H. 270, 272. (x. 78 (read). 
cf. Kupov 7. i Adjective and Relative 

14, σατράπην, sutrap:* ace, sing. ; ef. τελευτήν, Ist declension, βίον, Avreement ot ew 2 ee eee. (i. 138, 151. 
2d declension; the ace. sing. Ist and 2d declensions ends in yp, Uf. Lat. Compound Verbs. 11. 580. G. 131, 3. 
ἜΘ ΝΝ ΔΡΕΎΝ αἱ. . Imperf. and Aor. Tenses H. 829, 886, 887. (ὦ. 200 and Ν. 5. 

15. ἐ-ποίη-σ-ε, he made, had made: (4) of = οὐ in oil; (b) from 
ποιέτω, I make, cf. English poet; (c) note the augment, the euding -e, I 5. VOCABULARY. A. 
the verb stem moe, and that ¢ has been inserted after the stem, the | . ἀπό, from. 9. Oy the (nom. mas, sing. ). 

ε of which has at the same time been lengthened to 9; () this σ . ἀρχή, government. 10. οὖν, accordingly. 
(representing -σα-), when added to a simple verb stem, forms a new . αὐτόν, him. ll. παρά, by the side of. 
stem, called First Aorist, and denotes past time, . ἧς, Of which (fem. sing). 12. παρών, being present. 
μετά, after. 13. σατράπης, ΠΡ. : 
3. OBSERVATIONS. . φόμπω, I end. 14. τῆς, of the (fem. sing.). 
μεταπέμπομαι, I send after. 15. τοῦ, of the (masc. sing.). 


ov, of which (masc. sing.). 16. τυγχάνω, I happen. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The new consonants x, yy; the diphthong οι. 

2. The circumflex accent stands over the breathing when they are 
written together, VOCABULARY. B. 
3. The article and relative are declined : e. 4. 6, τοῦ, τῆς ; οὗ, ἧς. 


4. Nouns whose stem ends in a (nom. η) are feminine; those whose MASCULINE SINGULAR. — SECOND DECLENSION. 





stem ends in o (nom. os) are masculine. phenom eee Tes bs Ἢ 
5. τῇ, τῆς, τὴν are endings of Ist declension } τὸς, τοῦ, τον are cnilings | NOMINATIVE. GENITIVE, ACCUBATIVE. 
of 2d declension. 





6. ‘The participle with τυγχάνω has the force of an English infinitive. ὁ, the. seis of ias Peace 
Adpeios, Darius. Δαρείου, of Darius. Δαρεῖον, Darius. 
πρεσβύτερος, elder.| πρεσβυτέρου, of an elder.| πρεσβύτερον, elder. 
νεώτερος, YOuNGer. νεωτέρου, of a younger. ae younger. 
Bios, lufe. βίου, of life. βίον, life. 

1 A kind of lord-lieutenant who represented the interests of the Persian mon- Κῦρος, Cyrus. Κύρου, of Cyrus. Kupor, Cyrus. 
νων αὐτός, he himself. αὐτοῦ, of him, his. αὐτόν, him. 


7. Many prepositions, e.g. ἀπό, μετά, παρά, ὑπό, are found prefixed to 
verbal forms. 

8. Besides the imperfect, there is an aorist which denotes past time. 

9. ε of ποιέω becomes η before σ᾽ of the aorist. 






































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : («) Τυγχάνω ὦν. (b) Τυγχάνω οὖν παρών. (c) ᾿Ετύγχανε 
δὲ ἀπὼν. (d) Βούλομαι αὐτὸν σατράπην εἶναι. (6) Αὐτὸς ! δὲ ἐβούλετο τὸν 
νεώτερον παρεῖναι. (f) Καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀπεῖναι Δαρεῖον, οὗ γίγνεται Κῦρος. 
(4) ‘O σατράπης τῆς ἀρχῆς ἐποίει τελευτὴν τοῦ βίου τοῦ νεωτέρου Κύρου. 

2. ‘Translate: (ὦ) Being. (ἢ) Being absent, (0) To be present. 
(cl) To be. (ε) But I happen to be absent. (/) The two boys ae- 
cordingly were wishing to be absent. (y) Darius on the one hand sent 
after Artaxerxes. (/) He himself (αὐτός) on the other hand happened 
to be (= being) absent. () And Cyrus indeed wished to be older. 
(j) But Cyrus happened to be satrap of the government, from which 


Darius sent-alter him. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Analysis? of ἐποίει, of ἐποίησε. 2. Participle with τυγχάνω. 3. Po- 
sition of μέν and δέ. 4. Nom., gen., acc., sing. endings Ist and 2d de- 
clensions. 5. Augmentin. compound verbs. Ὁ, Accent of antepenult ; 
of penult. 7. Gender of stems in -a, in το. 8. Formation of aorist. 


9. e- before -o of the aorist.” 10. Ditlerence between signification of 


aorist and imperfect tenses... 1]. Pronunciation of x, yxy. 12. Meaning 
of the augment ; tenses which have it. 





LESSON IV. 
ANABASIS 1. 


i. ἘΣ, 


[Only the more diflicult words will he divided into syllables or trans- 
literated.] 7 


‘ v Ν Ν ἣν. % ’ὔ , 
καὶ στρᾶτηγον δὲ αὐτὸν ἀ-πέ-δει-ξε παντων, 
stratégon ~ a-pe-dei-xe 
also general and hom he-(had)-appo inted of-all, 


1 αὐτός (in nom.) does not mean he, but he himself, Lat. ipse. 
3 . . , ᾿ ᾿ Ω ᾽ Ν᾿ “ . 
That is, the distinguishing of the various elements of which each word is 
made up. 7): « εὐ τὸ 


»..-.. 


λυ δ. αν να νον ORT LTT EN 


meer te 


LESSON IV. 


ν ~ 4 » , 

Kag-Tw-Aov πεδιον ἀ-θροί- ζον-ται. 
Cas-tid-lou ath-roi-zon-tal. 

plain assem ble-themselves. 


9 > 

og OL ELS 

hosol 
as-many-as ὑπο Castolus’s 


2. NOTES. 


1. καί, and, also: of. Lat. et, and, also; like et, καί most frequently 


means and, 
uy. strut-cgy: nominative, genitive, gender, 


2. στρατηγύν, J! neral ; cf. 
of the objects of ἀπέδειξε, he appointed him 


declension? It is here one 
> ’ 
(αὐτόν) general, etc. 
3. δέ, and: cf. νεώτερος δεῖ. 
as well as adversative. 
4. ἀπ-έδειξε, he appointed: (4) f 


δανών ILL. ». 93 (ὁ) ὃ not only pronounce 
and ς, of. Lat. vox = Voc-s ; note therefore ἀπέδειξε = ἀπέδεικσε:; 
ν. 15 d; (0) ε before ὃ as 


ἐπεὶ δέ 11. ; note, δέ may be connective 


rom ἀπο-δείκο-νῦμι; (b) ἀπ for ἀπό, cf. 
ἃ like ks, but actually made 


up of x 
(1) σ in & indicates the aorist, cf. ἐποίησε ITE. 
in ἐβούλετο IT. N. 9; € after & as in ὑπώπτευε lI. n. Sf. 

cf. Eng. panto-mrme : end. των indicates gen. plur. 


5. πάντων, of all; 
who: (a) end. τοι indicates nom. plur. 


6. ὅσοι, quanti, as many (8, 
24 declension, ¢f. Tin Lat. serv-1; meaning of πρεσβύτεροι, πρε- 


miasc. 
he breathing when written 


σβυτέρων ? (hb) the acute accent stands after t 


over the same vowel, of. however οὖν III. N. 9. 


7. εἰς, into: εἰς has no accent, and is read as if Ὁ 


word, cf. 6 ILI. x. 26; euch words are called proclities. 


8. πεδίον, plain; ace. sing. : (4} nom. πεδίον, neut.; If masc., it 


(},) -ov, like -um in Lat. regnum, indicates 


art of the following 


would have been πεδίος ; 
sing., 2d declension. 

collect themselves: (a) ¢ = %, OF ds in avoids, not z 
in azure; (h) from ἀθροίζω, I collect ; (0) -vt- indieates 3d plur., as in 
ws. 4: (A) o-vtat 15. ἃ significant ending 5 ef. γίγνονται, they are 
(for themselves), ἀθροίζονται, they collect themselves. 
In the first the subject is acted upon, in the second and third it acts for 
or upon itself (reflexive) ; (c) the Greek has, hesides the active and pas- 
sive voices, also a reflexive, called Middle, ef: μεταπέμπεται III. x. 8. 


neuter nom., acc., VOC., 
9. ἀθροίζονται, they 


γίγνονται Ι. 
born, βούλονται, they wish 


1a woh oa ial A ἀτυρηήοοκ oe. 5 Spt ha 


: Hh Sigg RH Me tp RR ANS Ae aN os ON te oe we 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. OBSERVATIONS, 


1. One new consonant, — ¢, = ds in avoids. 
consonant. 


€ in ἀπέδειξε is a double 


2. καί and δέ have cach two different signilications. 

3. Verbs meaning “ to appoint” govern two accusatives. 

4. The circumflex accent stands over the breathing, the 
it, When accent and breathing fall together, 

S. -ot, των indicate respectively the nom, and gen. plur. mase. 2d 
declension. 


acute behind 


6. -ον indicates nom., acc., voc., sing. neuter, 2d 
7. The Greek verb has three voices, — 


declension. 
active, passive, middle. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Final “αι, τοι τ αἰ ἀν eee eS 102, ἃ. G, 22, n. 1. 
Decl. of ἄνθρωπος, Gapey. . . ,. 1188. Gy. 42. 

The double consonant. . .) . ΠῚ 26. (3.5, 2. 
Formation of the first aorist stem 11. 428. G. 110,111. L. 
WE i H. 298andu; G.88, 1, 2. 


811-13. 
Verbs with two accusatives. .. ll. 726. GG. 166. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


. ἀθροίζω, I collect. Ὁ. mas (gen, plur. πάντων), all. 
2. ἀπο-δείκνυμι, I appoint. ). πεδίον, plain. 

. εἰς, With acc., into. 7. στρατηγύς, general. 

. ὅσος, quantus, us many as. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : («) Βούλεται τελευτὴν πάντων, ὕσοι γίγνονται. (b) ᾿Απο- 
δείκνῦμι αὐτὸν πάντων σατράπην. (c) ᾿Δρταξέρξης ὁ πρεσβύτερος, ἀπὼν ἀπὸ 
κι ᾽ _ , i > = , 
τὴς ἀρχῆς, βούλεται Κῦρον στρατηγὸν εἶναι. (1) ‘O Κῦρος οὖν σατράπης ὧν 
, , ξ »“ ΄ ’ ”~ 
ἐτύγχανε. (¢) Παρύσατις, ἧς ὁ Κῦρος ἐγένετο, ἐποίησε αὐτὸν στρατηγὸν τῆς 
> ~ β > 4 “ὦ ᾿ Ian ‘ ae »“ ᾽ , ‘ 
ἀρχῆς. (f) Αὐτὸς ἐτύγχανε παρών. (4) ᾿Επεὶ δὲ ὁ Kupos ἐτύγχανε σατράπης 
» ξ Α ‘ - , > ͵ a , , oe 
ὧν, ὁ στρατηγὸς τελευτὴν τοῦ βίου ἐποίει. (h) Τυγχάνω πρεσβύτερος ὦν. 
- 5 ‘ t Φ ΞΡ “- 
(Ὁ) Βούλομαι δὲ νεώτερος εἶναι. (9) Μετεπέμπετο τὸν Κῦρον ἀπὸ τοῦ πεδίου. 





ἜΣ Ni Καλὰ ΕΣ RE στον ‘ 


pie ΕΜ ΘΕ 


LESSON V. 27 


2. Translate: (a) He was sending him into Castolus’s plain. (4) Ile 
was sending after him, (c) I wish in truth (that) the satrap be present. 
(ὦ) ‘The general indeed happened to be absent. (6) But 1 happen to be 
the general of all who assemble themselves. (77) From the government 
of which he happened to be satrap and general. (4) But when the 
younger suspected an end of his life. (4) L appoint him general of all 
who wish to be present. (ἢ) And Darins (6 Aap.) happened to be ab- 
sent; happened to be yeneral. ()) They sent after Cyrus the satrap. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The aorist tense. 2. The middle voice. 3. Translation and anal- 
ysis of ἐποιεῖτο. 4. The letters and ¢ 5. The participle with τυγχάνω. 
6. Analysis of μετεπέμπετο. 7. Endings in the 2d declension. 8, End- 
ings -ot, των. 9. Meanings of καί and δέ. 10. Neuter nouns of the 2d 
declension. 11. Verbs which take two accusatives. 12. Prepositions 
meaning from, into, by the side of, after, up. 


LESSON V. 
ANABASIS 1. τ 2. 


L. See 


> e 


ava-Bat-ver οὖν ὁ Κῦρος λᾶβὼν ἽἼισ-σα- 
Tag ae 
ana-hai-nel Tis-sa- 


: . 
(he)-goes-up accordingly — Cyrus taking Tissa- 


φέρ-νην ὡς φΐἴλον, καὶ τῶν ᾿Ιλ-λήτ-νων δὲ ἔ-χων 
pher-nén hoés philon, ton Iel-lé-ndn e-chon 
phernes as a-frrend, also of-the Greeks and having 


ε έό͵ ο- 2 ’ - , ¥ 

om-At-Tas av-eBn τρι-ἀ-κο-σίτους, ap-XOV-Ta 

hop-li-tas an-ebé tri-a-ko-si-ous, ar-chon-ta 
heavy-armed-soldiers he-went-up three-hundred, commander 


ΡΤ ae tee eee ae a 


OR, ax tei de 


sigh es, stig thane 


PB Bi Ba Re a RN eA tle 











28 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


δὲ αὐτῶν He-vi-av Παρ-ρά-σιεον. 


Xe-ni-an 
and of-them Aenias a-Parrasiai. 


2. NOTES. 


1. ava-Baive, he gocs up: («) from ava-Bairw, 1 go up; hence Anaha- 
sis, the going or marching up to Babylon; (0) dvd, up, prepositional 
prefix ; “he goes away” would be ἀπο-βαίνει ; (c) end. -e indicates pres. 
ind. act. 3d sing.; (ὦ) cf. γίγνονται 1. N. 4, μεταπέμπεται III. N. 8; note, 
the pres. tense may denote a time actually or historically past; as such it 
is called the historical present. 

2. λαβών, tuking*: (a) trom λαμβάνω, J take; (b) end. των indicates 
participle, mase. sing. nom. ; ef παρών II]. N. 53 (ὁ) λαμβάν-ων, pres. 
part., also = taking, 2. e. as a continued action ; λαβών, taking, i.e. as an 
act simply brought to pass ; (d) meaning of ὑποπτεύων, ἀναβαίνων, ἀπο- 
βαίνων ? (6) cf. use of των in πάντων LV. N. 5, 

3. Τισσαφέρνην, nom. Τισσαφέρνης; on -ν cf. τελευτήν II. N. 6, Κῦρον 
ILI. Ν. 7, σατράπην ILI. Ν. 14. 

4. ὡς φίλον, as a friend; εὐ. Eng. phil-anthropy: (a) ὡς, no accent, 
cf. ὁ IIL., εἰς IV.; all pronounced with foll. word and called proclitics. 

5. τῶν Ἑλλήνων, of the Greeks: on the end. των cf. πάντων LV. Ν. 5. 

6. ἔχων, having: (a) from ἔχω, J have; (b) use here of end. -wv? 
Another use of same end. ? 

7. ὁπλίτας, heavy-armed soldiers; cf. Eng. pan-oply, full armor: 
(a) nom. sing. ὁπλίτης, accus. sing. ὁπλέτην ; cf. σατράπης; σατράπην IIL. 
nN. 14 ; (b) end. -ἂς indicates accus. plur. Ist decl. ; οὐ Lat. πλϑηβ- 85 ; 
(c) of. ᾿Αρταξέρξης, σατράπης, ὁπλίτης ; masc. nouns Ist decl. end in τῆς, 
nom, sing. : 

8. ἀν-ἐ-βη, he went up: (a) on av- and -e- οἱ. ἀπ-έ-δειξε TV. N. 4; 
(b) Greek for “ he goes up”? 

9. τριᾶκοσίονς, three hundred: (a) end. τοὺς (= 68 in Lat. servds) 
indicates masc. plur. accus. 2d decl. 

10. Ξενίᾶν, nom. Eevids: (a) Ξ, capital ξ, = ks in barks; (b) on the 
ending -ν cf. 3. 

1 The pupil should not be allowed to fall into the habit of réndering aorist 


participles by the Eng. ‘‘having’’ with a past partic., e.g. “‘ having taken,” 
‘‘ having come,” etc. 





LESSON Y. 29 
11. dpxovt-a, commander, governor ; cf. ἀρχή, government: (a) nom. 
sing. dpx-@y, partic. from dpy-, formed as ἔχων from ἔχω ; used here as 
noun ; ()) -yr-, partic. suffix; ef. Lat. ama-nt-em ; (6) -a, ending accus. 
sing. 3d decl. 
12. αὐτ-ῶν, of them: (a) on the ending ef. πάντων IV. N, 5. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 

1. ‘Two new characters : 2, and ᾧ (= ph in hyphen). 

2. Unaccented words read as a part of the following word are called 
proclitics. 

3. ον is the ending of accus. sing. Ist and 2d deel. 3 τς ending of 
accus. plur. Ist deel. ; τοὺς ending of accus. plur, 2d decl. ; τὰ ending of 
accus. sing. 3d decl. 

4. Ending τῶν indicates gen. plur.; also the nom. sing. masc. of 
participles like λαβών, ἔχων. 

5. Masculine nouns, Ist decl., end in τῆς or -@s nom. sing. 

6. Ending -e indicates pres. ind. act. 3d sing., as in ἀναβαίνει. 

7. -ντ- is a participial sullix. 

8. The accent, when it falls on the genitive endings -ns, τοῦ, των, is 
circumflex : ἀρχῆς, τοῦ, αὐτῶν. 

9. Appositives (7.g. φίλον. ἄρχοντα) agree in case with their sub- 
stantives. 

10. The present tense may be used to denote an event actually past. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Prete ys Cn ἡ SOR 18}. . 29. 
Accent of nouns... 128, 129. ,. 25, 1 and 9. 
Noun stems . . . ἢ. 130. 4. 32, 2. 
Declension of χώρᾶ, 
Te Siw oo OS, a xf 
Special rule of accent 
Ist decl. . i ¢, Seek . 39, 4. 
Appositives. . . . Hf. 623. tet νὰ 
Tenses ... . . H. 821-24, 828. . 900 and Ν. 1 and 5. 











Ὁ tatoos: κ᾿ μ᾽ νου ομο δ 


Ὑ 


ak isthe Ltn eee Lae 











INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. ἀναβαίνω, 1 yo up. ». λαμβάνω, I tale. 
ἀνέβη, he went up. . ὁπλίτης, heavy-armed soldier. 
UpX@Y, ἐμ πηι}, . τριζκύσιοι, three hundred. 
Aas ‘ ᾿ sa ͵ . ᾽ 
4. “Ἕλληνες, (reeks. . Φίλος, a friend. 
ἔχω, LT huve. LO. ὡς, as. 


6. EXERCISES. 


je * 3 a t a4 pu ᾽ εἰ ᾿ " ” , 

1. Translate: («) ‘Qs δὲ τυγχάνω ἀναβαίνων. (1) “ο ἄρχων λαμβάνει 
φίλους τριάκοσίους. (ὁ) Καὶ Κῦρον δὲ ὑπώπτευε ὡς ἔχοντα ὁπλίτας τῶν 
fy. , dy , ͵ ΄ ‘ rn ~ 
Enver. (i) ᾿ΒΕγίγνοντο δύο παῖδες. (ε) Ὅσοι στρατηγοὶ εἰς Καστωλοῦ 

, ᾽ - , ‘ “ “ ΄ ᾿ ‘ 
πεδίον ἡθροίζοντο, βούλονται τὸν Κῦρον ἄρχοντα εἶναι. (} ᾿Ελάμβανε αὐτὸν 
ε ¢ i « » "Ὁ , , - ͵ 
ὡς ὁπλίτην. (0) 'Ὃ Κῦρος ἀνέβη, ὑποπτεύων τελευτὴν τοῦ Δαρείου. (h) ’Aro- 
IN fe - » ‘ , - » ΄ , ε ’ - - ᾽ 4 
θείκνυμε αὐτὸν σατράπην τῶν ἀρχῶν. (1) Ὃ φίλος τῶν στρατηγῶν ἀπὼν 


» 4 Φ , ~ 
ἐτύγχανε. (7) Μεταπέμπεται τοὺς φίλους τῶν ἀρχόντων. 


2. Translate: (6) But when he went up, he was taking Xenias as a 
friend. (ὁ) Xenias the Parrasian happens to be (= being) commander 
of 300 hoplites. (0) The government of which Tissaphernes was wishing 
to be satrap. (d) I wish the boys both to be absent. (¢) They sent 
himaway. (0) But when ‘Tissaphernes desires Xenias the Parrasian to 
be absent, I suspect him. (y) Taking 300 friends and Xenias as com- 
mander of them, he went up into Castolus’s plain. (h) But I have 
friends and generals as commanders. (i) Having Artaxerxes as the 
older satrap. (j) Ie apppointed Cyrus as commander. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The verbal endings τω, -et, το-μαι, -€-Tal, -0-VTO, τότνται, -ε-το. 
2. Partic. suffix. 3, Analysis of ἄρχοντα. 4. Use of the augment, 
5. Formation of the Ist aorist. 0. Signification of the aorist tense. 
7. Accent of end. -ων Ist decl. 8, Quantity of final -at, τοὶ as regards 
accent. 9. Quantity of -as accus. plur. Ist decl. 10. Difference between 
λαβών and λαμβάνων. 11. The suffix pr. 12. Appositives. 13. Endings 


“Vy “OUS, “OSs «ἧς, «ἐς, “οἱ. 

















LESSON VI. 


LESSON VI. 


ANABASIS I. 1. 3, to ἐπιβουλεύοι αὐτῷ. 


For text and translation the pupil is referred to pp. 228, 279. The divid. 
ing of words into syllables will be discontinued from this point ; such 
division as is continued hereafter will have for its object not to teach the 
pupil the syllables of which a word is composed, but the formative ele- 
ments out of which it has grown, "Phe marking: of quantity will be cone 
tinued only in the case of ὦ, t and 3. ἢ and ὦ are long by nature, and e€ and o 
are short. When a vowel has the circumflex accent it is always long. 


1. NOTES. 


1. ἐ-τελεύτη-σ-ε, he ended; ef. τελευτή 11.: (4) from τελευτάτω ; (b) on 
the form οἵ. é-moin-o-e L11.; (0) mote that a, like €, is lengthened to ἡ 
before o of the 1st aorist. 

2. κατ-ἔέ-στη, he took his stand (down), was estublished (asking): (a) from 
ἵστη-μι, Lat. sisto; both developed from the simple form or theme στα: 
(b) κατ (for κατά, cf. ὑπ in ὑπώπτευε I1.), prepositional prefix = down ; 
ef. Eng. cata-ract; (6) κατά -ἰ- ἵστημι becomes καθ-ίστημι ; note change of 
t to @ before the rough breathing ; (ὦ) cf. λαβών V., ἀνέβη V., κατέστη, 
all indicating past time, and in usage equivalent to aorists with the 
sullix oa (cf. ἐποίη-σ-εν; they however differ in form, and for convenience 
are called Second Aorists. 

3. εἰς τὴν βασιλεία-ν, into the kingdom; was established into the king- 
dom = he beeame king ; (4) εἰς with ace. case, ef. εἰς πεδίον Δ΄. (b) Ba- 
σιλείαν, nom. βασιλεία, declined like χώρα. 

4. δια-βάλλ-ει, he slanders ; ef. Ἰὰς, diabol-ical: (a) ou the tense ef. 
ἀναβαίνει Δ΄. Ν. 1 ες εἰ; (b) διά, through, prepositional prefix. 

5. ἀδελφόν, brother; cf. Phil-adelph-va, brotherly love; why not 
ἀδελφόν in the text? } 

6. ws ém-ovrev-o, seyingy that he was plotting against (him) ; the 
accuser’s direct words to the king were, “ he [Cyrus] is plotting against 
you,” Κῦρος ἐπιβουλεύ-ει, οἷο, Nenophon quoting this indirectly uses : 
mode adapted for any verb quoted indirectly when dependent upon a 
verb denoting past. time.) This is called the Optative mode. 

1 Do not forget that διαβάλλει is an historical present, really equivalent to an 
aorist. 











enn ce et 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


7. αὐτῷ, to or for him, here against him; cf. Hug. auto-crat, aut-opsy: 
(w) τῳ is ἃ contraction of the stem vowel o with ¢, and is the case end. 
dat. sing. 2d decl.,) cf. Lat. servo, to a slave: (b) cf. αὐτῶν, αὐτῷ ; the 
gen. and dat., having an accented ultima, are written with the circumflex 
accent, 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The first aorist stem is made by melding the suflix -oa; in the 3d 
sing, -va becomes τσε. 

2. Final a of the simple verb stem or theme becomes 9 before -a. 

3. The second aorist has no sullix -ea; it has a shorter form of the 
verb than the present. 


4. The first and second aorists differ only in form ; each has the 
augment in the indicative mode, 

5. Prepositional pretixes ending in a vowel lose it before the initial 
vowel of the verb. 

6. Before a rough breathing τ is roughened to 6 (th). 

7. -ῳ marks the dat. sing. 2d decl. ; if accented, it is circumflex. 

8 


The prepos. εἰς voverns the acc. case. 

9. The pres. ind. in a direct statement may become pres. optative 
when quoted after a main verb denoting past time. 

10. When an oxytone, ἡ. ¢. a word with acute accent on the ultima, 
is followed by another word so closely connected with it in sense as not 
to require any mark of punctuation, it changes or softens its acute accent 
into the grave accent. Some editors soften the accent even before a 
comma. 


11. ᾿Επιβουλεύω is followed by dative of the person conspired against. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Names and characters of first twelve 

en ON ies ers H. 5. σ. 1. 
Elision in compound words . .. Hf. 81. 1. 12, 2. 
Rae OR ke Se ww H. 299. G. 89. 
Greek tenses in the indicative . . H. 300 G. 90. 
ee ς., H. 307. G. 92. 
ἜΝ ea eh μιὰ H. 272. G. 78. 


1 This ῳ is pronounced like ὦ, 7. e. oin prone; the « is the same as the ὦ in 
Lat. honor-i, reg-i. 








LESSON VI. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


1. ὁ ἀδελφός, brother. . κατά, down, 
αὐτῷ, to (or for) ham. . καθιίστημι, 1 cause 
ἡ βασιλεία, kingdom. sit, = set down. 
διά, through. κιτ-έστη, he sat down. 
δια-βάλλω, I slander. . πρός, al, by. 
ἐπί, Upon. τελευτά-ω, I cn. 
emt-Bovrevw, I conspire ὡς, that; on the ground 
against. that, as if (with part.). 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate and explain the formation of : ἐποίησε, ἐτελεύτησε. ἀπέ- 
δειξε, ἐπεβούλευσε, ὑπώπτευσε, ἠσθένησε. 2. Decline ἀρχή. βασιλεία, ἡ νε- 
wrépa, στρατηγός. 3. Translate : (4) Ὑπὸ τῷ πεδίῳ, παρὰ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, 
μετὰ τὸν στρατηγόν, ἀπὸ τῆς τελευτῆς, εἰς τὸν βίον, κατὰ τὴν χώρᾶν, διὰ τοῦ 
βίου, πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν. (0) ᾿Επιβουλεύει οὖν τῷ στρατηγῷ. (¢) Διαβάλλει 
τὸν ἀδελφόν. (4) Ὑπώπτευε αὐτὸν ὡς διαβάλλοι τὸν ἀδελφόν. 


4, Translate: (a) They desired in-truth to be absent. (4) And he 
made the younger to be satrap. (c) Artaxerxes indeed happens to be 
younger. (d) He is conspiring against the government. (6) He sus- 
pected that he was conspiring against the government. 


6, TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Comparison between formation of the Ist and 2d aorists. 2. Dif- 
ference of use between imperfect and aorist. 3. The accent in declen- 
sion. 4. The participial sign. 5. Nom, sing. endings Ist decl. mase. 
and fem. 6. Nom. sing. endings 2d dec], mase. and neut. 7. τ before 
arough breathing. 8. Proclities. 9. Verb endings -ec and τοι. 10. Con- 
struction after ἐπιβουλεύω. 11. The tenses which denote continued 
action; those which denote completed action ; those which denote an 
action as simply brought to pass. 12. Time denoted by the different 
tenses of the indicative. 13. The historical perfect. 

3 


#8 PARR OEE, OPE 


PERE PRESSE a ΕΑ 


BY Ly AP Ἐν 


0  Φ 
#P% 


Ret LYE A MO HEAESE Bt 








GAS ghee ene aie tei Νά νον, μα ,. “ye 
OOF ae ῳ vi ony ων eT 





ee RS EEL LLL GLE 














INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON VII. 
ANABASIS I. τ. 3, to the end. 


NOTES. 


1. 6, the, he: («) stands here without its substantive ᾿Αρταξέρξης ; 
ὁ δέ, but he; (b) note, the article standing without its substantive has the 
force of a demonstrative pronoun. 7 


a. πεί - ᾽ς mere . F : 

; κ᾿ ide a he is persuaded, he helieves Be ef, γίγνε-ται, he 18 born ; 
“ rom πείθω, 1 persuade; πείθομαι, IT am persuaded, hence, believe ; 

’ ’ 
) ) ) Se ' ᾿ " , ’ ᾽ 
(b) note the tense, denoting time actually past, ἐλ ἀναβαίνει V. 
3. συλ-λαμβάνει, he ΑΥ̓ΤῸΣ 
uBaver, he arrests: (a) from λαμβάνω, | tule, cf ty V.: 
() συλ for δὼ a sositi al ( ἐ ioc μβ 5 : ( Ϊ - iF λαβ.-ὧν \ “ὁ 

] : ‘uy, prepositional prefix, = together, with ; of. syn-agogue, a 
Ρ ace οἱ meeting together > (c) y becomes A before λ, but note συν-ε-λάμ- 
βαν-ε, he was arresting ; (d) optative συλλαμβάν-οι. 

> ~ . 
4. ἀπο-κτεν-ῶν, interfecturus, «hot to kill; (a) from xreivo. I kill 
> , Mk, νὰ. ἷ ᾿ i ᾿ . ὶ Φ 
τ PA ei f kill, (ἰς stroy ; : () αποκτέινων, Κὐ ας ; ἀποκτενῶν. about to 
cull (Luture » classed wi , : - 

, ᾿ re), not to be classed with λαβών as a 2d aor. partic. on account 
of the short form of the verb stem (xrev) ; in the 2d aor. partic. the end. 
wv has an acute accent ; (c) supply αὐτόν Cs. e. Κῦρον) as the object. 

5. ἡ, t 5 e . καὶ 4 “hp i. 2 , ε ‘ ΄ } 
ἢ he (fe m.) : 1) δέ, but shu > cf. Oo δέ "ἢ ‘ ἢ δὲ μητηρ. hast the mother. 
6. μήτηρ, mother; c ᾷ : i f 
ibe BM ha other ; cf. Lat. mater: (#) nom. sing. ; ()) cf. ἀρχή IIL, 
ασιλεία .. of the ὦ decl.; Δᾶρεῖος [Π., πεδίον LV., of the ὁ decl.; note 


that μήτηρ shows no resemblance to these and belongs to the 3d or con- 
sonant deel. 


«ἐν ἘΠ τ ᾿ ' Ls 
ἐξ-αιτη-σα-μένη, begging (him) off: (a) from αἰτέω, I beg, with ἐξ 
at. Cx, = aw if or | | 
i ; An away, off; (b) for ε lengthened to ἡ, and for -σα, Ist. aor 
suflix, ef. ἐ-ποίη-σ- ; : fe Ἴ ie] | 

᾿ , of ἐ-ποίη-σ-ε IIT. nN. 15 ; (c) -μένη (inase. pevo-) participial suffix, 

‘ nee ᾿ pe Tas : ee - Y 
nie : eee ; for the active sullix cf. ἄρχοντα V.: (/) ἐξαιτησάμεν-ος, he 
egying off, ἐξαιτησαμέν-η, she, ete., ἐξαιτησάμεντ-ον, if, etc.; cf. the Lat 
end. -us, -a, -um. 

> 2 Ὕ . 

8. ἐπί, upon, to; eof. Eng. epi-taph, words upon a tombstone : note that 
after a verb of motion, ἐπί is followed by the acc. ; ef. similar use of ace 


after els. 


1 ἌΓ ἷ 
Or, sometimes, 7 lead away or order off to death 





ΨΟΥΝΕΒΟΒΝΘΝΟΝΝ fs aa 
ΡΟ ΟῚ ἘΠῚ ha Nhat a hh ion ag OR Tn UR EE Yo 
μον ἐφ" wy , ᾽ 


ἷ 


ἐδ ἡ 1s: χρρωρόλβηχ νων 





LESSON VII. 


5. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The proclitics ὁ, ἡ, ws, cach, like εἰς, without an accent. 
2 The article standing without a substantive is equivalent to a 


demonstrative pronoun : he, she, it, 

3. The passive of a verb may eure sn 
nected with its active meaning, ¢. 4. πείθω, πείθομαι. 

4. Prepos. ἐξ, out of, from ; σύν, with ; ἐπί, upon. 

5. py of σύν becomes A when followed by A in the same word. 

6. Stems ending in a consonant (μήτηρ, St. μᾶτερ) belong to the 


‘aning apparently discon- 


third declension. 
7. ὁ δέ, but he; ἡ δέ, but she ; τὸ dé, but tt. 
8. The augment occurs only in the indicative mode, not in the partic., 
e.g. λαβών, ἐξαιτησαμένη. 
9. μενο-, fem. pevn, is the partic. suflix middle voice. 
10. The nom. of participles mid. voice is -pev-os, -per-n, -pev-ov, Lat. 
-us, -a, -um. 
11. πείθεται, συλλαμβάνει, pres. tense, here refer to time actually past. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The letters of the Greek alphabet Η. ὅ: Ω. i. 


Division of consonants . .. H. 38. (j. 6. 
& 6.4, 


(:. σοφός, 62, 3 
Git. = 
CG. 143 andn.2 


The semivowels ... . . H. 23. 
Declension of ἀγαθός. . . . Η. 222. 
articipial suflixes . νι. 00 ᾿ Il. 382. 
Article as ἃ demonstrative . . If. 654 and ὁ. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. αἰτέω, 1 beg. πάλιν, back, again. 


. ἐξ, from, out of. 9, πείθω. I persuade. 
3. ἐξ-αιτέω, 1 beg off. . πείθομαι, [ am persuaded, be 
ἀπο-κτείνω. 1 kill, destroy. lieve. 
. σύν. with. 


ἀπο-πέμπω. I send off, avay. 
συλλαμβάνω, I seize, arrest. 


κτείνω, 1 iil. 


. ἡ μήτηρ, mother. 








ΠΤ ΕΝ 


om Aone 


+ trae 


SR 
, 


ΕΝ 


«μος ESS και OE ce, useless 


sce eee ere’ 











apn re eqn ee see epee ee . .. 


5, τι --“-τΡὌ..-.. - 


} 
i 
Ι 
i 
Ι 
! 
᾿ 
i 


....-...-.-...........-.΄. .ὄ. 


ΝΣ χὰ AS οὐ} ; . 
: δον Gh ks. Vee et 


INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : («) Κατέστη πάλιν εἰς τὴν ἀρχήν. (hb) Ὁ δὲ συνελάμβανε 


᾿" ld « , ‘ a ᾿ ‘ , 
αὐτόν, ws διαβάλλοντα τὸν Δαρεῖον. (ec) Ὁ μὲν πρεσβύτερος, τοὺς τριακοσίους 


wpe * Fi ‘ , « Γ 
συλλαβών, κατέωτη εἰς τὴν χώραν. (/) Ἢ δὲ τυγχάνει ἐξαιτησαμένη τὸν 
νεώτερον τῶν ἀδελφῶν. 


SEB ITE OPENS ORE ERE REE TT ONE 


2. Ἵ ranslate : (a) γιγνόμενος, ()) ὑποπτευύμενος, (c) βουλόμενος, 
(/) πέμπων, (.) πεμπόμενος, (/) λαμβανόμενος, (4) διαβαλλόμενος, (h) 
διαβάλλων, (1) πείθων, ()) πειθύμενος. | 


3. ‘Translate : («) going up, (b) being present, (c) having, (4) hav- 
ng for >? se ἢ 2 υ ret} > seal wag Ϊ ; 

8. for one’s elf, (¢) collecting themselves, (f) persuading himself, 
(g) being persuaded. 





4. Translate: (a) But being slandered, he wishes to be absent from 
the government. (b) He sends the three hundred hack again to the 
government of which Cyrus had made him satrap. (c) But he believes 
(= believing) [and] sends after Cyrus as if (ὡς) about to kill him. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Article as demonstrative pronoun. 2. Classification of nouns 
according to decl. 3. Greek voices : significations of the middle. 
4. Proclitics. 5. Historical pres. 6. ν before dX. 7. Accent in deel. 
8. Formation of participles. 9, Analysis of ἄρχοντα. 10. Quantity of 
the vowel of each final syllable in the cases of Ist and 2d deel. 11. The 
augment, kinds, place, effect on a prep. prefix, 12. Gender in first two 
declensions. 13. Formation of the aor. stem. 


SS a ee ee 








LESSON VIII. 


LESSON VIII. 
ANABASIS I. 1 4, to ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνου. 


1. NOTES. 


1. ὁ δ᾽, for ὁ δέ, but he; of. ὃ δέ VII.: note the loss of e before the 
initial vowel of ὡς and the use of the apostrophe to indicate the loss, 

2. ὡς, when, as soon as: conjunction, cf. meaning of ὡς VIL, VIE. 

3. dr-7dGe, he went away, was gone: (4) from theme ἐλθ (€Av8) seen in 
Eng. pros-elyte, one who goes to another sect ; (b) pres. ἔρχομαι, deponent, 
from theme épy ; the fut., 2d aor., and perf. forms have the theme ἐλυθ ; 
(c) η temp. aug., of. ὑπώπτευε 11.; (4) dm for ἀπό, as in ἀπ-ών, ἀπ-εῖναι. 

4. κινδῦνευ- σᾶ ς, ufter incurring danger: (4) from κινδύνεύ ὦ ; (b) -σᾶ-ς 
indicates Ist aor. partic. act., standing for -oa-yt-s, as Lat. amans for 
ama-nt-s ; (c) on -σα-, cf. ἐποίησε III. N.; on vr cf. dpxo-vt-a V.; (d) -s 
case end. nom. sing. masc., cf. σατράπη-ς, Aapeio-s, Lat. amans. 

5. ἀτῖμασ-θεί-ς, after being dishonored : (a) from dripdg-w, theme ari- 
pad; (b) ζ not only sounded with a 6 sound, but actually contain- 
ing a 8; (c) note the change? of a ¢ sound before another ¢ sound 
(i.e. ὃ before 6) toa; (4) τ, δ, 6, sounded with the aid of the tip of the 
tongue, are called lingual consonants or mutes; (¢) -Oeé-s for -6é-vr-s indi- 
cates Ist aor. partic. pass.; (7) e-, first pass. suflix ; on -vr- and -s ef. 
κινδυνεύσας lor κινδυνεύσαντς. 

6. ἔσ-ται, he shall be: (a) from theme és, Lat. es-se, to be; infin. 
εἶναι, partic. dv 3 (b) -rae end. as in γίγνε-ται ; note that this fut. 1s depo- 
nent, ὅ. 6. active in meaning, but with passive terminations. 

7. ἐπί, upon, here in the power of: followed by dat., cf. however ἐπὶ 
τὴν ἀρχήν VII. 

8. ἣν δύνητται, if he shall (or may) be able: (a) ἢν = εἰ, of (Lat. si) + 
ἄν (untranslatable) ; (0) ef. Eng. dyna-mite, an able explosive: from 
δύνα-μαι, dep., ef. BovAo-par; (¢) -n-, vowel of subjunctive, but ὦ in Ist 
person: δύναμαι, Loam able ; δύνωμαι, pres. subjunctive, Ist sing., 
δύνηται, pres. subjunctive, 3d sing. 

9. βασιλεύ-σ-ει, hie shall rule ; ef. βασιλεία, kingdom: (a) from βασι- 
λεύ-ω, I rule 3; βασιλεύ-ει, he rules ; (Ὁ) note, σ- inserted after the verb 

1 So in Lat. claus-trum, from claud-o, is for claud-trum; this has come 
into Eng. as clois-ter. 


NKR Been οἱ 


Pi aE ai teas sai wr nes 


ea ah ests ak Bo pital TE ae : 
PRI IEE AT a λυ ae at A ay τυ νοῦ αὐ Bin in BE bia 





τὸ ltr Fe 8 ENR fh ek MF ans ποτ 





: TR Te aL ὡς 








»...ὕ.-----....-... -.....-...ς--.....--.--- 


πόποι τ στ απ νον «τ. 





38 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


stem forms the future stem, as σα- forms the Ist aor. stem, ef. ἐποίησε 
ILL. ; (ὦ) similarly ποιή-σω, ποιή-σει, I shall make, he will make. 

10. ἀντ᾽ for ἀντί, instead οὗ; ἢ ¢f.68 13 note, a final vowel may be 
dropped before the initial vowel of a following word, and an apostrophe 
indicate the loss; (ἢ) preposition followed by the gen. case. 

11. ἐκείνου, of that one, of him; from ἐκεῖνος, declined like ἀγαθός 


except that the neut. sing. is ἐκεῖνο, not ἐκεῖνον. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. A final vowel may be elided before the initial vowel of a following 
word. 


ὡς is used both as conjunction and adverb, 
ἐ augments to ἢ, ὁ. 4. ἀπῆλθε from theme ἔλθ. 
The augment in compound verbs comes after the preposition. 


τ, 6, or 6 before another τ, 8, or @ (in the same word) becomes σ. 
e-rat intlicates the ind. mid. 3d sing.; n-rae the subjunc. mid. 3d sing. 
των, cud. of the active partic. in pres., 2d aor., and fut. 
«σᾶς, end, of the partic., Ist aor. act.; standing for σα-ντ-ς. 
-Oeis, end. of the partic., Ist aor. pass. ; standing for Oe-vr-s. 
The verb stem is made fut. by adding oJe.,2 6. g. ποιήτσω. ποιή-σει. 
Second aor. forms (e.g. ἀπ-ῆλθε) are derived from the theme 

without a tense suffix. 

12. Only the indicative has the augment. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


The three classes of mutes IT. . 6, 2 second group. 
Linguals changed too . . IIL. 52. x. 16, 1 end. 
J ee oh. x. 12. 
Declension of ἐκεῖνος, αὐτός. II. 271, 265. . 83, 79. 
Suflixes of the fut., Ist aor. 
and Ist pass. systems . , II. 372. ΟΣ. Ti. Vi. 

Vowel of the subjunctive . ἢ]. 408. 114. 

7. ‘Tenses in participles, . , 1]. 856. . 204. 

8. Final clauses i.e 5, (i. 217. 

1 Such Eng. words as antichrist, antidote show this preposition; but the sense 

in them is rather that of against than instead of. 


* This means that an o-vowel follows σ in the Ist pers. sing. and plur, and 3d 
pers. plur.; and that ε follows elsewhere. 





PO CULT ETT PL Oe ν δὰ οὐδὲ 





AS RT TS REDS TET MEI UY oe at 


ΣΎ πον 





LESSON VIII. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἀλλά, but. 10. ἐπί (with dat.), upon, in the 
ἀντί, tnstead of. power of. 

. ἔρχομαι, [ come, go. Ll. ἔσται, will be. 

‘. ἀπ-έρχομαι, 1 go away. 12. ἔτι, yet, again. 
. ἀπ-ῆλθε, he went away. 13. ἦν (εἰ- ἄν), vf. 
. ἀτίμάζω, I dishonor. 14. κινδυνεύω, | incur danger. 

. βουλεύω, I advise, plun. 15. μήποτε, never. 
δύναμαι, I am able. 16. ὅπως, in order that. 

. ἐκεῖνος, that one, he. 17. λύω, I loose. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : (a) ἔχων, κινδυνεύων, κινδυνεύσων, κινδυνεύσᾶς, τελευτη- 
σάμενος, αἰτησαμένη, τελευτηθείς. (hb) ποιήσων, ποιήσᾶς, ποιησάμενος, ποιη- 
θείς. (ὁ) γίγνομαι, γίγνεται, βούλεται. (ὦ) ἐποίει, ἐποιεῖτο, ἐποίησε. 
(2) πείθω, πείθει, πείθεται, πεισθείς, πείθων. (7), λύω, λύων, λῦόμενος, 


τ , ἐς ἃ . ' - ’ » 4 2 » 2 
λυσαμένη, λύσᾶς, λύσων, λυθείς, λύει, EAVE, λύομαι, EAVETO, λύεται, EAVOVTO. 


2. ‘Translate : (a) after begging, about to beg, after being begeed. 
(b) Cyrus is-begged-off (partic. aor. pass.) [and] sent away to the gov- 
ernment of which Darius had made him satrap. (c) He plans (for him- 
self) in order that he may again be able to be general of all the Greeks 
who assemble into the plain. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


Ι. Elision. 2. Participial suffixes. 3. Indirect discourse, 4. Tense 
suffixes. 5. Verb theme. 6. Future of εἶναι. 7. Analysis of λύσᾶς, 
AvOels. 8. Lingual consonant before another ling. cons. 9. Accent in 
declension. 10. τ before a rough breathing. 11. Tenses which denote 
continued action. 12. Purpose, 13. Meaning of ae. 


1 Very frequent as an indirect middle. 


᾿ 


ἘΣ prt 


ees oie 


se ak af 


Pe ae ae 














INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON ΙΧ. 
ANABASIS I. τ 4 5, 


, 


TEXT : Παρύσατις μὲν δὴ. . ἣ βασιλεῖ. 


1. NOTES. 


1. ὑπ-ῆρχ-ε, was (for, 1. ..,.} atding: (a) from ὑπ-άρχω ; On ὑπ (Lat. 
sub) for ὑπό cf. ὑπ-ὠώπτευε II. x. 5 d; (b) onnand e cf. ἠσθένει 11. N. 4; 
(6) on the accent cf. ἀπ-ῆλθε VIIL. x. 3; note that it is upon the 
temporal aug. 

2. Κύρῳ: dat. alter ὑπῆρχε ; cf. similar use of the dat. in Lat. after 
verbs of aiding: e.g. mihi succurrit. 

3. φιλοῦσα, loving: (a) from φιλέω ; (b) φιλέ-ων (he) loving, φιλέ- 
ουσα (she) loving ; so ἔχων, ἔχουσα ; (c) note, the diphthong ov absorbs 
ε of φιλέ-ω and a circumflex marks the contraction ;! (d/) so φιλῶ, | love, 
φιλῶν, loving, φιλοῦσα (she) loving ; note the contraction. 

4. βασιλεύο-ντ-α, (him) ruling ; cf. βασιλεύσει VIII. (a) on -ντ- and 
-a tf. ἄρχοντα V. Ν. 11; (b) βασιλεύων, he ruling, βασιλεύουσα, she ruling ; 
(¢) -a marks ace. sing. 3d decl.; so ἡ μήτηρ (stem μητερῚ, τὴν μητέρ-α 

S. ἀφ-ικνοῖτο, might arrive, come: (a) pres. opt. from ἀφ-ικνέ-ομαι 
dep. ; (ὁ) -οἶτο, contr, of -ε of the theme with end. -o:ro ; note that ε 13 
absorbed by ot, as by ὦ in φιλέω, φιλῶ 3 εἰ, and that a circumflex marks 
the contr. ;1 (c) on the corresp. act. end. cf. ἐπιβουλεύ-οι VI. : (d) note 
that the verb is introduced by the indef. rel. pron. ὅστις, whoever, and 
that whoever might come = if any one came; (6) ap tor ἀπ (= ἀπό), cf. 
καθ-ίστημι Vi. ν. 2. 

6. παρά, with the ven, from beside, from the side of: (a) note the idea 
of separation in παρά with the gene; (ἢ) “whoever, of those from beside 
the King, de. from the court, came” means “whoever of those heside 
[who were beside] the king came,” ete, 

7. βασιλέτως, of (the) king; note the omission of the def. art.; 2 
(a) from βασιλεύ-ς, hing; cf. βασιλεύ-οντα above ; (6) τως for τος as in 
Hapvuodrid-os 1. XN. 3; of case endine gen. sing. 3d decl., εὐ -is in Lat. 3d 

1 A circumflex on the penult of course can occur only when the ultima is short. 


2 The art. is regularly omitted before βασιλεύς, when the great king of Persia is 
referred to, 











LESSON IX. Al 


decl., 6. g. honor-is, of honor ; (c) 50 dpxovr-os, BaowWevovr-os, rad os, 


μητρ-ός (Lat. matr-is). 
8. πάντ-ας, all; ace. plur, mase, ; gen. plur. πάνττων IV. x. 5: so 


πάντας βασιλέ-ας, all kings, πάντας ἄρχοντας, all commanders. 

9. dia-ri-els, disposing: (a) thus disposing all = thus affecting the 
minds of all; (b) from δια-τίθη-με, theme Oe, pres. stem τιθε; (c) pres. 
stem of the compound, δια-τεθε, partic. dca-reOe-vr-s 3 On -τέντς changed to -es 
cf. ἀτίμασθείς VIII. N. Se; ef. also κινδυνεύσας VII. for κινδυνεύσαντς ; 
(ὦ) note, vr is lost before the end. -s 5 then ¢ is lengthened to εἰ, a to ἃ. 

10. βασιλε-ῖ, to the king: (a) -t, end. of dat. sing. 3d decl., of. Lat. 
regi and ivta subscript in αὐτῷ ; (Ὁ) applying the endings met with, we 
have: βασιλεύ-ς, βασιλέ-ως, βασιλεῖ, βασιλέ-α ; βασιλέ-ες, 1 βασιλέ-ων, 
βασιλέ-ας. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The accent of compound verbs does not precede the auginent. 

2. ὑπάρχω, to be for, to aid, governs the dative case. 

3. Participles in των have the feminine in -ουσᾶ. 

#. Verb themes ending in -e lose it before an ending beginning with 
τῶ, του, or ot, and the contracted syllable receives a circumflex accent. 

5. A sentence introduced by the indef. rel. dares and containing the 
optative has the force of a condition. 

6. m becomes Φ before a rough breathing, as r becomes 6. 

7. The partic. suflix vr is lost before the case ending s, and a pre- 
ceding a becomes @; ε becomes et. 

8. The third decl. endings : -s, τὸς, τὸ, -a, -ες, των, -as. 

9. With the gen. παρά denotes separation : from the side of. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Three orders of the mutes iW. 58, (3. 6, 2 end. 
Compensative lengthening — 11, 84. G. 16,6 .N, 1. 


Contraction of e and 0 

ni 6 ιν 37,c: 39,b. G. 9,2 and 4. 
Accent in contraction. . TT 105. G. 24. 
Third declension . . . HH. 163 ; 168- G. 45, 1 and 2; 46, 


170. 2; 47; 48. 


1 Tn Xenophon βασιλέ-ες jg contr. to βασιλεῖς, a change like that of ἠσθένεε 
to ἡσθενει, 











INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


Declension of βασιλεύς . HH. 906. G. 
Accent as affected by the 

augment .« « » , 11. 891, Ὁ. G. 105. 
<6 4 ee ἢ G. 184, 2. 


H. 802 and]. G. 191, VI. 4(1). 
H.805and3a. Οὐ. 191, VI. 6 (3) a. 


Verbs of atding 
. mapa With the gen. case 
πρός With the acc. case 1 
Conditional relative sen- 
WONCIM 4 ls lw lw tl IB BSS. 63.8391: 310, 1, 2. 2. 


> ~9 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἀφ-ικνέο-μαι, I arrive. 10. πάντες, «ll. 

ὁ βασιλεύς, king. LL. παρά, with gen., from beside, 
3. βασιλεύω, ἰ rule. from. 

δή, accordingly, so then, L2. ὑπό, wnder: sub. 

δια-τίθη-μι, I arrange, dispose. ὑπ-άρχω,  «ιἰεὶ 
ἤ, than. ld. φιλέω, φιλῶ, I love. 
μᾶλλον, rather. φίλος, friend, 
ὅστις, whoever. ὥστε, that as a result; ut. 


οὕτω. so, thus; ita. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : (a) βασιλεύων, βασιλεύοντος, βασιλεύοντα. βασιλεύουσα: 
λύσων, λύσουσα. () Ἣ δὴ μήτηρ αὐτὸν ἐφίλει, ὥστε αὐτῇ μᾶλλον φίλον 
εἶναι ἣ τῷ βασιλεῖ. (c) Ὅοστις οὖν ἀφικνοῖτο παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν βασιλεύ- 
οντα ᾿Αρταξέρξην, ἀπέδειξε στρατηγὸν τῶν Ἑλλήνων. (1) VAAN ἣν δύνηται 
βασιλεὺς εἶναι, ποιήσει τὸν ἀδελφὸν στρατηγὸν. (9) Ἧ μήτηρ οὖν ἀνέβαινε 
πρὸς τὸν ᾿Αρταξέρξην ὡς ἐξαιτησομένη τὸν Κῦρον. (7) Ὁ δὲ ὑποπτευθεὶς 
ἐτελεύτησε τὸν βίον. 


2. Translate : (a) He indeed happens to be friendly (= a friend) to 
the king. (6) But when the younger happened to be absent, Tissa- 
phernes slanders him before the ruling Artaxerxes, (¢) But the mother. 
loving Cyrus rather than the older brother, persuades the king and 
sends Cyrus back again to his government. 


1 Make it a point to consult the treatment of the preposition given in the gram. 
mars, as often as new prepositions or new uses of the familiar ones are met with. 





IRS ae ee 


πα toa ae 


LESSON X. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1, Accent of ὑπῆρχε. 2. ὅπως and ὥστε. 3. Analysis of partic. end. 
«ἄς, -εἰς. 4. hin ἀφικνέομαι. 5. Endings in the 3d decl. 6. Adjective 
and relative agreement. 7. Analysis of βασιλεύοντα. 8. Augment of a, 
ε,ο. 9. Verb endings -ot, τοιτο. 10. Elision and augment in compound 
verbs. 11. Conditional relatives. 12. Classification of the consonants. 
13. Article as a demonstrative. 14. Time indicated by the tenses of the 


participle, 


LESSON X. — REVIEW. 


[This lesson is a review of all that have preceded it. Nothing is so 
necessary, in the acquisition of a language, as constant and thorough 
review. One should carry forward with him at least nine-tenths of what 
he has learned. The preceding lessons contain in all eighty-eight 
different words, together with a large number of grammatical forms. 
Many of the most important principles of the language have been con- 
sidered. Others might have been brought forward; but it has been 
deemed wise to hold them in reserve. It is understood that the student 
will in no case proceed to take up Lesson XI. until this lesson, with all 
that it includes, is learned. Let every word, every phrase, every prin- 
ciple, be mastered absolutely. ] 


1. TEXT. ANABASIS I. 1. 1 to βσλ I. 1. 5. 


In the review of the text which has thus far been taken, pursue the 


following order of work :— 

J. Pronounce aloud the Greek text. repeatedly. 

2. With only the English translation before the eye, pronounce the 
Greek, until this can be done rapidly and without hesitation. 

3. With only the English translation before the eye, write out the 
Greek ; compare the result with the printed Greck text; note and correct 
mistakes. 

4. Write ont a grammatical analysis of the material of the text thus 
far studied under the following heads: (1) noun-forms, classifying 
separately in both sing. and plur.. (4) nom. forms, (Ὁ) gen. forms, 
(c) dat. forms, (7) ace. forms; (2) verb-forms, elassify separately 





44 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. LESSON 
(4) presents, (ὁ) imperfects, (c) aorists ; and, again, (d) subjunctives, 
(6) optatives, (/) participles. 

5. Go through the text and select those forms and phrases which, 
perhaps, still remain unmastered. Read again the previous notes given 
upon them. Do not leave them before they have been conquered, 


26. Second decl., stem end., 
vender, nom. end, . . IL. 
. ἄνθρωπος, Spov . . . . 1]. 
. Third decl. stems and case 
σιν. 6 + « sl) HOR, 388, . 45,46, 2, 47, 1 
169, 170. 49. 
Oe eee ee ς. ἢ. . 63, 3. 


’ ἀγαθός οὐ» ee we a ἈΝ ρο, , G2, 3 σοφός. 
ρου -ς ον, Ἔν. ἢ, 
RT aa eee ‘ ; BS. 
SS ig os Προς ΠΝ: ἢ oo 
. Voices, modes, tenses, 
themes ...-«¢e«. &888-300.307.G. 86-02: 
. Augment. . . . . . H.354-56,360. G. 99, 100, 105. 
3. Tense and mode suffixes . H. 372. xr LIOIL IL ,VI. 
. Participial suflixes . . . H. 382. ee) cee 
. Vowel of the subjunct. . H. 408. x. 114. 
. Agreement of the subject H. 601. . 134. 
» ” verb H. 603. » 350, 
- “ adjective H. 620. . 138. 
“ appositive H. 623. . 187. 
» - relative H. 627. 3. 181. 
. 6usa demonstrative . . H. 654 ande. . 143 and ν᾿. 2. 
. Object and pred. ace. . . H. 726. . 166. 
oe! i fy . 199. 
. Tense ......- aH. 821-24,828, G. 200, n. 1, 202, 
829, 836, 837, 856. 1, 204. 
, Ὅπως with fut. ind. . . HH. 885. wae. 
. The cond. sentence. . . H. 889. . 219, 1. 
. Conditional relatives . . H. 912. 3. S31. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


. The se δ. 
ame νυ τς ΕΠ. 9. 

3. Breathings . . . . . Η17. 
-Gammanasal. . .. . H. 
Ces, τω ae 
. Classification of consonants H. 

. νον.  ὖἬἪ. 
ν᾽ Ξ-Φῃ 
Mee  ,.,. ιὲ8}κὯο..  , Ὦ 
- Compensative lengthening 

NT wl we a, 
- Contr. of ¢ with @,ov,e . If. 
12. Lingual mute before an- 
other lingual mute . , H. 52. 

Pee Sone H. 79, 81. 
hd ee ,. ἢ 90. 
a er: 95, 96 and a, 

99, 100u, ὁ, 102, a. 

. Accent as affected by contr, IL. 105. 
ΠΝ κοῦσπ, . 5 ἢ 108. 
Jeon Ὁ ae tS 
. Gender, number, cases. , H. 123. 

- Accent ofnouns. . . . II. 128, 129. 


ιν . IT. 130. 
2. Declensions .... - SE eet. 


- 
. 


Ls 
wo = 


4 
. 


OOD p 
Γῶ — 


- 


οι ὦ ὦ 
eo 8 = 


CENA SW DA Rr te TEE OS NP Ne Se LT NP NE BNC AEE SAT LEE? τ τσ σπεινν oe VERO RU TOURETTE” 





“ἃ an tl a ee 
ee ee an ad 





πὸ 
-“ «aad 
. . 


3. VOCABULARY. 


-_ 


3. Stem end., gender, nom. 

endings, Ist decl.. . , If. 134. 
ιν. H. 135. 
ΚΝ . . , | lw OH πὶ 


(The pupil is expected to know the various forms which have 


occurred of each of the words here given.] 


VERBS. 


1 The instructor s εἶ ; : 
5 structor should aid the pupil in ; work . eT ἮΡ ᾿ ‘ “ἃ f 
Wisul dala cacncty « puy this work of classifying his material. 2 . ἀθροίζω. 3. ἀνα-βαίνω. 5. ἀπο-δείκνυμι. 7. ἀσθενέω. 
KS, properly ruled, should be used. It is of extreme importance that 
« al, 


from the beginni Νὰ ; ' ἰτέ 4. ἀπ-έ ' 6. ἀπο-κτείνω. 8. ἀτιμάζω. 
le begining, the pupil should be encouraged to do independent work. ; . σἰεξῶ, 1. ἀπ-έρχομαι ἀπο-Κτει ζ 











ET En et ee - -- --- = 








ἀφ-ικνέομαι. 

. βασιλεύω. 
βουλεύω. 

. βούλομαι. 
γίγνομαι. 
δια-βάλλω. 
δια-τίθημι. 


NouNS 


ὁ ἀδελφός. 
ἡ ἀρχή. 

ὁ ἄρχων. 

€  - 
ἡ βασιλείᾳ. 
ὁ βασιλεύς. 
ὁ βίος. 

οἱ Ἑλληνες. 
ε , 
1) μήτηρ. 

at OR ae 

ὁ ὁπλιτῆς. 

ὁ παῖς. 

‘ ΄ 
τὸ πεδίον. 
ὁ σατράπης. 
ὁ στρατηγύς. 
ε , 
ἢ τελευτή. 


ὁ φίλος. 


᾽ , 
16. δύναμαι. 
- τ 
11, εἰναι. 


᾽ , 
LS. ἐξ-αιτέω. 


19. ἐπι-βουλεύω. 


ah. καθ-ίστημι. 


. . ὮΝ , 
22. κινδῦνεύω. 


ADJs., PRONs. 


> , 

᾿, ἀμφοτέρω. 
νεώτερος. 
πάντες. 


πρεσβύτερος 


» , 
auTos. 
» » 4 
m=. €EKELVOS. 
“ τ «ε ’ 
ade oO, 1), To 


Γι 
lL, oaos 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


4 , » ΄ 
1. δέ, καί, ἀλλά 

» ‘ 

ἐπεί. 

» 

})- 

a” 

)V- 

“ “ 
UTWS, ὥστε. 


ε 
ως. 


INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


κτείνω. 
λαμβάνω. 
λύω. 


μετα-πεμπω. 


“παρ-εῖναι. 


PRE 


. ἐξ. 


πείθω. 


4 
πεμπω. 


POSITIONS. 
, , 

ava. 

» Γ 
avrTt 

, ΄ 
aTro. 
, 

διά. 


, 
εις. 


» ,’ 
ἐπι. 
΄ 
KkaTa 
μετά. 
παρά. 
πρός. 
7 
our. 


J ’ 
υ το 


7 
TF OLEG). 


συλ-λαμβάνω. 


τελευτάω. 

τυγχάνω 
'π-άρχω. 

ὑπ-οπτεύω. 


φιλέω. 


. PARTICLES. 


, 
δή. 
ἔτι 
μέν 
ΓΣ 
μήποτε 
> 
OUV. 
OUTW. 
, 
πάλιν 


Led 
ως. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : (a) Ὁ στρατηγὸς τελευτὴν τοῦ βίου ἐποίει. (}}) Ὁ mpe- 


, ᾿ ‘ - > a » ‘ Dg ” 
σβύτερος ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἀπὼν ἐτύγχανε. (ι) Ὅσοι στρατηγοὶ ἡθροίζοντο εἰς 


πεδίον, βούλονται τὸν Κῦ ἷ ἴ ; ἐ Ξενί Ι͂ Ὶ 

: ι Tov Kupov ewat ἄρχοντα. (d) Ὃ δὲ Ξενίας κατέστη εἰς 
‘ » , , ΄ a) , , , ’ - “ 
τὴν ἀρχὴν. (ε) Ἢ δ' ἐτύγχανε διαβάλλουσα τὸν νεώτερον ὡς τῇ ἀρχῇ 


ἐπιβουλεύοι. 


2. Translate: (a) He wishes accordingly to be absent from the king- 
dom. (b) He sends for the three hundred men from the province of 
Which Darius had made him satrap. 
be a friend to him. 


(6) The king indeed happens to 
(7) But she, loving the younger, wished him to be 
present. 








Da a Steet Fd 2 ἐνν C8 tee, 


“νει, 
νων Δὲ... 





REALE TAT RE BLES NT 


LESSON Xl. 


LESSON XI. 


ANABASIS I. 1. 5, 6. 


. λάβοι βασιλέα. 


TEXT : καὶ τῶν παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ 
1. NOTES. 


1. παρ᾽ (with dat.), by the side of: (4) cf: παρὰ βασιλέως IX. (yen.), 
from the side of the king ; (b) on map’ for παρά cf ἀντ᾽ 111. Ν. 10. 

2. ἑαυτῷ, himself, sibi: note that map’ ἑαυτῷ stands between τῶν and 
βαρβάρων like an ordinary attrib. adj., ¢.y. τῶν ἀγαθῶν παίδων, of the 
good boys. 

3. én-e-pedei-ro, contr. from ἐπεμελέ-ε-το from ἐπι-μελέομαι, deponent : 
(a) on the form, ef. ἐ-βούλε-το I1.; (0) ε-ε = ee as in ἠσθένει LL. ; (0) on 
é-e = εἶ, cf. é-ov = οὗ in φιλοῦσα IX.; (ὦ) construed with gen., he tool: 
care of the barbarians. 

4. πολεμεῖν, contr. from πολεμέ-ειν, froin πολεμέω ; of. Eng. polemic: 
(a) -ew indicates the infin., ¢f. also -vae in mapet-vae IL.; (Ὁ) so ἔχω, ἔχειν; 
λύω, λύειν. 

5. τε, for τέ, both, foll. by καί, and: (a) note loss of accent ; to be 
read as part of the preceding word;} (b) cf. εἰς 1V., ὡς V., ὁ VIT., which 
have no accent, and are read as part of the foll. word. 

6. as .. . εἴησαν, ut essent, that they might be: (a) pres. opt. 3d 
plur., in a clause of purpose ; (Ὁ) from εἰμί, J am, ef. av, being, εἷναι, to 
be, ἔσται, will be; (c) on the optative in indir, disc, for indic, of the 
dir. disc. cf. ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι VI. ; (7) on the opt. in cond. rel. sent, of 
ὕστις ἀφικνοῖτο LX. 

7. εὐνοϊκ-ῶς ἔχοι-εν, «nd that they might have in a friendly manner, 2. 6. 
might be friendly : (a) -ὡς indicates the adverb ; (ἢ) as τοὶ indicates the 
pres. opt. 38d sing., so -ovey indicates the pres. opt. 3d plur., of. however 
ei-n-cav 6; (c) opt. as in εἴησαν. 6 «. 

8. δύναμι-ν, force: (a) nom. δύναμι-ς, cf. Eng. dynamite, δύνηται Ὑ 111.; 
(b) end. -ν indicates acens, sing. 3d decl., ef. also -a in ὥρχοντ-α V.N.11. 

9. ὡς μάλιστα ἐδύνατο, quam maxime poterat, as well as he could : 
ἐ-δύνα-το from δύνα-μαι dep., cf. δύνηται VIII. ; on the form ef. ἐ-βού- 
λε-το 11. N. 9 ; ἐπεμελεῖτο, 3 a. 


1 So in Lat., héminésque. 


pe ee ee Cate ee eer ene hee μϑὰμ, 











48 INDUCTIVE GREEK METILOD. 


10. ént-Kpurt-d-pevo-s, hi uling (for himself) : (4) from ἐπι-κρύπτω, cf. 
Eng. crypt; () on the partic. sullix and the voice of. ἐξαιτησα-μέν-η VII. 

11, ὅπως, ut, in order that ; cf. similar use of ὡς 6: (41) tollowed 
here by the opt. λάβ-οι ; (4) ef. εἴησαν, ἔχοιεν, λάβοι, note that the verbs 
upon which they depend (ἐπεμελεῖτο, ἤθροιζεν) are ina past, or second. 
ary, tense; (c) on ὅπως with fut. ind. after verbs of striving, 
ἔσται VIII. 

12. ὅτι ἀπαρασκενυό-τατο-ν, as unprepared as possible : 
ὡς μάλιστα 9, strenuthening the 


ef. OTF ws 


(4) ὅτι like ὡς i 

superlat, ; (1) -raro- (nom. τατος} inili- 
cates superlat. ; (0) for the comparative sullix ef. “TEpo- IN πρεσβύ- 
Tepo-s 1. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. παρά is const, with both gen, and dat., but with different meanings, 

2. A preposition with its dependent noun may stand 
article and its subst. and have the value of an attrib, adj. 

3. ἐπιμελέομαι is construed with the gen. 

4. ws and ὅπως indicate purpose. 


between an 


S. τεῖν, «ναι indicate the infinitive. ἔ-ειν = εἶν. 


6. ré loses its accent, and is read as part of the preceding word. 


7. A clause of purpose may have its verb in the opt. when the prin- 
cipal verb is in a past tense, 


8. ἔχω modified by an adv. has the sense of the Eng. to be with a 
pred. adj. 
9. -ovev and ἡ-σαν indicate the opt. 3d plur. 
10. ὡς, ὅτι, strengthen the superlative, like quam in Latin. 
11. Adverbs are formed from uljectives by the end, τως. 
12. Comparatives and Superlatives are formed by the endings -repo- 
and -τατο-. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Open and close vowels . . 2 ae 

2. Contraction of vowels νυ, Ὁ. 

"ἄν shoe ye iH. FES. 

4. Declension of ee. «> Sh eat. 
Comparison of adjectives . ἢ, 248, 249. 

6. Formation of adverbs : . 2 eee. 


iad 


7. Tenses of the indicative . If. 301, 302. 


-- 
~ 
τῷ 
~ 
Ce 
— 
, 
ee 


NOw on 
Ss 


_— 


“J 


Ὁ 
Ο 


ΜΡ 
τῷ 


7 


Pe A Ry τον -- 


εν τ kta ek tates ee τ 


Pa rr eee 


POOP I ELON τὸν WE 


-- 
en rs 


LESSON ΧΙ. 49 


ἃ. Article with attributives Il. 666 and a. (i, 142, 1 and nN. 
9. Adverb with ἔχω. Hf. 810 examples. Se ae 
10. Modes in final clauses . . H. 881. G. 215 A,, 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀπαράσκευος, unprepared. 9. εὐνυϊαῖς, ie 5: 

ὁ βάρβαρος, barburtan. 10. ncaa w friendly way. 
ἡ δύναμις, force. ll. vei ah i a 
ἑαυτῷ, to himself. 12. ὅτε, ws (w. Sede intensif: 
εἴησαν (opt.), they might be. νυ pine ous 
Ἑλληνικός, Greek. 13. παρά (ν. dat.), ny : — 
ἐπικρύπτω, I hade. 14. πολεμέω, I fight, ma Ν των 
8, ἐπιμελέομαι (w. gen.), J cure 15. sas καί, both Bh ᾿ : 
for. 1G. ὡς (conj.), tn order that. 


al Ὁ Ὁ ἢν 


c ot 


rn 


5. EXERCISES. 


΄ 

΄ « , ς acl. a ts, 
1. Form’ the adverb from “EAAnuKds and ἱκανός. 2. eee oer μις. 
, 3. Translate : ap ἑαυτῷ 
amapdoxevos (sing.), ἱκανός (plur.). 3. Translate: (a) οἱ wap Seg 
t ivat ἱκανοὶ πολεμεῖν. () Ὁ μὲν Κῦρος ἀνέβη καὶ ἔσται 

βάρβαροι βούλονται εἶναι ἱκανοὶ πολεμεῖν. μ ν 

‘ bad « , 

παρὰ τῷ ἀδελφῷ. () ᾿Εβούλοντο δὴ αὐτὸν ἔχειν ὅτι ἱκανώτατον ἄρχοντα. 
. ἢ “ ~ € - ’ 3a ΕἾ 
(4) Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀσθενεῖ ὁ βασιλεύς, ἐπιμελεῖται αὐτοῦ ἡ Παρύσατις. (“) Ene 


‘ 4 oa ‘ ’ [4 ατο. 
κρύπτετο τοὺς στρατηγοὺς ὅτι μάλιστα ἐδύν 


4, Translate: (4) But whoever might arrive from wisn Ce see 
(ered the king as secretly (= hiding) as possible. (b) But dig sit 
plotting in order that he might rule. (0) The satrap ibe Sitio 
up when the king was happening to be most unprepared. ( ) ἐν vs 
be a friend of the -king if he is able (subj.) to hold (= have) ms 
government, (6) And if he wishes to slay the generals, the king’s 
other will be present as a friend to them. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Elision. 2. Contr. of e-e, é-€, é-et, ἔτου. €-a, e-@. 3. Deponenta. 
4. Verb ending -εἰν. 5, Different uses of the opt. 6. pie δ τέ. 
7. Theme and pres. stein of λαμβάνω. 8. End, “OEY, τῇ vat 9. ae 
with the adv. 10. ὅπως with fut.ind. 11. Cases with παρά. 13, Ἐμά. 
ings of 3d decl. 13. Attributive position. ". Position of sept of δέ 
15. Augment. 16. Participial ore 17. Comparison of ixavds. 


ye 


PANEL RELIES AO ERED A NET PIES δῷ 


-— | 





























3 


INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XII. 
ANABASIS I. 1. 6. 


τ ὃ ΝῊ “ 
WOE OU ETTOLELTO 


πλὴν Μιλήτου. 


1. NOTES. 


1. εἶχε: (a) impf. i ᾿ ἔχω ; ' 
εἰχ (a) impf. ind. from ἔχω ; here ε augments to εἰ; (>) aug. 
Οἱ a, οἵ 
ae = a πόλεσι, in the cities: (a) ἐν, Lat. in, in; with dat. case ; 
) πόλε-σι, dat. plur. of πόλι-ς, ef. 1ὦ 
cot, cli plu of πόλι-ς, ef. Eng. metro-polis ; 1 (2) note change οἱ 
t toe; in which eases is ¢ retained ? 
3. παρ-ήγγειλε : («) fr 3 
: : (() from παρ-αγ) ἐς, I ἰ.3 
of in τυγχάν ie 6: fc : Ls ual Mange ἀνρεὶ; 3 (0) yy= ng. 
- YX γχάνω -N. 6; (ὦ) ἤγγελλε, impf., was announcing ; ἤγγειλε 
st aor., dunounced ; (4) note, there is but one ἃ in the Ist aor. and the 
tense suflix -g-a is not employed, but ¢ is strengthened to εἰ 
é 4. λαμβάν-ειν : (a) -ew indicates infin. act., cf. πολεμεῖν XI. Nn. 4: 
») pres Ὶ 10a is he χὰ 
( oer infin., since λαμβαν is the pres. stem of the theme λαβ. 
. ἄνδρ-ας : : si inp, ste I 2 
ἄνδρας: (“) nom. sing ἀνήρ, stem avep, but avdp in decl.; (b) on 
stems in p belonging to the 3d deel. cf. μήτηρ VII. Obs. 6 
: ᾿ é a . ᾿ς . 
6. πλείστους, most, βελτίστους, best: («) superlatives of πολύς ἀγαθός ; 
b) the adjectives meaning mue | | 
( ᾿ ul je ctives meaning much, good, are irregularly compared. 
aes . Se 
3. ὡς as, as if, of. ὡς φίλον V.: introduces the following two gen, 
Which, taken together, make cy 


nh construction equivalent to the Lat 
abl. abs. | 


8. Τισσαφέρνους, for Τισσαῴφερνεσ-ος, σ here drops away between e¢ 
and o and the vowels contr. to ov. 

9. καὶ yap ἡ-σαν, for [ the, ete, | were: (a) cf. Lat. etenim = et-enim; 

‘ . ὍΣΩΝ , 
(0) ἦ-σαν, erant, were; on -σαν cf. εἴησαν ΧΙ, 

‘ , « ° . o ᾿ . 

10. τὸ ἀρχαῖον, originally ; ef. Eng. archaic : 
force of adverb. 

Ll. ἐκ βασιλέ ; 7 ki 

β ws, from, by, [the] king: (a) ἐκ, same as ἐξ, but used 


when the following word begins with a consonant ; (5) with the gen 
case. | 


ace. sing. neut. with 


L othe ? i . 











δ τς dpe pitino tcc Ὁ — . 
oe) ο a, ony weeps ἀν. 
: : , Ν᾿ 





MALE ΠΥ τ το ρει πώ ον 


-“ αν Re 


Φο τα 


TG TINIE NIE OER 5 


LESSON ΧΙ]. 51 


12. δε-δυ-μέν-αι, herring been given: (4) perf. part. past. (or mid.) of 
theme do, fo yire, cf. Lat. do, dare ; (1) note, the stem of the perf. is 
formed by means of a prefixed reduplication, cf. Lat. pe-pendi, de-di, 
te-tendi ; (c) on part. suflix -pevo cf. ἐπικρυπτότμενο-ς XI. x. 10. 

13. ἀφ-ει-στή-κε-σαν, (they) had revolted :1 (a) from ἀφ-ίστημι, theme 
ora, Lat. sta-re; ()) on ἀφ for ἀπ᾽ cf. ἀφ-ικνοῖτο IX.N. 5, καθ-ίστημι 
VIN. 2c; (0) -σαν indicates 3d plur,, ¢/. εἴησαν X1., ἦ-σαν 9. 

14. πᾶσ-αι, all; from was: nom. plur. fem,; stem πᾶστα ; for the 
masc. stem cf. πάνττων LV. N. 5. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. ¢ sometimes augments to e. yy pronounced like ng in sing. 

2. ἐν is foll. by the dat. ; ἐξ by the gen. 

3. Verbs the stem of whose present ends in -AA form the first aor. 
with only one A and lengthen the theme-vowel, € to εἰ; the tense suflix 
-ca is not used. 

The theme AaB becomes AapBay in the present system. 

ἀνήρ has dv8p for its stem, in declension. 

πολύς, ἀγαθός are irreg. compared. 

The Greek has a gen. abs. corresp. to the Lat. abl. abs. 

-gay indicates the 3d plur. in some forms of the verb. 

The acc. sing. neut. of the adj. may be used adverbially. 

ἐξ becomes ἐκ before consonants, 

The perf. stem is formed by reduplication. 

πᾶς has the two stems mavr (mase., nent.) and πᾶσ-α (fem.). 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Accent in the third deel, ς΄. ἢ]. 172. 

Declens. of ἀνήρ. og we « BSS ee 

Declens. of mas... . - . . Ff. 240. 

Tense systems . οὖ. π᾿  : 

Adverbial accusative . . . . . H. 719. 

Genitive absolute . ... . . H.970 183. 


1 This form is pluperf. ind., but being somewhat irregular, its full analysis is 
for the present withheld. 























INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


4, VOCABULARY. 


. ἀγγέλλω, 1 unnownce. 12. πλήν, except. 
. παρ-αγγέλλω, I announce.* 13. ἡ πόλις, city. 
. ὁ ἀνήρ, Man. 14. πολύς, πλεῖστος, much, most. 
. ἀφ-ίστημι, I cause to stand 15. ἡ συλλογή, levy. 
off, revolt. 16. ἀρχαῖος, ancient, original. 
. βέλτιστος, best. 17. τὸ ἀρχαῖον, formerly. 
. δίδωμι, 1 give. 18. τότε, then. 


. ἕκαστος, each, . 6 φρούραρχος, captain of the 
guard. 


. ἡ φυλακή, guard. 


. ἕν, Nn. 

. ἦσαν, erant, they were. 
_ ὁπόσος, Quantus, as many 4s. . ὧδε, thus. 
. πᾶς, every, all. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Decl, πᾶσα ἡ συλλογή (sing-) ; ὁ βέλτιστος ἀνήρ ; ἑκάστη πόλις. 

2. Translate: (a) And the city makes the levy as follows. (b) As 
many generals as he has in the city. (0) To each he announces that they 
are-to-take (= to take) 300 as good men as possible. (d) The Pelo- 
ponnesian cities were, in truth, wishing to aid the Ionian cities. (¢) | 
will make Tissaphernes general, on-the-ground-that (ὡς) Cyrus wishes 


(it). 
6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Comparison. 2. Vowel contraction. 3. Open and close vowels. 


4. Ady. ending. 5. Different meanings of ὡς. 6. Modes in final 
clauses. 7. Peculiarities in decl. of πόλις. 8. Peculiarities of map- 
ήἠγγειλε. 9. Voice and accent of ἐποιεῖτο. 10. Construct. of πόλεσι (after 
Τισσαφέρνους). 11. Declens. of βασιλεύς. 12. -ovs in Τισσαφέρνους. 
13. Accent in contraction. 14, Stems of πᾶς. 


1 Literally pass the word along, announce to one after another. 














LESSON XIIL. 


LESSON XIII. 
ANABASIS 1. τ 7. 


TEXT: ἐν Μιλήτῳ δὲ... ἐκπεπτωκότας. 


1. NOTES. 


1. mpo-ac6-d-pevo-s, foresceing: (a) from αἰσθάν-ο-μαι, I percewe, cf. 
Eng. esthetic ; (b) mpd, before, Lat. pro ; (c) note, the partic. here has 
for its base the theme αἰσθ, not αἰσθαν ; it is 2d aor. ; cf. AaB-ov V., ave- 
Bn V. 

2. ra αὐτά, the same (things) ; τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα, these same things: (a) ὁ 
αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same man ; ἡ αὐτὴ te ευτή, the same end ; (6) ταῦτα, neut. 
plur. nom. or ace. of οὗτος, this, that. 

3. Bovdevo-pév-ovs, them planning for themselves: (a) in agreement 
with αὐτούς understood, the people of Miletus; (>) note, the partic. in 
pevo- is declined like ἀγαθό-ς ; for the nom. fem cf. ἐξ-αιτησαμέν-η VII. 

4. ἀπο-στῆ-ναι, to revoit; cf. ἀφ-ει-οτή κεισαν ΧἼΠ. ; (4) cf. πολεμ-εῖν, 
εἶναι ; note the infin. suffix is -vae or -εἰν ; (b) cf. xat-€-orn VI. ; both 
forms, showing the theme ora (here lengthened to orn), are 2d aor. ; 
(0) so κατα-στῆ-ναι, to stand down, be established. 

5. dr-é-xrew-e, he killed: (a) from ἀπο-κτεῖνω, cf. ἀπο-κτενῶν VIL, 
theme xrev; (δ) Ist aor., cf. παρ-ήγγειλε XII. ; note, stems in ν, as those 
in A, do not form the Ist aor. with the tense suffix σα, but lengthen the 
vowel of the theme, — ε to εἰ. 

6. τοὺς μέν. . . τοὺς δέ, some . . . others: on 6 as a demons. cf. ὁ δέ 
VII.,6 δ᾽ VIII. 

7. €&-€-Bad-e, he cast out, banished: (a) from ἐκ- βάλλω, theme Badr ; 
(b) note that the theme is the base of the verb here ; the form is 2d aor., 
cf. 4. 

8. ὑπο-λαβὼν τοὺς hevy-o-vr-as, undertuking (= receiving) the fleeing 
ones (= fugitives) : (a) cf. λαβών V.; (b) φεύγοντας, pres. part. from 
φεύγω, fugio, flee; on the form cf. ἄρχοντα V. 

9. συλ-λέξ-ἂς. . . ἐ-πολιόρκ-ει, collecting . . . he besieged, i. 6. he col- 
lected and besieged: for ovv-Aey-cas, from συλ-λέγω ; On συλ for σὺν cf. 
συλλαμβάνει VII. ; on E= ks, ys, cf ἀπέδειξε 1V.; on -σᾶς = ~aave-s. cf, 




















54 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


κινδυνεύσας VIII. N.; (Ὁ) from πολεορκέω ; -εἰ contracted from e-e, as in 
ἦν θένει I] . 

10. στράτευμα, army (acc.); ο΄. στρατηγός IV.: (a) 3d decl. neut., 
stem orpatevpar ; (b) note absence of case end. and dropping of final τ. 

11. ἐπειρᾶ-το, he was trying: (a) from πειρά-ο-μαι, dep.; (b) -Gro for 
-a-ero ; -ero being the same ending as in ἐβούλ-ετο LI. 

12. xar-ayew, to lead down, back: (a) from ἄγω, ago, I lead; (Ὁ) on 
the end. -εἰν, cf. 4. 

13. ἐκ-πε-πτω-κ- ὁτ-ἄς, fallen (i.e. cast) owt, exiles: (a) nom. ἐκπεπτω- 
cos, contr. from -xors ; on τως for -ors cf. κινδυνεύσας for κινδυνευσαντς ; 
(4) pert. partic., here with the force of a noun ; theme πτω from πίπτω ; 
(c) πε-» redup.; of. δε-δο-μέναι XII.; (d) κ-, representing κα, perf. act. 
sutlix, as σα- is of the Ist aor. ; (6) -as as in πάντ-ας IX. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. ἐν is followed by the dat. case. 
2. αἰσθάνομαι, theme αἰσθ, torn, theme ora, κτείνω, theme κτεν, 
βάλλω, theme Badr, λαμβάνω, theme AaB. 
3. ὁ αὐτός = the sume. 
. Participles in pevo-s are declined like ἀγαθός. 
. The infin. endings are -ειν, -vat. 
. The 2d aor. commonly shows the verb theme ; 6. g. ἀπο-στῆ-ναι. 
. ὁ μὲν... ὁ δέ denote contrasted persons. 
8. Verbs in ν and A form the first aor. without -σ-, but lengthen the 
thematic vowel. 
9. The participle standing without a substantive may have the force 
of a noun: 6. g. ἄρχων, φεύγων. 
10. « and y at the end of a verb stem, before -σα-, Ist aor. suffix, 
unite with o, forming é. 
11. Neuter stems in r form the nom. and ace. sing. without a case 
ending, and by dropping r. 
12. a-e contracts to a, d-e to ᾷ. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


G. 38 (συκῆ). 
G. 50 IT. 


1. Declens. of ee: 884. 
2. Declens. of neut.stemsinr. H. 181. 








ae a 


aE 


a 





LESSON XIIL 


ἰδ, αν κι; ee ee ϑῳο ΣΝ, G. 79, 2. 

. Declens. of οὗτος (neut.). , H. 272. G. 83. 

. First aor. of liquid verbs. , H. 431. G,. 210, [17S 
. Themein2daor. . . . . H.435,a. G. 110, V. 

. Attributives used without 


their substantives H.621; 965-66. G.139 land 2. 


Oe; 2 G. 143. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἄγω, I lead. 10. 6 αὐτός, idem, the same. 
κατ-άγω, I lead down, back. . dGpev...68¢, he... he. 

. αἰσθάνομαι, I perceive. 12. πειράομαι, [ attempt. 

. βάλλω, 1 throw. 13. πίπτω, 1 fall. 

. ἐκ-βάλλω, I eject, banish. 14. πολιορκέω, I bestege. 

. ἡ γῆ, earth, land. 15. τὸ στράτευμα, army. 
ὁ ἐκπεπτωκώς, exile. 16. συλ-λέγω, I collect. 

. ἡ θάλαττα, sea. 17. τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα, haec eadem, 

. κατά, down ; κατὰ γῆν, by these sume. 


land. 18. φεύγω, I flee; φεύγων, fugitive. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Ὁ δὲ φεύγων, συλλέξᾶς τριᾶκοσίους τῶν Πελοποννη- 
σίων, πολιορκεῖ τὴν πόλιν. (1) Ὃ μὲν ἀθροίζει τὴν βελτίστην δύναμιν ὡς 
ἐπιβουλεύοντος τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ἑαυτῷ. () Οἱ μὲν πείθονται, οἱ δὲ ἐβουλεύοντο 
ὅπως λάβοιεν βασιλέα. (il) Οὕτως ἐπεμελεῖτο τῶν φευγόντων, ὥστε πᾶσαι 
ai πόλεις εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν. 

2. Decline τὸ αὐτὸ στράτευμα : 6 αὐτὸς φύλαξ ; ἡ αὐτὴ ἀρχή. 

3. Translate : (a) They desire to revolt to the brother of the ruling 
man. (6) All the generals were desiring to besiege those (rovs) in Mi- 
letus both by sea and by land. (c) He attempted to lead back the army 
to (eis) the government of which he happened to be satrap. (d) Some 
he was sending away into the city, others he was collecting in order that 
he might take Miletus. (6) He was taking care of the best of the bar- 
barians. (f) Perceiving the same things in Miletus, the commander of 


the army goes up to (-the-side-of the) king. 


1 Cf. Eng. ge-ography. 


(rere tetanic hese 
i rene eee ποτ ΣΡ ΟΣ ΕΜΒΝΒΟΡΒΗΒΟΒΌΡΌΝΗΝ 














INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Augment. 2. Tense suffixes. 3. The verb theme. 4. Time de- 
noted by the tenses of the participle. 5. Declension of participles in 
-pevo-s. 6. Const. with ἐπεβουλεύω, ἐπιμελέομαι. 7. ἐξ and ἐκ. 8. Redu- 
plication. 9. Analysis of ἐπολιόρκει, ἐπειρᾶτο. 10. τὸ ἀρχαῖον, formerly, 
at first. 11. Enclitics. 12. Three uses of the optative. 13. The for- 
mation of the nom. of ἐκπεπτωκότας. 





LESSON XIV. 
ANABASIS I. 1. 7, 8. 


TEXT : καὶ αὕτη αὖ ἄλλη... ἠσθάνετο. 


1. NOTES. 


1. αὕτη, this, i.e. the war with Tissaph. : (a) nom. sing., subj. of ἦν 
agreeing in gender with πρόφασις (fem.) ; (Ὁ) mase. οὗτος, neut. τοῦτο ; 
neut. plur. ταῦτα, cf. ra αὐτὰ ταῦτα XIII. 

2. ἄλλη πρόφασις, another pretext : (a) ἄλλη (masc. ἄλλος, Lat. alius) 
decl. like αὐτός ; (b) πρόφασις, declens. and gend. same as δύναμις XI., 
πόλις XII. 

3. ἦν, was (3d sing.); ἦσαν, were, XII. ; meaning of ὦν, εἶναι, εἴησαν Ἷ 

4. αὐτῷ, to him ; was to him, = he had ; note the possessive force of 
the dative. 

5. τοῦ ἀθροίζειν, of the to-collect = of collecting: (a) -ew, sign of the 
inf. act., cf πολεμ-εῖν X1., λαμβάν-ειν XII. ; (Ὁ) note the Greek inf. with 
the force of an Eng. noun in -ing ; so rod λύειν. of loosing. 

6. ἠξίου. he was asking (as a right); from ἀξιόω : (a) impf. 3d sing. 
for ἠξίοε, cf ἠσθένεε, ἠσθένει 11. ; (Ὁ) note, o-e = ov. Contr. of ετ-ω, ε-ε, 
€-€t, α-ε, €-0 ! 

7. 80-67-va, to be given: (a) from theme 80, Lat. do, dare, cf. δε-δο- 
μέναι ΧΙ]. ; (Ὁ) θη, long form of 6e, Ist aor. pass. suffix; οὐ ἀτιμα- 
σθείς VIII., =aripao-be-vrs ; (0) -ναι inf. suffix in the aor. pass. (cf. 5 a). 

8. of, to himself: cf. similar meaning of ἑαυτῷ XI. 











LESSON XIV. 57 


9. ravras, these: (a) ace. plur. fem. from οὗτος cf. αὕτη 1; (Ὁ) note 
the forms: otros, αὕτη, τοῦτο, ταῦτα ; (4) cf. τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα XIII., note 
that the forms of οὗτος do not stand between the art. and its substantive. 

10. αὐτῶν, of them; gen, after ἄρχειν, to be ruler of them. 

11. συν-ἐ-πρᾶττε(ν) αὐτῷ, co-operated with him: (a) from συμ-πράἄᾶττω, 
theme mpay ; ( ) final » because the following word begins with a vowel, 
cf. ἤθροιζεν X1.; (c) αὐτῷ, dat. following σύν (with) in the verb. 

12. πρὸς ἑαυτόν, toward, against himself ; cf. ἑαυτῷ. to himself, XI. : 
note, these words stand between ἐπιβουλήν and its art., cf. παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ XI. 

13. ἡσθάνε-το, he was perceiving: (a) from αἰσθάνο-μαι, dep., cf. mpo- 
αισθόμενος XIII. ; (6) note, as augments to 7; augment of a, €, οἷ (c) 
tense of ἠσθάνετο 1 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


. οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, this, that. 
. ἄλλος, another ; 6 ἄλλος, the other, declined like αὐτός. 
. πρόφασι-ς, πόλι-ς, δύναμι-ς, fem. 3d decl., are declined alike. 
. εἰμί, am, is conjugated irregularly. 
. The Greek, like the Latin, has a dat. of possessor. 
6.. The infin. may be used as an indeclinable noun and take the art. 
as a modifier, representing any case. 
7. o-€=ov. Oe, lst passive suffix. 
8. ἄρχειν, a verb of ruling, governs the genitive case. 
9. σύν, with, in composition with a verb governs the dat. case. 
10. A prepositional phrase may take the attributive position. 
11. a augments to ῃ. 
12. οὗτος does not stand between a noun and its art., 6. g. οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Mutes beforeo@ .....e. , 64 
Contraction ofo-e- . . 1. .« « . 
Declension of οὗτος. ee do ee . 272. 
Declension of ἄλλος. . . . .. . 267. 
Position of otros. . . .. . 673; 670. 
Genitive with dpyew . . . . . H. 741. 
Dative with verbs comp. with σύν,ἐπί H. 775. 
Infinitive used asa noun... . . 959. 


PN Pp δὲ ye "- 











, . ere 
a ᾿» 4 ων “ὦ...».».ὕ...» 


INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD, 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἄλλος, another. . οὐκ, not. 

ἀξιόω, I claim, ask as a right. . οὗτος, this, that. 

ἄρχω, I rule. . ἡ πρόφασις, pretext. 

av, again. . mpatre, I do, act, make. 

¢ 3 ΄ . « . 

ἡ ἐπιβουλή, conspiracy. συμπρᾶττω, I do with, co- 
ἦν, erat, was. operate. 

οἷ, Sibi, to himself. 


τα σὴ OTR go to α 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Declension of πρόφασις, αὐτός, στράτευμα, βασιλεύς, πόλις, ἐπιβουλή. 
λυ-όμενος (loosing). 

2. Translate: (a) Ἤισθετο. (b) ᾿Ηισθάνοντο οὗτοι οἱ ἄνδρες αὐτοὺς 
τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἐν τῇ πόλει βουλευομένους. () Στρατεύματα ὅτι βέλτιστα 
συλλέξαντες, ἐβούλοντο ταύτην τὴν πόλιν κατὰ γῆν πολιορκεῖν. (4) ᾿Ετύγχα- 
νεν οὖν ἡ ἄλλη δύναμις τῶν Ἑλληνικῶν ἀνδρῶν αὐτὸν μᾶλλον φιλοῦσα ἣ τὸν 
βασιλέα. (6) ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὁ Κῦρος φίλος ἦν καὶ τῷ στρατεύματι καὶ ταῖς φυλακαῖς. 

3. Translate: (a) In order that the king might take the army as 
unprepared as possible. (b) If he may be able to have those cities in- 
stead of the king. (c) He was not a friend to the ruling Artaxerxes, 
(ὦ) But he was taking care of collecting an army. (6) He accordingly 
made (ποιέων that pretext. 

4. Translate and analyze : δοθῆναι, λυθῆναι, ἀτιμασθείς. δοθείς, ἐπειρᾶτο, 
ἠξίου. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The liquid consonants. 2. Formation of the 1st aor. of verbs end- 
ing in a liquid. 3. Attributive and predicate positions. 4. Noun ac- 
cent. 5, Accent in the first declens. 6. Accent of monosyllables in 
the third declens. 7. The tense suffixes ; lst pass. suffix. 8. Nom. of 
participles whose stems end in -or, -avr, -ovr, -evr. 9. Time denoted 
by the tenses of the indicative. 10. Modes in final clauses. 11. The 
mutes, the three classes and three orders. 12. Open and close vowels. 











LESSON XV. 


LESSON XV. 
ANABASIS I. 1. 8, 9. 
TEXT : Τισσαφέρνει δὲ ἐνόμιζε... φυγὰς ἦν. 


1. NOTES. 


1. Τισσαφέρνει πολεμοῦντα, (him) warring with Tissaphernes : (a) dat. 
after πολεμοῦντα ; for Τισσαφέρνεσ-ι, on the dropping of o cf. Τισσαφέρ- 
vous XII.1; (b) for the ace. cf. V. N. 3; (0) πολεμοῦντα for πολεμέο-ντ-α;, 
from πολεμέ-ω, cf. πολεμεῖν ΧΙ. ; on the form cf. ἄρχοντα Ύ, 

2. στρατεύματ-α, armies: (a) on the gender and formation of the 
nom. cf. στράτευμα XIII.; (0) -a, ending of nom. ace. neut. plur., cf. a 
in Latin, e.g. regn-a, gener-a, cornu-a. 

3. δαπανᾶν, for δαπανά-ειν, to be wasting money: from danavd-w; note, 
«ἄ-ειν = -ἂν. 

4. οὐδὲν ἤχθε-το, in-no-wise, not-at-all was angry: (a) ace. sing. neut. 
used adverbially, cf. τὸ ἀρχαῖον XII. ; (1) nom. mase. οὐδείς, nullus ; 
(ὦ from ἄχθο-μαι, dep. ; on the aug. cf. ἠσθένει IT. 

5. αὐτῶν πολεμού-ντ-ων, iis bellantibus, uwiilst, because, they were 
warring : on the gen. abs., cf. XIT. N. 7. fk 

6. τοὺς γιγνομένους Sacpous, the (being-born) accruing revenues : not 
the attrib. position of the partic., οἱ. βασιλεύοντα 1X.; theme of γι-γνο- 
pev-ovs ! cf. 1. 

7. ὧν Τισσαφέρνους xré., which, of (ὦ. 6. belonging to) Tissaphernes, he 
happened to be having: (a) ὧν for ds (acc. fem.) ; note that the relative 
here agrees with its antecedent even in case. 

8. Χερρονήσῳ τῇ xré., in the Cherronesus, the directly opposite Abydos : 
(a) X, Eng. ch, cf. X in Xmas, for Ch(rist)mas ; (0) 2d decl. fem. ; 
(c) τῇ καταντιπέρας ᾿Αβύδου is attrib. to Χερρονήσῳ ; note that the attrib. 


1 This dropping of σ may be compared with the change of s to r in Latin in 
such words as arbos, arboris; genus, generis. 














60 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


positions are: art., attrib., noun, or noun, art., attrib.;! (ὦ) Αβύδου, 
genitive with the locative adv. ἀντιπέρας. 

9. τόνδε τὸν τρόπον, this way, thus, as follows: acc. sing. used adverb- 
lally, cf. τὸ ἀρχαῖον Χ1Ι., οὐδέν 4 a; nom, ὅδε ὁ τρόπος ; note, ὅδε like 
οὗτος (XLV. nN. 9) does not take the attrib. position. 

10. φυγά-ς fur φυγαδ-ς, fugitive ; same theme (ivy) as in φεύγοντας 
XIII. : (a) note loss of δ before o; so in Lat., virtus for virtuts ; 
(ὁ) dat. plur. φυγαδ-σι becomes φυγάσι. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


. The person against whom one fights is expressed by the dative case. 
. €-o contracts to ov. 
Nom. and acc. plur. neut. ends in a. 

. a-ew contracts to av. 

. The accus. is used adverbially in certain expressions. 

. The attributive position is immediately after the article, — either 
between the article and substantive, or after the substantive with the 
article preceding. 


7. Participles and prepositional phrases, like adjectives, may stand in 
the attributive position. 
8. Adverbs of place are followed by the gen. case. 
9. rand ὃ before o are dropped. 
10. Stems in -es, 3d decl., lose ¢ between vowels. 
11. Verb themes ending in ε contract ε with a following vowel. 
12. The relative may occasionally agree with its antecedent even in 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declens. of βασιλεία, ἀρχή. γῆ. 

Declens. of βίος. στρατηγός, τρόπος. 

Declens. of ἀγαθός. αὐτός, ἄλλος, ὁ. 

Declens. of πόλις, δύναμις, πρόφασις, στράτευμα, ἀνήρ, βασιλεύς. 
Declens. of φύλαξ (for φυλακ-Φ)ὺ Η. 174. G. 50. 
Attributive positions . . . . H.666; 668. G. 142,1, 2, 
Dative of association . . . . H. 772. G 186,N. 1. 


ae 


NAO. 


1 The teacher should illustrate this point clearly and forcibly. 











LESSON XV. 


4, VOCABULARY. 


. ἀμφί, about. . ὁ δασμός, revenue. 
. ἀντιπέρας, directly opposite. νομίζω, puto, I think. 
. ἄχθομαι, I am angry. ὅδε, this, the following. 
daravaw, I spend (waste) . οὐδείς. οὐδέν, nobody, nothing. 
money. - ὁ τρόπος, manner. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Analyze: ἐνόμιζε, πολεμοῦντα, στρατεύματα, δαπανῶ, ἤχθετο, πολε- 
μούντων, συνελέγετο, φυγάς. 

2. Translate: (a) Ὁ φυγὰς ob! βασιλεύσει. () Τοῦτο τὸ στράτευμα 
βούλεται τόνδε τὸν ἄνδρα βασιλέα εἶναι. (.) ᾿Εβούλοντο οὖν ἄρχειν τῶν 
στρατευμάτων. (() Οὐκ ἄχθομαι τῶν στρατηγῶν ἀναβαινόντων ἐπὶ τὴν 
πόλιν. 

3. Translate: (a) I wish to be opposite that city. (Ὁ) The com- 
mander makes his levy in this manner. (c) He takes 300 men of the 
Greeks and of the barbarians as many as possible. (d) He collects (aor. 
part.) his armies, generals, heavy-armed men of the Greeks, and guards- 
men | and | besieges the Ionian cities both by land and by sea. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Adverbial accusative. 2. Accent in contraction. 3. Case with 
verbs of fighting. 4. Contraction of d-ew. 5. Quantity of in πόλεως, 
πόλεων. 6. Agreement of the relative. 7. Mutes beforeo. 8. Aug- 
ment of a, e. 9. Enclitics. 10. Construction with verbs of ruling. 
11. Tenses in the subjunctive and optative. 12. Accent in declension. 


1 ΞΞ οὐκ, but preferred when the foll. word begins with a consonant. 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XVI. 


ANABASIS 1. τ 9. 


TEXT : τούτῳ συγγενόμενος... πόλεις ἑκοῦσαι. 


1. NOTES. 


1. τούτῳ συγ yev-d-pevo-s, associated with him [and], lit. becoming asso- 
ciated with that one: (a) dat. follows σύν in composition, cf. συνέπραττεν 
αὐτῷ XIV. ; (δ) from σύν + γίγνομαι (cf. 1) ; note vy becomes yy = ng ; 
cf. ἐτύγχανε III., παρήγγειλε XII. ; (c) γίτγνο-μαι, theme γεν; tense in 
ovy-yevouevos ! 

2. ἠγάσθη τε, both admired (and, ete.|: (a) from ἄγα-μαι, dep., here 
aor. pass. with act. meaning (@ being inserted before the pass. sutftix) ; 
cf. δοθῆ-ναι XLV. ; note, the passive of deponents has an active meaning; 
(6) τὲ, enclitic ; cf. τὲ XI. ; τέ... καί ΞΞ Kai... καί (Χ111.), both... and. 

3. δί-δω-σι(ν), he gives: (a) from δέδω-με, cf. δο-θῆναι X1V., de-do- 
μέναι XII. ; (ὁ) -με, -σε indicate pres. ind. act. Ist and 3d sing., like the 
more usual -@, -es ; 80 ἀπο-δείκνῦμι, ἀπο-δείκνῦσι ; ἵστημι, ἵστησι ; (c) on 
(v) cf. ἤθροιζεν X1., συνέπραττεν XLV. ; theme of δίδωσιν ! - 

4. ὁ δὲ λαβ-ών, but he took, lit. taking: (a) on 6 as a demons. cf. 6 δέ 
VII.; (ὁ) on λαβών cf. V.; theme? tense here? pres. ind. ! 

5. συν ἐ-λεξεί(ν), for συν-έ Aey-oe(v), he collected ; cf. συλλογή XIL, 
συλλέξας XIII.: (a) on E= κσ, yo, ς΄. ἀπέδειξε 1V., συλλέξας XIII. ; 
tense here? (Ὁ) from συλ-λέγω ; συλ for συν, cf. συλ-λαμβάνει VII. 

6. ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν χρημάτων from, with, these means: note the order, 
τούτων τῶν, cf tavtas XIV. ; χρημάτων deci. like στράτευμα. 

7. ὁρμώ-μενο-ς, rushing: (a) from ὁρμά-ω (cf. δαπανά-ω XV.), I start ; 
ὁρμάο-μαι, I start myself, rush; the mid. voice as in ἀθροίζονται IV. ; 
(ἡ) -w for a-o; on a for a-e, cf. ἐπειρᾶτο XIII. 

8. Opaki . . . οἰκοῦσι, with the Thracians, the beyond the Hellespont 
dwelling, t. e. the Th. who dwell beyond the H.; on the attrib. position ef. 
Χερρονήσῳ... ᾿Αβύδου XV.: (a) nom. Θρᾷξ (for Opak-s), cf. φύλαξ, 
Gram. Less. XV.; on the dat. cf. Τισσαφέρνει XV. ; (b) οἰκοῦσι for 
οἰκέο-ντο-σι, (lat. plur.; on ¢-o contracted to ov, cf. πολεμοῦντα XV.; on vr 


lost before o, of. ἀτιμασθείς VIII. 











LESSON XVI. 63 


9. ὠφέλει, he was aiding: from ὠφελέ-ω ; note, ὦ absorbs the aug- 
ment e-, and remains unchanged ; on -εἰ (= -e-e), cf. ἠσθένει 11. 

10. χρήματ-α συν-ε-βάλλο-ντο, they were (for their sake) contributing 
means: (a) cf. xpnpdt-wv 6; (0) from συμ-βάλλω for συν-βάλλω ; 580 
συμ-πράττω, συμ Bovrevw ; On the theme οἱ βάλλω, cf. ἐξέβαλεν X11. 

11. στρατιωτῶν, of (the) soldiers, cf. στρατηγός. στράτευμα : (a2) nom. 
στρατιώτης, ist decl. masc.; so ὁπλίτης, ὁπλίτας V.; note the accent of 


the gen. plur. 1st decl. 
12. ἑκοῦσαι, willing, fem.; from ἑκών, masc. sing.; fem. ἑκοῦσᾶ, cf. 
φιλοῦσα IX. ; ἑκόντες, they (masc.) willing. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The dative follows verbs compounded with σύν. 
2. σὺν becomes συγ before y, pronounced sung. 
3. Theme of γίγνομαι, γεν; λαμβάνω, AaB ; βάλλω. Bad. 
4. Deponents retain their active meaning even in passive forms. 
5. -μι and -σι, personal endings, = -@ and -es. 
6. The impf. 3d sing. ending in ε adds ν before a word beginning 
with a vowel. 
7. νὰ becomes AA; vm, vB become pr, μβ. 
8. Final « or y in verb themes unites with oa in the Ist aor., form- 
ing £a. 
9. a-0, a-m@ = @; a-e = a. 
10. Final « or y in noun stems unites with ς (nom.) or -σι (dat. 
plur.), forming &, &. 
11. Participles drop yr before the dat. plur. end. -σι. 
12. w does not change in augment. 
13. The genit. plur. Ist decl. ends in -ὧν (circumflex accent 3). 
14. A:ljectives and participles in των have the fem. in -ουσᾶ. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


ν before other consonants . . . H. 55. G. 16, 5, 6. 
2. » movable oie. eee ἘΠ τώ G. 13. 
3. Declens. of πολίτης . . . . =. H. 145. G. 37,2: 


1 Except the feminine of barytone adjectives and participles in os, which takes 
the same accent as the masc. and neut. 





# 
j 

t 4 
t 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


Declens. of φλέψ (for φλέβ-.) . Η. 174. 
The «μὲ conjugation . . . . . H.811. 
Passive deponents. . . . . . H. 497. 
Circumstantial participle . . . H. 968-69. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἄγαμαι, I admire. 9. συμ-βάλλω, I contribute. 
. ὁ dapetkds,! a daric. 10. ἡ τροφή, support. 
ἑκών, ἑκοῦσα, willing. 11, ὑπέρ,3 beyond, above. 


. μύριοι, 10,000. 12. τὸ χρῆμα, thing; τὰ χρήματα, 


- οἰκέω, 1 live, dwell in. means. 
). ὁρμάω, I start. 13. τὸ χρῦσίον, money. 
ὁ στρατιώτης, soldier. 14. ὠφελέω, J aid. 
. συγ᾽ γίγνομαι, come into tnter- 
course with. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : (a) Οὗτος ὁ Θρᾷξ δαρεικοὺς δύο συμβάλλεται. (") Ἑκὼν 
> 4 A > 4 ͵ Φ' σι ς ‘ ΄ ‘ ᾽ - ’ 
ὠφελήσω τὸν αὐτὸν στρατιώτην. (7) Οἰκῶ ὑπὲρ πόλεν τὴν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ. 
(6) Πολεμήσει σὺν στρατιώται: μυρίοις. (+) ΕἙκὼν δίδωμε τὰ χρήματα εἰς 
τροφὴν τῶν στρατιωτῶν τοῦ βασιλεύοντος ἀνδρός. 

2. Translate: (a) These men were contributing money for the su 

g p- 
port of the guards. (b) But the kings living in that city do not per- 
ceive the plots against them. (c) The army deemed it right (ἀξιόω) 
that 10,000 darics should be given to the generals. (d) I do not wish to 

’ 5 5 
live in the kingdom of that king. (¢) These men were not willing. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Sound of yy, yy. 2. Enclitics, proclitics. 3. v hefore consonants ; 
σύν in composition. 4. Uses of the pres. indic. 5. Declens. of χρῦ- 
σίον. 6. Case with ἀπό 7. Declens. of χρῆμα. 8. Formation of Ist 
aor, stem. 9. Position of οὗτος. 10. Middle voice. 11. Case with 
verbs of fighting. 12. Analysis of ἐπολέμει. 13. Attributive position. 
14. Contraction of e-o; vr before σ. 15. Accent of στρατιωτῶν. 


1 A Persian gold coin equal to about $3.75. 
2 Lat. super, Eng. OVER. 











LESSON XVII. 


LESSON XVII. 


ANABASIS 1. τ. 9, 10. 


TEXT: τοῦτο δ᾽ αὖ... περιγενόμενος ἂν τῶν ἀντιστασιωτῶν. 


1. NOTES. 


1. τοῦτο, this; join with τὸ στράτευμα, this army: separated from its 
noun for the sake of emphasis, — this army, as well as the preceding. 

2. rpepd-pevo-v, being supported : from τρέφω, cf τροφή XVI. 

3. ¢€-AdvOav-e(v), escaped notice: from λανθάνω, theme dab; cf. λαμ- 
βάνω, theme AaB 

4. ξένος ὦν, being a guest, friend: on the partic. with τυγχάνω, ef. 
παρών III. 

5. ὑπὸ τῶν οἴκο: ἀντιστασιωτῶν, by the at-home adversaries : (a) note 
the meaning of ὑπό followed by the gen.; cf. the Lat. abl. of the agent 
with ab ; (Ὁ) οἴκοι, adv., with the position and force of an attrib. adj., cf. 
nap ἑαυτῷ XI., κατ᾽ ἀντιπέρας ᾿Αβύδου XV.; on the meaning cf. οἰκέω, 
I inhabit; (c) ἀντιστασιωτῶν from ἀντιστασιώτης, Ist decl. miasce., of. 
στρατιώτης XVI. Ν. 11. 

6. αἰτεῖ for αἰτέ-ει, he demands ; from airéw, cf. ἐξ-αιτητσαμένη VII. : 
on €-ec = εἶ, cf. πολεμεῖν ΧΙ. 

7. αὐτόν... ξένους, μισθόν : objects of αἰτεῖ : αὐτόν, 2. 6. Cyrus, upon 
whom the demand is made; ξένους, μισθόν, the objects demanded. 

8. εἰς, into, about (with numerals): so εἰς τριακόσιοι στρατηγοί. «bout 
300 generals, 

9. ξένους, hired soldiers, mercenaries : on ξένος, quest, visitor, cf. 4. 

10. τριῶν μηνῶν, of three months: (a) nom. τρεῖς μῆν-ες ; 50 τρεῖς παῖ- 
δες, three boys. τριῶν παίδων, of three boys ; (b) cf. Lat. tres, three ; (c) pn- 
νῶν, nom. sing. μήν, cf. Lat. mensis; on the nom. without case end. s, 
cf. μήτηρ VII., ἀνήρ XII. vocab. 

11. ὡς περι-γεν-ό-μενο-ς ἄν, on-the-ground-that he would conquer, etc., 
(if he received aid from Cyrus]: (a) γεν, theme of what verb? tense 
here? (6) γενόμενος, becoming; συγ-γενόμενος, being with ; περιγενόμενος, 
yettiny around, becoming superior to; (c) ἄν, not translatable, but always 

5 











66 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


used in conclusions after conditions referring to the future in a vague or 
uncertain (and less vivid) manner.? 
12. ἀντιστασιωτῶν. cf. 5 ; note the gen. following περιγενόμενος ; of. 


gen. alter ἄρχειν XIV. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Adjectives are separated from their substantives for emphasis, 

2. v is added to the impf. indic. act. 3d sing. of verbs when the foll. 
word has an initial vowel. 

3. λανθάνω, theme Aad; λαμβάνω, theme AaB; τυγχάνω, theme rvy ; 
γίγνομαι, theme γεν. 

4. τυγχάνω is foll. by the partic. where the infin. might be expected. 

5. ξένος has two different meanings: guest, visitor; mercenary soldier. 
Mercenaries were called friends euphemistically 

6. ὑπό with the gen. of a noun denoting a person signifies the agent. 

7. Adverbs, like partic. and prep. phrases, have the position and 
value of attrib. adj. 

8. airéw is foll. by the acc. of the thing desired and that of the person 
upon whom the demand is made. 

9. eis with numerals means about, approximately 

10. Stems in -ν, 3d decl., like those in -p, do not take the end. ¢ in 
the nom. sing. 

11. dy used in conclusions after conditions referring in a vague or 
uncertain manner to future time. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


vr, νδ,νθ beforeon. . . . . H. 56. G. 16, 6, n. 1, 2. 
yand vr, vd, vO before -σι, dat. 

ΝΡ 2 Sc ee ee, bee G. 16, 6, N. 1, 2. 
Two classes of feminines, Ist 

6h 6 6 ον ων. 40. G. 87, 
Nom. sing. 3d decl. . . . . H. 168. G. 46, 2 
Decl. of λύων . . . . . . H.241,2242, 6. 68. 


1 The teacher should point out, in connection with this lesson, the signification 
of the phrases fut. vivid, and fut. less vivid. 
2 Omit the 3d sentence. 














LESSON XVII. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


airéw, I beg, demand. 9. ὁ ξένος. quest ; mercenary. 
ay, used in the conclusion of . οἴκοι, at home. 
less vivid fut. cond. . περί, wround. 
ὁ ἀντιστασιώτης, adversary. περι-γίγνομαι, I become supe- 
δισχίλιοι, 2,000. rior, conquer. 
ἔρχομαι, I come. . πιέζω, 1 press. 
. AavOdve, I escape notice. . τρεῖς, three. 
- ὁ μήν, month. . τρέφω, I support. 


8, ὁ μισθός, pay. . ὑπό, under, by. 


5. EXERCISES. 


2 T ᾿ οἷς 2 : μ᾿ ᾽ 2 μ᾿ ΄ lal » , ΄ 
1 caneiets : (a) Αὐτῇ ὃ οὖν οὕτω τῷ βασιλεῖ ἐπιβουλεύουσα λανθάνει 
n πόλις. (b) Ξενίας δ᾽ 6 Παρράσιος φίλος ὧν ἐτύγχανε τῷ σατράπῃ. καὶ 
ἀτιμασθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν TH πόλει οἰκούντων ἀνέβη πρὸς βασιλέα. (:) Ἤισθά- 

Dt 
veto ; Gero. Ἤιτει τὸν ἄρχοντα τὸν αὐτὸν μισθόν. (1) Καὶ ὁ Κῦρος δίδω- 
σιν αὐτῷ ξένους καὶ τριῶν μηνῶν μισθόν. 

. γΠ"}»γ. ῷ]Ϊ « λ 9 Ὺ] 2...) γνώ ‘ ay € tiv. ς 5. 

ι 2. Translate : (a) Clearchus, being a fugitive, was a general of the 
Greeks in the army of Cyrus. (Ὁ) But he took (aor. partic.) the 
money [and] was desiring to spend it for the support of the Grecian 
force. (0) He collected an army of 2,000 men by-means-of (ἀπό) these 
resources (χρῆμα). (d) The guards indeed thus make the levy. (9) And 
he was deliberating in order that he might take the cities as unprepared 
as possible. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Analysis of πιεζόμενοι. 2. Constructions after airéw. 3. Con- 
structions with verbs of fighting ; verhs of superiority ; with compounds 
in σύν; with ἐπιβουλεύω. 4. ὑπό with the genitive. 5. Accent in the 
3ddecl. 6. Vowel contraction. 7. Circumstantial participles. 8. » be- 
fore other consonants. 9. Declens. of στρατιώτης, σατράπης. 10. Three 
uses of the optative. 


1 παρά = by, by the side of ; imo= by only in expressions of agency. 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XVIII. 


ANABASIS I. τ. 10. 


TEXT : ὁ δέ Κῦρος δίδωσιν. . . τρεφόμενον στράτευμα. 


1. NOTES. 


1. δίδωσιν... καὶ δεῖται, gives . . . and wants of, asks, him: (a) cf. 
δίδωσιν XVI. ; -ν movable as in ἤθροιζεν Χ1., ἐξέβαλεν XIII. ; (6) from 
δέομαι, dep., 1 want; for δέ-ε-ται, ἕ-ε = εἶ as in ἐπεμελεῖτο X1., ἐποιεῖτο 
X11. 

2. μὴ Kata λῦ-σ-αι, not to loosen down, let down, come to terms with, 
ne condiciones ferat: (a) μή, not, corresponding to the Lat. ne in 
many of its uses; (6) Ist aor. inf. act. from κατα-λύω ; ending -at ; (c) on 
the pres. act. ending, cf. πολεμεῖν ; aor. pass., cf. δοθῆ va; 2d aor. act., 
cf. ἀποστῆ-ναι. 

3. πρόσθεν... πρὶν ἄν, before, until ; πρόσθεν = previously, but need 
not be translated when followed by πρίν. 

4. αὐτῷ συμ-βουλεύσηται, should consult with him: (a) αὐτῷ dat. as 


in συνέπραττεν αὐτῷ XIV. ; (Ὁ) from συμ-βουλεύω, 1 advise with; mid. 


1] advise with (for my interest) ; συμ for συν asin συμ-πράττω X1V. vocab. ; 
(ὦ -nrat indicates the subjunct., cf. ddv-nrac VIIT. ; σ- (for oa-) indicates 
the Ist aor. stem; (4) note, πρὶν ἄν followed by the subjunct ; ¢f. the 
Lat. antequam consuluerit ; had the main verb been in a secondary 
tense, πρίν might have been followed by the opt. without ἄν. 

5. τὸ ἐν Θετταλίᾳ στράτευμα, the army in Thessaly: on the attrib. po- 
sition of ἐν Θετταλίᾷ, cf. map’ ἑαυτῷ ΧΙ. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. v is added to the ending -o« before words beginning with a vowel. 

2. δέομαι is followed by the gen. of the person of whom a request is 
male. 

3. μή corresponds in many of its uses to the Lat. ne. 














LESSON XVIII. 


4. The Ist aor. inf. act. ends in -σ-αι. 

5. πρόσθεν... πρίν, until. 

6. ‘he subjunct. is used after πρὶν ἄν, when it is dependent upon a 
primary tense. 

7. The opt. without ἄν may stand after πρίν when it is dependent 
upon a secondary tense. 

8. The ending -nrat indicates the subjunct. 3d sing. 

9. The dat. is used after compounds with σύν. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declension of stems ending in a 

lingual mute: Ons, ἐλπίς. γέρων H. 176,177. G. 50. 
Declension of φίλιος. .  .° aa G. 62 (ἀξιος). 
Construction with airéo . . . H. 724. G. 164. 
Construction with déopae. . . Η. 748, a. G.172,2n.1. 
Relat. clauses introduced by until H. 921. G. 239, 240. 


4. VOCABULARY A. 


δέομαι, I want, ask. . πρίν, until, 
ἕξ. six, . πρόσθεν, before. 
κατα-λύω, I loosen, come to . συμ-βουλεύω, I advise with. 
agreement. . τετρακισχίλιοι, 4,000. 
4, μή, not. 


VOCABULARY B. 


λύω, I loose. Avor,° he might loose. 
λύει,1 he looses. Avorev,® they might loose. 
édve(v),? he was loosing. Avewv,” to loose. 

λύσω, I shall loose. λίσειν, to be about to loose. 
λύσει,8 he will loose. λῦσαι § to loose. 
€dvoe(v),* he loosed. λύων," loosing. 


cf. ἀναβαίνει V. 4 * ἐποίησε]. 7 cf. λαμβάνειν ΧΙ͂Τ. 
2“ ἐτύγχανεϊΙ. 5 ἐπιβουλεύοι VI. 8 “ καταλῦσαι XVIII. 


4“ βασιλεύσει VIII. 8. « ἔχοιεν ΧΙ, 9 * ἐχωνΥ͂, 























INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


λύσομαι, 1 shall loose (for myself). 
λῦον, i toasting. Avoerat, he will loose (for himself ). 
λύσων, about to loose. ἐλύσατο, he loosed ( for himself). 
Avoas,? loosing. ἐλύσαντο, they loosed (for them- 
* Avouat, am loosed. selves). 
Avnrat,* he may loose, be loosed. 


ALvovea,! 


λύεται, he is loosed. 
λύονται, they are loosed. Avonrar, = " " 
λυθῆναι, to be loosed. 


ἐλύοντο, they were being loosed. λυθείς," loosed. 


edvero,® he was being loosed. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Decline μισθός, ἀντιστασιώτης, τρεφόμενος. λαβών. 

2. Translate : (a) Καὶ ἐδεῖτο αὐτῶν μὴ πρόσθεν ἀναβαίνειν πρὶν στρά- 
τευμα ἀθροίζοι. () Τῷ δὲ Κύρῳ δίδωσι στρατεύματα ὡς Τισσαφέρνους αὐτῷ 
ἐπιβουλεύοντος. (¢) Τούτῳ τῷ ἀνδρὶ δώσω δύο μηνῶν μισθόν. (1) Οὐ συμ- 
βουλεύσεται τοῖς στρατηγοῖς πρόσθεν πρὶν ἂν τὴν συλλογὴν ποιῆται. 

3. Translate: (a) Cyrus escapes notice [1π] collecting his armies. 
(0) Being hard-pressed by the soldiers, they assemble in (= into) the 
cities. (¢) The king thinks that his brother is spending-money on his 
armies. (d) He perceives the plots against himself and tries to arrest 
the men. (6) They do not wish to revolt to Cyrus. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The declension of ἀνήρ; of πᾶς. 2. Comparison, 3. Formation 
of the adverb. 4. ὅτι, ὡς with superlatives, 5. Some uses of the opta- 
tive mode. 6. Time denoted by the tenses of the subjunct., opt., infin. 
7. Classes of feminines Ist declens, 8. Subjunct. and optat. after πρίν. 
9. ν and vr before ς. 10. Nom. of stems in -ovr, -evr, -avr. 


1 φιλοῦσα IX. 
2 κινδυνεύσας VIII. 


5 δοθῆναι XIV. 
6 ἀτιμασθείς VIII. 


3 of. συνελέγετο XV. 
4° δύνηται VIII. 
* Middle or passive. 











LESSON XIX. 


LESSON XIX. 


ANABASIS I. τ 11. 


1. NOTES. 


1. ξένον ὄντα αὐτῷ, being (acc. sing.) a guest-friend to him (since he 
was his guest-friend) ; on the dat. cf. αὐτῷ XIV in init. 

2. ὄντα. . . λαβόντα, being .. . having taken: from dv, λαβών, stems 
ovr, λαβοντ ; note, the nom. is formed without the case end. s, and ο is 
lengthened to ὠ, r disappearing, since it may never stand at the end of 


a word. 

3. ὅτι πλείστους, quam plurimos, cf. XII. 

4. παρα-γενέ-σθαι, to become beside, come, arrive: -σθας, infin. ending 
mid. voice ; γεν theme of what verb? tense here ἢ 

5. ὡς... βουλόμενος στρατεύεσθαι, as wishing (wishing, as he said) 
to conduct a campaign for himself ; to march: (a) on ὡς, cf. ὡς ἀποκτενῶν 
VII. ; (>) στρατεύε-σθαι pres. inf. mid., cf. 4. 

6. ὡς παρεχόντων Πισιδῶν, on the ground that, etc. : on the gen. abs. 
cf. ἐπιβουλεύοντος Τισσαφέρνους XII. 

7. τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χώρᾳ, to-the of-himself country: (a) note, ἑαυτοῦ stands 
between the art. and its substant., ὁ. 6. in the attrib. position ; (Ὁ) note 
the forms ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτῷ ἑαυτόν. 

8. ἐλθ.-εῖν, to come: (a) 2d aor. infin. act., from the theme ἐλθ (ἔλυθ) ; 
ind. ἦλθε, he came ; note that here ε augments to ἡ ; cf. εἶχε XII. ; (0) 
the assumed pres. is ἔρχομαι. dep. cf. X VIT. vocab. 

9. ὡς πυλεμή-σων, as being about (intending, as he said) to fight, cf. 
ὡς ἀποκτενῶν VII. 

10. φυγά-σι, for φυγάδ-σε; on ὃ dropped before ς, cf. φυγάς XV. 

11. τοῖς Μιλησίων, namely, the (fugitives) of the Milesians : Μιλησίων, 
attrib. position, cf. τοῖς Opaki τοῖς... οἰκοῦσε XVI. 

12. ἐποίουν οὕτως, thus they were doing: (a) note, οὕτω becomes οὕτως 
before an initial vowel; (Ὁ) ἐποίουν, contr. from ἐ-ποίε-ον ; on €-0 = ov cf. 
πολεμοῦντα X.V., πολεμούντων XV.; -ov, end. of impf. ind. act. 3d plur.; 
80 ἔλυον, they were loosing. 





ee ΕΣ - τ το ττο ας 








ee 

















Fi 
᾿ 
[ἡ 
i 
3 


INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Stems in -oyr form the nominative in -ῶν. 
2. The dative used with the verb to be may indicate possession. 
3. -σθαι is the ending of the infin. mid. voice. 


4. ὡς with the participle marks something as merely alleged, which 
may or may not be true. 
5. The possessive ἑαυτοῦ stands in the attrib. posit. 
6. ε may augment to » as well as to εἰ. 
7. The pres., 2d aor., and fut. act. infinitives end in -ειν. 
8. ἦλθε, he came, has no present, but assumes ἔρχομαι instead, 
9. ὡς with the fut. partic. indicates an intention as stated, whether 
assumed or real. 
10. Participles, prepositional phrases, adverbs, and genitives are found 
in the attrib. position. 
11. The ending -oy indicates the impf. ind. act. 3d plur, 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Declension of φιλῶν (Joving). . . . H. 243. G. 69. 

2. Declension of ἑαυτοῦ (sing.) . . . . H 266. G. 80. 

3. Mute-, liquid-, and vowel-verbs . . . H. 309. G. 92, 3. 

4. Formative elements of the verb H. 353. G. 93 (read). 
5. The infinitive endings . . . , H.861. G. 117. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


παρ-έχω, I furnish, cause. 

"Ὁ, τὸ πρᾶγμα, affair, plur. trouble. 
στρατεύομαι, I march. 

. ἡ χώρα, country. 


. ξαυτοῦ, of himself. 

. ἤλθε(ν), he came. 

. κελεύω, I order. 

- mapa-yiyvopas, I arrive. 








LESSON XIX. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1, Translate and analyze: κελεύσας, κελεύοιεν, κελεύσω, ἐκέλευον, 
ἐκέλευσεν. 

2. Translate: (a) Καὶ yap ὁ ἀδελφὸς τὰ γιγνόμενα χρῦσία βασιλεῖ πέμ- 
πων, ἐλάνθανεν ἐπιβουλεύων. (b) Οἱ δ᾽ οὖν ἑκόντες χρήματα συνέβαλλον εἰς 

‘ ‘ ~ , . “ U 
THY τροφὴν τῆς πόλεως. (vc) Πράγματα παρεῖχον | τῇ βασιλείᾳ. 

3. Translate : (a) But they were collecting men, as if the Pisidians 
were causing trouble. (b) I will war against Tissaphernes with the sol- 
(liers of these cities. (c) He announced to the guards in the city? to 
take as good men as possible, and thus they were doing. (d) That 
country was formerly the kingdom of Artaxerxes 8 the king. (e) Being 
his brother, he was asking-as-his-right (that) those armies be given to 
himself rather than to another man. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. ὡς with participles. 2. The infinitive endings. 3. Constructions 
after δέομαι, αἰτεῖν. 4. Moves after πρίν. 5. The orders and classes of 
mutes. 6. pin ἀφικνοῖτο. 7. Gen. and dat. sing. Ist declens. 8. Analy- 
sis of ἐποίουν, of φυγάσι. 9. Demonstrative use of the article. 10. The 
formation of the verb. 11. Mutes before s. 12. Uses of the accus. 
13. Declension and gender of stems ἴῃ τ 14. The accent of the gen. 
plur. of φίλιος (3 genders). ἡ 


1 Why not πάρειχον ? Cf. ἀπῆλθε VITI. 
? Put the prepos. phrase in the attrib. posit. 
8 First declension. 





ine err ch ret nies Sennen ate 5 


--“- τ -τν’ «---τποινσ--οστ΄.ανς0. 























INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XX. — REVIEW. 


[In preparing this Review Lesson, follow closely the directions given 
with Lesson X.] 


1, TEXT: καὶ τῶν wap’ ἑαυτῷ (1. 1. 5), through Chapter I. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. (a) Open and close vowels, H. 12; G.2.N. (δ) Gamma nasal, 
H. 20; G. 6, 1. (c) Contraction of vowels, H. 37; G. 9, 1, 2, 3. 
(d) Mutes before o, H. 54; G. 16,2. (e) ν and o before other conso- 
nants, H. 55-57; G. 16, 5, 6. (f)v movable, H. 87; 6. 18. 
(g) Enclities, H. 113; 6. 27. 

2. First Declens.: (a) Two classes of feminines, H. 13'7-140; 
G. 37,2. (>) Gen. and dat. sing., H. 140; G 387, 2. (c) Accent, H. 
141 ; G. 25,2. (εν Declens. of πολέτης, H. 145-147; G. 37, 1. 

3. Third Declens, : (a) Nom. sing., H. 168; 6. 46, 2, 3, 4. (b) 
Special rule of accent, H. 172 ; G. 25,3. (ὦ Declens. of φύλαξ, φλέψ, 
Ans, ἐλπίς. γέρων, σῶμα (d) Declens. οἵ ἀνήρ, H. 188 b, 189; G. 57, 
2. (e) Declens. of πόλις, H. 201; G. 53. 

4. Adjectives: (4) Declens. of ἀγαθός, φίλιος, πᾶς, λύων, φιλῶν. 
(5) Comparison, H. 248, 249; G. 71. (c) Formation of adverbs, H. 
257; G. 74. 

5. Pronouns: (a) αὐτός, H. 265; G. 79, 2. (b) ἑαυτοῦ, H. 266; 
G. 80. (¢) ἄλλος. H. 267; G 84,3. (d) οὗτος. H. 272; G. 83. 

6. Verbs: (a) Tenses of the indic., H. 301, 302; G. 90, 1, 9, 
(b) Tense systems, H. 303; G. 92, 4. (c) Mute-, liquid-, and vowel- 
verbs, H. 309; G. 92, 3. (ὦ) The -μὲ form, H. 311; G. 98, 3. 
(6) Formative elements of the verb, H. 8353; G. 93. (/) Infinitive 
endings, H. 381 ; G. 117. (0) First aor. of liquid verbs, H. 431 ; 6. 
110 rr. 2. (h) Second aorists, H. 485 a; G. 110 v. (ὃ Passive 
deponents, H. 49'7; G. 88, 2, n. 

7. (a) Adjective used alone, H. 621; G. 139, 1 and 2, (b) ὁ as 
a demonstrative, H. 654; G. 148. (c) The article with attributives, 








LESSON XX. — REVIEW. 75 


H. 666-670 ; G. 142, 1 and N. 1,2, 3. (ὦ) The article with pronouns, 
H. 673; G. 142, 4. 

8. Accusative: (a) Adverbial, H. 719; G. 160, 2. (h) Double 
object, H. 724; G.164. Genitive : (a) With verbs of ruling, H. 741 ; 
G.171,3. (6) With δέομαι, H. 743 a; G. 172, 2, N. 1. (ὁ With 
verbs of superiority, H. 749; G. 175, 2. (d) With adverbs of place, 
H. 757; G. 182, 2. 

9. Dative: (a) Of the possessor, H. 768; G. 184, 4. (ὁ) Of asso- 
ciation, H. 772; G. 186, N. 1. (ὦ With compound verbs, H. 775; 
G. 187. 

10. Verbs: («) καλῶς ἔχει, H. 810. (b) Medes in final clauses, 
H. 881; G. 215 a, 216. (c) Relative clauses introduced by until, 
H. 921; G. 239, 240. (d) Infinitive used as a noun, H. 959; G. 
262,2. (6) Attributive participles, H. 965,966; G.276,1. (f) Cir- 
cumstantial participle, H. 968, 969; G. 277, 1-6. (g) Gen. absolute, 
H. 970; G. 183. 


3. VOCABULARY. 


VERBS. 


” > a 
. ἄγαμαι. 5. εἴησαν, ἦν, ἦσαν. 9. παρ-έχω. 
. ἀγγέλλω. ). ἐκ-πίπτω. 30. πειράομαι. 
3. ἄγω. . ἐπι-κρύπτω. . περι-γίγνομαι. 
> , > a ΄ , 
. αἰσθάνομαι. 3. ἐπι-μελέομαι. 2, πιέζω. 
. αἰτέω. 9. ἔρχομαι, ἠλθε(ν). . πολιορκέω. 








), ἀξιόω. 

. ἄρχω 

. ἀφ-ίστημι. 
9. ἄχθομαι. 

. βάλλω. 

. ἐκ-βάλλω. 
2. δαπανάω 

. δέομαι. 

. δίδωμι. 


1, ὁ ἀνήρ. 
2. ὁ ἀντιστασιώτης. 


. κατα-λύω. 

2, κελεύω. 

. λανθάνω. 

. νομίζω. 

. οἰκέω. 

. ὁρμάω. 

. παρ-αγγέλλω. 
28. παρα-γίγνομαι. 


NOUNS. 


; κατ-άγω . στρατεΐομαι. 
. συγ-γίγνομαι. 
}. συλ-λέγω. 
. συμ-βάλλω. 
. συμ: βουλεύω. 
. συμ-πράττω. 
. τρέφω. 
. ὠφελέω. 


. ὁ δαρεικός. 
. 6 δασμός. 






































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


19. ὁ φρούραρχος. 


. ἡ δύναμις. 13, ἡ πρόφασις. 
ὁ στρατιώτης. 20). ἡ φυλακή. 


. ἡ ἐπιβουλή. 14. 
. ἡ θάλασσα. 15. ἡ σιλλογή. 21. τὸ χρῆμα. 
. ὁ μήν. 16. ὁ τρόπος 22. τὸ χρῦσίον 
. ὁ μισθός. 17. ἡ τροφή. 23. ἡ χώρα 

. τὸ πρᾶγμα. 18. ὁ φεύγων. 24. ὁ ξένος. 


ADJECTIVES. 

ΕΣ 
. ἄλλος. . ἕκαστος. ὁπόσος. 

» , " ε , 7. « > ΄ 
. ἀπαράσκευος. . ἑκών οὐδείς, οὐδέν. 
3. βέλτιστος. . ἕξ τρεῖς. . πᾶς. 

« , a 

. δισχίλιοι, τετρα- . μύριοι. . πλεῖστος. 


ἰ 
κισχίλιοι. 


ADVERBS. 

. av. . BN. οὐ, οὐκ. 
2. εὐνοϊκῶς. . πρόσθεν. 

3. ἀντιπέρας. }. τὸ ἀρχαῖον. 


PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS. CONJUNCTIONS. 


. ἑαυτοῦ. 1. ἀμφί. 1. πρίν. 

" 6, ὃ, νά “ ev. 2. τέ. 
3. ὅδε. 3. πλήν. 3. ὡς. 

. οἱ 4. ὑπέρ. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) ᾿Επεκρύπτετα τοὺς στρατηγοὺς ὅτι μάλιστα ἐδύνατο. 
(Ὁ) Τὸ ἀρχαῖον ἦσαν δεδομέναι αἱ βέλτισται πόλεις τῷ ἀδελφῷ τοῦ βασιλέως. 
(6) Ὁ μὲν ἤθροιζε δύναμιν τὴν βελτίστην ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοντος ἑαυτῷ τοῦ ἀδελ- 
gov. (d) Αὐτοὺς τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἐν τῇ πόλει βουλευομένους ἠσθάνετο. 

2. Analyze: φυγάς, συνελέγετο, στρατεύματα, ἐνόμιζε, πολεμοῦντα. 

3. Translate : (a) The satrap accordingly went up, when the king 
was happening to be as unprepared as possible. (Ὁ) He announces to as 
many generals as he has in the cities, that they take 300 men as good as 
possible. (c) All the generals were desiring to besiege those in Miletus 
both by land and by sea. (d) If he may be able to have those cities 
instead of the king. (¢) This man contributes money for the support of 
the soldiers. (77) By means of these resources he collected an army of 
two thousand men. 

















LESSON XXI. 


LESSON XXI. 


ANABASIS LL m 1. 


1. NOTES. 


[By using the Vocabulary, pp. 361-387, and with the aid of the 
literal and free translations on pp. 279 and 289, the pupil will master 
the meanings not given for some of the words in the Notes of this and 
the subsequent Lessons. | 

1. ἐ-δόκει, for ἐ-δόκε-ε, cf. ἠσθένει 11. ; from δοκέω ; tense, pers., 
and num. οἵ ἐδόκει 1 

2. πορεύε-σθαι dep., to proceed ; on the ending -σθαι cf. παραγενέσθαι 
XIX. 4. 

3. μέν, on the one hand; used here without a following δέ, so that 
the real intentions of Cyrus are left to the surmises of the reader. On 
the use of μέν... δέ cf. I. 8. 

4. ἐποιεῖτο, mid., for himself; cf. ἐποιεῖτο XII. 

5. ὡς βουλόμενος, as wishing [saying that he wished]; cf. ὡς βουλό- 
μενος XIX. 

6. éx-Bareiv, from ἐκ-βάλλω ; on the theme, cf. é&-€-Barev XIII. ; 
tense here? On the change of ἐξ to ἐκ before consonants, cf. ἐκπεπτω- 
κότας XIII. 

7. τε, enclitic, both; cf. re XI., XVI. Note that here re, imme- 
diately following an accent otherwise grave, makes it acute. 

8. ὅσον ἦν αὐτῷ στράτευμα, quantus erat ei exercitus ; object of 
λαβόντι, taking what army he had ; αὐτῷ dat. of possessor, cf. αὐτῷ XIV., 
XVII.; on ὅσοι = quanti as many as, cf. IV. 

9. συν adday-€-vr-, becoming reconciled ; partic., nom. συναὶ λαγείς 
for guvadAayevrs, cf. ἀτιμασθείς VIII.; aor. pass. from συν-αλλάττω, 
theme αλλαγ, as πράττω X1V., theme πραγ. On the pass. suffix θε-, 
here e-, ς΄. ἀτιμασθείς VIII. 

10. πρὸς τοὺς οἴκοι, toward, with, the [adversaries|] at-home. Note 
the omission of the substantive. 

11. ἀπο-πέμψαι (= ἀπο-πεμπ-σ-αι), cf. κατα-λῦ-σ-και XVIII, 1st aor. 
infin. act. Note y=ats. 
































ene err 


SS ees 











78 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


12. ὃ εἶχε στράτευμα, quem habebat exercitum, obj. of ἀπο- 
πέμψαι ; 6 rel. pron, neut. sing. ; masc. és. 

13. προ-ει-στή-κ-ει, praefuerat, was in command of ; pluperf. ind. 
act. from προΐστημι, cf. κατέστη VI. Note the reduplication e-, cf. ἀφ- 
ειστήκεσαν XII. ; on the reg. redup. cf. δε-δομέναι XII., ἐκ- πε-πτω-κότας 
XILL.; on « (= xa) the perf. suffix cf. ἐκπεπτω-κ- ότιας XIII. 

14. τοὺς ἄλλους πλήν, the others, excepting, i.e. all, excepting. 

15. φυλάττειν from φυλάττω, theme φυλακ ; force of ending -ew? 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. δοκεῖ = it seems, it seems best. 

2. The infin. mid. ends in -σθαι. 

3. ὡς gives to the participle the idea of a merely possible reality, 
like the Lat. tamquam, Eng. as. 

4. ἐξ becomes ἐκ before consonants. 

5. ‘the 180 aor. infin. act. ends in o-ae ; the 2d aor. infin. act. 
ends in -εῖν. 

6. An enclitic changes a preceding grave accent to an acute. 

7. In Greek, as in English, a relative clause may be the object of a 
verb. 

8. θε- is the 180 passive suffix ; ε-, the 2d passive suffix. 

9. The article, followed by an attributive adjective, or the equivalent 
of an attributive adjective, may modify an omitted substantive which is 
easily supplied from the context. 

10. Verb stems in -π unite r with o-a, Ist aor. suffix, forming y-a. 

11. Verbs in -rrw have their themes ending in -y or -κ. 

12. -x-a is the perf. act. suffix. 

13. ἵστημι ‘reduplicates in the pluperf. by prefixing εἷ- to the 
theme, ora. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


I. Declens. ofAvOds . ... =. H. 548. G. 69 (τιθείς). 
2. Infinitives and participles of λύω H. 313. G. 95, 1. 
&. Reduplication. . ... . . H. 368-65. G. 101, 1,3. 


4. The Ist perfect stem. . .. . H. 446. G. 110, 4 ὁ. 














LESSON XXI. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἡ ἀκρόπολις, citadel. 9. ξενικός, mercenary. 

ἄνω (cf. ava, up), upward, 10. ὅσος (quantus), how great. 
βαρβαρικός, barbarian. παντάπασιν, wholly. 

δοκεῖ, it seems. πορεύομαι, I advance. 
‘EAAnukds, Grecian. mpo-iotnut, I set in charge. 
ἐνταῦθα, there. . συν-αλλάττω, I reconcile. 
ἤδη, now, at length. φυλάττω, 1 guard. 


ἥκω, 1 am come. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Decline: αὐτῷ, τούτους, συναλλαγέντι. ἀκρόπολις. 

2. Translate: (4) Καὶ γὰρ ἐτύγχανον καὶ οὗτοι οἱ αὐτοὶ τῷ βασιλεῖ 
ξένοι ὄντες. (b) Καὶ πιέζων τοὺς οἴκοι ἀντιστασιώτας περιγίγνεται αὐτῶν. 
(0) Δοκεῖ δὴ τοὺς μὲν ἐκβάλλειν τοὺς δ᾽ ἀποκτείνειν. (4) ᾿Ανέβαινον εἰς 
τὴν πόλιν ἔχοντες ὃ ἦν αὐτοῖς στράτευμα. (6) ᾿Απέπεμψε πρὸς Κῦρον ὅσον 
ἦν αὐτῷ στράτευμα. 

3. Translate: (a) I will now advance upward with my (= the) 
friends into the province of the satrap. (Ὁ) The soldiers were wishing 
to drive out the conspirators (= the conspiring) wholly from (ée) the 
kingdom. (c) They were collecting accordingly, as against these men, 
both the mercenary and the Greek (army). (d) He will come (ἥκω), 
taking what army he has. (6) All (οἱ ἄλλοι) were slandering the king, 
except as many as were friends to him. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Elision, 2. Enclitics. 3. Grave accent before an enclitic. 
4. Themes of verbs in τλλω, -rr@. 5. First and second passive suffixes, 
6. Formation of the perf. stem. 7. The 1st aor. of liquid verbs. 8. ‘Qs 
with the participle. 9. Reduplication. 10. Uses of the aorist parti- 
ciple. 11. The genitive after mpo-iotnut. 12. Words in the attributive 
position. 






































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XXII. 


ANABASIS I. π| 2 and 3 


1, NOTES. 


1. ἐκάλε-σ-ε" (a) from καλέω; on the form, cf. ἐποίησε III.; note, 
final ε of the theme does not here change to yw before a consonant ; 
()) ἐκάλεσα I called, so ἔλῦσα I loosed; (c) the pres. (Adéw), fut. 
(Avow), aor. (€Adoa), perf. (λέλυκα) are the principal parts of the verb 
in the active voice. 

2. τοὺς Μίλητον πολιορκοῦντας, the [men] besieging Miletus ; note 
the omission of the substantive. 

3. ὑπο-σχ-ό-μενο-ς, promising: (a) from ὑπ-ισχνέο-μαι dep.; ὑπ-έ- 
σχε-το, he promised ; tense of the partic.? (6) The rest of the sentence 
gives his promise ; stated in his own words it would be: “ {1 shall suc- 
ceed in those matters with reference to which I am marching, I will not cease 
wntil I bring you back home.” This would be called a future condition, 
vividly stated, with probability of fulfilment ; in the conditional clause 
ἐάν with the subjunctive would be used, and the future indicative in the 
conclusion 

4. εἰ καλῶς xata-mpdg-ee(v), if well he accomplished, t.e. if he suc- 
ceeded: (a) καλ-ῶς adv., cf. εὐνοϊκ-ῶς X1.; (Ὁ) κατα-πράττω, 7 accomplish ; 
theme mpay; here aor. opt. 3d sing.; on € = xs, ys, cf. ἀπέδειξε IV. ; 
note the personal ending -ece(v); cf. however ἐπιβουλεύοι VI., λάβοι XI. ; 
(c) the words of the promise are not stated directly (3 δ), but in- 
directly, i.¢. in the oratio obliqua ; note that ἐάν with the subjunctive 
has accordingly become εἰ with the optative. 

5. ἐφ᾽ a, for ἐπὶ ἅ; note that after the loss of ἐ (elisio ) m is 
brought before a rough breathing; hence changed to @, cf. ἀφ- 
exvoiro LX. 

6. μὴ πρόσθεν παύσε-σθαι, se non prius cessurum esse, that he 
would not (sooner) cease, stop: (a) παύω, I stop; mid. I stop myself, cease ; 
παύσεσθαι fut. inf. mid.; -σε-, fut. suffix; (6) note, the fut. ind. of the 


direct discourse (3 δ) has become fut. infin., and od becomes μή. 











LESSON XXIL 81 


7. πρὶν κατ-αγάγτοι: (a) from κατ-άγω; here 2d aor. opt., cf. λά- 
Bor ΧΙ. ; note, the 2d aor, of ἄγω has the theme doubled, instead of ics 
simplest form; (6) this subordinate clause also, like εἰ καταπράξειεν, 
has its verb in the optative, where πρὶν ἄν with the subjunctive would 
have been used in the oratio recta, cf. πρὶν ἂν συμβουλεύσηται XVIII. 
Notes 4 d. 

8. of δὲ ἐπείθο-ντο ; cf. ὁ δὲ πείθε-ται VII. 

9. παρ-ῆσαν, were beside, arrived; cf. παρών 111]., παρεῖναι II., 
ἦσαν XI1.; on the accent, cf ἀπ-ῆλθε VIII. 

10. τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων λαβὼν, taking the [soldiers] from the cities ; 
note the omission of the substantive στρατιώτας after πόλεων, ς 2; 
(a) ἐκ τῶν πόλεων, attrib. posit., as παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ XI.; (Ὁ) ἐκ for ἐν on 
account of the idea of separation in λαβών ; cf παρὰ βασιλέως 1X. for 
mapa βασιλεῖ. 

11. παρῆν, on the meaning, form, and accent, cf. 9. 

12. τῶν στρατευομένων, of the being-in-the-army, t.e. of (among) those 
Jighting ; note the omission of the substantive ; ¢f. 2, 10. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. καλέω does not change ε to η before consonants. 
2. The pres., fut., aor., and perf. act. are four of the principal parts 
of the verb. 
3. The substantive is sometimes omitted after words which modify 
it attributively. 
4. The Greek, like the Latin, has a direct and an indirect discourse. 
5. A vivid future condition with probability is expressed by ἐάν 
with the subjunctive in the condition, and the future indicative in the 
conclusion. 
6. y and « unite with -σα, Ist aor. suffix, forming ξα. 
7. -ee(v) marks the Ist aor. opt. act. 3d sing. 
8. π. x, or τ, brought by elision before a rough breathing, is made 
rough. 
py takes the place of od with infinitives. 
ἄγω has a reduplicated theme in the 2d aor. 
γάρ, like the Lat. enim, does not stand first in its sentence. 
πιστεύω. I trust, is followed by the dative case. 
The accent of a verb does not precede the augment 
The partitive genitive exists in Greek as in Latin. 
6 


I --- :9π-- ε--- 


ἘΞ ΕΞ ΞΞ ae Ὄπ πα 





ee Ξ sarees 


RS 





«τς SPORE Soe ee eee 



































INDUCTIVE GREEK METIIOD. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


τε ἀν rte mere, My py Ab 

. The variable vowel of the verb. . H. 310. G. 113 and 3. 
a Pee, toe. act. οἱ Ade « , . st 2 . 814. . 96. 

. Declension of the relative pron, . Η, 275. . 86. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ὁ γυμνής, light-armed soldier. 10. ὁ πελταστής, targeteer. 

ἡδέως, gladly. 11. πιστεύω. J trust. 

καλέω, I call. 12. ὑπ-ισχνέομαι, I promise. 
καλός, beautiful. 13. ὡς (with numerals), circa, 
καλῶς, beautifully, well. about. 

κατ-άγω, I lead down, back. 14. τριᾶκόσιοι, 300 

τὰ ὅπλα, arms. 15. πεντᾶκόσιοι, 500. 


πάρ-ειμι, I arrive, am present. 16. χίλιοι, 1,000. 
παύω, I stop; mid. I pause. 17. μύριοι, 10,000. 


ΘΝ Pe 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Analyze : ἐκάλεσε, πολιορκοῦντας, φυγάδας, καταπρᾶξειεν, παύ- 
σεσθαι, ἐπίστευον. 

2. Translate: (a) κάλει δ᾽ οὖν τοὺς ἀμφὶ τὴν πόλιν στρατευο- 
μένους. (b) νόμιζε δή. εἰ καλῶς καταπράξειεν ἐφ᾽ ἃ τοὺς ἄνδρας συν. λεγε. 
βασιλεύσειν ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνου. (Cc) ᾿Ἐβουλεύετο ὡς ταύτην τὴν δύναμιν οἴκαδε 
καταγάγοι. (4) Οἱ δὲ στρατιῶται ἐπίστευον τῷ στρατηγῷ καὶ ἡδέως τε καὶ 
ἑκόντες ἐπείθοντο. (4) Καὶ αὐτούς, τὰ ὅπλα λαβόντας, ἐκέλευεν εἰς τὴν 
πόλιν παρεῖναι. 

2. Translate: (a) And the guest-friends came (πάρειμι) unto the 
king, having money for the support of the soldiers. (+) And 3,000 men 
in truth were present. (6) In order that he might have 10,000 darics. 
(7) If the 500 targeteers would be friendly to him. (6) And Socrates 
was among those fizhting in the plain. 














LESSON XXIII. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Attributives used substantively. 2. The adverbial ending. 
3. Principal parts of the verb. 4. Infinitives and participles of Ata. 
5. The accent of παρῆν. 6. Formation of the perfect stem. 7. Theme 
of verbs ending in -λλω, -rrw. 8, First and second pass. suffix. 
9. Principal parts (act.) of κελεύω, ποιέω. 10. Augment and redupli- 
cation of ai-. 11. Principal parts of airéw. 12. Declension of πολέτης, 
πελταστής. 13. Ἐάν with the subjunctive in the indirect discourse 
after secondary tenses. 14. Position of γάρ. 15. Case with πιστεύω. 
16. καί... καί. 17. Declens. of Ons, γυμνής 





LESSON XXIII. 


ANABASIS I. π. 4 and 5. 


1. NOTES. 


1. ἀφίκοιντο: from ἀφ-ικνέο-μαι, cf. IX.; note, « augments to 7. 
Theme and tense of the verb ? 

2. κατα-νοή-σᾶς, when he perceived : on the form cf. κινδυνεύσᾶς VIIT.; 
principal parts, κατανοέω, κατανοή-σω, κατε-νόη-σα, κατα-νε-νόη-κα. 

3. μείζονα ἡγη-σά-μενος, and because he thought . .. to be greater : 
(a) μείζων, greater; μέγας, great; note the irreg. comparative, and cf. 
πρεσβύτερος I.: (Ὁ) from ἡγέ-ομαι, dep. I lead, think; fut. ἡγή-σο-μαι, 
aor. ἥγη-σά μην ;1 note, ἡ here augments without change, as ὦ in 
ὠφέλει XVI. 

4. 7 ἐδύνατο τάχιστα, by what way he could most quickly: cf. ὡς 
μάλιστα ἐδύνατο XI.; 7 the rel. pron. dat. sing. fem., 86. ὁδῷ, way ; 
note, the dat. here denotes manner ; cf. the Lat. qua via, by what way 
or means ; how. 

5. ἤκου-σε Τισσαφέρνους, heard from Tissuphernes : (a) from ἀκούω, 
cf. the Eng. acoustics ; (Ὁ) account for the η and for the σ. 


1 -unv ending of Ist sing. in the past tenses ind. mid., so ἐλύσάμην, J loosed 


Sor myself. 


Sef τ τς one-term 
Arte See 








ee Se τατς σαςς 


ea, 
τ τες τι δ 


a 





SER GE SE Ale toe eee 




















84 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


6. ots εἴ-ρη-κα, whom T have mentioned: (a) εἴρηκα classed as the 
perf. of φη-μί, I say, Lat. fari; (b) -«a, the perf. suttix, as in λέλυκα ; 
note the irreg. redup. εἴ- ; cf. προειστήκει XXI. 

7. ὡρμᾶτο ἀπὸ Σάρδεων, was setting out from Sardis: (a) ef. ὁρμώ- 
μενος XVI.; ἃ for ae, as in ἐπειρᾶτο Χ]111. ; (Ὁ) Σάρδεων, declined 
like πόλις, plur. 

8. σταθμοὺς τρεῖς, three days’ journey; acc. plur.; note, the dis- 
tance or extent of space is expressed by the acc.; cf. the Lat. usage. 

9. τὸ εὖρος : subj. of ἦν, was, understood ; not 2d decl., but 3d neut., 
as in Lat. corp-us, corpor-is, not corp-i. 

10. ἐπ-ῆν, from ἔπ-ειμι ; cf. παρὴν XXII. ν. 11. . 

11. ἐ-ζευγ-μένη, joined: (a) from the theme ¢evy, ζυγ, Lat. jug in 
jungo, 1 join; (6) perf. partic. mid. ; ¢f. προ-ει--στήκει XXI., and note, 
the redup. is not as it is in λέλυκα, when the verb begins with a double 
consonant (¢= ὃς) or two consonants; (6) cf. λέλυκα, note, the perf. 
mid. is formed without the suffix κα-, so λε-λυμένη, λέ-λυ-μαι. 

12. sdoi-os, by means of .. . boats; note, the dat. here denotes 


means ; cf. 4. 
2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The theme of ἀφ-ικνέομαι is ix. 
2. « augments to 7, a to ἡ, o to w ἢ remains unchanged. 


3. νοέω, ἡγέομαι lengthen ε to ἡ before consonants, but καλέω X XIT. 
does not. 
4 The regular comparative ending is -repo-; but μέγας forms the 
comparative μείζων. 
«μην ending Ist sing., where the 3d sing. is -ro; 3d plur. -vro. 
The person from whom one hears is denoted by the gen. case. 
εἴρηκα classed as the perf. of φημί 
ἁἀ ὦ ΞΞ 6, ae=—4, d-¢ = ἃ. 
. The means and the manner of an action are denoted by the dat. 
10. Extent of space is denoted by the accusative. 
11. Nowns in -os are, some 2d decl. masc.; others, 3d decl. neut. 
12. Verbs beginning with a double consonant or two consonants 
reduplicate by omitting the consonant and prefixing ἐ only. 
13. κα-, the perf. suffix, does not appear in the middle voice. 


1 The perf. of ἵστημι is ἕστηκα. It is in the pluperf. that εἷ- appears. 














LESSON XXIIL. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


- Declens. of yepipa . . . . . H. 135. G. 37, 1, end. 
2. Declens, of δαίμων. . . . . H. 184, G. 50. 
3. Declens. of μείζων (G. ἡδίων) . H. 236. G. 72,2, nN. 1 
4. Conjug. of Avw in pres., fut., im- 


perf., aor, ind. act. . H. 314-316. G. 96. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἀκούω, I hear, . μέγας, μείζων, great, greater. 

. ἡ γέφυρᾶ, bridge. . ἡ Tapacayyn,? league. 

. διά (with gen.), through. - παρα-σκευάζω,8 I prepare. 

. εἴκοσι(ν), twenty. . 7) παρασκευή, preparation. 

. εἴρηκα (φημί), have said, . τὸ πλέθρον," plethron. 
mentioned. - τὸ πλοῖον, boat, vessel. 

. ἐξ-ελαύνω, I march.) - ὁ morapds,® river. 

. 6 σταθμός, stopping-place, day’s 


. ἑπτά, Septem, seven. journey. 


. ἔπ-ειμι, ἐπ-εῖναι, am upon. 


. τὸ εὖρος, breadth, width. 
10. ζεύγ-νῦμι, 1 join. . ταχέως, τάχιστα, quickly, most 
11. ἡγέομαι, I lead, think. quichly. 

12. 6 ἱππεύς, horseman. - ὡς, as, in order that, to (prepo- 
13. κατα-νοέω, I observe. sition). 


- 6 στόλος, equipment. 


Principal parts of Avo: Ave, λύσω, ἔλῦσα, λέλυκα, λέλυμαι,5 EAVOnv." 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Analyze: ἀφΐκοντο, κατανοήσας, ἤκουσε, ὡρμᾶτο. 

2. Translate: (a) Οἱ μὲν οὖν στρατηγοί, λαβόντες χρήματα εἰς τὴν 
τροφὴν τῶν στρατιωτῶν, παρῆσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν. (0) Ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅπως, 
ὁπόσοι στρατηγοὶ εἴησαν, ἑαυτῷ εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν. (Cc) Ἦσαν δὲ καὶ οὗτοι 


1 Used with reference to the general, not the soldiers. 

2 Equal to about 5} kilometers (3 English miles). 

ὃ C/. ἀπαρασκευότατον XI. * About 30.8 meters (101 feet). 

§ Cf. the English hippo-potamus, river-horse. 

6 Cf. Notes 11, c. 7 Aor. ind. pass, 1st sing. ; ¢f. ἠγάσ-θη XVI. 





















































86 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


τῶν τῷ βασιλεῖ ἐπιβουλευομένων. (i) Κατανοησᾶς δὴ τοὺς τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα 
βουλενομένους, ἀνέβη ὡς βασιλέα. 

3. Translate: (a) But when those hoplites arrived, the commander 
thought Cyrus had made (aor. inf.) preparation against him(self). 
(c) He heard from those (= the) living in the city, [that] Cyrus was 
marching through the provinces of the king. (c) And he destroyed 
(καταλύω) that bridge. (d) He desired the same bridge to be de- 
stroyed., 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY 


1. Principal parts of the verb. 9. Quantity of ¢ in ddikovro. 
3. Quantity of the 3d a in κατανοήσας. 4. Different uses of ds. 5. Kx- 


planation of 7 in 9 ἐδύνατο. 6. Case with διά, = through. 7. Extent 
of space. 8. Formation of perf. stem act.; mid. 9. Declension of 


οὗτος, ἡγησάμενος, παρασκευή, ἱππεύς, ἔχων, πλοῖον. 10. Uses of the 
dative. 11. The final vowel in the Ist decl. 12. Nom. sing. of liquid 
nouns in the 3d decl. 13. The variable vowel of the verb, 





LESSON XXIV. 
ANABASIS I. π. 6 and 7. 


1. NOTES. 


1. δια-βάς, going through, crossing (this river) : δι-έ-βη, he crossed ; 
of. av-€ Bn, he went up V., so dva-Bas, going up: (a) from δια-βαίνω, 
theme Ba; (b) Bas = Ba-vr-s, cf λύσᾶς = λυσαντς ; (c) tense here ? 
(δ on the declens., cf. πᾶς XII. Gram. Less. 

2. €v-a, one; nom. εἷς for ἕν-ς, 3d decl.; -a as in ἄρχοντα V. 

3. εὐδαίμον a καὶ μεγάλην, prosperous and larye: (a) nom. εὐδαίμων, 
stem εὐδαιμον ; ()) nom. μέγας, fem. μεγάλη ; ef. XXIII. Vocab, 

4. épew-e(v): from μένω, Lat. man-eo, here Ist aor.; on the 
Ist aor. of liquid verbs ¢f. παρ-ήγγειλε XII. 

5. ἡμέρᾶς ἑπτά, throughout seven days. Note, duration of time, like 
extent of space, is denoted by the ace. case ; cf. σταθμούς XXIII. 

6. ἧκ-ε, arrived ; imperf. of ἥκω, of. XXI, Note, ἡ augments 
without change; cf. ἡγέομαι XXIII. 














LESSON XXIV. 87 


7. Κύρῳ βασίλεια ἦν: (a) on the dat. cf. ἦν αὐτῷ XIV.; (b) βασί- 
λειᾶ, royal abodes (not βασιλεία, kingdom) ; 2d decl. neut. plur. ; (c) ἦν, 
was, sing. ; note the subj. is plur.; the verb is regularly sing. when the 
subject is neut. plur. 

8. γυμνά-σαι βούλ-οιτο, whenever (=?) he might wish to take exer- 
cise: (a) aor. infin., cf. κατα-λῦσαι XVIII.; from γυμνάζω, theme 
yupvad ; 80 drivdtw VIIL., theme ariwad ; here γυμνάσαι is for yupvad-ca; 
note, ἃ lingual mute drops out before ς, cf. φυγάς for φυγωὸς XV.; 
on a lingual mute before another lingual mute, ef. ἀτιμασθείς VILL. 
(ὁ) SovrAotro opt. as in ἀφικνοῖτο IX. ; -orro, ending of the opt. middle, 
corresponds to the active ending -o.; cf. λάβοι XI. 

9. διὰ μέσου τοῦ παραδείσου, through the middle of the park. Note 
that μέσου stands before the art., ἐς ὁ. in the pred. position. 

10. εἰσιν, sunt, are: like re an enclitic, throwing its accent (εἰσίν) 
on the preceding word. Note, a final circumflex is not altered thereby. 

11. Κελαινῶν : gen. plur. takes the place of an appositive with 
πόλεως. ('f. City of New York. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Baivw, theme Ba; Bas is for Bavrs, and is declined like πᾶς. 
2. eis, one, is for ἐν-ς. 
3. Nouns whose stems end in τὸν form the nominative by length- 
ening o to o. 
4. In the Ist aor. of liquid verbs ¢ in the theme becomes et. 
5. Duration of time is denoted by the accusative case. 
6. Verbs beginning with a long vowel augment without change, 
except that @ generally becomes η. 
7. A neuter plural subject has ἃ singular verb. 
8. Verb themes which end in a lingual mute lose it before s. 
9. The optative is used in relative clauses which have the force of 
a condition, when the main verb denotes past time. 
10. -o-ro is the ending opt. middle, corresponding to the active oc ; 
οίμην is the ending, Ist pers., if -ocro is 3d; of. Obs. 5, XXIII. 
11. μέσος (when it means middle of) takes the predicate position, 
like ὅδε and ἐκεῖνος. 
12. εἰσίν, like τέ, is an enciitic. 
13. A final circumflex is not affected by an enclitic. 


























INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declens. of εὐδαίμων. . . . . . H. 285. 
Declens. of péyas. . . . ε - - . 947. 
. Conjug. of λύω in the perf. act., perf. 


mid., aor. pass., indicative Η. 317-319. 
Duration of time; extent of space . H. 720. 
The imperfect tense . Η. 830. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἄγριος,ἷ wild. . 10. ὁ ἵππος,δ horse. 

. τὰ βασίλεια," royal abodes. 11. μένω, 1 remain. 
δια-βαίνω, 1 go through, cross. 12. μέσος.δ middle. 

. εἷς, One. 13. oixovpevos,’ populous. 

. εἰσί(ν), sunt, (they) are. 14. ὀκτώ. octo, eight. 
evdainwyr,® prosperous. 15. ὁ παράδεισος," park. 

. ἡ ἡμέρα," day. 16. ἡ πηγή. source. 

. θηρεύω, I hunt. 17. πλήρης, full. 

. τὸ θηρίον, wild beast. 18. ῥέω, flow. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Decline: ἐκεῖνος, ὅς. ἥ 6, ἡμέρᾶ. μέσος, πηγή. 

2. Translate: (a) ᾿Ἐξελαύνω ἀπὸ τῆς θαλάττης εἰς τὴν Σάρδεις πόλιν. 
(Ὁ) Ὁπότε aripdoa τὸν βασιλέα βούλοιτο, συνέπραττεν αὐτῷ ἡ μήτηρ. 
(c) Διὰ μέσης τῆς πόλεως ῥεῖ ποταμὸς μέγας. (d) Τοῦτον τὸν ποταμὸν 
διέβη τῇ μεγάλῃ γεφύρᾷ. 

3. Analyze: διαβάς, ἐξελαύνει, οἰκουμένην, ἔμεινεν, ἧκε, ἔχων. 

4. ‘Translate: (a) I have said [that] Cyrus has a large force. 
(5) The army marched® through that prosperous country eight days’ 
journey. (c) But this river flows from large springs. (d) I heard 
[that] the younger brother was marching against the older brother. 
(0) That city is large and prosperous, and full of both (τέ) gardens and 


royal abodes. 


1 Cf. Lat. agr-estis, wild. 2 Cf. βασιλεύς, βασιλεία, βασιλεύω. 
8 Having kindly deities: εὖ, well; δαίμων (Eng. demon), spirit, deity. 

4 Cy. Eng. eph-emeral. δ Cf. Eng. hippo-drome. 

6 Cf. Meso-potamia, between rivers. 7 Cf. οἴκοι, at home; oixéw. 

8 Cf. Eng. Paradise. 9 Use πορεύομαι. 














LESSON ΧΧΥ. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Themes of Baiva, τυγχάνω, ἀγγέλλω, ἵστημι, βάλλω, ἀλλάττω; 
2. Review of the conjugation of λύω. 3. Formatiun of the nominative 
of stems in -avyr, -evr. 4. Lingual mutes before σ᾽; before lingual 
mutes. 5. Principal parts of λύω, κελεύω, αἰτέω. 6. The liquids, 
7. Uses of the pres., imperf., aorist. 8. The form ἐθήρενον. 9. De- 
clension of πᾶς, διαβάς. 10. Position of μέσος. 11. Enclitics. 





LESSON XXV. 


ANABASIS I. i 8 and 9. 


1. NOTES. 


1. ἔστι, Lat. es-t, is: (a) subj. βασίλεια ; on the sing. verb with 
a plur. subj., cf. βασίλεια ἦν XXIV.; (b) note the forms met with, — 
εἰμί, εἰσί(ν), ἦν, ἦσαν, ἔσται, εἴησαν. 

2. ὑπό, Lat. sub, under: here with the dat., denoting place where ; 
cf. the dat. with ἐν; on ὑπό with the gen., cf. ὑπὸ ἀντιστασιωτῶν XVII. 

3. ἐμ-βάλλει : from ἐμ (= ἐν) βάλλω ; On ν before consonants, cf. συλ- 
λαμβάνει VII., συμ-βουλεύσηται XVIII. ; meaning of δια-βάλλει 1 

4. ἐστί(ν), enclitic, like εἰσίν XXIV. ᾧ 7. Note, its accent is thrown 
on the ultima of εὖρος ; on a final circumflex before an enclitic cf. αὐτοῦ 
εἰσιν XXIV. 


5. εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε ποδῶν, (the breadth was) of twenty-five feet : 
(2) note the use of the gen. in expressions of measure ; cf. the Lat. 
usage; (b) ποδῶν, nom. πούς, Lat. pes, ped-is. 

6. ἐκ-δεῖρ-αι, to flay) (skin), i.e. (it is said that Apollo) flayed: 
from ἐκ-δέρω, Ist aor. infin. act.; cf. xara-Ad-cas XVIII. On the for- 
mation of the aor. of liquid verbs, cf. ἔμεινεν XXIV., παρήγγειλε XII. 


1 The aor. infin, with λέγεται here corresponds to the aor. ind. ἐξέδειρε, ἐκρέμασε 
of direct discourse. The translation of the aor. infin. by the Eng. perf. infin. is 


Se a a ne sh oe nee 























00 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


7. νική σᾶς ἐρίζοντά οἱ, when he conquered (on conquering) him, 
Marsyas, who contended with him, Apollo: (a) from νικάω; note, a be- 
comes ἡ before oa; on -σᾶς, cf. κινδυνεύσας VIII.: (L) ἐρίζοντα, theme 
pid; so fut. ἐρίσω, aor. ἔρισα ; cf. γυμνάσαι XXIV.; (c) oi, for of, sibi, 
fo, with, himself; dat. sing., ef. Τισσαφέρνει XV.; note the loss of accent ; 
οἷ is an enclitic, and throws its accent on ἐρίζοντα, cf. δοθῆναι of X1V., 
where of keeps its accent for emphasis. 

8. κρεμά σαι, to hang: on the form, cf. ἐκ-δεῖρ-αι 6, καταλῦσαι 
XVILI.; κρεμα, theme of κρεμά-ννῦμι, cf. Seix-vipe IV., theme δεικ ; 
Cevy-vipe XXIII., theme fevy, cf. foot-note, page 89. 

9. ἥττη θείς : from ἡττά-ο-μαι; on -θεις cf. ἀτιμασ-θείς VIII. 

10. ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχϊίλίους, about (the) 2,000: note, ἀμφί has the 
saine force with numerals as ὡς, εἰς XXII. ; note the use of the article 
with approximate rownd numbers, — unnecessary in translation. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Neuter plural rouns take a singular verb. 

2. ὑπό with the dative denotes the place under which, as ἐν denotes 
the place in which. 

3. ν becomes » before labial mutes. 


4. A word which has the circumflex accent on the penult takes an 
acute on the last syllable when it is followed by an enclitic. 


5. Measure may be denoted by the genitive case. 
A proparoxytone takes an acute on the ultima before an enclitic. 


The theme of verbs in -νῦμε is found by dropping the -»νῦμι. 


6 

7 

8. The article is used with approximate round numbers. 
9 


Verbs in -aw change a to η when it comes before a consonant. 


10. The aor. act. infin. is accented on the penult: καταλῦσαι. 


ἐκδεῖραι. κρεμάσαι. 


ulways to be discouraged; the Eng. perf. infin. should be reserved for the Greek 
perf. infin If necessary, let the pupil give a free rendering ; thus it is far better 
to translate ‘it is said that Apollo flayed and hung up,” than “ Apollo is said to 
have flayed,” etc. So with aorist circumstantial participles; let the pupil always 
indicate by his translation what circumstance the participle denotes. Where the 
participle indicates preliminary action, let him render it by the indicative : 6. g. 
tu take men and come, not having taken men, to come. 














LESSON XXV. 91 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


lL, meets, 5. « ¢ BE ὙΠ κι Tie ἃ 27, 28, 1, 2, 3. 
2. Declens. of πούς. . Η. 172. G. 46, 4, n. 1, end. 
3. Declens. of γένος. . H. 190, 191. G. 52, 2. 

4. Declens. of veavias . H. 148. G. 37 rapids. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. τὸ ἄντρον, cave. 15. ἡ μάχη, battle. 
2. ἀπο xwpew, I retreat. 16. vixaw, I conquer. 
3. ὁ ἀριθμός, number. 17. ὅθεν, whence. 
. τὸ δέρμα, hide, skin. 18. οἰκοδομέω, I build. 
ex δέρω, I flay, skin. 19. ὀκτακόσιοι, eight hundred. 
ἡ Ἑλλάς, Greece. 20. ὅτε, ἐπεί, when. 
ἐμ- βάλλω, flow into. 21. περί, about. 
ἡ ἐξέτασις, examination. 22. 6 πούς, foot. 
ἐρίζω, 1 contend. ἡ σοφία, wisdom, musical 
. ἐρυμνός, fortified. skill, 
. ἐστί, est, is. . σύμπας, all together, cunctus. 
2. nrrdopa, I am defeated. - ὁ τοξότης, bowman. 
. κρεμάννῦμι, I hang. . τριάκοντα, thirty. 
. λέγω, I say. . ὑπό (with dat.), under. 


τα σ᾿ ον 


— μ- 
oe <> οὐ 


— μ' 
Hm Co 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Analyze: ῥεῖ, ἐκδεῖραι, ἀπεχώρει, ἡττηθείς. 

2. Translate: (a) Ἔστι δὲ καὶ μεγάλη ἀκρόπολις ἐν τῇ πόλει, ὅθεν 
οἱ τοξόται ὡρμήσαντο. (Ὁ) Ὁ Μαρσύας λέγεται τῷ ᾿Απόλλωνι ἐρίσαι 
περὶ σοφίας. (6) Τῶν da δρῶν ἐξέτασιν ποιήσω ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ τῷ μεγάλῳ. 

3. Translate: (a) The skin, however, is said to be [that] of Mar- 
syas. (Ὁ) Those springs are said to empty into the Maeander, a large 
river. (c) There the satrap remained twenty-seven days. (d) That 
large acropolis is full of all the best men of Greece. (e) Xerxes built 
a large and beautiful palace over the source of the river Marsyas. 
(f) The forces of the king assembled in the park whenever he wished 
to make a review of them. (g) It was said that the skin which Apollo 
hung up in the cave belonged to Marsyas. (hk) He has parks which are 
full of beautiful animals; these (= which] I believe he hunts whenever 
he wishes to exercise his horse. 





SS Se Se 


See δ σον 











INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1, Διὰ τοῦτο : διά with the gen. 2. Construction of the dat. in 
ἡττηθεὶς τῇ μάχῃ. 3. Principal parts of vicdw, ποιζω. 4. Enclitics : 
enclitics and proclitics contrasted. 5. ὑπό with the gen.; with the 
dat. 6. Final a, first declension. 7, Theme of ἐρίζω ; of κρεμάννζμι. 
8. Expressions of measure. 9. ν before other consonants. 10. Position 
of the appositive. 11. Construction with verbs of fighting. 12. De- 
clension of τὸ δέρμα. 


LESSON XXVI. 


ANABASIS 1. π. 10-14. 


1. NOTES. 


1. ἐν ais [ἡμέραιςἾ, in which [days]. τὰ Λύκαια,1 the Lycaean [sacri- 
fices}: on the attrib. used without its substant. cf. ἐκπεπτωκότας XIII, 
τὸ βαρβαρικόν XXII. ἔ-θη-κε: aor. ind. from ri-On-ps, theme Oe or θη, 
cf. δια-τι-θείς 1X.; note, «- irreg. takes the place of o- (cf. ἔλυσε) ; 
fut. θήσω, perf. τέθηκα. 

2. ἦσαν : plur., although the subj. ἄθλα is newt. plur.; cf. XXIV. 
nN. 7. The verb here agrees in number with the pred. χρυσαῖ, golden 


(cf. the Eng. chrys-alis), from χρυσοῦς. 

3. ἐθεώρει, viewed ; cf. the Eng. theory; on the form, cf. ἀπ-ε- 
χώρει XXV.§9 πρὸς. .. χώρᾳ, in the direction of, etc.; for πρός 
with the accus., implying motion, cf. πρὸς Κῦρον XII. ad fin. Misia: 
adj, Mysian, nom. Μύσιος. 

4. l-d-vr-es, e-u-nt-es, going: pres. part. from εἶμε, theme ¢, Lat. ire, 
nom. sing. ἐών. ἀπ-ήτουν : from ἀπ-αιτέω, cf. ἐξ-αιτησαμένη VII.; ἢ, aug- 
ment of ai, cf. ἠσθάνετο XIV. ; -odvr- for -éovr-, cf. πολεμούντων XV.; 
on the ending -ov, cf. ἐποίουν X1X., ἐπίστευον XXII. 

5. δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος (for dviaduevos), was evident being annoyed, 
i.e. was evidently annoyed. Note, a-o contracts to . 


1 Sacrifices in honor of Zeus, such as those performed on Mount Lycaeum in 
Arcadia each spring (as expiatory offerings for the sins of the previous year). 











LESSON XXVI. 93 


6. πρὸς τοῦ τρόπου, in accord with the character ; μὴ ἀπο-δι-δό ναι, 
not to give: (a) note the use of μή, not, of μὴ παύσεσθαι ΧΧ!!., N. 6; 
(ὁ) pres. infin. οἵ ἀπο-δίδωμε, theme do ; note, the infin. in -vaz, like the 
aor. infin. in -σαι, is accented on the penult ; cf ex-Ocipa. κρεμάσαι XXV_; 
verbs in -ye «lo not have the pres. infin. in -ew (Avo, Ave), but in ~vat, 
80 τιθέ-ναι. δεικνύ-ναι, ἱστά-ναι. 

7. τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως παρὰ Κῦρον, of the king of [the] Cictlians to 
Cyrus: (a) note the attrib. position of the gen. Κιλίκων ; (b) παρά with 
the ace., denoting motion to a place beside ; cf. παρά with the gen., 
mapa βασιλέως 1X. ; with the dat., map’ ἑαυτῷ XI. N. 1. 

8. δοῦναι, dedisse, that she gave: cf.6 ὃ ; 2d aor. infin., so ἀποστῆ- 
vat XIII. ; note, the pres. and 2d aor. infin. act. of -μι verbs end in -vat. 
ar-€-8w-xe, he gave: on x for o in the lst aor., cf. ἔτθητκε 1; fut. δώσω, 
perf. d€-d@-xa. χρήματα πολλά, much money: πολλά from πολύς. 

9. αὑτήν, se (fem.), herself; not αὐτήν (nom. αὐτός). 

10. ἡ Μίδου καλουμένη, the so-called [spring] of Midas: attrib. to 
κρήνη, note the position ; also the position of the gen. Midov between 
ἡ and καλουμένη ; cf. Κιλίκων 7. ἐφ᾽ ἣ = ἐπὶ Ff, upon which, at which ; 
cf. ἐφ᾽ ἃ XXITL. ν. 5. 

11. οἴνῳ κεράσᾶς αὐτήν, by mixing it with wine : (a) dat. as in 
πλοίοις XXIII, μάχῃ XXV.; (0) from κερά-ννῦμι, theme κερα-. 

12. δεη-θῆ-ναι, that the Cilician (queen) asked: pass. dep. from δέομαι, 
cf. δεῖται XVIII. ; note the accented syllable of infinitives in -ναι (6 δ). 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. ἐν is followed by the dative; παρά and πρός by the genitive, 
dative, or accusative. 

2. τίθημι, δίδωμι form the Ist aor. stem with « instead of σ. 

3. The verb to be sometimes agrees in number with its predicate 
instead of its subject. 

4. εἶμι, I go, has the theme 2; εἰμί, Tam, has the theme ἐς. 

5. Greek; was evident being annoyed ; English, was evidently 
annoyed, 

6. μή is used with the infin. instead of οὐκ. 

7. Verbs in -y have the pres. and 2d aor. infin. act. in -vat. 

8. The infin. in -vac is accented on the penult. 

9. The gen. which limits a noun is put in the attrib. position. 

















94 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


10. The dat. denotes means, manner, place where. 
11. ἑαυτοῦ etc. may contract to αὑτοῦ etc. 
12. Contract adj. in -ovs for -e-os have the circumflex on the ultima. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declens. of contract adjective in τους H. 223, 224. G. 65. 
τὰ . . lk . tl sl Β΄. 59". 808, 6. 101, 4,6. 
Avo, pres. system, act. . . . . H.314, G. 96. 
νον 310 cs el we a. G. 76. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἡ ἀγορά, market, market-place. 15. ἡ θύρα," door. 
. ὁ ἀγών, game, contest. 16. θύω, I sacrifice. 
. τὸ ἄθλον," prize. 17. κεράννῦμι, I mia. 
. ἀνιάω, I trouble. 18. ἡ κρήνη. spring (of water). 
. ἀπ-αιτέω, I ask as my due, 19. ὁ oivos,® wine. 
demand. . ὀφείλω, 1 owe. 

. ἀπο-δίδωμι, 1 give, give away. 21. πλέον, more. 
. ἡ γυνή, woman, wife. 22. πολλάκις, often. 

δῆλος, evident. 23. modvs,® much. 
. δι-άγω, I continue. 24. ἡ στλεγγίς, comb. 
. εἶμι, I go; ἰέναι, to go. 25. ἡ στρατιά, army. , 
. ἡ ἐλπίς, hope, promise. 26. ovy-yiyvouat, have intercourse, 
. ἐπι-δείκνῦμι, 1 show. acquaintance with. 
. ἔσχατος, remotest. 27. τέτταρες, four. 
. θεωρέω, 81 view. 28. τίθημι, I place. 


5. EXERCISES. 


> ” 
1. Analyze: ἔθυσε, ἔθηκε, στλεγγίδες, ἐθεώρει, ὠφείλετο, ἰόντες, 
> Ld ΄ - > “ 
ἀπήτουν, διῆγε, ἀνιώμενος, ἀποδιδόναι, καλουμένη, θηρεῦσαι, ἐπιδεῖξαι. 
2. Principal parts of Ave, θύω, κελεύω, αἰτέω. Inflect each of the 


principal parts of θύω. 


1 Cf. Eng. agony. 5 Cf. Lat. i-re. ; 

2 Cf. Eng. athletic. 6 Cf. Lat. vinum, Eng. wine. 
8 Cf. Eng. theory. 7 Cf. Eng. pleon-asm. 

4 Cf. Lat. fores, Eng. door, Ger. thiir. 8 Cf. Eng. poly-syllabic. 





-LESSON. XXVI. 95 


? ‘ - ~ 
3. Translate: (a) "Hy δὲ n στλεγγὶς χρῦσῆ ἣν ὁ στρατηγὸς ἐλέγετο 
ω , > ὃ ~ hb ’ > 4 “ ‘ 
Τῷ στρατιωτῇ ἀποδοῦναι. (ἢ) Θεωρήσομεν οὖν μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων Tas 
» , a “ , - 
ἐξετάσεις, ἃς οἱ στρατηγοὶ ποιήσουσιν ἐπὶ ταῖς θύραις τοῦ σατράπου. 
κ a > > , “- , - 
(0) Δῆλοι ἦσαν ἀνιώμενοι τὴν τῶν πολεμίων δύναμιν ὁρῶντες. (4) Αὕτη 
ὃ ἐστὶ ἡ Σάρδεις καλουμένη πόλις. ἧς ὁ Κῦρος τὸ ἀρχαῖον ἄρχων ἦν. 
> ‘ ‘ - ᾿ , ‘ U a 
(¢) "Emi τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ βασιλέως ἰών, μισθὸν τεττάρων μηνῶν ἀπήτει, ὃς 


αὑτῷ ὠφείλετο. 


4. Translate: (a) Each woman was evidently annoyed. (b) The 
remotest government in the direction of Phrygia (= the government the 
remotest). (c) He used to make an examination of his soldiers on 
horseback. (d) Going often to the gates of the king, he used. tp ask 
that all those cities be given to him. (¢) I have no (= not) means 
for the support of those large armies. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Attributive used without the substantive. 2. Agreement of the 
verb. 3. Vowel contraction. 4. Accent of διῆγε. 5. Means in Greek. 
6. Declension of ordeyyis, ἀγών, ἀγορά, ἐλπίς, ἐξέτασις. 7. Διά with 
the accusative. 8. Formation of the aor. of τίθημι, δίδωμι. 9. Greek 
for “he was evidently.” 10. The negative with the infin. 11. Accent 
of the infin. in -ναι. 12. Declension of Midas. 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XXVII. 


ANABASIS 1 wm. 15, 16. 


1. NOTES. 


1. ὡς νόμος αὐτοῖς εἰς μάχην, as [was the] custom to them [in entering } 
into battle: on the dat. cf. Κύρῳ βασέλεια ἦν XXIV. 

2. ταχ-θῆ-ναι καὶ στῆ-ναι, to be arranged and to stand: (a) from 
rarrw, theme ray, cf. φυλάττειν, theme φυλακ XXI.; -θῆναι, ending as 
in λυθῆναι ; note y becomes x before 4; (6) στῆναι, aor. infin. act. ; 
ef. δοῦναι XXVI.; verbs in -pe have the pres. and the aor. infin. act. in 
-vat, — διδόναι, δοῦναι, ἱστάναι, στῆναι. ᾿ ἕκαστον, subj. of συν-τάξαι. 
τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ, the [men] of himself; cf. τοὺς oixoe XXI., the [men} αἱ 
home. 

3. τὸ δεξιόν, the right [wing]: ¢f. τὸ Ἑλληνικόν, the Greek: [army] X XI. 
οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, the [men] with him. οἱ ἐκείνου, the [men] of, with, that one. 
Note how readily the substantive is omitted when easily supplied from 
the sense of the text. 

4. of δὲ παρ-ήλαυνον : cf. 6 δέ, but he VILL. ; on a of. ἀπ-ῆλθε VIII., 
εἶχε XXI. 

5. re-ray-yévoe: from τάττω. perf. pass. partic., theme ray, fut. τάξω, 
aor. ἔταξα, perf. mid. ré-ray-wat, aor. pass. ἐ-τάχ-θην ; on the redup. 
cf. δεδομέναι XII. 

6. κράνη : from κράνος, declined like εὖρος XXIII... χαλκᾶ for 
χάλκεα : nom. χαλκοῦς, declined like χρυσαῖ XXVI. 

7. ἐκ-κεικαλυμ-μέν-ας : perf. partic. ; cf. δεδομένας XI1., τεταγμένοι 5 ; 
from ἐκκαλύπτω. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Possession is denoted by the dat. with εἰμέ, am. 
2. y coming before @ is changed to χ. 


3. rarrw, theme ray. 














LESSON XXVII. 97 


4. ‘he infin. in -ναι is accented on the penult. 

5. Substantives are readily omitted when understood from the con- 
text, their place being frequently taken by a modifying adjective. 

6. ¢€ augments to n or εἰ. 

7. ‘The article with δέ has the force of a demonstrative. 

8. The perf. mid. attaches the pers. and partic. ending directly to 
the reduplicated theme. 


9. Contract adjectives like χαλκοῦς ; accent the final syllable cir- 
cumflex throughout. 


10. Nouns in -os are 2d declension mase. or 3d declension neuter. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


. The tense systems . . . . H. 303. . 92, 4, i.-VII. 
- Principal parts . , . . H. 304, c. . 92, 5. 


. Conjugation of Adw through 
the fut. act. and aor. act. H. 315,316. G. 96. 


. Augment of diphthongs . . H. 357. G. 103. 
- Reduplication of verbs begin- 
ning witha vowel . . . . 367. G. 101, 3. 
. Accent ofthe verb. . . , H. 886. G. 26. 
G 


. Formation of fut. stem . - 420, 421,b. G. 110, IL. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


τὸ ἅρμα, chariot. 9. εὐώνυμος. left. 
. 1) ἁρμάμαξα, carriage. 10. ἡ ἴλη, troop, company. 
3. ἡ ἀσπίς, shield. 11. ἵστημι,3 I set, station. 
. δεξιός, dexter, right. 12. ἡ κνημίς,3 greave. 
5. εἶτα, then, thereupon. 13. καλύπτω, I cover. 
- ἕκαστος, each. 14. τὸ κράνος, helmet. 
€x-xadurr@,! I uncover. 15. 6 νόμος. custom. 
. ἐπί (upon); ἐπὶ τεττάρων, 16. παρ-ελαύνω, I march by. 
in fours. 17. πρῶτος, first. 


1 Cf. Eng. Apo-calypse, Revelation. 
2 In the 2d aor., 7 stand, station myself. 
% Leathern leggings. to protect the lower part of the leg in warfare. 


— 


( 








98 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


Ὁ. φοινικοῦς,2 purple. 
χαλκοῦς, brazen, of bronze. 


18, ἡ τάξις (ταγ-σις),} arrange- 2 
ment, company. 2 
2 


‘ 
19. τάττω, I arrange. 2. 6 χιτών, tunic. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Analyze: ταχθῆναι, στῆναι, συντάξαι, ἐθεώρει. τεταγμένοι, ἐκκεκα- 
λυμμένας. 

2. Decline: Ἕλλην, πόλις, τάξις, σῶμα, ἅρμα, γένος, κράνος, ἁπλοῦς 
χαλκοῦς, ἐλπίς, ἀσπίς, κνημίς. 

3. Translate: (α) The Greeks were ordered to stand in fours. 
(b) And they (= but the), arranged in companies, were going up into 
the city, [which was] great and prosperous (pred. position). (6) And 
all the hoplites had golden helmets and tunics of bronze. (ὦ) And it is 
said that Cyrus gave pay to all his soldiers. (¢) He was uncovering 
his shield. (7) It was their custom (dat. construction) to fight those 
[who] dwelt (= dwelling) beyond the so-called Maeander River. 


4. Translate: (a) Πολλὰς δ᾽ ἐξετάσεις ποιήσει τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
δυνάμεως. πρὶν ἂν οἱ πολέμιοι παραγένωνται.Ό. (ὁ) Οὐκ οὖν ἤσθοντο τὸ 
ἄθλον στλεγγὶς χρῦσῇ οὖσα. (°) ᾿Εκκαλύψουσι τὰς ἀσπίδας. ὅταν τοῖς 
πολεμίοις μάχεσθαι δέῃ. (1) Χαλκᾶ δ᾽ ἦν τὰ κράνη, ἃ αἱ τάξεις αἱ 
πρῶται ἔφερον. (6) Νόμος δὴ αὐτοῖς ἐστιν ἀφ᾽ ἵππου θηρεύειν, ὅταν 
ἑαυτοὺς γυμνάσαι βούλωνται. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. p in ἐφ᾽ ἅρματος. 2. κατ᾽ tras. 3. Augment of e. 4. Different 
uses of παρά. 5. ὑπό with the genitive; with the dative. 6. Construc- 
tion with ἐν, εἰς, σύν, περί, ἀμφί, ἐπί, πρός, did. 7. The tense systems. 
8. Fut. and aor. of themes ending in x, y. 9. Accent of the verb ; of 
ἀπῆλθε. 10. ὡς... οὕτω. 11. Classes and orders of mutes. 12. y be- 


fore 6. -13. The numerals from 1 to 10. 


1 Cf. Eng. syn-taz. 
2 The Phoenic-ians are said to have discovered the purple dye. 











LESSON XXVIII. 


LESSON XXVIII. 


ANABASIS I. π΄ 17-20. 


1. NOTES. 


1. παρήλα-σε: Ist aor. from ἐλαύνω, theme eda: cf. Baivw, theme Ba; 
on the imperf., cf. παρ-ήλαυνον XX VII. στήσᾶς : from ἵστημι, Ist aor. 
partic. ; so στῆσαι infin., but στῆναι 2d aor. infin. ; note. ἵστημι has 
Ist and 2d aor. forms. πέμψας, = πέμπ-σᾶς ; cf. ἀπο-πέμψαι X XT. 
προ-βαλέ-σθαι : from βάλλω, theme Bad; cf. €&-€-Bah-ev XIII.: tense 
here? mid. voice, to throw before one’s self. ἐπι-χωρῆ-σαι, to advance : 
of. ἀπ-ετχώρ-ει XXV., he retreated ; on the form, cf. κρεμάσαι XXV. 

2. προ-εῖπον, report: from εἶπον, I said; 2d aor. with no pres. form, 
but classed with λέγω ; ef. εἴρηκα XXIII. ἐ-σάλπιγξε, he (the trumpe- 
ter) blew the trumpet: from σαλπίζω, theme gadneyy; on Ὑ nasal, cf. rapay- 
γέλλει ΧΧΙ. ἐπ-ἤε-σαν, they advanced: impert. ind., irreg. formation, 
from ἐπε + ἰέναι, Lat. ire ; of. ἰτόντες XXVI.; -σαν as in ἦ-σαν, e-rant. 

3. ἐκ τούτου, from, out of, this; thereupon. θᾶττον προ-ιόντων, iis 
ocius proeuntibus, [they] advancing more rapidly : (a) gen. abs., 
στρατιωτῶν being understood ; ef. αὐτῶν πολεμούντων XV., παρεχόντων 
Πισιδῶν XIX.; (6) θᾶττον, compar. οἵ δᾶν. Taxé-ws, superl. τάχι- 
ora XXIII. ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, from the spontaneous, spontaneously ; 
note the omission of the substant.; ef τὸ δεξιόν XX VII. τοῖς OTpa- 
τιώταις : the dat. as in Κύρῳ ἣν XXIV. 

4. ἔ-φυγ-ε(ν) : from φεύγω, theme guy; cf φυγάς. fugitive; tense 
here? why? οἱ ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς : read as if ἐκ were ἐν, the men in the 
market ; cf. ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ΧΧΙΠ, κατα-λιπ-όντες, leaving: κατα-λείπω, 
theme Aur; tense here ? ἰδοῦσα : masc. ἐδών, from εἶδ-ον, theme ἐδ. 
Lat. vid-eo ; no pres. form, but classed as 2d aor. of ὁράω. ἐθαύμασε 
for ἐθαυμαδ-σε. from θαυμάζω, theme θαυμαδ: cf. ἀττμάζω VITI.; on the 
loss of ὃ before ς, cf. φυγάς (= pvyad-s). ἥσ-θη for 748-6n, from ἥδ-ομαι 
dep.; on 8 before 6. cf. dripacbeis. VIII. 

5. τὴν ταχίστην ὁδόν, the quickest way, straightway: note the adv. 
use of the accus. ; ταχύς, quick ; cf. the forms ταχέως, θᾶττον, τάχιστα. 
ἐν ὦ, in which [time] ; cf. ἐν αἷς, in which [days]. Tia, quem- 
dam, a certain: an enclitic fur τινά ; note the accent is thrown 

















100 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 
upon the ultima of ἕτερον; cf. ἐρίζοντά of XXV., nom. tis for rus. 
airta-od-pevo-s : from αἰτιάομαι dep.; note, a does not become ἡ betore a ; 


cf. νικῆησᾶς XXV., ἡττηθείς XXV. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The theme of ἐλαύνω is éAa (aor. ἦλα-σε) ; 80 Baivw, theme Ba. 
2. The theme of βάλλω is Badr; of σαλπίζω, carmyy; of φεύγω, 


guy; of λείπω, der. 
3. tornu has a Ist and 2d aor., the first being trans., the second 


intrans. 
4. εἶπον, I said, is classed as the 2d aor. of λέγω ; εἶδον, 1 saw, as 


the 2d aor. of ὁράω. 
5. The accent of a verb does not precede the augment. 
6. εἶμι, 1 go, is conjugated irregularly. 
7. ταχέως is compared ταχέως, θᾶττον, τάχιστα. 
8. A verb containing the idea of separation causes the use of ἐκ for 
ἐν, even when the preposition has no connection with the verb. 
9. θαυμάζω has the theme θαυμαδ, ὃ dropping before s (fut. θαυ- 
paow), and becoming ¢ before a lingual mute, 
10. The accus. is used adverbially. 
11. ris, a certain, is an enclitic throughout its inflecfion ; a pro- 
paroxytone before an enclitic takes an acute on the last syllable. 
12. αἰτιάομαι does not change a to ἡ in conjugation. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Labial and palatal mutes before a 
Dee see kt . , { ε« 8. δι, 


Declens. of σάλπιέξ, . . . ὁ. Η. 174. 
Conj. of λύω, fut., and Ist aor. act. Η. 315,316. 


. Conj. of λείπω, 2d aor. act.. . . ἢ. 320. 
Article with πᾶς and ὅλος. . . H. 672. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


Ll. αἰτιάομαι, I accuse. 3. avrouatos,' spontaneous. 
2. ἁρπάζω, I seize. 4. ὁ γέλως, laughter. 


1 Cf. autcmat-ic. 


LESSON XXVIUL. 101 


δι-αρπάζω, I plunder. 22. sodeuos,® hostile. 

ὁ Spdpos,) a run. 3. mpo-Badda, I throw before, pre- 
ὁ duvdotns,? officer. sent (urms). 

εἶδον (ὁράω), I saw. - πρότειμι, προ-ιέναι, I go for- 
εἶπον (λέγω), I said. ward, 

σαλπίζω, blow the trumpet. 

. ἐπι-χωρέω, I advance. }. ἡ σκηνή, tent. 


» » a 
. ἔπ-ειμι, ἐπ-ιέναι. I advance. 


ὁ ἑρμηνεύς, interpreter. 27. ταχύς, quick. 
ἔτερος,8 other. . ταχέως, quickly. 
. ἥδομαι, I am pleased. . τρέπω, I turn. 
. θαυμάζω, I wonder. . ἐπι-τρέπω, I turn over to. 
ἡ κραυγή, shout. 31. ἡ φάλαγξ. phalanz. 
. ἡ λαμπρύτης, brightness. . φεύγω. I flee. 
. λείπω," I leave. 33. ὁ φόβος." fear. 
. καταλείπω, I leave behind. ὁ φοινικιστής, wearer of the 
. μετά (with gen.), with. purple. 
. ὅλος, whole. . τὰ ona, goods for sale. 


5. EXERCISES. 


Analyze: πορήλασε, πέμψας, ἐπιχωρῆσαι, ἐσάλπιγξε. καταλιπόντες. 

2. Decline: ἅρμα, Κίλισσα, γέλως, λαμπρότης, ἑρμηνεύς, δυνάστης. 

3. Translate: (a) And he announced to his friend te take (taking) 
what army he (dat.) had, and come straightway, (Ὁ) The guards indeed, 
becoming reconciled with the (men) in the city, send to the commanders 
what armies they had. (9) And he (6) ordered those (who were) be- 
sieging the enemy (= hostiles) to advance quickly. (4) And they 
gladly obeyed. (6) They began to run. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The declension of φάλαγξ. 2. Some uses of the optative. 3. Fu- 
ture conditions with probability. 4. Tenses of the participle. 5. Uses 
of the imperfect indicative. 6. The cases after mapa. 7. Reduplica- 


tion. 8. Greek for “he was evidently.” 9. Future of themes ending 
in tr, ὃ, 6. 


1 Cf. Eng. hippo-drome, horse-race. Cf. δύναμαι. 
* Cf. Eng. hetero-dox, having other or wrong beliefs. Cf. Eng. ec-lip-se. 
Cf. πολεμέω. ὁ C/. Eng. hydro-phobia. Cf. φοινικοῦς XXVIII. 




















INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XXIX. 


ANABASIS I. mn. 21-24 


1. NOTES. 


1. ἐπειρῶντο εἰσβάλλειν, they were attempting to enter: (a) cf. ἐπει- 
paro XIII. ; (b) theme Bad ; ef. προ-βαλέσθαι XXVIII., ἐξέβαλεν XIII. 
duafirés ... ἀμήχανος κτέ, a wayon-roud, ... anil impracticable for an 
army to enter. Note the mas. ending, although ὁδός is fem. ; in Greek, 
as in Latin, there are adj. of two terminations, the mas. and fem. forms 
being alike. εἰσ-ελθεῖν : indic. εἰσ-ῆλθον ; cf. ἀπ-ῆλθε VIII; theme? 
pres. indic. εἰσ-ένχομαι dep. τῇ vorepaig, on the following day; sc. 
ἡμέρᾷ; note that the dat., like the Latin abl., denotes time when. 
λελοιπ-ὼς εἴη, that Syennesis had left, lit. was having left: (c) perf. opt., 
for the indie. of the dir. dise., λέλοιπε(ν), “ Syennesis has left,” cf. ὡς ἐπι- 
βουλεύοι VI. ; (d) λε-λοιπ-ώς, perf. partic. act. of λείπω : note the redup., 
and the ending -ws=-o:-s of. éememrax-dr-as XIII.; note the change of 
the theme Au to λοιπ, and that the perf. suffix -κα has been omitted ; 
such perfects are called second perf. ; so ypdp-w yé-ypad-a, ] have written. 
καὶ ὅτι . . . ἤκουε, and because he heard Tamés having (i.e. that T. 
had) triremes [which were] sailing around, etc. ; note the partic. after 
ἤκουε, and cf. παρὼν ἐτύγχανε III.; such partic., taking the place of an 
infin., are called supplementary. On ἤκουε. cf. ἤκουσε XXIII. καὶ 
αὐτοῦ Κύρου, and of Cyrus himself; but ὁ αὐτὸς Κῦρος, the same Cyrus ; 
cf. ra αὐτὰ ταῦτα XIII. 

2. οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος, nullo prohibente : οὐδείς, no one, accus. οὐδ- 
ένα; cf. ἕνα XXIV. Doves this construction denote time, cause, or con- 
dition ? δένδρων . . . ἀμπέλων σύμπλεων full of trees. . . and of vines ; 
note the genitives dependent on σύμπλεων : cf. the Eng. usage, full or ; 
σύμπλεως masc., fem.; neut. σύμπλεων 

3. ἐξέλιπον : on the form, cf καταλιπόντες XXVIIL. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The Greek has adjectives of two terminations, the masculine and 
feminine forms being alike. 
2. The dative denotes time when. 


LESSON XXIX. 103 


3. The perf. opt. act. is made up of the perf. partic. and the opta- 
tive of the verb to be. 

4. 2d perfects differ from 1st perfects in omitting the suffix κα. 

5. A supplementary partic. may stand after ἀκούω, as after τυγχάνω. 

6. αὐτός is intensive when it modifies a noun, provided it does not 
stand in the attributive position. 

7. Adjectives of fulness are followed by the genitive case. 

8. σύμπλεως has ὦ short as regards accent. 

9. ἐπί with the gen. or the dat. denotes rest wpon. 

10. διά with the gen. = through; with the acc. = on account of. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declensiun of ὅδός. . . . . . H. 158. 
Adjectives of two terminations . . H. 225, 226. 
Declension of εὐγενής, mas. and fem. H. 230. 
Ist perf. system, active voice. . . H. 317. 
2d perf. system, active voice . . . H. 821. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ὁ ἄγγελος, messenger. 19. μελίνη, millet. 
τὸ ἄκρον, height, summit. 20. ἡ ὁδός, way. 
ἁμαξιτός. passable for wagons. 21. dpbcos, straight. 
ἀμήχανος, insurmountable, 22. τὸ ὄρος, mountain, 
. 1) ἄμπελος, vine. 23. ὅτε (conjunct.), that, because. 
}. βάλλω, I throw. 24. οὗ. where. 
εἰσ-βάλλω, I throw in, make . ovd-eis, nobody. 
an entrance. 26. ὀχυρός, fortified. 
ἡ εἰσβολή, entrance. . πάντῃ, on all sides. 
τὸ δένδρον, tree. . παντοδαπός, of all kinds. 
διό, wherefore. 9. περι έχω, surround. 
εἴσω, within. . πλέω, I sail; περι-πλέω, sail 
ἐκ-λείπω, I leave out. around. 
ἐν-οικέω, I dwell in. ὁ πῦρός, wheat. 
ἐπίρρυτος. watered. 2. τὸ σήσαμον, sesam-e. 
εἰσ-έρχομαε, εἰσ-ῆλθον, 1 enter. 33. ἡ τριήρης, tri-reme. 
- ἐσχυρός, mighty ; -ῶς, mightily. ὑστεραῖος, next (following in 
ἡ xpitn barley. time). 
κωλύω. I prevent. d. ὑψηλός, high. 




















INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD, 


5. EXERCISES, 


1. Principal parts of κωλύω ; conjugation of the perf. system act. and 
mid. of κωλύω ; conjugation of the fut., 2d aor., 2d perf. act. of λείπω. 

2. Translate: (a) That good king has a large and beautiful park. 
(ὁ) He was living in a large and well-watered plain. (c) The inter- 
preters announced that those lofty mountains were fortified, and that 
the enemy were upon them. (d) In that same country there was much 
wheat. (¢) Nobody can enter where the great king dwells. (f) On 
the following day he died, and the younger of the brothers became 
king. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Formation of the pluperf. ἐλελύκειν. 2. Different meanings of 
αὐτός. 3. Case following adverbs of place. 4. Indirect discourse. 
5. Conjugation of ἔφυγον, 2d aor. system act. 6. The form ἐπειρῶντο. 
7. Construction with adj. of fulness. 8, Adj. of two terminations. 
9. Compensative lengthening, with examples. 





LESSON XXX.— REVIEW. 


δ, TEXT: AwnaBasis I. 1. 1— I. II. 24. 
2. GRAMMAR. 


1. Labial and palatal mutes before a lingual mute: H. 51; G. 16, 1. 
Elision: H.82; G.17,1. Enclitics: H. 113, 115, 116; G. 27, 
28, 1, 8, 3. 

2. Declension - γέφῦδρα. Η. 135. G. 57,1, ὁπ. νεᾶνίᾶς, Ἡ. 145 ; 
G. 37 (ταμίας). ὁδός Η. 153; G. 42. πούς, H. 172; G. 46, 4, 
N. 1, end. σάλπιγξ, H. 174; G. 50. δαίμων, H. 184; G. 50. 
γένος, H. 190, 191; G. 52, 2. Of Adjectives : contr. in -ovs, H. 223, 


224; G. 65. Of two terminations, H. 225, 226 ; G. 63. εὐγενής, 
H. 230; G. 66. εὐδαίμων, H. 235: G. 66. μείζων, H. 236; 
G. 7% % x. 1 (ἡδίω). Avbeis, H. 242: G. 68 (τιθείς). μέγας, 


H. 247; G. 70. The Relative: H. 275; G. 86. Numerals: 1-10, 
LI. 288; G. 76. 


LESSON XXX. 105 


3. Conjugation: Tense systems, H. 303; G. 92, 4, I.—VII. Principal 
parts, H. 304,c; G. 92,5. Variable vowel, H. 310; G. 113 and 3, 
Synopsis of Ave, H. 313; G. 95, 1. Ado, act. voice, H. 314-319; 
G. 96. λείπω, 2d aor. act., H. 320; G. 96, II.; and 2d perf., H. 321. 
Augment, H. 357; G. 103. Reduplication, H. 363-365, 367 ; 
G. 101, 1,2,3. Accent, H. 386; G. 26. Fut. stem, H. 420, 421, )b; 





G. 110,11. 1st perf. stem, H. 446; G. 110, iv. ὃ. 


4. Syntax: Article with πᾶς, ὅλος, H. 672; G. 142, 4, wn. 5. Time 
παρά, πρός, H. 802, 805; G. 191, vi. 
4,6. Imperf., H. 830; G. 200. 


and space, H. 720; 6. 161. 


. ἡ ἀκρόπολις. 


. ἡ ἄμπελος. 
. τὸ ἄντρον. 
. 6 ἀριθμός. 
. τὸ ἅρμα. 


. ἡ ἁρμάμαξα. 


ς ε > , 
. ἢ ἀσπίς. 


3. τὰ βασίλεια. 


. 6 γέλως. 
ἡ γέφῦρα. 
5. ὁ γυμνῆς. 
. ἡ γυνή. 
. τὸ δένδρον. 
. τὸ δέρμα. 
. ὁ δρόμος. 
. ὁ δυνάστης. 
. ἡ ἐλπίς. 
3. ἡ ἐξέτασις 


1 
. ἢ 


3. VOCABULARY. 


NOUNS. 


. ὁ ἑρμηνεύς. 
. τὸ εὖρος. 

}. ἡ ἡμέρα. 
. τὸ θηρίον. 
. ἡ θύρα. 


ἡ Dy. 


. ὁ ἱππεύς. 

. ὁ ἵππος. 
2. ἡ κνημίς. 

. τὸ κράνος. 


pean 
κρήνη. 
ἡ κριθή. 


λαμπρότης. 


μάχη. 
μελένη. 
νόμος. 


΄ , 

. 7) 600s. 

ξ΄ > 
. ὁ οἶνος. 
. τὰ ὅπλα. 

ae 

. τὸ ὄρος. 

© , 
- ὁ παράδεισος. 


. 2) παρασάγγη. 


~ ε Ld 

. ἡ παρασκενή. 
΄ , 

. ὁ πελταστῆης. 
ε ’ 

- ἢ πηγῇ. 

. τὸ πλέθρον. 

. τὸ πλοῖον. 


e ’ 
2. Ὁ ToT apos. 


ξ , 
ο πους. 


e .--Οφ ὃ 
. ὁ πῦρος. 


[4 
. τὸ σήσαμον. 


ε 


ome 
. ἡ σοφία. 

. ὁ σταθμός. 
9. ἡ στλεγγίς. 
. ἡ στρατια. 
. 6 στόλος. 
ya ἡ τάξις. 

. ὁ τοξότης. 

. 1) τριήρης. 
- ἡ φάλαγξ. 
. ὁ φόβος. 

- ὁ φοινικιστής. 
. ὁ χιτών. 


> 4 » 
. Ta @via. 





ns — 


ee ον 


PON ὁ δὲ» ὦ τὸ »» 


— 





αἰτιάωμαι. 
ἀκούω. 
ἀνιάω. 
ἀπ-αιτέω. 
ἀπο-δίδωμι. 
ἀπο-χωρέω. 
ἁρπάζω. 

. βάλλω. 


. δια-βαίνω. 


. εἰσ-βάλλω. 


. εἰσ-έρχομαι. 


. ἐκ-δέρω. 


» ΕΝ 
. ἐκ-καλύπτω. 


. ἐκ-λείπω. 


2, ἐμ-βάλλω. 


> , 
+ €V-OLKE@. 


. ἐξ ehavva. 
. ἔπ-ειμι. 


ἄγριος 
ἁμαξιτός. 
ἀμήχανος. 
αὐτύματος. 


βαρβαρικός. 


δεξιός. 
δῆλος. 
Ἑλληνικός. 
ἐπίρρυτος. 
ἐρυμνύς. 

. ἔσχατος. 

. ἕτερος. 


VERBS. 


» 
ἐπ᾿ εἰμι. 


᾽ , 
. ἐπι-δείκνύμι. 
ζ ’ 
28, ἐπι-τρέπω. 


- ἐπι-χωρέω. 

. ἐρίζω. 

. ζεὐγνῦμι. 
2. ἡγέομαι. 

. ἥδομαι. 


. ἤΚω. 
ε 
. ἥττάομαι. 


oc ὦ. 
— 


or or 


μι] 


INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


νικάω. 


2. οἰκοδομέω. 

oe ὁράω. 

. ὀφείλω. 

+ παρα-σκευάζω. 
}. πάρ-ειμι. 

. παρ-ελαύνω. 

. παύω. 

. πέρι έχω 

)0ὺ. πιστεύω. 


a» 
. avo. 
ς , 
. διό 
3 
. εἶτα. 
» 
. εἴσω. 


. ἐνταῦθα. 


» 
. εἰκοσι(ν). 
2. Tptakovra. 


3. τριζκύσιοι. 


LESSON XXXI. 


ADVERBS. 


), ἤδη. 

. ἐσχυρῶς. 
. ὅθεν. 

. Ov. 


. παντάπασιν. 


NUMERALS. 


, 
+ WEVTAKOCLOL. 


x ? 4 
YJ. OKTAKOCLOL. 


G. χίλιοι. 


‘ TavrTy. 
2. πλέον. 
2. πολλάκις. 
. ταχέως. 


. τάχιστα. 


΄ 
. δισχίλιοι. 
χ ‘ 
- τετρακισχίλιοι. 


. μύριοι. 


). θαυμάζω. il. πλέω 
- θεωρέω. 2. πορεύομαι. 
. θηρεύω 9. προ-βάλλω. 
. θύω. 4. πρό-ειμι. 
. ἵστημι. 5. προ-ίστημι. 
. καλέω. j. pew. 
- καλύπτω. 7. σαλπίζω. 
3. κατ-άγω. . Ovy-ylyvouat. 
. κατα-νοέω. 9. συν-αλλάττω. 
D. κεράννῦμι. 70. τάττω. 
). κρεμάννῦμι. . τίθημε. 
. κωλύω. 2. τρέπω. 
. λέγω. 3. ὑπισχνέομαι. 
. λείπω. . φεύγω. 
. μένω. ῦ. φυλάττω. 


ADJECTIVES. 


. εὐδαίμων. . παντοδαπός. 
. εἰώνυμος. 26. πλήρης. 
> , ‘ 
. ἰσχυρός. . πολέμιος. 
), μέγας. 28, πολύς. 
. μείζων. 9. πρῶτος. 
. μέσος. . σύμπας. 
, 
Eevixos. . ταχύς. 
o ε on 
. ὅλος. 2. ὑστεραῖος. 
» 
. ὄρθιος. . ὑψηλός. 
a oe 
2. ὅσος. . φοινικοῦς. 
» ‘ 7 
. ovd-eis. . χαλκοῦς. 
. ’ - - 
. ὀχυρός. . χρϊσοῦς. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


. περί. 3. διά (gen.). ὅ. ἐπί (τετταρων). 
. ὑπό (dat.). 4. ὡς. + μετά. 


CONJUNCTIONS., 


e ’ , [4] oe , 
- OTE, ἐπεί. “. OTL. . πριν. 


LESSON ΧΧΧΙ. 


ANABASIS I. πὶ 25-27, 


1. NOTES. 


ὃ 25. ἡ Συεννέσιος γυνή: cf. XXVI. § 12. προτέρᾳ Κύρου πέντε 
ἡμέραις, Maturius Cyro quinque diebus, δαγί ον (than) Cyrus by five 
days. Note, mporépa agrees with γυνή; on the comparative ending, 
cf. πρεσβύ-τερο-ς I. Κύρου, genitive case, dependent upon the com- 
parative; ¢f. the Latin use of the ablative. ἡμέραις, dative, denoting 
the interval or degree of difference between the queen’s arrival and that 
of Cyrus ; cf. the Latin usage. τῇ ὑπερβολῇ... .. TH. . . πεδίον : on the 
order, cf. τοῖς Θρᾷξὶ . .. οἰκοῦσι XVI. ἀπ-ώλο-ντο : from ἀπ-όλ-λῦ-μι 
(= ὀλινυ-μι, cf. ἀπο-δείκ-νῦ-μι), theme dd. Tense here ? ἔ-φα-σαν, 
they said: from φη-μί, Latin fa-ri ; on -σαν, ending 3d plur., cf. εἴη- 














108 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


σαν XI., ἀφ-ειστήκε-σαν XII, κατα-κοπ-ῆτναι : 2d aor. pass. infin. ; 
pass. suflix -e, lengthened to » before the infin. ending ; cf. συν- 
adday-€-vre X XI. ὑπο-λειφ- θέντας : from λείπ-ω, theme Aur; cf. κατα- 
λιπόντες XXVIII. On Φ for π᾿ before 8, ef. ταχ-θῆναι XX VII. εὑρ-εῖν: 
from εὑρ-ίσκω, theme edp. Tense here ? 


ὃ 26. otre .. . ἐλθεῖν ἔφη; οὔτε ἰέναι ἤθελε, he said that he had not 
(lit. netther) come, nor was he willing, ete. ἑαυτοῦ, than himself: on 
the case, cf. Κύρου, § 25. οὐδενί. . . εἰς χεῖρας, for no one into the 
hands, = into the hands of no one : cf. sese Caesari ad pedes projece- 
runt. In both instances the English prefers the genitive construction. 
Note that the two negatives, οὔτε... οὐδενί, do not make an affirmative. 


ὃ 27. ἔδωκε: on the form, cf ἀπέδωκε XXVI. § 12. χρήματα 
πολλά: cf. ΧΧΥ͂Ι. § 12. εἰς τὴν στρατιὰν : cf. εἰς τὴν τροφήν XVI. 
Κῦρος : subject of an omitted ἔδωκε. mapa βασιλεῖ, by the side of the 
king ; i.e. at the Persian court. καὶ... x@pav .. . ἀφ-αρπάζεσθαι, and 
that his country be no longer plundered : object of ἔδωκε ; on the infin., 
used as a noun, cf. ἀποστῆναι XIII, ἀθροίζειν XIV. ἡρπασ-μένα : from 
ἁρπάζω, theme ἅρπαδ. Note the change of 8 to σ᾽ before μ᾿; on the form, 
cf. δεδομέναι XL. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The genitive, dependent upon a noun, occurs in the attributive 
position. 
2. The genitive follows the comparative when 7, than, is omitted. 
3. Deyree of difference is expressed by the dative. 
4. The suffix -repo- forms comparatives. 
5. The attributive order is: article, attributive, substantive ; or 
farticle), substantive, article, attributive. 
6. od is the theme of ὄλλῦμε ; edp, οἱ εὑρίσκω. 
7. -σαν indicates the 3d plural, as in ἔφα-σαν, εἴησαν, ἐλύθη-σαν. 
8. The Greek has a Ist aorist passive suflix (6e-) ; also one for the 
21 aorist (e-). 
9. The infinitive is used substantively, with or without the article. 
10. π and B become @ before 6. 
11. Lingual mutes become o before μ. 
12. The dative occurs in the sense of an English possessive genitive. 


13. δίδωμι forms its lst aorist with -κα- for -σα-. 


LESSON XXXI. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declension of πολύς. . H. 247. G. 70. 
Accent of infinitives and 

participles. . . . . H. 389. G. 26, (1), (2), (3). 
Classes of verbs: Ist and 

2d classes. . . . =. H. 892-304. G. 107, 108, L., II. 


Reduplication of verbs be- 
ginning with a vowel . H. 367. G. 101, 3. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ὁ axivaxns, dagger. 16. ἡ πίστις, pledge. 
τὸ ἀνδράποδον, slave. 17. πλανάομαι,8 7 wander. 
ἀπ-ὀλλῦμι, 1 destroy. 18, mov, anywhere. 
- τὸ δῶρον, gift. 19. πώ, yet. 
ἐθέλω, am willing, wish. 20. πρότερος, earlier. 
εἰσ-ελαύνω, march into. 21. ἡ στολή, gown. 
ἑκατόν, hundred. 22. ὁ otpentds, necklace. 
ἐν-τυγχάνω, happen upon. 23. τίμιος, honorable. 
τότε, then. 
ἡ Umep-BoAn, passage over. 
ὑπο-λείπω, ἰ leave. 
φη-μί.δ I say. 
ἡ xetp,® hand. 
xpvao-xarivos, golden bridle. 
. τὸ ψέλιον. bracelet. 


bo 


εὑρίσκω, | find. 

κόπτω, cul; κατα-κόπτω, cut 
κρείττων, stronger. [down. 
ὁ λόχος, company. 

ὁ ὄλ-εθρος," destruction. 
ὀργίζομαι, am angry. 

οὐδείς, nobody, no one. 


2 Ww τῷ Ww WwW τῷ 
$1 δι 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (6) Οὐχῖ εὑρεῖν τὸν καλὸν axivaxny δύναμαι. ὃν ὁ 
, A - , 3 κ ’ , a 

φύλαξ ἐν τῇ σκηνῇ ὑπέλιπεν. (ὃ) Εἶδον τὴν τοῦ μεγάλου βασιλέως χεῖρα 
᾿ ~ ‘ , > ~ , 

ἔχουσαν πολλὰ Ψέλια ἐφ᾽ αὑτῇ. (c) Οὐδείς ἐστι κρείττων τοῦ μεγάλου 


1 Cf. Eng. Theo-dore, divine gift. 2 Cf. ὄλ-λυμι. 

8 Cf. Eng. plan-et, wanderer among fixed stars. 

4 Cf. ἀ-τιμάζω, I dishonor. 5 Cf. Eng. eu-phem-ism, blas-pheme. 
6 Eng. chir-ography. 

7 Note the change of « (οὐκ) to x before the following rough breathing. 














110 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


βασιλέως. (d) Οὗτος ὁ ἀνὴρ ἦν τότε τοῦ Κύρου πρεσβύτερος ἑκατὸν 
ἡμέραις ὅτε τὰ στρατεύματα ἀπώλετο. 

2. Analyze: διήρπασαν, μετεπέμπετο, ἔδωκε, ἐντυγχάνωσιν. 

3. Translate: (a) But Parysatis, the wife of Darius, arrives in the 
city six days before he [does]. (δ) The passage of those mountains is 
exceedingly difficult (ἀμήχανος). (6) I am not willing to fall into the 
hands of any one stronger than myself. (4) Many gifts are considered 


honorable at court. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. mapa. 2. Use of the infinitive. 3. Declension of ὅς ; of μείζων, 
κρείττων. +. Degree ofdifference. 5. Case with comparatives, 6. Labial 
and palatal mutes before r, δ, 6. 7. Accent of the verb. 8. Declen- 
sion of χρῦσοῦς. 9. Accent in declension. 10. Formation of the 
perfect stem. 11. Reduplication. 12. Accent in οὐδενί πω, ἤν που. 
13. Quantity of « in ἀφίκετο. 14. Adverbial accusative. 


LESSON XXXII. 


ANABASIS I. mm. 1-3. 
1. NOTES. 


8 1. ἔμεινε: note, the singular, although two subjects follow. 
οὐκ ἔτφα-σαν xrté,! refused (lit. said not) to go forward. On ἔφασαν, 
ef. XXXI. $25; on ἰέναι, cf. ἰόντες XXVI. §11; τοῦ πρόσω, of the 
forward, ἃ. 6. any part of the [ journey] forward. ὑπ-ώπτευον .. 

ἰέναι, sc. αὐτόν, they suspected him to be going. μισθω-θῆ-ναι «ré, they 
said [ themselves, sc. €avrovs| to be hired not for that | purpose}. Note, after 
φημί, the infinitive is used in the indirect discourse ; not ὅτε with a finite 
mode. πρῶτος δὲ Κλέαρχος, primus autem Clearchus, Clearchus 
was the first to, etc. αὑτοῦ : on the attributive position, cf. τῇ ἑαυτοῦ 
χώρᾳ XIX. ἐβιάζετο, was forcing, ἃ. 6. was trying to force ; ἔβαλλον, 
they kept throwing. Note the two different uses of the imperfect. 
ἐπεὶ ἄρξαιντο, whenever they might begin, whenever they began ; aor. opt., 


1 καὶ ta ἕτερα, and the rest, and so forth. 


LESSON XXXII. 111 


from ἄρχω. On the mode, cf. ὅστις ἀφικνοῖτο 1X.; ὁπότε γυμνάσαι Bov- 
λοιτο XXIV. 

ὃ 2. μικρὸν ἐξέφυγε xré, escaped little [so as] not to be stoned, 1. 6. 
narrowly escaped being, etc. Note the redundant, use of the negative. 
μικρόν : adv. ace.; cf. τὴν ταχίστην ὁδόν XXVIII. § 20. ὕστερον, 
afterwards: cf. preceding note. ἔγνω, he knew: trom γι-γνώ-σκω, 
Lat. gnG-sco, Eng. kno-w. Theme? tense! Note, there is no personal 
ending; cf. κατ-έστη VI., ἀνέβη V. guv-nyay-e(v) : on the form, 
cf. κατ-αγάγ-οι XXII. § 2. é-oT-ws: 2d per!. partic., from ἕστηςμι; cf. 
Ae-houn-ws XXIX.§21. On the ending -or, cf. ἐκ-πεπτω-κ-ότ-ας XIII. 

ὃ 3. ἄνδρες στρατιῶται, () men soldiers, i. e. Jellow-soldiers : ἄνδρες 
used for politeness, as in English, “gentlemen of the jury.” χαλεπῶς 
φέρω, aegre fero, am troubled, grieved. τεῖς παροῦσι πρᾶγμασιν, be- 
cause of the present affairs. Note that the dative, like the Latin ablative, 
may express cause. ἐγένετο, became: cf. δρόμος ἐγένετο XX VIII. τά 
τε ἄλλα κτὲ, he both honored me in other matters, and gave me, etc., 7. 6., 
he gave me ten thousand darics, besides honoring me in other ways. 
εἰς τὸ ἴδιον κατ-ε-θέ-μην, laid aside for the (= my) private [use]. Oe, theme 
of what verb? tense here? note the voice. Note the omission of the 
substantive after ἴδιον ; cf. τὸ δεξιόν XXVII. ἐμοί, mihi; nom. 
ἐγώ, ego. 

2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. A verb with two subjects may agree in number with the nearest 
only. 
2. οὔ φημι. signifies 7 refuse. 
3. εἶμι, eo, ire, has the theme «. 
4. After φημί the main verb of the indirect discourse is in the 
infinitive. 
5. ἑαυτοῦ takes the attributive position. 
6. πρῶτος Κλέαρχος means Clearchus was the first, ete. 
7. An attempted act is denoted by the imperfect. 
8. A continued past act is denoted by the imperfect. 
9. ἐπεί with the optative forms a conditional relative sentence, 
referring to no particular, but to a general, occasion. 
10. The neuter accusative is used with an adverbial force. 
11. γιγνώσκω, theme yo; τίθημι, theme θε. 
12. ἀνήρ is used in addresses for politeness or respect. 
13. The dative may express cause. 























INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Present system of Avw 
Classes of verbs 
Position of ἑαυτοῦ . 

τὰ ἄλλα 

Attempted action . 


. 814. . 96. 
, 392-400. G. 108, L-IV. 

. 673, ὃ. . 142, 4, ἢ. 3. 
_ 704. . 142, 2, Ν. 3. 


1. 832. . 200, N. 2. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. apxe,! I begin. 
. βιάζομαι, 1 force. 
3. γι γνώ-σκω," 1 know. 
. daxpvo,® I weep. 
δαπανάω, I expend. 
ἡ ἐκκλησία," assembly. 
. ἐκ-φεύγω," I flee, aor. escape. 
. ἐπὶ τούτῳ. for that (purpose). 
. ὁ ἴδιος, private. } 
. κατα-πετρόω,, I stone down 
(to death). 
. καθ-ηδυπαθέω, I waste in lux- 
2. puxpds,® small. [ury. 
3. praddo,® I hire. 


14. 
5. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 


dpaw,!? I see. 

οὔ φημι, I refuse, deny. 

ἡ πατρίς, fatherland. 
πρόσω, forward. 

πρῶτος,}} first. 

σιωπάω. I am silent. 
ovy-ayw,!? I bring together. 
tipaw, 1 honor. 


£ ὦ ; 
ὑμεῖς, ye; σύ, thou. 


. τὸ ὑποζύγιον, pack animal. 


ὕστερον,}8 later. 


25. φέρω, I bear. 
3. χαλεπῶς, grievously. 


ὁ xpévos,! time. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Analyze: μισθωθῆναι, ἰέναι, 


, , 
ἐδαπάνων. 


ae é ὃ ’ , 
ἄρξαιντο, υνήσεται, συνήγαγον, 


2. Difference between ἔβαλλον and ἔβαλον, ἐξέφυγε and ἐξέφευγε. 


1 Cf. arch-aic, ancient. 
3 Lat. lacru-ma, tear. 
5 Lit. flee away. 


9 Cf. μισθὸς, pay. 
11 Cf, Eng. proto-plasm. 


2 Cf. a-gno-stic. 

4 Cf. Eng. ecclesia-stical ; Fr. église. 
6 Cf. Eng. tdio-syncrasy. 

7 Cf. Lat. petra, rock; petr-oleum, rock-oil. 8 Cf. Eng. mitcro-scope. 
10 Cf, Eng. pan-orama. 

12 Cf. Eng. synagogue. 

18 Note the comparative ending -repo-. 14 Cf. Lat fero, Eng. bear. 

15 Cf, Eng. chronic, chron-icle, chron-ometer, ana-chrom-ism. 








LESSON XXXII. 113 


3. Principal parts of δακρύω, τἱμάω, σιωπάω, δαπανάω. Translate 
βιάσομαι, ἐβιασάμην, βεβίασμαι, ἐβιάσθην. Conjugate φεύγω, 2d aorist 
active system : H. 320; G. 96, II. 

4, Translate: (a) He remained in the city many days. (b) Mes- 
sengers said (εἶπον) that the enemy (hostiles) broke down (καταλύω) 
the bridge on the following ἀὰγ. (6) The width of that river is twenty 
feet. (d) I give the soldiers pay for (= of) six months, besides honor- 
ing them in other respects. 

5. Classify : ὑποπτεύω, μισθόω, βιάζομαι, βάλλω, ἄγω, σιωπάω. 

6. Translate : (α) Πολὺν δὲ χρόνον ἑστώς, ἐσιώπα. (6) Μικρὸν ἐκφεύ- 
yet τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα μὴ κατακοπῆναι. () ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἤρξατο προϊέναι οὐκ 
ἐδύνατο τὴν ὁδὸν εὑρεῖν. (1) Οὐκ ἔφασαν ἐν Ἴσσο ς μένειν (4) "Eni δὲ 
τούτῳ οὐκ ἔφη χρήματα ἀποδιδόναι. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The prepositions πρός, παρά, ἐπί, διά, μετά, σύν, ἐν, εἰς, κατά. 
2. τὰ ἄλλα ἐτέμησε. 3. Indirect discourse after φημί. 4. Supplement- 
ary participle. 5. Verb accent. 6. Verb followed by two subjects. 
7. ἐπεὶ ἄρξαιντο. 8. Uses of the imperfect. 9. Cause. 10. Second 
aorist of ἄγω. 11. Conditional relative sentences (subjunctive, optative 
ἄν, general time ; discuss under each head). 12. Comparison ef "ἃ. 
jectives. 13. Special Greek uses of the genitive case. 14. Future 
conditions with probability. 





LESSON XXXIII. 
ANABASIS I. πὶ. 4,5. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 4. πρῶτον : on the construction, cf. μικρόν XXXII. 8 2. μεθ᾽ 

ὑμῶν, with you: cf. ἐφ᾽ & XXIT. 8 2. Meaning of perd with the accu- 

sative ? αὐτοὺς... βουλομένους, them wishing, i.e. because they 

wished. Note that the participle here marks the circumstances under 

which Clearchus fought. ἀφ-αιρεῖσθαι . . . Ἕλληνας... γῆν, to de- 

prive the Greeks of their land. Note, both nouns are accusative after the 
8 


























~ 


114 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


verb ; cf. αἰτεῖ κτὲ XVII. δέ-οιτο : indirect middle ; optative, be- 
cause the verb on which it depends is optative. ὠφελ-οίην, I might 
aid: from ὠφελέω ; cf. ὠφέλει XVI.; same as ὠφελέ-οιμι (= ὠφελοῖμι), 
cf. λύτοιμι. On the mode, cf. ἔχοιεν, εἴησαν ΧΙ. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν κτὲ, in re- 
turn for what I suffered well by him, %.e. in return for the favors I enjoyed 
at his hand. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν : for ἀντὶ ὧν, cf. μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν above. ἔ-παθ-ον, I 
suffered : from πάσχω (for παθ-σκω), theme wad. Tense here? ὑπ᾽ 
ἐκείνου, ab eo: cf. ὑπὸ ἀντιστασιωτῶν XVII. 

ὃ 5. ἀνάγκη, sc. ἐστί, it is necessity, necessary. 
betraying, ὦ. 6. to betray youand: nom. προδούς, = mpo-do-(vr)-s φιλίᾳ 
χρῆσθαι ; from ypdopa, dep. The dat. is like the Latin abl. with utor. 
Wev-od-pevo-v deceiving, t.e. to deceive, be false, and, etc.: from Ψεύδω. 
Note the loss of ὃ before ς in the aor. δίκαια just things, right: 
neut, plur. ὅτι ἂν δέῃ. whatsoever (= if anythiny) may be necessary : 
conditional relative sentence. Note that the subjunctive stands after 
a primary tense; on the optative in a conditional relative sentence, 
cf. ὅστις ἀφικνοῖτο IX. Note that when the subjunctive is used, ἄν fol- 
lows the relative. δέ-η : on the form, cf. Avy (pres. subj.). 
pat: from πάσχω ; fut. mei-co-pae (note, loss of 8), 2d aor. ἔπαθον. 
καὶ οὔποτε κτὲ, and never shull nobody (= anybody) say that, etc.: the 
redundant negative as in XXXII. § 26. ἐρεῖ : classed as fut. of φημί. 
ὡς : conj. like ὅτι, = that. ἀγαγών : on the form, cf. συν-ἤγαγον 
XXXII. § 2 εἱλόμην, I took for myself, I chose: from the theme ἐλ, 
pres. αἱρέω ; on the augment, cf. εἶχε XXI.; classed as 2d aor. of αἱρέω ; 
fut. aipnow, aor. εἷλον. 


« 
ὑμᾶς προδόντα, 


πείσ-ο- 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The neuter accusative of the adjective is used adverbially. 

2. μετά becomes μεθ᾽ in losing its final vowel before a vowel with 
the rough breathing. 

3. μετά with the genitive = with. This is more frequent in Attic 
prose than σύν with the dative. 

4. A circumstantial participle marks the circumstances under which 
ais act occurs: cause, condition, time, etc. 

5. ἀφ-αιρέω is followed by the accusative of the thing taken and of 
the person from whom it is taken. 

6. <A verb depending upon an optative may itself be in the optative. 








LESSON XXXIII. 


115 


7. The optative is regularly used in purpose clauses when the main 
verb is in a past tense. 


8. πάσχω is for παθσκω : the theme is mad; fut. πείσομαι for 
πενθ-σομαι. 


9. ὑπό with the genitive denotes agency ; with the dative, = under. 
10. -oinv as an optative ending has the same force as -οιμι. 
11. aipéw has the theme ἕλ in the 94 aorist. 


12. d:d0-vr, δο-ντ, form the nominative διδούς, δούς. 
13. χράομαι is followed by the dative, as the Latin utor is followed 


y ‘ J Ἷ 7 4 om ) 
by the ablative. χρά-εσθαι contracts ά-ε to ἢ, becoming χρῆσθαι 
ΓῚ , P , . . ; 
14. μοί is an enclitic, but ἐμοί is not. 


15. 


ε augments to εἰ in εἷλον, theme ἕλ, as in ἔχω, εἶχον (imperfect) 
16. πάσχω and αἱρέω have irregular principal parts. 
17. Redundant negatives do not annul but intensify one another 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON, 


. Future and Ist aorist 


system of Ave . 


2. Verb endings 
. First five classes of 


verbs. 


- Declension of διδούς 
. Principal parts of 


, 
πάσχω. aipew . 


3. Verbs of depriving . 
. Case with ypdopat . 
. Purpose clauses . 

- Participles 


). Contr. of a-e in ypd- 


ς > _. * 
. ἀντί, instead of, in return for. 5. 


ομαι 


when the second is a compound negative. 


H. 315, 316. 


Η. 


375-376, 379. 


. 392-402, 
. 242. 


. 533, 11; 539, 1. 
. 794. 


. 777, 
. 881. 
. 968, 980. 


. 412. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


aipew, I take. 


€ > 


ἢ ἀνάγκη, necessity. 


. 96. 
. 112, 114, 115, 


. 108, I.-V. 
. 68 (δεικνύς). 


. pages 330, 551, 
. 164, 
. 188, nN. 2. 
. BIG, I, 3. 
G. 275, 277, 279. 


G. 98, n. 2. 


4. ἀφ-αιρέω, I take away. 


sary. 


δέω, 7 want; δεῖ, it is neces- 

















INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


δίκαιος, just, right. 12. πάσχω, I suffer. 
. ἐξ-ελαύνω, 1 drive out, march. . mpo-didepe,* 1 betray. 
. ἐρῶ (future of φημί), I shall . τιμωρέω, I punish. 
say. . ὑπέρ,» above, in behalf of. 
εὖ,1 well. 3. χράομαι (deponent), J use. 
μετά (with gen.), with. Wevde,® I deceive. 
oida,? 1 know. . ὡς, ὅτε (conj.), that. 


5. EXERCISES. 


Analyze : éripwpovpny, ἀφαιρεῖσθαι, ἐκάλει, ψευσάμενον. 

Decline: Θρᾷξ, Ἑλλάς, ἐνοικῶν, γῆ, ὅς, φιλία. 

Explain: ἐκ τῆς for ἐξ τῆς : the ἀοοθηΐ ἴῃ εἴ τι, δή μοι. 

Principal parts of ὠφελέω, πολεμέω. πορεύομαι. 

Translate : (a) ᾿Ανθ᾽ ὧν εὖ ἔπαθε in’ ἐμοῦ, ἐπιβουλεύει δὴ τῇ ἀρχῇ. 
(ὁ) Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν πρὸς ὑμᾶς πολεμήσουσι καὶ πειράσουσι ὑμᾶς τὴν βασι- 
λείαν ἀφαιρεῖν. (Cc) Ἤθελον τῇ φιλίᾷ τῇ Κύρου χρῆσθαι.. (4) Eto», 
εἱλόμην. 

6. Translate: (a) We do not wish to fall into the hands of the 

great king. (6) I know that I shall not be able to force you. (c) I do 
not know if I am acting rightly ; but I chose to be with you, and to 


suffer whatever might be necessary. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Circumstantial participle. 2. Supplementary participle. 3. Spe- 
cial Greek uses of the accusative; of the genitive. 4. Accent of par- 
ticiples and infinitives. 5. ἐπεὶ dp£awro. 6. ἀντί, ὑπέρ, perd. 7. Not, 
with imperative. 8. The correlative of μέν ; of μέν, beginning § 4. 
9. Words in the attributive position. 10. Ending -ofmv. 11. Elision. 
12. Accent in the case of enclitics. 13. Redundant negatives. 14. The 
subjunctive and the optative in conditional relative sentences. 15. Uses 


of the imperfect. 


1 Cf. εὐ-δαίμων, having the gods well-disposed ; fortunate. 

2 Cf. Eng. wit, wot, wis-dom. 8 Cf. Eng. path-etic, sorrowful. 
4 Cf. Lat. pro-do. 5 Cf. Eng. over; Lat. super. 
6 Cf. Eng. pseudo-nym. 








LESSON XXXIV. 


LESSON XXXIV. 


ANABASIS I. mm. 6-8. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 6. ἐπεί, since. ἐμοὶ πείθεσθαι: cf. ἐπίστευον ara XXII. § 2; 
cf. the similar use of the dative in Latin, mihi parére, credere. 
καὶ σὺν ὑμῖν. .. ὅπου ἂν ὦ, and with you, on the one hand, I think 
I would be (puto me futurum esse), etc. Note the condition in σὺν 
ὑμῖν, if I were to be with you, — εἰ σὺν ὑμῖν εἴην. The conclusion might 
be τίμιος ἂν εἴην. οἶμαι shows the modesty of the speaker, In ἄν οἶμαι 
τίμιος, ἄν is construed with the inf. εἶναι, and shows that the inf. is here 
equivalent to the opt. Note the form of statement in modest fut. cond. : 
εἰ with the optative in the condition, ἄν with the optative in the conclu- 
sion. On confident fut. cond., with probability (ἐάν with subjunctive in 
the condition, future indicative, or some form expressing futurity, in the 
conclusion), cf. XXII. Nn. 4, εἰ καλῶς καταπράξειεν ὅπου ἂν ὦ : on the 
subjunct. ὦ, Lat. sim, cf ὅτι ἂν δέῃ, § 5. ὑμῶν δὲ ἔρημος... εἶναι, 
but if I should be, etc.... I would not be, methinks, ete. ovr dv... 
ovr’ ἄν : note the redundant negatives, the repeated ἄν, and the con- 
sequent emphasis. ὡς ἐμοῦ. .. ἰόντος. . . καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. tyre, 
eatis) κτέ, so make up your minds as if, i.e. on the understanding that, I 
am going, etc. ; cf. ὡς παρεχόντων XIX. 

ὃ 7. of τε. . . καὶ of ἄλλοι, both those of that one himself and the 
rest. Note the partitive apposition. αὐτοῦ, cf. αὐτοῦ Κύρου XXIX. 
§ 21. ἀκούσαντες ταῦτα ὅτι οὐ φαίη, hearing this, that he refused. 
What they heard was Κλέαρχος οὔ φησι (indic.). But Xenophon puts 
this in the indirect discourse ; hence the optative. On the form, cf. ε-ἴη 
XXIX. § 21; on of gy μι, cf. οὐκ ἔφασαν XX XIJ. πλείους, plires, 
contracted form, = πλείονες ; irregular comparative of πολύς ; cf. πλέον 
XXVI. § 11. Significations of παρά in this section ? 

ὃ 8. τούτοις : on the case, of. πράγμασιν XXXII. λάθρᾷ τῶν 
στρατιωτῶν, secretly (= without the knowledge) of the soldiers, “'The geni- 
tive as in εἴσω τῶν ὀρέων ΧΧΙΧ, θαρρεῖν, be of good cheer. Note the 
infinitive for the imperative of the direct discourse. ὡς καταστησο- 
μένων Kré as these matters being about to (= would) settle themselves into 
































118 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


the necessity; would turn out ull right. Uf. κατέστη VI. δέον : 
pres. part. neut., from δέω, 1 need. Note the substantive use, and cf. 
ἐκπεπτωκότας XIII. μεταπέμπεσθαι κτὲ, and he bude him send for 
[Aim, ὁ. ὁ. Clearchus]; but he (ipse, Clearchus] refused, etc. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


ἐπεί, = since, or when. 
πείθομαι is followed by the dative of the person persuaded. 
A preposition with its noun may have the force of a condition. 

4. εἰ, with the optative in the condition and ἄν in the conclusion, 
expresses a future condition modestly, or with less probability. 

5. ἐάν, with the subjunctive in the condition and the future in- 
dicative in the conclusion, expresses a future condition confidently or 
with probability. 

6. ay and the subjunctive are used in conditional relative sentences 
after primary tenses. 

7. Adjectives of want are followed by the genitive. 

8. A noun may be followed by words in partitive apposition 
with it. 

9. The infinitive with ἄν may stand in the indirect discourse for 
the optative with ἄν in direct discourse. 

10. The optative may stand for the indicative of the direct discourse 
after a secondary tense. 

11 πολύς is compared : πολύς, πλείων, πλεῖστος. 

12. παρά is followed by the genitive, dative, and accusative, with a 
difference of meaning. 

13. Adverbs are followed by the genitive: ὁ. 9. εἴσω, λάθρᾷ. 

14. The infinitive in the indirect discourse may represent the im- 
perative. 

15. The neuter participle, like the neuter adjective, is used sub- 
stantively. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Perfect system of 
foe. «ss ς Oy, ote +. 96. 
2. Seven classes of 
verte. . . . H. 808-404. . 108, L.-VII. 


LESSON XXXIV. 


. Conjugation οἵ 
εἰμί, subjunct., 
opt., inf., partic. H. 478. G. 127. 
Declension of éya, 
eee Fe G. 79. 
Conditions. . . H. 889,890,898, 6. 220, IT., 223, 224. 
900. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀλέξω.,1 ward off, protect. 12. οἶμαι, I think. 

amropew,? am perplexed. 13. πῇ, in some way; ὅπῃ, what- 
ἡ γνώμη. opinion. ever way. 

ἐπ-αινέω, I applaud. 14. πού, somewhere; ὅπου wher- 
ἐπεί, when, since. ever. 

ἕπομα'. I follow. 15. πολύς, much, many; πλείων, 
ἔρημος," barren, deprived of. more. 

ὁ ἐχθρός, enemy. 16. τὰ σκευοφόρα, baggage. 
Gappew am of good cheer. 17. στρατοπεδεύω,ϊ I encamp. 
AaOpa,° secretly. 18. ὁ σύμμαχος, ally. 

Aunéw, am distressed. 19. τίμιος, honored. 


tS _— 


τα σὺ συ μὰ φὸ 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Analyze: ἕψομαι, ἰόντος. ἐπήνεσαν, καταστησομένων. 

2. Decline: πατρίς, γνώμη. ἀκούσᾶς, βασιλεύς. 

3. Translate: (a) Ὁ δὲ ἐνόμισε ἡμᾶς αὑτῷ φίλους εἶναι. () Τοὺς 
ἐμοῦ κρείττονας φιλήσω ἀνθ᾽ ὧν εὐ πείσομαι ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν. (6) Οὕτω τὴν 
γνώμην ἔχω ὡς Κύρου τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἐπιβυυλεύσαντος. (4) “Ὅπῃ ἂν ἔρχηται, 


δι Aa ? ~ ’ τ 
αἰμῆσομαι σὺν αὐτῷ εἶναί τε καὶ πάσχειν. (4) Χαλεπῶς ἐφέρομεν τῷ 


στρατηγῷ ὅτι ἡμᾶς οὐκ ἑκόντας προϊέναι ἐβιάζετο. (f) Καὶ δὴ ἐσιωπῶμεν 
oa ‘ ἊΨ, ¢ ΄σ ‘ £ - , > > « o 
ὁρῶντες τὸν ἄνδρα ἑστῶτα καὶ δακρύοντα. (gy) Εἵλοντο δὲ μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ὅτι 
δέοι πάσχειν. 


1 Alex-ander, protector of men. 

2 From πόρος (Eng. pore). ἀ- is negative ; hence ἀπορέω, --- am without a way. 
8 Cf. γι-γνώ-σκω. 4 Eng. hermit. 5 From λαθ, in λανθάνω ; cf. Lat. lat-eo. 
6 From σκεῦος, baggage (cf. παρασκενάζω), and φέρω, I bear. 

7 στρατόπεδον, ἃ camp. ὃ σύν + udx-onae (Cf, μάχῃ XXV.) 

9 Cf. τιμή, ἀ-τιμάζω. 









































120 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


4. Translate: (a) And first they waged war (aor. partic.) against 
the inhabitants (partic.) of the city, and punished them mightily. 
(6) He cannot deprive the soldiers of their pay. (c) I came to aid 
them if there might Le any (mov, enclitic) need. (4) He led (partic.) 
the army into the large and prosperous city, and went away to his own 
(ἑαυτοῦ) country. (¢) Not being able to find the rest of the army, he 
was left behind, and then was cut down by the enemy. (7) It is said 
(that) those beautiful plains, which we see, bear much sesame and wheat. 
(9) Wherefore we remained a day in the city, but when on the following 
(lay) messengers came, saying that the enemy were coming, we fled as 
quickly as possible. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Case with πείθομαι. 2. Future conditions. 3. Conditional rela- 
tive sentences. 4. Construction with adjectives of want. 5. Partitive 
apposition. 6. αὐτός. 7. Optative in indirect discourse. 8. Declen- 
sion of comparatives. 9. Comparison of πολύς. 10. Παρά. 11. Case 
with certain adverbs. 12. Imperative in indirect discourse. 13. The 
substantive use of the participle. 14. Classification of five verbs in 
the text of the lesson. 15. Principal parts of the verbs belonging to 
the first two classes (except δέω, ἀκούω). 16. Special Greek uses of 
the dative. 


LESSON XXXV. 


ANABASIS 1. 1m. 9-11. 


1. NOTES. 


$9. μετὰ ταῦτα, after these [things], after this: cf. μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν XXXIIL. 
προσ-ελθόντας : note the force of the aor. partic., those who came, 2. 6. 
had come. Kai τῶν ἄλλων xré, and, of the others, the one wishing, i.e. 
any one who wished. ta μὲν δὴ Κύρου κτέ, the [interests] of Cyrus 
(clearly (8)) evidently have thus (i.e. are in the same relation) to us as 
our [interests] to him. τὰ Κύρου is here nearly equiv. to Κῦρος. Note, 


LESSON XXXV., 121 


μέν is used here without a following δέ : cf. τὴν μὲν πρόφασιν ΧΧῚ - 
cf. εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν ΧΙ, ἡμεῖς : 80. ἔσμεν, We are. συν-επόμεθα 
αὐτῷ: cf. συνέπρᾶττεν αὐτῷ XIV. ἐκεῖνος : 80. ἐστίν. is. 

ὃ 10. ἀδικεῖσθαι : sc. ἑαυτόν as the subject. καὶ μεταπεμπομένου 
αὐτοῦ, even though he sends ajter me. Note this force of ka, even, with 
the gen. abs. TO μὲν μέγιστον «ré, most greatly, i.e. chiefly, indeed 
being ashamed (i.e. becuuse I am ashamed). pév correlative with the 
following ἔπειτα μέγιστον : cf. μικρόν XXXII. αἰσχυνόμενος : cf. Bov- 
Aopevovs XXXII. § 4, n. σύν oda ἐμαυτῷ... αὐτόν, 1 am conscious 
to myself having deceived (= that I have deceived) him in all respects. 
(f. αὐτῷ 89. Note the supplementary use of the participle ; cf. παρὼν 
ἐτύγχανε III. ἐψευσ- μένος : perf. partic. Note the reduplication 
before the double consonant ; it is identical in form with the syllabic 
augment. On σ᾽ (for 8) before p, cf ἡρπασ-μένα XXXI. end. δε- 
δι-ώς : 2d perf. partic., from δείδω ; cf. λελοιπώς XXIX. ἐπιθὴ: 
subjunct. 3d sing., from ἐπι-τίθημι. Tense here? Note the usage after 
verbs of fearing. ὧν (= τούτων &), on account of those [things] which 
(= wherein) he, ete. Note the genitive of cause after the leyal expres- 
sion δίκην ἐπιθῇ ; of., however, πράγμασιν XXXII. The ἅ included 
in ὧν would be obj. of ἀδικεῖσθαι, called a cognate acc.; sO πάντα 
(ἐψευσμένος). 

ὃ 11. οὐχ Spa εἶναι - note the change in οὐκ before a rough breath- 
ing. pa, if subject of εἶναι, should be acc. (par). ἀμελεῖν, xré, 
to be careless of ourselves. Note the genitive ; cf. ἐπεμελεῖτο XI. 

σκεπ-τέον εἶναι, videndum esse, we must see. ἀσφαλέστατα 
μενοῦμεν, how we shall remain most safely: irom ἀσφαλέ-ως, comp. 
ἀσφαλέσ-τερον. μενοῦμεν : fut. ind. of μένω for μεν-σω. Note, o does 
not appear in the future of liquid verbs, and that e- contracts with the 
following vowel: pevotper for peréo μεν. ἄπ-ι μεν, ab-i-mus, we 
[shall] go away. ἕξομεν : from ἔχω. Note the rough breathing. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. μετά with the genitive means with ; with the accusative, after. 

2. The aorist participle sometimes refers to an act previous to that 
of the main verb, 

3. μέν is used occasionally without a following δέ. 
































29 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


4, ἔχω modified by an adverb = εἰμέ with predicate adjective. 


5. Compounds in συν- are followed by the dative. 
6. καί is often used where a participle denotes concession, and may 
he translated even, although. 
7. The circumstantial participle gives the circumstances under 
which an act occurs. 
8. Σύνοιδα is followed by the supplementary participle. 
9. Verbs beginning with a double consonant reduplicate with e-, 
so that their reduplication has the same form as a syllabic augment. 
10. A lingual mute (τ, δ, 8)becomes o before μ. 
11. δείδω forms the 2d perfect δέδια, δεδιώς 
12. Verbs of fearing in primary tenses are followed by μή with the 
subjunctive. 
13. The genitive of cause follows verbs of legal or judicial action. 
14. The neuter adjective or pronoun may be used as a cognate 
accusative. 
15. Verbs of caring are followed by the genitive case. 
16. The form of the verb in -réov denotes duty or necesstty 
17. The superlative of adverbs ends in -rara. 
18. The future of liquid verbs omits -σ, and shows contracted forms. 


19. ἔχω has the rough breathing in the future. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Comparison of μέγας . . . . H. 253. 


Declension of ἐμαυτοῦ͵ σεαυτοῦ, 
a ee eri  ἌἬ 80, . 80. 


λύω, Ist passive system . . . H. 319. . 96. 
Participle in -réos . . . . . . 478. 2. . 281, 1, 2. 


Verbs denoting action of senses 
eM, .. ewe . 742. . $71, 8, 


Verbs of judicial action . . . . 748. . 173, 2. 
Circumstantial participle . . . H. 969,979. 6. 277, 1-6. 


Supplementary participle. . . H. 982. . 279, 280. 


LESSON XXXY. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀδικέω 1 I injure, wrong. 14. ἐπιτίθημι, I place upon, inflict. 

αἰσχύνω͵ I shame. 15. ἕως, as long as. 

δμελέω," I neglect. . ἡμέτερος, noster, our. 

ἄνευ, without. . 6 ἰδιώτης, a private (soldier). 

ἄπ-ειμι (-ιέναι), I go away. . καθεύδω, I sleep. 

αὐτοῦ. here. 9. pera (with acc ), after. 

ἀσφαλής, safe. . ὁ peoboddrns,* paymaster. 

a'haréws, safely. - τὸ ὄφελος,5 uxe, profit. 

δείδω, 1 fear. 22. προσ-έρχομαι ( ἢλθον), I come 

δῆλος, evident. to, join. 

δῆλον ὅτι, it is evident thut, 3. oxerropa,® I examine. 
evidently. 24. χρή, it is necessary. 

ἡ δίκη. justice. 25. ὥρα, hora,’ season, time. 

τὰ ἐπιτήδεια μι vvisions. 26. ὥσπερ, just as. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Συνάξω τε τοὺς ἐμαυτοῦ φίλους καὶ ἀποδώσω, 
αὐτοῖς ἐπιτήδεια εἰς τὴν τοῦ βίου τροφήν. (h) Σκεπτέον δ᾽ ἐστὶν ὅπως 
τούτους τοὺς μεγάλους ποταμοὺς διαβαίνειν δύνωμαι. (c) Δίκην ἐπιθήσω 
ὧν νομίζω ὑπ᾽ ἐχθρῶν ἠδικῆσθαι. (/) Ἐὰν δὴ ἐμαυτοῦ τινι κρείττονι εἰς 
χεῖρας ἔλθω, βασιλείαν οὐκ ἔτι δυνήσομαι ἕ ἔχειν. (ἐε) Ἔκ δὲ τούτου ἀνίσταντο 
τέτταρες ὧν δὴ δύο ἐλεξάτην ἃ ἐγιγνωσκέτην. (7) Δύο δὲ ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου ἐγκε- 
λεύστω ἤτην. 


2. Translate: (a) The boys are not willing toobey me. (b) I can- 
not indeed follow with my friends, but will suffer whatever may be 
necessary. (6) He thought we were (as good as) a fatherland to him. 
(4) Without you I do not think I should be honored wherever I might 
ye (6) Thus make up your minds, that I follow whithersoever you 
also may go. 


1 δίκη, justice; d-, negative, as in ἀ-τιμασθείς. 

2 ἀ-, asin ἀδικέω. Cf. ἐπι-μελέομαι. 8 Cf. Eng. idiot. 
* From μισθός and the theme do (δίδωμι). 

5 Cf. ὠφελέω. 6 C/. Eng. scep-tic. 7 Cf. Eng. hour. 














STE aey Soe ae STS πῸ 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Cause. 2. Expressions of duty, necessity. 3. Uses of the geni- 
tive. 4. 6° ἑαυτοῦ. 5. Position of ἑαυτοῦ. 6. Tenses of the parti- 
ciple; time denoted by them. 7. ἤσχῦνα ; αἰσχυνῶς 8. Declension 
of ἰδιώτης. 9. τέ. .. τές. 10. Comparison of adverbs ; of adjectives. 
ll. ἕξω. 12. Cognate accusative. 13. Lingual mutes before μ. 
11. οὕτως ἔχει. 15. Construction with verbs of feuring. 16. Classiti- 
cation of twelve verbs in this Lesson. 17. ἠδικῆσθαι; also principal 
parts of ἀδικέω. 





LESSON XXXVI. 


ANABASIS 1. πη. 12-14 


1. NOTES. 


ὃ 12. ὁ δ᾽ ἀνὴρ xré, but the man [= Cyrus] ts (sc. ἐστί) worthy of 
much (i.e. valuable) to whomsoever he may be a friend: cf. ὅπου 


ἂν ὦ XXXIV. δύναμιν : modified by the following three adjec- 
lives. Note, nai... «at... «at, both. ..and... and. “ὦ 
γάρ, etenim, and [1 say we see and know} for: cf. XII. πόρρω. .. 
αὐτοῦ, apart from him: cf. εἴσω τῶν ὀρέων XXIX. xaé-7-0 Oat : 
(from κάθ-η μαι, dep.; perf., with no pres. form ; cf. οἶδα, Lat. memini. 
@pa, sc. ἐστίν. | 

ἢ 13. ἐκ τούτου ayiota-vro Kré, some from this (= thereupon) kept 
risinj. Tense and theme of the verb ? ἐκ τοῦ αὐτομάτου ; cf. 
XXVIII. 817. ἡ ἀπορία, the difficulty both to remain ; 1. ὁ. as regarded 
remaining. Note the dependence of the infinitive on the noun. 

ἃ 14. ὡς τάχιστα, quam celerrime: cf. ὡς μάλιστα ΧΙ. εἶπε 

. ἑλέσθαι, tolil them to choose: cf. εἱλόμην XXXIII. § 5. His direct 
words were, ἑλώμεθα, let us choose, or ἕλεσθε, choose ye. Note the change 
of the imperative to the infinitive in the indirect discourse ; cf. θαρρεῖν 
XXXIV. § 8. So also the following infinitives— ἀγοράζεσθαι, ov- 
σκευάζεσθαι, αἰτεῖν (twice), συντάττεσθαι, πέμψαι --- depend upon εἶπε. 

ἐλθόντας... αἰτεῖν, to go and ask: cf. διαβᾶς ἐξελαύνει ΧΧΙΥ͂, 





LESSON XXXVI. : 125 


καταβὰς ἤλασε XX1X. 8 23. Κῦρον αἰτεῖν πλοῖα: of. αἰτεῖ XVII. ὡς 
ἀπο-πλέ-οιεν, in order that they might, etc. On the form, ef. ἔχ-οιεν ΧΙ.: 
on the mode, cf. λάβοι XI., ἵνα opedoiny XXXIII. Note, the main 
verb (εἶπε) is in a past tense. ots . . . ἀπ-άξει, who (whoever he is) 
will, etc. Note the predicate position of Prrias, — not through a friendly 
country. διδῷ : subjunct., 3d siffy. of δίδωμι. Tense ? τὴν 
ταχίστην ὁδόν) : cf. XXVIII. § 20. πέμψαι : cf. πέμψας XXVIII. 


προ-κατα-ληψομένους, [men] who should take, with the purpose of tak- 
ing: fut. partic. (dep.) of λαμβάνω, theme λαβ, here strengthened to 
An8. On the fut. partic. denoting purpose, cf. ὡς ἀποκτενῶν VII. 


ὅπως μὴ φθάσωσι, in order that they may anticipate. Note the sub- 
junctive for the optative, the secondary tense εἶπε having for the mo- 
ment lost its foree. On the form, cf. Av-cwor. Note the plural form, 
the speaker having others besides Cyrus in mind. — 
cf. ἡρπασμένα XXXI. end; ἐκπεπτωκότας XIII. 


ἀν-ηρπακ-ότες : 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


Adjectives signifying worthy are followed by the genitive. 
Certain adverbs are followed by the genitive : πόρρω, εἴσω, πλήν. 
hat is a defective perfect. 
The infinitive may depend upon a noun, like the Latin gerund, 
The imperative becomes infinitive in the indirect discourse. 
ὡς, ὅτι, that, do not introduce the infinitive. 
The first of two consecutive acts is often expressed by the aorist 
participle. 
8. Verbs of asking, begging, are followed by two accusatives. 
9. The future participle expresses purpose, 
10. ὅπως μή expresses negative purpose. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. φιλέω, present system. . . . H. 324, G. 98. 

2. Conjugation of εμέ . . . . H. 478. G. 127. 

3. Genitive with certain adjectives H.'753,c,f. G. 180, 1. 

4. Conditional sentences . H. 889-891. G. 220, L, II. 




















INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


4, VOCABULARY. 


ἀγοράζω, buy. 11. οἷος, qualis, what, of what 
ἀν ίστημι, raise up; mid. 12. ὁμοίως, equally, alike. [sort. 
stand up, rise. ° 13. πόρρω, far from, away from. 
ἄξιος, worth, worthy. 14. προ-κατα-λαμβάνω, seize in ad- 
ἀπο-πλέω, sail away. vance. 
ἡ ἀπορία." perplexity. 15. προσ-ποιέομαι, pretend. 
ἄριστος," best. . σπεύδω, hasten. 
ἐγ-κέλευστος,8 instructed. 
ἐπίσταμαι, know. . φθάνω, anticipate. 
ὁ ἡγεμών, leader. 9. φίλιος," friendly. 
κάθημαι, sit down, am en- 20. χαλεπός, hard, violent. 


συ-σκευάζομαι, pack up. 


camped, 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Decline : φίλιος, ἄξιος, Spa, δύναμις, οὗτος, ἡγεμών ; present 
system of δοκέω. 


2. Translate: (a) Αὕτη ἡ ἱππικὴ δύναμις od πολλοῦ ἀξία ἐστίν. 

? ? - - 

(0) Πάντες ἐπίστασθε ὅτι οἷς ἂν φίλιος ἦ ἰσχυρῶς τετίμηκε. (c) “Qpa 
> ‘ a“ , 4 " , > ? ‘ \ ΜΝ ε 

ἐστὶν ταῦτα γιγνώσκειν ἃ ἄριστά ἐστιν. (d) Eis δὲ δὴ ἀνίσταται ὡς 

λέξων ὅτι ἡ τοῦ ἄγοντος ἀπορίᾷ μεγάλη ἐστίν (6) ᾿Ἐντεῦθεν οὖν ἐπειρᾶτο 

ἐξελαύνειν διὰ πολεμίᾶς τῆς χώρᾶς. (7) Δεδιότες μὴ αὑτοὺς λαβὼν δίκην 

ἐπιθείη ἀντὶ τούτων ἃ ἠδικήθη, ἀπέφευγον. (4) Αὐτὸν δὲ ἐπήνουν, ὅτι ἔλεγεν 


ὰ» Ἢ μ 
a ἐγνὼ ἄριστα εἰναι. 


3. Translate: (a) After this he collected his soldiers and crossed 
the river, (Ὁ) If it is necessary, I will follow and suffer with you. 
(c) I will obey the king, wherever he may lead me. (d) O fellow- 
generals, our commander is no longer (οὐκέτι) our paymaster if we do 
not obey him. (6) The soldiers crossed the river without the knowl- 
elge of the generals, (7) It seems to me that we must see what opinion 
our soldiers have. (0) They were pretending to be willing to follow 
wherever he might go. 


1 Cf. ἀπορῶν (= ἀπορέων) XX XTV. 8 From ἐν + κελεύω, I order. 
2 Uf. Eng. aristo-cracy, best rule. 4 US, φιλέω, φιλία, 








LESSON XXXVII. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Negative purpose. 2. ὡς, ὅτι, in introducing the indirect dis- 
course. 3. The imperative in the indirect discourse. 4. Construction 
with airéw, aipéw. 5. Case following ἐξ, ἐν, ἄνευ. εἰς, ἀπό, ἀντί, σύν. 
6. Comparison. 7. General conditions. 8. Contraction of ε- with 
fullowing vowels, 9. Use of.the future participle. 10. Future con- 
ditions. 11. Subjunctives and optatives in the Lesson. 12. Genitive 
and dative singular endimgs of Ist declension. 13. Middle and passive 
deponents. 14. Mutes before ao; o before other consonants. 





LESSON XXXVII. 
ANABASIS 1. m1. 15-17. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 15. ὡς μεν στρατηγήσοντα κτὲ, let no one of you speak on the suppo- 
sition that Iam (as I being) about to general (1. 6. to hold) this general- 
ship, t.e. to hold this office, to lead this army. Note μηδείς = nobody, with 
the imperative. δ᾽ ἃ . . . ποιητέον [ἐστίν), on account of which 
this is not to be done by me, i.e. why I must not do this. Cf. διὰ δὲ 
τοῦτο XXV. § 8. Note the dative of the agent with the verbal adjec- 
tive; but cf. ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν XXXV. §10; also the Latin usage with the 
participle in -dus. Cf. σκεπτέον XXXV. 8 11. ὡς δὲ τῷ ἀνδρὶ Kré, 
[but let each say or think, sc. ἀλλὰ ἕκαστος λεγέτω, from the preceding 
μηδεὶς λεγέτω] that I will obey, etc. ὡς, as in ἐρεῖ οὐδεὶς ὡς XXXIII. 

mei-co-pat, for πείθσο-μαι : from πείθω ; cf. φυγαδς, φυγάς. ἡ δυ- 
νατὸν [ἐστιν] μάλιστα : cf. 7 ἐδύνατο XXIII. ἵνα εἰδ-ῆτε κτὲ, that 
you may know, etc.: subjunct., from οἶδα. On the mode, cf. ὅπως μὴ 
φθάσωσι XXXVI. ὥς tis καὶ ἄλλος, as much as possible as also 
any one else of men (1. 6. as well as or better than any other man). 


δ 16. τοῦ κελεύοντος, of him who urged that they ask, etc. ὥσπερ 
κτέ, as if Cyrus were on the home trip: ὡς Πισιδῶν XIX. as... εἴη, 
that it was foolish: cf. ὡς ἐπιβουλεύ οὐ VI.; εἴη XXXVI. § 13; 











128 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


XXIX. 8 21. 
does not change its acute to a grave (ri). 
disadvantage. 


τί κωλύει, Quid obstat. Note that the interrogative 
ἡμῖν, for us, to our 


8 17. ὀκν-οίην ἄν, | should be reluctant. Note, the reluctance is not 
stated as a fact (*/ um reluctant”), but as a possibility, potentially. 
On the form, cf. ὀφελ-οίην. Compare this potential optative with the 
conclusion of future conditions with less probability. ἃ δοίη, which 
he might give. Theme? Note, ἄν is not used in conditional relative 
sentences where the verb is optative. μὴ. καταδύ-σῃ κτέ, 
lest he sink us with the . . . themselves. Note, the dative denotes 
accompaniment even without σύν; so ἡγεμόνι ἕπεσθαι; but cf. ἕψο- 
μαι XXXIV. ᾧ δοίη, for ὃν δοίη ; cf. τῶν πόλεων ὧν XV. 

dev . . . ἐξ-ελθεῖν, ['0 αἱ place] whence tt will not be [ possible] to, etc. 

ἄκοντος. . . Κύρου, Cyro nolente : connect with the intervening 
ἀπ-ιών. λαθ-εῖν. . . ἀπ-ελθών, to escape him. (in) going away: da, 
theme of what verb ! 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The participle modified by ὡς indicates a merely supposed or 
possible fact, and does not necessarily convey the idea of reality. 

2. μηδείς, = nobody, with the imperative. 

3. did, with the genitive, = through; with the accusative, = on 
account of. 

4. With the verbal adjective in -réos, the dative expresses the agent. 

5. ὡς serves the same purpose as ὅτε in introducing the indirect 
discourse. 

6. The interrogative ris retains its acute accent in connected 
dliscourse. 

7. The Greek dative, like the Latin dative, expresses advantage or 
disadvantage. 

8. A fact is stated doubtfully or potentially by the optative with ἄν. 

9. The potential optative resembles in form the conclusion of future 
conditions with less probability. 

10. Occasionally the relative pronoun agrees in case with its ante- 

cedent. 





i 


ee ΨΦ' τν- LA a ἐμὰς φορές τος ὡς ashe 


LESSON XXXVII. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declension of εὐγενής Η. 230. G. 66 (ἀληθής). 
Declension of ris (inter- 

rogative and relative) H.277 anda. G. 84 and ν. 9. 
H. 503, I. 14; 504, 3-521 
G. 281, I. and note. 
G. 226, 2b. 


G. 183, 278, 1. 


τελέω, καλέω, AV, αἰνέω 
Verbal adjectives in -τέος Ἡ. 988, 991. 
Potential optative H. 872. 

Genitive absolute . H. 970, 971. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἄκων,3 unwilling 11. μηδείς, οὐδείς, nobody. 
ἄρχω, I rule, begin. 12. ὅθεν, whence. 
δυνατός ὃ possible, able. 13. ὀκνέω, hesitate. 
δύω, enter, cause to enter. 14. ἡ mpakis,® business. 
κατα-δύω, sink. 15. στρατηγέω, am general, com- 
ἐμ-βαίνω," go in, embark. mand. 
ἡ στρατηγία, military plan. 
17. φοβέω,5 frighten ; pass., 7 am 
frightened, fear. 


ἡ φλυαρία, nonsense. 


Boo to 


5 
6. 
ti 


€v-opdw, see into, discover. 
εὐήθης. simple, foolish. 

ἡ εὐήθεια, simplicity, folly. 
Avpaive, spoil, ruin. 


so © 


ὑπὸ 
- 
. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Analyze: στρατηγήσοντα, ἕλησθε. ἐπιδεικνύς, καταδύσῃ. Decline 
πρᾶξις. 

2. Translate: (a) Ὡς δὴ φοβούμενόν με τοῦτον μηδεὶς αὐτῶν λεγέτω. 
(0) “Ope γὰρ πολλὰ ὄρη Se ὧν ἡμῖν ὁδοὶ ποιητέαι εἰσίν. (c) Εὐηθέστατόν 
ἐστι τὴν τοῦ ἡγεμόνος πρᾶξιν λῦμαίνεν (ἡ) Πείσομαι τῷ ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν 
ἔλησθε. (+) ἘἘπείθοντο ὃν ὑμεῖς ἔλοισθε. Cf) Ἠρώτων δὴ τί κωλύσειν 
τὰ ὄρη αὑτοῖς προκαταληφθῆναι. εἰ τούτοις τοῖς ἡγεμόσι πιστεύοιεν, οἷς 
βασιλεὺς δοίη 


1 The teacher will be obliged to pick out these verbs, if he is using Goodwin's 
Grammar, from the Catalogue of Verbs, pp. 329 7. 
2 From ἀ = not (called a- privative), and ἑκών, willing. 
8 Cf. δύναμαι, δύναμις. 4 ἐμ for ἐν, cf. συμ-πράττω XIV., Vocabulary, 
δ᾽ Cf. πράττω. 6 Cf. Eng. hydro-phobia. | 
9 














130 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. Translate: (a) The army will follow wherever the guides may 
lead. (ὁ) He said that (εἶπε ὅτι) the army would follow wherever the 
guides wight lead. (6) I should hesitate to follow where the foolish 
yo in (ἦλθον with prefix εἰς). (4) Going away without his permission, 
they would desire to elude him in going away. () But that would be 
(f) The barbarians began to rush with a shout, as was 
their custom. (9) They did not wait at the sates, for great fear had 
seized them. (h) There are many large and strong bridges over the 
full rivers which flow through the well-watered gardens of the king's 


wife. 


impossible. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The long and short forms, pod ἐμοῦ, etc, of ἐγώ. 2. Lingual 
mutes before lingual mutes; before o 3. Labial mutes before μ. 
4. Uses of the participle. 5. Conditional sentences. 6. Conditional 
relative sentences. 7. General conditions. 8. Agreement of the rela- 
tive. 9. Some uses of ἄν. 10. Parts of αἰτέω. πιστεύω, ὀκνέω. 
11. Classification of six additional verbs in this Lesson. 12. Declen- 
sion of liquid stems. 13. Conjugation of the present system of ὀκνέω. 


14. Relative clauses introduced by πρίν (until). 





LESSON XXXVIII. 


ANABASIS [. mr 18-21. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 18. οἵ-τινες ἐπιτήδειοι [eioiv|, whoever (i.e. such persons as) are suit- 


able: cf. ὅστις ἀπάξει XXXVI. 14. ἐρωτᾶν: cf. δαπανᾶν XV. 

τί... ἡμῖν χρῆσθαι, what use he wishes to make of us: SG τί κω- 
λύει XXXVII.; cf. φιλίᾳ χρῆσθαι XXXII. χρῆσθαι, for χρά-εσθαι: 
note, a-e here contracts to ἡ instead of ἃ 11. ἐὰν μέν : note the 
a mapanAnoia . . . ξένοις, like to what, i.e. the 


following ἐὰν δέ. 
ness Cin which} ἔπεσθαι καὶ ἡμᾶς, that we too follow: dependent 
business fin which |}. ? 


upon δοκεῖ. κακίους : cf. πλείους XXXIV. τῶν . .. συν- 
ava-Bavrwv, those who went up with. On the case, cf. Κύρου ΧΧΧΙ. 25. 





OTSA RN RE Stee ie i oat my 


LESSON XXXVIII. 131 


§ 19. Note the form of conditional statement - δυκεῖ with its de- 
pendent infinitive (referring to a future line of action) takes the place of 
the future indicative in the conclusion.1 ἀξιοῦν, sc. δοκεῖ : cf. 
ἠξίον XIV. πεισθέντα : trum πείθω. Note the 
euphonic changes. πρὸς φιλίαν ἀφ-ιέ-ναι, to-let-yo in a Srvendly 
manner (lit. with a view to friendship). ἀφ ίη-μι, 1] release, theme é, 
ποῦ to be confused with efus, εἰμί. . ἂν ἑποίμεθα, 
if we should thus follow . we should follow. Note the form of con- 
ditional statement ; ef. ἔρημος ov XXXIV. 6. 
of. Tap nyy €tA-€ XII. 


πείσαντα 


7 ΄ 
OUT@ ἑπόμενοι .. 
> ~ 
av αγγεῖλο-αι : 


δ 20. ἠρώτων : frum ἐρωτάω. On the two accusatives, cf. αἰτεῖ 
XVII, ἀφ αἱρεῖσθαι XXXIII. 4 
cf. συν-ανα-βάντων, § 18. δοκέω : aor. ἔδοξε, not ἐδόκησα. Kav : 
contracted from καὶ ἄν (= ἐάν). on the long form 
of the theme vowel in the 2d aorist οἱ -ye verbs before -vat, cf. ἀπο- 
στῆναι XIII., δοῦναι XXVI. 12. ἤν (= ἐάν, cf. qv VIII): note 
the form of conditional statement. 


ta δόξαντα : on the tense, 


emt Gei-va : 


ὃ 21. ὑπισχνεῖται : cf. ὑπο-σχόμενος XXII. τοῦ pnv-ds, of the 
month,? each month. Cf. this with the use of the accusative, throughout 
the month. τῷ στρατιώτῃ, to each soldier. 


Compare the indirect discourses in this section. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. ὅστις is used with reference to persons indefinite in the mind of 
the writer or speaker, 

2. d-ew (infinitive) contracts to ἂν. 

3. a-e contracts to ἡ in χράομαι 

4. Adjectives of likeness, as in Latin, are followed by the dative. 

5. The aorist participle occasionally has the use of the aorist indica- 
tive in denoting an act as brought to pass in some past time. 

6. The genitive follows adjectives of the comparative degree. 

7. Conditions and conclusions are very frequently expressed in 
mixed forms. 

8. inus, I send, let, has the theme €. 


1 Thus, it seems best that we demand, is equivalent to saying, we shall wisely 
demand, or let us demand. 

2 So in English, “he goes to church of a Sunday,” — which has become the less 
idiomatic, — “on Sunday,” each Sunday.” 


























139 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


9. The Ist aorist of liquid verbs is formed without the suffix -ca - 

but, instead, the theme vowel is strengthened. 

10. Verbs of asking are followed by one accusative of the person ail 
another accusative of the thing. 

11. -μι verbs strengthen the final vowel of the theme in the 2d aorist 
before the ending -vat. 

12. The genitive denotes time in such expressions as by days 
per month, each year. 

13. The indirect discourse has the main verb in the infinitive ; or 
in a finite mode, introduced by ὡς or ὅτι 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
TE SM ere ΚΝ ὃ Se ἢ 


Conjugation of present system 

7 ee ee ne ol A ek 
Η. 477. 
H. 773. 


+, 121,123 
3. 127, LI. 
G. 186. 


Conjugation of εἶ. . . 
Adjectives of likeness 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀν-αγγέλλω,} I report, bring 13. κακός, bad. 

back word. 14. κακίων, worse. 
ἀπ-έχω, hold off, am distant. ὅμως, nevertheless. 
ἀπο-κρΐνομαι, I reply. ὅστις. whoever; ὅτι, whatever. 
ἀφ inut, send away, dismiss. 
δεῦρο, hither. 
dwdexa,? tivelve. 


exet,® there. 


παραπλήσιος, like. 
πρόθῦμος. eager ; warm friend. 
προσ. attéw, ask besides. 
ἡ browia® suspicion. 
φαίνω. I show. 

, 
aivopa, show myself, ap- 


ἐπικίνδυνος," dangerous. 

ἐπίπονος laborious. 
10. ἐπιτήδειος, suitable. pear. 
pavepds,® evident. 
χρήζω, I desire. 


ll. ἐρωτάω, I ask. 
12. ἡμι-όλιος,δ one and a half. 


1 Cf. παρ-αγγέλλω ΧΙΠ, 

2 From δύο (two) + δέκα (ten), as tawelve has two as one of its elements. 
8 So ἐκεῖνος, he yonder; cf. Ger. jen-er. 4 Ch. κινδυνεύω. 
5 Cf. ἡμι- = ἃ, Lat. semi; datos, from ὅλος, the entire. 

7 Cf. Eng. pheno-menon. δ From ¢av, the theme of paiva. 


6 CS. ὑποπτεύω. 





+ rr le ninthiinles Say Gav: 


LESSON XXXVIII. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) ᾿Ἐὰν ἡ πρᾶξις μείζων ἦ τῆς πρόσθεν οὐχ ἔψονται. 
(0) Στρατηγοί, οἵτινες ἄριστοι ἦσαν, προσῆκον εἰς τὴν τοῦ βασιλέως 
σκηνήν. (0) Καὶ ἐμοὶ ἔδοξε ἡμᾶς πλείους εἶναι τῶν οἴκαδε πρόσθεν 
ἀπελθόντων. (4) Kav δή μοι ἐπιβουλεύσῃ, χρήζω δίκην ἐπιθεῖναι αὐτῷ 
(:) Αὕτη ἡ πόλις τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀπέχει χϊλίους σταδίους. 


2. Translate: (a) I come in order that you may know that I am 
a friend to you. (ὁ) If he will give usa guide, I will follow him as a 
zealous friend. (c) There were many suspicions that the commander 
was marching against the king. (4) Cyrus was evidently wishing to 
become king. (6) They called (partic.) an assembly, and chose men to 
tell the king those things which seemed best to the army. (7) They 
indeed had suspicions that, if he had been there, the mercenaries would 
have punished him. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰς τὴν πόλιν. 2. Uses of the 
aorist participle. 3. Declension of comparatives in -@y. 4. Case 
after comparatives. 5. Potential optatives. 6. Case after χράομαι. 
7. Words for if. 8. τοῖς στρατιώτ ats ὑποψία ἦν. 9. Principal parts 
Of δίδωμι, δοκέω, πείθω, λείπω παύω, κελεύω, axovw. 10. Declension 
of ἀσφαλής. 11. Classification of six verbs in the Lesson. 12. En- 
clitic forms of the personal pronouns. 183. ἀπεκρίνατο ; quantity of ¢; 
ὅτι ἀκούοι; the mode. 14. Accent and enclitics. 












































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XXXIX. — REVIEW. 


[In preparing this Review Lesson, follow closely the directions given 
with Lesson X.] 


1, TEXT: Awnasasis I. τι. 25, through Chap. rt. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. Crasis: H.76; G. 11. 

2. Declension: (1) εὐγενής, H. 230; G. 66 (ἀληθής). (b) διδούς, 
H. 942; G. 68 (δεικνυς). (2) πολύς, Η. 947; G. 70. (4) μέγας 
(comparison), H. 253; ἃ. 73, 1,4. (e) ἐγώ, ov, H. 261; G. 79. 
(f) ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, H. 266; G. 80. (9) τίς, ris, H. 277 
anda; G. 84. 

3. The Verb: (7) Avo, present, future, Ist aorist, perfect, and 
Ist passive systems, H. 314-319; G. 96. (b) φιλέω, present system, 
H. 324; G. 98. (c) δίδωμι, present system, H. 330, 414; G. 121, 
123. (ὦ) Verbal endings, H. 375, 376, 379; G. 112, 114, 115. 
(9) Accent of the infinitive and participle, H. 389; G. 26, (1), (2), (3). 
(/) Classes of verbs, H. 392-404; 6. 108, 1.-VII. (9) Reduplica- 
tion of verbs beginning with a vowel, H. 367; 6. 101,3. (h) Parti- 
ciples in -réos, H. 475,2; G. 281, 1, 2. (ὃ εἶμι, H. 477; G. 127, TT. 
(j) epi, H. 478; G. 127, L. (0) Principal parts of πάσχω, aipew, 
H. 533, 11, 539, 1; G. pp. 330, 351. 

4. Syntax: («) Position of ἑαυτοῦ. H. 673,5; G. 142, 4, wn. 3. 
(>) ra ἄλλα, H. 704; 6. 142, a M.S (c) Verbs of depriving, 
H. 724; G. 164: (d) of action of the senses or mind, H, 742; 
α. 171,2: (¢) of judicial action, H. 745; G. 178,9. (f/) Genitive 
with certain adjectives, H. '753, ¢, f; G. 180, 1. (7) Case with adjec- 
tives of likeness, H. 773; G. 186. (h) Attempted action, H. 832: 
G. 200, N. 3. (/) Potential optative, H. 872; G. 226, 2 hb. (7) Pur- 
pose clauses, H. 881; G. 216, 1, 3. (0) Conditions, H. 889-891, 
898, 900; G. 220, I., II., 223, 224. (ἢ Participles, cireum- 
stantial, H. 968, 969; G. 275, 277, 1-6. (m) Genitive abso- 
lute, H. 970, 971; G. 278, 1. (1) Participles, supplementary, 
Η. 980-982; G. 279, 280. (0) Verbal auljectives in -réos (syntax), 
H. 988, 991; G. 281. 





LESSON XXXIX. — REVIEW. 


1. ἀγοράζω. 
2. ἀδικέω. 
3. aipew αἱρέομαι. 
. αἰσχύνω. 
. ἀλέξω. 
᾿. ἀμελέω. 
. av αγγέλλω. 


» Ul 
- ἄν-ιστημι. 


My 
επτειίμι 


. ἀπ ἔχω. 

+ ἀπο-κρνομαι. 
2. ἀπ-ὀλλῦμι. 
3. ἀπο-πλέω. 

. ἀπορέω. 

. ἄρχω. 

. ἀφ-αιρέω. 

. ἀφ-ίημι. 

. βιάζομαι. 

. γιγνώσκω. 

. δακρυω. 

. δαπανάω. 
2. δείδω. 

. δέω. 

. δύω 
5. ἐθέλω. 


> > ΄ 
. εἰσ-ελαύνω. 


[ > , 
- ὁ ἀκινάκης. 
; ἢ ἀνάγκη 
« ‘ , ΄ 
. τὸ ἀνδράποδον. 
. ἧἥ ἀπορία. 
€ , 
+H) γνώμη. 
. ¢ x7 
. ἢ OLKN. 
. TO δῶρον. 
ε > ‘- 
. ἢ ἐκκλησίᾳ. 
Α ᾿ ΄ 
+ Ta ἐπιτήδεια. 
« »γῃ 
. ἢ εὐήθεια. 
ll. 6 ἐχθρός 


27. 
28. 
29. 
90. 
31. 
32. 
33. 
34. 


. ἐρωτάω. 


3. VOCABULARY. 


VERBS. 
ἐκ-φεύγω. 
ἐμ-βαίνω. 
ἐν-οράω. 
ἐν τυγχάνω. 
ἐξ-ελαύνω. 
ἐπ-αινέω. 
ἐπίσταμαι. 


ἐρῶ (pnpi). 


. ἐπι-τίθημι. 


37. 


[ω 2 
ἕπομαι. 
εὑρίσκω. 


. θαρρέω. 


. καθεύδω. 


. καθ-ηδυπαθέω. 


2. κάθ-ημπι. 


. Κατα δνω. 
. κατα-πετρόω. 
. κόπτω. κατα-κόπτω. 


. ATpaive. 


. λυπέω. 


μισθόω. 


3 
. οἶδα. 
>? 
. οἶμαι. 
ἦ᾽ , 
+ OKVE®@. 


2. ὁράω. 


NOUNS. 
ἡγεμών 
ἰδιώτης. 
λόχος 
μισθοδότης. 
ὄλεθρος 


. τὸ ὄφελος. 

¢ 
- ἢ πατρίς. 
. ἡ πίστις. 

« ~ 
- 9 πρᾶξις. 

A Ld 

+ Ta σκευοφόρα. 


€ 


2. ἢ στολή. 


ὀργίζω. 


. πάσχω. 
- πλανάομαι. 
. προ-δίδωμι. 
. προσ-αιτέω. 
- προσ ερχομαι. 
. προσ-ποιέω. 
0. σιωπάω. 
jl. σκέπτομαι. 
. σπεύδω. 
3. στρατηγέω. 
. στρατοπεδεύω. 
Ὁ. συν-άγω. 
0. ov σκευάζομαι. 
. Tide. 
8. τἱμωρέω. 
9. ὑπο-λείπω. 


75. χράομαι. 
). Χρή. 
«Οχρῃζω. 
. Ψεύδω. 


στρατηγία. 
στρεπτός. 
σύμμαχος. 


᾿ς, ἡ ὑπερβολή. 
. τὸ ὑποζύγιον. 
. ἡ ὑποψία. 

- ἡ φλυαρία. 

- 1) χείρ 

- ὁ χρόνος. 


2. τὸ Ψέλιον. 
e - 


bad 


3. ἢ ὥρα. 















































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


ADVERBS. 
. αὐτοῦ. 8. λάθρᾷ. . πού, ὅπου. 
ἀσφαλῶς. 9. ὅθεν. . πρόσω. 
3. δεῦρο. 10. ὁμοίως. . πώ. 
δῆλον ὅτι. 11. ὅμως. . τότε. 
. ἐκεῖ 12. οὔποτε. . ὕστερον. 
. ἔπειτα. 13. πῇ, ὅπῃ. . χαλεπῶς. 
. €&. 14. πόρρω . ὥσπερ. 


ADJECTIVES. 


-- 


. ἄκων. 11. ἐπιτήδειος - παραπλήσιος. 
ἄξιος. 12. ἔρημος 2]. πολύς. πλείων. 
ἄριστος. 13. εὐήθης 22. πρόθυμος. 
ἀσφαλής. 14. ἡμέτερος . πρότερος. 
δῆλος. 1ῦ. ἡμιόλιος. 24. πρῶτος. 
δίκαιος. 16. κα ὄς, κακίων. 25. τιμιος. 
δυνατός. 17. κρείττων. 26. φανερός. 
ἐγκέλευστος. 18, μῖκρός. 27. φίλιος. 
ἐπικίνδῦνος. 19. οἷος. - χαλεπός. 
ἐπίπονος. 29. χρῦσυχάλϊινος. 
PRONOUNS. 


oo τὸ 


Nop 


- © & 


¢ Lad 
. μηδείς, οὐδείς. 2. ὅστις. 3. σύ, υμεῖς. 


PREPOSITIONS. CONJUNCTIONS. 
. ἄνευ. 3. μετά. ἕως, iva.. 


y ‘ 


. @yrt. 4. ὑπέρ. 


4. EXERCISES. 


I. Translate: (4) Οὐκ ἐδυνάμεθα πολλοὺς δικαίους ἐν τῇ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν 
πόλει εὑρίσκειν. (hb) ‘H δὴ ἀπορίᾳ τῶν συμμάχων δήλη ἂν εἴη ἄνευ τῶν 
ἐπιτηδείων ὧν παρείχομεν. (0) ᾿Ἐγκέλευστος ἦν ὁ ἰδιώτης ἀποκρίνασθαι 
τε μικρὸς εἴη ἂν ὁ μισθός. (1) Οἱ μὲν ἡγεμόνες πρότεροι ἀφικνοῦντο 
τοῦ στρατεύματος. (+) ‘O χρόνος λὺμαίνει πάντα τὰ καλά. 

2. Translate: (a) And the passage of the mountains was hard for 
the beasts of burden. (b) This necklace is in truth small, but I have 
many others which are larger. (c) If ye go away, I will follow with 
you ; but I know this well, that it will not be possible to protect our- 
selves from our enemies. (d) My fatherland is dearer to me, methinks, 
than life itself and much honor. (2) It was the opinion of all the com- 
puny that the slaves should be honored in return for what they had done. 





LESSON XL. 


LESSON XL. 
ANABASIS I. rv. 1-4. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 1. τρία, Lat. tria, from τρεῖς, tres. 


§ 2. νῆ-ες : from ναῦ-ς. navis. Number and case ἢ vav-apyos, 
ship-commander. Composition of this word ἢ ἡγεῖτο δ᾽ αὐταῖς κτέ, 
commanded them, lit. for them. On the genitive with verbs of command- 
ing, ef ἄρχειν αὐτῶν XIV. vats érépas, other ships; acc. plur. 
Note the form ναῦς. συνεπολέμει κτὲ, and [with which] he was con- 
ducting the war together with Cyrus against him [ Tissaphernes]}. 


$ 3. ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν, upon the ships: from ναῦς. Case and number? 

ὧν ἐστρατήγει, which he commanded: ef. ἡγεῖτο, Ν. § 2. οἱ mapa 
᾿Αβροκόμᾶ «ré, the mercenaries beside (lit. from beside) Abrocomas 
(sen. sing.) revolted and, ete. Nvte the gen. sing. form ᾿Αβροκόμ-ἃ for 
-ov. This genitive takes the place of the dative through the influence 
of the verb of separation, ἀπο-στάντες : cf. of ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς XX VIII. 

§ 4. ἦσαν δὲ ταῦτα, but these [the gates] were two walls: ταῦτα for 
αὗται, consequently the plur. ἦσαν TO μὲν ἔσωθεν... τὸ δὲ ἔξω, 
the within (inner) wall, the one towards Cilicia, ... the without (outer), 
etc. Of course, the first wall was to the west and northwest of the 
second. διὰ μέσου τούτων : note the substantive use of μέσος. 

τὸ μέσον ἦσαν στάδιοι : note the influence of the predicate upon the 
number of the verb; Eng., the entire distance between was. οὐκ 
ἦν [= δύνατον ἦν], was not possible ; ef. οὐκ ἔσται ἐξελθεῖν XXXVII. 

ἐφ-ειστή-κεσαν, stood upon; were set at; built: from ἐφ-ίστημι ; 
cf. ἀφ-ειστήκεσαν XII.,— here pluperf., the meaning passing from the 
trans. (Sisto) to the intrans. (sto, stare). Note that stems beginning 
with two consonants do not reduplicate regularly. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Adverbs, genitives, appositives, prepositional phrases, may occupy 
the attributive position. 
2. ναῦς, στάδιον (plur. orddvot), are irregularly declined. 










































































138 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. πάρειμι is followed by the dative (of persons), or εἰς with the 
accusative (of places). 

4. Verbs of commanding are followed by the genitive, but ἡγέομαι is 
followed by the dative also. 

5. Prepositional constructions dependent upon a noun are readily 
affected and changed by a verb in the sentence. 

6. Some proper nouns in -ag (Ist declension) have a gen. sing. in 
-a, for -ov. 

7. The verb εἰμί may agree in number with its predicate ; sometimes 
it is plural when the subject is a neuter plural pronoun and refers to 
masculine or feminine plural nouns. 

8. μέσος (in the neuter) may be nsed substantively. 

9. ἔστι, ἦν, and ἔσται sometimes have the meaning of ἐξ ὦ (ete.) 
possible. 

10. Verbs beginning with two consonants do not take the regular 
reduplication. 

11. Some of the forms of ἵστημι (Sisto) are intransitive ; 6. g. 
2d aorist ἔστην, perfect, pluperfect, εἱστήκειν. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declension of vats. . . . 4H. 206,207. G. 54. 
Declension of εἷς, δύο τρεῖς. H. 290. G. VF. 
Gender ofnouns .... ΗΥ. 125, α, ὃ, ς. 6. 38, 2, notes. 


ἵστημι (present sy ten) [Η. 331, 414, § G. 123, 121, l, 
| ἐδ " "(€ 415, $84. 5. ὶ 2 (d). 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἡ Bia,’ force, violence 7. ndi-Baros, steep, inacces- 
. ἔξω," without, outer. sible. 

ἔσωθεν," within, inner. καθ-ήκω, come down, extend 
€repos,® other. down (to). 


. ἐφ-ίστημι, I place upon, 9. μετά-πεμπτος, sent after. 


build at. 10. 6 μισθο-φόρος," paybearer, 
. ἡγέομαι, I lead. mercenary. 


1 Cf, ἐβιάζετο XXXII. 8 CS. Eng. hetero-dox. 
2 Cf. ἐκ, from ; εἰς, to. 4 μισθός, pay ; φέρω, 1 carry. 





LESSON XL. 159 


11. ἡ ναῦς, ship. 19. ἡ πύλη 8 gate. 

12. ὁ vav-apyxos, admiral, captain. 90. τὸ στάδιον, a stade (192 me- 
13. τὸ ὄνομα, name. ters). 

14. dppéw, lie at anchor. 21. orévos, nurrow.4 

15. map-€pxopat, come or go by. 22. στρατηγέω, I command. 

16. παρ-ῆλθον, came or went by. 23. τὸ τεῖχος, wall. 

17. ἡ πάρ-οδος, way past, pass. 91. ὕπερθεν. above (adv.). 


18. ἡ mérpa,? rock. 25. φίλος. friend, friendly. 


5. EXERCISES. 


J]. Translate: (a) Ὁ δὲ Ψάρος ποταμός ἐστι μέγας. ἀλλ᾽ ἐζευγμένος 
ἐστὶν ἑπτὰ πλοίοις. ("}) Τὸ μὲν οὖν εὗρός ἐστι δέκα πλέθρων. (Cc) Οὐκ 
ἦν διελθεῖν διὰ ταύτης τῆς μεγάλης τε καὶ εὐδαίμονος πόλεως. (4) Αἱ δὲ 
πύλαι πᾶσαι ἰσχυρῶς μεγάλαι εἰσίν. (6) Συμπολεμήσω δὴ τῷ Κύρῳ πρὸς 
τὸν βασιλέα 

2. Translite: (a) The chosen admirals arrived (= were present) for 
Cyrus. (4) We have asked what he wishes to do with that money. 
(c) It is necessary [for] us not to be worse than those who formerly 
fought-with the younger brother, Cyrus. (d) If we should thus follow, 
we should be friends worthy of much. (¢) They announce to the king 
whatever we do in this city. 

3. Prepare a list containing the translation of each word in the Voc. 
of Lesson X. ; with this list in hand in the class-room, be prepared to 
give rapidly and distinctly each corresponding Greek word.5 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Accent in the 3d declension, 9. The attributive position. 
3. Words in the attributive position. 4. The dative in συνεπολέμει 
Κύρῳ. 5. Extent of space and duration of time. 6. Cases for express- 
ins means, measure, specification. 7. The neuter plural subject. 
8. Agreement of the verb with two subjects. 9. ἐπί in §§ 1 and 3. 
10. Accent of παρῆσαν, παρῆν. 11. -ν in εἴκοσιν. 12. παρά. in ὃ 3. 
13. Construction with verbs of commanding. 14, Classification of the 
verbs in the Lesson, 

1 Cf. Eng. pseud-onym. 4 Cf. Eng. steno-graphy. 


2 Cf. Eng. petr-oleum, rock-oil. 5 Preserve this list for following exer- 
8 (Οἱ Thermo-pylae, Hot-gates. cises. 









































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XLI. 
ANABASIS I. tv. 5-7. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 5. ταύτης ἕνεκα τῆς παρόδου, on account of this, etc. ἕνεκα, adv., 
used as a prep. with the genitive case. Cf. the use of the Latin adv. 
clam as a prep.; e.g. Clam ux6rem. Note the position.! ἀποβι- 
βάσειείν) κτὲ, he might land his hoplites within and without the walls, 
i.e. on both sides of the east or Syrian wall. On the form of the verb, 
cf. καταπράᾶξειεν XXII. ; on the mode, cf λάβοι XI. τῶν πυλῶν: 
cf. εἴσω τῶν ὀρέων XXIX. § 21. βια-σ ο-μένους : from βιάζομαι ; 
euphonic change! Note the tense, ¢f. ὡς ἀποκτενῶν VII. 4. @ETO : 
from οἶμαι ; ef. XXXIV. Note how oi- augments. ᾧετο soko 
Lat. putabat [Abrocom§4n] factirum esse. ἤκουσε Κῦρον ὄντα, 
heard that Cyrus was, etc. On the supplementary participle after ἀκούω, 
cf. ἤκουε Ταμῶν ἔχουτα XXIX. 

§ 7. ἔμειναν : theme μεν, Lut. man-eo; fut. μεν-έσω, but in actual 
use -o- drops away and €@ = @; hence the actual future is μενῶ, 
(μενέ-εις) μενεῖς, (μενέ-ει) μενεῖ, etc. Explain the form here. ἐμ- 
βά-ντες, . .. ἐν -θέ- μενοι. . . . ἀπέπλευσεν : the aor. partic, used as 
in ἐλθόντας... ἐρωτᾶ, XXXVIII. Ba and θε, themes of what verbs 

τὰ πλείστον ἄξια : cf. πολλοῦ ἄξιος XXXVI. ὡς . .. ἐδόκουν, 
Φιλοτιμηθέντες : being piqued, as they seemed or appeared. The Greek 
says “as they seemed,” where the English says “as it seemed.” Like 
the Latin, the Greek prefers the personal construction ; εἰ λέγεται ᾿Απόλ- 
λων ΧΧΥ. ὅτι τοὺς στρατιώτας κτὲ, because Cyrus was permitting 
(εἴα contracted from εἴα-ε, from ἐάων Clearchus to have their soldiers, who 
had left [their generals, Xenias and Pasion,] on the understanding that 
they were going back to Greece again, etc. Cf. XXXIV. 7. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. ἕνεκα. μέν δέ, οὖν, put after one or more words in their sentences, 
are called post-positive. 


1 ε a = ie 
Words which do not stand at the beginning of phrases, clauses, or sentences 
in which they appear are calied post-positive ; ¢. 9. μέν, δὲ, οὗν, yap. 





LESSON XLI. 


2. The Ist aor. opt. act. 3d sing. ends in -at or -ece(v). 

3. oi- augments to @; ἐ- to εἰ- in ἐάω, ἔχω. 

4, The supplementary participle follows ἀκούω, with nearly the 
value of an English infinitive. 

5. Liquid verbs form their future without -o, contracting the endings 
with a preceding original ε to -@, -eis, εἴ, etc. 

6. The aorist participle, denoting a preliminary act, is rendered as 
zo-ordinate with the verb upon which it depends. 

7. ἄξιος. an adjective of value, is followed by the genitive. 

8. In using δοκεῖ (vidétur), λέγεται (dicitur), the Greek prefers 
the personal construction. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


The mutes when coming be- 
OR hx ie hae ὦ ας ΝΒ, G. 16, 3. 


Conjugation of the present 
system of δείκνυμι. . . H. 332. G. 123. 


Formation of the future of 
liquid verbs. . . . . H. 422. G. 110, II. 2. 


The perfect with aspiration. H. 452. G. 110, IV. ὃ. 
Principal parts of méumo@! . Η. 508, 21. G. page 351. 
Principal parts of φυλάττω. H. 514, 11. G. page 359. 
The future in the indirect 

discourse. . . . « H. 855. G. 203. 


The infinitive in the indirect 
discourse. . . . . . H. 9380,2; 946. 6. 246 and Note. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀνα-στρέφω. turn around, back. . αὐτόθι, here, there. 
ἀπ ελαύνω, nurch away. . εάω, permit, 
éu-Baivw go on board, embark. 
. τὸ ἐμπόριον," port, place of trade. 
ἐν-τίθημι, place in, on (board). 


ἀπ-έρχομαι, go away. 
ἀπο-βιβάζω.3 I land. 
ἀπο-πλέω, sail away. 


1 Note that the perfect middle, πέ-πεμ-μαι, loses final π᾿ of the theme between 


the two ’s. 


2 Strictly, cause to go off. Verbs in -agw are regularly transitive, and many 


are causative. 
8 Cf. πλοῖον, boat. 4 Cf. Eng. emporium. 


















































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


11. ἕνεκα (with gen.), on account 14. ἡ ὁλκάς, freight ship. 
of. 15. ὅσ-περ, ὅ-περ, who or which 
12. ἔξω, without, outside of. really, just who or which. 
13. ἡ pipids,! number or crowd of 16. φιλοτϊμέομαι3 am piqued or 
10,000, jealous. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Decline: ναῦς, ὅσ-περ, ἀναστρέψᾶς 

2. Synopsis of λύω, active voice, Master ὃ 313 Hadley (G., pages 
86, 87) until all the forms can be given and written correctly, discrimi- 
nated from one another, and readily translated. 

3. Translate: (a) Τούτου ἕνεκα τοῦ ποταμοῦ οὐκ ἦν ἐξελθεῖν ἐκ τῶν 
ὀρῶν. (Ὁ) Τυγχάνει δ᾽ ἐπιμελούμενος ὅπως αἱ νῆες αὐτόθι πάρωσιν. 
(c) Ei δὴ ὑμεῖς πολεμοῖτε τῷ Συρίῳ βασιλεῖ οὐκ ἂν πολὺ στράτευμα 
καταγάγοιτε. (d) ᾿ἙἘνόμισεν οὖν ὅτι τοῦτο ποιήσοι ὁ ἄρχων αὑτῷ ἀνθ᾽ ὧν 
εὖ πέπονθε. (6) Καὶ γὰρ ἔγωγέ φημι τὸν ἄνδρα πέμψειν mod as ὀλκάδας 
εἰς τὸ ἐμπόριον. 

4. Translate: (a) Thence I was marching five days’ journey, 
twenty (and) five parasangs, to a large river of Syria. (Ὁ) The width 
of these rivers is about two plethra. (¢) Issus (plural) is the last city 
of Cilicia, built by the sea-sidle, and large and prosperous. (4) I will 
remain in this city thirty days. (0) Now the commanders of the ships 
revolted (partic.), and sailed away again to Greece. (f) I am afraid 
(oxvew) to go on board those ships (= what ships) he may give us. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Classification of the verbs in this Lesson. 9. Post-positive words. 
3. m between two w’s. 4. Tenses in the indirect discourse. 5. Modes 
in main clauses, indirect discourse. 6. Peculiarities of -ye verbs. 
7. Formation of the future and 1st aorist stems, liquid verbs. 8, The 
aspirated perfect. 9. The participle with ἀκούω. 10. Regular meaning 
of verbs in -d¢w. 11. Personal endings, Ist aorist optative active. 
12. Conjugation of the present and imperfect indicative active of φάω. 
13. Three prepositions which govern the genitive only ; two which 
govern the dative only. 14. Classification of the consonants, 


1 Cf. Eng. myriad. 2 φίλος and tiny, to hold honor dear. 











LESSON XLII. 


LESSON XLII. 
ANABASIS 1. rv. 7-9. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 7. ἦσαν ἀφανεῖς, were out of sight, gone. On the declension, 
cf. εὐηθης XX XVII. διτῆλθε, 1. 6. through the army. ὅτι διώκοι: 
cf. ὅτι ἄγοι XXXVIII. τριήρεσι : on the case, cf. πλοίοις AAU 

ηὔχοντο : impf., from εὔχομαι, dep. Note the augment. ὧκ... 
ὄντας... ληφ-θῆ-ναι : ὡς construed with the participle, = on the ground 
that. It does not introduce the infinitive; neither ὡς nor ὅτε, nor any 
conjunction, ever does that. ληφ-θῆναι : aor. pass. inf. of λαμβάνω, 
theme AaB; cf. λάβ-οι XI. On ¢@ for B, cf. ὑπολει Φ-θέντας XXXI. 

ᾧ κτειρον : from οἰκτείρω ; cf. ᾧ ετο XLI. εἰ ἁλώ-σο-ι-ντο, should 
they be taken: from ἁλ-ίσκομαι (dA-, ddo-), used as passive to αἱρέω. 

ὃ 8. συγ-καλέσᾶς, called together . . . and, ete. On συν- changed to 
συγ-, ς΄. συγγενέσθαι XX VI. ἐπιστά-σθων, let them know: cf. dve- 
σθων ; from ἐπίσταμαι, dep. ἀπο-δε-δρά κα-σιν, have eluded: from 
δι-δράᾶ-σκω (Spa); cf γι-γνώ-σκω (yvo). ὥστε ἑλεῖν, so that 
I am able to take. Note the manner of exprissing result in Greek, On 
the theme €, cf. εἱλόμην XXXIII. pa τοὺς θεούς, by the gods! 
pa used in negative oaths ; hence probably allied with μή. Note the 
accusative following it. ἐρεῖ : classed as future of φημί; ς the 
perf. εἴρηκα XXIII. ; see οὔποτε ἐρεῖ οὐδείς ΧΧΧΉΗΙ. ἕως ἂν 
map-7 τις, as long as any one may be with me, = if any one, ete. : con- 
ditional relative sentence; but note, the subjunctive with ἄν is_used 
when the present is alluded to ; ef. ὅστις ἀφικνοῖτο ΙΧ. ἐπειδὰν δέ, 
= ἐπειδὴ ἂν δέ. Note the contrast indicated by μέν... δέ i- OV TOY, 
let them yo. So λῦ-ὄόντων, imperative 3d plural. εἰδ-ότ-ες : “cf. €id- 
ἣτε XXXVII. κακίους : comparative of κακός ; cf. πλείους 
XXXIV. § 7. poupovpeva (cf Φρούραρχος XI11.): neuter plural, 
the women being possibly classed as vaguely as the children, —as mere 
things or creatures. ἕνεκα: cf. ὃ 5. . 

ὃ 9. ἥδ-τον, more gladly: comparative of the adverb 98-éas ; strictly 
the neuter singular of the comparative of the adjective, similarly with 


προθυμότερον. 












































INDUCTIVE GREEK METIIOD. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The verb of the indirect discourse may be put in the optative 
when dependent upon a verb denoting definitely past time. 
2. Adjectives whose stem ends in τες lose 5 between vowels, and 
contract e-e tu εἰ, e-o to ov, and e-a to n 
3. Means is expressed by the dative case. 
4. εὖ augments to nv. 
5. The infinitive in the indirect discourse is never introduced by a 
conjunction. 
6. AaB becomes ληβ in the future and in the aorist passive. 
7. Result is denoted by ὥστε with the infinitive. 
8. A number of verbs form the present stem by reduplicating the 
theme and adding -σκ. 5 
9. The object or person by whom one swears negatively is indicated 
by the accusative case following pa. 
10. Conditional relative sentences of present time have the verb in 
the subjunctive, with dy following the relative adverb or pronoun. 
11. Adverbs form their comparative by using the neuter singular 
of the comparative of the adjective. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
- Declension of γυνή ‘s)e« BoR16;4; G. 60,5, 7. 
- Conjugation of ride, present system H. 323. G. 98. 
. Principal parts of φεύγω. . . . H. 511,15. 6. Appendix. 
. Principal parts of λαμβάνω, . . H. 523.5. G. Appendix. 
. Principal parts of ἔρχομαι. . . . H.539,2. G. Appendix. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. adpos,! dispirited. 5. ἀπο-λείπω, forsake, desert. 

: ἁλίσκομαι, am taken, captured, (. ἀπο avAdw, steal, rob. 

- ἢ ἀνάβασις, upward march. 7. ἀπο-φεύγω, flee away, escape. 

- ἀπο-διδράσκω,.2 run off (by 8. ἡ ἀρετή. goodness, good service. 
stealth), elude. 9. apavns,® out of sight, gone. 


1 ἀ- privative (like the English suffix -less in spirit-less), θῦμός, mind, courage. 
Cf. Lat. a-mens. 


2 " ΄ . 7 . , 
Theme, Spa ; ¢f. 8p6 -nos. 8 ἀ- privative, φαίνομαι, appear. 





LESSON XLII. 145 


. δειλός, timid, cowardly. 20). ὁ Adyos,? word, rumor. 

. δι έρχομαι, go through ; (of . pa, nay! by (adv. of swear- 
rumor) spread. ing). 

2. διώκω, I pursue. . οὐδέ, neither, not even. 

. ἔγωγε, equidem, I at least. 

. ἐπειδάν. when indeed, after 
(with subjunc.). 

. εὔχομαι, I pray, wish. ously. 

ὁ θεός," god. 3. στερέω, I deprive. 

. κακός, bad, base. . guy-kadéw, 1 call together. 

. κακῶς, badly. . τὸ τέκνον, child. 

. κακῶς ποιέω, I injure, wrong. - φρουρέω,δ I guard. 


3. οἰκτείρω, I pity. 
. οἴχομαι, am gone, departed. 
. προθύμως, with spirit, zeal- 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Αἱ γυναῖκες οὐκ ἀπολείψουσι τὰ ἑαυτῶν τέκνα, μὴ 
Y μη 


ξ ᾿ ΄ 4 γ ΄ ς κι σιν ες “ ΄ , ᾿ ε 
ὑπὸ τῶν μετὰ Κυρου πορευυμένων ἁλῶσιν. () Td ἑαυτῆς δῶρόν ἐστιν ἡ 


> , Oi ὃ λ , 4 4 ΄ » ‘ “~ , » 52d - 
ἀρετή. (C) Οἱ δειλοί τε καὶ κακοὶ πειρωνται ἀπὸ τῆς μάχης αποοὐιόρασκειν. 


2. Translate: (a) Il-indeed pursued the enemy, but I was not able 
to take them. (+) When-indeed you wish (fut. cond. with probability) 
to call together (partic.) the generals, and pursue with triremes and 
boats those who have (partic.) fled away, many friends will follow with 
you. (c) And beautiful gates were-built (= set upon) in the royal- 
abodes. (d) Cherisophos arrives upon the ship which the admiral 
Pythagoras was commanding. (5) On account of the good-service of 
these men, their enemies did not injure their wives and children. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Present and imperfect of εἰμί. 2. Declension of ἀφανής, τριήρης. 
3. Augment of diphthongs. 4. Future conditions. 5. Result clauses. 
6. Negative oaths. 7. Formation of adverbs; of the comparative. 
8. The second accent in κακίους εἰσὶ, § 8. 9. Contractions in the 
present system of ripdw. 10, Classification of the verbs in § 8. 
11. Accent of διῆλθες 12. ἀ- privative illustrated. 13. Peculiarities 
in the declension of γυνή 14. αἱρέω and ἁλίσκομαι : theme of the 
latter; relation of meaning. 

1 ἐπεί + δή + av, followed by the subjunctire. 

2 Of. Eng. theo-logy. 8 Cf. φρουράρχοις XII. 

10 





Se ae RI 












































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON XLIII. 


ANABASIS I. v.. 9-12. 


9, Mera ταῦτα, through τοῦ πατρὸς Κῦρον, 12. 


1. NOTES. 


δ 9. ὄντα... πλέθρου, being, in respect to wilth, of a plethrum : 


cf. εὖρος δύο πλέθρων XXIX. § 23, Lat. via tridui. 
ἰχθύων: ε΄. πλήρης θηρίων XXIV. Why genitive ? 
εἴων, and they did not permit any one, ete.: cf. ea XLI. 
σάτιδος ἦσαν δεδομέναι :1 cf. καὶ... ἦσαν... δεδομέναι XII. 


ὃ 10. of .. . πλέθρου, of which the width [was] (of) a plethrum. 

Συρίας ἄρξα -ντ-ος, (of) the former ruler of Syria. Note the tense ; 
also that the participle, like a noun, is here followed by the objective 
genitive, — so amans patriae, patriot. 
cf. πάντων ὅσοι LV. 


πάντα ὅσα all thinys which : 


ὃ 11. ὄντα. . . σταδίων : cf. ὄντα πλέθρου, ὃ 9. ἔλεγεν ὅτι 
ἔσοιτο, he said that the journey would be; dir. ilise., “ the journey will be” 
(ἔσται) : ε΄. ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι VI. 


ὃ 12. ἐ-χαλέπαινον τοῖς στρατηγοῖς. were angry at the generals. 
Il. 764, 2 Ex. εἰδό τ -ας, theme ἰδ (Lat. vid-eo, Eng. wit) ; perf. 
partic.: ¢f. ἐκπεπτωκ ot-as XIII., εἰδότες XLIL οὐκ ἔφασαν: 
cf. ΧΑΧΙΙ ἐὰν μή. nisi, unless. Note the use of μή rather than 
ov. τοῖς μετὰ Κύρου ἀναβᾶσι, those who went up with Cyrus : nom. 
ἀναβάς (2d aor. purtic. of dva-Baivw) ; cf. δια-βάς XXIV. : cf. the use of 
the tense with that of ἄρξαντος, § 10. καὶ ταῦτα κτὲ, and that too, 
though. Note the concessive force of the genitive absolute; this is 
heightened by καὶ ταῦτα. 


1 “Given for her girdle” is somewhat like the English “ given for pin money,” 
since the beauty of the girdle was a matter of pride with Persian ladies. Other 
cities were assigned to furnish the queen-mother with sandals and head-dresses, 
The Persian king assigned to the exiled Themistocles one city to furnish bread 
and another to furnish meat. 


> 


LESSON XLII. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. “A river four feet wide” is in Greek “a river of four feet, 
respecting width.” 

2. ‘The cities belong to Parysatis” is in Greek “the cities are 
of Parysatis.” 

3. Participles of transitive verbs may be used as nouns, and be 
followed by an objective genitive. 

4. ὁ ἄρχων, = ruler; 6 ἄρξᾶς, = he who (once or Jormerly) ruled, the 
ruler. 

5. The future optative, introduced by ὡς, ὅτι, indirect (liscourse, 
after a secondary tense, represents the future indicative. 

6. οἰδ-, of οἶδα, becomes εἰδ- in the subjunctive and in the participle.? 

7. Iu conditional sentences μή is the negative of the condition (pro- 
tasis), od that of the conclusion (apodosis). 

8. καὶ ταῦτα preceding a concessive participle intensifies its force as 
such. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declension of ἐχθύς. <= SS. G. 53, 2. 
The ordinals (1-20) . . > « Bea. G. 76. 
Conjugation of oi8a . . . . H. 491. G. 127, VII. 
Accusative of specification . . . H. 718. G. 160, 1. 
The genitive with substantives. . H. 729, a-g. G. 167, 1-6. 


4 VOCABULARY. 


ἀδικέω,2 I harm, injure. 4. ἐκ-κόπτω,δ I cut out, destroy 
2. ἀνα-πείθω, I persuade, i.e. change utterly. 
oe’s mind, induce. 5. ἡ ζώνη." belt, girdle. 


- ἐὰν μή (with subjunct.), unless. 6. ὁ ἰχθύς, δ fish. 


1 It does the same elsewhere, as will presently be learned. 
2 From ἄδικος, = ἀ- privative, and δίκη, justice. 

8 Cf. κατα-κοπῆναι XXXI. 

4 Cf. Eng. zone. 

5 Cf. Eng. ichthy-ology. 


















































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


καὶ ταῦτα, and that too; al- 12. ὁ πατήρ," father. 
though. 13. πρᾷος ὃ mild, tame. 
κατα-καίω, I burn down, de- 14. axnvew,® I encamp. 
stroy by fire. 15. gue,’ produce, yield, bring 
kpuntw,” I hide, conceal. forth. 
ἡ κώμη, village. 16. χαλεπαίνω, am angry. 
- πάλαι, long before, previously. 17. ἡ &pa,° season (of the yea:). 


5. EXERCISES. 


1, Principal parts of πείθω. κόπτω. κρύπτω. 39 
‘ γι ᾿ ᾽ , Ἢ ΕΝ ͵ 
2. Translate: (α) ’Emei δ᾽ αὐτόθι πολλοὶ ἦσαν φίλοι ἡμῖν, ἐμείναμεν 
τρισκαίδεκα ἡμέρᾷς. (0) Χαλεπανοῦσιν αὐτῷ ἐὰν μὴ ταὐτᾶς τὰς mode ids 
p nue pas. ῷ ἐὰν μὴ μ 
’ - ᾽ , . ’ ‘ > #4 > ‘ a“ , ‘ = 9% 
κὠμᾶς ἐκκόψῃ. (6) Πάλαι δὴ ἀνέπεισα αὐτὸν ταῦτα κρύπτειν, καὶ ταῦτ 
οὐκ ἐθέλοντα. (i) Πολλαὶ καὶ μεγάλαι κῶμαι τῇ Παρυσάτιδι δεδυμέναι 
εἰς τὴν ζώνην, ὑπὸ τῆς στρατιᾶς ἁλώσονται (6) Οἱ ἑρμηνεῖς ταῦτα τῷ φρου- 
ράρχῳ ἀπήγγειλαν " ὁ δε ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ χρήματα πολλὰ ἐπειδὰν εἰς 
Ἰσσοὺς ἥκωσι καὶ μισθὸν μέχρι (until) ἂν καταγάγῃ τοὺς Ἕλληνας πάλιν εἰς 
᾿Ιωνίαν. (f) ᾿Ακούσαντες ταῦτα ἐπείθοντο καὶ οὐ διέβησαν πρὶν ἂν οἱ ἄλλοι 


᾽ . 
αποζρινωνται. 


3. Translate: (a) They said that those rivers were full of many (and) 
tame fishes ; but the inhabitants of the country do not permit any-one 
to harm them. (ὁ) They encamped (aor.) in the gardens and palace 
of the former-king of the country, and then (εἶτα) burned down the 
palace (ὁ) He will call (partic.) an assembly of his soldiers, and 
endeavor to persuade them. (d) He said that all things which the 
seasons produce would be theirs (dat. poss.) if they should be able to 
take these gardens. 


4. Review the noun list in Lesson X., giving the gender, genitive, 
and declension of each word. 


1 καίω, fut. καύ-σω 3 Eng. caustic. 

2 Cf. ἐπι-κρυπτόμενος XI. ; Eng. crypt. 

4 Lat. pater. 

5 Very irregularly declined. The study of its declension is omitted for the 
present. 6 Cf. σκήνη, tent. 

7 Whence φύσις, nature, Eng. physics, physician, metaphysics. 

8 From χαλεπός, hard, difficult. 9 Cf. Lat. hora, Eng. hour. 

10 Consult the verb-indices in the grammars, 


8 Eng. pale-ontology. 


LESSON XLIV. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. μετά with the genitive; with the accusative. 2. Accusative of 
specification. ὃ. Genitive of measure. 4. Declension of πλήρης. 
5. Inflection? of εἴων. 6. εἰς ζώνην. 7. The genitive with ἄρξαντος. 
8. Time denoted by the tenses of the participle. 9. Inflection of μέγας. 
10. Principal parts and classification of the verbs οἵ 810. 11. Analysis 
of φκεῖτο ; why not pluperfect? 12. Future conditions in the indirect 
discourse. 13. Correlative pronouns used with πᾶς. 





LESSON XLIV. 
ANABASIS I. tv. 13-15. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 13. ὑπέσχετο: cf. ὑπο-σχόμενος XXII. Note the present and 
aorist stems, δώ-σειν . . . ἸΙωνίᾶν πάλιν (dir. disc.), “I will give 
you... when you reach Babylon, and full pay until I set you Greeks 
down again,” etc. Note the form of indirect discourse after this verb. 

ἐπὴν... ἥκωσι: cf. ἕως av χρῶμαι, ἐπειὸὃ ἂν βούληται XLII. ; 
conditional relative clauses. On the optative (without ἄν) in such 
clauses, referring to time past, cf. ἀφικνοῖτο 1X., βούλοιτο XXIV. 
Note that with the subjunctive, ἄν is used : ἐπήν = ἐπεὶ ἄν. μέχρι 
ἄν καταστήσῃ, until he (shall) set down, (shall) bring back : cf. preceding 
note. ‘EAAnuxod : 86. στρατεύματος πρὶν. .΄. εἶναι, before it 
was evident: cf. πρὶν συμβουλεύσηται XVIII. ; noting, however, that 
the verb upon which the subjunctive depends is negative. τί ποιή- 
σουσιν: note that this interrogative maintains its acute accent. οὔ: 
accented, because at the end of a clause. χωρὶς τῶν ἄλλων : 
cf λάθρᾷ τῶν στρατιωτῶν XXXIV.; each is a gen. of separation. 

814, τῶν ἄλλων πλέον, more [than] the others, ete. Note the geni- 
tive dependent upon the comparative πλέον ; on πλέον, cf. XXVI,, 
πλέον ἢ... μηνῶν. δεῖται : cf. ΧΎΤΙΠ., δεῖται αὐτοῦ μή. χρῆ-ναι: 


1 That is, give all the persons and numbers of the verb in this mode, voice, 


and tense. 























Is 

















150 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


infinitive of χρή: cf. χρή XXXV. διαβῆναι : the form is analogous 
with στῆ-ναι XX VII. ἀπο-κρινοῦνται : ef. ἔμειναν XLI., Notes, 8 7. 

ὃ 15. ἣν μέν : note ἣν δέ Leluw, — ἤν, = ἐάν, εἰ av; οἵ. ἣν δύνηται VALI. 
Kind of conditional sentences in this section ? δόξετε : fut., from 
δοκέω. Note the change of theme. ἄμξαντες «ré, since you began the 
crossiny (lit. to cross): ¢f. ἄμξαντος XLIII. ἢ 10. Note the case, and 
cf. ἄρχειν αὐτῶν XIV. χάριν εἴσεται (first, will know, recognize, the 
favor, and then), will be grateful, will requite, ἡ 
knows how, if anybody else also (does). ὑμῖν χρήσεται : cf. ἡμῖν 
χρῆσθαι ΧΧΧΎΥΊΤΙΠΙ. καὶ ἄλλου οὗτινος... Κυρου, and 1 you stand- 
tn-need of anything else. . . as friends, you will happen upon (get) it from 
Cyrus. τεύξεσθε : fut. (deponent), from the theme TUX, τυγχάνω. 
Note the dependent genitive. 


ἐπίσταται κτὲ, and he 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. ὑπισχνέομαι is followed by the infinitive construction, like the 
Latiu polliceor. 

2. Conditional relative clauses, referring to the present or future, 
have their verbs in the subjunctive; and ἄν stands after the relative 
adverb or pronoun introducing them. 

3. The Ist aorist of iornus, like the present, is causative, = set. 

4. πρίν is followed by the infinitive ; but generally by the subjunc- 
tive when the leading verb is negative. 

5. τίς, interrogative, always retains its acute accent. οὐ becomes 
οὔ at the end of a sentence. 

6. Indirect questions may retain the mode of the direct discourse. 

7. The comparative is followed by the genitive when ἢ (than) is 
omitted. 

8. χρή, it is necessary, has an irregular present infinitive χρῆναι. 

9. δοκέω assumes the theme dox- in the future. 

10. τυγχάνω, I meet with, happen upon, obtain, is construed with the 
genitive of the source whence the thing obtained comes. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Η. 144, G. 38. 
H. 188,189. G. 57,1. 


1. Declension of μνᾶ 
2. Declension of πατήρ. 
3. Second aorist system of 


τίθημι and δίδωμι. . H. 333,334. G. 123, pages 161, 164. 


LESSON XLIV. 


4, VOCABULARY. 


. αἴτιος, responsible for, charge- 11. πότερον... #, whether... or. 
able with. 12. προ-τϊμάω, I honor above others, 
. ἀπ-αγγέλλω, I report. prefer. 
3. τὸ ἀργύριον, silver, money. 13. τοὔμπαλιν (= τὸ €umadw), back, 
. ἄρχω, I begin, rule. back again. 
. evtedns, full, complete. 14. τυγχάνω, I happen upon, meet 
}. ἐπήν (with subjunct.), when. with, obtain. 
. ἡ Aoxayia, captaincy. 15. τὸ dpovpiov,* a garrison. 
. povos,' alone. 16. χωρίς apart from. 
. ἡ μνᾶ,3 mina, 17. ψηφίζομαι, I vote, decide. 
. πονέω,δ I labor, toil. 18. ἀπο-ψηφίζομαι, I vote off, reject. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Τὸ δὲ Μένωνος στράτευμα ἀπεψηφίσατο τοὔμπαλιν 
ἀπιέναι. (b) Σὺ δὲ οὐκ οἶσθα πότερον χωρὶς τὼν BupBdpov ἐκινδυνευσαν 
ἢ οὔ. (c) Ὁ ἐντελὴς μισθὸς ὠφείλετο τοῖς ἀναβᾶσι μετὰ Κυρου. (d) ᾿Ακουύ- 
σαντες ταῦτα ἐπείθοντο καὶ διέβησαν πρὶν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀποκρίνασθαι. 
(9) ᾿Επεὶ δ᾽ ἤσθετο διαβεβηκότας, ἥσθη τε καὶ τῷ στρατεύματι τὸν épunved 

‘ ‘ 


ἔπεμψεν λέξοντα ὅτι Κῦρος αὐτῷ χάριν οἶδεν. 


2, Translate: (a) They began the flight (= to flee) before it was 


plain what the enemy were doing. (b) And if they need money or 
anything else, they know that they will obtain it from me, their best 
friend. (6) We recognize the favor, and that too although they are 
ourenemies. (4) But he says that this (= these things) is nonsense, 
and to him it seems best that men, such as (= whoever) are suitable, 
should go to Cyrus with the captain-of-the-garrison and ask what use he 
wishes to make of the Greek mercenaries. 

3. In the List of Words of Book 1. arranged in the order of Jirst oc- 
currence, prepare the first fifty words carefully for rapid oral recitation. 


1 Cf. the Eng. mono-syllable, mono-tone, mono-gram. 
2 The sixth part of a talent, — 100 drachmae, about $18.75. 
ὃ ΟἿ. ém-rovwrépa XX XVIII. § 19. 


4 CS. φρουράρχοις XII., φρουρούμενα XLII. 



































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Conditional sentences. 2. The use of πρίν. 3. The genitive 
with comparatives. 4. Synopsis of Ave, πέμπω, and ἀγγέλλω in the 
present and future active. 5. Principal parts of δίδωμι, torn, πείθω, 
βαίνω. 6. The genitive with δέομαι; with χωρίς ; with dpyw. 7. Cra- 
815: τοὔμπαλιν. 8. dy in conditional relative sentences. 9. The pro- 
clitics; οὐ and of. 10. The aspirated perfect. 11. Post-positives. 
12. Peculiarities of -ys verbs, 18, Analyze : ἕψονται, πεισθῆτε, ψηφί- 
σωνται, πονήσαντες. 





LESSON XLV. 
ANABASIS I. tv. 16-19. 


1. NOTES. 


ὃ 16. ἤσθετο διαβεβηκότας, perceived, learned, that they had crossed. 
Had the participle been avrist (διαβάντας), the sense would have been 
“νος that they crossed,” not had crossed : cf. λελοιπὼς εἴ XXIX. Cf. 
ἤσθετο XXIX. On the use of the participle (supplementary), cf. ἤκουε 
Tapev ἔχοντα XXIX. 0-8 «ré, was both pleased and, ete. : cf. 
Κῦρος δε ἥσθη XXVIII. ὅπως ἐπαινέσετε κτὲ, it will be my concern 
that you praise (fut.) me: cf. ὅπως ἔσται VIII. Cf. ἐπήνεσαν XXXIV.: 
final ε of the theme is not here changed to ἢ as is usual before conso- 
nants, as in φιλέω, φιλήσω 
etc.: cf. μὴ θαυμάζετε XXXII. 


μηκέτι νομίζετε, no longer consider, 


ὃ 17. συν-είπετο: from συν-έπομαι : ef. ἔχω, εἶχον ; edw, εἴων. 
ἀνωτέρω τῶν μαστῶν, above (lit. higher up than) the breast: cf. ἄνω 
XXI. and τῶν ἄλλων πλέον XLIV. ὑπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ: cf. ὑπὸ τῶν 
ἀντιστασιωτῶν XVII. Note, the river is represented as acting like a 


personal agent. 


ὃ 18. εἰ μὴ τότε, wnless then, ἡ. 6. excepting then: cf. ἐὰν μὴ XLITI. 
§ 12. ὡς βασιλεύοντι : note the tense. 


LESSON XLV. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. αἰσθάνομαι (theme aig@) is followed by the supplementary parti- 
ciple, or by ὅτε with a finite mode. 

2. ἥσθη. was pleased, is for ἥδ-θη. 

3. ὅπως with the future indicative follows verbs of striving or 
attention. 

4. μή and its compounds are the negatives used with the imperative. 

5. ἕπομαι, like ἔχω, ἐάω, augmenis by changing e to es. 

6. Agency is denotel by ὑπό with the genitive; means, by the 
dative, or occasionally by ὑπό with the genitive, when the means is 
viewed as agent. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1, Present and aorist systems of τίθημι H. 329,333. G. 123. 
2. Conjugation of φημί. . . . . H. 481. G. 127, IV. 
H. 715,a, 6; § G. 159, Rem., 


3. The cognate accusative . 716, a,b. | Nores 2, 4. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. μεγαλο-πρεπῶς," magnificently. 
. μέλει, refert, it concerns. 


. ἀνωτέρω, higher up. 
. βρέχω, moisten, wel. 
. δια-βατός, fordable, passable. 
. ἐπι-σϊτίζομαι,} lay in provisions. 2. οὐπώποτε, never yet, never 
. εὐτυχέω,2 be foriunate, suc- before. 
cessful. . πεζῇ. on foot. 
- Θαψακηνός, inhabitant of Thap- . mpd-eyst, go before, in ad- 
sacus. vance. 
. θεῖος divine, supernatural, . σαφῶς, clearly. 
miraculous. . τὸ σῖτον, food. 
. ὑπο-χωρέω, retreat, give way. 


. μηκέτι, οὐκέτι, no longer. 


8. ὁ μαστός, breast. 


1 Cf. σῖτον, food. 

2 εὖ, well ; τύχη-, fortune. τυγχ -άνω has the same theme. 

38 Cf. θεός, a god. : 

4 The first element is μέγας ; so in the translation the first element is magnus. 


§ Cf. πούς, foot ; Lat. pes. 














SSS Ss οτος δε πες ποσοσσοσσνσνναννσιρηενημν 


SSS ess 




















INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Give the principal parts and the classification of (a) ἀκούω : 
(1) βρέχω; (c) νομίζω ; (1) αἰσθάνομαι. Decline βασιλεύσων. 

2. Translate: (u) Πορευόμενοι δὲ διὰ ταύτης τῆς χώρᾶς ἀφικνοῦνται 
ἐπὶ τὸν Μάσκαν ποταμόν, ὄντα τὸ εὖρος πλέθρου ἑνός. (}}) ᾽Εὰν δ᾽ ἀπο- 
ψηφιζώμεθα ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω, βασιλεὺς ἡμῖν χάριν εἴσεται καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ 
(9) ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐνόμισε ὅτι ἄλλου οὗτινος δεοίμεθα ὡς φίλου τευξοίμεθα Κύρου. 
(ἢ) Ἔμελεν αὐτῷ ὅπως ἀκούσᾶς τὴν τοῦ στρατηγοῦ ἀρετὴν ἡδέως καὶ οὐκ 
ἀάθυμως συμπορεύσεται. 


3. Translate: (a) They praised him as often as (ὁπότε) he was 
fortunate. (6) But when they received the pay for (= οἱ more than 
three months, which was due (= owed) them, they were pleased, and 
willingly (= willing) followed Cyrus to battle. (6) Because the river 
was not large, it did not wet the soldiers above the breast as they crossed. 
(ὦ Now when he learned that they had voted to cross the river, and 
that too before it was evident whether the others would follow them or 
not, he recognized the favor in a magnificent manner. (ὁ) As-long-as 
(€ws) they obey their leader gladly, they know well that they will find 
him a true (ἀληθής) and faithful friend. 


4. Review carefully the Vocab. of Lesson X. until, by means of 


hearing the English equivalents, the Greek may be given without 
hesitation. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Complete synopses of ἵστημι, τίθημι, δίδωμε, in the present, future, 
and aorist systems. 2. The imperfect indicative of εἶμι. 3. The de- 
clension of ἀνήρ. 4. Formation of adverbs. 5. The labial and palatal 
mutes before r, 8, 6. 6. The disappearance of ¢ (of verbs in -ἰζω) in the 
future, aorist, and perfect systems. 7. The uses of the accusative. 
8. Translation of aorist and perfect participles. 9. Some verbs which 
are followed by the supplementary participle. 





LESSON XLVI. 


LESSON XLVI. 


ANABASIS 1. v. 1-5. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 1. ἐν δεξιᾷ, on the right (hand): sc. xep-i (from χείρ, hand). 

ἅπαντα ἦσαν, all [the bits of wood and brush] were. Note the plural 
verb with a neuter subject ; cf. ἄθλα ἦσαν XXVI. 

§ 2. θηρία δὲ κτὲ, and there were many kinds, etc. πολὺ θᾶττον, 
much swifter [than|. πολύ, neut. sing., used adverbially, modifies θᾶτ- 
τον ; ε΄. τὸ ἀρχαῖον XII. θᾶττον (for ταχ-ιον). comparative of ταχέως : 
the aspirate yx being lost in the comparative, τ is “ΝΑ sot θ asa 
compensation ; cf. θᾶττον προϊόντων XXVIII. ἐπεὶ πλησιάζοιεν: 
cf. ὁπότε βούλοιτο XXIV. 8 7. ταὐτόν, = τὸ αὐτόν : cf. oa 
XLIV. § 15. οὐκ ἦν : cf. οὐκ ἔσται ΧΧΧΥΗ. § 17. εἰ 
μὴ διαστάντες κτέ, unless standing apart (i.e. at intervals) ney chase, 
taking their turn in line, 2. e. relieving one another. παραπλήσια : cf. 
XXXVIII. § 18. . 

§ 3. τοῖς ποσὶ δρόμῳ . . . χρωμένη xté, using its feet in running, one 
its wings like a sail by raising them up. ἄν τις, μὲ any one: ἄν ΞΞ ἐάν, 
ἦν. ἔστι λαμβάνειν, it is possible to capture. Note the accent of 


ἔστι meaning tt is possible. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The neuter singular accusative of an adjective is readily used "5 
an adverb. This is so even when the adverb itself exists; e.g. ταχύ, 
ταχέως. : ᾿ 

2. ταχύς, ταχέως, roughen τ to @ in the comparative, the rough x 
being lost. 

4 ive i al litions which refer to past 

3. The optative is used in general conc itions whic Ρ 
time ; in the conclusion a past tense of the indicative is used 

4. The subjunctive with dy is used in general conditions which 
refer to present time; in the conclusion the present indicative is used. 

5. ἔστι, in the sense it 1s possible, is accented upon the penult. 
































INDUCTIVE GREEK METIIOD. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Transfer of SE ee Ne ee 74,6. G. 17, 9, Nn. 
Comparison by -ἔων, -ἐστος H. 253. 1 72, 1. 
Contract verbs in -όω H. 325. r. 98. 


Declension of γέρας. . . lat mo aek. G86. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


aipw, raise. 16. εὐώδης ὃ -es, JSragrant. 
av-iotnue stir up. 17. ndvs,® -εἴα. -d, sweet. 
ἀπ-αγορεύω, desist, fail, giveout. 18. ὁ κάλαμος, reed, brush- 
ἁπαλός, tender. wood, 

ἀπο-σπάω, draw off, withdraw. - TO κρέας flesh, meat. 

TO Gpwpa,? spice, . ὁμαλής." -ἐς, even, level. 
τὸ aviv wr,? wormwood. ὁ ὄνος, asx, donkey. 

- mavroios,"® varied, of all 
δια-δέχομαι, 5 receive in turn, kinds. 


. βραχύς " -eia, -ὑ. short. 


succeed, relieve. 3. mavw,'4 slop; mid., cease. 
δὲ ἔστημι, set apart; intrans., - ἡ πέρδιξ, partridge. 

sland apart. 25. mérouat,!® fly. 
ἡ δορκάς, gazelle. πλησιάζω,15 approach, 
ἐλάφειος, belonging to a deer; 27. προ-διδ ράσκω,} run ahead. 

κρέας ἐλάφειον, venison. . ἡ πτέρυξ, wing. 
ἔν-ειμι, am in a place, am arpovds,'® ostrich. 
tomos, place, locality. 
. €pnuos" deserted, desolate ; vAn,2 wood, 


ἐνίοτε, al times. [ there. 


σταθμὸς ἔρημος, aday’s march 32. ἡ ὠτίς,21 bustard. 
through a desert country. 


Cf. Eng. spasm. 2 Cf. Eng. aromatic. 

Cf. French absinthe, brandy flavored with wormwood, 

Hence Eng. tri-brach, brachy-logy. 5 Cf. Eng. take. 

Hence the name Dorcas. 1 Cf. Eng. eremite, hermit ; cf. XXXIV. 
εὖ, well, cf. Eng. ev-logy ; ὧδ, from the theme οὗ (Lat. od-or), smell. 

Cif, ἥδομαι, am pleased ; ἡδέως, gladly. 

Hence Lat. calamus. ll Of, Eng. crea-sote. 

Cf. Eng. an-omalous. 18 From zavr, theme of πᾶς. 

Cf. Eng. pause. 16 Theme wer; Lat. pen-na, wing, for pet-na 
Cf. παραπλήσιος, like. 17 Theme dpa, cf. δρό-μος. 

Cf. Eng. o-strich. 19 Cf. Eng. topo-graphy. 

Cf. Lat. silva. 

A large bird, which like the ostrich runs with great swiftness. 





LESSON XLVI. 


5. EXERCISES. 


9 ud Ld 
1. Translate: (a) Ἐπορεύθη mapa ποταμὸν ἰχθύων πραέων πλήρη. 
ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχων πεδίον μέγα καὶ ἐπίρρυτον. (/) Τοὺς δὲ ὄνους διαστάντες 
» - 
διώξομεν διαδεχόμενοι, ἀλλ᾽ εὖ ἴσμεν οὐκ ἔσεσθαι αὐτοὺς λαβεῖν, ἐπεὶ 
πολὺ ἀποσπῶσιν. (4) Καὶ πᾶσα ἡ χώρᾶ ὁμαλὴς ἦν ὥσπερ πεδίον μέγα. 
(.) "Ev τούτοις τοῖς τόποις ἐποιήθησαν καλοὶ παράδεισοι ὑπὸ τοῦ τότε 


ἄρχοντος. 


2. ‘Translate: (a) Sometimes indeed they obeyed, but (use μὲν 

δέ) then they refused to go farther. (6) If they shall cross this river 
now, they will not be wet above the middle. (c) The flesh of the 
animals caught (attrib. posit.) by the Greeks is found to be more tender 
than venison. (d) It was said that they ran much swifter than the 
horses. (6) But proceeding through this country, they arrive at 
(= upon) a river, the width of which was a plethrum; there was a 
large city there, of which (dat. poss.) the name was Issus; they remained 
there three days, and took-in-provisions ; thence they marched thirteen 
days’ journey through a-desert-country (use ἔρημος), with the Euphrates 
river on the right; in these journeys many of the beasts-of-burden 
perished. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Declension of nouns and adjectives whose stems end in -es; the 
manner of contraction. 2. Accent of ἐνην, inerat; why? 3. Uses of 
the imperfect indicative. 4. Conditional relative sentences. 5. The 
case after comparatives when ἤ is omitted. 6. The aspiration in θᾶττον. 
7. Crasis, cordnis. 8. ὦ in ἁπαλώτερα. 9. ἔστι, ἐστί. 10. Formation 
of comparatives and superlatives. 11. The present system of ἀποσπάω. 
12. The first aorist and future of liquid verbs. 13. Synopsis of ἀξιόω, 
present system, 1st and 2d person singular. 

















INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. LESSON XLVII. 159 
3. Manner is denoted by the dative case. 
4. Price is denoted by the genitive case. 
: 5. δύναται, = 1s able, is worth, and in the latter sense governs an 
LESSON XLVII. : accusative. . - 

6. Verbs, like nouns, are often followed by the partitive genitive. 

7. The relative pronoun may stand as a cognate accusative wherever 
a noun could stand in the same construction. 


ANABASIS 1. v. 4-7. 


1. NOTES. 








§ 4. περι-ερρεῖτο : impf. ind. from mept-p-péw, and contracted from 
mept-eppe-ero. Note the doubling of p, and οὗ ἐπίρρυτον XXIX., from 
ἐπί and ῥέω. Initial p is usually doubled when a vowel is brought 
before it by composition or inflection. ὑπὸ τοῦ Μάσκᾶ: cf. ὑπὸ τοῦ 
ποταμοῦ XLV. On the form, cf. ᾿Αβροκόμα XL. ὃ 3. κύκλῳ, in ἃ 
circle. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


aS gi τς 2 


. ἵστημι in the 2d aorist and 2d per- 
fect active systems. . . . . ἢ. 335,336. 
The partitive genitive with verbs . H. 736. 
The genitive with verbs of buying . H. 746. 
. Instrument, means, cause, manner . H: 776. 


ne on 


fa 


§ 5. ἀπ-ώλετο : cf. ἀπ-ώλοντο XXXI. καὶ ποιοῦντες Kré, and 
manufacturing them (into the proper form), they used to tuke them, ete. 

ἔζων κτὲ, and they rived by buying bread in turn. ἔζων, contracted 
from €-¢a-ov, impf. ind. 


4. VOCABULARY. 





§ 6. τεττάρων σίγλων, for four shekels ; paying four shekels. Note the 
use of the genitive to indicate the price of a purchase; cf. the Latin 
usage. δύναται κτὲ, is worth seven and a half Attic obols. Cf. this 
use of dvvaras with that of the Latin valet. ἐσθίοντες... διε- 


. τὸ ἄλευρον (usually plur.), 10. ἕάω," live. 

meal, flour. 11. ἡμι-ω βόλιον,Σ half- obol, 
. τὸ ἄλφιτον (usually plur.), 1? cents. 

barley grits. 12. ἡ καπίθη.δ hapithe. 


yiyvovro, continued eating, 7. 6. continued to eat. This use of διαγίγνομαι 
with the participle is a more vivid way of expressing what might be 
denoted by the imperfect (ἔσθιον) alone. What kind of participle ? 

ὃ 7. ἦν σταθμῶν, there were (some) of, etc. . . . which he made (lit. 
marched) very long. ἦν singular; being used without reference to any 
definite subject. οὕς : cognate accusative. ἐπ-έστη, stood by, 
halted: cf. ἐφ-ειστήκεσαν XL. § 4. λαβόντας τοῦ . .. στρατοῦ, 
taking [a part] of the, etc. Note this free use of the partitive genitive, 
the limited word being omitted. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. p at the beginning of a word is doubled when a vowel is brought 
before it. 

2. A few proper names of the first declension ending in -as, have the 
genitive singular ending in -a, 








avr-ayopatw,! buy in ex- 
chanq?. 


. Arrixds, Attic, Athenian. 
. δια-τελέω,2 bring through to 


an end, complete. 


. δύναμαι, am able; worth. 
. δυσ-πόρευτος,3 difficult of 


travel. 


. ἐνενήκοντα. ninety. 


ἐπι-λείπω, give out, fail. 


. ὁ κύκλος, circle 
. ὁ λῖμός, hunger. 
. μακρός long. 

. ὁ ὀβολός,8 obol. 


ὁ ὄνος adérns, grinding-jack, 
(hand) mill-stone. 


. ὁρύττω, dig, quarry. 
. πάνυ," wholly, exceedingly. 


περι ρ pew, flow about, en- 
COMPASS. 





1 Cf. ἀγορά, market. 2 Cf. τελευτάω, finish. 

8 Cf. πορεύομαι, αποριὰ, amopew. δυσ- has the sense of dificult, cf. Eng. dys- pepsia, 
4 Cf. Eng. zoo-logy. 5 Cf. ημι-ὅόλιον, = 1}. 

6 A Persian dry measure, = 2.3 litres. 7 Cf. Eng. cycle. 

8 An Attic coin, the sixth part of a drachma, about 34 cents. 

9 Cf. was, all. 














INDUCTIVE GREEK METIIOD. 


ὁ πηλός, mud. 27. συν-εκ-βιβάζω," help pull out. 
πλεθριαῖος, of a plethrum (in . τὸ Udwp,® water. 
extent). 29. ὁ χῖλός, grass, fodder. 
- πρίαμαε, buy. . ἡ χοῖνιξ," choeniz, 
πωλέω,Ϊ sell. . ὁ χορτός, grass, fodder. 
ὁ atyhos,” shekel. 2. xwpéw,' give room; hold, 
στε oxwpia,®> a@ narrow contain. 
place, pass. 33. wWidrds, bare. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Ὁ μὲν daperxds δύναται πολλοὺς ὀβολοὺς ᾿Αττικούς. 
(0) Τοῦτον τὸν ὄνον ἀλέτην. ἐπρίατο ἐννέα σίγλων. (6) "Ελεξαν ὅτι ὀρύ- 
Eavres εὕροιεν πολλοὺς ὀβολοὺς ἐν τῷ πηλῷ: (d) “Ore δὲ πολλοὶ τῶν 
ἐνοικοῦντων ὑπὸ λϊίμοῦ ἀπόλοιντο. εὖ ἤδειτε (9) “Orav βούλησθε πρὸς πόλιν 
διατελέσαι οἱ σταθμοὶ ods ἐλαύνετε ἰσχυρῶς μακροί εἰσιν. (f) Ἐπεὶ δ᾽ 


ἐδόκουν αὐτῷ οὐ ταχέως ποιεῖν, ὥσπερ ἀχθόμενος ἐκέλευσε τοὺς περὶ αὐτὸν 
Πέρσᾶς τοὺς βελτίστους συμπρᾶξαι αὐτῷ ἔνθα δή τι τῆς καλῆς τάξεως ἣν 
θεασασθαι. (1) Δῆλος δὲ ἦν Κῦρος ὡς ὅτι τάχιστα πορευόμενος πᾶσαν τὴν 
ὁδόν, νομίζων, εἰ θᾶττον ἔλθοι, ἀπαρασκευοτέρῳ βασιλεῖ μαχεῖσθαι. (h) Ὑπὲρ 
δὲ τὸν Εὐφράτην ποταμὸν κατὰ τοὺς ἐρήμους σταθμοὺς ἦν πόλιες εὐδαίμων καὶ 
μεγάλη ὄνομα δὲ Χαρμάνδη " ἐκ ταύτης οἱ στρατιῶται ἠγόραζον τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 
πλοίοις διαβαίνοντες. 

2. Translate: (a) He was exceedingly pleased because you crossed 
before the rest replied whether they would do so or not. (ὁ) But 
when Socrates learned that he had gone up with Cyrus against the king, 
he was not at all (adverb. acc.) pleased. (c) We know that the breasts 
of the soldiers were not made-wet as they crossed (= crossing) the Eu- 
phrates. (d) Pray that Cyrus may be fortunate in-the matters. for-which 
(ἐφ᾽ ἅ) he is marching. 

3. (a) Decline : ὕδωρ, H. 182, a; G. 60, 5, 29. δυσπόρευτος, H. 
225; ἃ. 63. (ὁ) Learn the Vocabulary of Lesson XX., (a) pronounc- 
ing carefully each word, observing its translation, and dwelling upon it 


1 Cf. Eng, mono-poly. 

2 A Persian coin, equal to about 24 cents. 
8 στενός, NaTTOW ; xwpa, place. 

5 Cf. Eng. hydrant, hydro-phobia. 

6 A grain measure, equal to about 1.1 litres or quarts. 7 CS. χώρα. 


* CS. ἀπο-βιβάζω XLI. 








LESSON XLVILIL 161 


until it is fixed in the mind, (Ὁ) copying on a slip of paper the English 
translations, and then from the English giving the Greek, and vice versa. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Meanings of διά ; constructions after it. 9, Analysis and syn- 
opsis of ἀφικνοῦνται. 3. Declension of εὖρος. 4. The doubling of p. 
5. The form Maoxa. 6. Manner. 7. Future and aorist formation in 
liquid verbs. 8. Future and aorist of verbs in -atw, -ἰζω. 9. Theme 
and principal parts of ὀρύττω and ἐπέλιπε. 10. Value of the obol, 
the shekel. 11. Participle with διαγέγνομαι. 12. Declension of com- 
pound adjectives. 13. Principal parts and classification of ἐφίστημε ; 
sf ἔταξε. 14. Cognate accusative. 





LESSON XLVIII. 


ANABASIS I. v. 8, 9. 


1. NOTES. 


ὃ 8. ὥσπερ ὀργῇ : on the construction, cf. κύκλῳ, § 4. συν-επι- 
σπεῦσαι κτὲ, to help in hastening forward. σύν has here the same force 
(that of helping) as in ovv-ex-BiBdtew, § 7. te-vro, they sent them- 
srlves, rushed: from ἴη-μι, send, let go; not to be confused with εἶμι OF 
εἰμί. ὥσπερ ἂν δράμοι κτὲ, just as any one would run for a victory, 
even down a very, etc. Note the optative, and cf. ὀκνοίην av XX XVIII. 
§ 17. h ὥς τις ἂν @ero, than [omit ὡς, as] any one might think, 
t.¢. if he were observing them. The past indicative thus used in a 
conclusion is called the hypothetical indicative. Without ἄν, what 
would @ero mean ? μετεώρους. . ἁμάξᾶς, t. 6. they lifted them up, 
and brought them out of the mud. 


ὃ 9. τὸ δὲ σύμπᾶν, upon the whole, adverbial accusative : cf. οὐδὲν 
ἤχθετο XV. δῆλος ἦν σπεύδων : cf δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος XXVI. § 11. 
11 











162 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. ᾿ LESSON XLVIII. 
ὅπου μὴ καθέζετο, where he did not halt, i.e. except (εἰ pn) where he 
halted. On account of the conditional idea in the sentence, the negative 
is μή, not ov. dom. . . τοσούτῳ, quanto, . . . tanto (degree of ; ‘ en 
Be a oe ἀναγκαῖος, necessary; neut., 20. τὸ μῆκος ® length. 
difference ; cf. ἡμέραις XXX1.), the more swiftly he proceeded, the more te 
ὶ fi vii eat ἱ a necessity. 21. ἡ vixn,? victory. 
- ᾽ 
unprepared the king would be. μαχεῖσθαι : fut. of μάχομαι. συν- | nine : oo 3 
oh bi iene 2 ae _ αἱ dvakupides, Persian trow- 22. ὁ νόος (νοῦς), mind, atten- 
wWeiv δ᾽ ἦν... οὖσα, and for one lending his attention (animum adhi- i eaten ee: 
: : ᾿ : gage . ὁ yn-rogos,! hill. [sers. tion. 
benti), the government of the king was to see into as being strong (t.¢. it ‘a ἀρ ς 
: RP ; . δια-σπάω͵,Σ draw apart, sepa- 23. ἡ ὀργή. anger. 
was possible to see that the government was strong). ἀρχή, subject of Wh di : 
: 3 ' ὙΠ: : ee rate. 24. τὸ πλῆθος, number, multi- 
ἦν, the Greek, as usual, preferring the personal construction, cf. δῆλος ἦν a 
i wih 9 ep a a i Le pi . ὃ α-ττρίβω.3 wear away : delay. tude, extent. 
σπεύδων above, and XXIV., XXV. συν-ιδεῖν, 2 aor. inf, (from a? uae ae Ξ : 
: i ; : ; . εἰσ-πηδάω, jump inio, 25. ποικίλος. many-colored, em- 
auv-opaw), is loosely attached to ἦν. πλήθει. .. μήκεσι. . . τῷ : 
δι᾿ εσπάσθαι : datives of cause. τῳ διεσπάσθαι, the scuttered condition of 
his forces: perf. inf., from δια-σπάω. Note the reduplication e-; why 
not oe-? On the infinitive used as a noun, cf. τοῦ ἀθροίζειν XIV. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἐκ-κομίζω, bring out. broidered. 
. ἔνιοι, some. 26. πολυτελής, -€s, costly, rich. 
. ἐπισϊτισμός, provisioning, tak- 27. πορφύρεος, -ovs, purple. 
δυνάμεις : subject of διεσπάσθαι. διὰ ταχέων, through swift means ; τω — ] pie — καθάριος 

suede νῶν. + ables, ΕΝ γ. 29. προσ ἔχω; hold to, apply. 

- ἡ evtagia.* good order. . pinta, throw, throw off. 
. ἴημι.5 send, hurl. . σπεύδω, hasten. 
2. OBSERVATIONS. 3. καθέζομαι sit down, rest. 
. 6 xavdus, cafian (a Persian tening onward, 
συν-αγείρω, collect together. 





2. συν-επι-σπεύδω, help in has- 





1. σύν, prefixed to a verb, frequently has the idea of aiding in the ) Vest ). 
. κράτιστος. most powerful, best. . συν-οράω, observe, perceive. 


act denoted by the simple verb. 
σχολαῖος, slow; -ws, adv., 


2. ἵστημι has a Ist and 2d perfect participle (ἑστηκώς, ἑστώς) - μάλα, very, exceedingly. 
. μάχομαι, fight, contend with. slowly. 


without difference of meaning. 
. TO μέρος, part, portion. ὁ τράχηλος, throat. 


3. The Greek prefers the personal construction (δῆλος ἦν, he was 
evident) to the impersonal (δῆλον ἦν). Occasionally it is impossible to . μετέωρος, lifted, raised (in ἡ χείρ, hand. 
render a personal construction literally and in good English ; e.g. συν- mid air). 
wWeiv ἦν ἡ ἀρχὴ ἰσχυρὰ οὖσα, the government was to perceive as being strony, 
i.e. tt was possible to perceive that the government was strong. 

4. The infinitive, even when used as a noun, may take a subject. 

5. The English, they lifted up and brought out the wagons, may be- 
come they brought out the uplifted wagons, in being put into Greek. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Compare: πρᾶνής, πολυτελής, ποικίλος, ταχέως, σχολαίως, σχολαῖος, 
ἰσχυρός, ἀσθενής. (Grammar Lesson Χ].) 

2. Principal parts, theme, and class οἵ ῥίπτω, τυγχάνω, διδράσκω, 
ἔχω, τρίβω, μάχομαι. 

1 γῆ, earth, and λόφος, an eminence. 7 Cf. Eng. meteor 
3. GRAMMAR LESSON. ys gee g 
2 Cf. ἀπέσπα XLVI. 8 Cf. μακρός, long, XLVII. 

: ; 3 Cf. Eng. diairibe. 9. ΟἹ vindw, XXV. ὃ 8. 
1. Comparison of ἀγαθός . nee ἐν. Η. 254, 1. G. 73, 1. 4 εὖ, well, and τάττω, arrange. 10 Cf. Lat. pronus. 
2. The genitive with substantives . , H.729,a-g. G. 167. δ Cf. ἀφ-ιέναι XXXVIII. § 19. ll Cf. Eng. chir-ography. 
Η. 476. G. 127, III. 6 Uf. μάχη, battle, XXV., Eng. logo-machy. 


3. The present system of tne. 








164 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. (a4) Ὁ δὲ ἐλθὼν πρὸς ἑαυτοῦ στράτευμα ἔλεγεν " ἀκούσαντες δ᾽ οἱ 
στρατιῶται ἐχαλέπαινον καὶ ὠργίζοντο ἰσχυρῶς τῷ Κλεάρχῳ. (ὁ) Τῇ δ᾽ 
αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐπὶ τὴν πηγὴν τοῦ ποταμυῦ ἰὼν καὶ ἐκεῖ θεωρήσας τὴν ἀγορᾶν, 
ἀπῆλθε ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνὴ ’ διὰ τοῦ Μένωνος στρατοῦ σὺν τοῖς περὶ αὐτόν. 
(0) Ὅσῳ πλεῖον ἔχομεν τοσούτῳ πλεῖον βουλόμεθα ἔχειν. ((1) Τοῖς τὸν 
νοῦν προσέχουσι δῆλόν ἐστι τοῦτο τὸ μέρος τοῦ γηλόφου ἰσχυρῶς πρᾶνές 
(¢) Ὑπέσχετό μοι εἰ καταπηδήσας συνεπισπεύσαιμι τὰ σκευυφόρα, μὴ πρό. 
σθεν παύσεσθαι πρίν μοι πολλοὺς ποικίλους τε καὶ πολυτελεῖς κάνδυς τοὺς 
πορφυροὺς ἀποδοίη. 


4. Translate: (a) If he should apply his attention to this con- 
spiracy against himself, he would quickly perceive that it is very danger- 
ous. (+) The more we have, the more we want. (c) It is said that 
Apollo was the best of all the gods in musical-skill. (4) It was indeed 
evident that the kingdom was weak on account of the barbarians dis- 
persing their armies. (6) They thought that if any one made a quick 
campaign, the city might be conquered. 

5. Select fifty of the words in Chap. I. whose meanings are most 
difficult to retain, make a list of these meanings, and practise giving the 
corresponding Greek until it can be done without hesitation. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Declension of neuters in -os. 2. The supplementary participle. 
3. Declension of χείρ, νοῦς 4. Hypothetical optative ; hypothetical 
indicative. 5. Personal and impersonal constructions. 6. Classifica- 
tion and orders of the mutes. 7. Accent in the 2d aorist infinitive an<l 
participle. 8. Declension of ἑστηκώς. 9. Reduplication of ψεύδω, 
σπάω, ἵστημι, λαμβάνω ; the form εἴρηκα. 10. The hypothetical in- 
dicative. 11. Substantive use of the infinitive. 12. Its loose use. 
13. μετεώρους, ἐξεκόμισαν. 


1 Lesson XXXVIII. § 19. 2 H. 157; 6. 43. 























LESSON XLIX. 


LESSON XLIX. 


ANABASIS 1. v. 10-13. 


1. NOTES. 


δ 10. κατὰ τοὺς ἐρήμους σταθμοὺς, opposite the journeys through the 
desert: cf. κατ᾽ ἀντιπέρας XV. στεγάσματα, as coverings [for their 


tents]. 


ἐπίμπλα-σαν χόρτον, they filled with light hay. συν- 


έσπων : ε΄. ἀπέσπα XLVI. § 3; διεσπάσθαι XLVIII. ὡς μὴ... 
ὕδωρ, so that the water did not touch the hay. ὡς = ὥστε ; ef. IX. 


> 
οινον... 


σῖτον : appositives to ἐπιτήδεια. Note carefully the arrange- 


ment of attributives in this clause : ἐκ, out of ; ἀπό, from, from off. 


§ 11. ἀμφι-λεξάντων, --- gen. abs , with τοῦ (= τινός) after Μένωνος, 
and τοῦ supplied before τῶν Κλεάρχου. --- because some one of . . . had 


some dispute, ete. 


ἐχαλέπαινον, bore it hard, were provoked : 


ef. XLIII. § 12, and χαλεπῶς φέρω XXXII. 


8. 12. ἕησι τῇ ἀξίνῃ, hurls (with) his axe. αὐτοῦ ἥμαρτεν, missed 


him. 


§ 13. παραγγέλλει εἰς τὰ ὅπλα, passes the word along, “to arms!” 
orders them to arms. τούτων δὲ. . . Θρᾷκας : ἃ parenthesis. 

ἐκ-πεπλῆχθαι : perf. inf. mid., from ἐκ- πλήττω, theme πληγ. The 
ending -σθαι drops o coming between y and @, and y then becomes  ; 
?) λαμβάνω, perf. εἴληφα, inf. mid. εἰλῆφθαι. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. πέρᾶν, an adverb of place, is followed by the genitive. 
2. Verbs of filling govern the genitive. 
3. Negative result is expressed by ὦ; μή or ὥστε μή, with the 


infinitive, 


4. Verbs of touching govern the genitive. 


5. 


Tov, meaning the same as τινός, is an enclitic. 


6. Verbs signifying to be angry, may take the dative of the cause. 
7. Verbs of missing are construed with the genitive. 
8. In the perfect infinitive middle the ending -σθαι loses o between 


consonants, 











INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


- Declension of yov. . . . . . H.216,3. G. 60, 5, 6 
Ὑ . . . ‘ ; : 
. Genitive with verbs . . . . . H. 786-748. G. 170,171. 


. Conjugation οἵ ἵστημ. . . . . Η. 331, 335, G. 123, 121, 


336, 351. 1, 2 (d). 


4. VOCABULARY. 


; ἁμαρτάνω (theme duapr), miss. 14. κατα-σκέπτομαι," examine. 
- ἀμφι-λέγω (talk on both sides), 15. κατα-φεύγω, flee for refuge, 
wrangle, quarrel. escape to. ) 
7 e > . ᾿ 
. ἡ ἀξίνη, axe. 16. κοῦφος, light. 
” 
. ἅπτομαι, touch, 17. κρίνω, decide, judge. 
> , ° 
. ap-irreva,! ride away. 3. ὁ λίθος,Ἷ stone. 
* ¢ , . 
. ἡ βάλανος, nut. (of the date- - τὸ ξύλον, piece of wood. 
palm) date. . ὀλίγος," small; plur., few, 
‘ , 2 ἔων, ω , 
7. 98 γῶν, knee. . ὀργίζομαι, am angry. 
- ἡ SudBaars,’ place of crossing; 22. οὔπω, not yet. 
fort. . πέρα. ν),10 beyond, across. 
. δι -ελαύνω, ride through. 24. πίμπλημι,}} All. 
- ἡ διφθέρα,8 hide; (hide made 90. πληγή, plaga, blow. 
me a) bag. 26. mpoo-ehavvw, ride forward, 
. ἐκ-πλήττω," strike out ; (of one’s up. 
senses) dumbfound, amaze. - τὸ oréyacpa,'? covering 


2. ἐμ-βάλλω,5 throw on; πληγὰς - ov once," draw together. 


ἐμβάλλω, throw on blows, 29. ἡ axedia,* frame, raft. 
chastise by beating. 320. σχίζω 15 scindo, split. 
ἡ κάρφη, hay. 31. ὁ φοῖνιξ, date-palm. 


Derivation ? 

Same in origin as genu and the Eng. knee. 

How different from τὸ δέρμα ὃ Cf. Eng. diph-theria. 

Theme tray, many. CY. πληγή. ὅ Cf. ἐμβάλλει XXV. 
Cf. σκεπτέον XXXV. Cf. Eng. litho-graphy, mono-lith. 
Cf. Eng. olig-archy. Cf. ὀργή XLVIII. ; 
Cf. κατ᾽ ἀντιπέρᾶς XV. 

Cf. πλή-ρης, σύμ-πλετως, πλῇ-θος, pleo. 

2 From στέγω, = tego, cover. 

Cf. ἀπο-σπάω, XLVI, δια-σπάω XLVIII. 

How different from τὸ πλοῖον ? 16 Cf, Eng. schism. 

















LESSON XLIX. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (4) Τούτῳ δὲ τῷ ἱππεῖ πολλᾶς τε Kai ἰσχυρᾶς πληγᾶς 
ἐμβαλῶ, ἐὰν μή μοι πείθηται (Lb) Ὅσοις μὲν λίθοις τὸν γυμνῆτα ἧκε, 
πάντες αὐτοῦ ἥμαρτον" ἡ δ᾽ ἀξίνη τοῦ ποδὸς ἐκείνου ἔτυχε. (C) Κεκε- 
λεύκαμεν ὑμᾶς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι τούτων τῶν στλεγγίδων τοῦ φοινικιστοῦ 
(1) Ταῦτα δὴ πραγματα ἐπὶ τῶν γονάτων τῶν θεῶν ἐστιν. (6) ‘H τῶν 
ἀρχαίων σοφία μέγα θαυμαστέα ἐστίν. 

2, Translate: (a) This is the cave in which are the sources of the 
river which we must cross (= is to be crossed, διαβατέος) when we 
arrive directly-opposite the city of the great king. (ὦ) We will not 
touch those things which do not belong to us. (6) Whenever they 
crossed the river they used to fill their leathern bags with food which 
they bought in the markets of the barbarians. (ὦ) Whenever we wish 
to split wood rapidly, we use an axe. (6) You know well that the nut 


of the date-palm is sweet. 
3. Review carefully all the words in the Voe. of Lessons X. and XX. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Construction of the genitives and the datives in this Lesson. 
2, The principal parts of πίμπλημει, ἐμβάλλω, ἁμαρτάνω, καταφεύγω, 
σαραγγέλλω, μένω, τίθημι, ἐκπλήττω. ὃ. Classification of the preceding 
verbs. 4. Formation and comparison of the adverb ἰσχυρῶς. 5. The 
short forms for the genitive and dative singular of ris. 6. Conjugation 
οἵ συσπάω and πίμπλημε, present system, active and middle. 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON L. 
ANABASIS I. v. 14-17. 


1. NOTES. 


ὃ 14. ἔτυχε yap ὕστερος προσιών, «ré, for he happened to be coming 
on later, behind, etc. ἔτυχε, cf. ἔτυχεν XLVII. ὃ 8; ὕστερος, on the 
case, cf προτέρα XXXI. 8 25: προσιών, cf. παρών III. On the number 
Of ἔτυχε, cf. ἔμεινε XXXII. $1. εἰς τὸ μέσον ἀμφοτέρων, between 
both. ἐδεῖτο. . . ταῦτα : cf. closely with δοῦναι. . καναλῦσω 
XVIII. αὐτοῦ. . . καταλευσθῆναι, when he wanted little to be 
stoned to death (i. e. narrowly escaped being stoned). 


ἢ 15. ἐν τούτῳ, meanwhile. ἐπ-ῆει : cf. ἐπ-ήεσαν XXVIII. 


§ 16. οὐκ ἴστε: from οἶδα. κατακεκόψεσθαι (fut. perf.), shall 
have been cut to pieces, i.e. shall certainly be, etc. N ote, the future per- 
fect for the future here seems to make the act immediate or decisive. 

ἐμοῦ ὕστερον: cf. mporépa Kipov XXXII. κακὼς ἐχόντων: what 
circumstance is denoted by the genitive absolute here ? Tov... 
ὄντων, than those, ete.: cf. τῶν ἄλλων πλέον XLIV. 8 14 


ὃ 17. ἐν ἑαντῷ ἐγένετο. (became in himself), came te himeelf. κατὰ 


χώρᾶν ἔθεντο κτέ, they brought their arms to their right place ; they 
returned to their original quarters. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Words meaning earlier, later, standing as predicates to verbs of 
motion, agree with the subject, and are therefore not adverbs. 

2. A verb having two or more subjects, and preceding them, may 
agree in number with the nearest only. 

3. ὀλίγου δεῖ, followed by the infinitive, = (he) almost or (he) very 
nearly ; e.g. ὀλίγου δεῖ ἐβλήθη (βληθῆναι), he was very nearly hit. 

4. The future perfect may be used for the simple future to represent 
a future act as certainly about to occur. 




















LESSON L. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


. First aorist system of liquid verbs, 
activeand middle . . . . H. 327. G. 96. 
. Future perfect of Ave . . . . H. 319. G. 96. 
H. 466, 467, G. 92, 4, IV.; 


3. The future perfect 850 anda. 110, IV. ὦ. 


. Predicate adjective, equivalent to 
an English adverb 
. The genitive with δέω 


4. VOCABULARY. 
. ἐξ-ίστημι, set, place, out of; 7. πρόσ-ειμι, come to, near; 
mid., stand out of. approach, 
κακῶς ἔχειν, be or go ill, be in . πυνθάνομαι (theme mv6), ask, 
a bad condition. learn by inquiry. 
Kata-Aevw,? stone down, to . ovvanre,® make touch, join 
death. together; μάχην, join 
- τὸ πάθος, suffering, treat- battle. 
ment. . τίθημι τὰ ὅπλα ; mid., take a 
. τὸ παλτόν, light spear, jave- military position (in line), 
lin (used for hurling or siand under arms (after ad- 
striking). vancing to or froma place). 
3. mpaas,* mildly. 11. ὕστερος, later, behind. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Εὖ δ᾽ οὖν ἤδεσαν τὴν τάξιν ἣ προσιοῦσα ὑστέρα 
ἐτύγχανεν ὅτι κωλύσοι μὴ τὸν ἑρμηνέα καταπετρωθῆναι. ‘ (Ὁ) Ov δὲ πολὺ 
Kupov ὕστερον θήσονται τὰ ὅπλα κατὰ χώὠρᾶν τῆς ἔριδος παυσάμενοι. 
(.) Συλλαμβάνει ᾿᾽Ορόντᾶν καὶ συγκαλεῖ εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνὴν Πέρσᾶς 


‘ \ - ς ’ ᾿ 
τοὺς ἀρίστους τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἑπτά καὶ τοὺς τῶν Ἑλλήνων τυ ρανηγοῦν 


lS, = ~ J , 4 ~ ‘ 8 ξ ~ 
κελεύει ὀπλίτας ἀγαγεῖν, τούτους δὲ θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα περὶ τὴ» αὑτοῦ 
΄ e £ 
σκηνήν. oi δὲ ταῦτα ἐποίησαν, ἀγαγόντες ὡς τρισχιλίους ὁπλίτας. 


1 Cf. εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχειν XT. 4 Cf. πρᾷος XLITTI. 
2 Of. κατα-πετρόω XXXII. 5 Cf. ἅπτεσθαι XLIX. 
" Of. πάσχω (theme παθ. revo) XXXII1 6 Cf. ὕστερον (used adverb.) XXXII. 





170 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD, 


2. Translate: (a) They knew not what they were doing until they 
saw Cyrus standing in their midst, and begging them not to join battle. 
(6) Then in truth they returned to their better senses. (c) Any one 
might well be angry with you, because when the generals were almost 
cut-down, you seem to speak so lightly about it. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Principal parts of τυγχάνω, ἕπομαι, ἄγω, δέω, λέγω, πυνθάνομαι 
2. Classification of κελεύω, ἔλαβε, ἐλαύνων, συνάψετε. 3. Theme of 
νομίζω, κόπτω, ἔχω, axovods, ἔθεντο. 4. (ὃ 14.) Construction of αὐτῷ, 
Κλεάρχου, αὐτοῦ; (ὃ 16.) of πολύ, ἐμοῦ, ὕστερον, τῶν. . . ὄντων. 
5. Inflexion of mpurrw, perfect indicative middle. 6. Synopsis of 
ἔθεντο, 2d aorist active, and middle 2d singular. 





LESSON LI. — REVIEW. 


1 TEXT: AwnaBasis I. Iv. and v. 


This is a most important review, and should be taken up carefully. 
Go over the translation several times ; mark the words whose meaning 
it is hard to retain ; write them and repeat them with their meanings 
until they become thoroughly impressed. Apply just as far as possible, 
and step by step, the method of review suggested at the beginning of 
Lesson X. Be sure that if you wish to master the five remaining chap- 
ters of this First Book of the Anabasis, you must master thoroughly 
these first fifty Lessons, and, above all, this Review. 


2. VOCABULARY. 
NOUNS. 

9. τὸ ἀψώνθιον. 
10. ἡ βάλανος. 
ll. ἢ Bia. 

12. ὁ γήλοφος. 


. τὸ ἄλευρον. 5. ἡ ἀξίνη. 

. τὸ ἄλφιτον. 6. τὸ ἀργύριον. 
, + , on ε " ,΄ 

. ἡ ἀνάβασις. 7. ἢ ἀρετή. 


. αἱ ἀναξυρίδες 8. τὸ ἄρωμα 














. τὸ γόνυ. 

. ἡ διάβασις. 
. ἡ διφθέρα. 
. ἡ δορκάς. 


. τὸ ἐμπόριον. 


- ’ 
. ὁ ἐπισϊτισμύς. 


. ἡ εὐταξία. 
. ἡ ζώνη. 
. τὸ ἡμιωβύλιον. 


beds 
ἰχθύς. 
κάλαμος. 


. ὁ κάνδυς. 
). ἡ καπίθη. 
ε , 
. ἢ Kaphn. 
. τὸ κρέας. 


5 κύκλος. 


κώμη. 
λίθος. 


2. ὁ λιμός. 
3. ὃ λόγος. 


. ἡ Aoxayia. 
. ὁ μαστός. 


. ἀδικέω. 


2. αἴρω. 
3. ἁλίσκομαι. 


. ἁμαρτάνω. 

. ἀμφι-λέγω. 
> ’ 

. ἀνα-πείθω. 
. , 

. ἀνα-στρέφω. 

. ἀν-ίστημι. 

. ἀντ-αγοράζω. 

. ἀπ-αγγέλλω. 

. ἀπ-αγορεύω. 
> , 

. ἀπ-ελαύνω. 


LESSON LI.— REVIEW. 


36. 
37. 
38. 
39. 


TO μέρος. 

TO μῆκος. 

ὁ μισθοφόρος. 
ἡ μνᾶ. 


. ἡ μυριάς. 


41. 
42, 
48. 
44. 
45. 
46. 
47. 
48. 
49. 


ὁ ναύαρχος. 
ἡ ναῦς. 
ἡ νίκη 
ὁ νοῦς. 
τὸ ξύλον. 
ὁ ὀβολός. 
ἡ ὀλκάς. 
τὸ ὄνομα. 
ecw 
ὄνος. 
» ’ , 
ὄνος ἀλετης. 


ὀργή 


ς {Ἐν Oe 
. ἢ ωτις. 


3. τὸ πάθος. 


Α ’ 
. τὸ παλτον. 


. ἡ πάροδος. 


}. ὁ πατήρ. 


. ἡ πέρδιξ. 
a ἡ πέτρα 


VERBS. 


. ἀπ-έρχομαι. 


. ἀπο-βιβάζω. 

. ἀπο-διδράσκω. 
» ’ 

. ἀπο-λείπω. 


. ἀπο-σπάω. 


» τι , 
. ἀπο-σῦλάω. 


. ἀπο-φεύγω. 


. ἀπο-ψηφίζομαι. 


. ἅπτομαι 
ξ Ψ᾿ 
. ἄρχω. 


Ἢ >] , 
. ἀφ-ιππεύω. 


βρέχω. 


. ὁ πηλος. 


Ὁ. τὸ πλῆθος. 


; ἡ πύλη 


2. ὁ σίγλος. 


3. ὁ σῖτος. 


Ψ ‘4 , 
. τὸ στάδιον. 


7 ε ,- 
. ἢ στενοχωρία. 


)6. ἡ στρουθὸς. 


7. τὸ τεῖχος. 


. τὸ τέκνον. 


)9. ὁ τόπος. 


. ὁ τράχηλος. 
. τὸ ὕδωρ. 


. ἢ ὕλη. 
3. ὁ φίλος. 


“I 417..17..1 


Go 
-_~ 
oe 
. 


Ἣ 59 . 


© © 


. TO φρούριον. 


. δια-δέχομαι. 


). δια-σπάω. 


. δια-τελέω. 


; δια-τρίβω. 


. δι-ελαύνω 
. δι ςέρχομαι. 
. δι-ίστημι. 


2, διώκω. 


. δύναμαι (2 senses). 
id ἐάω. 

> , 
. εἰσ-πηδάω. 


5 » , 
. ἐκ-κομίζω. 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


7. €K-KOMTW. 


. ἐκ-πλήττω. 
. ἐμ-βαίνω 
. ἐμ-βάλλω. 
. Erect. 

. ἐν-τίθημι 


3. ἐξ-ίστημι 


. ἐπιλείπω. 
. ἐπι- σϊτίζομαι. 


> > ΄, 
5 ευτυχεω. 


. εὔχομαι 

. ἐφ-ίστημι. 
- (dw. 

. ἡγέομαι. 

. tye. 


a. καθ-ήκω. 


53. καθ-έζομαι. 


. κακῶς ἔχειν; κ. ποιεῖν. 


. κατα-καίω. 


). κατα λεύω. 


to = 
: 


oe 


i μὰ μὶὶ μὶ 
wo Ὁ. > 


Ὁ Ὁ τὰ δ οἱ 


’΄ 

., κατα- σκέπτομαι. 
7 

- κατα-φεΐγω. 


. Gbipos. 


αἴτιος. 
ἁπαλός. 
᾿Αττικός. 
ἀφανής. 
βραχύς. 
δειλός. 
διαβατός. 
δυσπόρευτος. 


ἔλάφειος. 


᾽ Ld 

. ἐνενήκοντα. 
,«΄ 

. ἔνιοι. 


. ἐντελής. 


59. 
60. 
61. 
62. 
63. 
64. 
65. 
66. 
67. 
68. 
+ περι-ρ-ρέω. 
. πέτομαι. 


κρίνω. 
μάχομαι. 
μέλει. 
οἰκτείρω 
οἴχομαι. 
ὀργίζομαι. 
ὁρμέω. 
ὀρύττω. 

παρ έρχομαι. 


΄ 
πανω. 


. πίμπλημι. 


. πλησιάζω. 


dl 
+ πονεω. 


. πρίαμαι 


. προ-διδράσκω. 


}. πρό-ειμι. 


. πρόσ εἰμι. 
’ 
. προσ ελαύνω. 
. προ-τϊμάω. 
. πυνθάνομαι. 


ADJECTIVES. 


- ἔρημος. 
. ἕτερος. 


. εὐώδης. 


. ἡδύς. 


. ἡλίβατος. 


. θεῖος 


. κακός. 


. κοῦφος. 


2. κράτιστος. 


. μακρός. 
. μετέωρος. 


. μόνος. 


a ὀλίγος. 


81. 
82. 
83. 
84. 
85. 
86. 
87. 
88. 


. συν-επι-σπεύδω 


πωλέω. 

ῥίπτω. 

σκηνέω. 
στρατηγέω. 
συγ-καλέω. 
συν-αγείρω. 
συν-ἄπτω. 
συν-εκ-βιβάζω. 


. συν-οράω. 
. συ-σπάω. 
. σχίζω. 


3. τίθημι τὰ ὅπλα. 


. τυγχάνω (3 


senses). 


. ὑπο-χωρέω. 

. Pidroripeopat. 
. φρουρέω. 

. φύω 


9. χαλεπαίνω. 


. χωρέω. 
. Ψηφίζομαι. 


. ὁμαλής. 


. παντοῖος. 


. πλεθριαῖος. 


. ποικίλος. 


. πολυτελής. 
2, πορφυροῦς. 

. πρᾶνής. 

+ πρᾷος. 

. στενός. 


. σχολαῖος. 


. ὕστερος. 
. φίλος. 
. Wirds. 





αὐτόθι. 
ἔξω 
ἔσωξεν. 
evl vs. 

Kal ταῦτα. 


κακῶς. 
μά. 


οΟ ὃ ι Καὶ nN = 


ΝΜ J , 
. ἄνω, ἀνωτέρω. 


LESSON LI. — REVIEW. 


ADVERBS. 


. μάλα 
. μεγαλοπρεπῶς 
. μηκέτι, οὐκέτι. 
2. οὐδέ. 
. a» 
. οὔπω. 
. οὐπώποτε. 


. πάνυ. 


. πάλαι. 


. πεῷ.. 

. πέρᾶν. 

. πρᾳως. 

. προθύμως. 

. σαφῶς 
ς " 

. τοὔμπαλιν. 
. Ὁ 

. ὕπερθεν 

+ Χωρίς. 




















CONJUNCTIONS., PRONOUNS. PREPOSITIONS. 
ἕνεκα (strictly 


an adv.). 


aA ’ ᾿»᾿ 
ἐὰν μή. ἔγωγε. 
ἐπειδαν. ὅσπερ. 
, 
ἐπήν. 
td a» 
πότερον. . . 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Mutes before μ, H. 53; G. 16, 3. Transfer of aspiration, H. 
74,6; G. 17, 2, N. 

2. Declension : μνᾶ, H. 144; G. 38. πατήρ, H. 188, 189; 6. 
57, 1. γέρας, H. 191; G. 56. iyéus, H. 201; G. 53, 2. vais, 
H. 206, 207; G. 54. γόνυ, H. 216,3; G. 60,5,6. yum, H. 216, 
4; G. 60, 5,7. Gender of nouns, H. 125, a, b,c; G. 33, 2, NN. 

3. (a) Numerals 1 to 20, H. 288; G. 76. (0) εἷς, δύο, τρεῖς, 
H. 290 ; G. 77. 

4. Comparison: («) ἀγαθός, H. 254, 1; 6. 78,1. (6) Endings 
-wv, cotos, H. 253; G. 72, 1. 

5. Verbs: (a) Pres. system of ryuadw, H. 323; G.98. (hb) Of verhs 
in τόω, H. 325; 6. 98. (0) Liquid verbs, lst aorist, H. 327; G. 96. 
(4) Future perfect Avo, H. 319; G. 96. (ὁ) ἵστημι, H. 331, 335, 
336, 351, 414, 415, 534, 5; G. 128, 121, 1, 2, d. (f) δείκνῦμε, 
H. 382; 6. 123. (9) τίθημι. H. 329, 383, 334; G. 123. (h) δί- 
dou, H. 330; G. 123. (ὃ Future of liquid verbs, H. 422; G. 110, 
II. 2. (2) Aspirated perfect, H. 452; G. 110, IV. δ. (k) φημί, H. 
481; G. 127, IV. (ὃ οἶδα, H. 491; G. 127, VII. (m) Future 
perfect, H. 466, 467, 850 and a; G. 92, 4, 1V., 110, IV. 6. () nus, 
H. 476; G. 127, III. 





174 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


6. Syntax: (a) Pred. adj. equivalent to Eng. adverb, H. 619; 
G. 138, nN. 7. (6) Cognate acc., H. 715, a,b; G. 159, nn. 2, 4. 
(0) Accusative of specification, H. 718; G. 160, 1. (d) Genitive with 
substantives, H. 729, a-g; G. 167, 1-6. (¢) With verbs, H. 736-742 ; 
G. 170-173. (0) With δέω, H. 743, a,b; G.172,NN. 1,2. (9) With 
verbs of buying, H. 746; G. 178. (h) Instrument, means, cause, 
manner, ΕΠ. 776 ; α. 188, 1, 2. (ὃ Future in the ind. dise., H. 855; 
G. 203. (9) Infin. in ind. disc., Il. 930, 2, 946 ; G. 246 and note. 





LESSON LII. 
ANABASIS I. vi. 1-6. 


1. NOTES. 


$1. προ-ιόντων, on the construction, etc., cf Chap. 11. 17. οὗ- 


τοι, ὦ. ὁ. the horsemen, suggested by ἵππων. καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο. . . ἦν, 


sc. the conclusion καὶ τοῦτο ἔκᾶον, or render εἴ τι whatever. γένει, in 
birth, a dative indicating the manner of his connection with the king. 


τὰ πολέμια, regarding the matters of war; construction ? καὶ 
πρόσθεν, on a former occasion also, καταλλαγείς, cf. συν-αλλαγέντι, 
AXI. 

ἢ 3. ὡς ᾧετο, modifies what ? 

ὃ 5. τὴν κρίσιν... ὡς ἐγένετο, the trial . . . how it took place, i. e. 
how the trial took place. ἀπόρρητον, neuter, a thing of secresy. 

§ 6. ὅτι δίκαιόν ἐστι... ἀνθρώπων, what is just . . . before men; 
object of βουλευόμενος. antecedent of τοῦτοῖ mode of πράξω ? 
why ? περὶ ‘Opdvra rovrov-t, regarding this (-é) here Orontds ; note 
the force of -ἔ; ¢f. the Lat. -ce, hic-ce. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The noun or pronoun with which a participle is in the absolute 
construction has occasionally to be supplied. 

2. Indefinite things are denoted not only by the indefinite pronoun, 
but also by a clause with εἴ τις, εἴ τι ; siquis, siquid. 


3. The dative of manner is used to denote that in respect to which a 
thing is true. 








LESSON 141. 175 


4. The subject of a subordinate clause may be anticipated in a sen- 
tence by being made object in the main clause. ies 

5. An adjective referring to a preceding masculine or feminine noun 
may be neuter, when the noun passes over into the general idea of a thing. 

6. -t added to a demonstrative pronoun renders it detctic, i.e. makes 
it refer to something as present. 


3. FORM LESSON. 


Prin. Parts. DECLENSION. ANALYSIS. 

. φαίνω. 1. κρίσις. . προσπολεμῶν. 
. γιγνώσκω. 2. ἴχνος. 2. ἀναγνούς. 
3. γράφω. 3. ὑπόμνημα. 3. καταλλαγείς. 
. δέχομαι. 4. ἀναγνούς. . ἐνεδρεύσας. 


. καίω (Kaw) 5. προσπολεμῶν. 5. διαγγεῖλαι. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἀνα-γιγνώσκω, recognize ; read. 14. ὁ κόπρος, dung. 
2. dné-p-pntos,} -ov, not to be told, se- 15. ἡ κρίσις. δ judgment, trial. 
3. τὸ γένος,2 genus, birth. [cret. 16. παρα-καλέω, call to my side, tn- 
. γράφω, write. vite. . 
. ἡ de&a,* pledye. . mpo-kata-kaiw,” burn in advance. 
3. δι-αγγέλλω, carry word through, . mpoo-nxav.® coming to ; related to. 
report 9. προσ-πολεμέω, wage war against. 
. εἰκάζω. liken ; estimate, suppose. . ὁ atiBos, trodden or beaten path. 
ἐν-εδρεύω, lie in ambush. . ὁ σύμ-βουλος, counsellor. 
. ἐξ-αγγέλλω, bring out word, . ὑπήκοος, -ov,° subject to, obedient. 
make known. . ὑπο-δέχομαι, receive, welcome. 
. ἡ ἐπιστολή. epistola, letter. . τὸ ὑπόμνημα, reminder. 
. ἕτοιμος, ready. φράζω, tell, declare. 
2. τὸ ἴχνος. trace, track, footprint. 3. χρήσιμος, useful. 
3. xara-xaivw,® kill, put to death. 7. ὠφέλιμος, serviceable. 
1 ἀπό, from, not (like a- priv. ), and the theme pe, speak ; cf. εἴρηκα XXIII. 
2 Cf. γίγνομαι, theme γεν ; Lat. gigno, genus. ; 
8 ΟἹ Eng. geo-graphy, graph-ite. 4 Strictly right hand, sc. χείρ. 
5 καίνω, same as κτείνω ; Cf. ἀπο-κτεν ὧν VII. 
6 Same derivation as κρίνω; cf. κρίνας XLIX. 
7 Cf. κατέκαυσεν XLIII. § 10. 


8 From ἥκω, come. Associated with what verb? 
9 ὑπό and ἀκούω : cf. Lat. obedio, == ob + audio. 

















INDUCTIVE GREEK METIIOD. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : (a) Ἡμεῖς γ᾽ dxvoinuev ἂν τούτοις τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν ἔπεσθ.ι 
- , δ ὦ > A - ? ΄ > , ε a” ᾿ ᾿ 
οἷς δοίητε, μὴ Gs αὐτῷ τῷ λόχῳ ἀπολέσωσιν. (ὁ) Ei δὴ ἡ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 
γνώμη δικαιοτένᾶᾷ φανείη τῶν τοῖς ἑτέροις δοξάντων, ἀξιοῖμεν ἂν τοὺς στρα- 
τιώτᾶς στρατηγοὺς γενέσθαι. (c) Τί od» ἀδικηθεὶς ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ νῦν ἐπιβουλεύων 
4 ° l , , ‘ ~ ψ ὁ wr >>* > ; > ͵ 
μοι φανερὸς γέγονας ; εἰπόντος δὲ τοῦ ἰδιώτου ὅτι οὐδὲν ἀδικηθείς, ἠρώτησεν 
ὁ δυνάστης αὐτόν. Λέγεις οὖν περὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος γεγενῆσθαι; (d) Συμβου- 
λεύοιμι ἂν ἐγὼ τὸν ἀνδράποδον τοῦτον λάθρᾷ ἀπολέσαι ὡς δύναται τά χίστα. 


2. Translate: (a) I replied that they thought it was the time for 
Orontas to suffer for the bad deeds which he had done. (>) He has 
written many letters to his paymaster (saying) that he would have as 
many allies as possible when he came. (c) It is no secret that when he 
read the letter he had many suspicions, and then put him to death. 
(4) He told me not to receive you as friends. 


3. Review carefully the list of nouns in Lesson XXX., until, from 
hearing or seeing the English words only, the Greek words can readily 
be given ; make a constant effort to associate each new word with some 
already familiar Greek word, an occasional Latin equivalent, or an 
English derivate or cognate. 





LESSON LIII. 
ANABASIS I. vi. 7 to the end. 


1. NOTES. 


7. ὅτι σε ἠδίκησα, wherein I (have) wronged you; the antecedent 
of ὅτε is subject of ἔστιν. ὅτι οὔ, “ No;” note the accent; of. 
XLIV. § 13. οὐδὲν « . . ἀδικούμενος, being injured nothing, i.e. in 
no respect ; in the act. voice ἀδικέω takes a cognate accusative ( cf. the rel. 
part of ὅτε above) ; note, in the passive this cognate accusative is still 
retained. ὅτι ἐδύνω, what harm you could (sc. ποιεῖν). μετα- 
μέλειν σοι, that it was-a-counter-care, or change of mind, for you, ἡ. 6. 
that you repented. 


1 From γίγνομαι : where made 7 








LESSON LIII. 177 


§ 8. γενοίμην, sc. τῷ . . . ἀδελφῷ . . . φίλος καὶ πιστός. 

9. ἀπό φηναι.... δοκεῖ, declare your opinion, [namely| what seems 
best to you. τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι, as regards this man ; literally as 
regards the to be (τὸ εἶναι, accusative of specification) or condition [of 
affairs] with reference to this one. 

§ 10. ἔφη, subject Ἱ τῆς ζώνης, by the girdle, genitive of the 
part touched. 

§ 11. ἄλλοι ἄλλως, alii aliter. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. ἀδικέω, κακῶς wow take a cognate accusative of the wrong done, 
as well as an accusative of the person or thing injured. 

2. ov, meaning “no,” or at the end of a sentence, is accented (οὔ). 

3. The genitive with λαμβάνω denotes the part taken hold of. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


The second passive system, H. 322, 468, 471, 472; G. 96, pp. 


108, 109 bottom. 
4. VOCABULARY. 


Φ « ΄ 3 
. ἄδικος ἷ -ov, unjust. 11. ὁ θάνατος, death. 


2. ἄλλως, otherwise; differently. 12. θνήσκω," die. 
. ἀπο-φαίνω, show; mid. reveal 13. κακῶς ποιέω, do evil or harm to, 
one’s self or for one’s self. injure. 
. ὁ βωμός. altar. 14. μετα-μέλει, poenitet, it repents 
. yé (enclitic), at last (giving em- (impersonal). 
phasis to the preceding word). 15. ὁμολογέω, acknowledge ; confess. 
. 6 ἐθελοντής,2 volunteer. 16. οὐκοῦν (interrogative), nonne 


. εἰσ-άγω, lead or conduct into or igitur, not therefore ? 


within, 17. mpoo-xuvéw,® prostrate one’s self 


. ἐκποδών, out of the way. before, pay homage to. 
. ἐξ-άγω, lead out. 18. προσ-τάττω, assign, order, com- 


. ἦ, verily, assuredly. mand, 


1 Cf. δίκη, δίκαιος, ἀδικέω. 

2 Connected in derivation with what verb ? 

8 Cf. Eng. thanat-opsis (view of death). 

4 Theme θαν (cf. θάνατος) ; so 2 aor. = ἔ-θ α ν-ον. 

5 κυνέω, kiss ; probably homage in the Orient was originally shown by prostrat- 
ing one’s self and kissing the feet or the garments of the person revered. 


12 











178 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


19. προσ-τίθημι, place to; mid. 22. ὁ συγγενής, relative, kinsman. 
place one’s self to, join; agree. 23. ἡ σχολή,8 leisure. 

20. πώποτε, ever yet. 24. ὁ τάφος, burial, grave. 

21. ὁ σκηπτοῦχος,Ἶ sceptre-bearer. 25. τρίτος, tertius, third. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : (a) Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη ὁ φρούραρχος. tore τὴν πατρίδα πολλὰ 
ἀδικηθεῖσαν τόνδε τὸν τρόπον; (b) Ἔστι δὴ χρόνος ὑμῖν μεταμέλειν τε καὶ 
Tas γνώμᾶς ἀμείνους ἀποφήνασθαι. (c) ᾿Ἐγκέλευστοι οὖν τοὺς παῖδας τῆς 
χειρὸς λαβόντες. ἐπὶ θάνατον ἐξήγαγον. (7) Ἔν δὲ τῷ τρίτῳ σταθμῷ ἐξέτα- 
σιν ποιεῖται ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ. (4) Ἐντεῦθεν ἐπειρῶντο εἰσβάλλειν εἰς τὴν 
χὠρᾶν: ἡ δὲ εἰσβυλὴ ἦν ἁμαξιτὸς καὶ ἀμήχανος εἰσελθεῖν στρατεύματι, 
εἴ τις κωλύοι. (/) Ἡ δὲ ἰδοῦσα τὴν λαμπρότητά τε καὶ εὐταξία» ἐθαύμασε" 
ἡμεῖς δὲ ἥσθημεν ἰδόντες τὸν ἐκ τῶν Ἑλλήνων εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους φόβον. 
(0) Ἐπειδὴ δὲ πάντας παρηλάσαμεν, στήσαντες τὰ ἅρματα πρὸ τῆς φά- 
Aayyos μέσης. πέμψαντες τοὺς Epunvéds παρὰ τοὺς στρατηγοὺς ἐκελεύ- 
σαμεν προβαλέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα. 

2. ‘lranslate: (a) Not even if they should be willing to become 
faithful to me, should I at least believe them ; for I do not trust them. 
(Ὁ) Whenever we shall know that those high mountains are fortified 
for us, we shall remain in the plain. (c) For the multitude is great 
(= much), and they advance with a great shout. (4) I have taken (ἄγω) 
you as allies, because I thought (participle) you to be better [than] and 
superior [to] many barbarians. 

3. Write out a translation of the verbs of Lesson XXX. ; by means 
of this be thoroughly prepared to give the corresponding Greek words. 
Read the latter part of No. 3 in the Exercises of Lesson LIT. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The two objects of ἠδίκησα. 2. Construction of ὕστερον, of οὐδέν. 
3. In ὃ 8, the forms γέγονας and *Opévra, the optatives, the clause depen- 
dent upon δόξαιμι. 4. In § 9, τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι. 5. In § 10, con- 
struction of γνώμῃ, ζώνης, οἷς ; difference of meaning between ἐπὶ θανάτῳ 
and ἐπὶ avarov. 6. In § 11, two senses of ὅπως ; ἄλλοι ἄλλως ; deriva- 
tion of σκηπτοῦχος. 7. Complete synopsis of ἐξάγω. 8. Principal 
parts of θνήσκω, ἀποφαίνω, γιγνώσκω ; synopsis of the last, 2 aor. act. ; 
analysis of ἔγνως. 9. The genitive with verbs. 


1 From σκῆπτρον and ἔχω. 2 Cf. συγ-γίγνομαι, γένος, Lat. co-gna-tus. 
8 Cf. σχολαίως XLVITL. 








LESSON LIV. 


LESSON LIV. 


ANABASIS I. vu. 1-5. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 1. εἰς. .. ἕω, toward the approaching (= approach of ) dawn: 
nom. ἕως. Cf. Ταμ-ώς, Ταμτῶν XXIX. Note, ἕως forms its accusative 
singular without the case ending. κέρως : for κέρασ-ος, from κέρας ; 
cf. γένους for γένεσ-ος. 

§ 3. ἀπορῶν. because I am in want of. Cf. XXXIV. § 8. ἧς 
κέκτησθε : cf. ᾧ δοίη ΧΧΧΥΤΙ. 8 17. ἧς ὑμᾶς κτὲ, on account of 
which, etc. Note the genitive of cause; cf. ἐπιθῇ ὧν νομίξει XXXV. 
§ 10. 

§ 4. ἄν: cf. κἄἂν XXXVIII. 8 20. τἄλλα (cf. preceding note), 
I seem to be ashamed of the rest, 1. e. what will follow, namely, what men, 
etc. τοῖς οἴκοι ζηλωτόν, to those, 7. e. in the eves of those, at home. 

§ 5. dard... εἶναι : of. τῷ διεσπάσθαι XLVIII. § 9. τοιούτῳ 

. τοῦ κινδυνου, such [a point] of danger. με-μνῇο : contraction 
for με-μνή-οιο. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Some nouns of the 2d declension end in -@s, and have the accu- 
sative singular in -@y ; ἕως, however, omits -ν. 

2. Nouns whose stem ends in -as form the genitive in -ws by 
contraction. 

3. The genitive of cause follows εὐδαιμονίζω. 

4. The dative may denote in whose view, or in relation to whom, 
something is true. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Declension of ἕως. . H. 159,161. G. 42, 2 and ν. 1. 
Declension of κέρας. H. 181, 188. G. 56, 9. 
᾿ ie og eh tag 118, 1N.; 200, 
a τ 466, ὃ: 530, 6. N. 6. 
Genitive of cause, with 


verbs of emotion. . H. 744. G. 178}. 




















INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἅμα, together, together with. 12. ὁ κίνδῦνος,δ danger. 


. ἀν-έχω, hold up, endure. 13. κτάομαι, acquire; perf. pos- 
ὁ αὐτόμολος, deserter. sess. 
. δια-τάττω, dispose in order, 14. ai μέσαι νύκτες, mid-watches 
arrange. (of the night), midnight. 
διδάσκω," teach. 15. μήν, verily, of a truth (post- 
5. ἡ eAevOepia, freedom. positive) 
εὐδαιμονίζω,8 deem happy, 16. μιμνήσκω. I remind; μέμνη- 
congratulate. μαι, memini. 
εὔτολμος, courageous. map-atvew,® recommend. 
ἡ ἕως, dawn. . πολλαπλήσιος, manifold. 
ζηλωτός, envied ; object ofenvy. 9. mpoo-AapBavea, take in addi- 
τὸ κέρας," horn; wing (of an tion. 
army). . πῶς; how? 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Οἱ δὲ ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες αὐτοί τε ἦσαν πολὺ προθῦ- 
μότεροι καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐξήγγελλον. (ὁ) Εἰσήεσαν δὲ παρ᾽ αὐτὸν οἵ τε 
στρατηγοὶ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τινές, ἀξιοῦντες εἰδέναι τί σφίσιν ἔσται ἐὰν 
νικήσωσιν. (ε, Ὃ δ᾽ ὁρᾷ τοὺς Ἕλληνας νϊκῶντας τὸ καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς καὶ 
διώκοντας. (i) Ἡδόμενος καὶ προσκυνούμενος ἤδη ὡς βασιλεὺς ὑπὸ τῶν 
ἀμφ᾽ αὐτόν, οὐδὲ τότε ἐπειράσατο διώκειν. 

2. Translate: (α) He hung up the beautiful horns of the animals, 
which he had killed, in a little cave near the gate of the garden. 
(Ὁ) Since we know, we will tell (= teach) vou why we congratulated 
those guiles. (c) They had shown themselves courageous in battle, 
and endured well so much of danger, that the king recognized the favor, 
and made them all objects of envy in the eyes of the rest. (d) We 
shall recollect to show ourselves worthy of the freedom which we have 
acquired, whenever the enemy come. 


1 From αὐτός, self, and the theme oa, to go. 

2 Cf. Eng. didactic. 8 From εὐδαίμων. 

4 Cf. Eng. rhino-cervos, having a horn on the nose. 

δ Hence κινδῦνευω. 6 Cf. ἐπ-αινέω XXXIV. § 7. 








LESSON LY. 181 


3. Prepare a translation of the nouns and verbs of Lesson XXX., 
and practise giving the Greek for each word, varying the order con- 
stantly. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Attic second declension. 2. Neutersin-as 3. Peculiarities in 
conjugation of μέμνημαι. 4. Principal parts of μιμνήσκω, and synopsis 
of μέμνημαι. 5. A tabular view of the uses of the genitive with verbs ; 
illustrations in this Lesson. 6. ἥξειν. . . μαχούμενον in direct dis- 
course. 7. Κλέαρχον . . . ἡγεῖσθαι in direct discourse. 8. ἡμέρᾷ, § 2, 
construction! 9. ποιοῖτο mode, and why. 10. ἀμείνους, ὃ 3; pecu- 
liarities of declension. 11. Construction of πολλῶν βαρβάρων. ἐλευθε- 
pias, ἧς (κέκτησθε). 12. Principal parts and classification of διέταξε, 
παρήνει, προσέλαβον, κέκτησθε, εὐδαιμονίζω, διδάξω, μεμνήσεσθαι. 





LESSON LV. 


ANABASIS I. vu. 6-11. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 7. μὴ οὐκ ἔχω: on the mode, cf. xaradion XXXVII. § 17. 

ὅτι δῶ, what to give. This is not for ὅτι ἂν δῶ (cond. rel.) ; it is 
the indirect form of the direct question, “what shall I give” (ri δῶ). 
Note, the subjunctive (like the Lat. quid dicam) is used in a question 
as to what may be done with propriety or advantage. ois δῶ: 
cf. preceding note. 

§ 9. ὄπισθεν ἑαυτῶν : cf. εἴσω τῶν ὀρέων XXIX. οἴει yep; 
do you think then-indeed ? Note this sense of γάρ in questions, — γάρ 
= γέ + dpa; cf. ἦ yap ἀνάγκη LITI. νὴ Δί᾽ : cf. μὰ τοὺς θεούς 
XLII. Ai’, = Δία : accusative of Ζεύς ; H. 216; 6. 60, 5, 10. 

§ 10. ἀσπίς : singular where the plural might have been expected ; 
but cf the English use, e.g. “a thousand horse.” This is called the 
collective use of the noun. 








Se aa te eee νας, 


aa re a OO E LOLOL TON 


INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Questions of deliberation as to what may be done, have their verb 
in μὰ subjunctive. In the indirect discourse after a primary tense this 
moc e Ν ὲ . > . » 5 , . Ἢ . . . 

8 18. ret ined, the interrogative being changed to δὴ indefinite 
relative pronoun. 


2. wy, μά, adverbs of swearing, are followed by the accusative of the 
person sworn by, 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Synopsis of τω. . . . . H. 3387. 
. Synopsis of ποιέω H. 339. 


. Cardinal numerals, 1 — 10,000 H. 288. . 76. 
. dpi asenclitic . . . . . . H.480,1,2. G. 28,n. 1 end. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


> ’ 1 ° raf 
- apayei,! without a battle. 12. xparéw,‘ rule, have power over 
cw 2 "ὦ - “πὶ ° j 
ἢ ἄρκτος," bear ; Great Bear; 13. ἡ peonuBpia’ mid-day ; south. 
north. 14. μεχρι οὗ, until where; to the 
dta-Aéyouat,! converse with. place where. 
ἊΝ , 3 se ᾿ 
δρεπανη-φόρος,Σ -ov, scythe- 15. vy, yea, by; affirmative ad- 
beariny. verb of swearing. 
, ue ΄ 4 ,’ Φ . 
€y-Kpatns,* -€s, im-power, 16. ὄπισθεν, behind. 
᾿ pony over 17. παρα-κελεύομαι, recommend. 
ἐμ-πίπλημι Jill in, satisfy. 18. πατρῷος, paternal, heredi- 
ἑξακισχιλιοι, siz thousand. tary. 
ts "ἃ 8 neal . 
ἡ ἐξοπλισία,δ the arming, 19. πώς, in some way; ὧδέ πως, 
equipment, about thus. 
ἠρό 2 aor., 1 asked Υ 
ψρωψ. 2 aor., I asked. 20. σατραπεύω,1 govern as satrap. 
ὁ καιρός, occasion. 21. ὁ στέ 9 
, avo 
a é pavos, crown. 
wa,’ heat. 22. ὁ χειμών, winter. 


1 ae 

: Derivation ? 2 Hence Eng. arct-ic. 

: δρέπανον, scythe, +- φέρω. 4 Cf. κρατέω ; cf. ἐγκρατής 
From theme πλη. Cf. πλῆθος, πλήρης, ple-o, ple-nty. 

6 Derivation ? 7 Derivation ἢ 

8 Ἢ ᾿ - ‘ - : 
From μέσος and ἡμέρα. 9 Hence Eng. Stephen. 








LESSON ΠΥ. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Ταύτῃ μὲν οὖν τῇ ἡμέρᾷ οὐκ ἐμαχέσατο, ἀλλ᾽ 
ὑποχωρούντων φανερὰ ἦσαν καὶ ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη πολλά. (ὁ) ᾿Ανέ- 
βησαν οὖν ἄνω διὰ τοῦ πεδίου ἐπὶ δώδεκα παρασάγγᾶς μέχρι τοῦ τῆς 
(c) Πάλιν δ᾽ ἤμετο, Οὐκοῦν ὑμεῖς οἰκνοῖτε 


Φρυγίᾶς ἐσχάτου τείχους. 
(4) Οὐκοῦν 


ἂν τὸν ποταμὸν ταύταις ταῖς γεφύραις διαβαίνειν, αἷς ποιοῖεν ; 
φοβοῖο ἂν τοῖς ἡγεμόσι τούτοις ἕπεσθαι οἷς δοῖεν ; 

2. Translate: (α) We deem it right to know what we also shall 
have if you conquer (aor.). (6) Not many are able to endure both the 
winter of the north and the mighty heat of the south. (6) I will 
make you powerful over many cities, if you learn to conquer yourself. 
(d) Yea! by the gods, (the) men cannot conquer themselves without a: 


battle ; but if they conquer indeed, many crowns are due (= owed) to 
them. 

3. Review the entire Vocabulary of Lesson XXX. Do not think 
you have mastered it before being able to give the Greek from the 
English, and vice versa, without hesitation. 

4. Synopsis (a) of οἰκέω ; (ὁ) of vixdw; (c) of λαμβάνω. 

5. Parts, classification, and theme of (a) ἀκούω, (ὁ) ἔχω, (c) mip- 


πλημι. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Mode with verbs of fearing. 2. Mode in questions of delibera- 
tion; direct and indirect discourse. 3. Tabular view of the genitive 
with adjectives and adverbs. 4. Adverbs of swearing. 5. Derivation 
of γάρ; its use in questions. 6. First and second perfect stems. 
7. The forms ἔστε and ἐστί. 8. The cardinal numerals. 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON LVI. 


ANABASIS I. vit. 12-17, 


1. NOTES. 


§ 12. ὑστέρησε κτὲ͵ = ἀφίκετο ὕστερος τῆς μάχης, later than (= too 
late for) the battle. Cf. mporépa Κύρου κτὲ XXXI. 
ὃ 15. maperéraro: H. 519, A and 5; G. page 356, and § 109, 6. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Synopsis of λείπω. . . . .. 844, σ. 96, IT. 
. Synopsis of τίημε. . . . . . H. 849. G. 123. 


ον of péefect stems... H. 446, 447, te 110, IV. 


450, 452. (b), (ὦ). 


3. VOCABULARY. 


. αὐτομολέω,1 1 desert. 11, ὀρυκτός, dug. 

. τὸ βάθος, -ovs, depth. 12. mapa-reivw, stretch beside, ex- 

. βαθύς, -eia, -v, deep. tend. 

. δια-λείπω, leave between; lie 13. πλεθριαῖος, extending a pleth- 
at intervals. rum. 

. ἡ διῶρυξ,2 canal, trench. 14. πλέω, I sail. 

. εἰσ-βάλλω, throw into; enter. 15, σϊταγωγός," -dy, grain-carry- 

- τὸ ἔρυμα, protection; rampart. ing. 

. μεταξύ, adv., between. 16. ἡ τάφρος, ditch, trench. 

. 9 dpyud,® a fathom. 17. torepéw,4 am or come (too) 

- dputte, I dig. late. 


1 From αὐτόμολος LIV. 8 Strictly, the span of the outstretched hands. 
2 From διά and ὀρύττω. See 10. 4 Derivation ? 








LESSON LVI. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1, Translate: (a) Τότε δὲ καλέσᾶς τὸν éppnna ἀπέδωκεν αὐτῷ 
δαρεικοὺς τρισχϊλίους, ὅτι τῇ τρίτῃ ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνης ἡμέρᾳ θυόμενος εἶπεν ὅτι 
ὁ φρούραρχος οὐ μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν. (Ὁ) ‘O δὲ εἶπεν, Οὐκ οὖν ἔτι 
μαχεῖται. εἰ ἐν ταύταις οὐ μαχεῖται ταῖς ἡμέραις: ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀληθῆ λέγης, 
ὑπισχνοῦμαί σοι δέκα tddavta. (Cc) Τοῦτο τὸ χρῦσίον τότε ἀπέδωκεν, 
ἐπεὶ παρῆλθον αἱ τρεῖς ἡμέρα. (ἃ) ᾿Επεὶ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῇ τάφρῳ οὐκ ἐκώλνε 
βασιλεὺς τὴν τῶν πολεμίων στρατιᾶν διαβαίνειν, ἔδοξε αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις 
καταλελυκέναι πρὸς τὸν Κῦρον. 

2. ‘Translate: (a) He was fifteen days too late for the review of the 
armies of the great king. (ὁ) Yea! by Zeus, they do not indeed know 
what they are doing; for if they join battle with the king, let them 
not think that the scythe-bearing chariots can be prevented from cutting 
(infin.) them all down. (c) They were mightily angry with the guides 
when they heard this, and refused to go forward. (4) When, however, 
they knew that the journey (= way) was against the great king at 
Babylon, they voted not to cross the river. 

3. Make a list of the meanings of the verbs in Lesson XXXIX.; 


from this be prepared to recite without hesitation the corresponding 
Greek verbs, as their meanings are pronounced by the instructor. 


4. Review, in the List of first occurrences, words 196 to 300. 


5. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Principal parts of πλέω ; of péw. 2. Construction of ἡμέραις͵ 
§12. 3. Crasis in § 13; other instances met with. 4. Construction 
of στρατεύματι, § 14. 5. Synopsis of συντεταγμένῳ ; formation of the 
perfect active. 6. Principal parts, themes, and analysis of παρατέτατο. 
7. Construction of τείχους, ποταμοῦ, ποδῶν, εὖρος, ὃ 15. 8. Declension 
of τείχους, εὖρος, βαθεῖα. 9. Participle with πυνθάνεται. 10. Case 
governed by ὑστερέω. 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON LVII. 
ANABASIS I. vu. 18--ΥΠι. 2. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 18. δέκα ἡμερῶν, on any one of the ten days, ἑ. 6. within ten days. 
Uf. however τοῦ μηνός XXXVIII. ad fin. Uses of dative and accusative 
in expressions of time ? ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀληθεύσῃς . . 
of conditional statement? Ενοϊνα the future idea in the eonclusion : 
cf. καταπράξειεν XXII. Note, the aorist has the sense of the Lat. 
future perfect. 

ὃ 19. ἀπ-εγνωκέναι τοῦ μάχεσθαι, had concluded not to Jight. On the 
prefix, cf. ἀπὸ ψηφίζομαι XLIV. ‘The prepositional prefix governs the 
genitive as it would if standing as an independent preposition. 

ὃ 20. τοῖς στρατιώταις : cf. οὐδενὶ κρείττονι ΧΧΧΙ͵ ἃ 26. 


; ὑπισχνοῦμαι: form 


Chap. VIII 8 1. ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ: cf. συντεταγμένῳ τῷ στρατεύ- 
pare LVI. ὃ 14. 

§ 2. ἀτάκτοις σφίσιν ἐπι-πεσεῖσθαι, would fall upon them/(selves), etc. : 
from ἐπι-πίπτω, theme mer, πτω. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Time within which is expressed by the genitive. 

2. In future conditions with probability, expressions may be used in 
the apodosis equivalent to the future indicative; in the protasis, the 
aorist subjunctive is nearly equivalent to the Latin future perfect. 

3. The prefix ἀπό frequently has a negative sense. It may govern 
the genitive, as when standing as a preposition. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Synopsis οὗ φαίνψμω. . . . . . H. 8348. G. 96, III. 
2. Synopsis of δίδωμι. . . . . . H. 850. G. 123. 





LESSON LVII. 187 


. Augment of the pluperfect . 
. Attic reduplication 


. Principal parts of ἀκούω, ἐλαύνω . 


}. Genitive with compound verbs 
ΜΕ 3 a ως 


H.358. Ο. 99, 101, 4. 
Η. 368. 6. 102. 
H. 507, 1, } 


. 330-338. 
521, 1, $ & PP- 380-338 


H. 751. G, ΣΤΥ, 
H. 484, G. 127, V. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀληθεύω, speak the truth. 

ὁ ᾿Αμπρακιώτης, Ambraciot.* 

ἀνά, up; ἀνὰ κράτος, up to the 
full measure of strength, 
e.g, αἱ full speed. 

. ἀνα-ταμάττω,2 stir up, con- 
Suse. 

. ἀπο-γιγνώσκω,δ come to the 
conclusion not to, abandon 
the idea. 

. apa, therefore. 

. Graxtos * -ov, out of order. 

. αὐτίκα, immediately. 

. βαρβαρικῶς, barbarously ; in 
the Persian tongue. 

. Bodw, bawl or cry out. . 

- ἑλληνικῶς, in the Greek fash- 
ton or tongue. Ἢ 


12. ἑνδέκατος," -ἡ, -ov, eleventh. 26. 


. ἐπι-πίπτω, fall upon. 


npeAnpeves,® carelessly. 


. ἡνίκα, when; like the Lat. 


quum with the ind. 


}. idpdw, sweat, perspire. 
. τὸ κράτος -ovs, power, strength. 


See ava above. 


. 6 μάντις, seer, soothsayer. 
. μέλλω, I intend, am likely. 
. πλήθω,.5 be full; ἀγορὰ πλή- 


θουσα, full market, i.e. 
about 10.30 A.M. 


. πλησίον, near. 

2. ἡ πορεία, journey. 

3. προ-θίομαι, conduct asacrifice. 
. προ-φαίνω, appear in the dis- 


tance. 


. τὸ τάλαντον, talent. 


ὁ τάραχος, confusion. 


1 Ambracia was in Epirus, near the συ which bore its name, — ἴΠ6 Am- 


bracian Gulf. 
2 Cf. τάραχ-ος below, for the theme. 


8 Cf. γνώ-μη; ἐπεὶ ἔγνω ὅτι οὐ δυνήσεται XXXII. 


4 Derivation ? 


5 Perfect middle participle of ἀ-μελέω made into an adverb. Cf. XXXV. § 11; 


XLV. § 16. 
6 Give other words showing same theme. 
7 Cf. Lesson XLVII., Vocab., note 8, 
8 A sum of money, about $1,100. 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1, Translate: (a) Ἣν μὲν yap ἀπόγνωμεν αὐτίκα ἔπεσθαι καὶ ἡμῖν 
ἐπιπέσωσι, ὑμεῖς δόξετε αἴτιοι εἶναι ἄρξαντες τὸν τάραχον. () Τῷ 
᾿Αμπρακιώτῃ χάριν εἴσεται ὡς ἀληθεύοντι- μέλλει δὴ αὐτὸν ἀποδώσειν. 
() Τῇ δὲ ἑνδεκάτῃ ἄτακτοι διέβησαν πρὶν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀποκρΐνασθαι. 
(ἢ) Οἱ μάντεις βοήσαντες ἠμελημένως τὴν στρατιω» ἐτάραξαν. (+) ᾿Ανα- 
βᾶς ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον καὶ τὰ παλτὰ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας λαβών τοῖς τε ἄλλοις πᾶσι 
παρήγγελλεν τὰ ὅπλα λαμβάνειν καὶ καθίστασθαι εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ τάξιν 
ἕκαστον. 

2. Translate : (a) And at (= in) this time, riding-along, himself, with 
Pigres the interpreter and two or three others, he cried-out to Clearchus 
to lead the army against [the] middle (= middle the) of the enemy, 
because the king was (ind. disc.) there. (Ὁ) ‘* And if we conquer 
this,” said he, “everything has been done for us.” (c) We were riding 
at full speed, with our horses sweating mightily, in order to announce 
that the king was near. (d) But being perplexed and distressed by 
these matters, they sent after the soothsayers, (e) And they told us to 
be of good cheer, as these matters would be settled (= set themselves 
down) as desired (= into the needed, dé). (f) This was done care- 
lessly, and without the knowledge of the messengers. 


3. Review carefully the Vocabulary of Lesson XXXIX., so as to 
be able to give the English from the Greek, and vice versa, without 
hesitation. 


4. Review the words of Chapter II. in the List of first occurrences. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Expressions of time. 2. Modes in the indirect discourse. 3. How 
to change the direct discourse in § 18 into the indirect discourse as 
completely as possible (study Chap. II. 8 2). 4. Aorist subjunctive in 
conditional clauses, 5. The mutes before μβ. 6. Peculiarity in ἔδωκε, 
ἔθηκα ; synopsis of this tense, active voice. 7. Analysis and principal 
parts of ἀπεγνωκέναι; of dvarerapaypéevov. 8. Different kinds of re- 
duplication. 9. Declension of κράτος, σφίσιν, μάντις. 10. Principal 
parts of ἐπιπεσεῖσθαι ; synopsis of this tense and voice. 











LESSON LVIII. 


LESSON LVIII. 


ANABASIS I. vu. 3-8. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 3. év-é-d0: of. dv-€-Byn-v, é-yva-v, é-orn-v , they are 2d aorists, 
formed from the pure theme. Note, each theme ends in a vowel, and 
that the personal endings are attached directly. This is not the case, 
6. 4.. With €-Aun-o-v, é-Bad-e-s, — themes ending in a consonant, — for a 
vowel stands between the theme and the ending. The conjugation of 
these last belongs to the - system (Avw) ; but the few 2d aorists of vowel 
themes belong to the -μὲ system, whatever be the system to which the 
present belongs, —so ἔλιπ-ο-ν, ἔδῦ-ν ; βαλ-εῖν, βῆ-ναι ; φυγ-ών, γνοὺς or 
Bas or dus. καθ-ἰσ-τασθαι eis . . . τάξιν ἕκαστον, each one to set 
himself (dir. mid.) down, ἃ. ὁ. fall into line. 


§ 4. ἐχόμενος, holding on, neczt. 


§ 8. χρόνῳ συχνῷ : cf. ἡμέραις πέντε LVI. § 12. ἐπὶ πολύ, 
into, at, a great [distance]. Cf. ἐπὶ δώδεκα παρασάγγᾶς LVI. § 15. 


2. OBSERVATION. 


There are 2d aorists (a) of the -w form, following the model of ἔλιπον ; 
(Ὁ) of the pe form, following the model of ἔστην. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


. Short a in the nominative, 
lst declension . .. . H.139,¢,d. G. 37, κ 2. 
. Comparison of adverbs. . H. 259. G. 75. 
. Future system of liquid verbs H 326. G. 96, IIT. 
Conjugation of ἔστην and ἔδῦν Η. 335. G. 123. 
Second aorists of the -μὲ form H.489,1,3, 15,17. G. 125, 3. 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀστράπτω, flash. 16. ὁπλίζω, -ἰσω or -1@, put on 
ἡ Seidn, early evening. heavy armor; arm. 
- δια-κινδυνεύω, brave the danger. 17. ὅσον, so muchas ; with num., 
- ἐγγύς, near; ἐγγύτερον, nearer. about. 
. ἐν-δυω, enter into ; put on. . Ta mapaunpidia, the thigh- 
e§-omhifw,! arm completely. pieces of armor. 
ὁ θώραξ," -ἄκος, breastplate. 9. πελταστικός, consisting of tar- 
κατα-πηδάω, leap down. geteers. 
- kata Φφανής," -és, in plain view. . Ta προμετωπίδια, armor-pieces 
6 κονιορτός, a stirring or before the forehead, head- 
cloud of dust. pieces. 
ἡ λόγχη, spear-head ; spear, - τὰ mpoorepvidia,® armor-pieces 
lance. before the breast, breast- 
λευκός, -9, -ov, white. pieces. 
ἡ μάχαιρα, short sword, dag- 22. ἡ σπουδή, zeal, haste. 
ger. 23. συχνός, -n, -ov, continuous, 
ἡ pedavia,® blackness ; black considerable in length. 
object. 24. raya, quickly. 
ἡ νεφέλη, cloud. . χαλκός, bronze, bronze object. 


5. EXERCISES. 


4 ? . a. 
1. Translate: (a) ‘O μέντοι εἶπεν ὅτε καλέσας παρεκελεύετο tpiv τὴν 
4 ᾽ Ld ,’ 7 n ~ 
κραυγὴν ἀνέχεσθαι, ἐψεύσθη τοῦτον (b) Kai ἐν τούτῳ τῷ καιρῷ τὸ μὲν 
‘ Φ ty ‘ » ΄ - 
βαρβαρικὸν πρυΐει. τὸ δὲ “Ἑλληνικὸν ἔτι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ μένον συνετάττετο ἐκ 
a Oo” , ᾿ > oe ε .“ ‘ " , - > - ς 
τῶν ἔτι προσιόντων. (ὁ) Καὶ ἦσαν ἱππεῖς μὲν λευκοὺς θώρᾶκας ἐνδῦντες 
᾿ ~ > ΄ ΄ , ld ΄ 
ἐπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου τῶ» πολεμίων" δυνάστης τις ἐλέγετο τυύτων ἡγεῖσθαι " 
; ‘ a ro 
ἐχόμενοι δὲ ὁπλῖται σὺν ἀσπίσι ταῖς πρὸς τοὺς πόδας παρατεινούσαις. 


« , » , ~ ’ af , 
(4) Ἡνίκα δ᾽ ἐν τῇ δείλῃ τὰς δορκάδας τε καὶ ὄνους ἀγρίους ἐδίωκον 
΄ , LA > ~ “- a 
χρόνον συχνὸν, κονιορτός τις ἐφάνη ἐπὶ πολὺ ὡς πολλῶν στρουθῶν τᾶς 
, > “~ “ - - 
πτέρυγας αἱρουσὼν ὥσπερ ἱστίοις χρωμένων καὶ ἀποδιδρᾶσκουσῶν. 


1 Cf. ἐξοπλισίᾷ LV. § 10. 2 Hence Eng. thoraz. 

8 Cf XLVIII. § 8. 

4 κατά has the sense of thoroughness, as in καταπράξειε(ν) XXII. Cf. ἀφανεῖς 
XLII. ad init. 5 Cf. Eng. melan-choly, gloom. 

6 From πρό and στέρνον, sternum, the breast-bone. 

7 Hence χαλκοῦς XXVII. 


LESSON LIX. 191 


2. Translate: (a) There was a certain dark-object on the plain at a 
great distance, which appeared like a cloud coming on with much water. 
(0) Yea! by Zeus, the bronze spears flashed mightily, and the thigh- 
pieces and the breast-pieces and the golden front-pieces which the royal 
horses had. (c) We put on our golden breastplates with great haste. 
(ὃ We shall try to show ourselves (= appear) worthy of the freedom 
which we have acquired, and on account of which so-many men deem 
us happy. (6) We have advised you to put (= make) this man 
out-of-the-way quickly, so that we may be able to do good to our 
friends, 

3. (a) The translation, vocabulary, and grammatical principles in 
Lesson XLVI. (6) The vocabularies of Lessons X. and XX. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Two kinds of 2d aorist. 2. Analysis, principal parts, and classi- 
fication of ἐνέδῦ, ἀναβάς, ἔσχε, ἔστησαν, καθίστατο. 3. Principal parts 
and classification of ὡπλισμένοι and ἤστραπτε ; euphonic changes illus- 
trated in the principal parts of each. 4. Final ἅ in μάχαιρἄ, yépipa. 
5. Comparison of ταχέως, ἡδέως, εὐνοϊκῶς. 


LESSON LIX. 
ANABASIS I. vir. 9-14. 


NOTES. 


ὃ 9. ἄλλοι δ᾽ ἱππεῖς. .. τοξόται, and [there were upon the left 
wing] other horsemen and other bowmen, %.¢. others, — namely, horsemen, 
etc., or horsemen and bowmen besides. κατὰ ἔθνη, tribe by tribe: 
of. κατ᾽ thas XXVII. ἕκαστον τὸ ἔθνος : in apposition with οὗτοι, 
distributing οὗτοι into tribes ; cf. διαλείπουσι ἑκάστη παρασάγγην LVI. 
This is called distributive apposition. ἐπορεύετο : singular, on 
account of the nearness of ἔθνος ; cf. Ga ἦσαν orheyyides XX VI. § 10. 














192 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


ὃ 10. καλούμενα : cf. XXVI. § 13. ἀπο-τεταμένα : cf. παρ- 
ετέτατο LVI. ὡς διακόπτειν, = ὥστε διακόπτειν. ὅτῳ, = ᾧτινι 
(ὅστις) : of. Ste ἂν δέῃ πείσομαι ΧΧΧΊΙΙ ; οἵτινες ἐπιτήδειικ XXXVIII. 

γνώμη, expectation: cf. LV. § 8 . ὡς ἐλῶντα καὶ διακόψοντα, 
that they should drive (fut. of ἐλαύνω) into, etc. : cf. ὡς στρατηγήσοντα 
ἐμέ κτέ, XXXVIT. § 15. 

ὃ 11. ἐψεύσθη τοῦτο, was deceived this, i.e. in this: cognate accu- 
sative; of. ὅτι ἠδίκησα LITI. ὡς ἀνυστόν, [as far] as possible : 
cf. 7 δυνατὸν μάλιστα XX XVII. § 15. ἐν ἴσῳ, in even [line]. 

ὃ 13. αὐτῷ μέλοι : cf. XLV. § 16. 
ἔχει XXXV.§ 9; κακῶς ἐχόντων : cf. L. § 16. 


καλῶς ἔχοι : cf. οὕτως 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The Greek says, “hoplites and ether horsemen,” for “ hoplites 
and others, — namely, horsemen.” 

2. Ari appositive distributing the sense of its substantive is said to 
be in distributive apposition. 

3. A verb may be thrown out of agreement with its subject through 
various causes. 

4. ὡς may take the place of ὥστε, with the infinitive. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Declension of dems . . . . . . H. 280andea. G. 86. 
2. Declension of τέτταρες . . . . H. 290. 2. TF. 


3. Conjugation of πείθω, perfect middle 
and lst aorist pemive.. «|  ..-. ἢ. 5868. G. 97, 3. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀνυστός, practicable, possible. 6. βραδύς -εῖα, -ὦ, slow; -éws, 
ὁ ἄξων, -ovos, axle. slowly. 
ἀπο-σπάω, -άσω, draw off or ὁ yeppo-popos, soldier bear- 
away. ing a wicker-shield. 
ἀπο-τείνω, -eva, stretch off, δια-κόπτω, -ψω, cut through 
extend. or in pieces. 
5. βλέπω, look. 9. 6 δίφρος, chariot. 


LESSON 


τὸ δρέπανον, scythe. 

τὸ €Ovos,) tribe, nation. 
ἑκατέρωθεν ? from or on both 
ἡσυχῇ. quietly. [ sides. 
ἴσος.3 equal, even. 


193 


ὅμως. nevertheless. 
Trept-eipt,* excel, surpass. 


. πλάγιος, oblique ; eis πλάγιον, 


obliquely and outwards. 
τὸ πλαίσιον, square, rectangle. 


2. ποδ-ήρης, -es, reaching the feet. 


KukAOw,” encircle, surround. 
Aevko-Oapaé,” -axos, wearing 3. ἡ otyn, silence. 

a white breastplate. τὸ στῖφος," τους, dense mass. 
EvAwos,? wooden. crowd. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (4) Καὶ πάντες δὲ ἔτρεχον: λέγουσι δέ τινες ὡς Kai 
ταῖς ἀσπίσι πρὸς τὰ παλτὰ ἔβαλον φόβον ποιοῦντες τοῖς ἵπποις (Ὁ) Καὶ 
ἐνταῦθα δὴ ἐδίωκον μὲν ἀνὰ κράτος οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐβόων δὲ ἀλλήλοις μὴ 
τρέχειν δρόμῳ ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τάξει ἔπεσθαι () Καὶ οὐδὲν μέντοι οὐδὲ τοῦτον 
παθεῖν ἔφασαν, οὐδ᾽ ἄλλος δὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ μάχῃ ἔπαθεν 
οὐδεὶς οὐδέν, πλὴν ἐπὶ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ ληφθῆναί τις ἐλέγετο. (4) ᾿Αλλ᾽ 
ἔχὼν τὴν τῶν σὺν ἑαυτῷ ἑξακοσίων ἱππέων τάξιν ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅ τι ποιήσοι 
βασιλεύς. καὶ yap nde αὐτὸν ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι τοῦ Περσικοῦ. (6) Καὶ 
ὁ φοινϊκιστὴς δὴ τότε μέσον ἔχων τῆς αὑτοῦ στρατιᾶς ὅμως ἔξω ἐγένετο 
τοῦ εὐωνύμου κέρως. 

2. Translate: (α) From both sides of the river [there] assembled a 
crowd of soldiers with wicker shields as noiselessly as practicable, with 
the expectation of cutting the hostile tribes to pieces. (ᾧ) Their shields 
reached to their feet, and their spears were wooden. (6) If they would 
look they might see that scythes extend sideways from the axles of the 
chariots, and that they are equal to those which the Thracians use. 
(4) It is said that Apollo surpasses all the gods in musical-skill ; when 
a certain one contended with him he flayed him, and hung up the skin 
in a cave surrounded with beautiful trees of all sorts. 


3. Review carefully the Vocabularies of Lessons X., XX., XXX., 
and XXXIX. Write out translations of the more difficult words, and 
be prepared to give any Greek word without hesitation as rapidly as the 
corresponding English word is given. Do this with great care. 


1 Cf. Eng. ethno-logy. 4 περι- as in περι-γίγνομαι, 
2 Derivation ? 5 Cf. eriBos LIT. 
8 Cf. Eng. tso-sceles, iso-thermic. 





ε΄ 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 52. ἡ σχολή. . 6 τάφος. 


. 4 , ’ " ε , FC € ’ 
. TO τάλαντον. . ἢ τάφρο.. 9. ὁ χειμών. 


8. ὁ χαλκός. 














1. Peculiarity in the use οἵ ἄλλος. 2. Different senses of κατά. 
3. Formation of perfect and pluperfect forms, active and middle, with 
some of their peculiarities. 4, Cognate accusative. 5. Result and 
purpose clauses. 6. Subjunctive of deliberation. 7. Four verbs which 
are construed with the supplementary participle. 8. Declension of 
ποδήρεσι, στῖφος. 9. Comparison of βραδύς and βραδέως. 10. Classifi- 
cation and parts of βλέπω, κόπτω, τείνω, and ψεύδω. 11. Partitive 
and distributive apposition. 12. Explanation of the optatives in the 
Lesson. 





LESSON LX.— REVIEW. 


Seem : Amapagm I. vi. 1 — L. viz. 13. 


Read carefully the instructions given in Review Lessons X. and LI. 


2. VOCABULARY. 
NOUNS. 
ἄξων. 18, τὸ ἔρυμα. . 2 μεσημβρία. 
yw € Ῥ ‘ " a 
ἄρκτος. . ἡ €ws. 36. ἢ νεφέλη. 
» , € ’ - » £ 
αὐτόμολος. . 6 θώραξ. . ἢ ὀργυιᾶ. 
‘ Ld - 4 » 4 , 
. τὸ βάθος. . τὸ ἴχνος. τὰ παραμηρίδια. 
ὁ καιρός. τὸ πλαίσιον. 
τὸ καῦμα. . ἡ πορείᾳ. 
τὸ κέρας. . τὰ προμετωπίδια. 
ὁ κίνδῦνος. 42, ὁ προσήκων. 
ὁ κονιορτός. . τὰ προστερνίδια. 
ἡ κόπρος. . ἡ σϊγή. 
τὸ κράτος. . ὁ σκηπτοῦχος. 
τὸ δρέπανον. 29. ἡ κρίσις. ), ἡ σπουδή. 


ὁ ἐθελοντής. . ἡ λόγχη. 47. ὁ στέφανος. 





. ὁ τάραχος. 


. ἀληθεύω. 

. ἀναγιγνώσκω. 
3. ἀναταράττω. 

. ἀνέχω. 


. ἀπογιγνώσκω. 


> 
ἀποσπάω 


» 

. ἀποτείνω. 
» 

. ἀποφαίνω. 


. ἀστράπτω. 


> id 
αὐτομολέω. 


. βλέπω. 
2. βοάω. 
3. γράφω. 
. διαγγέλλω. 
. διακινδυνεύω. 
. διακόπτω. 
. διαλέγομαι. 


διαλείπω. 


διατάττω. 


. διδάσκω. 
. εἰκάζω. 


. εἰσάγω. 


ἄδικος. 
ἀνυστός. 
ἀπόρρητος. 


a» 
aTAKTOS. 


. βαθύς. 
3. βραδύς. 


ἰῷ τὸ to το PbO 
c 


Ὁ «- 


bo 


Gr μὼ ὧδ 
a ee 


. TO ὑπόμνημα. 


VERBS. 
εἰσβάλλω. 
ἐμπίπλημι. 


ἐνδυω . 


. ἐνεδρεύω. 

. ἐξαγγέλλω. 
> , 

. ἐξάγω. 

. ἐξοπλίζω. 


. ἐπιπίπτω. 


εὐδαιμονίζω 


ἡμόμην. 


3. θνήσκω. 


. ἱδρόω. 


κακῶς ποιέω. 
κατακαίνω. 
καταπηδάω. 
κρατέω. 
κτάομαι. 
κυκλόω. 
μέλλω. 
μεταμέλει. 
μιμνήσκω. 
ὁμολογέω. 


ADJECTIVES. 
ud 

. ἕτοιμος. 

. εὔτολμος. 


(nr\@rds. 


» 
. toos 
. καταφανής. 


. λευκοθώραᾶξ. 


i? 


0. ὁ χῖλός. 


ὁπλίζω. 


. ὀρύττω. 
. παραινέω. 
. παρακαλέω. 
. παρακελεύομαι. 
. παρατείνω. 
. περίειμι. 
2. πλέω. 
3. πλήθω. 
. προθύομαι. 
. προκατακαίω. 
}. προσκυνέω. 
. προσλαμβάνω. 
. προσπολεμέω. 
9. προστάττω. 
. προστίθημι. 
. προφαίνω. 


σατραπε ύω. 


ee « , 
. ὑποδέχομαι. 
)4. ὑστερέω. 


φράζω. 


6. φυλάττω. 


. πελταστικός. 
2. πλάγιος. 
3. πλεθριαῖος. 
, 
. ποδήρης. 
: σϊταγωγός. 
). συχνύός. 


τὸ ἔθνος ἄντις 48 στίβος , , , 
‘or ’ CoO. . δρεπανηφόρος. . λευκός. . τρίτος. 





ἐλευθερίᾳ. 
ἐξοπλισίᾶ. 


» ld 
EMLOTOAN. 


μάχαιρα 


peAavia. 


ai μέσαι νύκτες. 


49, 
50. 


51, 


TO στῖφος. 


ὁ συγγενής. 
ὁ σύμβουλος. 


ἐγκρατής. 


΄ , 
. ἐνδέκατος. 


. ἑξακισχίλιοι. 


. ξύλινος. 


9. ὀρυκτός. 


πατρῷος. 


. ὑπήκοος. 


. pe 
. ὠφέλιμος. 









































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


ADVERBS. 

. ἄλλως. 10. ἑκατέρωθεν. 19. νή. 
2. ἅμα: 11. ἐκποδών. 20. ὅμως. 
3. ἀμαχεί. 12. ἑλληνικῶς. 21. ὄπισθεν. 
. ἄρα. 13. 7. 22. ὅσον. 

αὐτίκα. 14. ἡἠμελημένως. 28. οὐκοῦν. 
}. βαρβαρικῶς. 15. ἡσυχῆ. 24. πλησίον. 
. βραδέως. 16. μεταξύ. 25. πώποτε. 
. γέ. 17. μέχρι (od). 20. πῶς, πώς. 
. ἐγγύς. 18. μήν. 27. τάχα. 

CONJUNCTION, REPOSITION. 


aE > , 
ἡνίκα. ava. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Declension : (+) Short α in the 1st declension, H. 139, c. d ; 
G. 37,n.2. (b) ἕως, H. 159, 161; 6. 42, 2 and yn. 1. (c) κέρας, 
ἘΠ, 181, 1898: G: 66, 5. (4) ὅστις, H. 280 and a; G. 86. 
(6) τέτταρες, H. 290; G. 77. 

2. Cardinal Numbers: H. 288; G. 76. 

3. Comparison of Adverbs: H. 259; G. 75. 

4. Synopses of (a) rivdw, H. 337; G. 98. ()) ποιέω, H. 339; 
G. 98. (:) date, H. 343; G. 96, III. (4) λείπω, H. 344; 
G. 96, 11. (9) τέθημι, H. 349; G.123. (ὁ δίδωμι, H. 350; 
G. 123. 

5. Werb-formation: (4) Perfect stems, H. 446, 447, 450, 452; 
G. 110, IV. (6), (ὦ. (b) Attic reduplication, H. 368; G. 102. 
(c) Augment of the pluperfect, H. 358; G. 101, 4. (7) Future 
system of liquid verbs, H. 326; G. 96, IIT. (0) Second passive 
system, H. 322, 438, 471, 472; G. 96, pages 108, 109 bottom, 
110 top. (f) πείθω, perfect middle and 1st aorist passive system, 
H. 888. G.:.97, 3 (4) ἔστην and guy, H. 335; G. 123. 
(0) μέμνημαι. UH. 866, }, 465, a, 466, δ, 680,6; G. 118, 1, x. 
200,N.6. (i) κάθημαι, H. 484; G. 127, V. (j) εἰμέ as enclitic, 
H. 480, 1,2; G. 28, n. 1 end. (k) Second aorist of the -pt form, 
H, 489, 1, 3,15, 17; G. 125, 3. (/) Principal parts of ἀκούω, ἐλαύνω, 
H. 507, 1, 521, 1; G. 330, 338. 

6. Syntax: (a) Genitive of cause, with verbs of emotion, H. 744 : 
G. 173, 1. (6) Genitive with compound verbs, H. 751; G..177. 





LESSON LXI. 


LESSON LXI. 
ANABASIS I. vin 14-18. 


1. NOTES. 


ὃ 14. οὐ πάνυ πρὸς... στρατεύματι, not very near (lit. in front of), 
etc. ἑκατέρωσε, to either direction: cf. ἑκατέρωθεν, from either 
direction XLIX. § 13. 

ὃ 15. ὡς συν-αντῆσαι, with a view to meet. Note the force of the 
infinitive. ἐπιστήσᾶς, sc. τὸν ἵππον: cf. XXVIII. ad init. 

ὃ 16. θορύβου ἤκουσε, heard a noise. Why the genitive ἢ Cf. ἤκουσε 
Τισσαφέρνους. . . στόλον XXIII. § 5. καὶ ὅς, and he. 

ὃ 17. ἀλλὰ δέχομαι, [I wondered], but I accept, i.e. welcome [1 now]. 

χώραν : cf. L., end. δι-ειχέτην : 3d person dual impf. Note 
the ending. 

ὃ 18. πορευομένων : note the omission of the substantive. Cf. 111. 
ad init. τι and τὸ ὑπολειπόμενον, sc. μέρος XLVIII. § 8. 

δρόμῳ : manner. Cf. ὀργῇ XLVIII. § 8; κύκλῳ XLVII. § 4. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Purpose is denoted by the infinitive, as well as by ὅπως with the 
future indicative, or (more usually) ἵνα, or ὡς, with the subjunctive (or 
optative). 

2. ἀκούω is construed with either the genitive or the accusative of 
the object heard, but with the genitive only of the source from which 
one hears, 

3. The ending -τὴν indicates the 3d person dual, past time. 

4. The ending -θεν denotes motion from ; -oe, motion toward. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Perfect middle and 1st passive 

systems of vowel and liquid 

ρου τᾶν oo G. 97, 3, 4. 
᾿ 840, 423, ; G. 109, 2, 110, 


’ S Ξ Ss . : 
ynopsis of τελέω 461,463. t Π1. 9, κ. 1. 









































198 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. Synopsis of στέλλω. . . . H. 342,448. 6. 109, 4. 
4. Tenses in other modes than the 
πιοῦν ww te tl Be 8δῖ. G. 202, 1, 2. 


4, VOCABULARY. 


ἀντίος. opposile ; ἀντίος ἰέναι, 14. ὁ θόρυβος, noise. 
go to meet, go against. 15. ἱερός, sacred, τὰ ἱερά, sacri- 
ἀπο-βλέπω, lvok off or away. fices. 
δεύτερος. second. 16. κατα-θεάομαι, view, look down 
δέχομαι, receive, accept. upon or watch intently. 
διέχω, have between, am 17. οἷον, adv., as, just as. 
apart, separated or distant. 18. ὁμαλῶς, evenly, in even line. 
τὸ δόρυ, spear-shaft, spear. παιανίζω, sing a paean or 
δουπέω, make a din, clash. war-song. 
ἑκατέρω-σε, to, or in, in either πελάζω, approach, draw near. 
direction. συν-αντάω, confront, meet, 
ἐκ-κῦμαίνω, bend out (or forth) τὸ σύν-θημα, compact ; watch- 
like a wave. word, password. 
ἐλελίζω, raise a war-cry. 23. τὸ σφάγιον, sacrificial victim. 
ὁ ᾿Ενυάλιος, Enydlios, Mars. 24. 6 σωτήρ, savior. 
6 Zevs, Zeus. 25. φθέγγομαι, sound, shout, cry 
θέω, run. out, yell. 


5. EXERCISES. 


‘ -~ > ~ 
1. Translate: (1) Χρήζει δίκην αὐτῷ ἐπιθεῖναι. (0) ‘Qs δ᾽ ἐλελί- 
~ A “~ ’ ‘ b πὸ ͵ J Z a 
avres τῷ Διὶ σωτῆρί te καὶ ᾿Ενδαλίῳ ἐπαιάνασαν τὸ δεύτερον, ἀντίοι τοῖς 
> a . a ‘ , “- 
ἐχθροῖς ὁμαλῶς ἔθεον. () ᾿Εδούπησεν δὲ τὰ ὅπλα ἡνίκ᾽ ἐκ τοῦ ἅρματος 
ὝΝ a ᾿ - , 
ἐπὶ γῆν ἔπεσεν. (1) ᾿Ἐπειδᾶν προβάλωνται τὰ ὅπλα, καὶ βασιλεὺς παρε- 


λάσῃ πρὸ αὐτῶν, ἡμεῖς δὴ φθεγξώμεθα (6) ᾿Αναβὰς δ᾽ ἐπὶ τὸν πρᾶνῆ 


, ~ ¢ , > , ” - 
γήλοφον καταθεῶ ἑκατέρωσε ἀποβλέπων εἴς τε τὴν μεσημβρίᾶν καὶ τὴν ἄρκτον. 
‘4 A Ἁ ’, ‘ μι - 

(f) ἜΝνθα δὴ δέδοικε μὴ ὄπισθεν αὐτοῦ γενόμενος βασιλεὺς κατακόψη 
τὸ πελταστικὸν καὶ πρόεισιν ἀντίος" καὶ ἐπιπεσὼν σὺν τοῖς κρατίστοις 
. Φ “ ξ , - » ‘ 4 , , Ἢ , 
(καὶ ἦσαν ὅσον ἑξακόσιοι) vika τοὺς mpd βασιλέως τεταγμένους καὶ διώκει 
τοὺς ἑξακισχιλίους καὶ ἀποκτεῖναι λέγεται αὐτὸς τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χειρὶ φοινικι- 


’ Ν » «A , , ἃ - "Δ . 
στὴν τινα ἄρχοντα αὐτῶν. (_) Διαστάντες οἱ ἱππεῖς ἐθήρων. 





LESSON LXII. 199 


2. Translate: (a) I wonder because you have not yet received the 
letter which your (art.) wife wrote to you. (6) They did not know 
how great the noise would be when they uncovered (partic.) their 
shields and made a din with them against’ their spears. (c) When they 
neared (gen. abs.) his tent, a certain part of the army bent out like a 
wave; those therefore (who were) lett behind went on arun. () Since 
the sacrifices are favorable, let victory, and death to the king and those 
with him, be our watchword. (v) Let us send (subjunct ) men to 
capture the heights in advance (apo-, prepositional pref.). 

3. Learn the verbs of Lesson LI.; write on a slip of paper the 
English, and then from the English give the Greek, pronouncing both 
aloud as much as possible. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The adverbial endings -σε and -θεν. 2. Different ways of ex- 
pressing purpose. 3. ἐπιστάς and ἐπιστήσας. 4. Construction with 
ἀκούω. 5. καὶ ds, ὁ dé. 6. Personal ending -ryv. 7. ἀλλά and γάρ 
in answers. 8. Analysis, parts, and classification of (a) μένον, (b) ἀπο- 
βλέπων, (c) πελάσᾶς, (4) συναντῆσαι, (6) δέχομαι, (f) ἐφθέγξαντο. 
9. Inflection of προΐει. 10. Reason for the mode of συναντῆσαι (15), 
of παραγγέλλοι (15), of εἴη (16). 


LESSON LXII. 
ANABASIS 1. vu. 19-24. 


NOTES. 


$19. πρὶν... ἐξικνεῖσθαι : cf. πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι XLIV. § 13, 
Notes. κατὰ κράτος, according to their strength, t.e. at full speed: 
cf. κατὰ ἔθνη LIX.$9. Meaning of κατὰ γῆν. Cf. ἀνὰ κράτος LVIT. § 1. 

§ 20. κενὰ ἡνιόχων : cf. ὑμῶν ἔρημος XXXIV. § 6. ἔστι ὅστις, 
somebody. Of. ἦν. .. σταθμῶν οὗς .. . ἤλαυνεν, he made some of his 
marches long, lit. there were of his marches [ those} which, ete. XLVII. 8 7. 


ἐκπλαγείς : for ἐκ-πλαγ-ε-ντ-ς. 















































200 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


ὃ 21. καθ᾽ αὑτούς : cf. κατ᾽ dvrimépas ᾿Αβύδου XV. οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not 
even THUS. Note, ὥς in this sense is accented. Meaning of καὶ ταῦτα ! 
Υ r » : . 
Cf. XLII. ad fin. ἤδει αὐτὸν ὅτι ἔχοι : so Matthew XXV. 24, — 
1 knew thee that thou art a hard man. 

ὃ 22. αὐτῶν ἑκατέρωθεν : cf. πέρᾶν τοῦ Εὐφράτου X LIX. 810. εἰ 
χρήζοιεν -. . ἂν αἰσθάνεσθαι. Form of conditional statement } Form 
in the direct discourse / 

» | «» wae, ~ ΄“ "4 
§ 23. ἔξω . . . κέρᾶτος : cf. ἔξω τῶν πυλῶν XLI. ὃ 5. On the geni- 
tive form, ef. κέρως LIV. 8 1. 

ὃ 24. δείσας, fearing: trom δέ δοι-κα LV. § 7, there being no 

Attic present. On -o- in the perfect stem, cf. λεέπω, λέλοιπα. ἐμ- 


βαλών, he charged or fell wpon. Cf. ἐμ-βάλλει XXV. § 8, ἐν-έ 
XLIX. § 11. ‘ pee ree 


2. OBSERVATION. 


The verb ἐστί may be so closely construed with the relative pronoun 
that both may be rendered by the English some. In this case, the forms 
ἐστί and εἰσί take the accent on the penult, — ἔστι, εἴσι. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Synopsis of ῥίπτω 


ἐν 345, 355, "ἦν 15, 2, 101, 


᾿ 366, 61. 2. 
Synopsis of πείθω. Ὃς H. 347. G. page 351. 
Modes with verbs of fearing . H. 887. G. 218. 
ne. . ia oy Oe G. 152, n. 2. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


ἀσφαλής, -€s, safe: ἐν ἀσφα- 6. ἐξ-ικνέομαι, arrive at, reach. 
rei, in @ safe place. 7. ἐπι κάμπτω, bend in; draw 
ex-KXiver, bend out of line; the wings of an army t¢o- 
give way. gether. 
- ἐκ-πλήττω, strike out of one’s . ἥμισυς, -εια, -v, half. 
senses, dismay. ὁ 
- ἔμ-προσθεν, in front. ὁ ἱππόδρομος, horse-race. 
ἐξ-άγω. lear out, astray ; lempt. ἡ ἰσχύς. might, strength. 


¢ ° + 
ἥνιοχος, rein-holder, driver. 














LXI. 201 


κενός, emply. 16. τὸ τόξευμα, bow-shot ; arrow. 
. ἡ κύκλωσις, encirclement : εἰς 7. τοξεύω, shoot with a bow, strike 
κύκλωσιν, in order to en- with an arrow. 
circle. 3. τρέπω, turn. 
mpo-opdaw, see in front. . ἡ φυγή, flight. 
συ-σπειράω, coil together. . ὥς, thus. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1, Translate: (a) "Hides δὴ αὑτὸν ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ ὄντα. (b) ἴΗιδειμεν 
αὐτὸν ὅτι συ πειραμένην ἔχοι Ἑλληνικὴν δύναμιν τὴν σὺν αὑτῷ (Cc) Εἰσῆ- 
κται εἰς τὴν ᾿Αρταπάτου σκηνὴν τοῦ πιστοτάτου τῶν σκηπτούχων. (4) Οὐδ᾽ 
ὡς ἐξεπλάγη ὡς εἶδε αὐτοὺς ἐλαύνοντας τὰ δρεπανηφόρα πρὸς αὑτὸν κενὰ 
ἡνιόχων. (4) ᾿Ἐνταῦθα διέσχον ἀλλήλων ὅσον τετταράκοντα στάδια, oi 
μὲν διώκοντες τοὺς καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς ὡς πάντα νϊκῶντες, οἱ δ᾽ ἁρπάζοντες ὡς 
ἤδη πάντα νϊκῶντες. (f) Ἐπεὶ 8’ ἤσθοντο βασιλέα ὅτι ἐν tos σκευο- 
φύροις εἴη σὺν τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ, βασιλεὺς δ΄ αὖ ἤκουσε Τισσαφέρνους ὅτι 
οἱ Ἕλληνες νϊκῷεν τὸ καθ᾽ αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς τὸ πρόσω οἴχονται διώκοντες, 
ἐνταῦθα δὴ βασιλεὺς μὲν ἀθροίζει τε τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ καὶ συντάττεται, ὃ δὲ 
Κλέαρχος ἐβουλεύετο Πρόξενον καλέσας εἰ πέμποιέν τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν 
ἐπὶ τὸν σταθμὸν ἀφ᾽ οὗ ὥρμηντο. 

2. Translate: (a) But after this he never saw him, either 
(i.e. neither) living or (nor) dead (perf. part.). (0) How many 
(i. 6. as many as) indeed of those about the king died, Ktesias tells; for 
he was with (= beside) him: but Cyrus himself died, and eight, the 
best of those about him, fell upon his body (= him). (ὁ Much use 
is there of good drivers in a horse-race. (d) Before I gave thee thy 
talents, thon knewest (me) that I was a hard man. (e) They were 
filled with consternation as they saw the king’s force drawing in its 
wings before them as if to encircle them. (9) He now wants the 
Greeks to follow against the king; I therefore say that it is necessary 
that you cross the river Euphrates before it is evident what the rest will 
say (= reply) to Cyrus. 

3. Review the Noun and Verb lists of Lesson LI. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Use of modes after πρίν. 2. Uses and senses of κατά. 3. The 
accent ἔστι. 4. ἔστι ὅστις. 5. τοι- in λέλοιπα, δέδοικα. 6. Parts, 






































202 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD 


classification, and analysis of ἔτρεψε, ἐπέκαμπτεν, συνεσπειραμένην, 
» , 6 > , _ + " Γ . > Ζ . . c Ὺ 
ἐξήχθη, ἐκπλαγείς. 7. Sy hopsis of ἐκκλένουσιν, active voice. 8. Con- 
struction of ἡνιόχων 20; declension οἱ ἰσχύς 22, κέρᾶτος 23 ; conju- 
gation of ἤδει. indicative, 21. 9. The phonetic rules illustrated in the 
synopsis of ῥίπτω and πείθω. 10. What mode to be used after ἔδεισε 
(he feared). 





LESSON LXIII. 
ANABASIS 1. vin. 25 to the end. 


1. NOTES. 


ὃ 25. εἰς τὸ διώκειν : cf. ds εἰς κύκλωσιν LXII. § 23. πλὴν. 
κατελείφθησαν, except that .. . were left. πλήν, conj., as in LXII, § 20, 
and XXIX. ad fin. 

ὃ 26. ἠν-ἔ-σχετο, he did not endure, control himself. Cf. ἂν δὲ ταῦτα 
ἀνάσχησθε, §4. Note, in ἠνέσχετο both the temporal and the syllabic 
augment. ἵετο, he threw himself. Cf. ἵεντο κτὲ XLVIILI. § 8. 

ἢ 27. καὶ . . . μαχόμενοι κτέ, and as the king... fought, Ktesias 
says how many of those about the king perished. βασιλεύς is nominative, 
but has no verb, for Xenophon changes the construction of his sentence 
at ὁπόσοι. 

ὃ 28. πεπτωκότα : cf. ἐκπεπτωκότας XIII. On the construction, cf. 
Ταμῶν. .. ἔχοντα XXIX. § 21. 
LVII. ad fin. 


§ 29. ἐπι-σφάξαι: theme σφαγ (ε΄. σφάγια LXI. 8 15), pres. σφάττω; 
so theme mpay, pres. Tparrw. εἶχε, ἐφόρει, ἐτετίμητο, 1. 6. ᾿Αρταπάτης. 


περι-πεσεῖν (aor.): ε΄. ἐπι-πεσεῖσθαι 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The idea of purpose is expressed in many different ways. 

2. πίπτω (mer) assumes the theme πτω in the perfect. 

3. Many verb themes in -y have the present stem in -rr. 

4. ἀν-έχομαι, endure, has two augments, — one before and one after 
the preposition. 





LESSON LXIII. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Synopsis of ἀλλάττω. H. 346. 
Synopsis of δείκνῦμε. H. 352. 


ἣν 97, 4, and Ν. 9 end; 
page 331. 
G. 128. 


ene ; H. 893-895, { G. 220 (a), 1,2; (0), 1,23 
Conditional sentences 898, 900. 


( 221-225. 


4, VOCABULARY. 


ἀκοντίζω, hurl (hit with) the 
spear. 

βίαιος, powerful ; ady. -as, 
powerfully, violently. 

δια σπείρω, scatter seed broad- 
cast; pass. (of an army), 
become separated. 

ἑκάτερος. each (of two). 

ἐπι-σφάττω, slay upon or 
over. 

ἡ εὔνοια, good will, devotion. 

ὁ θεράπων, atiendant, servant. 

ἰάομαι, dress or heal (a wound). 

ὁ ἰᾶτρός, physician. 


κατα-λείπω, leave behind. 

κεῖμαι, lie, lie fallen. 

ὁ ὁμο-τράπεζος, table.compan- 
ion. 

ὁ ὀφθαλμός, eye. 

παίω, strike. 

περι-πίπτω. fall (round) upon, 

πίπτω, fall. 

ἡ πιστότης faithfulness. 

σπάω, draw. 

τὸ στέρνον, breast. 

σχεδόν, almost, almost only. 

τιτρώσκω, wound. 

TO τραῦμα, a wound. 








καθ opdw, behold over in the 24. ἡ τροπή, a turning, rout. 
distance. 25. opéw, continually wear. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (4) Θεῶνται δ᾽ of παῖδες καὶ τἱμωμένους ὑπὸ βασιλέως 
καὶ ἀκούουσι, καὶ ἄλλους ἀτϊμαζομένους:" ὥστε εὐθὺς παῖδες ὄντες ἐπί- 
στανται ἄρχειν τε καὶ ὄρχεσθαι.Ό. (b) Τὸ δὲ ἥμισυ τῆς βασιλέως ἰσχύος 
ἐκπλαγὲν ὥσπερ ἐν τοῖς ἱπποδρόμοις ἐξεκλίθη τῆς τάξεως καὶ ἐτρέφθη 
εἰς φυγὴν πρὶν τοξεύματα ἐξικνεῖσθαι. (cc) Οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἐξάγεται ἐπικάμψαι 
εἰς κύκλωσι. (7) ἴἤαλγαμαι δὴ τοὺς ἐμοὺς θεράποντας διὰ τὴν εὔνοιαν 
καὶ πιστότητα. ἣν ἐπέδειξαν" εἰ ἀσθενοῖεν. μέλοι ἄν μοι αὐτοὺς ἰᾶσθαι. 
(6) Ἔνθα δὴ πολὺς θόρυβος ἐγένετο καὶ τάραχος: αὐτίκα γὰρ ἐνόμιζον 
ὅτι ἀτάκτοις σφίσιν ἐπιπίπτοιεν ἄν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς θώρακας ἐνδῦντες καθίσταιντο 


» ‘ e ~ , - » 
εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ τάξιν ἕκαστος. 















































204 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


ς Π νυνυϊαλω. "i 
So erage pic gale or ie eters ταὶ 
j y beneath the left eye 
(0) I had thought that it was almost afternoon when the rout occurred. 
() Since the wound was upon the whole (a) large (one), he fell ies 
his horse, and many of his most faithful table-companions fell over him 
(ὦ Many of the servants of each lay by the side of the river wh tia 
they had been slain over the body of the dead Cyrus. (6) I shall ioe 
to heal this wound as quickly as possible, in order that we ὧν μ᾿" 
leisure to put our enemies out of the way. 
3. Review carefully the Nouns, Verbs, and Adjectives of Lesson LI 
Select the more difficult ones for special study, ; 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Principal parts, classification, and analysis of (a) διασπείρονται, 
(0) κατελείφθησαν, © ἠνέσχετο, (1) τιτρώσκει, (0) ἐπισφάξαι, (f) κα- 
θορᾷ. 2. W ays of expressing purpose. 3. Uses of πλήν. 4. Present 
system of tye; principal parts. 5. Declension of στῖφος, τραῦμα 
τίς, πιστότης. 6. Inflection of éreriunro. 7. Euphonic principles 
illustrated in the synopsis of ἀλλάττω. 8, General conditions ; ee 
conditions. 9. Themes ending in -y; present stem. as 





LESSON LXIV. 
ANABASIS I. rx. 1-5. 


1. NOTES. 


‘ , Φ 
ὃ 1. παρὰ πάντων : nearly equivalent to ὑπὸ πάντων. What is the dif 
fer Cu : a Ἴ ' 
: ence ? Κυρου . . . ἐν πείρᾳ γενέσθαι, to have been acquainted with 
'yrus. 


§ 2. ἔτι παῖς ὦν, while yet a boy. πάντα, in all respects. On the 
construction, cf. τὸ εὖρος XLIIT. 8 9. 


ὃ 3. κατα-μάθοι ἄν τις: why the optative? cf ὀκνοίην dv XXXVII 














LESSON LXIV. 205 


ἰδεῖν ἔστι : cf. οὐκ ἦν λαβεῖν XLVI. § 2, ἔστι λαμβάνειν XLVI. § 3. 
Note, that ἐστί becomes paroxytone (ἔστι) when the verb denotes possi- 
bility ; as also when ‘it denotes existence : cf. ἔστι δ᾽ doris LALL. § 20. 


4. εὐθὺς παῖδες ὄντες. at once, while children ; in their very childhood. 
3 ᾽ 


. πείθεσθαι, and to obey his elders more 


§ 5. τοῖς τε πρεσβυτέροις. 
ἑαυτοῦ, construed 


even than those did who were infertor to him. 
aiter ὑποδεεστέρων ; on the case of each, cf. προτέρᾷ Κύρου XAXI. § 25. 

φιλιππότατος, sc. ἐδόκει εἶναι. ἔργων (explained by τοξικῆς and 
ἀκοντίσεως) is construed after the two following adjectives. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. παρά with the genitive may denote agency, but not commonly. 
2. English : “I am acquainted with Cyrus ;” Greek : “I become in 


(= come into) a trial or experience of Cyrus.” 
3. ἐστί in certain positions or with certain meanings becomes ἔστι. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Synopsis of O9paw . . . H. 338. 
Synopsis of δηλόω . H. 341. G. 98. 
Synopsis of κομίζω . . . H. 348,425. 6. 110, II. 2 (ὁ. 


Conditional relative clauses H. 912-918. G. 2383. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


αἰδήμων, -ovos, modest. 10. παιδεύω educate. 

> , Φ e ~ . ᾿ 
αἰσχρός, shameful, disgraceful. 11. ἡ πεῖρα, trial, expervence, ace 
ἡ ἀκόντισις, throwing the jave- quaintance. 

ἡ σωφροσύνη, prudence, tem- 
βασιλικός, kingly, royal. perance ; self-control. 

1.» ; Ξ ε , 

τὸ ἔργον, WORK, deed. n τοξική, archery. 

ὁ ἡλικιώτης. an equal in age, . ὑποδεέστερος, wanting some- 
what, inferior. 


lin. 


companion, comrade, 
κατα-μανθάνω. learn thoroughly. φίλιππος, fond of horses. 
μανθάνω, learn. φιλομαθής, -ἐς, fond of learn- 


μελετηρός, studious in practising. ing. 






































INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Ἐν συχνῇ δὲ πείρᾷ τῶν Κύρου ἡλικιωτῶν ἧσαν, καὶ 
ἐνόμισαν αὐτὸν πάντα πάντων αἰδημονέστατον εἶναι. (b) "Ere παῖδες ὄντες, 
ὅτ᾽ ἐπαιδεύθησαν, πολλὴν ἀρετήν τε καὶ σωφροσύνην κατέμαθον. (c) Εὐθὺς 

ΕΟ 4 ᾿ ~ 4 ” ‘ ‘ ~ > ‘ e ΄ all 
mats ὧν ἐθεᾶτο τοὺς φιλίππους καὶ τοὺς τῶν εἰς Tov ἱππόδρομον ἔργων φιλο- 

“ 4 , ΄ , + * a - Ι] ΄ Ε] , > ._@ 4 
μαθεῖς καὶ μελετηρούς (4) Ὅτε δὲ αὐτῷ wpa ἐγένετο, ἐθήρευε ad’ ἵππου καὶ 

\ ‘ , ᾽ , ε , ψΨ - “Ὁ ae ν 349 δι...  « 
πρὸς τὰ θηρία ἐφάνη ὡς κίνδῦνον φιλῶν. Καὶ ἄρκτον ποτὲ ἐφ᾽ αὑτὸν ἰοῖσαν 
οὐκ ἐφοβεῖτο, ἀλλὰ συμ-πεσὼν αὐτῇ ἐσπάσθη ἀπὸ τοῦ ἵππου - αὐτὴν δὲ 
κατέκανεν. 

2. Translate: (a) Yea, by Zeus, I know that if they should become 
enemies to each-other, many would go-away from the king to those even 
[who are] inferior to him. (ὁ) It is a good [thing] to be fond of javelin- 
throwing and of archery, and, on the whole, of all things [which per- 
tain] to war. (c) It is indeed most disgraceful that he is inferior to his 
attendants in faithfulness. (d) We all fear that he will die, if he has 
been wounded severely beneath the eye. 


3. Review carefully the Vocabulary of Lesson LI. ; note the more 
difficult words and go over them repeatedly. Review numbers 454-500 
in the List of first occurrences. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Principal parts, theme, and classification of μανθάνω. 2. Com- 
parison of αἰδήμων, φιλομαθής, ἄξιος, κράτιστος. 3. The genitives in § 1. 
4. The genitives in ὃ 5. 5. The Attic future. 6. Kinds of condi- 
tional relative clauses. 7. ἔστι (paroxytone). 8, General conditions. 
9. General conditions, indirect discourse. 10. Illustrations of general 
conditions, direct and indirect discourse. 1]. Familiar words suggested 
by words in the ¢& Vocabulary.” 12. Different methods of comparing 


adjectives. 13. Formation and comparison of adverbs. 14. The 
adverbial endings -ce and -θεν. 





τω a cil in Se RR tes, ee 


LESSON LXV. 


LESSON LXV. 


ANABASIS I. 1x. 6-10. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 6. ἐπεὶ δέ: correlative with πρῶτον μέν § 2. καὶ οὐδ μέντοι, 
and withal or moreover. τέλος δέ, but finally ; note, this takes the 
place of ra δέ, correlative with ra μέν ; on the construction of τέλος, cf. 
τὸ ἀρχαῖον XII., τόνδε τὸν τρόπον XV. 

πολλοῖς : cf. τοῖς οἴκοι ζηλωτόν LIV. § 4. 

§ 7. καθ-ήκει, comes as ἃ duty; but c/. καθ-ήκοντα XL. ad fin. 

ἐπέδειξεν αὑτὸν ὅτι . . . ποιοῖτο: cf. ἤδει αὐτὸν. . . ὅτι ἔχοι {Χ11. 
§ 21. ὅτι . .. ποιοῖτο, that he mude it of the most importance. 
Explain the optative. Note the sense of περὶ πλείστου. ᾿ 

εἴ τῳ σπείσαιτο : cf. εἰ καλῶς καταπράξειεν XXII. wn. τῷ, encl., 
τες τινί, alicui, dative of association. ; aise seein 

ὃ 8. μηδὲν ἂν παρὰ tas σπονδὰς παθεῖν : cf. ἂν εἶναι τίμιος X Α 
6, ΝΝ.; παρὰ, contrary to. ᾿ 

§ 9. προ-έτσθαι, from προ ἴημι : cf. ap-ievaa XXXVIII. 19, tevro 
XLVIII. 8, σι XLIX. 12. 

§ 10. ἔλεγεν ὅτι, direct discourse, “I would never abandon them, when 
(= tf) 1 once (= surely) became thetr friend.” Ί his would be expressed 
by ἄν with the optative in the main clause, with the imperfect indica- 
tive in the subordinate clause. | Ε 

μείους : cf. πλείους XXXIV. § 7. κάκιον πράξειαν: κ. πράττω = 


fare badly; cf. XXII. ad init. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. τὰ μέν is not necessarily followed by so strict a correlative as 


τὰ δέ. ΐ ᾿ 
2. The subject of a subordinate clause, instead of appearing as such, 
may be made the object of the main clause of a sentence. 
3. The infinitive takes av when it stands in the place of a finite verb 


which would have taken it. 


else ae ας τς 
ee — 
-- SR tek a ΝΣ 


ercpae are en ee 
Se τ το- - ——— ν 


a ie aS i ap 











INDUCTIVE GREEK METUOD. LESSON LXVI. 209 


aw 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 2. ‘Translate: (a) When it befitted his time of life, Cyrus was edu- 

; cated with the other boys at the king’s gates. (b) If anybody was ever 
Syllabic augment before vowel initial H. 359. G. 104. an enemy to me, he trusted that, when I made an agreement or a treaty 
Vowel of the subjunctive. . | | Η. 373. G.114. with him, he would suffer nothing contrary to the agreement (Lesson 
Mode suffix of the optative . . . H.374, G. 115. LXI.) or to the treaty. (c) When he was drawn from his horse, he 
Accent in the optative of - verbs. H. 388. G. 220, n. 1. showed how fond of danger and of hunting he was; for grappling with 
Vowel changes in the 2d perfect. . Η 481 G. 110, IV. (d); the bear, he, to be sure, suffered somewhat, so that he always bore the 
os € 109, 3. scars, but he at length killed her with his dagger. (d) If the enemy 
Infinitive τ ἂν. 2. | . . Η. 964, G. 211. ever caused trouble to his country, Cyrus used to be sent down against 


them by the king. 
4. VOCABULARY. ; 3. In the List of first occurrences review words numbered 500-609. 


ἅπαξ. once, once for all. 2. ἡ σπονδή, Libation ; plural, 
. Bonbéw, assist, treaty. . 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


- ἐπιιφέρω, bear upon; mid., 3. συμ-πίπτω, full together with, j 
rush upon. grapple with. 4 1. Principal parts, theme, and classification of σπείσαιτο, συνθοῖτο, 


- ἡ ἡλικία age, time of life. - συν-τίθημε, put together; mid., : εἵλοντο, συμπεσών, προέσθαι. 2. (a) Analysis of each of the preceding 
. κατα-πέμπω, send down (to the agree. : forms; () synopsis of each in the tense and voice in which it appears. 
Sed-cOust). ὅ. τὸ τέλος, end. 3. The form μείους ; its comparison. 4. Past general conditions. 
κατα-σπάω, draw down. }. τοι-γαρ-οῦν, and so then, there- 5. The topics included in the Grammar Lesson. 6. A eT enn 
+ μακαριστός deemed happy, blessed. fore. present system. 
- μείων, less in number, fewer. - τρέω, tremble, shrink from in 
- πρέπει, it becomes or befits. fear. 
+ προ-ίημε, give up, abandon, sur- - Φιλότθηρος, fond of the hunt 
render. or chase, 


+ σπένδω, poura libation; mil., 19. Piro-xivdovos, fond of dan- 
pour a libation with anoth- ger. 


er, i. 6. make a treaty. 90: §°dread’ sar. ᾿ ANABASIS I. 1x. 11-16. 











2 
i 
a 
) 
; 
P| 
ἊΨ 
Ἢ 
4 
Ὶ 
ΕἼ 
ἢ 
᾿ 
{ 
4 
a 
| 
ΐ 
ἢ 
Ἢ 
2 
d 





METS eS a cat ei 





LESSON LXVI. 


ar ci ain 








aN RE ES SP, 


iach aman chins 
a i on 


—- 


1. NOTES. 
5S. EXERCISES. 


στ 


1. Τί. at oe : | ὃ 11. φανερὸς δ᾽ ἦν... πειρώμενος: cf. ἐπιβουλεύων φανερὸς γέγονας 
: ransiate : (a) Καὶ οὗτοι ἐβουλεύοντο εἰ αὐτοῦ μείναντες τὰ σκευο- ’ LIII. § 8 

ρα ἐνταῦθα ἄγοιντο ἢ dn-i ἐπὶ γὴ ” a che a Ἶ ᾿ ᾿ 
Φ ps ay ) an-tovev ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον. (ἢ) "Ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς 4 ἰγαθὸν . . οιἥσειεν αὐτόν, do him good or, etc.; observe the two 
ἀπιέναι" καὶ ἀφικνοῦ “Δ λων λα ἰὼ ᾿ ἀγαθὸν . TOW 3 g A : 

at υνται ' . = Ξ i - . 

ΜΝ μην ὐφ  αρηφι ΤῊΝ 4 ΠΡ hs Tas σκήνας. (6) Ταύτης μὲν τῆς “| accusatives. νικᾶν, t. 6. excel, surpass. ἔστε νΐκῳη, until he should 

€pas TOUTO ἐγένετο TO τέλος. ἢ ᾿ ἔ ᾽ “ Σ Ν᾿ ἥ . a a 
φιλόθηροί (ἀν idori ps sme (7 — a ὯΝ ee f surpass ; direct discourse, “until I excel,” ἔστε ἂν νϊκῶ : cf. εἰ καλῶς κατα- 

t TE καὶ Φιλοκινδῦνοι 1 as ὦ 5 » ~ ~ - = 
tates διὰ τοῦ Bi (6) οὐ a πολλὰ πάσχειν ὧν τᾶς ὠτειλὰς ἑ πράξειεν XXIT. εὖ. .. κακῶς ποιοῦντας : cf. κακῶς ποιῶ XLII. 
ε ta Του tov. e a ἃ if 4 » J » ὦ ἡ mye Ἂ 

P μ τ : ) ν =a μεν μειους γένοιντο ἔτι δὲ κάκϊον 4 § 8. ἀλεξόμενος, by guwing them like for like ; cf. however ἀλέ- 

mpagerav, οὐκ ἄν ποτε προοιμην, ἐπεὶ ἅπαξ ἐμοῦ φίλοι ἐγένοντο | ξασθαι XXXIV. § 6 














eS se Se: 
eases 





14 








210 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


§ 12. πλεῖστοι δή, the very greatest number. αὐτῷ. ae ἡμῶν, to 
him, the one man of the men of our times. Note the contrast indicated by 
πλεῖστοι. . . ἑνί. Note also the force of ἐπί. 


§13. ὡς: cf. XXXIII. § 5. εἴα : cf. XLIII. ad init. 


ἀφειδέστατα, superlative of the adverb ; strictly a neuter plural, cognate 


accusative: cf. ἄριστα ὃ 5. ἦν: cf. οὐκ ἦν λαβεῖν XLVI. § 2. 

§ 14. εἰς πόλεμον : cf. εἰς τὴν τροφήν XVI. es: imperfect of 
ὁράω. Note the syllabic and temporal augment. ss — 
χὠρᾶς, of what country, etc., a. 6. of the country, which, etc. Note the 
appearance of the antecedent in the relative clause. 

815. ὥστε κτὲ, so that the good appeared, ... and the bad were 
deemed, etc. | | 

8 16. εἰς δικαιοσύνην . . . ἐπιδείκνυσθαι, to distinguish himself in the 
matter of (lit. unto) justice. ἀδίκου : neuter used as substantive ; 


cf. ἄδικος 1111. § 8. 
2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1 φανερός εἶμι, like φαίνω, may be followed by a supplementary 
participle. ce τ 

2. Conditional or relative clauses, having ἄν and the subjunctive, 
may in the indirect discourse omit ἄν and change the verb to the 


optative. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


. Futuré perfect stem . . . . H. 466. G. 110, IV. (c). 


_ Theme modified in Ist aorist 
MN ses se ke ἐπ δνυΥν, G. 110, VI. 
G. 127, III. 


‘ugation of us . . =. =. ἢ. 476. 
pi ν G. 127, VI. 


Conjugation of κεῖμαι. . . . H. 482. 


4, VOCABULARY. 


. ἀδεῶς, fearlessly. . ἡ δικαιοσύνη, justice. 
ἀφειδής, unsparing; -ὥς, δᾶν., 6. ὁ δοῦλος, slave. | 
unsparingly. ; ἐκ φέρω, bring forth ; report. 
. ἡ ἀφθονία, abundance. ‘ ἐπι-θυμέω, set the heart upon, 
. διαφερόντως (differently), exceed- desire. 


ingly, especially. . ἔστε, until. 











LESSON LXVI. 211 


co 
10. ἡ εὐχή, prayer, vow. . προ-χωρέω, advance; aid. 
. ὁ κακοῦργος, evil-doer. Ϊ. στείβω, tread. 
κατα-γελάω, laugh at, deride. στέρομαι, mid. and pass. of 
3. κατα-στρέφω, overturn,subdue. στερέω. 
. ὅποι, whither. . τὸ σῶμα, body. 


. πλούσιος, rich. . Φιλο-κερδέω, fond of gain. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Mera δὲ τοῦτον ἄλλος παραγενόμενος εἶπεν ὅτι 
ἧστινος πράξεως Κῦρος ἐπιθυμοῖτο, οἱ δοῦλοι ἤθελον πάντες πάντα ἃ 
σῷ, ’ > Ld > - ”~ ΄ > bead , 
ἐκέκτηντο προέσθαι εἰς ὅτι αὐτοῖς χρῆσθαι βούλοιτο. (6) *Eripwpovpny 

᾽ = ~ ‘ ΄ > “ 4 “ ‘ > “a ΄“ 
μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν τοὺς βουλομένους ἀφαιρεῖσθαι τὴν γὴν τοὺς ἐνοικοῦντας Ἕλληνας. 
(6) Εἴς γε μὴν σωφροσύνην ἐάν τινες αὐτῷ φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐπιδείκνυσθαι 
βουλόμενοι. περὶ πλείστου ποιεῖται τούτους ζηλωτοτάτους ποιεῖν τῶν ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν. 
(4) ᾿Ενταῦθα δ᾽ ἔστησαν καὶ θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα ἐπαύοντο - καὶ ἅμα μὲν ἐθαύ- 

΄ > , a >> » a > ~ > ‘ , > 4 
μαζὸν ὅτι οὐ φαίνοιτο Κῦρος οὐδ᾽ ἄλλος dn αὐτοῦ οἰδεὶς παρείη " οὐ γὰρ 
ἤδεσαν αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα, ἀλλ᾽ εἴκαζον ἢ διώκοντα οἴχεσθαι ἢ καταληψό- 
μενόν τι ἐληλακέναι εἰς τὸ πρόσω. 

2. Translate: (a) Whenever evil-doers and unjust people used to 
laugh at him, he did not suffer it, but he made them the slaves of 
others. (b) They were so fond of danger that their bodies bore the 
scars of many battles. (c) Take whatever you think will aid you for 
your journey, and proceed without fear through Cyrus’s kingdom. 
(4) There is indeed an abundance of men who will be willing to surren- 
der ail they have to Cyrus, wherever any one thinks he will perceive it. 

3. Review with care the list of nouns in Lesson LX., and in the List 
of first occurrences the words numbered 610-660. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. κακὸν ποιῶ αὐτόν. 2. (a) The optatives in the lesson, (5) the sup- 
plementary participles. 3. Comparison of the adverb. 4. ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν. 
5. Parts, classification, analysis, and synopsis of (a) στειβομένᾶς, 
(b) κατεστρέφετο. (c) στερομένους. (64) καταγελᾶν, (6) eta. 6. Construc- 
tion of ποδῶν (13), αὐτῷ (14,16). φιλοκερδούντων (16). 7. The forms 
ὡμολόγητο διαφερόντως, ἑώρᾶ, εὐδαιμονεστάτους. 8. The antecedent 
in the relative clause. 9. ἀγαθὸν ποιῶ as a transitive construction. 
10. Comparison of the adverb. 


a ae sr se eeprom ΘΌΘΝΟΟΝ BR eae 3 





AS a RR MR REA i ARERR SR le aC at. 


| 
| 
. 
i 


i ei ai igi neo 





ae τοὺ τ or a a ee 








pe Soper aan 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON LXVII. 


ANABASIS I. 1x. 17-19. 


1. NOTES. 


817. ἄλλατε . . . ἐχρήσατο, whilst a great many things were done for 
him with justice, he always had un army well worth the name ; cf. τά τε 
ἄλλα ἐτίμησε... καί κτὲ XXXII. § 3. 

κατὰ μῆνα : ε΄. τοῦ μηνός ΧΧΧΥΠΙΙ. ad fin. 

18. avrg... ὑπηρετήσειεν : cf. Κύρῳ .. 
Κύρῳ ΙΧ. ἐλέχθησαν, from λέγω 

ὃ 19. οὐδένα. .. 


ΧΧΧΠΙ. 4. 
Κῦρον ἔκρυπτεν, Cyrum celabat, used to conceal from Cyrus. 


. ὑπάρχειν ὃ 17; ὑπῆρχε 


~ 


ἀφείλετο : cf. ἀφαιρεῖσθαι. . . Ἕλληνας . .. γῆν 


2. OBSERVATION. 


κρύπτω is construed with the accusative of the person from whom a 
thing is hidden, as well as with the accusative of the thing concealed. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


ὌΝ 6s a et eee eee G. 28, 3, n. 1 end. 
Principal parts of πλέω, γι- 
γνώσκω. ὑπάρχω, προστάττω, 
ὑπηρετέω, ἐάω. λέγω, γίγνο- 
μαι, ὀράω, ἀφαιρέω. 
3. Agreement of the verb with 
two or more subjects . . H. 606, 607. 
Verbs of plenty and want. . H. 743. 
. Verbs of separation. . . . H. 748. 
. Genitive of time. . . . . H. 759. 

















LESSON LXVII. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἀεί, always. 11. κερδαλέως, gainful. 
2. ἀληθινός, true, worthy the 12. τὸ κέρδος gain, profit. 
name. 13. ὁ οἰκονόμος, house-steward ; 
ἀπο-κρύπτω, hide away, con- manager. 
ceal. 14. πέπαμαι, have gained, possess, 
. axap:oros, thankless, unthanked. 
. δεινός, terrible; clever. ἡ προθυμία, zeal. 
δια-χειρίζξωο, have in hand, . προσ-δίδωμι, give in addition, 
manage. add. 
. δικαίως, justly. 
ἥκιστα, minime, least of all. 


. πλουτέω, am wealthy. 


. ἡ πρόσοδος, approach, revenue. 
: ὑπ-ηρετέω, render service, serve. 
. θαρραλέως, boldly. . ὁ ὑπηρέτης, servant, assistant. 
. kata σκευάζω, prepare fully, - φανερῶς, evidently. 

emprove. 2. φθονέω, begrudge, envy. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Ὕστερον δέ, ἐπεὶ ἔγνω ὅτι κερδαλεώτερον ἔσται 
βασιλεῖ ὑπηρετεῖν, συνήγαγεν ἐκκλησίᾶν καὶ ἔλεξεν τοιάδε. (Ὁ) Καὶ μὴν 
εἶπόν τινες ὅτι πολλὰ ὑπισχνωῖτο τότε διὰ τὸ ἐν τοιούτῳ εἶναι τοῦ κινδύνου 
προσιόντος. (c) Εἶτα δ᾽ ἐξῆγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ οἷς προσετάχθη. 
(4) “Ea αὐτῷ πεισθῶμεν, οὔτε πονήσαντες οὔτε κινδυνεύσαντες τῶν ἄλλων 
πλέον προτϊμησόμεθα οἰκονόμων. (4) Καταλαμβάνουσι δὲ τῶν τε ἄλλων 
χρημάτων τὰ πλεῖστα διηρπασμένα καὶ εἴ τι ἄλευρον ἦν, καὶ τὰς ἁμάξας 
μεστᾶς girov καὶ οἴνου. as παρεσκευάσατο iva, εἴ ποτε isxupas τὸ στρά- 
τευμα λάβοι λιμός, διαδοίη τοῖς Ἕλλησιν. ἦσαν δ᾽ αὗται τετρακύσιαι ὡς 
ἐλέγοντο ἅμαξαι. 

2. Translate: («) If we heard that any servant or steward was evi- 
dently improving the country which he was governing, we would never 
«llow his zeal to be unrewarded, but we used always to give him more. 
(5) We therefore worked most gladly and acquired many things boldly, 
and whatever we possessed we never hid from the king. (c) Not 
only do they manage many things for us with-justice, but they show 
that they are soldiers and stewards worthy the name. (d) Let us not 
seem to begrudge those who become wealthy openly. 





a ae One ee δ P 





214 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 

3. Make a careful review of the Vocabulary of Lesson LX.; select 
the harder words and make a special study of them. Continue in the 
List of first occurrences as far as No. 780. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Peculiar use of ἄλλα 8 17. 2. κατὰ μῆνα; τοῦ μηνός. 3. Various 
verbs meaning to aid ; case-construction with each. 4. Verbs construed 
with two accusatives. 5. Classification of the ten verbs of the Grammar 
Lesson. 6. ἔστιν. 7. Verbs construed with the genitive. 8. Familiar 
words suggested by the new words of the Vocabulary. 9. Analysis of 
the conditional sentences in the Text. 10. Case construction after 
xpdopa, φθονέω. 11. Analysis of ὁρῴη, ἐπόνουν, ἐκτῶντο (ὃ 19). 





LESSON LXVIII. 


ANABASIS I. 1x. 20-24. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 20. ὅτι τυγχάνοι, in whatever he might happen, etc., 7. 6. of he hap- 
pened to. . . anything. πρὸς πάντων: cf. πρὸς θεῶν 1.11. ὃ 6. 

ὁμολογεῖται . . . θεραπεύειν. Note, instead of the imperfect indica- 
tive ἦν (or ἐγένετο) ὁμολογουμένως (he was confessedly the best man, etc.), 
in the conclusion of this past general condition an equivalent form is 
used : it is acknowledged by all that he was; lit. he 1s acknowledged, etc. 

§ 21. αὐτὸ τοῦτο, wré, that very thing, on account of which he, .. « 
(namely) that he might have, . . . he himself sought, etc., ὃ. 6. he him- 
self [did] seeking, etc. Observe, αὐτὸ τοῦτο has no strict construction. 
Give a previous instance of this same peculiarity. Cf. Lesson LXIII. 


8 22. εἷς ye dv ἀνήρ. κτὲ. for one man, he used for many reasons to 
receive, etc. ; cf. ἑνί ye ἀνδρί LX VI. 12 and note. μάλιστα πάντων, 
most of all, i. e. rather than do anything else with them. 


§ 23. “With regard to gifts to be worn, his body could not wear 
them all ; a man’s best ornaments were his friends.” 











ee pe si - 
a EOE i in EOE i inet > 





LESSON LXVIII. €15 


§ 24. “That he greatly excelled in kindnesses is easily explained ; 
that he excelled in attentiveness and a love to please others was remark- 
able.” 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Frequently the conclusion of a general supposition does not have 
its verb in the mode and tense required by a strict rule ; instead of 
“he was confessedly, or he was, as all knew,” the form “ he ts confessed 
(or known) to have been,” may be used. 


2. Sometimes the construction of a sentence is such that its latter 
part seems to have no strict grammatical connection with the first part. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


Principal parts and classifica- 

tion of κρίνω, τυγχάνω, ot- 

ομαι, αἰσθάνομαι, λαμβάνω, 

σκοπέω, πέμπω. 
Dative of advantage. . . . H. 767. 
Dative of interest in looser 

MANE ac ka we ς ΒΟ ΎΥΙ, . 184,3 Nn. 1. 


H. 772 and c. . 186, ex. 


. 184, 1, 2, 3. 


Dative with ἅμα. 
Dative of accompaniment in 
military expressions . H. 774 and a. . 188,5 and Nn. 


Dative oftiime .... . H. 782. . 189. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἀγαστός, to be admired, admi- 7. ὁ καλλωπισμός, personal adorn- 
rable. ment. 


δια δίδωμι, give to different ones, . κατ-εργάζομαι, work out, accom- 
distribute. plish. 
ἡ ἐπιμέλεια, care, attentiveness. . κοσμέω, set in order, adorn. 
. εὔνους (contr. from εὔνοος), mpo-Ovpgopay, am zealous, eager. 
well-minded, well-disposed. σκοπέω, look at, observe. 
5. θαυμαστός, wonderful. . ὁ συνεργός, fellow-worker. 
3. θεραπεύω, serve, attend. 3. χαρίζομαι, gratify, oblige. 





ARNE SS See Sag a eda dC Gt a 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Ἐνταῦθα δὴ Κύρου ἀποκόπτεται ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ ἡ χεὶρ 

ἡ δεξιά. Βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ διώκων ἐπιπίπτει τῷ Κύρου στρα- 

, ‘ . 4 2 ’ > # ~ > ‘ , ‘ a 

τευματι" Kat οἱ μὲν μετὰ Aptaiov οὐκέτι ἵστανται, ἀλλὰ φεύγουσι διὰ τοῦ 

ς « , > \ ‘ ΓΙ ΄ > , 

αὐτῶν στρατοπέδου (camp) εἰς τὸν σταθμὸν οὗ ὥρμηντο" τέτταρες δ᾽ ἐλέ- 

, > A - 4 a 3 - 4 > « εν 

yovro παρασάγγαι εἰναι τῆς ὁδοῦ. (b) Καὶ γὰρ οὖν πλεῖστοι δὴ αὐτῷ ἑνί 
Ύ ‘ “ , - ᾽ , ? ” 

ye ἀνδρὶ τῶν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ ἐπεθύμησαν συνεργοὶ εἶναι καὶ θεραπεύειν, ὅτι 

τυγχάνοι βουλόμενος κατεργάζεσθαι. (“) Ὅπου δ᾽ οὐ πολὺς εἴη χῖλός, αὐτὸς 
δ᾽ δύ , \ " ‘ » τ ‘= ‘ ‘ ‘ ’ 

ἐδύνατο παρασκευάζεσθαι διὰ τὸ πολλοὺς ἔχειν ὑπηρέτας καὶ διὰ τὴν ἐπι- 

, ‘ U , π᾿ - . 

μέλειαν, διαδιδοὺς ἐκέλευε τοὺς Φίλους ἐμβάλλειν τοῦτον τὸν χῖλὸν τοῖς 

τὰ ἑαυτῶν σώματα ἄγουσι ἵπποις. 


2. Translate: (a) For one man, he did most to make men love 
him and help (in) whatever he might chance to desire to accomplish. 
(0) Whomsoever he sees willing to incur dangers and knows to be well 
disposed, him he makes it of the highest importance to gratify in many 
things. (c) Now the flesh of these wild animals was sweet. (d) When- 
ever we used to hear of men who wore many personal adornments, we 
used to think that our best ornaments were our (the) good and faithful 
and zealous friends of whom we had many. 


3. Review the Vocabularies of Lessons δὴ XX., XXX., and 
XXXIX.; make a search for the more difficult words the chief study. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Conditional relative sentences. 2. πρός with the genitive. 3. Ir- 
regularities in the form of the verb in conclusions of conditional sen- 
tences. 4. εἷς ye ὧν ἀνήρ. 5. Analysis of the conditional sentences in 
the Lesson. 6. Declension of εὔνους (20), ὅτου (21), and σῶμα (23). 
7. Analysis of κοσμηθῆναι (23), διεδίδου (22), xptvere (20). 8. The 
optatives in the Lesson. 9. Familiar words suggested by the new 
words in the Vocabulary. 








LESSON LXIX. 


LESSON LXIX. 
ANABASIS 1. 1x. 25-31. 


1. NOTES. 


8 25. οὔπω . . . ἐπιτύχοι, not yet of (ie. for) a long time, etc.; rov- 
του, 2. 6. the wine sent by Cyrus; οἴνῳ, cf. σφίσιν LVII. ad fin. 

σοί, H. 261; 6. 79. 

§ 26. τούτοις ἥσθη; cf. XXVIII. 18. 

§ 28. μέλλοιεν ὄψεσθαι, were likely to see (indefinite frequency) ; 
cf. the meaning of ἔμελλε 1,01]. 1; ὄψεσθαι, classed as future of épde, 
though from a different theme; cf. (a) aipéw, εἷλον, (Ὁ) φημί, εἶπον, 
εἴρηκα. 

§ 29. καὶ τόδε (sc. ἐστίν), the following fact also is, etc. καὶ 
οὗτος . . . ἣ ἑαυτῷ, and he found that he, whom he supposed faithful to 
himself, was a better friend, etc.; cf. δοθῆναι ot XIV.; φίλτερον, the 
usual comparative of φίλος. καὶ οὗτοι μέντοι : in apposition with 
πολλοί. ἂν τυγχάνειν : cf. ἂν τίμιος εἶναι XXXIV.; the condition 
is in ὄντες ἀγαθιΐ (= εἰ ἀγαθοὶ εἴησαν). Note the genitive construed 
with τυγχάνειν. 

ὃ 30. τεκμήριον . . . ὅτι καὶ αὐτός, indication of the fact that he was 
both himself, etc.; the τεκμήριον which Xenophon has in mind is in 
§ 31, hence ydp at the beginning of it. 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The time within which an act occurs may be expressed by the 


genitive case. | 
2. Several important verbs show a change of theme in their principal 


parts. 
3. μέλλω (I am likely or about to), implying futurity, may itself be 
construed with a future infinitive. 








INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The principal parts of δέω (want), 

ἥδομαι, βούλομαι, δύναμαι, ἔχω, 

ἄγω, ἐμ-βάλλω, πρυσ καλέω, ἀκούω, 

εὑρίσκω. 
2. Perfect with present meaning . . H. 849. G. 200, n. 6. 
3. Tenses of the optative and infinitive 

in the indirect discourse . . . H. 852. G. 203. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


. ἀγαπάω, love. 14. ἡμι-δεής, half-wanting or emp- 
. ὁ ἄρτος, bread. ty; half-full. 
βέβιιιος, firm. 5. τὸ ἥμισυ, neut. of the addj., 
6 Bixos, pitcher. half. 
. yevo, give a taste; mid., . ὀρθῶς, rightly. 
taste. . πεινάω, wm hungry. 
3. δηλόω, reveal, make evident. . προσ-καλέω, call unto mysel/, 
δια-πέμπω, send around, dis- summon. 
tribute. . σπάνιος, scarce, rare. 
ὁ δοῦλος, slave. . σπουδαιολογέομαι, talk earn- 
ἐκ-πίνω, drink up. estly. 
ἐπι-λέγω, say with reference . ὁ συν τράπεζος, mess- mate, 
thereto. table-companion. 
. ἐπι-τυγχάνω, happen upon. 2. τὸ τεκμήριον, sign, indication. 
. ἐπι xewew, take in hand, at- . τήμερον, to-day. 
tempt. . ἡ τιμή, honor. 
3. ἡμί-βρωτος, half-eaten. ὅ, ὁ χήν, goose. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate : (1) Οὕτως ἐτελεύτησεν ὁ φοινικιστής ἀνὴρ dv τῶν μετὰ 


ae ‘ . , - , , ἊΨ > , a ‘ 
Kipov τὸν μέγαν γενομένων τἰμιώτατός τε καὶ ἄρχειν ἀξιώτατος - τοῦτο παρὰ 
ε ’ “~ - - κ - , 
πάντων ὡμολόγηται τῶν αὐτοῦ δοκούντω» ἐν πείρᾷ τε καὶ φιλίᾳ γενέσθαι 
a ε 


a” ‘ a . 
(0) Ἔνθα δὴ εὐθὺς παῖδες ὄντες ἔμαθον αἰδήμονες εἶναι καὶ πρὸς τοὺς 
ἑαυτῶν ὑποδεεστέρους. (vc) ᾿Επιδείκνῦσι αὑτὸν ὅτι περὶ πλείστου ποιεῖται, 








LESSON LXX. 219 


ἐάν τῳ σπείσηται Kai ἐάν τῳ συνθῆται, μηδὲν ψεύδεσθαι. (i) Kai εἴ τις 
ἡμῖν ἐχθρὸς ἐγενετο, σπειυαμένων ἡμῶν ἐπίστευε πάντα καλῶς ἂν ἔχειν. 
(2) Συνιδεῖν δ᾽ ἔστι τῷ προσέχοντι τὸν νοῦν ὁ Κῦρος ὡς δυνάμενος κρινειν 
ὀρθῶς τοὺς πιστοὺς καὶ βεβα ους. 

2. ‘Translate: (a) Whenever I receive pitchers of sweeter wine, I 
shall send all to you, but not for a long time have I received wine 
sweeter than this. (Ὁ) They are confessed by all to be zealous co- 
workers for all whom they know to be well-disposed and faithful. 
(0) That also which happened to him about full market is a great 
indication that he always had his army drawn up for battle ; for when 
a horseman appeared riding at full speed and announced that the enemy 
were coming, the soldiers immediately stood under arms and waited 
until Cyrus should order them what they should do. 

3. A careful study of the Vocabulary of Lesson LI. and LX.; review 
in the List of first occurrences from No. 781 to 865. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. How to express time, 2. Tenses of the indicative, optative, 
infinitive, participle. 3. The optatives in the Lesson. 4. Declension 
of ἡμιδεής (25) ὑπηρέτης, πεινῶντες (27). 5. Inflection of ria (28), 
ἀπήει (29). 6. Analysis of δηλοίη. πεφιλῆσθαι (28). 7. Comparison 
of φίλος. 8. The participle πεπτωκότα (30). 


LESSON LXxX. 


ANABASIS I. x. 1-6. 


1. NOTES. 


§1. ἀποτέμνεται, διώκων, εἰσπίπτει ; explain the use of the singular. 
οἱ μὲν pera ᾿Αριαίου, Ariaeus and his men. 


§ 2. τέτταρες. . . ὁδοῦ, there were said to be four parasangs of the 
road, t.e. the distance was said to be four parasangs. τά τε ἄλλα 
διαρπάζουσι, cat . . . λαμβάνει, not only plunder much of other things, but 
(v. 6. while they plunder, etc.) also take, ete.; cf. LX VII. 17. 





220 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


§ 3. ληφ-θεῖσα, theme AaB τῶν ἀμφὶ βασιλέᾷ. cf. of μετὰ ᾿Αριαίονυ 
8. 1. πρὸς τῶν Ἑλλήνων, to [sc. τούτους, those] of the Gieecs. Why 
not allow πρός to be construed with the genitive here ? ὅπλα ἔχοντες 
1.6. on guard. οἱ δὲ καὶ αὐτῶν, but some of them (i.e. the Greeks) 
also. ἔσωσαν, from σώζω. ἐντὸς αὐτῶν, within their army or 
line. 

ὃ 5. Τισσαφέρνους, cf. Κύρου LIX. § 13. eis τὸ πρόσθεν, for- 
ward. πλησιαίτατος from πλησίον : note the formation. πέμ- 
moev . .. ἴοιεν, whether they should send . . . or go; direct discourse, 


is a a ; 
shall we send... orgo?” the subjunctive of deliberation ; observe the 
change from direct to indirect discourse. ἀρήξοντες : tense ? 


2. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. A verb followed by two or more subjects frequently agrees with 
the nearer in number. 
Ὧν An adjective modifying two or more substantives may be singular 
when. one person or thing is especially held in mind by the writer 
, . . . . ’ 
3. πλησίον and φίλος show irregularities of comparison. 


ry. . . ᾿ ᾿ 5 
4. lhe subjunctive of deliberation may become optative in the indi- 
rect discourse after a secondary tense. 


3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


The adverb dj... . . H,. 857-868. 6. 207-211. 
Subjunctive of deliberation . H. 866, 3. G. 256. 


Modes in result clauses . . H. 925-927. 6. 237, 238 


4, VOCABULARY. 


> ,“ 
. ἀπο-τέμνω, cut off. 8. ἐντός, within. 
ava-AauBavw, take up to or . Kupetos, of Cyrus. 
with one’s self. . ἡ παλλακίς, mistress 
- ἀντιττάττω, draw up against. . σοφός, wise, accomplished. 


. ἀρήγω, aid, assist. . τὸ στρατόπεδον, camp. 

. γυμνός͵ lightly clad. . στρέφω, turn. 
εἰσ-πίπτω, fall info. . co fw, save. 

. ἔνθεν, thence ; whence. 








LESSON LXX. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) “Apa δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾷ συνελθόντες of στρατηγοὶ ἐθαύ- 
μαζον ὅτι Κῦρος οὔτε ἄλλον πέμποι λέξοντα ὅ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν οὔτε αὐτὸς φαίνοιτο. 
(0) Ἐπεὶ δὲ τετελεύτηκεν. ἀπαγγέλλετε ᾿Αριαίῳ ὅτι ἡμεῖς νικῶμέν τε βασιλέᾶ 
καὶ ὡς ὁρᾶτε οὐδεὶς ἔτι ἡμῖν μάχεται. (c) Καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐβουλεύοντο εἰ αὐτοῦ 
μείναντες τὰ σκευοφόρα ἐνταῦθα ἄγοιντο ἢ ἀπίοιεν ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον. 
(4) Οὗτος γὰρ πρῶτον οὐκ ἔφυγεν. ἀλλὰ διήλασε παρὰ τὸν ποταμὸν κατὰ 
τοὺς Ἕλληνας " διελαύνων δὲ κατέκανε μὲν οὐδένα, διαστάντες δὲ οἱ Ἕλληνες 
ἔπαιον καὶ ἠκόντιζον αὐτοὺς καὶ ἐτόξευον. 

2. Translate: (a) They deliberated whether they should take up 
those who had again fled or fall upon the camp and cut off those (who 
were) stationed there on guard. (Ὁ) This was the end of that day. 
(c) She was said to be a beautiful and accomplished woman ; wherefore 
those (who were) drawn up to aid her did not flee, but saved her and all 
her property. (d) When the brave soldiers wheeled (= turned) in that 
direction to receive the king, he did not lead against them, but fled to 
the station from which he had set out. (¢) But when they saw-in- 
advance the scythe-bearing chariots, they did not fear, but opened their 
line (i.e. stood apart). 

3. The review of the words in the List of first occurrences numbered 
831-921. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The agreement of the verb; irregularities. 2. Agreement of the 
adjective ; irregularities. 3. Familiar words suggested by the Vocabu- 
lary. 4. Principal parts of the new verbs in the Vocabulary. 5. The 
changes in the theme vowel of στρέφω in the different tense systems. 
6. The principles in the Grammar Lesson. 7. of μετὰ ᾿Αριαίου, ᾿Αριαῖος 
καὶ of σὺν αὐτῷ. 8. Comparison of πλησίον and φίλος. 9. Subjunctive 
of deliberation ; the same in the indirect discourse. 











INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


LESSON LXXI. 
ANABASIS I. x. 7-12. 


1. NOTES. 


§ 7. Ἕλληνας : here with the force of an adjective. 
of. LXV. § 6. 


ὃ 8. ὡς μεῖον ἔχων ἀπ-ηλλάγῃ, when he withdrew, having less, 7. 6. the 
worst of it; μεῖον is comparative of μῖκρός. τὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων, in 
apposition with στρατόπεδον. 


Karexave . 


ὃ 9. ἀνα-πτύσσειν τὸ κέρας: to bend or wheel the wing around; thus 


the army would be brou ht to face the enemy, while its rear rested on 
the river. 


ὃ 10. καὶ δὴ βασιλεύς. the king already also. 


ὃ 11. ἐκ πλείονος ἢ τὸ πρόσθεν, from a greater distance than before : 
they did not wait for the Greeks to come so near as they had before. 
τὸ πρόσθεν, adverbial accusative. 


§12. πεζοί: partitive apposition with of ἀμφὶ βασιλέᾷ. ἱππέων: 
cf. χόρτου XLIX. 810. ὥστε... μὴ γιγνώσκειν, so that [the Greeks] 

. what was being done. ἄετόν τινα κτὲ, a kind of eagle, outstretched 
(Ὁ. 6. with wings outstretched) wpon a shield, on the top of a (spear) shaft. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Principal parts of φεύγω, 
ἐλαύνω, καίνω, iornut, raiw, 
ἀλλάττω. στρέφω, ἱκνέομαι, 
δέδοικα, κόπτω. 
2. Comparison of κακός, μῖκρός, 
ὀλίγος, πολύς, καλός. . H. 254. 


3. Indirect discourse. . _ . {Η. 928-930, 932. ) 6 
( 934, 937. 





LESSON LXXI. 


3. VOCABULARY. 


ὁ δετός, eagle. 10. παρ-αμείβω, mid., change a 
ἀμφοτέρωθεν, from or on both battle-line or order. 
sides. 11. παρα-τάττω, draw up or ar- 
ἀνα-πτύσσω, fold up; open range beside. 
out (hence, to deploy the 12. ἡ πέλτη, light (crescent- 
wings of an army to meet JSormed) shield. 
any new attack of the 13. περι-πτύσσω, fold about, en- 
enemy. fold, surround. 
. ἀνα-τείνω, stretch up or out, 4. προσ-άγω, lead against, atiack. 
extend. . τὸ σημεῖον, sign, standard. 
ἀπ-αλλάττω, change away, . σύντ-ειμι, go with, come to- 
withdraw, come off from gether. 
an encounter. . ἡ ovv-odos, coming together, 
αὖθις, again. encounter. [in with. 
ἐπι-διώκω, pursue. . συν-τυγχάνω, happen or fall 
ὁ λόφος, hill. . τὸ σχῆμα, Sorm, shape. 
. ὁμοῦ, together. . φρόνιμος, sagacious. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1, Translate : (a) ’Emei δὲ καὶ ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἐχώρουν οἱ Ἕλληνες, οἱ ἱπ- 
πεῖς λιπόντες τὸν λόφον ἀπηλλάγησαν: ἦν δ᾽ ὁ λόφος Wirds τῶν ἱππέων. 
(Ὁ) Μετὰ τὴν πρώτην σύνοδον συνήεσαν πάλιν παραμειψάμενοι εἰς τὸ μάν 
σχῆμα τοῖς Ἕλλησιν. (c) ὃ δὲ δὴ ἔγραψα ὅτι βασιλεὺς ἐξεπλάγη τῇ συνόδῳ, 
τῷδε δῆλον ἦν- τῇ μὲν γὰρ πρόσθεν ἡμέρᾷ πέμπων τὰ ὅπλα αὑτῳ διδέναι ἐκέ- 
λευε. τότε δὲ ἀγγέλους καὶ ἑρμῃνέᾶς ἔπεμψε περὶ σπονδῶν. (4) Δριδρὰς a 
τῆς ὁδοῦ ἣν ἦλθον ἐξ ᾿Εφέσου τῆς ᾿Ιωνίᾶς μέχρι τῆς μάχης σταθμοὶ τρεῖς καὶ 
ἐνενήκοντα, παρασάγγαι πέντε καὶ τριάκοντα καὶ πεντακόσιοι, στάδιοι πεντή- 
κοντα καὶ ἑξακισχίλιοι καὶ μύριοι" ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς μάχης ἐλέγοντο εἶναι εἰς Βαβυ- 
λῶνα στάδιοι ἑξήκοντα καὶ τριάκόσιοι. 

2. Translate: (a) The standard of the enemy was supposed to be a 
bronze eagle, having its wings raised, as-if about to fly. (>) W e shall 
pursue them, if we are able, as far as the so-called wall of Media. 
(-) And when he heard the watch-word passing a second-time (adv. acc.) 
through the army, he asked what the noise was. (4) A rumor spread 
(went) through the army that the march was to be against the king. 

















ee οκὐσωσ, 5. σον. ,...ωβ.....ὄ προς τον 


ns 





224 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


(ὁ) They put the river in their rear, fearing lest the enemy might sur- 
round them and cut them down. 


3. Review of words numbered 922-988 in the List of Jirst occurrences. 


5. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Familiar words suggested by the Vocabulary. 2. Euphonic prin- 
ciples illustrated in the principal parts of the verbs in the Grammar 
Lesson. 3. Summary of the principles of the indirect discourse. 
4. Optativesin§ 9. 5. Analysis of the participles in §§ 9, 10. 





LESSON LXXII. 


ANABASIS I. x. 13-19, 


1. NOTES. 
ὃ 13, ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν, some in one direction, others in another. 
τέλος : cf. LXV. § 6. 


ὃ 15. ἀνὰ κράτος, cf. LVII. § 1. σχέδον. . . ἦν, about the time 
this took place. 


§ 16. θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα, grounding their arms sof. L. 814. ἤδε- 


σαν : from οἶδα. 


§ 17. ἄγοιντο, ς΄. πέμποιεν LXX. 8 5. 


ὃ 18, ciriov ἣ ποτόν, meat or drink. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Principal parts of λείπω, ἀγγέλλω 

δύω, τίθημι trate. φαένω, οἶδα, 

θνήσκω, διώκω, μένω. 
2. The infinitive construction with 

adjectives or nouns . . . . H. 955. G. 261. 
3. The infinitive construction with 


eee ao , τ 953,955. G. 266, 274. 











LESSON LXXII. 


3. VOCABULARY. 


ἄδειπνος, -ov, without dinner. 8. δύω, enter. 

ἀθρόος, in a body or mass. 9. ἡ ἔνδεια, want, need. 

ἄλλοθεν, from or in a differ- 10. ὁ ἥλιος, sun. 
ent direction. [up. 11. οὐδαμοῦ, nowhere. 

ava βιβάζω, lead up, make go 12. mords. drinkable, drink. 

5. ἀνα- παύω, mid., stop and re- 13. προ-ελαύνω, ride forward. 

gain breath or strength. 14. τὸ σϊτίον, food. 

ἀν-άριστος, -ov, without break- 15. σφοδρός. vehement, violent, ex- 
fast. [ing meal. cessive. 

ὁ δορπηστός, time of the even- 16. ψιλόω, make bare, desert. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. Translate: (a) Πρὶν δὲ τόξευμα ἐξικνεῖσθαι ἐκκλίνουσι of βάρβαροι 
καὶ ὁ λόφος ἐψτλώθη. () Ἥσθημεν δὴ πάντες. ὁρῶντες ἀμ τοῦ ὄδημεναν 
ἡλίου λαμπρότητα καὶ τῶν νεφελῶν. (:) Ἐντεῦθεν ἐπεὶ 6 ὅλων stare, ὅ 
Θρᾷξ ἔχων τούς τε ἱππέᾶς τοὺς μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ εἰς τετταράτοντα om τῶν μαζῆν 
Θρᾳκῶν ὡς τριάκοσίους ηὐτομόλησε πρὸς βασιλέᾷ᾽ κλδαρχον δὲ et ἄλλοις 
ἡγεῖτο κατὰ τὰ δόξαντα, οἱ δ᾽ εἵποντο καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται εἰς τὸν πρῶνον ore 
μὸν παρὰ "Ἀριαῖον καὶ τὴν ἐκείνου στρατιᾶν ἀμφὶ pene σιράῤερ ἢ καὶ ” 
τάξει θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα συνῆλθον οἱ Θμᾷκες καὶ τὸ πολὺ τῶν Leena? clues. nye 
"Aptaiov” κιὶ συνέθεντο οἵ τε Ἕλληνες καὶ ὁ ᾿Αριαῖος καὶ τῶν σὺν αὐτῷ oi 
κράτιστοι μήτε προδώσειν ἀλλήλους σύμμαχοί τε ἔσεσθαι. 

2. Translate: (a) Cyrus, annoyed and grieved by these things, sent 
for Clearchus: but he refused to go; without the knowledge of the 
soldiers, however, he sent a messenger to him and told him not to fear. 
(b) We shall not lead our soldiers up those difficult hills, but permit 
them to stop when they have pursued the enemy and made the plain 
wholly bare. (ὁ) He did not know whether he should first pause and 
then enter the tent, or go in immediately. (d) If the enemy had found 
the meat and drink hidden in the camp of Cyrus and plundered it, great 
and excessive need would have fallen upon all with him. 


3. Review of the words numbered 989-1117 in the List of first 


occurrences. 
15 





SEARO ee eR Uy ea RE TAR i SNR ee et 





INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


5. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. ἄλλο: ἄλλοθεν. 2. τίθημι τὰ ὅπλα 3. Subjunctive of delibera- 
tion in indirect discourse. 4. The grammatical principles illustrated in 
No. 1, Grammar Lesson. 5. Cunstruction of ἱππέων and τέλος § 13. 
6. Inflection of ἔστησαν ὃ 16. 7. The ‘optatives in §§ 16-18. 
8. Inflection and analysis of ἐφάνη § 19. 


6. REVIEW. 


It is of great importance to review the ninth and tenth chapters. 
This can be done successfully if great care is taken (a) to understand 
the translation correctly ; (ὁ) to grasp the meaning of each of the new 
words in these two chapters; (c) to study the more complicated uses 
of modes and tenses illustrated in the ninth chapter; and (d) to pick out, 
classify, and tabulate the instances of conditional clauses in both direct 
and indirect discourse. Follow in general the plan of Review adopted 


in Lessons X, and XX. 











THE FIRST BOOK 


OF 


XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. 


CHAPTER 1. 


When Darius was at the point of death, he desired his sons Artaxerxes 
and Cyrus to be summoned to him (1). The former shortly after 
becomes king, and the latter, during his stay at court, is accused of 
plotting against the new king (2,3). Upon returning to his pro- 
vince, Cyrus nurses his resentment against his accusers and against 
the king, who had been upon the point of putting him to death, 
and decides to raise an army in secret in order to thrust Artaxerxes 
from the throne (4). He summons his several commanders to col- 
lect Spartan mercenaries, as if to subdue his enemy Tissaphernes and 
to champion the exiles of Miletus (5-8). Through the aid of Clear- 
chus, he raises a second army and stations it in the Thracian Cher- 
sonese (9). A third army, under the command of Aristippus, he 
secretes in Thessaly (10). A fourth, with Proxenus as general, he 
prepares as if for a campaign against the Pisidians, and other generals 
are placed in command of smaller forces, ready to come to aid him 
in the war against Tissaphernes, which serves as a blind to conceal 
from the king the true intentions of his brother against him (11). 


1. Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, 
πρεσβύτερος μὲν ᾿Αρταξέρξης, νεώτερος δὲ Κῦρος. 
/ 9 \ 4 > ’ “A \ ε ’ \ ~ 
᾿ἐπεὶ δὲ ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος καὶ ὑπώπτευε τελευτὴν τοῦ 
. Οὔ ᾿ , N “A Φ , a ε 
βίου, ἐβούλετο τὼ παῖδε ἀμφοτέρω παρεῖναι. 2. ὁ 
] A 5 , 4 Ἂν ~ de 
μὲν οὖν πρεσβύτερος παρὼν ἐτύγχανε: Κῦρον δὲ 
μεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἧς αὐτὸν σατράπην 

















228 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Boox 1. 


> ‘4 A ‘ 4 > Ἁ > , , 
€TOLHOE, και OT PaTHnyov δὲ αὐυήτον ἀπέδειξε TAVT WV 


Ψ > ν΄ \ ‘a , > 4 > / 
ὅσοι εἰς Καστωλοῦ πεδίον ἀθροίζονται. ἀναβαίνει 
οὖν ὁ Κῦρος λαβὼν Τισσαφέρνην ὡς φίλον, καὶ τῶν 
ἜΧλ 1D vy ε Nir =e 5 B ’ » 

ἤνων ἔχων ὁπλίτας ἀνέβη τριακοσίους, ἄρχοντα 


δὲ αὐτῶν Ξενίαν Παρράσιον. 3. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐτελεύτησε 
Δαρεῖος καὶ κατέστη εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν ᾿Αρταξέρξης, 
Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφὸν 
ὡς ἐπιβουλεύίοι αὐτῷ. ὁ δὲ πείθεται καὶ συλλαμβάνει 
Κῦρον ὡς ἀποκτενῶν: ἡ δὲ μήτηρ ἐξαιτησαμένη αὐτὸν 
4. ὁ δ᾽ ὡς ἀπῆλθε 


ὃ ’ ‘ 5 , , bid , 
κινδυνεύσας καὶ ἀτιμασθείς, βουλεύεται ὅπως μήποτε 


> , ’ > Ἁ Ν > », 
ἀποπέμπει πάλιν ἐπὶ τὴν ἀρχήν. 


y ~ ~ 
ἔτι ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ, ἀλλά, ἣν δύνηται, βασιλεύσει 
? , nw 
avr ἐκείνου. Παρύσατις per δὴ ἡ μήτηρ ὑπῆρχε 
“~ “ἢ A ww“ 
τῷ Κύρῳ, φιλοῦσα αὐτὸν μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν βασιλεύοντα 
3 ’ “ 
Αρταξέρξην. 


, A > ‘ , ν % Ν 5 ’ 
λέως Τρος QUTOV TAVTAS Οὐτω διατιθεὶς ΑἸΤΕΤΤΕΜΊΤΕΤΟ 


5. ὅστις δ᾽ ἀφικνοῖτο τῶν παρὰ βασι 


ὥστε αὐτῷ μᾶλλον φίλους εἶναι ἢ βασιλεῖ. καὶ τῶν 
3 ε “~ Ἁ ’ 3 “ ε ~ 
tap ἑαυτῷ δὲ βαρβάρων ἐπεμελεῖτο ws πολεμεῖν τε 
ἱκανοὶ εἴησαν καὶ εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν αὐτῷ. 6. τὴν 
’ 
δὲ “Ἑλληνικὴν δύναμιν ἤθροιζεν ὡς μάλιστα ἐδύνατο 
ἐπικρυπτόμενος, ὅπως ὅτι ἀπαρασκευότατον λάβοι 
, - > 5 “ A ’ ε ’ 
βασιλέα. ὧδε οὖν ἐποιεῖτο τὴν συλλογήν. ὁπόσας 
> Ν 5» ~ ’ , ω 
εἶχε φυλακὰς ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι παρήγγειλε τοῖς φρουρ- 
’ ε ’ , » , 
ἄρχοις ἑκάστοις λαμβάνειν ἄνδρας Πελοποννησίους 
- ’ A ’ ε 9 , 
οτι πλείστους Kat βελτίστους, ws ἐπιβουλεύοντος 
Τισσαφέρνους ταῖς πόλεσι. καὶ γὰρ ἦσαν αἱ Ἴωνι- 
A ’ ’ Ν x ~ > 4 
καὶ πόλεις Τισσαφέρνους τὸ ἀρχαῖον ἐκ βασιλέως 
δεδομέναι, τότε δὲ ἀφειστήκεσαν πρὸς Κῦρον πᾶσαι 


πλὴν Μιλήτου" 7. ἐν. Μιλήτῳ δὲ Τισσαφέρνης 


/ 





Boox 1. CHAPTER I. 3-10. 229 


, A > Ν “~ ’ 9 
προαισθόμενος τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα βουλευομένους, ἀπο- 
στῆναι πρὸς Κῦρον, τοὺς μὲν ἀπέκτεινε τοὺς ὃ 
ἐξέβαλεν. 6 δὲ Κῦρος ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας 

, , > ΄ - ’ A A ~ 
συλλέξας στράτευμα ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον Kat κατὰ γὴν 
καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν καὶ ἐπειρᾶτο κατάγειν τοὺς ἐκπε- 

¢ A 9 > » , > “ wn ~ 
TTWKOTAS. καὶ αὕτη αὖ ἄλλη πρόφασις ἣν αὐτῷ TOU 
3 ’ , Ν Ν ’ ’ 
ἀθροίζειν στράτευμα. 8. πρὸς δὲ βασιλέα πέμπων 
ἠξίου ἀδελφὸς ὧν αὐτοῦ δοθῆναι οἷ ταύτας τὰς πόλεις 
A Δ , » "Phe, . £ , 
μᾶλλον ἢἣ Τισσαφέρνην ἄρχειν αὐτῶν, καὶ ἢ μήτηρ 
“Ὁ “A Ἁ Ν 
συνέπραττεν αὐτῳ ταῦτα ὥστε βασιλεὺς τὴν μὲν 
\ ε ἃ > \ > > ’ ’ 
πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἐπιβουλὴν οὐκ ἠσθάνετο, Τισσαφέρνει 
΄“ ’ 
δὲ ἐνόμιζε πολεμοῦντα αὐτὸν ἀμφὶ τὰ στρατεύματα 
᾿ σ΄ “~ μὴ 
δαπανᾶν" ὥστε οὐδὲν ἤχθετο αὐτῶν πολεμούντων. καὶ 
γὰρ ὁ Κῦρος ἀπέπεμπε τοὺς γιγνομένους δασμοὺς 
“ “ e 4 
βασιλεῖ ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ὧν Τισσαφέρνους ἐτύγχανεν 
» » \ , > ~ 4 > 
ἔχων. 9. ἄλλο δὲ στράτευμα αὐτῷ συνελέγετο ἐν 

4 ~A > > , > ’ ¢ \ 4 
Χερρονήσῳ τῇ Kat ἀντιπέρας ᾿Αβύδου τόνδε Tov τρό- 
πον. Κλέαρχος Λακεδαιμόνιος φυγὰς Hv" τούτῳ συγ- 

’ ε “~ > ’ > A 4 , > “~ 
γενόμενος ὁ Κῦρος ἤἠγάσθη τε αὐτὸν καὶ δίδωσιν αὐτῷ 
, 4 ε A \ Ἁ ’ , 
μυρίους δαρεικούς. ὁ δὲ λαβὼν τὸ χρυσίον στράτευμα 
> ” , Ν ’ > 
συνέλεξεν ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν χρημάτων καὶ ἐπολέμει EK 
r ’ c ’ ~ Ἁ ΄᾿ ε A ε ’ 
Χερρονήσου ὁρμώμενος τοῖς Θρᾳξὶ τοῖς ὑπὲρ ᾿Ελλή- 
> A \ 3 ’ oe " bf ἃ 
σποντον οἰκοῦσι καὶ ὠφέλει τοὺς Ελληνας" ὠστε Kat 
, , ' Ἂν > Ἁ Ν σι 
χρήματα συνεβάλλοντο αὐτῷ εἰς τὴν τροφὴν των στρα- 

a ε ¢n . ΄ ε - - δ" 
τιωτων αἱ Ἐλλησποντιακαὶ πόλεις ἐκουσαι. τοῦτο 

> ~ Ἁ , 

av οὕτω τρεφόμενον ἐλάνθανεν αὐτῷ TO στράτευμα. 
> ΄ 

10. ᾿Αρίστιππος δὲ ὁ Θετταλὸς ἕένος ὧν ἐτύγχανεν 

αὐτῷ, καὶ πιεζόμενος ὕπο τῶν οἴκοι ἀντιστασιωτῶν 


¥ ‘ 4 - ‘ ee ee ᾿ ὃ We 
EPX ETAL TpPos TOV Kupov και QALTEL AUVTOV ELS ἰσχι ιους 




















230 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Βοοκ I. 


-- - 9 
ξένους καὶ τριῶν μηνῶν μισθόν, ὡς οὕτω περιγενόμενος 
ἂν τῶν ἀντιστασιωτῶν. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος δίδωσιν αὐτῷ εἰς 
τετρακισχιλίους καὶ ἐξ μηνῶν μισθόν, καὶ δεῖται αὐτοῦ 
μὴ πρόσθεν καταλῦσαι πρὸς τοὺς ἀντιστασιώτας πρὶν 
“λ ὦ ’ ν \ > = , 
av avTw συμβουλεύσηται. οὕτω δὲ ad τὸ ἐν Θετταλίᾳ 
» , > ~ , , , 
ἐλάνθανεν αὐτῷ τρεφόμενον στράτευμα. 11. Πρό- 
ξενον δὲ τὸν Βοιώτιον ἕένον ὄντα ἐκέλευσε λαβόντα 
» ν 4 ’ ε 3 ’ 
ἄνδρας ὅτι πλείστους παραγενέσθαι, ὡς; εἰς Πισίδας 
βουλόμενος στρατεύεσθαι, ὡς πράγματα παρεχόντων 

“»"» δῶ a δ ἴων , Ὁ ’ A A 
των Ilovdwv τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χώρᾳ. Σοφαίνετον δὲ τὸν 
’ \ τ' ’ \ > ’ id » 
Στυμφάλιον καὶ Σωκράτην τὸν ᾿Αχαιόν, ξένους ὄντας 
’ , ~ 
καὶ τούτους, ἐκέλευσεν ἄνδρας λαβόντας ἐλθεῖν ὅτι 
’ ε 4 r , 1 ~ 
πλείστους, ὡς πολεμήσων Τισσαφέρνει σὺν τοῖς φυ- 
, mn \ © 
yaou τοις Μιλησίων. καὶ ἐποίουν οὕτως οὗτοι. 





CHAPTER II. 


As soon as it seemed that his plot was ready to be put into execution, 
which Tissarphernes had foreseen and reported to the king, Cyrus 
collects his forces and sets out from Sardis, as if against the people of 
the Pisidians (1-5). He proceeds through Lydia (5) and then 
through Phrygia, where new forces join him (6). At the city of 
Celaenae, a new supply of auxiliaries arrives and a review of the 
forces is made (7-9). When they arrive at the plain of Cajyster, 
the soldiers become clamorous for their pay for the three months of 
their service (10,11). This Cyrus gives them, being enabled to do 
so by the pecuniary assistance lent by the queen of the Cilicians, who 
had come to him (12). They then reach Thymbrium, pass the 
fountain of Midas (13), and make their way into Lycaonia (19), at 
which point the queen departs for Cilicia (20), which country Cyrus 
and his army then enter (21-25). At Tarsus he meets Syennesis, 
king of the Cilicians (26, 27). 





Book 1] CHAPTERS I. 11 — II. 1-4. 231 


1. ᾿Επεὶ δ᾽ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ ἤδη πορεύεσθαι ἄνω, τὴν 
μὲν πρόφασιν ἐποιεῖτο ὡς Πισίδας βουλόμενος ἐκβα- 
λεῖν παντάπασιν ἐκ τῆς χώρας: καὶ ἀθροίζει ὡς ἐπὶ 
τούτους τό τε βαρβαρικὸν καὶ τὸ “Ἑλληνικόν. ἐνταῦ- 
θα καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ τε Κλεάρχῳ λαβόντι ἥκειν 
ὅσον ἦν αὐτῷ στράτευμα, καὶ τῷ ᾿Αριστίππῳ συναλ- 


» , Ν ε Ν a 
λαγέντι πρὸς τοὺς οἴκοι ἀποπέμψαι πρὸ: ἑαυτὸν ὃ 


ο ’ Ν pence , A > (ὃ ἃ 9 “ 
εἶχε στρατευμα' Kal Reva τῳ ApKadi, ὃς αὕτῳ 


~ ~ , ~ 7 
προειστήκει TOU ἐν Tals πόλεσι ξενικοῦ, ἥκειν παρ- 
’ , » Ἁ ε , e A 
αγγέλλει λαβόντα τοὺς ἄλλους πλὴν ὁπόσοι ἱκανοὶ 
> 4 
ἦσαν Tas ἀκροπόλεις φυλάττειν. 2. ἐκάλεσε δὲ 
Ἂ ἴω A Ν ld 
kai τοὺς Μίλητον πολιορκοῦντας, καὶ τοὺς φυγάδας 
ἐκέλευσε σὺν αὐτῷ στρατεύεσθαι, ὑποσχόμενος αὐτοῖς, 
3 “A , 3 9 A > , A / 
εἰ καλῶς καταπράξειεν ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἐστρατεύετο, μὴ πρόσθεν 
» λ 
παύσεσθαι πρὶν αὐτοὺς καταγάγοι οἴκαδε. οἱ δὲ 
ε , > , > , Ν > ee Ν , 
ἡδέως ἐπείθοντο: ἐπίστευον yap αὐτῷ: καὶ λαβόντες 
τὰ ὅπλα παρῆσαν εἰς Σάρδεις. 3. Ξενίας μὲν δὴ 
\ > “A , Χ , > τ’ ὃ 
τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων λαβὼν παρεγένετο εἰς Σάρδεις 
ε ’ > , , de »“-ὠἅΙ » 
δπλίτας εἰς τετρακισχιλίους, Πρόξενος δὲ παρὴν ἔχων 
, A ~ 
ὁπλίτας μὲν εἰς πεντακοσίους Kal χιλίους, γυμνῆτας 
δὲ πεντακοσίους, Σοφαίνετος δὲ ὁ Στυμφάλιος ὁπλίτας 
» ’ Sy , \ ε 3 A ε ’ » 
ἔχων χιλίου:, Σωκράτης δὲ ὁ ᾿Αχαιὸς ὁπλίτας ἔχων 
ὡς πεντακοσίους, Πασίων δὲ ὁ Μεγαρεὺς τριακοσίους 
’ \ A » 
μὲν ὁπλίτας, τριακοσίους δὲ πελταστὰς ἔχων παρε- 
΄ > a δ ΄, A > \ 
γένετο: ἦν δὲ καὶ οὗτος καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης τῶν ἀμφὶ 
ζω , 
Μίλητον στρατευομένων. 4. οὗτοι μὲν εἰς Σάρδεις 
- s \ , 7 
αὐτῷ ἀφίκοντο. Τισσαφέρνης δὲ κατανοήσας ταῦτα, 
\ , - , > ἃ. ἃ “κ aa ‘ 
Kal μείζονα ἡγησάμενος εἶναι ἢ ws ἐπὶ Πισίδας τὴν 
ε ΄ - ’ ’ 
παρασκευήν, πορεύεται ὡς βασιλέα ἣ ἐδύνατο τάχιστα 








SS SS Eee Ἐς ὍΣ 


i} 
Η 


ἢ 
ἢ 
ἢ 
ἢ 
? 


Ὗ 


i σαι ς Σς Στ: 


So πὰς 


———— 








232 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Book 1. 


e 4 » ε ’ A A 
ἱππέας ἔχων WS πεντακοσίους. 5. καὶ βασιλεὺς 
Ἁ ’ > \ » r ’ Ἀ 4 , 
μὲν δή, ἐπεὶ ἤκουσε Τισσαφέρνους τὸν Κύρου στόλον, 

ἀντιπαρεσκευάζετο. 
Κῦρος δὲ ἔχων ovs εἴρηκα ὡρμᾶτο ἀπὸ Σάρδεων" 
+ ἃ , 5 - ? ‘ A 
καὶ ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Λυδίας σταθμοὺς τρεις παρα- 
σάγγας εἴκοσι καὶ δύο ἐπὶ τὸν Μαίανδρον ποταμόν. 
, Ἀ > , ’ , 4 5 lol ε Ἀ 
τούτου τὸ εὖρος δύο πλέθρα: γέφυρα δὲ ἐπὴν ἑπτὰ 
“ οι. ᾿ 
ἐζευγμένη πλοίοις. 6. τουτον διαβὰς ἐξελαύνει διὰ 
Φρυγίας σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας ὀκτὼ εἰς Κο- 
λοσσάς, πόλιν οἰκουμένην, εὐδαίμονα καὶ μεγάλην. 
> ww » e , ε ’ , 5 ’ ε 
ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας ἑπτά: καὶ ἧκε Μένων ὁ Θεττα- 
λὸς ὁπλίτας ἔχων χιλίους καὶ πελταστὰς πεντακοσίους, 
Δόλοπας καὶ Αἰνιᾶνας καὶ Ὀλυνθίους. 7. ἐντεῦθεν 
ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας εἴκοσιν εἰς 
, A / ’ > ’ ’ὔ 
Κελαινάς, τῆς Φρυγίας πόλιν οἰκουμένην, μεγάλην 
καὶ εὐδαίμονα. ἐνταῦθα Κύρῳ βασίλεια ἣν καὶ -- 
μονα. ρῳ βασίλεια ἣν καὶ παρά 
δεισος μέγας ἀγρίων θηρίων πλήρης, ἃ ἐκεῖνος €67,- 
ρευεν ἀπὸ ἵππου, ὁπότε γυμνάσαι βούλοιτο ἑαυτόν 
΄ ~ , 
τε Kal TOUS ἵππους. διὰ μέσου δὲ τοῦ παραδείσου 
ΦΝ κα , ὃ ΗΒ ε δὲ Ν > re > 
pet ὁ Matavopos ποταμός: αἱ δὲ πηγαι αὕτου εἰσιν 
ἐκ τῶν βασιλείων: ῥεῖ δὲ καὶ διὰ τῆς Κελαινῶν 
/ » 
πόλεως. 8. ἔστι δὲ καὶ μεγάλου βασιλέως βασίλεια 
> A 3 ee ω i a , 
ἐν Kedawat; ἐρυμνὰ ἐπὶ ταῖς πηγαις Tov Μαρσύου 
ἥν αὶ “ ᾿ , A - Ξ 
ποτάμου ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει: ῥεῖ δὲ καὶ οὗτος διὰ 
τῆς πόλεως καὶ ἐμβάλλει εἰς τὸν Μαίανδρον: τοῦ δὲ 
Μαρσύου τὸ εὗρός ἐστιν εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε ποδῶν. 
“A > ~ 
ἐνταῦθα λέγεται ᾿Απόλλων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν νικήσας 
ϑις \ 
ἐρίζοντά οἱ περὶ σοφίας, καὶ τὸ δέρμα κρεμάσαι ἐν 
~ » [2 ε , Ν \ ~ ε 
τῳ ἄντρῳ ὅθεν αἱ πηγαί: διὰ δὲ τοῦτο ὁ ποταμὸς 








Βοοκ I.] CHAPTER II. 5-12. 233 


καλεῖται Μαρσύας. 9. ἐνταῦθα Ξέρξης, ὅτε ἐκ τῆς 
Ἑλλάδος ἡττηθεὶς τῇ μάχῃ ἀπεχώρει, λέγεται oiko- 
δομῆσαι ταῦτά τε τὰ βασίλεια καὶ τὴν Κελαινῶν ἀκρό- 
πολιν. ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινε Κῦρος ἡμέρας τριάκοντα" καὶ 
ἧκε Κλέαρχος ὁ Λακεδαιμόνιος φυγὰς ἔχων ὁπλίτας 
χιλίους καὶ πελταστὰς Θρᾷκας ὀκτακοσίους καὶ τοξό- 
τας Κρῆτας διακοσίους. ἅμα δὲ καὶ Σῶσις παρὴν ὃ 
Συρακούσιος ἔχων ὁπλίτας τριακοσίους, καὶ Σοφαί- 
νετος ὁ ᾿Αρκὰς ἔχων ὁπλίτας χιλίους. καὶ ἐνταῦθα 
Κῦρος ἐξέτασιν καὶ ἀριθμὸν τῶν ᾿Ἑλλήνων ἐποίησεν 
ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ, καὶ ἐγένοντο οἱ σύμπαντες: ὁπλῖται 
μὲν μύριοι καὶ χίλιοι, πελτασταὶ δὲ ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχι- 
λίους. 10. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρα- 
σάγγας δέκα εἰς Πέλτας, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. ἐνταῦθ᾽ 
ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας τρεῖς: ἐν αἷς Ξενίας ὁ ᾿Αρκὰς τὰ 
Λύκαια ἔθυσε καὶ ἀγῶνα ἔθηκε: τὰ δὲ ἄθλα ἦσαν 
στλεγγίδες χρυσαῖ: ἐθεώρει δὲ τὸν ἀγῶνα καὶ Κῦρος. 
ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας δώδεκα 
εἰς Κεράμων ἀγοράν. πόλιν οἰκουμένην, ἐσχάτην πρὸς 
τῇ Μυσίᾳ χώρᾳ. 11. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς 
τρεῖς παρασάγγας τριάκοντα εἰς Καὕὔστρου πεδίον, 
πόλιν οἰκουμένην. ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας πέντε: 
καὶ τοῖς στρατιώταις ὠφείλετο μισθὸς πλέον ἢ τριῶν 
μηνῶν, καὶ πολλάκις ἰόντες ἐπὶ τὰς θύρας ἀπήτουν. 
ὁ δὲ ἐλπίδας λέγων διῆγε καὶ δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος: 
οὐ γὰρ ἦν πρὸς τοῦ Κύρου τρόπου ἔχοντα μὴ ἀπο- 
διδόναι. 12. ἐνταῦθα ἀφικνεῖται ᾿Επύαξα ἡ Συεννέ- 
gis γυνὴ τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως παρὰ Κῦρον: καὶ 


ἐλέγετο Κύρῳ δοῦναι χρήματα πολλά. τῇ δ᾽ οὖν 





Το SNR SE rE AF 6s lene eae Se cae 











234 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. |Boox 1. 


στρατιᾷ τότε ἀπέδωκε Κῦρος μισθὸν τεττάρων μηνῶν. 
εἶχε δὲ 7 Κίλισσα φυλακὴν περὶ αὑτὴν Κίλικας καὶ 
Ασπενδίους: ἐλέγετο δὲ καὶ συγγενέσθαι Κῦρον τῇ 
Κιλίσσῃ. 18. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο 
παρασάγγας δέκα εἰς Θύμβριον, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. 
ἐνταῦθα ἦν παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν κρήνη ἡ Μίδου καλουμένη 
του Φρυγῶν βασιλέως, ἐφ᾽ ἧ λέγεται Μίδας τὸν Σάτυ- 
ρον θηρεῦσαι οἴνῳ κεράσας αὐτήν. 14. ἐντεῦθεν 
ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας δέκα εἰς Τυ- 
ριάειον, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας 
τρεις. καὶ λέγεται δεηθῆναι ἡ Κίλισσα Κύρου ἐπι- 

μ ‘ , a“ 

δεῖξαι τὸ στράτευμα αὑτῇ" βουλόμενος οὖν ἐπιδεῖξαι 
ἐξέτασιν ποιειται ἐν τῳ πεδίῳ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων καὶ τῶν 
βαρβάρων. 15. ἐκέλευσε δὲ τοὺς Ἕλληνας, ὡς 
νόμος αὐτοῖς εἰς μάχην, οὕτω ταχθῆναι καὶ στῆναι 
συντάξαι δ᾽ ἕκαστον τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ. ἐτάχθησαν νὰν 
ἐπὶ verrepen δ" δὲ τὸ μὲν δεξιὸν Μένων καὶ οἱ 
συν αὕτῳ, τὸ δὲ εὐώνυμον Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκεί 

τὸ δὲ μέσον οἱ ἄλλοι aaa 16. kak od 
ee ὃ 

ὁ Κυρος mpwrov μὲν τοὺς βαρβάρους: οἱ δὲ παρ- 
ἤλαυνον τεταγμένοι κατὰ ἴλας καὶ κατὰ τάξεις: εἶτα 
Θὲ τοὺς Ἕλληνας, παρελαύνων ἐφ᾽ ἅρματος καὶ ἡ Ki- 
λισσα ἐφ᾽ ἁρμαμάξης. εἶχον δὲ πάντες κράνη χαλκᾶ 
καὶ χιτῶνας φοινικοῦς καὶ κνημῖδας καὶ τὰς ἀσπίδας 
ἐκκεκαλυμμένας. 17. ἐπειδὴ δὲ πάντας παρήλασε, 
στήσας τὸ ἅρμα πρὸ τῆς φάλαγγος μέσης, πέμψας 
Πίγρητα τὸν ἑρμηνέα παρὰ τοὺς στρατηγοὺς τῶν 
Ελλήνων ἐκέλευσε προβαλέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα καὶ ἐπι. 


χωρῆσαι ὅλην τὴν φάλαγγα. οἱ δὲ ταῦτα προεῖπον 





Βοοκ 1.} CHAPTER II. 13-21. 35 


~ 4 Ν > ‘ > / , 
τοῖς στρατιώταις" καὶ ἐπεὶ ἐσάλπιγξε, προβαλόμενοι 
τὰ ὅπλα ἐπῇσαν. ἐκ δὲ τούτου θᾶττον προϊόντων 
σὺν κραυγῇ ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου δρόμος ἐγένετο τοῖς 

, ee Ν ’ ~ Ν , 
στρατιώταις ἐπὶ Tas σκηνάς. 18. των δὲ βαρβάρων 

, 4 Ν id ’ ¥ > \ “ ε 
φόβος πολύς, καὶ ἡ τε Κίλισσα ἔφυγεν ἐπὶ τὴς ἀρμα- 
μάξης καὶ οἱ ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς καταλιπόντες τὰ ὦνια 
ἔφυγον. οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες σὺν γέλωτι ἐπὶ τὰς σκηνὰς 
ἦλθον. ἡ δὲ Κίλισσα ἰδοῦσα τὴν λαμπρότητα καὶ 
4 , on ,ὕ > , ~ x 
τὴν τάξιν τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐθαύμασε. Kupos δὲ 
ἥσθη τὸν ἐκ τῶν “Ἑλλήνων εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους φόβον 
ἰδών. 19. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρα- 
σάγγας εἴκοσιν εἰς Ἰκόνιον, τῆς Φρυγίας πολιν 
ἐσχάτην. ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινε τρεῖ; ἡμέρας. ἐντευθεν 
ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Λυκαονίας σταθμοὺς πέντε παρα- 


σάγγας τριάκοντα. ταύτην τὴν χώραν ἐπέτρεψε διαρ- 
πάσαι τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ὡς πολεμίαν οὖσαν. 20. ἐντευ- 
~ Ἁ ’ὔ » Ν ΄ > 
θεν Κῦρος τὴν Κίλισσαν εἰς τὴν Κιλικίαν ἀποπέμπει 
ε ’ Ν ἴω 
τὴν ταχίστην ὁδόν: καὶ συνέπεμψεν αὐτῇ τοὺς στρα- 
’ a , > Ν 3 , ~ Ν Ν 
τιώτας ovs Μένων εἶχε καὶ αὐτόν. Kupos δὲ μετὰ 
τῶν ἄλλων ἐξελαύνει διὰ Καππαδοκίας σταθμοὺς 


ld ¥ Ν 3 
τέτταρας παρασαγγας εἰκοσι Kal πέντε εἰς Θόανα, 


’ » , , Ν 3 / > ~ 
πόλιν οἰκουμένην, μεγάλην Kat εὐδαίμονα. ἐνταῦθα 
ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς: ἐν ᾧ Κῦρος ἀπέκτεινεν ἄνδρα 
Πέρσην Μεγαφέρνην, φοινικιστὴν βασίλειον, καὶ 
ἕτερόν τινα τῶν ὑπάρχων δυνάστην, αἰτιασάμενος 
> ’ 7 A > ~ > - . 
ἐπιβουλεύειν αὑτῳ. 21. ἐντεῦθεν ἐπειρῶντο εἰσ- 
βάλλειν εἰς τὴν Κιλικίαν: ἡ δὲ εἰσβολὴ ἣν ὁδὸς 
ε Ν 5 ‘4 > ~ Ν 5 ’ 5 Ὁ“ 
ἁμαξιτὸς ὀρθία ἰσχυρῶς καὶ ἀμήχανος εἰσελθεῖν στρα- 

, » δ. ΟΝ ϑη Κ᾽ δὲ δ oe 
τεύματι, εἴ τις ἐκώλυεν. ἐλέγετο OE και Συέννεσις 





ae RR Sn ie ARR GSS oe SS eke ctl AF SRO cc 


ῃ 
ΠῚ! 
| 
val 
i: 
; 
q 
Ἶ 
ἦν. 
ἘΝΙ 
᾿ 
at 
| 
ba) 
ay 
qa 
i 
i 
4 
4 
ἐσ! 
ae 
if 
! 
7 
Ἵ 
: 
id 
Ϊ 


LT AE A πὐνοσοσοι 








36 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Boox 1. 


> \ - ¥ 

εἶναι ἐπὶ τῶν ἄκρων φυλάττων τὴν εἰσβολήν: διὸ 

¥ a , A 

ἐμειναν ἡμέραν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἧκεν 

¥ , 4 Ν ¥ τ' ’ Ν ¥ 

ἄγγελος λέγων ὅτι λελοιπὼς εἰ AVEVVETLS τὰ ἄκρα, 

> Ν » ” Ν , , Sa > 

ἐπεὶ ἥσθετο ὅτι τὸ Μένωνος στράτευμα ἤδη ἐν 

, ~ » - ψ , 

Κιλικίᾳ ἦν εἴσω τῶν ὀρέων, καὶ ὅτι τριήρεις ἤκουε 
’ » ae , ᾽ ’ Ὕ ~ ¥ 

περιπλεούσας am “Iwvias εἰς Κιλικίαν Tapwv ἔχοντα 

22. Κῦρος δ᾽ 

> ; OY A, Ν 3 3 ἈΝ ΄ \ 5 

οὖν ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος, καὶ εἶδε 

‘ ‘ e , ΄“ 

τὰς σκηνᾶς ov οἱ Κίλικες ἐφύλαττον. ἐντεῦθεν δὲ 

κατέβαινεν εἰς πεδίον μέγα καὶ καλόν, ἐπίρρυτον, καὶ 


Η͂ a , ‘ 5 A , 
Tas Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ αὐτοῦ Κυρου. 


δέ ὃ ὃ a ΄ Ν 3 , \ 
evOp@v παντοοαπων σύμπλεων καὶ ἀμπέλων: πολὺ 
δὲ καὶ σήσαμον καὶ μελίνην καὶ κέγχρον καὶ πυροὺς 
Ἁ ‘\ 4 4” > > Ν ’ > ‘\ \ 
καὶ κριθὰς φέρει. ὄρος δ᾽ αὐτὸ περιέχει ὀχυρὸν καὶ 
ὑψηλὸν πάντῃ ἐκ θαλάττης εἰς θάλατταν. 23. κατα- 
Ν A Ν 4 “A , » Ἁ ’ 
βὰς δὲ διὰ τούτου τοῦ πεδίου ἤλασε σταθμοὺς τέττα- 
ρας παρασάγγας πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν εἰς Ταρσούς, τῆς 
, a 
Κιλικίας πόλιν μεγάλην καὶ εὐδαίμονα. ἔνθα ἣν τὰ 
Συεννέσιος βασίλεια τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως: διὰ 
’ Ἁ ~ ’ ea Ν ’ w 
μέσου δὲ τῆς πόλεως ῥεῖ ποταμὸς Κύδνος ὄνομα, 
εὖρος δύο πλέθρων. 24. ταύτην τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον 
“~ Ν ΄, 
οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες μετὰ Συεννέσιος εἰς χωρίον ὀχυρὸν ἐπὶ 
Ν ¥ ‘ ε Ν “ ¥ » A Ἁ 
Ta Opn πλὴν οἱ τὰ καπηλεῖα ἔχοντες" ἔμειναν δὲ καὶ 
ε ἅ Ν θ ’ > “Ὁ > τ' ΄ 4 > 
Ol παρὰ τὴν θάλατταν οἰκοῦντες ἐν Σόλοις καὶ ἐν 
Ἰσσοῖς. 25. ᾿ΕἙπύαξα δὲ ἡ Συεννέσιος γυνὴ προ- 
’ 7 ’ ε ’ > ‘ > , > 
Tépa Κύρου πέντε ἡμέραις εἰς Ταρσοὺς αφίκετο: ἐν 
Ἁ ~ e ~ ”~ > , ~ > ‘ 4 4 , 
δὲ τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ὀρέων Τῇ εἰς τὸ πεδίον δύο λόχοι 
τοῦ Μένωνος στρατεύματος ἀπώλοντο- οἱ μὲν ἔφασαν 
αρπάξοντας τι κατακοπὴναι ὑπὸ τῶν Κιλίκων, οἱ δὲ 


’ ‘ , “ 
ὑπολειφθέντας καὶ οὐ δυναμένους εὑρεῖν τὸ ἄλλο στρά- 





Book 11} CHAPTERS 11. 22-27— IIT. 287 


τευμα οὐδὲ τὰς ὁδοὺς εἶτα πλανωμένους ἀπολέσθαι: 
ἦσαν δ᾽ οὖν οὗτοι ἑκατὸν ὁπλῖται. 26. οἱ ὃ ἄλλοι 
ἐπεὶ ἧκον, τήν τε πόλιν τοὺς Ταρσοὺς διήρπασαν, 
διὰ τὸν ὄλεθρον τῶν συστρατιωτῶν ὀργιζόμενοι, καὶ 
τὰ βασίλεια τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ. Κῦρος δὲ ἐπεὶ εἰσήλασεν 
εἰς τὴν πόλιν, μετεπέμπετο τὸν Συέννεσιν πρὸς meter 
ὁ δ᾽ οὔτε πρότερον οὐδενί πω κρείττονι ἑαυτοῦ εἰς 
χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν ἔφη οὔτε τότε Κύρῳ ἰέναι ἤθελε, πρὶν 
ἡ γυνὴ αὐτὸν ἔπεισε καὶ πίστεις ἔλαβε. 27. μετὰ 
δὲ ταῦτα ἐπεὶ συνεγένοντο ἀλλήλοις, Συέννεσις μὲν 
ἔδωκε Κύρῳ χρήματα πολλὰ εἰς τὴν στρατιάν, Κῦρος 
δὲ ἐκείνῳ δῶρα ἃ νομίζεται παρὰ βασιλεῖ τίμια, ἵπθδὸν 
χρυσοχάλινον καὶ στρεπτὸν χρυσοῦν καὶ ψέλια καὶ 
ἀκινάκην χρυσοῦν καὶ στολὴν Περσικήν, καὶ τὴν 
χώραν μηκέτι διαρπάζεσθαι" τὰ δὲ ἡρπασμένα ἀνδρά- 
ποδα, ἦν που ἐντυγχάνωσιν, ἀπολαμβάνειν. 





CHAPTER III. 


While the army delays at Tarsus, the soldiers begin to suspect the de- 
signs of Cyrus and refuse to go any farther (1). Clearchus, at the 
risk of his life, but in vain, tries to force his men; he then moves 
them to obedience by means of tears and a shrewd address in which 
he recites the causes of his grief over their disobedience (2-4), pre- 
tending, however, absolute devotion to them, whatever they may do, 
and asserting his willingness to go and suffer with them whatever 
may be necessary (5, 6). These words win the applause of the 
soldiers and two thousand, serving under other generals, desert them 
and join his standard (7). Cyrus is perplexed, but is secretly 
reassured by Clearchus (8), who, taking his soldiers apart, again 
addresses them, hinting significantly at the difficulties which would 











238 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Book 1. 


beset their separation from Cyrus (9-12). Others follow in the 
same strain (13) one speaker however takes the opposite side (prob- 
ably inspired by Clearchus), urging that they return to Greece as 
quickly as possible, even demanding that Cyrus furnish them with 
ships for the purpose (14). Upon this, Clearchus rises, disclaiming 
any willingness to further such a plan as that (15), and exhibiting 
the perils which would assail them if they started homeward (16, 17). 
Finally it is decided that they ask Cyrus what his plans are (18, 19). 
He answers them that he intends to punish Abrocuomas, and gives 
them, upon their demanding it, half again as much pay ; so that they 
follow him, although still suspecting his purposes (20, 21). : 


Samy ~ ~ 
1. Ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινε Κῦρος καὶ ἡ στρατιὰ ἡμέρας 
¥ ΄ κ᾿ “- 
εἰκοσιν: Ol γὰρ στρατιωται οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι τοῦ 
,ὕ : ε , Ν "ὃ ΟΝ / >7 
πρόσω" ὑπώπτευον yap ἤδη ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἰέναι" μι- 
σθωθῆναι δὲ οὐκ ἐπὶ τού ε Ὁ ὲ 
ἢ οὕτῳ ἔφασαν. πρῶτος δὲ 
’ Ἁ ~ 
Κλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι- οἱ 
δὲ 3 4 »Ά᾽ λλ Ἁ Ἀ ε 4 4 3 4 
€ αὐτὸν τε ἔβαλλον καὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια τὰ ἐκείνου, 
A » .. 9, Y , 
ἐπεὶ ἄρξαιντο προϊέναι. 2. Κλέαρχος δὲ τότε μὲν 
Ν 3 , ‘ ~ ¢ 
μικρὸν ἐξέφυγε μὴ καταπετρωθῆναι, ὕστερον δ᾽ ἐπεὶ 
» σ » ’ ’ 
ἔγνω ὅτι οὐ δυνήσεται βιάσασθαι, συνήγαγεν ἐκκλη- 
4 ~ ε ~ ~ “ 
σιαν τῶν αὑτοῦ στρατιωτῶν. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν ἐδάκρυε 
Ἀ ᾿ ε ’ ς ~ 
πολὺν χρόνον ἑστώς: οἱ δὲ ὁρῶντες ἐθαύμαζον καὶ 
> , Ψ 
ἐσιώπων: εἶτα δὲ ἔλεξε τοιάδε. 3. “Avdpes στρα- 
΄“ A , “~ 4 ~ a“ 
τιωται, μὴ θαυμάζετε ὅτι χαλεπῶς φέρω τοῖς παροῦσι 
’ 5 Ν A ’ ᾿ "Ὁ , 
πράγμασιν. ἐμοὶ yap ξένος Κῦρος ἐγένετο Kat με 
’ὔ »] ~ 4 
φεύγοντα ἐκ τῆς πατρίδος τά τε ἄλλα ἐτίμησε καὶ 
, ¥ 
μυρίους ἔδωκε δαρεικούς: ods ἐγὼ λαβὼν οὐκ εἰς 
Ν » ’, 
τὸ ἴδιον κατεθέμην ἐμοὶ οὐδὲ καθηδυπάθησα, ἀλλ᾽ 
3 ε ~ 3 ’΄ “ 
εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐδαπάνων. 4. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν πρὸς τοὺς 
”~ > , \ ε Ν A 
Θρᾷκας ἐπολέμησα, καὶ ὑπὲρ τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἐτιμω- 
’ , e ΄“ > ~ 
ρούμην μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν, ἐκ τῆς Χερρονήσου αὐτοὺς ἐξε- 


Βοοκ I.] CHAPTER III. 1-9. 239 


, , 5 ~ ‘ 5 ~ 
havvwv βουλομένους ἀφαιρεῖσθαι τοὺς ἐνοικοῦντας 
Ἕλληνας τὴν γῆν. ἐπειδὴ δὲ Κῦρος ἐκάλει, λαβὼν 
ec nw > / ν ¥ δέ > , > αὶ 
ὑμᾶς ἐπορευόμην, Wa EL TL δέοιτο ὠφελοίην αὐτὸν 
> ν᾿ 5 > » cs , > \ 5 « ~ 
av? ὧν ev ἔπαθον ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου. 5. ἐπεὶ δὲ ὑμεῖς 

. , , δ ον 2 δ ἃ 
οὐ βούλεσθε συμπορεύεσθαι, ἀνάγκη δή μοι ἢ ὑμᾶς 
’ ~ » δ ΄ ~ Δ Ν > sgn 
προδόντα τῇ Κύρου φιλίᾳ χρῆσθα. ἢ πρὸς ἐκεῖνον 
“ > \ 
ψευσάμενον μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἶναι. εἰ μὲν δὴ δίκαια ποι- 
, > > > > γὴν 
now οὐκ οἶδα, αἱρήσομαι δ᾽ οὖν ὑμᾶ: καὶ σὺν ὑμῖν 
- ¥ a ‘ 
ὅτι ἂν δέῃ πείσομαι. Kai οὔποτε ἐρεῖ οὐδεὶς ὡς 
ἐγὼ Ἕλληνας ἀγαγὼν εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους, προδοὺς 
an - , ΄ os 
τοὺς Ἕλληνα; τὴν τῶν βαρβάρων φιλίαν εἱλόμην. 
6. ἀλλ᾽ ἐπεὶ ὑμεῖς ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἐθέλετε πείθεσθαι, ἐγὼ 
σὺν ὑμῖν ἕψομαι καὶ ὅτι ἂν δέῃ πείσομαι. νομίζω 

‘ ε ~ > \ > \ 4 A , Ν 
γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἐμοὶ εἶναι καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους καὶ 

~ > > , 
συμμάχους, Kal σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν ἂν οἶμαι εἶνα! τίμιος 
ὅπου ἂν ὦ, ὑμῶν δὲ ἔρημος ὧν οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς οἶμαι 
εἶναι οὔτ᾽ ἂν φίλον ὠφελῆσαι ovr ἂν ἐχθρὸν ἀλέξα- 
σθαι. ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς οὕτω 
τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε. 7. ταῦτα εἶπεν οἱ δὲ στρατιῶ- 
ται οἵ τε αὐτοῦ ἐκείνου καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ταῦτα ἀκούσαν- 
τες ὅτι οὐ φαίη παρὰ βασιλέα πορεύεσθαι ἐπήνεσαν" 

αἴη παρὰ βασ ρεύεσθαι ἐπήνεσαν 

Ν A ee 4 A 4 , a» , 

παρὰ δὲ Zeviov καὶ Πασίωνος πλείους ἢ δισχίλιοι 
λαβόντες τὰ ὅπλα καὶ τὰ σκευοφόρα ἐστρατοπεδεύ- 
σαντο παρὰ Κλέαρχον. 8. Κῦρος δὲ τούτοις ἀπο- 
ρῶν τε καὶ λυπούμενος μετεπέμπετο τὸν Κλέαρχον" 
€ +. 2S \ 3 ¥ , \ A ' A 
ὁ δὲ ἰέναι μὲν οὐκ ἤθελε, λάθρᾳ “δὲ τῶν στρατιωτῶν 

, nx oY» ¥ A © 
πέμπων αὐτῷ ayyedov ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν ws καταστης- 

, > 
σομένων τούτων eis τὸ δέον. μεταπέμπεσθαι ὃ 


> / > ’ 3 Ν > > » »»9 Ν 
ἐκέλευεν αὐτόν: αὐτὸς δ᾽ οὐκ ἔφη ἰέναι. 9. μετὰ 




















ae = 


St ee ee 


| 
. 
| | 
! 
ae 
i) 
Ἑ 








240 XENOPHON'S ANABASIS. |Koox I. 


~ 4 > a“ , Ν 
δὲ ταῦτα συναγαγὼν τούς θ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ στρατιώτας καὶ 
7 5 ΄σ΄ »Ἤ A 
τοὺς προσελθόντας αὐτῷ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τὸν Bovdc- 
¥ , ¥ a ‘ \ 
μενον, ἔλεξε τοιάδε. “Avdpes στρατιῶται, τὰ μὲν 
‘ 4 ~ - - » Ν ε ~ ΄ 
δὴ Κύρου δῆλον ὅτι οὕτως EXEL πρὸς ἡμᾶς ὡὠσπερ 
‘ , ~ ‘ ~ 
TL ἡμέτερα πρὸς ἐκεῖνον: οὔτε yap ἡμεῖς ἐκείνου 
» ΕΝ , 3 , > ite » 
€TL στρατιῶται, ἐπεὶ γε οὐ συνεπόμεθα αὐτῷ, οὔτε 
ἐκεῖνος ἔτι ἡμῖν μισθοδότης. ὅτι μέντοι ἀδικεῖσθαι 
’ ε > ε ~ > 9 A 
νομίζει vp yuwv οἶδα: 10. ὥστε καὶ μεταπεμπο- 
4 > ~ J > , 5 ~ \ A 4 
μένου αὑτοῦ οὐκ ἐθέλω ἐλθεῖν, TO μὲν μέγιστον 
’ ν “σ΄ 
αἰσχυνόμενος ὅτι σύιοιδα ἐμαυτῷ πάντα ἐψευσμένος 
αὐτόν, ἔπειτα καὶ δεδιὼς μὴ λαβών με δίκην ἐπιθῇ 
® “~ > ~ > A 
ὧν νομίζει vr ἐμοῦ ἠδικῆσθαι. 11. ἐμοὶ οὖν δοκεῖ 
4 ΄ > e “ > ᾽ 5 A ε “Ὁ 
οὐχ wpa εἶναι ἡμῖν καθεύδειν οὐδ᾽ ἀμελεῖν ἡμῶν 
3 ~ > ‘ , σ Ν “ 3 4 
avtwv, ἀλλὰ βουλεύεσθαι ὅτι χρὴ ποιεῖν ἐκ τούτων. 
A ο “ , ~ » 
Kal ἕως τε μένομεν αὐτοῦ σκεπτίον μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι 
“ 5 , A » »¥ ~A 9 
omws ἀσφαλέστατα μενοῦμεν, εἴ τε ἤδη δοκεῖ ἀπι- 
’, ν 3 , » 4 Ν ’, 
ἐναι, ὁπω: ἀσφαλέστατα ἄπιμεν, καὶ ὅπως τὰ ἐπιτή- 
δεια ἕξομεν: ἄνευ γὰρ τούτων οὔτε στρατηγοῦ οὔτε 
’ Σ A 
ἰδιώτου ὄφελος οὐδ΄ν, 12. ὁ δ᾽ ἀνὴρ πολλοῦ μὲν 
- , δι. ΄ “4 ΄, ἜΣ. Ν φ 
ἄξιος φίλος ᾧ ἂν φίλος ἡ, χαλεπώτατος δ᾽ ἐχθρὸς ᾧ 
*» ’ " » Ἁ ’ \ \ \ e ‘ 
av πολέμιος ἢ, ἔχει δὲ δύναμιν Kai πεζὴν Kal ἱππικὴν 
καὶ ναυτικὴν ἣν πάντες ὁμοίως ὁρῶμέν τε καὶ ἐπι- 
, A “A 
στάμεθα: καὶ yap οὐδὲ πόρρω δοκοῦμέν μοι αὐτοῦ 
“ 9 ν -΄ » 
καθῆσθαι. ὥστε wpa λέγειν ὅτι τις γιγνώσκει apt- 
yy “ » Ν 3 , > \ 
στον εἰναι. TAUTA εἰπὼν ἐπαύσατο. 13. ἐκ δὲ 
’ ~ ss 
τούτου ἀνίσταντο οἱ μὲν ἐκ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, λέξοντες 
ἃ -»" ᾧ c \ Ν ε 3 > , “ , 
ἃ ἐγίγνωσκον, ot δὲ καὶ ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου ἐγκέλευστοι, 
ο » » “A , / 
ἐπιδεικνύντες οἵα εἴη ἡ ἀπορία ἄνευ τῆς Κύρου γνώ- 


A ’ Ἁ 5 , es de δὴ > 
μὴης και PEVELY και ἄπιεναι. 14. εἰς O€ On εἶπε 








Boox 1] CHAPTER III. 10-17. 241 


προσποιούμενος σπεύδειν ὡς τάχιστα πορεύεσθαι 
εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα στρατηγοὺς μὲν ἑλέσθαι ἄλλους ὡς 
, 3 A ’ὔ , 3 ’ Ν 3 
τάχιστα, εἰ μὴ βούλεται Κλέαρχος ἀπάγειν: τὰ ὃ 
> , > > ’ θ ε δ᾽ > A > 3 ~ 
ἐπιτήδει᾽ ἀγοράζεσθαι ---- ἡ δ᾽ ἀγορὰ ἦν ἐν τῷ Bap- 
βαρικῷ στρατεύματι --- καὶ συσκευάζεσθαι: ἐλθόν- 
A ~ > ~ ~ e > , 3A A 
tas δὲ Κῦρον αἰτεῖν πλοῖα, ws ἀποπλέοιεν: ἐὰν δὲ 
Ν ὃ ὃ ~ ~ ε / > ~ ~ 9 ὃ A 
μὴ διὸῳ ταῦτα, Ἠγεμονα aitew Kupov οστις ova 
, “ ΄ > /, 2\ de Ξ δὲ ε ’ 
φιλίας τῆς χώρας ἀπάξει. ἐὰν δὲ μηδὲ ἡγεμόνα 
~ , Ν 
διδῷ, συντάττεσθαι τὴν ταχίστην, πέμψαι δὲ καὶ 
’ Ν » ν \ , 4 
προκαταληψομένους τὰ ἄκρα, ὅπως μὴ φθάσωσι μήτε 
Κῦρος μήτε οἱ Κίλικες καταλαβόντες, ὧν πολλοὺς καὶ 
- ’ Ὄ A 
πολλὰ χρήματα ἔχομεν ἀνηρπακότες. οὗτος μὲν TOL- 
avta εἶπε" μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον Κλέαρχος εἶπε τοσοῦτον. 
15. Ὡς μὲν στρατηγήσοντα ἐμὲ ταύτην τὴν στρα- 
΄, Ν c “ 4 “ Ν 5 sie > ὁ 
τηγίαν μηδεὶς ὑμῶν λεγέτω: πολλὰ yap ἐνορῶ δι᾽ ἃ 
> \ ~A > 4 ε \ ~ > Ν ἃ - 4 
ἐμοὶ τοῦτο οὐ ποιητέον: ws δὲ TH ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν ἕλησθε 
7 e . ’ὔ 9 > A 4 ‘ » 
πείσομαι ἣ δυνατὸν μάλιστα, ἵνα εἰδῆτε ὅτι καὶ ap- 
5 ’ὔ ν Ν » 4 > ’ 
χεσθαι ἐπίσταμαι ὥς τις καὶ ἄλλος μάλιστα ἀνθρώ- 
Ν ω » > ’ 9 ‘ A 
πων. 16. μετὰ τοῦτον ἄλλος ἀνέστη, ἐπιδεικνὺς μὲν 
τὴν εὐήθειαν τοῦ τὰ πλοῖα αἰτεῖν κελεύοντος, ὥσπερ 
, Ν ¢ ΄ , 3 ὃ ‘ δὲ 
πάλιν τὸν στόλον Κύρου ποιουμένου, ἐπιδεικνὺς δὲ 
ὡς εὔηθες εἴη ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν παρὰ τούτου ᾧ λυμαι- 
νόμεθα τὴν πρᾶξιν. εἰ δὲ καὶ τῷ ἡγεμόνι πισ- 
/ aA δὰ ~ “A ’ / Q Ν ¥ 
τεύσομεν ὃν ἂν Kupos d@, τί κωλύει καὶ τὰ ἄκρα 
ἡμῖν κελεύειν Κῦρον προκαταλαβεῖν; 17. ἐγὼ γὰρ 
- , ‘ λ > ‘ - 9 , “oe , 
ὀκνοίην μὲν ἂν εἰς τὰ πλοῖα ἐμβαίνειν ἃ ἡμῖν Soin, 
\ ~ “ ΄“»"» 
μὴ ἡμᾶς αὐταῖς ταῖς τριήρεσι καταδύσῃ, φοβοίμην 
δ “Ξε , - ΄, ΄ \ ε κα 5 , 
δ᾽ ἂν τῷ ἡγεμόνι ᾧ δοίη ἕπεσθαι, μὴ ἡμᾶς ἀγάγῃ 
“ » ~ 
ὅθεν οὐκ ἔσται ἐξελθεῖν: βουλοίμην δ᾽ ἂν ἄκοντος 





Ϊ 
{i 
4 
i 
i 
‘| 
Ϊ 
ῃ 
Ϊ 
i 














249 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Book I. 


ἀπιὼν Κύρου λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών: ὃ ov δυνατόν 
> A , > 
ἐστιν. ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ φημι ταῦτα μὲν φλυαρίας εἶναι" 
~ ‘ ro” 7 
18. δοκεῖ δέ μοι ἄνδρας ἐλθόντας πρὸς Κῦρον οἵτινες 
ἐπιτήδειοι σὺν Κλεάρχῳ ἐρωτᾶν ἐκεῖνον τί βούλεται 
A A “ > , 
ἡμῖν χρῆσθαι: καὶ ἐὰν μὲν ἡ πρᾶξις ἢ παραπλησία 
σ \ , a ~ ~ , 9 . 
οἰᾳπερ καὶ πρόσθεν ἐχρῆτο τοῖς ἕένοις, ἕπεσθαι καὶ 
- > μ᾿ , 4 
ἡμᾶς καὶ μὴ κακίους εἶναι τῶν πρόσθεν τούτῳ συν- 
αναβάντων: 19. ἐὰν δὲ μείζων ἡ πρᾶξις τῆς πρό- 
σθεν φαίνηται καὶ ἐπιπονωτέρα καὶ ἐπικινδυνοτέρα, 
~ ~ »} a 4 4 
ἀξιοῦν ἢ πείσαντα ἡμᾶς ἄγειν ἢ πεισθέντα πρὸς 
9 λ 
φιλίαν ἀφιέναι. οὕτω γὰρ καὶ ἑπόμενοι ἂν φίλοι 
3 ” Ν ’ ε , Ν > , ΕῚ κ 
avTw καὶ πρόθυμοι ἑποίμεθα καὶ ἀπιόντες ἀσφαλῶς 
ἂν ἀπίοιμεν. ὅτι δ᾽ ἂν πρὸς ταῦτα λέγῃ ἀπαγγεῖλαι 
δεῦρο: ἡμᾶς δ᾽ ἀκούσαντας πρὸς ταῦτα βουλεύεσθαι. 
“ ‘ , 
20. ἔδοξε ταῦτα, Kai ἄνδρας ἑλόμενοι σὺν Κλεάρχῳ 
πέμπουσιν ol ἠρώτων Κῦρον τὰ δόξαντα τῇ στρατιᾷ. 
ε > > , hd > , ᾽ ’ > Ν ¥ 
ὁ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι ἀκούοι ᾿Αβροκόμαν ἐχθρὸν av- 
» Α a 3 , νας δ᾿» ὃ ὃ 
dpa ἐπὶ τῷ Εὐφράτῃ ποταμῷ εἶναι, ἀπέχοντα δώδεκα 
σταθμούς: πρὸς τοῦτον οὖν ἔφη βούλεσθαι ἐλθεῖν" 
ΕΥ 4 > 4 ~ A OL 2 4 "» ρ - 
κἂν μὲν ἢ ἐκεῖ, τὴν δίκην ἔφη χρήζειν ἐπιθεῖναι 
+ ὧν Δ \ , - - > A ‘ A , 
αὐτῷ, ἣν δὲ φύγῃ, ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ πρὸς ταῦτα βουλευσό- 
μεθα. 21. ἀκούσαντες δὲ ταῦτα οἱ αἱρετοὶ ἀπαγ- 
, “~ , a de e , 4 > 
γέλλουσι τοις στρατιώταις" τοῖς δὲ ὑποψία μὲν Hv 
- ¥ ‘ , ν δὲ 280 ν θ 
ὁτι ἄγοι πρὸς βασιλέα, ὅμως δὲ ἐδόκει ἕπεσθαι. 
Εν , A 5 A 
προσαιτοῦσι δὲ μισθόν: ὁ δὲ Κῦρος ὑπισχνεῖται 
ε , ~ ὃ , e , ¥ > Ν ὃ 
ἡμιόλιον πᾶσι δώσειν οὗ πρότερον ἔφερον, ἀντὶ δα- 
a Ν A Ν ΦᾺ ’ 
ρεικοῦ τρία ἡμιδαρεικὰ τοῦ μηνὸς τῷ στρατιώτῃ" 
" - ¥ ‘ 
ὅτι δὲ ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἄγοι οὐδὲ ἐνταῦθα ἤκουσεν οὐδεὶς 


¥ a ~ 
ἐν ye τῳ φανερῷ. 








Book I.| CHAPTERS III. 18-21 —IV. 1. 


CHAPTER IV. 


After the soldiers have been persuaded to continue their course stil] 
farther to the east, they journey on and cross the Psarus and Pyra- 
mus rivers, making for Issus, the frontier town between Cilicia and 
Syria (1). At this place Cyrus is joined by his fleet of Greek ships and 
marines ; the Spartan Cheirisophus comes with the ships, farnishing 
his quota of seven hundred hoplites. Greek deserters from A broco- 
mas also join his forces (2,3). Coming to Issus, Cyrus finds his way 
blocked by the so-called Gates of Syria, and a force under the com- 
mand of Syennesis manning one of the walls (4, 5). Upon learning 
that Cyrus is in Cilicia, Abrocomas, from whom Cyrus had expected 
opposition, flees with his large army ; and Cyrus, passing Issus, 
marches through Syria to Myriandum, a Phoenician town. Xenias 
and Pasion desert him here, piqued at the favor shown Clearchus 
(6,7). But Cyrus declares that he will not pursue them, preferring 
that no one shall serve unwillingly in his cause ; at this the soldiers 
are greatly pleased, and march with better will (8, 9). Passing the 
Chalus and the source of the Dardas, and destroying the royal resi- 
dence and gardens of the Syrian king, located at the latter place, 
Cyrus reaches the Euphrates (10, 11). Here the generals learn that 
Cyrus intends to march against the king, and are ordered to influence 
the soldiers to continue. These at first are angry, claiming that they 
have been duped by the generals ; they demand still more pay and are 
promised it (12,13). But Menon, meanwhile, seeking the special 
fevor of Cyrus, by seeming zealous in his cause, urges his soldiers to 
cross the Euphrates while the rest of the army is uncertain (14-17). 
This they, and subsequently the rest of the army, do with an ease 
which seems to the inhabitants of the place to be miraculous. They 
then reach the river Araxes, and finding well stocked villages there, 
rest three days (18, 19). 


1. ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας 
, - > > ν 
δέκα ἐπὶ τὸν Ψάρον ποταμόν, οὗ ἦν τὸ εὖρος τρία 


























244 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Book I. 


πλέθρα. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγ- 
γας πέντε ἐπὶ τὸν Πύραμον ποταμόν, οὗ ἦν τὸ εὖρος 
4 > ~ > 4 Ἁ 4 ’ 
στάδιον. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγ- 
’ 3 > 4 ~ 4 > , 
yas πεντεκαίδεκα εἰς ᾿Ισσούς, τῆς Κιλικίας ἐσχατηχ' 
, ΕΣ Ἁ “~ , 5 , , 4 5 , 
πόλιν ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάττῃ οἰκουμένην, μεγάλην Kal evdat- 
μονα. 2. ἐνταῦθα ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς - καὶ Κύρῳ 
παρῆσαν αἱ ἐκ Πελοποννήσου νῆες τριάκοντα καὶ 
πέντε καὶ ἐπ᾿ αὐταῖς ναύαρχος Πυθαγόρας Λακεδαι- 
μόνιος. ἡγεῖτο δ᾽ αὐταῖς Ταμῶς Αἰγύπτιος ἐξ ᾿Εφέ- 
σου, ἔχων ναῦς ἑτέρας Κύρου πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν, αἷς 
ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον ὅτε Τισσαφέρνει φίλη ἣν, καὶ 
’ , Ν > / “ \ \ 
συνεπολέμει Κύρῳ πρὸς αὐτόν. 3. παρὴν δὲ καὶ 
Χειρίσοφος Λακεδαιμόνιος ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν, μετάπεμπτος 
ὑπὸ Κύρου, ἑπτακοσίους ἔχων ὁπλίτας, ὧν ἐστρατήγει 
Ν , e Ν ‘a 9 Ν \ , 
mapa Κύρῳ. at δὲ νῆες ὥρμουν παρὰ τὴν Κύρου 
, 9 A ‘ ε oe , , 
σκηνήν. ἐνταῦθα καὶ οἱ παρὰ ᾿Αβροκόμα pic bodo- 
4 > ’ > ‘ i 
pot Ἕλληνες ἀποστάντες ἦλθον παρὰ Κῦρον τετρα- 
κόσιοι ὁπλῖται καὶ συνεστρατεύοντο ἐπὶ βασιλέα. 
4. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας πέντε 
> 8 , ~ ’ , A τ' ’ > δὲ 
ἐπὶ πύλας τῆς Κιλικίας καὶ τῆς Συρίας. ἦσαν δὲ 
ταῦτα δύο τείχη, καὶ τὸ μὲν ἔσωθεν τὸ πρὸ τῆς 
, 

Κιλικίας Συέννεσις εἶχε καὶ Κιλίκων φυλακή, τὸ δὲ 
ἔξω τὸ πρὸ τῆς Συρίας βασιλέως ἐλέγετο φυλακὴ 
’ὔ Ἁ ’ ‘\ em” 4 ‘ ’ 
φυλάττειν. διὰ μέσου δὲ pet τούτων ποταμὸς Kap- 

»” > , 9 ‘ \ , ~ 

σος ὄνομα, εὖρος πλέθρου. ἅπαν δὲ TO μέσον τῶν 
A > - Ἢ ~ > 
τειχῶν ἦσαν στάδιοι τρεῖς" καὶ παρελθεῖν οὐκ ἦν 
Bia: ἦν γὰρ ἡ πάροδος στενὴ καὶ τὰ τείχη εἰς τὴν 
, , ° > “, , 2\ 7 
θάλατταν καθήκοντα, ὕπερθεν δ᾽ ἦσαν πέτραι ἠλί- 

‘\ ths , 
βατοι-" ἐπὶ δὲ τοῖς τείχεσιν ἀμφοτέροις ἐφειστήκεσαν 

















Boox 1] CHAPTER IV. 2-8. 245 


, , 9 “~ ’ ~ 4 
πύλαι. 5. ταύτης ἕνεκα τῆς παρόδου Κῦρος τὰς 
~ , 9 ε ’ὔ + , ot 
vaus μετεπέμψατο, ows ὁπλίτας ἀποβιβάσειεν εἴσω 
. » A - , . ΄ 9 
καὶ ἔξω τῶν πυλῶν βιασομένους τοὺς πολεμίους εἰ φυ- 
’ 9 \ ~ ’ , σ ΝΜ , 
λάττοιεν ἐπὶ ταῖς Συρίαις πύλαις, ὅπερ WETO ποιήσειν 
ε ῳ Ν ᾽ ’ » Ν ’ : 
ὁ Κῦρος τὸν ‘ABpoxopav, ἔχοντα πολὺ στράτευμα. 
> ’ ἃ > ~ > > 4 > > > Ν » 
Αβροκόμας δὲ οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίησεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἤκουσε 
Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα, ἀναστρέψας ἐκ Φοινίκης 
A ‘4 > ’ » ε > ’ , 
παρὰ βασιλέα ἀπήλαυνεν, ἔχων, ws ἐλέγετο, Tpia- 
, ~ 5 ~ 3 ’ 
κοντα μυριάδας στρατιᾶς. 6. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει 
9 ’ 3 
διὰ Συρίας σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας πέντε εἰς 
\ σι 
Μυρίανδον, πόλιν οἰκουμένην ὑπὸ Φοινίκων ἐπὶ τῇ 
3 > y 
θαλάττῃ ἐμπόριον δ᾽ ἢν τὸ χωρίον καὶ ὥρμουν at- 
τόθι ὁλκάδες πολλαί. 7. ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔμειναν ἡμέρας 
ε ’ Net 4 . 2 \ Ν ἃ ’ὔ ε 
ἑπτά " καὶ Ξενίας 0 ᾿Αρκὰς στρατηγὸς καὶ Πασίων ὃ 
A > , > Si. A \ of ¥ 
Μεγαρεὺς ἐμβάντες εἰς πλοῖον καὶ τὰ πλείστου ἀξια 
’ ~ , 
ἐνθέμενοι ἀπέπλευσαν, ws μὲν τοῖς πλείστοις ἐδόκουν 
φιλοτιμηθέντες ὅτι τοὺς στρατιώτας αὐτῶν τοὺς παρὰ 
Κλέαρχον ἀπελθόντας, ὡς ἀπιόντας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα 
» A \ 
πάλιν καὶ ov πρὸς βασιλέα, εἴα Κῦρος τὸν Κλέαρχον 
᾽ 5 A A , 9 
ἔχειν. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἦσαν ἀφανεῖς, διῆλθε λόγος ὅτι διώ- 
~ ¥ ε 
κοι αὐτοὺς Κῦρος τριήρεσι" καὶ οἱ μὲν ηὔχοντο ὡς 
\ » 5 Ν. ’ ~ e ᾽ » > 
δειλοὺς ὄντας αὐτοὺς ληφθῆναι, ot δ᾽ ᾧκτειρον εἰ 
ε ’ ~ Ἀ ’ὔ’ Ν 
ἁλώσοιντος 8. Κῦρος δὲ συγκαλίσας τοὺς στρατη- 


Ν > > ’ὔ ε “ — , Ν ’ 
yous εἰπεν, Ἀπολελοίπασιν ἡμᾶς Ξενίας καὶ ἸΙασίιων. 


» > ν , 
ἀλλ᾽ εὖ γε μέντοι ἐπιστάσθων ὅτι οὔτε ἀποδεδράκα- 


> Ν Ψ » x 3 ’,Ἅ 
σιν" otoa γὰρ ὅπῃ οἴχονται: οὔτε ἀποπεφεύγασιν'᾽ 
ἔχω γὰρ τριήρεις ὥστε ἑλεῖν τὸ ἐκείνων πλοῖον: 
, 9 ᾽ 
ἀλλὰ μὰ τοὺς θεοὺς οὐκ ἔγωγε αὐτοὺς διώξω, οὐδ 


ἐρεῖ οὐδεὶς ὡς ἐγὼ ἕως μὲν ἂν παρῇ τις χρῶμαι, 



































246 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Boox L 


ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἀπιέναι βούληται, συλλαβὼν καὶ αὐτοὺς 
κακῶς ποιῶ καὶ τὰ χρήματα ἀποσυλῶ. ἀλλὰ ἰόντων, 
εἰδότες ὅτι κακίους εἰσὶ περὶ ἡμᾶς 4 ἡμεῖς περὶ ἐκεί- 
νους. καίτοι ἔχω γε αὐτῶν καὶ τέκνα καὶ γυναῖκας 
ἐν Τράλλεσι φρουρούμενα: ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ τούτων στερή- 
σονται, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπολήψονται τῆς πρόσθεν ἕνεκα περὶ 
ἐμὲ ἀρετῆς. 9. καὶ 6 μὲν ταῦτα εἶπεν. οἱ δὲ Ἔλ- 
ληνες, εἴ τις καὶ ἀθυμότερος ἣν πρὸς τὴν ἀνάβασιν, 
ἀκούοντες τὴν Κύρου ἀρετὴν ἥδιον καὶ προθυμότερον 
, 

συνεπορεύοντο. 

Μετὰ ταῦτα Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τέτταρας 
παρασάγγας εἴκοσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Χάλον ποταμόν, ὄντα 
τὸ εὖρος πλέθρου, πλήρη δ᾽ ἰχθύων μεγάλων καὶ 
πραέων, os οἱ Σύροι θεοὺς ἐνόμιζον καὶ ἀδικεῖν 
οὐκ εἴων, οὐδὲ τὰς περιστεράς. αἱ δὲ κῶμαι ἐν αἷς 
ἐσκήνουν Παρυσάτιδος ἦσαν εἰς ζώνην δεδομέναι. 
10. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς πέντε παρασάγγας 
τριάκοντα ἐπὶ τὰς πηγὰς τοῦ Δάρδατος ποταμοῦ, οὗ 
τὸ εὖρος πλέθρου. ἐνταῦθα Hv τὰ Βελέσυος βασίλεια 
τοῦ Συρίας ἄρξαντος, καὶ παράδεισος πάνυ μέγας 
καὶ καλός, ἔχων πάντα ὅσα ὧραι φύουσι. Κῦρος δ᾽ 
αὐτὸν ἐξέκοψε καὶ τὰ βασίλεια κατέκαυσεν. 11. ἐν- 
τεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας πεντε- 
καίδεκα ἐπὶ τὸν Εὐφράτην ποταμόν, ὄντα τὸ εὖρος 
τεττάρων σταδίων: καὶ πόλις αὐτόθι κεῖτο μεγάλη 
καὶ εὐδαίμων Θάψακο: ὄνομα. ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινεν ἡμέ- 
ρας πέντε. καὶ Κῦρος μεταπεμψάμενος τοὺς στρατη- 
yous τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἡ ὁδὸς ἔσοιτο πρὸς 
βασιλέα μέγαν εἰς Βαβυλῶνα: καὶ κελεύει αὐτοὺς 











Βοοκ 1. CHAPTER IV. 9-15. 94 


λέγειν ταῦτα τοῖς στρατιώταις καὶ ἀναπείθειν ἕπεσθαι. 
12. οἱ δὲ ποιήσαντες ἐκκλησίαν ἀπήγγελλον ταῦτα᾽ 
οἱ δὲ στρατιῶται ἐχαλέπαινον τοῖς στρατηγοῖς, καὶ 
» 9 A ’ a ὦ > , 4 Ν > 
ἔφασαν αὐτοὺς πάλαι ταῦτ᾽ εἰδότας κρύπτειν, Kal οὐκ 
» 52 2X , > ~ , ὃ ὃ a“ ν 
ἔφασαν ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις αὐτοῖς χρήματα διδῷ, ὧσ- 
“ , Ν 4 3 ~ Ν Ν 
περ τοῖς προτέροις μετὰ Κύρου ἀναβᾶσι παρὰ τὸν 
~ Q ΄ 5 \ , 329 
πατέρα του Κύρου, καὶ ταῦτα οὐκ ἐπὶ μάχην ἰόντων, 
A ~ ~ ~ ~ € 
ἀλλὰ καλοῦντος Tov πατρὸς Κῦρον. 13. ταῦτα ot 
Ν ΄ 3 , ε > ε ’ 3 ὃ Ν 
στρατηγοὶ Κύρῳ ἀπήγγελλον ὁ δ᾽ ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ 
ld ~ Ν 
ἑκάστῳ δώσειν πέντε ἀργυρίου μνᾶς, ἐπὴν εἰς Βαβυ- 
λῶνα ἥκωσι, καὶ τὸν μισθὸν ἐντελῆ μέχρι ἂν κατα- 
, ‘ Yrs > > ’, , Ν Ν 57; 
στήσῃ τοὺς ἔλληνας εἰς Iwviay πάλιν. τὸ μὲν On 
πολὺ τοῦ ᾿Ελληνικοῦ οὕτως ἐπείσθη. Μένων δὲ 
πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι τί ποιήσουσιν οἱ ἄλλοι στρατιῶται, 
’ dl 4 a » ’ Ν ε ΄“ 
πότερον ἕψονται Κύρῳ ἢ οὔ, συνέλεξε τὸ αὑτοῦ 
~ » ‘ » 
στράτευμα χωρὶς τῶν ἄλλων καὶ ἔλεξε τάδε. 14. "Av- 
~ » 
ὃρες, ἐάν μοι πεισθῆτε, οὔτε κινδυνεύσαντες οὔτε 
΄, A »” 
πονήσαντες τῶν ἄλλων πλέον προτιμήσεσθε στρα- 
τιωτῶν ὑπὸ Κύρου. τί οὖν κελεύω ποιῆσαι; νῦν 
δεῖται Κῦρος ἕπεσθαι τοὺς Ἕλληνας ἐπὶ βασιλέα: 
» 4 > ε ~ ~ ~ Ν. > ’ 
ἐγὼ οὖν φημι ὑμᾶς χρῆναι διαβῆναι τὸν Εὐφράτην 
“ —y 9 
ποταμὸν πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι ὅτι οἱ ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες 
ἀποκρινοῦνται Κύρῳ: 15. ἣν μὲν γὰρ ψηφίσωνται 
2 ε ~ , »ἭἌἈ > » - 
ἕπεσθαι, ὑμεῖς δόξετε αἴτιοι εἶναι ἄρξαντες τοῦ δια- 
βαίνειν, καὶ ὡς προθυμοτάτοις οὖσιν ὑμῖν χάριν 
of A ‘+3 , ae > ¥ \ 
ELO ETAL Kupos και ἀποδώσει: ETLOTATAL ὃ ει TLS Και 
¥ Δ » » \ 
ἄλλος: Hv δὲ ἀποψηφίσωνται οἱ ἄλλοι, ἄπιμεν μὲν 
- A 
ἅπαντες τοὔμπαλιν, ὑμῖν δὲ ὡς μόνοις πειθομένοις 
πιστοτάτοις χρήσεται καὶ εἰς φρούρια καὶ εἰς λοχα- 




















} 
} 
Ι 
} 
ἢ 





a 





248 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Βωοκ L. 


γίας, καὶ ἄλλου οὗτινος ἂν δέησθε οἶδα ὅτι ὡς φίλοι 
τεύξεσθε Κύρου. 16. ἀκούσαντες ταῦτα ἐπείθοντο 
καὶ διέβησαν πρὶν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀποκρίνασθαι. Κῦ- 
ρος δ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἤσθετο διαβεβηκότας, ἥσθη τε καὶ τῷ 
στρατεύματι πέμψας Τλοῦν εἶπεν, ᾿Εγὼ μέν, ὦ ἄνδρες, 
ἤδη ὑμᾶς ἐπαινῶ. ὅπως δὲ καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ ἐπαινέσετε 
ἐμοὶ μελήσει, ἢ μηκέτι με Κῦρον νομίζετε. 17. οἱ 
μὲν δὴ στρατιῶται ἐν ἐλπίσι μεγάλαις ὄντες ηὔχοντο 
αὐτὸν εὐτυχῆσαι, Μένωνι δὲ καὶ δῶρα ἐλέγετο πέμ- 
ψαι μεγαλοπρεπῶς. ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσας διέβαινε: συν- 
εἰπετο δὲ καὶ τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα αὐτῷ ἅπαν. καὶ 
τῶν διαβαινόντων τὸν ποταμὸν οὐδεὶς ἐβρέχθη ἀνω- 
τέρω τῶν μαστῶν ὑπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ. 18. οἱ δὲ 
Θαψακηνοὶ ἔλεγον ὅτι οὐπώποθ᾽ οὗτος ὁ ποταμὸς 
διαβατὸς γένοιτο πεζῇ εἰ μὴ τότε, ἀλλὰ πλοίοις, ἃ 
τότε ᾿Αβροκόμας προϊὼν κατέκαυσεν, ἵνα μὴ Κῦρος 
διαβῇ. ἐδόκει δὴ θεῖον εἶναι καὶ σαφῶς ὑποχωρῆσαι 
τὸν ποταμὸν Κύρῳ ὡς βασιλεύσοντι. 19. ἐντεῦθεν 
ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Συρίας σταθμοὺς ἐννέα παρασάγγας 
πεντήκοντα " καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται πρὸς τὸν ᾿Αράξην πο- 
ταμόν. ἐνταῦθα ἦσαν κῶμαι πολλαὶ μεσταὶ σίτου 
καὶ οἴνου. ἐνταῦθα ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς καὶ ἐπε- 
σιτίσαντο. 











Book 1.] CIAPTERS IV. 16-19—V. 1, 2. 


CHAPTER Υ. 


The journey is continued through the Arabian desert, along the north 
bank of the Euphrates (1). Many wild animals of various sorts are 
met with, and some of them the horsemen pursue. Difficulties in 
giving chase to the wild ass and the ostrich (2, 3). The army ar- 
rives at Corsdte and takes in provisions, and then continues on its 
way to Pylae, many of the beasts of burden suffering from hunger 
and thirst. The inhabitants of the country quarry grinding-stones 
for a living anc, sell them at Babylon (4,5). During this journey 
through the desert, provisions sell for an exorbitant price in the army ; 
the march was very rapid, Cyrus and his retinue frequently dismount- 
ing and lending a helping hand whenever a wagon was stalled in the 
mud. It was the impression of all that Cyrus was hastening so as to 
find the king unprepared (6-9). At Charmande the soldiers cross 
the river and buy provisions (10). Outbreak in the Greek army, the 
soldiers of Menon venting their ill-will against Clearchus and his rig- 
orous method of punishment. Clearchus and his Thracian soldiers 
march against the camp of Menon. Most unfortunate results might 
have followed, notwithstanding the mediation of Proxenus, had not 
Cyrus opportunely arrived upon the scene (11-17). 


1. ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς ᾿Αραβίας τὸν Εὐ- 
φράτην ποταμὸν ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχων σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους 
πέντε παρασάγγας τριάκοντα καὶ πέντε. ἐν τούτῳ 
\ κ , τς ῃ - ΄ Ψ ε \ © 
δὲ τῷ τόπῳ ἦν μὲν ἡ γῆ πεδίον ἅπαν Spares ὥσπερ 
> ~ » “~ 
θάλαττα, ἁψινθίου δὲ πλῆρες" εἰ δέ τι καὶ ἄλλο ἐνὴν 
Y Δ , 9 > ae’ 9 a ὦ 
ὕλης ἢ καλάμου, ἅπαντα ἦσαν εὐώδη ὥσπερ ἀρώ- 
ματα' 2. δένδρον δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἐνῆν, θηρία δὲ παντοῖα, 
~ »” » Ν A Ἁ ε ’ 
πλεῖστοι ὄνοι ἄγριοι, πολλαὶ δὲ στρουθοὶ αἱ μεγάλαι" 
> »““« A A > / A ’ ~ A Ν 
ἐνῆσαν δὲ καὶ ὠτίδες καὶ δορκάδες: ταῦτα δὲ τὰ 


, ε ε ~ 4 ¥ δέ Ν ε A » 
θηρία οἱ ἱππεις EVLOTE ἐδιωκον. καὶ OL μεν ονοι, 














” 
| 
ip 
ΗΝ; 
itt 
il 
ἢ 
ih 
it, 
1} 
1 
th 
ih 
ut 
i 
He 
Hin 
if 
{ 
ΠΝ 
Ue 
it 
hu 
i 
HI 
pt 
ui 
“ἢ 
ΠΝ 
Vi 
Ι 
Ἷ 
᾿ 
ἢ 
t 
ἱ 
᾿ 


i 
i 














Se ee ΕΣ 


PES SEES 





50 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Boox I. 


> ͵ὕ 4 ,ὔὕ ΄ 4 4 
ἐπεί τις διώκοι, προδραμόντες ἔστασαν: πολὺ γὰρ 
τῶν ἵππων ἔτρεχον θᾶττον καὶ πάλιν, ἐπεὶ πλησιά- 
ζοιεν οἱ ἵπποι, ταὐτὸν ἐποίουν, καὶ οὐκ ἦν λαβεῖν, 
εἰ μὴ διαστάντες οἱ ἱππεῖς θηρῷεν διαδεχόμενοι. τὰ 
δὲ κρέα τῶν ἁλισκομένων ἦν παραπλήσια τοῖς ἐλα- 
φείοις, ἁπαλώτερα δέ. 3. στρουθὸν δὲ οὐδεὶς ἔλαβεν - 
ε A - ~ ε , 4 > ,ὔ’ 4 A 
OL δὲ διώξαντες T@WV LITTTE@V TAaXU €7TAVOVTO * πολυ γαρ 
ἀπέσπα φεύγουσα, τοῖς μὲν ποσὶ δρόμῳ, Tals δὲ πτέ- 
ρυξιν αἴρουσα, ὥσπερ ἱστίῳ χρωμένη. τὰς δὲ ὠτίδας, 

W “~ , 
av τις ταχὺ ἀνιστῇ, ἔστι λαμβάνειν - πέτονται γὰρ 
βραχὺ ὥσπερ πέρδικες καὶ ταχὺ ἀπαγορεύουσι. τὰ 
δὲ ’ > a “ὃ > ’ Ἁ Ν 
€ κρέα αὑτῶν ἤδιστα ἦν. 4. πορευόμενοι δὲ διὰ 
ταύτης τῆς χώρας ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ τὸν Μάσκαν πο- 
, 4 > ~ 5 ~ > ,ὔ + , 
ταμὸν, TO εὖρος πλεθριαῖον. ἐνταῦθα ἣν πόλι; ἐρήμη, 
3, ΄Ὁ r ~ 
μεγάλη, ὄνομα δ᾽ αὐτῇ Kopowry: περιερρεῖτο δ᾽ 
αὕτη ὑπὸ τοῦ Μάσκα κύκλῳ. ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔμειναν ἡμέ- 
aA Q > , ᾿ κι > , 
pas τρεις καὶ ἐπεσιτίσαντο. 5. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει 
A 4, 
σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους τρισκαίδεκα παρασάγγας ἐνενή- 
Ἀ ΕῚ ’ὔ Ἁ > ΩΝ » A 
κοντα τὸν Εὐφράτην ποταμὸν ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχων, καὶ 
᾿ ~ “ιν , y , A A 
ἀφικνεῖται ἐπὶ Πύλας. ἐν τούτοις τοῖς σταθμοῖς 
Ἀ “~ ε ’ π- , ε A ~ > A 
πολλὰ τῶν ὑποζυγίων ἀπώλετο ὑπὸ λιμοῦ: od γὰρ 
> ,ὔ » > 
ἣν χόρτος οὐδὲ ἄλλο οὐδὲν δένδρον, ἀλλὰ ψιλὴ ἦν 
΄ ~ 
ἅπασα ἡ χώρα' ot δὲ ἐνοικοῦντες ὄνους ἀλέτας παρὰ 
A ~ ~ 
τὸν ποταμὸν ὀρύττοντες καὶ ποιοῦντες εἰς Βαβυλῶνα 
ἤγον καὶ ἐπώλουν καὶ ἀνταγοράζοντες σῖτον ἔζων. 
ἣν A 4 ~ 
6. τὸ δὲ στράτευμα ὁ σῖτος ἐπέλιπε, καὶ πρίασθαι 
οὐκ ἦν εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ Λυδία ἀ Le » Kv 
ἣν εἰ μὴ ἐν TH Λυδίᾳ ἀγορᾷ ἐν τῷ Κύρου βαρ- 
β ~ A ‘A iA ,ὔὕ “Ὁ aN , , 
apik@, τὴν καπίθην ἀλεύρων ἢ ἀλφίτων τεττάρων 


, 4 e ‘ 
σίγλων. ὁ δὲ aiyhos δύναται ἑπτὰ ὀβολοὺς Kal 














Book |] CHAPTER V. 3-9. 251 


, ? 
ἡμιωβόλιον ᾿Αττικούς - ἡ δὲ καπίθη δύο χοίνικας ᾽Ατ- 
+ 3 ’ὔ ’ὔ > > θί ε σι 
τικὰς ἐχώρει. κρέα οὖν ἐσθίοντες οἱ στρατιῶται 

> ~ - ἃ 
διεγίγνοντο. 7. ἦν δὲ τούτων τῶν σταθμῶν cd; 
, \ ¥ ec a ἣν 5 Ἂ 
πάνυ μακροὺς ἤλαυνεν, ὁπότε ἢ πρὸς ὕδωρ βούλοιτο 
‘ \ 4 , 
διατελέσαι ἢ πρὸς χιλόν. καὶ δή ποτε στενοχωρίας 
~ ’ ΄ , > 4 
καὶ πηλοῦ φανέντος ταῖς ἁμάξαις δυσπορεύτου ἐπέστη 
ὁ Κῦρος σὺν τοῖς περὶ αὐτὸν ἀρίστοις καὶ εὐδαιμο- 
’, μὸν: , 
νεστάτοις καὶ ἔταξε Γλοὺν καὶ Πίγρητα λαβόντας 
~ ~ ἴω ’ Ν ε , 
tov BapBapixov στρατοῦ συνεκβιβάζειν τὰς ἁμάξας. 
“" , - 9 > she 
8. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐδόκουν αὐτῷ σχολαίως ποιεῖν, ὥσπερ ὀργῇ 
, ’ 
ἐκέλευσε τοὺς περὶ αὐτὸν Πέρσας τοὺς κρατίστους 
‘oa ε / » Ἁ , A 
συνεπισπεῦσαι Tas ἁμάξας. ἔνθα δὴ μέρος τι τῆς 
5 , \ \ 
εὐταξίας ἦν θεάσασθαι. ῥίψαντες yap τοὺς πορφυ- 
~ ο ε ’ ν ν 
pous κάνδυς ὅπου ἔτυχεν ἕκαστος ἑστηκώς, ἵεντο WO- 
’, Ν a 
περ ἂν ὃδράμοι Tis περὶ νίκης Kal μάλα κατὰ πρανοῦς 
la “A A Ν 
γηλόφου, ἔχοντες τούς τε πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας καὶ τὰς 
΄ ,ὔ \ Ν 
ποικίλας ἀναξυρίδας, ἔνιοι δὲ καὶ στρεπτοὺς περὶ 
A 4 ἃ , Ν ΄ , ὑθὺ 
τοις τραχήλοις καὶ ψέλια περὶ ταις χερσίν" εὐθὺυς 
Ν Ν an 
δὲ σὺν τούτοις εἰσπηδήσαντες εἰς τὸν πηλὸν θᾶττον 
a 9 Δ x ’ > / Ν ε , 
ἢ ὥς τις ἂν ῴᾧετο μετεώρους ἐξεκόμισαν τὰς ἁμάξας. 
9. τὸ δὲ σύμπαν δῆλος ἦν Κῦρος ὡς σπεύδων πᾶσαν 
\ ε Ν Ἁ » ’ χὰ Ν > a ἃν 
τὴν ὁδὸν Kal ov διατρίβων ὅπου μὴ ἐπισιτισμοῦ ἕνεκα 
» » > ’ὔ > , ’ 9 
ἢ Twos ἄλλου ἀναγκαίου ἐκαθέζετο, νομίζων, ὅσῳ 
A ~ » ’ 5 ’ ΄“-"ΜΝἢ 
μὲν θᾶττον ἔλθοι, τοσούτῳ ἀπαρασκενυοτέρῳ βασιλεῖ 
μαχεῖσθαι, ὅσῳ δὲ σχολαίτερον, τοσούτῳ πλέον συν- 
’, A , Ν ὃ A δ᾽ > 
αγείρεσθαι βασιλεῖ στράτευμα. καὶ συνιδεῖν ἦν 
om , sa , > b , 
τῷ προσέχοντι τὸν νοῦν ἡ βασιλέως ἀρχὴ πλήθει 
ἊΝ ~ \ 4 
μὲν χώρας καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἰσχυρὰ οὖσα, Tots δὲ μήκεσι 
~ ΄ ~ , Ν , 5 , 
τῶν ὁδῶν καὶ τῷ διεσπάσθαι τὰς δυνάμεις ἀσθενής, 





























252 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Bvox 1, 


y Ν , ἈΝ ’ ~ , 
εἴ τις διὰ ταχέων τὸν πόλεμον ποιοῖτο. 10. πέραν 
δὲ τοῦ Εὐφράτου ποταμοῦ κατὰ τοὺς ἐρήμους otal- 
‘ > , 9 , ‘ , » Ἢ 
fous ἣν πόλις εὐδαίμων καὶ μεγάλη, ὄνομα δὲ 
r ’ ~ 
Xappavdn: ἐκ ταύτης οἱ στρατιωται ἠγόραζον τὰ 
ἐπιτήδεια, σχεδίαις διαβαίΐνοντε: ὧϑε. διφθέρας ἃς 
εἶχον στεγάσματα ἐπίμπλασαν χόρτου κούφου, εἶτα 
συνῆγον καὶ συνέσπων, ὡς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι τῆς κάρφης 
Ἁ ν ΩΝ ’ , A 5 ’ ‘ 
TO ὕδωρ: ἐπὶ τούτων διέβαινον καὶ ἐλάμβανον τὰ 
> , ~ ~ 
ἐπιτήδεια, οἶνόν τε ἐκ τῆς βαλάνου πεποιημένον τῆς 
ἀπὸ τοῦ φοίνικος καὶ σῖτον μελίνης" τοῦτο γὰρ ἢν 
ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ πλεῖστον. 11. ἀμφιλεξάντων δέ τι év- 
ταῦθα τῶν τε Μένωνός του στρατιωτῶν καὶ τῶν 
Κλεάρχου ὁ Κλέαρχος κρίνας ἀδικεῖν τὸν τοῦ Μένω. 
vos πληγὰς ἐνέβαλεν: 6 δὲ ἐλθὼν πρὸς τὸ ἑαυτοῦ 
» , “A 
στράτευμα ἔλεγεν: ἀκούσαντες δὲ οἱ στρατιῶται 
> ’ \ » ’ὔ 5 ~ ~ > ’ 
ἐχαλέπαινον καὶ ὠργίζοντο ἰσχυρῶς τῷ Κλεάρχῳ. 
12. τῇ δὲ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ Κλέαρχος ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ τὴν διά- 
βασιν τοῦ ποταμοῦ καὶ ἐκεῖ κατασκεψάμενος τὴν 
ἀγορὰν ἀφιππεύει ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνὴν διὰ τοῦ 
Μένωνος στρατεύματος σὺν ὀλίγοις τοῖς περὶ αὐτόν" 
Κῦρος δὲ οὔπω ἧκεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἔτι προσήλαυνε: τῶν δὲ 
“~ Oo ’, 
Μένωνος στρατιωτῶν ξύλα σχίζων τις ὡς εἶδε Κλέ- 
apxov διελαύνοντα, ἵησι τῇ ἀξίνῃ" καὶ οὗτος μὲν 
αὐτοῦ ἥμαρτεν - ἄλλος δὲ λίθῳ καὶ ἄλλος, εἶτα πολλοί, 
κραυγῆς γενομένης. 13. ὁ δὲ καταφεύγει εἰς τὸ 
ἑαυτοῦ στράτευμα, καὶ εὐθὺς παραγγέλλει εἰς τὰ 
ν \ ‘ \ ε , > a > ’ ” 
omha* καὶ τοὺς μὲν ὁπλίτας αὐτοῦ ἐκέλευσε μεῖναι 
Ν 5 ’ Ἁ Ν , , 5 Ν Ἁ \ 
Tas ἀσπίδας πρὸς τὰ γόνατα θέντας, αὐτὸς δὲ λαβὼν 


‘\ ay Ν Ν ε , Aa 5 > “ > 
τους Θρᾷκας καὶ Tov; ἱππέας ot ἧσαν avTw ἐν τῳ 











Boox 1: CHAPTER VY. 10-17. 952 


\ ε 
J Ἵ ἢ L των δὲ ob 
στρατεύματι πλείους ἢ τετταράκοντα, TOV 


πλεῖστοι Θρᾷκες, ἤλαυνεν ἐπὶ τοὺς Μένωνος, ὥστ᾽ 
ἐκείνους ἐκπεπλῆχθαι καὶ αὐτὸν Μένωνα, καὶ τρέχειν 
ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα: οἱ δὲ καὶ ἔστασαν ἀποροῦντες τῷ 
πράγματι. 14. ὁ δὲ Πρόξενος --- ἔτυχε γὰρ ὕστε- 

ὴ ὶ τά ὑτῴ ἑπομέ ν ὁπλιτῶν ---- 
ρος προσιὼν καὶ τάξις αὐτῷ ἑπομένη τῶν om) : 
εὐθὺς οὖν εἰς τὸ μέσον ἀμφοτέρων ἄγων ἔθετο τὰ 
ὅπλα καὶ ἐδεῖτο τοῦ Κλεάρχου μὴ ποιεῖν ταῦτα. ὁ 
δ᾽ ἐχαλέπαινεν ὅτι αὐτοῦ ὀλίγου δεήσαντος κατα: 
λευσθῆναι πράως λέγοι τὸ αὑτοῦ πάθος, ἰδ τε 
αὐτὸν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου ἐξίστασθαι. 15. ἐν τούτῳ δὲ 
ἐπήει καὶ Κῦρος καὶ ἐπύθετο τὸ πρᾶγμα᾽ εὐθὺς ὃ 
ἔλαβε τὰ παλτὰ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας καὶ σὺν τοῦς σαρονσι 
τῶν πιστῶν ἧκεν ἐλαύνων εἰς τὸ μέσον, καὶ λέγει 
τάδε. 16. Κλέαρχε καὶ Πρόξενε καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι οἱ 
παρόντες Ἕλληνες, οὐκ ἴστε on ποιεῖτε. εἰ yop τῶν 
ἀλλήλοις μάχην συνάψετε, νομίζετε ἊΨ τῇδε τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 
ἐμέ τε κατακεκόψεσθαι καὶ ὑμᾶς μὴ πολὺ ἐμοῦ —— 
ρον" κακῶς yap τῶν ἡμετέρων ἐχόντων πάντες οὗτοι 
ods ὁρᾶτε βάρβαροι πολεμιώτεροι ἡμῖν ἔσονται τῶν 
παρὰ βασιλεῖ ὄντων. 17. ἀκούσας ταῦτα ὁ Κλέαρ- 
yos ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἐγένετο: καὶ παυσάμενοι ἀμφότεροι 


A 9 
κατὰ χώραν ἔθεντο τὰ οπλα. 














eee a EET 





XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. 


CHAPTER VI. 


Marching down the Euphrates from the vicinity of Charmande, Cyrus 
finds evidence of the nearness of the king’s cavalry (1). The treach- 
ery of Orontas. He persuades Cyrus to give him 2,000 cavalry 

* ὦ . 5 : 2 ; ΨΥ 
promising to kill or capture the hostile cavalry in the neighborhood; 
he write: tte » king ; disclosi hi 

: rites a letter to the king ; disclosing the plan and his purpose 
to revolt, and places it in the hands of one whom he thought trust- 
worthy, to be forwarded to the king (2,3). It falls however into 
Ὺ ι) we ι) ΓΙ ν ἴω ΄ . M4 ᾽ 
Cyrus's hands. Orontas is arrested, and a council is summoned, to 
which Clearchus is invited (4,5). Cyrus states the object of the 
council (the trial of Orontas), recites his former acts of indulgence 
γε a ἢ ‘ ᾿ 19 , Η ᾿ Poe 
towards the culprit, and cross-examines him, eliciting the confession 
that he has acted with injustice towards his benefactor (6-8) 
Clearchus urg cuti ao 5 ἱ , 
: archus urges the execution of Orontas, and Cyrus, taking the 
πρὸς by the girdle, delivers him to a faithful servant, who per- 
orms the executi cretly thi i as 

the execution so secretly that nothing was ever afterwards 

seen of Orontas dead or alive (9-11). 


1. Ἐντεῦθεν προϊόντων ἐφαίνετο ἴχνη ἵππων καὶ 
κόπρος" εἰκάζετο δ᾽ εἶναι ὁ στίβος ὡς δισχιλίων 
ἵππων. οὗτοι προϊόντες ἔκαον καὶ χιλὸν καὶ εἴ τι 
ἄλλο χρήσιμον ἦν. Ὀρόντας δὲ Πέρσης ἀνὴρ γένει 
τε προσήκων βασιλεῖ καὶ τὰ πολέμια λεγόμενος ἐν 
τοῖς ἀρίστοις Περσῶν ἐπιβουλεύει Κύρῳ καὶ πρό. 
σθεν πολεμήσας, καταλλαγεὶς δέ. 2. οὗτος Κύρῳ 
εἶπεν, εἶ αὐτῷ δοίη ἱππέας χιλίους, ὅτι τοὺς προκατα- 
κάοντας ἱππέας ἢ κατακάνοι ἂν ἐνεδρεύσας ἢ ζῶντας 
πολλοὺς αὐτῶν ἂν ἕλοι καὶ κωλύσειε τοῦ κάειν ἐπιόν- 
τας, καὶ ποιήσειεν ὥστε μήποτε δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς 


> , Ν ’ , 
ἰδόντας τὸ Κύρου στράτευμα βασιλεῖ διαγγεῖλαι. τῷ 
τ 











Book 1] CHAPTER VI. 1-6. 255 


Ἀ ’ , ’ ~ > ’ 3 ᾽ > A 
δὲ Κύρῳ ἀκούσαντι ταῦτα ἐδόκει ὠφέλιμα εἶναι, Kat 
ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν λαμβάνειν μέρος παρ᾽ ἑκάστου τῶν 
ε ’ ε ᾿ 8 ’ ΄ ε , > 
ἡγεμόνων. 3. ὁ δ᾽ ᾽Ορόντας νομίσας ἑτοίμους εἶναι 
ε ~ ‘ ε ’ ’ 5 Ἁ Ν ’ 
αὑτῷ τοὺς ἱππέας γράφει ἐπιστολὴν παρὰ βασιλέα 
Ψ σ » ε , ε Δ , , - Q 
ὅτι nou ἔχων ἱππέας ws ἂν δύνηται πλείστους - ἀλλὰ 
φράσαι τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ ἱππεῦσιν ἐκέλευεν ὡς φίλιον αὐτὸν 
ε , > ~ \ > ~A > ~ 4 ~ , 
ὑποδέχεσθαι. ἐνὴν δὲ ἐν TH ἐπιστολῇ Kal τῆς πρό- 
σθεν φιλίας ὑπομνήματα καὶ πίστεως. ταύτην τὴν 
- » 
ἐπιστολὴν δίδωσι πιστῷ ἀνδρί, ὡς ῴετο: ὁ δὲ λαβὼν 
Κύρῳ δίδωσιν. 4. ἀναγνοὺς δὲ αὐτὴν ὁ Κῦρος συλ- 
λαμβάνει ᾿Ορόνταν, καὶ συγκαλεῖ εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 
σκηνὴν Πέρσας τοὺς ἀρίστους τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἐπτά, 
\ ‘ ~ ε ,’ Ν > ’ ε ’ 
καὶ τοὺς τῶν Ἑλλήνων στρατηγοὺς ἐκέλευσεν ὁπλίτας 
5 ΄“ ’ὔ Ν ’ Ν ν A A e A 
ἀγαγεῖν, τούτους δὲ θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα περὶ THY αὑτοῦ 
σκηνήν. οἱ δὲ ταῦτα ἐποίησαν, ἀγαγόντες ὡς τρισ- 
χιλίους ὁπλίτας. 5. Κλέαρχον δὲ καὶ εἴσω παρε- 
, , σ \ >. A Q A » 
κάλεσε σύμβουλον, ὅς γε Kal αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς adAoLs 
΄“"ἍΟ A ε Ν 3 
ἐδόκει προτιμηθῆναι μάλιστα τῶν Ἑλλήνων. ἐπεὶ ὃ 
ἐξῆλθεν, ἐξήγγειλε τοῖς φίλοις τὴν κρίσιν τοῦ ‘OpovTa 
ε 3 ’ > Ν > , > » Ν ~ 
ὡς ἐγένετο: οὐ yap ἀπόρρητον ἦν. 6. ἔφη δὲ Κῦ- 
» ~ ’ χὰ 4 e ἴω » 
ρον ἄρχειν τοῦ λόγου ὧδε, Ἰ]αρεκάλεσα ὑμᾶς, ἄνδρες 
’ὔ 9 \ τ “ ’ ν ’ ’ 3 
φίλοι, ὅπως σὺν ὑμῖν βουλευόμενος ὅτι δίκαιόν ἐστι 
καὶ πρὸς θεῶν καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων, τοῦτο πράξω 
περὶ ᾿Ορόντα τουτουί. τοῦτον γὰρ πρῶτον μὲν ὃ 
νι κα \ ¥ © 4 > > ’ 9 Ν A 
ἐμὸς πατὴρ ἔδωκεν ὑπήκοον εἶναι ἐμοί" ἐπεὶ δὲ 
’ ε » > , e Ν “ > ~ 5 A Ὁ 
ταχθείς, ὡς ἔφη αὐτός, ὑπὸ τοῦ ἐμοῦ ἀδελφοῦ οὗτος 
3 / > \ ¥ Ν > Ss , ὃ 3 , λ 
ἐπολέμησεν ἐμοὶ ἔχων τὴν ἐν Σάρδεσιν ἀκρόπολιν 
Ν Wee, a a > 4 ν δό 
καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸν προσπολεμὼν ἐποίησα WOTE όξαι 


’ “ Ν ee.” , , Ν ὃ Ν 
τούτῳ τοῦ πρὸς ἐμὲ πολέμου παύσασθαι, καὶ δεξιὰν 



































256 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Boox I. 


¥ ie κι 
ἔλαβον καὶ ἔδωκα, 7. μετὰ ταῦτα, ἔφη, ὦ ᾿Ορόντα, 
» ν γδί > / ν »ν 4 4 
εστιν OTL OE ἡδίκησα; ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι οὔ. πάλιν Se 
ε ~ 5 4 ~ 9 
0 Kupos ἠρώτα, Οὐκοῦν ὕστερον, WS αὐτὸς σὺ ὁμο- 
λογεῖς, οὐδὲν ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀδικούμενος ἀποστὰς εἰς 
᾿ Ἀ - , ‘ 
Μυσοὺς κακῶς ἐποίεις τὴν ἐμὴν χώραν ὅτι ἐδύνω ; 
» ε > , 7 ~ yw ~ , ~ 
ἔφη ὁ ‘Opovtas. Οὐκοῦν, ἐφη ὁ Κῦρος, ὁπότ᾽ αὖ 
»᾿ A an δύ » \ > ἃ A A > / 
εγνως τὴν σαυτοῦ δύναμιν, ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς Δρτέ- 
A - 4 4 
μιδος βωμὸν μεταμέλειν τέ σοι ἔφησθα καὶ πείσας 
5.νΝ . , ¥ A 
ἐμὲ πιστὰ πάλιν ἔδωκάς μοι καὶ ἔλαβες Tap ἐμοῦ 


; 
A ~ , > 
καὶ ταῦθ᾽ ὡμολόγει ὃ Ὀρόντας. 8. Τί οὖν, ἔφη ὁ 


A > 4 + os κι 

Κῦρος, ἀδικηθεὶς UT ἐμοῦ νῦν τὸ τρίτον ἐπιβουλεύων 

Ν ἴω 

μοι φανερὸς γέγονας; εἰπόντος δὲ τοῦ ‘Opovta ὅτι 
ἡδὲ Tt A , > , ε A > , e 

οὐθέν adiKnleEis, npwrnoev ὃ Κῦρος αὐτόν, Ὁμολο- 
μῆς > are OL a κι , > , 

YELS οὖν περὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος γεγενῆσθαι; 7H γὰρ ἀνάγκη, 

¥ ¢ > / > “A 

ἔφη ὁ Opovtas. ἐκ τούτου πάλιν ἠρώτησεν ὁ Κῦρος, 

Vor ~~ at ~ ~ ~ 

Ett οὖν ἂν γένοιο τῷ ἐμῷ ἀδελφῷ πολέμιος, ἐμοὶ δὲ 
ir A δὰ ε δὲ + / 4 b > » 

φίλος καὶ πιστός; ὁ δὲ ἀπεκρίνατο OTL οὐδ᾽ εἰ γε- 
, ~ “A » She 

νοίμην, ὦ Kupe, σοί γ᾽ ἄν ποτε ἔτι δόξαιμι. 9. πρὸς 

ταυτα Κῦρος εἶπε τοῖς παροῦσιν, Ὁ μὲν ἀνὴρ τοι- 
~ 4 , ~ A 

αὐτὰ μὲν πεποίηκε, τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγει: ὑμῶν δὲ σὺ 

πρώτοξ, ὦ Κλέαρχε, ἀπόφηναι γνώμην ὅτι σοι δοκεῖ. 
¥ , \ > 4 4 

Κλέαρχος δὲ εἶπε τάδε. Συμβουλεύω ἐγὼ τὸν ἄνδρα 
os ~ A ~ 

τοῦτον ἐκποδὼν ποιεῖσθαι ὡς τάχιστα, ὡς μηκέτι 
, ~ , i) ”~ 

δέῃ τοῦτον φυλάττεσθαι, ἀλλὰ σχολὴ ἢ ἡμῖν τὸ 

Ν ~ > ‘ > Ν ’ 3 > A 
κατὰ τοῦτον εἰναι τοὺς ἐθελοντὰς φίλους εὖ ποιεῖν. 
’ 4 ~ ’ » ‘ ‘ » 

10. ταύτῃ δὲ τῇ γνώμῃ ἔφη καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους προσ- 
, ‘ iy ¥ , 

θέσθαι. μετὰ ταῦτα, ἔφη, κελεύοντος Κυρου ἔλαβον 
“~ ’ Ν 3 , νυ , 9 > 

τῆς ζώνης τὸν Ὀρόνταν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ ἅπαντες ἀνα- 


, ἃ ε “Ἂ > χω ae 
στάντες καὶ OL Guvyeves: εἶτα δ᾽ ἐξῆγον αὐτὸν οἷς 














Βοοκ I.] CHAPTERS VI. 7-11 — VII. 957 


, 5 Ν Ν > 5 % 9 , 
προσετάχθη. ἐπεὶ δὲ εἶδον αὐτὸν οἵπερ πρόσθεν 
προσεκύνουν, καὶ τότε προσεκύνησαν, καίπερ εἰδότες 
σ΄ 5 A ’ » 5 \ \ > \ > 
ὅτι ἐπὶ θάνατον ayouro. 11. ἐπεὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν Αρτα- 
πάτου σκηνὴν εἰσήχθη τοῦ πιστοτάτου τῶν Κύρου 
σκηπτούχων, μετὰ ταῦτα οὔτε ζῶντα ᾿Ορόνταν οὔτε 

/ > A εὺ ’ > \ 7 > ’ 
τεθνηκότα οὐδεὶς εἶδε πώποτε οὐδὲ ὅπως ἀπέθανεν 
" » 
οὐδεὶς εἰδὼς ἔλεγεν - εἴκαζον δὲ ἄλλοι ἄλλως: τάφος 


δὲ οὐδεὶς πώποτε αὐτοῦ ἐφάνη. 





CHAPTER VII. 


Babylonia is at length reached ; during his progress through it, Cyrus 
reviews his men and learns of the condition of the king’s army (1, 2). 
In an address to the Greeks he exhorts them to prove themselves 
worthy men, assuring them that the king’s army, though large, is 
harmless. He promises great rewards if they endure the first shock. 
These promises he declares he will not forget (3-5); for in a kingdom 
so great as that of Persia the difficulty is not in finding the means to 
fulfil his promises, but the persons worthy of them (3-7). The 
soldiers are pleased and beg him to remain in the rear during the 
fight. Another review is made, the Greeks amounting to about 
13,000, and the barbarians to 100,000 (8-10). The enemy amount 
to over a million men and possess 200 scythe-bearing chariots ; their 
cavalry numbers 6,000 (11-13). The advance is now made more 
cautiously as they near the king’s army and pass, one after another, 
the many deep trenches, which were cut to impede an enemy’s 
progress. Some of these extended almost to the Euphrates itself, 
leaving only an extremely narrow width of ground over which Cyrus 
might lead his army (14-17). The generosity of Cyrus towards the 
priest Silanus (18). Surprised that the king does not meet him in 
battle, Cyrus continues on his way somewhat negligent in his dis- 
cipline, many of the soldiers placing their arms in the baggace- 


wagons. 
17 





ee 


SETI 














258 XENOPHON'S ANABASIS. |Boox I. 


> a ~ 
1. ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Βαβυλωνίας oral- 
Ν “a , “~ 
μοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας δώδεκα. ἐν δὲ τῷ τρίτῳ 
σταθμῳ Κῦρος ἐξέτασιν ποιεῖται τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ 
~ 4 ~ , , 
τῶν βαρβάρων ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ περὶ μέσας νύκτας. 
286 Ν > ‘ 39 “ Ψ ν , ‘ 
ἐδόκει yap εἰς THY ἐπιοῦσαν ἕω ἥξειν βασιλέα σὺν 
~ ͵ ’ a , 
τῷ στρατεύματι μαχούμενον. Kal ἐκέλευε Κλέαρχον 
4 A - , > , 
μὲν τοῦ δεξιοῦ κέρως ἡγεῖσθαι, Μένωνα δὲ τὸν @er- 
Ν ΄“ 5 ’ > Ν A ‘ ε ~ , 
ταλὸν τοῦ εὐωνύμου, αὐτὸς δὲ τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ διέταξε. 
2. μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἐξέτασιν ἅμα τῇ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἡ 
μα τῇ ἢ ἡμέρᾳ ἧκον- 
4 , A ’ ’ 5 4 
τες αὐτόμολοι παρὰ μεγάλου βασιλέως ἀπήγγελλον 
» ἡ \ “A ,’ ~ ~ 
Κύρῳ περὶ τῆς βασιλέως στρατιᾶς. Κῦρος δὲ συγ- 
, Ν Ν A ἃ ~ ε ’ 
καλέσας τοὺς στρατηγοὺς καὶ λοχαγοὺς τῶν “Ἑλλήνων 
, ’ ~ ΕΣ ~ 
συνεβουλεύετό τε πῶς ἂν THY μάχην ποιοῖτο Kal αὐτὸς 
4 7 γι 
παρήνει θαρρύνων τοιάδε. 3. Ὦ ἄνδρες Ἕλληνες, 
3 3 ’ > - pa 
οὐκ ἀνθρώπων ἀπορῶν βαρβάρων συμμάχους ὑμᾶς 
» > ‘ , ~ 
ἄγω, ἄλλα νομίζων ἀμείνους Kal κρείττους πολλῶν 
’ ε ~ > Ν A / ΄σ 
βαρβάρων ὑμᾶς εἶναι, διὰ τοῦτο προσέλαβον. ὅπως 
> ν » ~ a 
οὖν ἔσεσθε avdpes ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἧς κέκτησθε 
Ἀ es ~ > ο 
καὶ ἧς ὑμᾶς ἐγὼ εὐδαιμονίζω. εὖ γὰρ ἴστε ὅτι τὴν 
ἐλευθερίαν ἑλοίμην ἂν ἀντὶ ὧν ἔχω πάντων καὶ ἄλλων 
πολλαπλασίων. 4. ὅπως δὲ καὶ εἰδῆτε εἰς οἷον ἔρ- 
χεσθε ἀγῶνα, ὑμᾶς εἰδὼς διδάξω. τὸ μὲν γὰρ πλῆθος 
Ne A A λλῃ δ᾿ ΕΣ δὲ “ > , 
πολυ Kal Kpavyyn πολλῃ ἐπίασιν" ἂν δὲ ταῦτα ἀνά- 
θ A » Ν > σὴ, ’ ~ σ 
σχησῦε, τὰ ἀλλα καὶ αἰσχυνεισθαί μοι δοκῶ οἵους 
ε > ’ A ~ , 
μιν γνώσεσθε τοὺς ἐν TH χώρᾳ ὄντας ἀνθρώπους 
4 δὰ ΄ ἃ a ¥ > - 
ὑμῶν δὲ ἀνδρῶν ὄντων. καὶ εὖ τῶν ἐμῶν γενομένων, 
δ Ν ε A Ν Ν » , > , ~ 
ἐγὼ ὑμῶν Tov μὲν οἴκαδε βουλόμενον ἀπιένα: τοῖς 
» ‘ 4 “ 
οἰκοι ζηλωτὸν ποιήσω ἀπελθεῖν, πολλοὺς δὲ οἶμαι 
la \ > , > ~ 
ποιήσειν τὰ παρ ἐμοὶ ἑλέσθαι ἀντὶ τῶν οἴκοι. 








Βοοκ I.] CHAPTER VII. 1-10. 259 


~ , ’ 
5. ἐνταῦθα Γαυλίτης παρὼν φυγὰς Σάμιος, πιστὸς δὲ 
> A > ~ , , 
Κύρῳ, εἶπε, Kat μήν, ὦ Κῦρε, λέγουσί τινες ὅτι 
πολλὰ ὑπισχνεῖ νῦν διὰ τὸ ἐν τοιούτῳ εἶναι τοῦ κιν- 
Q > , , 
δύνου προσιόντος, ἂν δὲ εὖ γένηταί TL, οὐ μεμνήσε- 
᾿ , , Mu A > > > m7 A 
σθαί σέ φασιν: ἔνιοι δὲ οὐδ᾽ εἰ μεμνῃό τε Kal 


ν 


’ 4 ΒΩ 9 ~ ε ~ 
βούλοιο δύνασθαι αν ἀποδοῦνα:ι οσα ὑπισΧχΡεέει. 


ε 


6. ἀκούσας ταῦτα ἔλεξεν ὁ Κῦρος, ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἔστι μὲν 
ες: “κα > ¥ e 9 Ν ε / Ν Ν 

ἡμῖν, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἡ ἀρχὴ ἡ πατρῴα πρὸς μὲν μεσημ- 
βρίαν μέχρι οὗ διὰ καῦμα οὐ δύνανται οἰκεῖν avOpo- 


Ν A » ’ a Ν ΄“ A > 9 
ποι, πρὸς δὲ ἄρκτον μέχρι οὗ διὰ χειμῶνα. τὰ δ᾽ ἐν 
μέσῳ τούτων πάντα σατραπεύουσιν οἱ τοῦ ἐμοῦ 
ἀδελφοῦ φίλο. 7. ἣν δ᾽ ἡμεῖς νικήσωμεν, ἡμᾶς 
δεῖ τοὺς ἡμετέρους φίλους τούτων ἐγκρατεῖς ποιῆσαι. 
ὥστε οὐ τοῦτο δέδοικα μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ὅτι δῶ ἑκάστῳ 

= , a > , 3 Ν \ > ¥ e Ν 
τῶν φίλων, ἂν εὖ γένηται, ἀλλὰ μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ἱκανοὺς 
οἷς δῶ. ὑμῶν δὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ στέφανον ἑκάστῳ 
χρυσοῦν δώσω. 8. οἱ δὲ ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες αὐτοι 

> \ , ‘ ~ ¥ da 
τε ἦσαν πολὺ προθυμότεροι Kal τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐξήγγελ- 
λον. εἰσῇσαν δὲ παρ᾽ αὐτὸν οἵ τε στρατηγοὶ καὶ 
τῶν ἄλλων ᾿Ελλήνων τινὲς ἀξιοῦντες εἰδέναι τί σφίσιν 
ἔσται, ἐὰν κρατήσωσιν. ὁ δὲ ἐμπιμπλὰς ἁπάντων 

Ν A 
τὴν γνώμην ἀπέπεμπε. 9. παρεκελεύοντο δὲ αὐτῷ 

’ ν ’ " ’ὔ 3 ’ ¥ 
πάντες ὅσοιπερ διελέγοντο μὴ μάχεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ome 
σθεν ἑαυτῶν τάττεσθαι. ἐν δὲ τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ 
Κλέαρχος ὧδέ πως ἤρετο τὸν Κῦρον. Οἴει γάρ σοι 
μαχεῖσθαι, ὦ Κῦρε, τὸν ἀδελφόν; Νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη ὁ 
Κῦρος, εἴπερ γε Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδός ἐστι παῖς, 
> ἡ \ 3 ,ὕ ᾽ > Ν a 9% Bi. ® , 
ἐμὸς δὲ ἀδελφός, οὐκ ἀμαχεὶ ταῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ λήψομαι. 

> ~ \ 5 “ες 3 4 3 Ν > 4 ~ 
10. ἐνταῦθα δὴ ἐν τῇ ἐξοπλισίᾳ ἀριθμὸς ἐγένετο τῶν 





























260 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Boox 4. 


\ Ἔλλ ’ > ὡν ’ὔ ‘ , A 
μεν ὥλληνων ἀσπὶς μυρία καὶ τετρακοσία, πελτασταὶ 
A ’ ἃ ΄“Ἂ Ν ὋΝ 
δὲ δισχίλιοι καὶ πεντακόσιοι, τῶν δὲ μετὰ Κύρου 
’ δέ (ὃ 4 9 , 
βαρβάρων δέκα μυριάδες καὶ ἅρματα δρεπανηφόρα 
3 \ Ν » ~ > 
ἀμφὶ τὰ εἴκοσι. 11. τῶν δὲ πολεμίων ἐλέγοντο εἶναι 
e \ . » , a, ee 
EKATOV καὶ εἴκοσι μυριάδες Kal ἅρματα δρεπανηφόρα 
, » > - a 
διακόσια. ἄλλοι δὲ ἦσαν ἑξακισχίλιοι ἱππεῖς, ὧν 
> , > e > 3 ΞΕ ee , 
Aptayepons ἦρχεν" οὗτοι δ᾽ αὖ πρὸ αὐτοῦ βασιλέως 
’ > la 
τεταγμένοι ἦσαν. 12. τοῦ δὲ βασιλέως στρατεύματος 
κα » , 
ἦσαν ἄρχοντες καὶ στρατηγοὶ Kal ἡγεμόνες τέτταρες, 
’ (ὃ ν > ’ mn , 
τριάκοντα μυριάδων ἐκαστος, ᾿Αβροκόμας, Τισσαφέρ- 


/ > , 4 ’ 5 
νης, Τωβρύας, ᾿Αρβάκης. τούτων δὲ παρεγένοντο ἐν 


’ὔ » ’ , i 
ΤΊ μάχῃ ἐνενήκοντα μυριάδες καὶ ἅρματα Speravy- 
φόρα ἑκατὸν καὶ πεντήκοντα" ᾿Αβροκόμας δὲ bore. 
~ , 4 ’ 
PNTE τῆς μάχης ἡμέραις πέντε, ἐκ Φοινίκης ἐλαύνων. 
~ A ¥ ~ 
13. ταῦτα δὲ ἤγγελλον πρὸς Κυρον οἱ αὐτομολή- 
σαντες ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων παρὰ μεγάλου βασιλέως πρὸ 
“~ , \ ‘ Ν ’ a 7 ’ 
τῆς μάχης, καὶ μετὰ τὴν μάχην οἱ ὕστερον ἐλήφθη- 
~ 4 5 . »; > ΄. 
σαν των πολεμίων ταὐτὰ ἤγγελλον. 14. ἐντεῦθεν 
δὲ Kv ᾿ς λ 4 A, Ν ν , A 
€ Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας τρεῖς 
συντεταγμένῳ TH στρατεύματι παντὶ καὶ τῷ Ἑλλη- 
΄ Α ~ ~ » Ν , Εν , 
νικῳ καὶ τῷ βαρβαρικῷ" ᾧετο γὰρ ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 
μαχεῖσθαι βασιλέα: κατὰ γὰρ μέσον τὸν σταθμὸν 
τοῦτον τάφρος ἦν ὀρυκτὴ βαθεῖα, τὸ μὲν εὖρος ὀρ- 
Ν ’ Ν δὲ ’ > Ν “A , 
γυιαι πέντε, τὸ ὃὲ βάθος ὀργυιαὶ τρεῖς. 15. παρετέ- 
Ἁ ’ » ΄“-“ , 
Tato δὲ ἡ τάφρος ἄνω διὰ τοῦ πεδίου ἐπὶ δώδεκα 
’ / “A 
παρασάγγας μέχρι τοῦ Μηδίας τείχους. ἔνθα ai δι- 
’ > ‘ ~ , [4] 
ὠρυχες, ἀπὸ Tov Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ ῥέουσαι:" εἰσὶ δὲ 
ra Ν A > ~ A A 
TeTTApEs, TO μέν εὕρος πλεθριαῖαι, βαθεῖαι δὲ ἰσχυρῶς, 
Ἁ “A A b > ΗΝ, , > ’ 
καὶ πλοῖα πλεῖ ἐν αὐταῖς σιταγωγά' εἰσβάλλουσι 


Βοοκ 1] CHAPTER VII. 11-20. 261 


\ > Ν > , / Q> e , , 
δὲ εἰς TOV Εὐφράτην, διαλείπουσι δ᾽ ἑκάστη Tapacay- 

4 > » > Q QA Q — 9 , 
γην, γέφυραι δ᾽ ἔπεισιν. ἢν δὲ παρὰ τὸν Εὐφράτην 
πάροδος στενὴ μεταξὺ τοῦ ποταμοῦ καὶ τῆς τάφρου 
ε ¥ κ᾿ ‘ > , \ \ , 
ὡς εἴκοσι ποδῶν τὸ Etpos: 16. ταύτην δὲ τὴν τά- 
ἈΝ ~ 4 > \ > 4 > A 
φρον βασιλεὺς ποιεῖ μέγας ἀντὶ ἐρύματος, ἐπειδὴ 
πυνθάνεται Κῦρον προσελαύνοντα. ταύτην δὴ τὴν 
΄ >A »ὕὔ δι ὦ ‘ - ἡ τ ἦν ον τὰ 
πάροδον Κῦρός τε καὶ ἡ στρατιὰ παρῆλθε καὶ ἐγέ- 
νοντὸ εἴσω τῆς Tappov. 17. ταύτῃ μὲν οὖν τῇ 

ε / > " ’ ’ 5 » ε ’ 
ἡμέρᾳ οὐκ ἐμαχέσατο βασιλεύς, ἀλλ᾽ ὑποχωρούντων 
φανερὰ ἦσαν καὶ ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη πολλά. 
18. ἐνταῦθα Κῦρος Σιλανὸν καλέσας τὸν ᾿Αμπρακιώτην 
μάντιν ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ δαρεικοὺς τρισχιλίους, ὅτι τῇ 
ἑνδεκάτῃ am ἐκείνης ἡμέρᾳ προθυόμενος εἶπεν αὐτῷ 
9 \ 5 ~ , ε ~ aa > > 
ott βασιλεὺς ov μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν, Κῦρος δ᾽ εἷ- 
πεν, Οὐκ ἄρα ἔτι μαχεῖται, εἰ ἐν ταύταις οὐ μαχεῖται 
ταῖς ἡμέραις: ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀληθεύσῃς, ὑπισχνοῦμαί σοι 
δέκα τάλαντα. τοῦτο τὸ χρυσίον τότε ἀπέδωκεν, ἐπεὶ 
παρῆλθον ai δέκα ἡμέραι. 19. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῇ τάφρῳ 
, ’ 
οὐκ ἐκώλυε βασιλεὺς τὸ Κύρου στράτευμα διαβαίνειν, 
»ἥὉἋ - \ "3 4 ~ » be] ’ A , 
edofe kat Κύρῳ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἀπεγνωκέναι τοῦ pa- 
χεσθαι: ὥστε τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ Κῦρος ἐπορεύετο ἠμελη- 
/ a “ A , > , a ἵν 

μένως μᾶλλον. 20. τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ἐπί τε τοῦ αρματος 
καθήμενος τὴν πορείαν ἐποιεῖτο καὶ ὀλίγους ἐν τάξει 
ἔχων πρὸ αὑτοῦ, τὸ δὲ πολὺ αὐτῷ ἀνατεταραγμένον 
- A Ν \ 
ἐπορεύετο Kal TOV ὅπλων τοῖς στρατιώταις πολλὰ ἐπὶ 


ε fo ¥ ἈΝ ε , 
ἀμαξων ἤγετο Kat ὑποζυγίων. 





XENOPTION’S ANABASIS. 


CHAPTER VIII. 


THE Barrie or Cunaxa. It is about noon, when a horseman, gallop- 
ing at full speed, announces the approach of the king’s army. The 
news creates great confusion; but Cyrus bids his soliiers prepare for 
the contest and fall into line (1-3). Position of the Greek army and 
of the forces of the barbarians (4,5). Cyrus takes his position at 
the centre of the line, with his head uncovered, surrounded by his 
600 bravest men (6, 7). Shortly after noon the enemy appear, their 
cavalry in white breast-coverings and led by Tissaphernes. In front 
of them are the scythe-bearing chariots, to be sent at random among 
the Greeks (8-10). As the king approaches silently and slowly, 
Cyrus orders Clearchus to lead his men against him, at the middle of 
the line, hoping to cut him down and to win the victory at once. 
But Clearchus, fearing lest he be surrounded, hesitates to withdraw 
from the Euphrates ; the entire Greek line maintaining its position, 
whilst the ranks are filling up, and the watchword of success, “Zeus 
the Savior, and Victory,” is passed along (11-16). As soon as the 
enemy are almost within bow-shot, the Greeks charge and put them 
to flight, the chariots fail to do any harm, and the victory seems 
already to belong to Cyrus (17-20). But fearing that the enemy 
may turn him in the rear, he charges with his 600 against the king’s 
centre, disperses many of the latter’s body guard, and even wounds 
the king, when he is himself struck beneath the eye by a javelin. 
In the confusion, Cyrus is killed, a few of his most devoted followers 
fall with him, and his most faithful sceptre-bearer, Artapates, covers 
his master’s body with his own corpse (21-28). 


1. Kat ἤδη τε Hv ἀμφὶ ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν καὶ 
πλησίον ἦν ὁ σταθμὸς ἔνθα ἔμελλε καταλύειν, ἡνίκα 
Πατηγύας ἀνὴρ Πέρσης τῶν ἀμφὶ Κῦρον πιστῶν 
προφαίνεται ἐλαύνων ἀνὰ κράτος ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ, 
καὶ εὐθὺς πᾶσιν οἷς ἐνετύγχανεν ἐβόα καὶ βαρβαρι- 


Boox 1] CHAPTER VIII. 1-8. 


nw A ε ~ σ A 4 Fd 
κῶς καὶ ἑλληνικῶς ὅτι βασιλεὺς σὺν στρατεύματι 
» , ’ 
πολλῷ προσέρχεται ὡς εἰς μάχην παρεσκευασμένος. 
2. ἔνθα δὴ πολὺς τάραχος ἐγένετο" αὐτίκα γὰρ ἐδό- 
εν \ , i 2 ὦ , 9 
κουν οἱ Ἕλληνες καὶ πάντες δὲ ἀτάκτοις σφίσιν ἐπι- 
πεσεῖσθαι: 3. Κῦρός τε καταπηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ 


σ ‘ , > 2 " . Ἀ > A Ν τ 
αρματος TOV θώρακα ἐνέδυ και ἀναβὰς ΕΤι TOV UTTOV 


τὰ παλτὰ εἰς Tas χεῖρας ἔλαβε, τοῖς τε ἄλλοις πᾶσι 
παρήγγελλεν ἐξοπλίζεσθαι καὶ καθίστασθαι εἰς τὴν 
~ ο » QA nw 
ἑαυτοῦ τάξιν ἕκαστον. 4. ἔνθα δὴ σὺν Toddy 
σπουδῇ καθίσταντο, Κλέαρχος μὲν τὰ δεξιὰ τοῦ κέ- 
» Ν “~ 5 ’ ” , Ἁ 

patos ἔχων πρὸς τῷ Εὐφράτῃ ποταμῷ, ἹΙρόξενος δὲ 
> ‘4 ε > » Ν ΄“ ’ A A Ν 
ἐχόμενος, οἵ δ᾽ ἄλλοι μετὰ τοῦτον, Μένων δὲ καὶ τὸ 


, Ν Pd 4 » ~ ε A 
στράτευμα τὸ εὐώνυμον κέρας ἔσχε τοῦ Ἐλληνικοῦ. 
5. τοῦ δὲ βαρβαρικοῦ ἱππεῖς μὲν Παφλαγόνες εἰς 

, Ν , » 3 ” ὃ A Ν Ν 
χιλίους παρὰ Κλέαρχον ἔστησαν ἐν τῷ δεξιῷ καὶ τὸ 
tm Ν , > \ ~ > 4, > a, 
Ελληνικὸν πελταστικόν, ἐν δὲ TH εὐωνύμῳ ApLatos 
τε ὁ Κύρου ὕπαρχος καὶ τὸ ἄλλο βαρβαρικόν, 6. Κυ- 
ρος δὲ καὶ οἱ ἱππεῖς τούτου ὅσον ἑξακόσιοι κατὰ τὸ 

, ε 4 ’ Ἁ > Ν Ἀ 4 
μέσον, ὡπλισμένοι θώραξι μὲν αὐτοὶ καὶ παραμηριδί- 
οις καὶ κράνεσι πάντες πλὴν Κύρου. Κῦρος δὲ ψιλὴν 
ἔχων τὴν κεώαλην εἰς τὴν μάχην καθίστατο λέγεται 
ue καὶ τοὺς "λλους Πέρσας ψιλαῖς ταῖς kepahats ἐν 
τῷ πολέμῳ διακινδυνεύειν. 7. οἱ δ᾽ ἵπποι πάντες 
> , Ν 
οἱ μετὰ Κύρου εἶχον καὶ προμετωπίδια καὶ προστερ- 
, > κ᾿ \ , e 2 μι τὰ , 
νίδια- εἶχον δὲ καὶ μαχαίρας οἱ ἱππεῖς EdAnvixas. 
8. καὶ ἤδη τε ἦν μέσον ἡμέρας καὶ οὔπω καταφανεῖς 
> e , a Fe Ν ’, Wee > 4 
ἦσαν οἱ πολέμιοι: ἡνίκα δὲ δείλη ἐγίγνετο, ἐφάνη 
a “~ 
κονιορτὸς ὥσπερ νεφέλη λευκή, χρόνῳ δὲ συχνῳ 
- , s 4 
ὕστερον ὥσπερ μελανία Tis ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ ἐπὶ πολύ. 





XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Boox 1. 


΄ A > 4 > ’ ’ A \ γ 

ὅτε δὲ ἐγγύτερον ἐγίγνοντο, τάχα δὴ καὶ χαλκός τις 
ΤΥ An Sa X 
¥ , ’ a“ 
ἤστραπτε καὶ ai λόγχαι καὶ αἱ τάξεις καταφανεῖς 
ἐγίγνοντο. 9. καὶ ἦσαν ἱππεῖς μὲν λευκοθώρακες 
ἐπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου τῶν πολεμίων: Τισσαφέρνης ἐλέ. 
’ » > ’ \ , > ’ 
γετο τούτων ἄρχειν: ἐχόμενοι δὲ γερροφόροι, ἐχό- 
ε ~ 
μενοι δὲ ὁπλῖται σὺν ποδήρεσι ξυλίναις ἀσπίσιν. 
Αἰγύπτιοι δ᾽ οὗτοι ἐλέγοντο εἶναι: ἄλλοι δ᾽ ἱππεῖς, 
ν e 
ἄλλοι τοξόται. πάντες δ᾽ οὗτοι κατὰ ἔθνη ἐν πλαι- 
σίῳ πλήρει ἀνθρώπων ἕκαστον τὸ ἔθνος ἐπορεύετο. 
A \ 5 “A σ ’ \ 5» > 
10. πρὸ δὲ αὐτῶν ἅρματα διαλείποντα συχνὸν ἀπ 
ἀλλήλων τὰ δὴ δρεπανηφόρα καλούμενα: εἶχον δὲ 
τὰ δρέπανα ἐκ τῶν ἀξόνων εἰς πλάγιον ἀποτεταμένα 
καὶ ὑπὸ τοῖς δίφροις εἰς γὴν βλέποντα, ὡς διακό- 
Φ a 

TTEW OTH ἐντυγχάνοιεν. ἡ δὲ γνώμη ἣν ὡς εἰς τὰς 
τάξεις τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλῶντα καὶ διακόψοντα. 11. ὃ 
~ > 7 , , ~ 
μέντοι Κῦρος εἶπεν ὅτε καλέσας παρεκελεύετο τοῖς 
Ἕλλησι τὴν κραυγὴν τῶν βαρβάρων ἀνέχεσθαι, 

3 ’ “ > ‘ th 5 Ν ~ ε > 
ἐψεύσθη τοῦτο" ov yap κραυγῃ ἀλλὰ σιγῇ ὡς ἀνυ- 
στὸν καὶ ἡσυχῇ ἐν ἴσῳ καὶ βραδέως προσῇσαν. 
12. καὶ ἐν τούτῳ Κῦρος παρελαύνων αὐτὸς σὺν Ii. 
YPNTL τῷ ἑρμηνεῖ καὶ ἄλλοις τρισὶν ἢ τέτταρσι τῷ 
Κλεάρχῳ ἐβόα ἄγειν τὸ στράτευμα κατὰ μέσον τὸ 

PX4 γ ράτευμ μ 

A , “ “ΩΝ ‘ ” λ aA 9 
τῶν πολεμίων, ὅτι ἐκεῖ βασιλεὺς εἴη. κἂν τοῦτ᾽, 
ἔφη, νικῶμεν, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται. 13. ὁρῶν δὲ 
ὁ Κλέαρχος τὸ μέσον στῖφος καὶ ἀκούων Κύρου ἔξω 
ὄντα τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ εὐωνύμου βασιλέα --- τοσοῦτον 
‘ ~ 9 ’ ~ ἴω 
yap πλήθει περιῆν βασιλεὺς ὥστε μέσον τῶν ἑαυτοῦ 
ἔχων τοῦ Κύρου εὐωνύμου ἔξω ἦν --- ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως ὁ 
Κλέαρχος οὐκ ἤθελεν ἀποσπάσαι ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ 


Βοοκ 1.]} CHAPTER VIII. 9-19. 265 


τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας, φοβούμενος py κυκλωθείη ἑκατέ- 
ρωθεν, τῷ δὲ Κύρῳ ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι αὐτῷ μέλοι. sine 
καλῶς ἔχοι. 14. καὶ ἐν τούτῳ τῴ καιρῷ τὸ μὲν 
βαρβαρικὸν στράτευμα ὁμαλῶς προῇει, τὸ δὲ Bay. 
νικὸν ἔτι EV τῷ αὐτῷ μένον συνετάττετο EK TOV ere 
προσιόντων. καὶ ὁ Κῦρος παρελαύνων οὐ wary πρὸς 
αὐτῷ τῷ στρατεύματι κατεθεᾶτο ἑκατέρωσε ἀσοβλέ. 
πων εἴς τε τοὺς πολεμίους καὶ τοὺς φίλους. 15. ἰδὼν 
δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ελληνικοῦ Ξενοφῶν ᾿Αθηναῖος, 
πελάσας ὡς συναντῆσαι ἤρετο εἴ τι παραγγέλλοι. 
ὁ δ᾽ ἐπιστήσας εἶπε καὶ λέγειν ἐκέλευε πᾶσιν ὅτι 
καὶ τὰ ἱερὰ καλὰ καὶ τὰ σφάγια καλά. 16. ταῦτα 
δὲ λέγων θορύβου ἤκουσε διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος, 
καὶ ἤρετο τίς 5 θόρυβος εἴη. ὁ δὲ Κλέαρχον ahd 
ὅτι σύνθημα παρέρχεται δεύτερον ἤδη. καὶ ὃς ἐθαύ- 
μασε τίς παραγγέλλει καὶ ἤρετο ὅτι εἴη τὸ σύνθημα. 
ὁ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο Ζεὺς σωτὴρ καὶ νίκη. 17. ὁ δὲ 
Κῦρος ἀκούσας ᾿Αλλὰ δέχομαί τε, ἔφη, καὶ τοῦτο 
ἔστω. ταῦτα δ᾽ εἰπὼν εἰς τὴν αὑτοῦ χώραν ἀπήλαυνε" 
καὶ οὐκέτι τρία ἢ τέτταρα στάδια Suet ergy τὼ φά- 
λαγγε am ἀλλήλων ἡνίκα ἐπαιάνιξόν τε οἱ ΒΑΕ 
καὶ ἤρχοντο ἀντίοι ἰέναι τοις πολεμίοις. > ὧν δὲ 
πορευομένων ἐξεκύμαινέ τι τῆς φάλαγγος, bie varohet- 
πόμενον ἤρξατο δρόμῳ θεῖν: καὶ apa ἐφθέγξαντο 
πάντες οἷον τῷ Βνυαλίῳ ἐλελίζουσι, καὶ πάντες δὲ 
ἔθεον. λέγουσι δέ τινες ὡς καὶ ταῖς ἀσπίσι πρὸς 
τὰ δόρατα ἐδούπησαν φόβον ποιοῦντες τοῖς ἵπποις. 
19. πρὶν δὲ τόξευμα ἐξικνεῖσθαι ἐκκλίνουσιν οἱ βάρ- 


i φεύ ὶ ἐνταῦθα δὴ ἐδίωκον μὲν 
βαροι καὶ φεύγουσι. καὶ ί ὴ 





22S ee 


aos 





᾿ 
a 
i 
ἢ 
᾿ 
ἢ 
| 
{i 
j 
if 
iy 


ee ταν 





-.-΄ὺὕ-’ .. . . .. .. . dei Ἂ - sites 
LENNON ὦ»..5.......... —_—— - ne 
ἈΒΟΒΟΕΒΟΟΒΝΝΟΡΝΘΝΝΝΒῸΝ - -- Ν 


XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. | Boox 1. 


κατὰ κράτος οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐβόων δὲ ἀλλήλοις μὴ θεῖν 
᾽ ty 
δρόμῳ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τάξει ἕπεσθαι. 20. τὰ δ᾽ ἅρματα 
5 4 ‘\ Ἁ > > ~ ~ ’ ‘ \ 4 
ἐφέροντο τὰ μὲν δι’ αὐτῶν τῶν πολεμίων, τὰ δὲ καὶ 
Ἀ ~ ε , Ν ε , ε a Ν of. 
διὰ τῶν Ἑλλήνων κενὰ ἡνιόχων. οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ προΐδοιεν, 
, ¥ > ὦ \ , “ 3 
διίσταντο' ἔστι δ᾽ ὅστις καὶ κατελήφθη ὥσπερ ἐν 
ἱπποδρόμῳ ἐκπλαγείς - καὶ οὐδὲν μέντοι οὐδὲ τοῦτον 
~ » > ¥ ~ ΕΝ , 
παθεῖν ἔφασαν, οὐδ᾽ ἄλλος δὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐν ταύτῃ 
“ , ¥ 9 i) Ν δέ λὴ , κ ~ > ΄ 
Τῇ μάχῃ ἐπαῦεν οὐδεὶς οὐδέν, πλὴν ἐπὶ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ 
τοξευθῆναί τις ἐλέγετο. 21. Κῦρος δ᾽ ὁρῶν τοὺς 
γι “ Ν ᾽ 8 Ν ἃ ’ 
EdAnvas νικῶντας τὸ καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς καὶ διώκοντας, 
ε 4 \ 4 » ε Ἁ “ > > > 
ἡδόμενος Kal προσκυνούμενος ἤδη ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφ᾽ ad- 
’ » > ἃ 3 ’ ’ > \ 4 
TOV, οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἐξήχθη διώκειν, ἀλλὰ συνεσπειραμένην 
ἔχων τὴν τῶν σὺν ἑαυτῷ ἑξακοσίων ἱππέων τάξιν 
Β ~ ΄ 4 , Ν Ν » > Av 
ἐπεμελεῖτο OTL ποιήσει βασιλεύς. καὶ yap noe αὐτὸν 
¢ » ~ σ΄ 
ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύματος. 22. καὶ 
πάντες δ᾽ οἱ τῶν βαρβάρων ἄρχοντες μέσον ἔχοντες 
τὸ αὑτῶν ἡγοῦνται, νομίζοντες οὕτω καὶ ἐν ἀσφαλε- 
’ > “Δ > ‘ “~ 
στάτῳ εἶναι, ἣν ἢ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν ἑκατέρωθεν, καὶ εἴ 
τι παραγγεῖλαι χρήζοιεν, ἡμίσει ἂν χρόνῳ αἰσθάνε- 
A 4 ‘\ \ , 4 
σθαι τὸ στράτευμα. 23. και βασιλεὺ; δὴ τότε μέσον 
ἔχων τῆς αὑτοῦ στρατιᾶς ὅμως ἔξω ἐγένετο τοῦ Κύρου 
εὐωνύμου κέρατος. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ ἐμάχετο ἐκ 
τοῦ ἀντίου οὐδὲ τοῖς αὐτοῦ τεταγμένοις ἔμπροσθεν, 
ἐπέκαμπτεν ὡς εἰς κύκλωσι. 24. ἔνθα δὴ Κῦρος 
4 A » ’ , A ε 
δείσας μὴ ὄπισθεν γένόμενος κατακόψῃ τὸ Ἕλληνι- 
Ν 3 ϑ 3 , \ > Ν ‘ “Ὁ ε 
κὸν ἐλαύνει ἀντίος - καὶ ἐμβαλὼν σὺν τοῖς ἑξακο- 
,’ ~ ‘ / 
σίοις νικᾷ τοὺς πρὸ βασιλέως τεταγμένους καὶ εἰς 
Ἁ Ἂ» ’ὔ “" , 
φυγὴν ἔτρεψε τοὺς ἑξακισχιλίους, καὶ ἀποκτεῖναι λέ- 
γεται αὐτὸς τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χειρὶ ᾿Αρταγέρσην τὸν ἄρχοντα 


TDL 9n_9 ; 907 
Book I.] CHAPTER VIII. 20-29 iy 


, ’ 
ὑτῶν 25. ὡς δ᾽ ἡ τροπὴ ἐγένετο, διασπείρονται 
- : ; Ν ’ ε , 
καὶ of Κύρου ἑξακόσιοι εἰς τὸ διώκειν ὁρμήσαντες, 
Ν, 
’ 
πλὴν πάνυ ὀλίγοι ἀμφ᾽ αὐτὸν καταλείφθησαν, atte 
4 4 
οἱ ὁμοτράπεζοι Kahovpevor. 26. σὺν τούτοις ὃὲε 
’ A > > > “ “Ἠ ε 
tv καθορᾷ βασιλέα καὶ τὸ ἀμφ ἐκεινον στίφος᾿ 
͵ ' ; ἰλλ᾽ εἰπὰ Τὸν ἄνδρα ὁρῶ 
καὶ εὐθὺς οὐκ ἠνέσχετο, ἀλλ εἰπὼν ‘Tov ρα ὁρ 
‘ , A 4 
> αὐτὲ ὶ Ἵ τὰ τὸ στέρνον καὶ τιτρώ- 
ἵετο ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ παίει κα ρνον κα νερὰ 
σκει διὰ τοῦ θώρακος, ws φησι Κτησίας o τρός, 
ὶ ta ὑτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι. 47. παίιοντα 
καὶ ἰᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραυμὰ 4 πω... 
δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἀκοντίζει τις παλτῷ ὑπὸ τὸν ὀφθα μὸν 
΄ Ν Ἁ 
βιαίως: καὶ ἐνταῦθα μαχόμενοι Kat βασιλεὺς καὶ 
’ ε 
CU ὶ of ἀμφ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὑπὲο ἑκατέρου, OTOTOL 
Κυρος καὶ ol ἀμφ vibes ' p nile ik 
μὲν τῶν ἀμφὶ βασιλέα ἀπέθνησκον Κτησίας λέγ 
πὶ - QA 9 an > 4 
map ἐκείνῳ yap ἦν: Kupos o€ αὕτος TE serene 
; ; » 9 59» 
καὶ ὀκτὼ οἱ ἄρ:στο:. τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἔκειντο ET GUT. 
> A ~ 
1 ἜΝ @ τῶν OKY- 
28. ᾿Αρταπάτης δ᾽ ὁ sangre QUTG : 
> 
L 3 ει πεπτωκότα ELOE 
πτούχων θεράπων λέγεται, ἐν ὴ τα εἶδι 
Ν ΄“ : 
Κῦρον, καταπηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἵππου περιπέσειν αὐτῷ 
; “A ¢ > 
29. καὶ οἱ μέν φασι βασιλέα κελευσαὶ τινα ἐπι- 
ά ὑτὸν Κύ οἱ δὲ αὐτὸν ἐπισφάξασθαι 
σφάξαι αὐτὸν Κύρῳ, : ταν: 
’ 5 ξ 
σπασάμενον τὸν ἀκινάκην" εἶχε γὰρ χρυσοῦν , 
» 
ov δ᾽ ἐφό ὶ ψέλ i τἄλλα ὥσπερ οἱ 
at ψέλια κα 
στρεπτὸν δ᾽ ἐφόρει ν ¥ ee 
ἄριστοι Περσῶν: ἐτετίμητο yap vo ρ 


A » 
εὔνοιάν τε καὶ πιστοτητα. 





XENOPHON’S ANABASIS 


CHAPTER IX. 


'4E CHARACTER OF Cyrus. Like the greater Cyrus, this prince evinced 
even in boyhood, as well as in his maturer years, the qualificati μ 
of ἃ king; he was ἃ brighter and “ stronger ” scholar than kn: 
xerxes and his other companions (1—4), his bearing towards his ‘dein 
and even towards his inferiors being one of marked respect and def. 
erence, He was fond of horses and horsemanship, and showed hin 
self assiduous in practising archery and in the use of the ΡΤ (5). 
Asa young man he was fond of the hunt, and on one occasion τὰ 
encounter with a bear, he showed great bravery and skill (6) As 
satrap he was a man of integrity towards friend and foe, loyal to all 
whom he esteemed as friends, and inclined to make both his friend- 
ship and his hostility strongly marked (7-12). The wicked aad tl 
unjust he punished with relentless severity; whilst those in his etna 
who proved their bravery and their daring, were rewarded with lidgh 
offices of state (13-15). The honest were rewarded with pikes ina 
preferment ; those who served him faithfully and earne ae eels 
promoted to positions of greater responsibility (16-21), Many of the 
gifts he used to receive, he distributed among his friends with ae 
acteristic messages No one of Greeks or barbarians was nesta 
beloved by a greater number of friends 22-28). No servant ever 
deserted him, whilst many on the king’s side flocked to him: at the 
decisive battle at Cunaxa all his friends and table-companions shen 
him fell, fighting to the end, — all, except Ariaeus, who led the left 
wing ; for he and his whole army fled, on learning of Cyrus’s death 


(29-31). 


a Κῦρος μὲν οὖν οὕτως ἐτελεύτησεν, ἀνὴρ ὧν 
Περσὼν τῶν μετὰ Κῦρον τὸν ἀρχαῖον γενομένων 
βασιλικώτατός τε καὶ ἄρχειν ἀξιώτατος, ὡς παρὰ 
πάντων ὁμολογεῖται τῶν Κύρου δοκούντων ἐν πείρᾳ 
γενέσθα. 2. πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ ἔτι παῖς ὧν ὅτ᾽ 


Βοοκ 1] CHAPTER IX. 1-8. 69 


κ΄ > a σι » 
ἐπαιδεύετο Kal σὺν TO ἀδελφῷ Kal σὺν τοῖς ἄλλοις 
παισί, πάντων πάντα κράτιστος ἐνομίζετο. 3. πάντες 
\ ε ~ “ 4 ~ ~ > A ~ ’ 
γὰρ οἱ τῶν ἀρίστων Περσῶν παῖδες ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως 
7ύραι: παιδεύονται: ἔνθα πολλὴν μὲν σωφροσύνην 
, sd > Ν ᾽ 2Q\ 7 > ὦ ~ ¥ > 
καταμάθοι av τις, αἰσχρὸν δ᾽ οὐδὲν οὔτ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι οὔτ 
iA A » ~ > ς ΄Ὃ ‘ 4 
ἰδεῖν ἔστι. 4. θεῶνται δ᾽ οἱ παῖδες Kal τιμωμένους 
ε Ν ’ \ 3 ’ Ν » > 
ὑπὸ βασιλέως Kat ἀκούουσι, καὶ ἄλλους ἀτιμαζο- 
’ hed ~ » ’ » 
μένους: ὥστε εὐθὺς παῖδες ὄντες μανθάνουσιν ἄρχειν 
A + » ~ > ’ 
τε καὶ ἄρχεσθαι. 5. ἔνθα Κῦρος αἰδημονέστατος 
μὲν πρῶτον τῶν ἡλικιωτῶν ἐδόκει εἶναι, τοῖς τε 
πρεσβυτέροις: καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ὑποδεεστέρων μᾶλλον 
’ » Ν , Ν ~ 9 
πείθεσθαι, ἔπειτα δὲ φιλιππότατος καὶ τοῖς ἵπποις 
» δὰ. ¥ ’ 2 4 \ ω > \ 
ἄριστα χρῆσθαι: ἔκρινον δ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν εἰς τὸν 
’ » “~ \ > ’ 
πόλεμον ἔργων, τοξικῆς τε καὶ ἀκοντίσεως, φιλομα- 
,ὕ 5 A A 
θέστατον εἶναι καὶ μελετηρότατον. 6. ἐπεὶ δὲ TH 
5 ΄ὕ ¥ \ , ΠῚ κ᾿ N ΝΥ 
ἡλικίᾳ ἔπρεπε, καὶ φιλοθηρότατος ἣν καὶ πρὸς τὰ 
4 4 A » 
θηρία μέντοι φιλοκινδυνότατος. καὶ ἄρκτον ποτὲ 
/ Ἁ 
ἐπιφερομένην οὐκ ἔτρεσεν, ἀλλὰ συμπεσὼν κατε- 
, ‘ “΄ἂἂἦν κ N » @ Ἢ 
σπάσθη ἀπὸ τοῦ ἵππου, καὶ τὰ μὲν ἔπαθεν, ὧν καὶ 
τὰς ὠτειλὰς εἶχε, τέλο: δὲ κατέκανε: καὶ τὸν πρῶτον 
4 4 ΄“ ’ 
μέντοι. βοηθήσαντα πολλοῖς μακαριστὸν ἐποίησεν. 
\ \ / ε Ν ~ A , 

7. ἐπεὶ δὲ κατεπέμφθη ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς σατράπης 
΄, A Q 
Λυδίας Te καὶ Φρυγίας τῆς μεγάλης καὶ Καππαδοκίας, 
στρατηγὸς δὲ καὶ πάντων ἀπεδείχθη οἷς καθήκει εἰς 
Καστωλοῦ πεδίον ἀθροίζεσθαι, πρῶτον μὲν ἐπέδειξεν 

΄ ~ ¥ Ν 

αὑτὸν ὅτι περὶ πλείστον ποιοῖτο, εἴ τῳ σπείσαιτο καὶ 
σ᾿ ‘ ¥ , “ 

εἴ τῳ συνθοῖτο καὶ εἴ τῳ ὑπόσχοιτό τι, μηδαμῶς 
, Q \ 5. a. \  - 
ψεύδεσθαι. 8. Kal yap οὖν ἐπίστευον μὲν αὐτῷ 


ε ’ 3 / > ’ y ε » ὃ 
αι πόλεις επιτρέπομεναι, €7TLOTEVOV ὃ οι αν Pes * 























270 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Boox I 


καὶ εἴ τις πολέμιος ἐγένετο, σπεισαμένου Κύρου ἐπί- 
στευε μηδὲν ἂν παρὰ τὰς σπονδὰς παθεῖν. 9. τοι- 
γαροῦν ἐπεὶ Τισσαφέρνει ἐπολέμησε, πᾶσαι αἱ πόλεις 
ἑκοῦσαι Κῦρον εἵλοντο ἀντὶ Τισσαφέρνους πλὴν Μι- 
λησίων: οὗτοι δὲ ὅτι οὐκ ἤθελε τοὺς φεύγοντας 
προέσθαι ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν. 10. καὶ γὰρ ἔργῳ 
᾿ ἐπεδείκνυτο καὶ ἔλεγεν ὅτι οὐκ ἄν ποτε προοῖτο, ἐπεὶ 
ἅπαξ φίλος αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, οὐδ᾽ εἰ ἔτι μὲν μείους 
γένοιντο, ἔτι δὲ κάκιον πράξειαν. 11. φανερὸς δ᾽ ἦν 
καὶ εἴ τίς τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ κακὸν ποιήσειεν αὐτόν, νικᾶν 
πειρώμενος: καὶ εὐχὴν δέ τινες αὐτοῦ ἐξέφερον ὡς 
εὔχοιτο τοσοῦτον χρόνον ζῆν ἔστε νικῴη καὶ τοὺς εὖ 
καὶ τοὺς κακῶς ποιοῦντας ἀλεἕξόμενο;. 12. καὶ γὰρ 
οὖν πλεῖστοι δὴ αὐτῷ ἑνί γε ἀνδρὶ τῶν ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν 
ἐπεθύμησαν καὶ χρήματα καὶ πόλεις καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν 
σώματα προέσθαι. 13. οὐ μὲν δὴ οὐδὲ τοῦτ᾽ ἂν 
τις εἴποι ὡς τοὺς κακούργους καὶ ἀδίκους εἴα κατα- 
γελᾶν, ἀλλὰ ἀφειδέστατα πάντων ἐτιμωρεῖτο: πολ- 
λάκις δ᾽ ἦν ἰδεῖν παρὰ τὰς στειβομένας ὁδοὺς καὶ 
ποδῶν καὶ χειρῶν καὶ ὀφθαλμῶν στερομένους ἀνθρώ- 
Tous: ὥστ᾽ ἐν τῇ Κύρου ἀρχῇ ἐγένετο καὶ Ἕλληνι 
καὶ βαρβάρῳ μηδὲν ἀδικοῦντι ἀδεῶς πορεύεσθαι ὅπῃ 

| 
τις ἤθελεν, ἔχοντι ὅτι Tpoxwpoin. 14. τούς γε 
μέντοι ἀγαθοὺς εἰς πόλεμον ὡμολόγητο διαφερόντως 
τιμᾶν. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν ἣν αὐτῷ πόλεμος πρὸς Πισί- 
δας καὶ Μυσούς: στρατενόμενος οὖν καὶ αὐτὸς εἰς 
ταύτας τὰς χώρας ovs ἑώρα ἐθέλοντας κινδυνεύειν, 
τούτους καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐποίει ἧς κατεστρέφετο χώρας, 
ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἄλλοις δώροις ἐτίμα' 15. ὥστε φαί- 


Boox [11 CHAPTER ΙΧ. 9-21. 271 


A A > ‘ > , A ‘ 
νεσθαι τοὺς μὲν ἀγαθοὺς εὐδαιμονεστάτους, τοὺς δὲ 
κ᾿ , , 9 a 5 A ‘ 
κακοὺς δούλους τούτων ἀξιῶν εἶναι. τοιγαροῦν πολλὴ 
> > , ee, A > , , σ΄ 
ἦν ἀφθονία αὐτῷ τῶν ἐθελόντων κινδυνεύειν, ὅπου τις 
οἴοιτο Κῦρον αἰσθήσεσθαι. 16. εἴς γε μὴν δικαιο- 
4 » Ν ’ 3 , , 
σύνην εἴ τις φανερὸς γένοιτο ἐπιδείκνυσθαι βουλό- 
μενος, περὶ παντὸς ἐποιεῖτο τούτους πλουσιωτέρως ζῆν 
~ ~ > ~ 5 , 4 Ἁ 
ποιεῖν τῶν ἐκ τοῦ ἀδίκου φιλοκερδούντων. 17. καὶ 
γὰρ οὖν ἄλλα τε πολλὰ δικαίως αὐτῷ διεχειρίζετο καὶ 
στρατεύματι ἀληθινῷ ἐχρήσατο. καὶ γὰρ στρατηγοὶ 
καὶ λοχαγοί, οἱ χρημάτων ἕνεκα πρὸς ἐκεῖνον ἔπλευ- 
σαν, ἔγνωσαν κερδαλεώτερον εἶναι Κύρῳ καλῶς 
ε , a ‘ N A , ᾽ ν᾿ ‘ 
ὑπάρχειν ἢ τὸ κατὰ μῆνα κέρδος. 18. ἀλλὰ μὴν 
εἴ τίς γέ τι αὐτῷ προστάξαντι καλῶς ὑπηρετήσειεν, 
οὐδενὶ πώποτε ἀχάριστον εἴασε τὴν προθυμίαν. τοι- 
γαροῦν κράτιστοι δὴ ὑπηρέται παντὸς ἔργου Κύρῳ 
ἐλέχθησαν γενέσθαι. 19. εἰ δέ τινα ὁρῴη δεινὸν 


᾿», > , > aA ’ὔ Ἁ ’ , 
OVTQA OLKOVOMLOV EK του δικαίου και KaTtaoKevalovTa 


τε ἧς ἄρχοι χώρας Kal προσόδους ποιοῦντα, οὐδένα 
ἂν πώποτε ἀφείλετο, ἀλλ᾽ ἀεὶ πλείω προσεδίδου " 


ν Ν ε ’ > ’ Ἁ , > -~ Ν 
WOTE και ἡδέως E€TOVOVUV και θαρραλέως EKTWVTO Και 


σσ > ’ , 9 a » > A 

ὅσα ἐπέπατό τις ἥκιστα Κῦρον ἔκρυπτεν: ov ‘yap 

= ~ ~ ~ 7 , > A 

φθονῶν τοῖς φανερῶς πλουτοῦσιν ἐφαίνετο, ἀλλὰ 

~ ~ ~ , ’ 

πειρώμενος χρῆσθαι τοῖς τῶν ἀποκρυπτομένων χρὴή- 

μασι 20. φίλους ye μὴν ὅσους ποιήσαιτο καὶ 

» \ 

εὔνους γνοίη ὄντας Kal ἱκανοὺς κρίνειε συνεργοὺς 
> ε 

εἶναι ὅτι τυγχάνοι βουλόμενο; κατεργάζεσθαι, ὁμο- 

λογεῖται πρὸς πάντων κράτιστος δὴ γενέσθαι θερα- 
A ν 

πεύειν. 21. καὶ γὰρ αὐτὸ τοῦτο οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἕνεκα 


4 » A « 4 »Ἤ) AQ _ ee 
φίλων ῳετο δεῖσθαι, ὡς συνεργους ἔχοι, και αὕτος 























272 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Book I. 


ἐπειρᾶτο συνεργὸς τοῖς φίλοις κράτιστος εἶναι τού- 
22. δῶρα 
δὲ πλεῖστα μὲν οἶμαι εἷς γε ἀνὴρ ἐλάμβανε διὰ πολλά. 


iv J 5 4 Y »“»--ἜῬΟ 
Tov oTov αἰσθάνοιτο ἕκαστον ἐπιθυμοῦντα. 


“A ’ Ν “ὦ 
ταῦτα δὲ πάντων δὴ μάλιοτα τοῖς φίλοις διεδίδου, 
A Ν , ’ ~ 9 
πρὸς τοὺς τρόπους ἑκάστου σκοπῶν Kal ὅτου μάλιστα 
ε ο ο ~ 
ὁρῴη ἕκαστον δεόμενον. 23. καὶ ὅσα τῴ σώματι 
9 A , a: 8 + , ra ε > 
αὐτοῦ πέμποι τις ἢ ὡς εἰς πόλεμον ἢ ὡς εἰς καλλω- 
, 9 
πισμὸν, Kal περὶ τούτων λέγειν αὐτὸν ἔφασαν ὅτι 
τὸ μὲν ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα οὐκ ἂν δύναιτο τούτοις πᾶσι 
~ , 4 ~ ’ ’ 
κοσμηθῆναι, φίλους δὲ καλῶ; κεκοσμημένους μέγι- 
4 > \ 4 A \ Ἁ Ν 
στον κόσμον ἀνδρὶ νομίζο. 44. καὶ τὸ μὲν τὰ 
, a ‘ ΄ 5 κι 204 
μεγάλα νικᾶν τοὺς φίλους εὖ ποιοῦντα οὐδὲν θαυμα- 
’ \ > ~ 
στόν, ἐπειδή γε καὶ δυνατώτερο; ἦν: τὸ δὲ τῇ 
ἐπιμελείᾳ ι ὧν φίλ L τῷ θυμεῖσθ 
μελειᾷ πεέριειναι τῶν φίλων καὶ τῷ προθυμεῖσθαι 
ἴω ow ~ nw > 
χαρίζεσθαι, ταῦτα ἔμοιγε μᾶλλον δοκεῖ ἀγαστὰ εἶναι. 


25. Κῦρος γὰρ ἔπεμπε βίκους οἴνου ἡμιδεεῖς πολ- 


λάκις ὁπότε πάνυ ἡδὺν λάβοι, λέγων ὅτι οὔπω δὴ 
~ , » ~ 
πολλοῦ χρόνου τούτου ἡδίονι οἰνῳ ἐπιτύχοι: τοῦτον 
οὖν σοὶ ἔπεμψε καὶ δεῖταί σου τήμερον τοῦτον ἐκπιεῖν 
\ e ~ ~ 
συν ols μάλιστα φιλεῖς. 26. πολλάκις δὲ χῆνας 
ε ’ »” A ” ς ΄ Ἀ » 
ἡμιβρώτους ἔπεμπε καὶ apTwv ἡμίσεα καὶ ἄλλα 
τοιαῦτα, ἐπιλέγειν κελεύων τὸν φέροντα, Τούτοις 
ν γ᾿ ΚΝ 4 εὐ Ν \ 4 4 
ἥσθη Κῦρος: βούλεται οὖν καὶ σὲ τούτων γεύσασθαι. 
ν \ Ν ’ ’ » > Ν \ 
27. omov δὲ yihds σπάνιος πάνυ Ely, αὐτὸς δὲ 
’ὔ 4 Ν Ν \ » 
δύναιτο παρασκευάσασθαι διὰ τὸ πολλοὺς ἔχειν 
ε ’ \ Ἁ \ > ’ ’ 5 ’ 
ὑπηρέτας καὶ διὰ τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν, διαπέμπων ἐκέλευε 
τοὺς φίλους τοῖς τὰ ἑαυτῶν σώματα ἄγουσιν ἵπποις 
3 ’ a Ν ’ ε \ ~ ‘ 
ἐμβάλλειν τοῦτον τὸν χιλὸν, ὡς μὴ πεινῶντες τοὺς 


ἑαυτοῦ φίλους ἄγωσιν. 28. εἰ δὲ δή ποτε πορεύοιτο 





Βοοκ I.] CHAPTER IX. 22-31. 273 


καὶ πλεῖστοι μέλλοιεν ὄψεσθαι, προσκαλῶν τοὺς 
φίλους ἐσπουδαιολογεῖτο, ὡς δηλοίη ods τιμᾷ. ὥστε 
ἐγὼ μέν γε ἐξ ὧν ἀκούω οὐδένα κρίνω ὑπὸ πλειόνων 
πεφιλῆσθαι οὔτε “Ἑλλήνων οὔτε βαρβάρων. 29. τεκ- 
μήριον δὲ τούτου καὶ τόδε. παρὰ μὲν Κύρου δούλου 
ὄντος οὐδεὶς ἀπγει πρὸς βασιλέα, πλὴν ᾿Ορόντας 
ἐπεχείρησε: καὶ οὗτος δὴ ὃν ᾧετο πιστόν οἱ εἶναι 
ταχὺ αὐτὸν ηὗρε Κύρῳ φίλτερον ἢ ἑαυτῷ: παρὰ δὲ 
βασιλέως πολλοὶ πρὸς Κῦρον ἀπῆλθον, ἐπειδὴ πολέ- 
μιοι ἀλλήλοις ἐγένοντο, καὶ οὗτοι μέντοι οἵ μάλιστα 
UT αὐτοῦ ἀγαπώμενοι, νομίζοντες παρὰ Κύρῳ ὄντες 
ἀγαθοὶ ἀξιωτέρας ἂν τιμῆς τυγχάνειν ἢ παρὰ βασιλεῖ. 
30. μέγα δὲ τεκμήριον καὶ τὸ ἐν τῇ τελευτῇ τοῦ 
βίου αὐτῷ γενόμενον ὅτι καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν ἀγαθὸς καὶ 
κρίνειν ὀρθῶς ἐδύνατο τοὺς πιστοὺς καὶ εὔνους καὶ 
βεβαίους. 31. ἀποθνήσκοντος γὰρ αὐτοῦ πάντες 
οἱ περὶ αὐτὸν φίλοι καὶ συντράπεζοι ἀπέθανον μαχό- 
μενοι ὑπὲρ Κύρου πλὴν ᾿Δριαίου: οὗτος δὲ τεταγ- 
μένος ἐτύγχανεν ἐπὶ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ τοῦ ἱππικοῦ ἄρχων" 
ὡς δ᾽ ἤσθετο Κῦρον πεπτωκότα, ἔφυγεν ἔχων καὶ τὸ 


, ~ es - - 
στράτευμα παν OV HYELTO. 








το: 


Stn EEE. 235 es 30s | Ser Saale 


ATES ST RI i hE τσαστο 








XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. 


CHAPTER X. 


After the head and right hand of Cyrus have been cut off (1), the king 
falls upon his camp and puts Ariaeus to flight. Everything is pil- 
laged, except where the few Greeks left on guard make a stout resist- 
ance (2,3). Learning of the king’s movements, the Greeks return 
from their pursuit; unwilling to meet them, the king collects his 
men, wheels around to the left, and joins Tissaphernes, who had 
borne down upon the Greek peltasts to his own discomfiture (4-8). 
In order to escape being surrounded, the Greeks remain close to the 
river ; the enemy move against them, but flee before the charge of 
the Greeks (9-11). Their cavalry halt upon a hill; but upon the 
approach of the Greeks they leave it, fleeing at full speed (12-15). 
Here the Greeks rest, wondering at the absence of Cyrus; they decide 


to return to camp, only to find it plundered of everything; and so 


they spend the night there, supperless (16-19). 

1. Ἐνταῦθα δὴ Κύρου ἀποτέμνεται ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ 
ἡ χεὶρ ἡ δεξιά. βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ διώκων 
εἰσπίπτει εἰς τὸ Κύρειον στρατόπεδον: καὶ οἱ μὲν 

Ἢ 5 , » 2 7 + \ , \ 
peta Aptatov οὐκέτι ἔστανται ἀλλὰ φεύγουσι διὰ 
τοῦ αὑτῶν στρατοπέδου εἰς τὸν σταθμὸν ἔνθεν 
[ν > > 
ὥρμηντο: 2. τέτταρες δ᾽ ἐλέγοντο παρασάγγαι εἶναι 

΄“ ε ΄“" Ν A ‘ ε Ἀ > ~ -f » 
τῆς ὁδοῦ. βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ οἱ σὺν αὕτῳ Ta τε ἄλλα 
πολλὰ διαρπάζουσι, καὶ τὴν Φωκαΐδα τὴν Κύρου 
παλλακίδα τὴν σοφὴν καὶ καλὴν λεγομένην εἶναι 
, e A , > - 
λαμβάνει. 3. ἡ δὲ Μιλησία ἦν νεωτέρα ἣ ληφθεῖσα 
α΄ A + \ , > , \ Ἢ σι 
ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφὶ βασιλέα ἐκφεύγει γυμνὴ πρὸς τῶν 
ε , ἃ» > ~ , 9 » 
Ελλήνων, ot ἔτυχον ἐν τοῖς σκευοφόροις ὅπλα ἔχοντες 

N > ’ ‘ ‘ ~ ε , 

Kat ἀντιταχθέντες πολλοὺς μὲν τῶν ἁρπαζόντων 





Βοοκ I.] CHAPTER Χ. 1-8. 975 


> ’ ε a A 5 ~A > ’ > \ » , 
ἀπέκτειναν, οἱ δὲ Kal αὐτῶν ἀπέθανον" ov μην ἐφυγόν 


A ‘ » A “-᾿. 
γε, ἀλλὰ καὶ ταύτην ἔσωσαν καὶ τἄλλα ὁπόσα ἐντὸς 


ἴω , \ » 
αὐτῶν Kal χρήματα Kat ἄνθρωποι ἐγένοντο πάντα 
ἔσωσαν. 4. ἐνταῦθα διέσχον ἀλλήλων βασιλεύς 
\ ε ν ε ’ ’ ε ‘ 
τε καὶ οἱ Ἕλληνες ὡς τριάκοντα στάδια, οἱ μὲν 
διώκοντες τοὺς καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς ὡς πάντα νικῶντες, οἱ 
> ε ’ ε » ’ ~ > Ἁ 
δ᾽ ἁρπάζοντες ὡς ἤδη πάντα νικῶντες. 5. ἐπεὶ 
δ᾽ ἥσθοντο ot μὲν Ἕλληνες ὅτι βασιλεὺς σὺν τῷ 
’ὔ 5 ~ , » A 5 > 
στρατεύματι ἐν τοῖς σκευοφόροις εἴη, βασιλεὺς δ᾽ αὖ 
ἤκουσε Τισσαφέρνους ὅτι οἱ Ἕλληνες νικῷεν τὸ καθ᾽ 
ἐν ον ἡ πιὰ \ ΄ » Ν # » 
αὑτοὺς καὶ εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν οἴχονται διώκοντες, ἔνθα 
\ A Ά 9 ’ Ν ε “A Ἁ , 
δὴ βασιλεὺς μὲν ἀθροίζει τε τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ Kal συντάτ- 
τεται, ὁ δὲ Κλέαρχος ἐβουλεύετο Πρόξενον καλέσας, 
πλησιαίτατος γὰρ ἦν, εἰ πέμποιέν τινας ἢ πάντες 
» > \ Ν ’ > , > 4 
ἴοιεν ἐπὶ TO στρατόπεδον ἀρήξοντες.ς 6. ἐν τούτῳ 
~ > 4, 
kat βασιλεὺς δῆλος ἦν προσιὼν πάλιν ὡς ἐδόκει 
» Υ : κ᾿ στ , 
ὄπισθεν. καὶ ot μὲν “Ἕλληνες στραφέντες παρε- 
σκευάζοντο ὡς ταύτῃ προσιόντος καὶ δεξόμενοι, ὁ 
δὲ βασιλεὺς ταύτῃ μὲν οὐκ ἦγεν, ἧ δὲ παρῆλθεν ἔξω 
τοῦ εὐωνύμου κέρατος ταῦτῃ καὶ ἀπῆγεν, ἀναλαβὼν 
A \ > ~ ’ ‘ Ν ν > 4 
καὶ TOUS EV TH μάχῃ κατα τοὺς EAAnvas αὐτομολή- 
γ A ~ 
σαντας καὶ Τισσαφέρνην καὶ τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ. 7. ὁ yap 
A > 
Τισσαφέρνης ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ συνόδῳ οὐκ ἔφυγεν, ἀλλὰ 
’ Ν Ν Ν Ν A 7 
διήλασε Tapa τὸν ποταμὸν κατὰ τοὺς Ἕλληνας πελτα- 
’ 4 \ 4 \ > ’ , 
στάς: διελαύνων δὲ κατέκανε μὲν οὐδένα, διαστάντες 
> ε Y » \ 5 ’ 3 4 > 
δ᾽ ot Ἕλληνες ἔπαιον καὶ ἠκόντιζον αὐτούς: ᾿Ἐπι- 
σθένης δὲ ᾿Αμφιπολίτης ἦρχε τῶν πελταστῶν καὶ 
ἐλέγετο φρόνιμος γενέσθαι. 8. ὁ δ᾽ οὖν Τισσα- 
Ὰ ε - » “ , , A 3 
φέρνης ὡς μεῖον ἔχων ἀπηλλαγη, πάλιν μὲν οὐκ 











276 XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. [Book 1. 


, 5 A 
ἀναστρέφει, εἰς δὲ τὸ στρατόπεδον ἀφικόμενος τὸ 
»“» ery , ~ ~ ΄σ 
τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐκεῖ συντυγχάνει βασιλεῖ, καὶ ὁμοῦ 
Ἁ , , 4 > 
δὴ πάλιν συνταξάμενοι ἐπορεύοντο. 9. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἦσαν 
Ν \ OF ~ ery , ΄,Ἱ ¥ e 
κατὰ TO εὐώνυμον των ᾿λλήνων κέρας, ἔδεισαν οἵ 
Gun \ , ΄ ΄ 
ἔλληνες μὴ προσάγοιεν πρὸς τὸ κέρας καὶ περιπτύ- 
ξαντες ἀμφοτέρωθεν αὐτοὺς κατακόψειαν - καὶ ἐδόκει 
αὐτοῖς ἀναπτύσσειν τὸ κέρας καὶ ποιήσασθαι ὄπι- 
Ν ’ e “ 
σθεν τὸν ποταμόν. 10. ἐν ᾧ δὲ ταῦτα ἐβουλεύοντο, 
\ 7, r ‘\ ’ » ‘ > Ν “ 
καὶ δὴ βασιλεὺς παραμειψάμενος εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ σχῆμα 
’ 5 o — 
κατέστησεν ἀντίαν τὴν φάλαγγα ὥσπερ τὸ πρῶτον 
’ > Yr 
μαχούμενος συνήει. ὡς δὲ εἶδον οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐγγύς 
” ‘ ΄ > 
TE OVTAS καὶ παρατεταγμένους, αὖθις παιανίσαντες 
» κα κ᾿ » 
ἐπῃσαν πολὺ ἔτι προθυμότερον ἢ τὸ πρόσθεν. 
ε > > , > ’ 4 
11. οἱ δ᾽ αὖ βάρβαροι οὐκ ἐδέχοντο, ἀλλὰ ἐκ πλείονος 
“ἡ Ν , ρ » ε 5° > ’ , , 
ἢ τὸ πρόσθεν ἔφευγον: ot δ᾽ ἐπεδίωκον μέχρι κώμης 
~ >] γι 
τινός: ἐνταῦθα δ᾽ ἔστησαν οἱ Ἕλληνες: 12. ὑπὲρ 
\ κι , , = 97? a , , 
yap τῆς κώμης γήλοφος ἦν, ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἀνεστράφησαν 
ε > Ν ’ \ Ἁ 3 ’ ~ ἃ ε ’ ε 
οἱ ἀμφὶ βασιλέα, πεζοὶ μὲν οὐκέτι, τῶν δὲ ἱππέων ὁ 
’ ’ - 4 \ , 
λόφος ἐνεπλήσθη, ὥστε TO ποιούμενον μὴ γιγνώ- 
σκειν. καὶ τὸ βασίλειον σημεῖον ὁρᾶν ἔφασαν ἀετόν 
τινα χρυσοῦν ἐπὶ πέλτῃ ἐπὶ ξύλου ἀνατεταμένον. 
Ἢ - 
13. ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἐχώρουν οἱ Ἕλληνες, λεί- 
\ \ ‘ , ε ε a 5 N ¥ 
πουσι δὴ Kal τὸν λόφον οἱ ἱππεῖς: οὐ μὴν ἔτι 
> > »” »¥ ἴω 
ἀθρόοι ἀλλ᾽ ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν: ἐψιλοῦτο δ᾽ ὁ λόφος 
τῶν ἱππέων: τέλος δὲ καὶ πάντες ἀπεχώρησαν. 
14. ὁ οὖν Κλέαρχος οὐκ ἀνεβίβαζεν ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον, 
> ᾽ ε 5 3 Ν ’ὔὕ Ἁ , , , 
ἀλλ᾽ vr αὐτὸν στήσας TO στράτευμα πέμπει Λύκιον 
τὸν Συρακόσιον καὶ ἄλλον ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον καὶ κελεύει 


, Ν ε \ ~ , ΄, 5 . A 
κατιδόντας τὰ ὕπερ Tov λόφου τί ἐστιν ἀπαγγεῖλαι. 





Book 1] CHAPTER X. 9-19. 277 


» , > © 

15. καὶ ὁ Λύκιος ἤλασέ τε καὶ ἰδὼν ἀπαγγέλλει ὅτι 

φεύγουσιν ἀνὰ κρᾶτος. σχεδὸν δ᾽ ὅτε ταῦτα ἦν 
9 A Y 

kat ἥλιος ἐδύετο. 16. ἐνταῦθα δ᾽ ἔστησαν οἱ Ἕλ- 
A 7 > . 9 

Anves καὶ θέμενοι Ta ὁπλα ἀνεπαύοντο. καὶ apa 

Ν 9 ~ - 
μὲν ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι οὐδαμοῦ Κῦρος φαίνοιτο οὐδ᾽ 
» > > > ~ > Ἁ ’ 5 A » 
ἄλλος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ οὐδεὶς παρείη: οὐ yap ἤδεσαν 
αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα, ἀλλ᾽ εἴκαζον ἢ διώκοντα οἴχεσθαι 
\ 

ἢ καταληψόμενόν τι προεληλακέναι: 17. καὶ αὐτοὶ 
> , > δ ΄ . , > A 

ἐβουλεύοντο εἰ αὐτοῦ μείναντες τὰ σκευοφόρα ἐνταῦθα 

» “ἃ 3 , > ἃ 4 , ὃ 25 > ~ 

ἄγοιντο ἢ ἀπίοιεν ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον. ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς 

> 4 \ > ~ > ‘ ‘ > ἃ, Ἀ 

ἀπιέναι: καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται ἀμφὶ δορπηστὸν ἐπὶ τὰς 
~ , ~ Ν ’ 

σκηνάς. 18. ταύτης μὲν τῆς ἡμέρας τοῦτο τὸ τέλος 

> 4 / δὲ ~ » , 

ἐγένετο. καταλαμβάνουσι δὲ τῶν τε ἄλλων χρημα- 

\ ~ Q ¥ , aN 

των τὰ πλεῖστα διηρπασμένα καὶ εἴ TL σιτίον ἢ 

Ν > ’ Ν > ΄ Ν 

ποτὸν ἦν, καὶ Tas ἁμάξας μεστὰς ἀλεύρων καὶ 


¥ a , A 7] » ἐ 
οἴνου, ἃς παρεσκευάσατο Kupos, wa εἰ ποτε σφοδρὰ 
, ¥ , aA Cen 
TO στράτευμα λάβοι ἔνδεια, διαδοίη τοις EdAnow --- 
> ᾽ es 9 QA 
ἦσαν δ᾽ αὗται τετρακόσιαι ὡς ἐλέγοντο ἅμαξαι --- καὶ 
4 ’ ε \ ~ , ΄σ 

ταύτας τότε οἱ σὺν βασιλεῖ διήπρασαν. 19. ὥστε 

> a A > \ 
ἀδειπνοι ἦσαν οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων: ἦσαν δὲ 


καὶ ἀνάριστοι: πρὶν γὰρ δὴ καταλῦσαι τὸ στρά- 
Ν » A > , 4 \ 
τευμα πρὸς ἄριστον βασιλεὺς ἐφάνη. ταύτην μεν 


> ‘ 4 ν ὃ , 
OUV TyV VUKTQA OUTW ἰέεγένοντο. 


Saw rey 


ee nana 
Ser ee 


ἘΣΣῚ Ξ ὩΣ 


te 


tea nn ΞΣΣ eereernaimmaeneabarenere pancreas eee eT 
eee sa Sa ees - 


Στ gd -ας Se pee eS 























A LITERAL TRANSLATION OF CHAPTERS 1.-Π|. 


CHAPTER I. 


1. (12) Of-Darius and of-Parysatis are-born boys two, elder indeed 
Artaxerxes, younger however Cyrus. (11.) When however was-sick 
Darius and was-suspecting an-end of-the (of-)life, he-was-wishing the-two 
two-hoys both to-be-present. 2. (111.) The on-the-one-hand in-truth elder 
being-present was-happening ; Cyrus on-the-other-haud he-sends-after from 
the government, of-which him satrap he-made. (IV.) Also general and 
him he-appoiuted of-all, as-many-as into Castolus’s plain collect-t lhemselves. 
(V.) Goes-up therefore the Cyrus taking Tissaphernes as a-frieud, also of- 
the Greeks and having heavy-armed-men he-went-up three-hundred, com- 
mander and of-them Xenias a-Parrhasian. 3. (VI.) When however euded 
Darius and sat-down into the kingdom Artaxerxes, Tissaphernes slanders 
the Cyrus by (i.e. before) the brother, that he-is-plotting-against him. 
(VII.) The @ he) however is-persuaded and arrests Cyrus as about-to-kill ; 
the however mother begging-off him sends-off again to the government. 
4. (VILL) The (=he) however as [= when] was-gone-away, after-incurring- 
danger, and after-being-dishonored, plans, in-order-that never again he-shall- 
be-in-the-power-of the brother, but, if he-may-be-able, shall-rule instead-of 
that-one. (IX.) Parysatis ou-the-one-hand indeed the mother was-aiding 
the Cyrus, loving him rather than the reigning Artaxerxes. 5. Whoever 
however might-arrive of-the from-beside king unto him, all so disposing he- 
was-seuding-away, so-as to-him rather friends to-be than to-king. (XL) 
also of-the by-the-side-of himself and barbarians he-was-taking-care, that to- 
fight both able they-might-be and in-a-friendly-way they-miglt-have-[them- 
selves] to-him. 6. The however Greek force he-was-collecting, as-much- 
as he-could, hiding-for-himself, in-order-that. as-unprepared-as-possible he- 
might-take king. (XII.) As-follows therefore he-was-making-for-himself 
the levy. As-many-soever he-had guards in the cities he-announced to-the 
captains-of-the-guard each to-take men Peloponnesian as-many as-possible 








280 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


aud as-good as-possible, as plotting Tissaphernes-against the cities. And-for 
were the Ionian cities of-Tissaphernes, the-ancient (= formerly) from king 
having-been-given, then however they-had-revolted unto Cyrus all exeept 
Miletus; 7. (XIII) in Miletus however Tissaphernes perceiving-in-ad- 
vance those same [things] [them] devising-for-themselves, ἐκεῖ unto 
Cyrus, the (=some) indeed he-killed-off, the (= others) however he-cast-out. 
The however Cyrus, taking up the fleeing [ones], afler-collecting au-army, 
was-besieging Miletus both by land and by sea and was-endeavoring to 
lead-down [= back] the having-fullen-out (= fugitives.) (XIV.) And this 
again another pretext was to-him of-the to-collect an-army. 8. Unto how- 
ever king sending, he-was-demanding, brother being of-him, to-be-given to- 
himself those the cities rather than Tissaphernes to-be-commander of-them 
and the moth: r ecéperated with-him these [things]; so that king the a 
the-one-haud against himself conspiracy not Wwas-perceiving. (XV.) With- 
Tissaphernes however he-was-thinking him warring, about the armies to-be- 
wasting-money ; so-that in-no-wise was-he-angry, them warring. And for 
the Cyrus was-sending-off the becoming (i. e. incoming) revenues to-king 
from the cities, of-which (ἡ e. which) ol-Tissaphernes he-was-happening 
having. 9. Another however army for-him was-being-collected in δον. 
nesus, the down opposite Abydus, this the way. Clearchus was a-Lacedae- 
monian fugitive; (XVI) with-him after-associating, (the) Cyrus both ad- 
mired him and gives to-him ten-thousand darics. The (= he) however after- 
taking the money, an-army collected from those the means, aud wan-warving. 
from Chersonesus settiug-out, with-the Thracians, the above [the] Helles. 
pont living, and he-was-aiding the Greeks; so-that also means they-were- 
contributing for-him into the support of-the soldiers, the Hellespontine 
cities, willing. (X VII.) This and again, thus being-supported, was-escaping- 
notice for-him the army. 10. And Aristippus the Thessalian was-happen- 
ing being a-guest-friep4 to-him, and being-hard-pressed under (= by) the at- 
home opponents he-comes to Cyrus and asks him into (= about) two-t housand 
mercenaries and pay of-three monthis, as thus being-superior possibly of-the 
opponents. (XVIII.) But Cyrus gives to-him about four-thousand and 
pay of six months and demands of-him not sooner to-become-reconciled 
unto the opponents before he-may-deliberate-together with-him. And 
thus the army in Thessaly Was-escaping-notice being-supported for-him. 
11. (X1X.) Proxenus however the Boeotian, a-guest-friend being, he ordered, 
taking men as-many as-possible, to-become-at-[his]-side, as wishing to-march 
into (=against) the Pisidians, as the Pisidians [were] furnishing affairs 
(= trouble) to-the of-himself country. And Sophaenetus the Stymphutinn 




















LITERAL TRANSLATION. 281 


and Socrates the Achaean, these also [being] guest-friends, he ordered to- 
come, taking men as-many as-possible, as being-about-to-war-with Tissa- 
phernes together-with the fugitives, the of-[the] Milesians. And were-doing 


thus those. 


CHAPTER 11. 


1. (XXI.) When however it-was-seeming-best to-him now to-advance 
upward, the on-the-one-hand pretext he-was-making as wishing to-drive- 
out Pisidians wholly from the country; and he-collects as against-these 
both the barbaric and the Greek [army]. There also announces both to- 
the Clearchus taking to-come how-great was to-lim an-army, and to-the 
Aristippus, reconciled unto the [opponents] at-home, to-send-away unto 
himself what he-had army; and to-Xenias, the Arcadian, who for-him had- 
charge of-the in-the-cities mercenary [army] to-come he-announces, having- 
taxed the others except howsoever-many sufficient were the citadels to- 
guard. 2. (XXII.) He-called and also the Miletus besieging, and the 
fugitives he-ordered with him to-take-the-field, promising to-them if well 
he-might-have-accomplished [those things] upon which (= for the purpose 
of which) he-was-marching, not previously to desist until he might-lead- 
down (= back) them homeward. The however gladly were-obeying; they- 
trusted for to-him; and taking the arms they were-preseut into Sardis. 
3. Xenias on-the-one-hand in-truth the from the cities heavy-armed-nen to 
(= about) four-thousand taking became-present into Sardis, Proxenus on- 
the-other-haud was-present having heavy-armed-men indeed about five-hun- 
dred and one-thousand, light-armed-men however five-hundred, Sophae- 
netus however the Stymphalian having heavy-armed-men one-thousand, 
Socrates however the Achaean, heavy-armed-men having about five-hun- 
dred, Pasion however the Megarean, three-lundred indeed heavy-armed- 
men indeed three-hundred however targeteers having arrived; was how- 
ever both that [one] and the Socrates of-the about Miletus being in the 
field. 4. (XXIII) Those indeed into Sardis for him arrived. Tissaphernes 
however, after-watching those-things, and after-conciuding greater to be 
than as-if against the Pisidians the preparation, proceeds to king, by-what. 
[way] he was-able most-quickly, horsemen having about five-inundred. 
5. And king on-the-one-hand indeed, when he-heard of-Tissanhernes the 
Cyrus’s military-preparation, prepared-in-turn. 

6. (XXIV.) Cyrus but having whom I-have-mentioned set-forth from 
Sardis ; and he-mareles through the Lydia days’~journeys three, parasangs 














289 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


twenty and two to the Maeander river. Of-this the width two plethra; a- 
bridge however was-upon having-been-joined by-meaus-of-boats. 6. This 
after-crossing, he-marches through Phrygia day’s-journey one parasangs 
eight into Colossae, city (well-) inhabited, prosperous and large. There vd 
waited days seven; and came Menon the Thessalian, hoplites having one- 
thousand and peltasts five-hundred, Dolopians and Aenianians and Olyn- 
thiaus. 7% Thence he-marches days’-journeys three parasaugs twenty into 
Celaenae, o!-the Phrygia city inhabited, large and prosperous. There to- 
Cyrus royukabodes was and park large, of-wild animals full, which that-one 
uscd-to-hunt from horse, whenever to-cxercise he-might-wish himself not- 
only but-also the horses. Through middle however of-the park flows the 
Maeander river; the and sources of-it are forth-from the royal-abodes 3 it- 
flows and also through the Celaenae city. 8. (XXV.) Therc-is and also of- 
great king royal-abodes in Celaenae fortified upon the sources of-the Mar- 
syas river beneath the acropolis; flows and also this through the city and 
empties into the Maeander ; of-the and Marsyas the width is of twenty and 
five feet. ‘There is-said Apollo to-have-flayed [it 1s said that Apollo flayed] 
Marsyas after-conquering [him] contending with-himself concerning [ musi- 
cal-] wisdom, and the skin to-have-hung-up [and that he hung up] in the 
rave whence the sources; through and this [fact] the river is-called Mar- 
syas. 9. There Xerxes, when forth-from the Greece after-being-defeated 
by-the battle he-was-retreating, is-said to-have-built [1 is said that he built} 
these both (ihe) royal-abodes and the of-Celaenae citadel. There waited 
Cyrus days thirty; and came Clearchus the Spartan fugitive having hop- 
lites one-thousand and peltasts Thracians eight-hundred and bowmen Cretan 
two-hundred. At-the-same-time and also Sosis was-present the Syracusan 
having hoplites three-hundred and Sophaenetus the Areadian having hop- 
lites one-thousand. And there Cyrus review and enumeration of-the Greeks 
made in the park and became the all-together hoplites indeed ten-thousand 
and one-thousand, peltasts however about the two-thousand. 10. (XX VI.) 
Thence he-marches days’-journeys two, parasangs ten, into Peltae, a-city 
inhabited. There he-remained days three; in which Xenias the Arcadian 
the Lycaean sacrificed and contest placed; the and prizes were flesh-combs 
golden ; viewed and the contest also Cyrus. Thence he-marches days’: 
journeys two, parasangs twelve, to Ceram6n market, city inhabited, re- 
motest at the Mysian country. 11. Thence he-marches days’-journeys 
three, parasangs thirty, into Cayster’s plain, city inhabited. There he-re- 
mained days five; and to-the soldiers was-owed pay more than of-three- 
mouths, and frequently going to the gates they-were-demanding [it] from 











LITERAL TRANSLATION. 283 


[him]. But the, promises speaking, was-putting-off and evident was being- 
troubled ; not for was-it according-to the of-Cyrus manner, having, not to- 
give-back. 12. There arrives Epyaxa, the of-Syennesis wife, the Cilicians’ 
king to-the-side-of Cyrus; and she-was-said tu-have-given [it was said that 
she gave} to-Cyrus meaus much. To-the and accordingly army then gave 
Cyrus pay of-four months. Had and the Cilician a-guard around herself, 
Cilicians and Aspendians; it-was-said however to-have-had-intercourse 
Cyrus [that C. had, ete.] with-the Cilician. 18. Thence he-marches days’ 
journeys two, parasangs ten, into Thymbrium, city inhabited. There was 
beside the road spring, the of-Midas called, the Phrygians’ king, upon 
which is-said Midas to-have-caught [it is said that M. caught] the Satyr, 
14. Thence he-marches days’-journeys two, para- 


with-wine by-mixing it. 
There he-remained days three. 


sangs ten, into Tyriaeum, city inhabited. 
And is-said to-have-requested the-Cilician of-Cyrus [it is said that . . . re- 
quested Cyrus] to-show the army to-herself; wishing according'y to-show, 
review he-makes in the plain of-the Greeks and ofthe barbarians. 
15. (XXVII.) He-ordered and the Greeks, as custom to-them into battle, 
so to-be-drawn-up and to-stand, to-marshal and, each-one, the of-himself. 
They-were-drawn-up accordingly in fours; had and the on-the-one-hand 
right Menon and the with him, the left but Clearechus and the of-that-one, 
the but middle the other generals. 16. Was-viewing accordingly Cyrus 
first indeed the barbarians ; the (= they) but were-marching-by having-been- 
drawn-up according-to squads and according to regiments; thereupon but 
the Greeks, riding-along upon chariot and the Cilician upon (= in) carriage. 
They-had and, all, helmets brazen and tunics purple and greaves and the 
shields having-been-uncovered. 17. (XXVIII.) When-indeed but all he 
rode-beside (= along), after-stationing the chariot before the phalanx middle, 
sending Pigres the interpreter to-the-side-of the generals ofthe Greeks he- 
ordered to-present the arms and to-advance entire the phalanx. They but 
said-in-frout these orders to-the soldiers; and when the-trumpet-had- 
sounded, after-presenting the arms, they-advanced. From but this, more- 
quickly advancing with shout, from the spontaneous running became to-the 
soldiers to the tents. 18. Of-the and barbarians fear much, and the both 
Cilician fled upon her carriage and the from (i. δ. in) the market leaving- 
behind their wares fled. The but Greeks with laugh unto their tents went. 
The and Cilician, seeing the splendor and the order of-the army wondered. 
Cyrus but was-pleased, the from the Greeks into the barbarians fear behold- 
ing. 19. Thence he-marches days’-journeys three, parasangs twenty, into 
Iconium, of the Phrygia city remote. There he-remained three days. 




















284 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


Thence he-marehes through the Lycaonia days’-journeys five, parasangs 
thirty. This the country he-turned-over tu-plunder to-the Greeks, as hose 
tile being. 20. Thence Cyrus the Cilician into the Cilicia sends-away tlie 
quickest way; and he-sent-with her the soldiers whom Menon had and 
him. Cyrus but with the others marches through Cappadocia days’-jour- 
neys four, parasangs five and twenty, into Thoana, city inhabited, large and 
prosperous. There he-remained days three; in which Cyrus slew man 
Persian, Megaphernes, a-wearer-o{-the-purple royal, and another certain 
of-the subordinates chief-officer, accusing to-be-conspiring-against him. 
21. (XXIX) Thence he-was-attempiing to-throw-into mto the Cilicia: the 
but entrance was road for-wagons steep mightily and impossible to-enter for- 
an-army, if any-one was-preveuting. Was-said however also Syeunesis to-be 
upon the heights guarding the eutrauce ; wherefore they-waited a-day in 
the plain. On-the but following came messenger saying that having-left 
was Syennesis the heights, when he-knew that the o’-Menon army already 
in Cilicia was within the mountains, and because triremes he-was-hearing 
sailing-around from Lonia into Cilicia Tamos having, the of-Lacedaemonians 
and of himself, Cyrus. 22. Cyrus and accordingly went-up upon tlie 
mountains, nobody preventirg, and he-saw the tents where the Cuilicians 
were-guarding. ‘Thence and he-weut-down into plain large and beautiful, 
[well-]watered, and of-trees of-all-kinds full and of-vines; much and also ses- 
ame and millet and panic and wheat and barley it-bears. A-mountain how- 
ever it surrounds, steep and high on-all-sides from sea to sea. 23. A(ter- 
descending and through this plain he marched days’-journeys four, 
parasangs five and twenty, to Tarsi, of-the Cilicia city large and prosperous. 
There was the of-Syennesis royal-abodes, the Cilicians’ king ; through 
middle and of-the city flows a-river Cydnus by-name width of-two plethra, 
24. This the city abandoned the inhabiting, with Syennesis into fortress 
steep upon the mountains, except the the shops having; remained and also 
the along-the-side-of the sea living in Soli and in Issi. 25. (XXXL) Epy- 
axa but the of-Syennesis wife earlier than-Cyrus by-five days into Tarsi 
arrived ; in however the crossing of-the mountains, the into the plain two 
companies of-the of-Menon army were-destroyed; the on-the-one-hand 
were-saying while-plundering something to-have-been-cut-down [that they 
while . . . were eut down] by the Cilicians, the on-the-other-hand after- 
being-abandoned and not being-able to-find the other (= the rest of the) army 
nor the roads, then, wandering-ahout, to-have-perished [that they were 
abandoned and . . . that they perished]; and they-were however-it-may-be 
these one-hundred hoplites. 26. The but others when they-came, the both 











LITERAL TRANSLATION. 


city, the Tarsus, they-plundered, on-account-of the loss of-the fellow- 
soldiers being-augered, and the royal-abodes the in it. Cyrus however 
when marched-into into the city, was-sending-after the Syennesis unto him- 
self; but he neither before for-nobody yet stronger than-himself into hands 
to-come said [ἢ e. that he had come, etc. | nor then for-Cyrus to-come was- 
he-willing before the wife him persuaded and pledges he-received. 
27. Alter but these, when they-were-come together with-one-another, Syven- 
nesis indeed gave to-Cyrus means much into the army, Cyrus and to-him gifts 
which is-[= are ]-thought by king (ἡ. e. at court) honorable, horse golden- 
bridled and necklace golden and bracelets and dagger golden and gown 
Persian and the country no-longer to-be-ravaged; the and having-been- 
plundered slaves, if anywhere they-may-happen-in [with them], to-receive- 


back. 


CHAPTER III. 


1. (XXXII) There remained Cyrus and the army days twenty ; the 
for soldiers not said to-go of-the forward; were-suspecting for now against 
king to-go; to-be-hired however not upon that they-said. First however 
Clearchus the of-himself soldiers was-compelling to-go; the however him 


both were-hitting and the pack-animals, the of-that-one, when he-might- 
begin to-go-forward. 2. Clearchus however then indeed little escaped not 
to-be-stoned-to-death, later however when he-knew that not he-will-be-able 
to compel, he-led-together assembly of-the of-himself soldiers. And first 
indeed he wept much time standing; tlhe however, looking, wondered 
and were-silent ; thereupon however he-said such-(things). 3. Men sol- 
diers, (do) not wonder that hardly I-bear because-of-the present affairs. 
To-me for guest-friend Cyrus became and me fleeing from the fatherland 
the both other (-things) he-honored and ten-thousand he-gave daries ; which 
I taking not into the private deposited for-me, nor wasted-in-luxury, but 
into (=for) you I-was-expending. 4. (XX XIII.) And first indeed against 
the Thracians I-warred, and in-behalf-of the Greece, I-was-punishing with 
you, from the Chersonesus them driving-out wishing to-take-away-for- 
themselves the inhabiting Greeks the land. When-indeed however Cyrus 
called, taking you I-proceeded, in-order-that, if anything he-might-need, 
I-might-aid him in-return-for what well I-suffered by that-one. 5. When 
however you (do) not wish to-proceed-together, necessity indeed for-me 
either, you betraying, the of-Cyrus friendship to-use, or, toward that-one 
being deceitful, with vou to-be. If on-the-one-hand indeed just-things 











286 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


I-shall-do not I-know, I-shall-prefer however, be-that-as-it-may, you, and 
with you, whatever may-be-necessary I-shall-suffer. And never shall-say 
nobody that I, Greeks leading to the barbarians, betraying the Greeks, 
the of-the barbarians friendship preferred. 6. (XXXLV.) But when you 
to-me (do) not wish to-obey, I with you will follow and, whatever may-be- 
necessary, I shall suffer. I-think, for, you to-mne to-be both fatherland 
aud friends and allies, aud with you on-the-one-hand would (ἄν) I-think be 
houored, wherever I-may-be, of-you however deprived being, not able I 
think would (1) be neither (ἄν) friend to-aid neither (ἄν) enemy to-ward-off. 


As me therefore going (gen. abs.) wherever may also you, so the opinion - 


have. 7. These he-said; the however soldiers, the both of-himself that- 
one and the others, these hearing, that not he-said to-the-side-of king 
to-proceed, applauded ; from-the-side-of however Xenias and Pasion more 
than two-thousand, taking the arms and the baggage encamped to-the-side- 
of Clearchus. 8. Cyrus however by-these being-perplexed both and 
being-distressed, was-sending-after Clearchus; the (=he) however to-go 
on-the-onc-hand not was-willing, secretly however of-the soldiers sending 
to-him messenger he-was-saying to-be-of-cheer as being-about-to-settle (gen. 
abs.) these into the needing. To-send-after however he-bade him. He- 
himself however not said to-go. 9. (XXXV.) After however these, col- 
Jecting the both ohimself soldiers and the coming-to to-him and of-the 
others the wishing, he spoke such. Men soldiers, the on-the-one-hand 
indecd of-Cyrus, evident that, thus have toward us just-as the our toward 
that-one; neither for we of-that-one still soldiers, when at-lcast not we- 
follow-together him, nor that-one still to-us paymaster. That moreover 
to-be-wronged he-thinks by us I-know. 10. So-that even he sending-after 
(gen. abs.) not T-am-willing to-go, the on-the-one-hand greatest, being 
ashamed because I-am-conscious to-myself all (things) having-deceived him, 
then also fearing lest, taking me, justice he-lay-upon on-account-of-w hat 
he-thinks by-me to-have-heen-wronged. 11. To-me accordingly seems not 
season to-be for-us to-sleep nor to-be-negligent of-ourselves, but to-delib- 
erate whatever it-is-necessary to-do out-of these. And while both we- 
remain here, to-be-considered to-me it-seems to-be how most-safely we-shall- 
remain, if and now it-seems-best. to-go-away, how most-safely we-shall-go- 
away, and how the necessary we-shall-have; without for these neither 
of-a-general nor of-a-private use no, 12. (XXXVI.) The however man 
of-much indeed a-worthy friend, to-whom a-friend he-may-be, most-hard 
however enemy, to-whom hostile he-may-be; he-has however a-force both 
infantry and cavalry and naval which (we) all equally see both and under 











LITERAL TRANSLATION. 287 


stand; and for not-at-all far do-we-seem to-me from-him to-sit. So-that 
season to-say whatever any-one knows best to-be. These saying, he ceased. 
13. Out-of however this, were-rising the on-the-one-hand out-of the spon- 
taneous, abou'-to-say what they-knew, the on-the-other-hand also by that 
(-one) instructed, showing of-what-nature was the difficulty, without the 
o-Cyrus knowledge, both to-remain and to-go-away. 14. One however 
indeed said, pretending to-hasten as-quickly as-possible to proceed into the 
Greece generals on-the-one-hand to-choose, others, as-quickly as-possible, if 
Clearchus (does) not wish to-lead-away. The however necessaries to-buy 
—the however market was in the barbarian army — and to-pack-up ; going 
however Cyrus to-ask boats, that they-might-sail-away; if however (he- 
shall) not give these, a leader to-ask Cyrus, whoever through friendly the 
country shall-lead-away. If however not-even a-leader he-shall-give, to- 
form-in-line the quickest [way], to-send however a'so about-to-seize-in- 
advance the heights, in-order-that not shall-anticipate neither Cyrus neither 
the Cilicians seizing, of-whom many and much property we-have having- 
plundercd. This-one indeed such said; after however him Clearehus said 
so-much. 15. (XXXVII.) That on-the-one-hand about-to-command me 
this the military-plan (let) no-one of-you say; many, for, I-sec-in through 
which by-me this not must-be-done ; that on-the-other-hand to-the man, 
whom ye-may-choose, I-shal!-sbey in-what [way] possible most, in-order-that 
you-may-know that also to-be-ruled I-understand as any-oue even else 
assuredly of-men. 16. After him another stood-up, showing on-the-one- 
hand the folly of-the the boats to-ask ordering, just-as back the expedition 
Cyrus making (gen. abs.) ; showing on-the-other-nand that foolish it-was 
a-leader to-ask from-beside this-one for-whom we-harm the business. If 
however even to-the leader we-shall-trust, whom Cyrus may-give, what 
prevents also the heights for-us to-order Cyrus to-seize-in-advance ? 17. I, 
for, should-hesitate on-the-one-hand into the boats to-embark, which to-us 
he-might-give, lest us with-themselves the triremes hessink, I-should-fear 
on-the-other-hand the leader, whom he-might-give, to-follow, lest us he-lead 
whence not it-will-be-possible to-come-out ; I-should-wish however, unwil- 
ling, going-away, Cyrus (gen. abs.) to-elude him gone-away ; which not 
possible is. But I say these on-the-one-hand follies to-be. 18. (XXXVIIT.) 
It-seems-best however to-me men, gone to Cyrus, whoever suitable, with 
Clearchus to-ask that-one what fuse] he-wishes us to-use; and if on-the 
one-hand the-business be similar to-just-what also formerly he-used the 
mercenaries, to-follow also us and not worse to-be than-the formerly him 
coneup-with. 19. If however greater the business thau-the former ap- 

















288 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


pear and more-laborious and more-dangerous, to-claim-as-a-right either 
persuading us to-lead or, being-persuaded, toward friendship to-send-away ; 
thus, for, both following, friends to-him and zealous we-would-follow and, 
going-away, safely we-would-go-away ; whatever however at these-[things ] 
he-may-say to-report hither; us however, hearing, at these-[ things] to- 
deliberate. 20. Seemed-best these, and men choosing with Clearchus they- 
send who ask Cyrus the seeming-best to-the army. The however replied 
that he-heard Abrocomas, hostile man, upon the Euphrates river to-be, 
being-distant twelve days’-journey ; to-him accordingly he-said to-wish to- 
go; and-if on-the-one-hand he-be there, the justice he-said to-desire to-lay- 
upon him, if on-the-other-hand he-fled, we there at these shal'-deliberate. 
21. Hearing however these, the chosen report to-the soldiers ; to-the how- 
ever suspicion indeed was that he-was-leading against king, yet however 
it-seemed-best to-follow. They-ask in-addition however pay; the however 
Cyrus promises a-half-obol-more to-all to-be-about-to-give than-what before 
they-bore, instead-of a-daric three half-daries of-the month to-the soldier ; 
that however against king he-was-leading not-even there heard nobody in 
at-least the evident. 


A FREE TRANSLATION OF CHAPTERS L., IL. 





CHAPTER I. 


1. Of Darius and Parysatis are born two sons; the elder, Artaxerxes ; 
the younger, Cyrus. But when Darius was sick and suspected the end of 
his life to be near, he wished both of his sons to be present. 2. Now the 
elder happened to be present; but Cyrus is summoned from the province 
of which he had made him satrap, as he had appointed him general also of 
all who assemble in the plain of Castolus. So Cyrus goes up, taking 
Tissaphernes as a friend; and having also three hundred hoplites of the 
Greeks and Xenias the Parrhasian as their commander. 3. But when 
Darius died and Artaxerxes was established on the throne, Tissaphernes 
accuses Cyrus to his brother, chargiug that he was plotting against him. 
And the king believes him and arrests Cyrus, with the purpose of putting 
him to death; but his mother begs Cyrus off ‘and sends him back again to 
his province. 4. But as he went back, after incurring danger and disgrace, 
he plans that he may never again be in the power of his brother, but rule 
as king in his stead, if he shall be able. Now both the mother, Parysatis, 
was assisting Cyrus, since she loved him more than the reigning Arta- 
xerxes, 5. And if any one came to him from the king, Cyrus used to 
send them back, so disposed that they were more friendly to him than to 
the king. And he saw to the barbarians about him, that they might be 
both able to fight and friendly to him. 6. His Greek force he collected, 
hiding it as much as possible, in order that he might take the king thor- 
oughly unprepared. He made his collection as follows. He ordered the 
captains of all the garrisons which he had in the cities to procure men of 
Peloponnesus, as many and as good as possible, declaring that Tissaphernes 
was conspiring against his cities. For the Ionian cities had formerly been 
given by the king to Tissaphernes, but at this time had all revolted to Cy- 
rus, except Miletus. 7. And Tissaphernes perceiving that in Miletus they 


were deliberating upon similar measures, namely, to revolt to Cyrus, slew 
19 











290 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


some and banished others. But Cyrus, taking the fugitives under his 
protection and collecting an army, besieged Miletus by land and sea and 
endeavored to restore them. And this was a second pretext he had for 
collecting an army. 8. And sending to the king, he kept urging that, 
because he was a brother of his, those cities should be given to himself 
rather than be in the province of Tissaphernes, and his mother was co- 
operating with him in this; so that the king did not detect the conspiracy 
against himself, but he thought that by warring with Tissaphernes, he was 
squandering his means upon his armies; so that he felt no anger at their 
being at war. For Cyrus continually sent in the incoming revenues to the 
king from the cities which belonged to Tissaphernes, but happened to be 
in his possession. 9. But another army was collected for him in the 
Chersonesus which lies directly opposite Abydus, in the following manner. 
Clearchus was an exile from Sparta; Cyrus came to know him and ad- 
mired him, aud gave him ten thousand darics. And he took the money and 
raised an army with these means, and sallying forth from the Chersonesus, 
carried on war with those Thracians who lived beyond the Hellespont, and 
continually aided the Greeks; so that the cities of the Hellespont volun- 
tarily contributed means for him for the support of his soldiers. And this 
army also was thus supported for him in secret. 10. And Aristippus the 
Thessalian happened to be a guest-friend of his, and, hard pressed by his 
adversaries at home, he comes to Cyrus and asks him for two thousand 
darics and three mouths’ pay, believing that thus he would get the better 
of his adversaries. But Cyrus gives him about four thousand darics and 
six months’ pay, and begs him not to conclude with his adversaries before 
he shall have consulted him. And thus again the army in Thessaly was 
supported for him in secret. 11. But Proxenus the Boeotian, a guest- 
friend of his, he bade to take as many men as possible and come to him, 
stating that he desired to march against the Pisidians, on the ground that 
the Pisidians were giving his country trouble. And Sophaenetus the 
Stymphalian and Socrates the Achaean — they too being friends — he bade 
to take as many men as possible and come to him, saying that he was 
about to fight Tissaphernes with the aid of the exiles from Miletus. And 


so they did. 














FREE TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER II. 


1. But when at length it seemed to him good to go iuland, he made as 
his pretext a desire to banish the Pisidians wholly from their country ; 
and he collects ostensibly against these both his barbarian and Greek 
forces. He also sends word to Clearchus to take whatever army he had 
aud to come there, and to Aristippus to make peace with his opponents at 
home and to send him the army which he had; and to Xenias the Arcadian, 
who had charge of the mercenary force in the cities, he sends word to come, 
taking all his men, excepting as many as were necessary to guard the cit- 
adels. 2. He called those also who were besieging Miletus, and urged the 
fugitives to take the field with him, promising them that, if he should 
successfully accomplish the objects for which he was taking the field, he 
would not rest until he should restore them to their homes. And they 
cheerfully obeyed, for they trusted him, and took their arms and came to 
Sardis. 3. So now both Xenias came to Sardis, with the garrison of the 
cities, — about four thou8and hoplites, — and Proxenus came with about 
fifteen hundred hoplites and five hundred light-armed soldiers, and Sophae- 
netus the Stymphalian with one thousand huplites, and Socrates the Achaean 
with about five hundred hoplites, and Pasion the Megarian came with three 
hundred hoplites and three hundred targeteers; both Pasion and Socrates 
were among those in the field before Miletus. 4. These came to him at 
Sardis; but Tissaphernes, seeing these movements and thinking the pre- 
paration to be too great to be directed against the Pisidians, proceeds as 
rapidly as possible to the king with about five hundred horsemen. 5. And 
the king, in truth, when he heard from Tissaphernes of the equipment of 
Cyrus, made preparations against him. 

But Cyrus, with the forces which I have mentioned, sets out from Sardis, 
and marches through Lydia, three days’ journey, twenty-two parasangs, to 
the river Maeander; the width of this was two plethra, and there was a 
bridge over it, made of boats. 6. This he crosses and marches one day’s 
journey, eight parasangs, through Phrygia to Colossae, —a populous city, 
prosperous and large. There he remained seven days, and Menon the 
Thessalian arrived with a thousand hoplites and five hundred targeteers, — 
Dolopians, Aenianians, and Olynthians. 7. Thence he marches a three 
days’ journey, twenty parasangs, to Celaenae, a populous city of Phrygia, 
large and prosperous. Cyrus had a royal palace there, and a park full of 














292 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 


wild animals, which he used to hunt on horseback whenever he desired to 
exercise himself and his horses. Through the middle of the park flows the 
Maeander river, and its sources rise under the palace ; it flows through the 
city Celuenae. 8. The great king also has a strongly built palace in Ce- 
laenae, over the sources of the river Marsyas, at the foot of the citadel ; 
this river also flows through the city aud empties into the Maeander; the 
width of the Marsyas is twenty-five feet. It is said that here Apollo 
conquered Marsyas, who contended with him in musical skill, and flayed 
him and hung his skin in the cave from which the sources issue ; aud for 
this reason the river is called Marsyas. 9. It is said that Xerxes, when 
he was returning from Greece after his defeat in the famous battle, built 
that palace there, and the citadel of Celaenae. There Cyrus remained 
thirty days; and Clearchus the Lacedaemonian exile arrived with a thou- 
sand hoplites, eight hundred Thracian peltasts, and two hundred Cretan 
bowmen. And at the same time Sosis the Syracusan came with three 
hundred hoplites, and Sophaeuetus the Arcadian with a thousand hoplites. 
And there Cyrus reviewed and enumerated the Greeks in the park, and the 
entire number of hoplites was eleven thousand, and of the peltasts about 
two thousand. 10. Thence he marehes two day®’ journey, ten parasangs, 
to Peltae, a populous city. There he remained three days, during which 
Xenias the Arcadian celebrated the Lycaean sacrifices and gave an athletic 
contest; and the prizes were golden strigils ; and Cyrus also viewed the 
contest. ‘Thence he marches two days’ journey, twelve parasangs, to 
Ceramon-agora, a populous city, and ou the frontier toward the country of 
Mysia. 11. Thence he marches three days’ journey, thirty parasangs, to 
Cayster-plain, a populous city. There he remained five days, and more than 
three months’ pay was due the soldiers, and they went frequently to head- 
quarters and demanded it. But he put them off by uttering promises, and 
he was evidently annoyed; for it was not according to the character of 
Cyrus not to give when he had the means. 12. There Epyaxa the wife of 
Syennesis. king of the Cilicians, came to Cyrus ; and it was said that she 
gave Cyrus a great deal of money. Whether so or not, Cyrus then gave 
the army four months’ pay. And the Cilician queen had about herself a 
guard of Cilicians and Aspendians; and it was said also that Cyrus had 
intercourse with the Cilician. 13. Thence he marches a two days’ jour- 
ney, ten parasangs, to Thymbrium, a populous city. ‘There was there, by 
the roadside, the so-called fountain of Midas, king of the Phrygians, at 
which it is said that Midas caught the Satyr by mixing it with wine. 
14. Thence he marches a two days’ journey, ten parasangs, to Tyriaeium, 








FREE TRANSLATION. 293 


a populous city. There he remained three days. And it is said that the 
Cilician queen asked Cyrus to show her the army. Wishing therefore to 
show it to her, le makes a review of the Greeks and the barbarians in 
the plain. 15. And he ordered the Greeks to be so arranged and to so 
take their place as was their custom for battle, and each general to marshal 
his own men. ‘They were therefore arranged four deep, and Menon with 
his soldiers held the right wing, and Clearchus and his men the left wing, 
while the other generals held the middle. 16. Now Cyrus viewed first 
the barbarians, and they marched by, drawn up in troops and companies ; 
and then he viewed the Greeks, riding past them in a chariot, the Cilician 
queen in a carriage. And they all had brazen helmets and purple tunics, 
aud greaves, and shields which they had uncovered. 17. But when he had 
ridden past all, he stopped his chariot in front of the middle of the phalanx, 
and sent Pigres the interpreter to the generals of the Greeks, and ordered 
them to present arms, and the whole phalanx to advance. The generals 
gave these announcements to the soldiers, and when the trumpet had 
sounded, they presented arms and advanced. And as the soldiers there- 
upon advanced more swiltly with shouting, they began to run of their own 
accord toward their tents. 18. But great was the fear of the barbarians, 
and not only the Cilician queen fled in her chariot, but those in the market- 
place left their wares and fled. The Greeks went to their teuts with a 
laugh; and the Cilician queen wondered as she beheld the brightness and 
the good order of the army. But Cyrus was amused when he saw the fear 
inspired by the Greeks into the barbarians. 19. Thence he marches a three 
days’ journey, twenty parasangs, info Iconium, a frontier city of Phrygia. 
There he remained three days. Thence he marches through Leesouin a 
five days’ journey, thirty parasangs. This country he allowed the Greeks 
to plunder, on the ground that it was hostile. 20. From this place Cyrus 
sends back the Cilician queen, by the shortest road, to Cilicia; and he sent 
with her the soldiers whom Menon led, and with them Menon himself. 

But Cyrus marches with the rest a four days’ journey, twenty-five parasangs, 

through Cappadocia, to Thoana, a populous city, large and peoapiinioie: 

There he remained three days; during which Cyrus put to death a Persian 

man, Megaphernes, a wearer of the royal purple, and a certain other 

powerful man of his subordinates, charging them with conspiracy against 

him. 21. From this place he attempted to enter Cilicia; but the entrance 

was a wagon road, very steep and impossible for an army to enter, if any 

one prevented. And besides, Syennesis was said to be upon the heights, 

guarding the entrance; wherefore they remained a day in the plain. But 








a= 


-- ας. -- --- σον 





᾿ 








294 INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 
on the following day a messenger came saying that Svennesis had left the 
heights, since he learned that Menon’s army was already in Cilicia, within 
the mountains, and because he heard that Tamos had command of triremes 
belonging to the Lacedaemonians and Cyrus himself which were sailing 
around from Ionia to Cilicia. 22. And so Cyrus went upon the moun- 
tains, since no one hindered, and he saw the tents where the Cilicians kept 
guard. And thence he descended into a large and fertile plain, full of all 
kinds of trees and of vines; and it produces a great deal of sesame and 
panic, and millet and wheat and barley. And a mountain, steep and ten- 
able as a stronghold, surrounds it on all sides from sea to sea, 23. And 
descending through this plain he marched a four days’ journey, twenty-five 
parasangs, to Tarsus, a large and prosperous city of Cilicia. And there 
was the royal residence of Syennesis, the Cilician king; and through the 
middle of the city flows a river, Cyduus by name, two plethra in width. 
24. This city, all the inhabitants, except those who had shops, deserted 
together with Syennesis for a strong fortress upon the mountains; but 
those remained, who dwelt by the sea-coast in Soli andin Issus. 25. And 
Epyaxa, the wife of Syennesis, arrived in Tarsus five days before Cyrus; 
but in the passage of the mountains down into the plain two companies 
of Menon’s army were destroyed. Some said that they were cut down 
while perpetrating some act of plunder; and others, that after being left 
behind, and losing the rest of the army and the roads, they then wandered 
about and were destroyed. At any rate, these were a hundred hoplites. 
26. But whien the rest came in they sacked the city of Tarsus, as well as 
the palace in it, because they were angered at the loss of their comrades. 
But when Cyrus marched into the city he kept summoning Syennesis to 
come to him; but he not only declared that he had never before come 
into the power of any one stronger than himself, but was then unwilling 
to come to Cyrus before his wife had persuaded him and he had himself 
received pledges. 27. But after this, when they were together, Syennesis 
gave Cyrus a great deal of money for his army: and Cyrus gave him gifts, 
which are considered honorable at court, — namely, a horse with a golden 
bridle, a golden necklace, bracelets, a golden short sword, and a Persian 
gown ; also the promise that his country should no longer be plundered, 
and that the slaves should be returned which had been carried off in plunder 
if they should be found anywhere. 








THE WORDS OF BOOK I. OF THE ANABASIS 


Arranged in the order of their first occurrence. 


CHAPTER I. 


καί, and, also. 
γίγνομαι, 2 aor. ἐγενόμην, to be 
born, become, be. 


. wats, παιδός, boy. 


δύο, δυοῖν, wo. 

πρέσβυς, -ews, old man; πρεσβύ- 
Tepos, -vtatos, older, oldest. 

μὲν. . . δέ, on the one hand 

. . on the other; often best 

rendered as here by em- 
phasizing the preceding 
word. 

νέος, -@TEpos, -wTaTos, young, 
younger, youngest. 


. ἐπεί, when; ἐπάν or ἐπήν 


9. 
10. 


11. 


12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


(= ἐπεί + ἄν) w. subj. when- 
ever, when. 
δέ, and, but. 
ἀσθενέω, impf. ἡσθένουν, fut. 
-no@, (0 begick. 
vr-orrevw, impf. ὑπώπτευον, 
fut. -evow, to suspect. 


τελευτή, -ἧς, end. 

ὁ, ἡ, τό; τοῦ, τῆς, τοῦ, the. 

βίος. -ου, life. 

βούλομαι, -ἥσομαι, fo wish. 

ἀμφότεροι, «αι, -α, both. 

πάρ-ειμι, impf. παρ-ἣν, to be 
present, arrive. 





18. 
19. 


οὖν, therefore, now. 
τυγχάνω, 2 aor. ἔτυχον, to 
happen. 


. μετα-πέμπομαι, fo send after. 
> ’ 4 
. ἀπό, with gen., from. 


2. ἀρχή, -ῆἧς, beginning, govern- 


tS b> τὸ NO 
ND ot 


30. 


ment, province. 
és, 7, 6, who, which, what. 
αὐτός, -7, -d, self, in the nom. 
and before the art.; same, 
after it ; him, her it, alone. 
σατράπης, -ov, a satrap. 
ποιέω, -7ow, (0 make. 


- στρατηγός, -ov, general. 


ἀπο-δείκνῦμι, -δείξω, to show 
forth ; appoint. 


. πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν; παντός, etc., all, 


every. 
ὅσος, -7, -ov, as much (pl. many) 
as. 


31. els, with ace. into; with nu- 


merals, about. 


32. πεδίον, -ov, plain. 


33. ἀθροίζω, -οίσω, to collect; mid. 


assemble. 


34. ava Balvw, 2 aor. ἀν-έβην, to 


go up. 


35. λαμβάνω, 2 aor. ἔλαβον, to take, 


receive. 























296 


36. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


ws, as, as if, when; to (Ch. II. 
§ 4); with super. intens., 
as possible (ὃ 5). See H.} 
651. 

φίλος, -n, -ov, friend/y , as subs. 
a friend. 


. ἔχω, impf. εἶχον, fut. ἔξω or 


σχήσω, to have, to hold. 


ὁπλίτης,Ἠ -ov, heavy -armed 
soldier. 


. τριάκόσιοι, -αι, -a, three hun- 


dred. 


. ἄρχων, -ovros, commander. 


τελευτάω, now, to end (life), 
die. See 12. 


. καθ-ίστημι, fo settle; 2 aor. 


κατ ἔστην, become settled. 
βασιλεία, -as, hingdom. 


. διαβάλλω (to throw through), 


to slander. 


. πρός, with gen. from; with 


dat. at, beside; acc. to, 
toward ; against. 


. ἀδελφός, -ov, brother. 


. ἐπι-βουλεύω, -evow, fo plot 


against. See 61. 


. ὁ δέ (not preceded by ὁ μέν), 


and he, but he. 


. πείθω, πείσω, (o persuade ; mid. 


obey. 
συλ-λαμβάνω, 2 aor. συν ἔλαβον, 
to seize. See 35. 


. ἀπο-κτείνω, -κτενῶ, ἀπ-έκτεινα, 


to kill. 


. μήτηρ, μητρύς, mother. 
. ἐξαιτέω, -ἥσω, demand from or 


off, wid. beg off. 








OF THE ANABASIS. 


. ἀπο-πέμπω, -ψω, fo send away 


or back. See 20. 


. πάλιν, buck, again. 
. ἐπί, with gen. upon ; with dat. 


upon, on, dependent upon 
(=in the power of); with 
acc. upon, against. 


. ἀπ-έρχομαι, 2 aor. ἀπ-ῆλθον, to 


go away or back, 


. κινδυνεύω, -evow, (ov incur dan- 


ger. 


. ἀτιμάζω, -aow, ἠτίμασα, to dis. 


honor. 


. βουλεύω, -εύσω, fo plan; mid. 


deliberate. See 48. 


. ὅπως, how, how that, in order 


that. 


. μήποτε, never (with subj., 


imper.,etc.). See H. 1018, 
G.? 283, 1 and 2. 


. ἔτι, still, yet. 
. εἰμί, impf. ἦν, fut. ἔσομαι, to be, 


with gen. or dat. belong to. 
See 17. 


. ἀλλά, but. 
. ἦν (uot ἦν, see 65), or ἐάν, if, 


with subj. 


. δύναμαι, impf. ἐδυνάμην, to be 


able. 


. βασιλεύω, -evow, fo be king 


See 44. 


. ἀντί, with gen., instead of. 
. ἐκεῖνος, -7, -o, that. 
. δή, now, indeed: often best 


rendered by emphasizing 
preceding word. 


. ὑπ-άρχω, impf. ὑπ-ῆρχον, fut. 


1 Hadley’s Greek Grammar, revised by Allen. 
2 Goodwin’s Greek Grammar, edition of 1879. 


- W, than; ἢ. 





CHAPTER I. 297 


-Ew, to begin (see 137); to 
be (§ 4, to favor, a rare 
sense). 


. φιλέω, -σω, to love. 
. μάλλον, more, rather. 


. - G, ether... 
or. 


. ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι, whoever, which- 


ever, whatever. See 23. 


- ἀφ-ικνέομαι, 2 aor. ἀφ-ϊκύμην, 


to arrive. See 17. 


. παρά, with gen. from; with 


dat. by, near; with ace. to. 
βασιλεύς, -έως, king. See 69. 


. οὕτω(ς), so, thus. 

2. δια-τίθημι, fo dispose or affect. 
. ὥστε, sv as, so that. 
. ἑαυτοῦ, -ἢς, himself, herself. 


. βάρβαρος, -ov, foreign, bar- 


barian. 


. ἐπι-μελέομαι, impf. ἐπ-εμελού- 


μην, to care for, with gen. 


. πολεμέω, -ἥσω, (0 carry on war. 
: δου «el beh... . οὐδ 
. ἱκανός, -ἡ, -όν, enough, com- 


petent. 


. εὐ-νοϊκῶς, well disposed. 
. δύναμις. ews, ἡ, force, power ; 


see 68. 


. Z . 
. μάλιστα, most, especially: ὡς 


μάλιστα, as much as possible. 
See 75. 


. κρύπτω, -ψω, to hide, cover ; 


ἐπι-, to corer over, conceal. 


. ὅτι, that, because, cf. 77; with 


super., intens. like ὡς (see 
36), as possible. 


LA 
. ἀπαράσκευνος, τον; -ότερος, 


-dratos, unprepared. 








96. ὧδε, thus, as follows. See 81. 
. συλλογή, ἧς, collection, levy. 
. ὁπόσος, -n, -ov, as great as, as 

many as. 

. φυλακή, -ῆς, a garrison. 

. ἐν, with dat., in. 

. πόλις, -ews, 7, City. 

παρ-αγγέλλω, fut. -ελῶ, send 
word to, command. 
3. potp-apxos, -ov, α garrison- 
commander, 

. ἕκαστος, -7, -ov, each; plur. 

several 
ἀνήρ. ἀνδρός, man (Lat. vir). 

. πολύς, πλείων, πλεῖστος, much 
or many, more, most. 

. ἀγαθός, -7, -όν ; ἀμείνων; ἄρι- 
στος, or βελτίων, βέλτιστος, 
good, better, best. 

yap, for. 

- ἀρχαῖος -a. -ον (in the begin- 
ning, see 22), old, ancient ; 
τὸ ἀρχαῖον, formerly. 

ἐκ, ἐξ, with gen., out of, from. 

δίδωμι, δώσω (H. 350; 6. 
123, 3), to give. 

2. πότε, then. 

ἀφ-ίστημι, ἀποστήσω (H. 351, 
G. 123, 3), to make to stand 
away, remove; mid., with 
pf. and 2 aor. act., intrans., 
stand aloof, revolt. 

πλήν, except. 

προ-αισθάνομαι, 2 aor. mpo- 
noOspnv, to perceive before- 
hand. 

. οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, this, con- 
trast αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό, self, 
same, him, etc. 





























298 


117 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


Opev... 6 8€, theone... 
the other; plur. these... 


those; some... others. 


. ἀπο-κτείνω, -κτενῶ, ἀπ-έκτεινα, 


to kill. 


. ἐκ-βάλλω, ἐκ-βαλῶ, 2 aor. ἐξ- 


. ὑπο-λαμβάνω, 2 aor. ὑπ-έλαβον, | 


έβαλον, throw out, expel. See 
45. 


to take under one’s protec- 
tion. See 35, 81]. 


. φεύγω, 2 aor. ἔφυγον, to flee, 


be in exile. 


. συλ-ιλέγω, -Ew, συν-έλεξα, to 


collect. 


. στράτευμα, -aTos, τό, army. 


. πολιορκέω, -now, besiege. 
. κατά, down; with gen. down 
rom; with acc. down along, 


according to, by. 


. γῆ. γῆς. earth, land. 

. θάλαττα, -ns, sed. 

. πειράομαι, ἰο attempt. 

. κατ-άγειν, fo lead back, re- 


. ἐκ-πίπτω, pf. ἐκ-πέπτωκα. to | 
fall out, be driven out, ot | 


store. 


ἐκ-πεπτωκότες, the exiles. 


. av, again. 
. ἄλλος, -n, -ο, another. 
. πρόφασις, -ews, 7, prefert. 


. πέμπω, ψω, to send. See 


20, 55. 


. ἀξιόω, impf. ἠξίουν, fut. -ώσω, 


to deem worthy, demand (as 
deserved). 


. οὗ, ol, ἕ, himself. See H. 677,a, 


G. 144, 2. 


. ἄρχω, impf. ἦρχον; fut. -ξω, 











OF 


THE ANABASIS. 


to begin (mid.); to rule 
(act.). See 22. 


. συμ-πράττω. -ἄξω, fo do (some- 


thing) with (another), co- 
operate with. 


. ἐπιβουλή, -7s, plot. See 48. 


. OV, οὐκ OY οὐχ, not. H. 88. 


G. 13, 2. 


. αἰσθάνομαι, impf. ἡσθανόμην, 


2 aor. ἠσθόμην, to perceive. 
See 115. 


. ψομίζω, fut. -.@ (to regard as 


custom, see 323), think, sup- 
pose. 


. ἀμφί, about. 
. ϑαπανάω, -ἦσω, fo spend 


(money). 


. οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, no one, 


nothing. 


. ἄχθομαι, to be vexed. 
. δασμός, -ov, revenue. 
. κατ-αντιπέρᾶς, adv. with gen., 


op posite. 


. ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, this, the follow- 


ing. 


. τρόπος, -ov, turn, manner. 
. φυγάς, -ados, fugitive, exile. 


See 121. 


2. avy-ylyvopar, impf. συν-εγι- 


γνόμην, 2 aor. συν-εγενόμην, 
to become (see 2) with, be- 
come acquainted with, be 


with. 


3. ἄγαμαι, 1 aor. pass. ἠγάσθην, 


to admire. 


. μύριοι, at, -a, ten thousand. 
. δᾶρεικός, -ov, a daric ($3.60). 
. Xpuolov, -ov, money; xpiads, 


-ov, gold. 








CHAPTER 1. 299 


. χρῆμα, -atos, τό, α thing 


used ; chief. plur., goods, 
money. 


. ὁρμάω, impf. ὥρμων, -ἥσω, set 


out, hasten. 


. ὑπέρ, with gen., over, in be- 


half of; with acc., over, 
beyond. 


. olkéw, impf. @xovr, fut. -ἥσω, 


divell, inhabit. 


. ὠφελέω, -now, aid, assist. 


2. συμ-βάλλω, fo throw or bring 


together; mid. contribute. 


See 45, 119. 


3. τροφή, -ῆς, nourishment, sup- 


port : 


. στρατιώτης, -ov, soldier. 
. ἑκών, -οὔσα, -dv, voluntary. 
. τρέφω, fo nourish, support. 


See 163. 


. λανθάνω, 2 aor. ἔλαθον, to 


escape notice; often = se- 
cretly. 


. ξένος, -ov, a foreigner who 


became a quest-friend to 
some one or entered mili- 
tary service abroad, a mer- 
cenary. 

πιέζω, fo press, oppress. 

ὑπό, under (dat. or acc.); by 
(gen.). 


. οἴκοι. at home. H. 220, G. 


190. n. 2. 


. ἀντισσττασιώτης, -ov, member 


of a στάσιν or faction, an 
opponent. 


. ἔρχομαι, 2 aor. ἦλθον, to go, 


come. 








174. alréw, impf. 7rovy, fut. -σω- 


ask, demand. 


7. δισχίλιοι, - ar, -a, two thousand. 


176. 
. μήν, μηνός, 6, month. 

178. μισθός͵ οὔ, pay. 
. περι-γίγνομαι, 2 aor. περι- 


τρεῖς, τρία. gen. τριῶν, three. 


εγενόμην, become above, over- 
come. See 2, 152. 


. ἄν, postpos. particle. See 


H. 857; G. 207. 


. τετρακισχίλιοι, -at, -a, four 


thousand. 


. ἕξ, six. 


. δέομαι, δεήσομαι, to want. 
. μή. not. 


See II. 1018, 6. 
283. 


. πρόσθεν, before, formerly ; π. 


. πρίν, before that. 


. Kara-Avw, <dis-solve, to end 


(esp. ἃ war). 
πρίν, before. See 185. 
συμ-βουλεύω, advise. See 
61. 


. κελεύω, -evo, order. 


παρα-γίγνομαι, impf. παρ- 
εγιγνόμην, 2 aor. παρ-εγενό- 
μην, to come to, arrive. See 
2, 152, 179. 


. στοατεύομαι, engage in war, 


make an expedition. 

πράγμα. -atos, τό, deed, αἴ 
fair; pl. affairs, business, 
trouble. 


3. παρέχω, impf. map-eixor, to 


furnish. See 38. 


. χώρᾶ, -as, country, land. 


σύν, with dat., with. 


























WORDS OF BOOK I. OF THE ANABASIS. 


CHAPTER 


δοκέω, δόξω, ἔδοξα, fo think; 
seem, seem good. 

. ἤδη, already, now. 

. πορεύομαι, evoouat, pass. dep., 

to proceed. 


. ἄνω, -τέρω, τάτω, up, upwards, 


παντά - πάσι(ν), «aliogether, 
wholly. 

βαρβαρικός, -7, -dv, barbarian, 
foreign. 

ἐνταῦθα, there. 

ἥκω, fo come, arrive. H. 827, 
G. 200, n. 3. 

συν-αλλάττω, -d&w, to change 
(and bring) together, to rec- 
oncile. 

προ-ίστημι, στήσω. -€oTnCA, 
trans. fo set before or over; 
intrans. to set orer, com- 
mand : 2 aor. -€orny, -ἐστηκα. 

. ξενικός, -7. -όν, mercenary. 

. ἀκρό-πολις, -ews. 9, acropolis, 
citadel. 

φυλάττω, -ἀξω. fo guard. 

καλέω, έσω. ἐκάλεσα, κέκληκα, 
call, summon. 

ὑπ-ισχνέομαι, 2 aor. ὑπ-εσχό- 
μην, lo promise. 

εἰ, if. 

καλῶς, honorably, well. 

κατα-πράττω, -ξω, fo do effect- 
ually, accomplish. 

. παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα. make 

to cease; mid. to cease, 

pause. 





Il. 


215. otxa-Se, homeward. H. 217, 


G. 61. 


. ἡδέως, ἥδιον, ἥδιστα, pleas. 


antly, gladly. 


ὩΣ , . 
πιστεύω, evow, trust, believe. 


8. ὅπλον, -ov, usually pl. armor. 
9. πεντακόσιοι, -a, -a, five hun- 


dred. 
χίλιοι, -at, -a, α thousand. 


. γυμνής, -nros, light-armed sol- 


dier. 


2. πελταστής, -ov, peliast. See 


1268. 

kara-voéw, observe carefully. 
See 821. 

μέγας, μεγάλη, μίγα; μείζων 
(Η. 68, G. 16, 7 (Ὁ)) ; μέγι- 
atos, great. 

ἡγέομαι, -ἥσομαι, lead, con- 
sider (cf. L. duco). 


. παρα-σκευή,. ns, preparation. 
. ἡ (sc. ὁδῷ. in which way), as. 


ταχύς, -cia, -v; θαττων (H. 74, 
G. 17, 2, n at end); τάχι- 
atos quick, 

ἱππεύς. -€ws, horseman. 

ἀκούω, ἀκούσομαι, ἤκουσα, tO 
hear. 

στόλος. -ov, expedition. 

ἀντι-παρα-σκευάζομαι, fo pre- 
pare against or in turn. See 
226. 


. φημί, fut. ἐρῶ (1V.,8), 2 aor. 


εἶπον (III. 7), pf. εἴρηκα, say ; 
οὔ φημι, deny, refuse. 


h> th b bo 
δὴ Set Or 





CHAPTER II. 301 


ἐξ-ελαύνω, fut. ἐξ-ελῶ, ἐξ-ήλα- 
σα, to march, 

Sia, with gen. through; with 
acc. on account of. 

σταθμός, -ov, siation, day's 
march. 


. wapacdyyns, -ov (Persian), 


parasang, league. 
εἴκοσι(ν), twenty. 


. ποταμός. -od rire. 


εὖρος. -ovs τό. breadth, width. 
πλέθρον. -ov. plethron (101 ft.). 


. γέφυρα, -as, bridge. 
. ἔπ-ειμι, impf. ἐπ-ῆν, to be 


upon. 


. ζεύγινῦμι, ζεύξω ἔζευξα, ἔζευγ- 


μαι (L. ju(n)g ο), fo ΥὙΟΚΕ, 
join together. 

πλοῖον, ov, boat. 

ἑπτά, seren. 

δια-βαίνω, 2 aor. δι-έβην, go 
through, cross. 

els μίᾶ, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, One. 

> ΄ “4 

ὀκτώ, eight. 

εὐδαίμων, -ov, gen -ovos, pros- 

μων, -ov, 8 .} 

perous. 

μένω μενῶ, ἔμεινα, fo remain. 

ἡμέρα, -as, day. 


3. ἐντεῦθεν, thence. 


βασίλεια, -ων, plur. of adj. (see 
80), royal palace. 


. παράδεισος, -ov, park; deriv. 


PARADISE. 


. ἄγριος, -a, -ov, wild; fr. ἀγρός, 


-ov (LL. ager), field, country. 
θηρίον, ov, dim. (in form 
only) of Onp, θηρός, a wild 
animal. 
πλήρης, ες, gen. -ovs, full. 








θηρεύω, -evow, hunt, catch. 
See 257. 


. ἵππος, -ov, horse. See 229. 
. ὁπότε, when, whenever. 


γυμνάΐζω, dow, fo train (see 
1243), exercise. 

μέσος, -n, τον, middle; τὸ 
μέσον, centre (= ped-yos, L. 
med-ius). 

pew, ῥεύσομαι, 2 aor. ἐ-ρ-ρύην, 
lo flow. 


. πηγή, -ns, fountain, source, 


chief. in plur. 


. épupvos, -ἡ -όν. fortified ; from 


ἐρίομαι, lo defend. 

ἐμ-βάλλω, -βαλῶ, 2 aor. ἐν- 
έβαλον, to throw inta; of ἃ 
river, fo empty. 


. πέντε, five. 
. πούς, ποδός ὁ (LL. pe(d)s), 


FOOT. 
λέγω, λέξω, ἔλεξα, fo say, 
speak. 


. ἐκ-δέρω, -depa, ἐξ έδειρα, to 


skin (off, én), flay. 


νικάω, -ἥσω, 10 Conquer. 


3. ἐρίζω, -icw (Epis, -ιδος, strife), 


strive with. 


. περί, with gen., about = con- 


cerning; dat. and ace. 
around, about. 
σοφία, -as, skill, wisdom. 


. δέρμα, ατος, τό, skin. See 


Jet: 
κρεμά-ννῦμι, κρεμάσω, ἐκρέ- 
paca to hang (trans.). 


ἄντρον. ov, care; L. antrum. 


. ὅθεν, whence, where. 
. ὅτε, when. 















































WORDS OF BOOK I. 


ἡττάομαι, pass. dep. ἡττηθή- 
copa, pf. ἥττημαι, ἡττήθην, 
to be ἥττων (comp. Of κακός), 
inferior, worsted, defeated. 
μάχη. -ns, battle. 
ἀπο-χωρέω, -now, withdraw, 
retreat. 
olxo-Sopéw, -now, ῳκοδόμησα, 
to build. 
τριάκοντα, thirty. 
ὀκτακόσιοι, «at, -a, eight hun- 
dred. 
τοξότης, -ov. ὦ bowman; τό- 
ξον, -ov, a bow. 
διακόσιοι, at, -au, (wo hundred. 
ἅμα, at the same time; with, 
with dat. 
ἐξ-έτασις, -ews, ἡ, inspeclion 
(ἐξ ετάζω, ἰο inspect). 
. ἀριθμός, -οὔ, number, num- 
bering. 
. σύμ-πᾶς, σύμ-πᾶσα, σύμ-πᾶν, 
all together, all ina body ; 


τὸ σύμ πᾶν, on the whole. 
See V. 9. 


δέκα. fen. 
θύω. θύσω, ἔθῦσα, sacrifice. 

. ἀγών, -ὥνος, 6 contest. 

. τίθημι. θήσω ἔθηκα, pul, place ; 
institute: τίθεσθαι τὰ ὅπλα, 
to stack arms, stand under 
arms. 

297. ἄθλον, -ov, prize. 
298. στλεγγίς, iSos, ἡ flesh-scraper 
or comb. 


299. χρῦσοῦς, -7, -ow, golden; 


xpuads, -ov, gold. 
300. θεωρέω, -now, fo view, inspect. 


301. δώδεκα. /welve. 


OF 


302. 


503. 
508. 


305. 
306. 





THE ANABASIS. 


Gyopa, as, market-place, 
market. 
ἔσχατος, -η. -ov, last, farthest. 
ὀφείλω, ὀφειλήσω, ὠφείλησα: 
tu owe. 
πολλάκις, often. See 106. 
εἶμι, impf. ἦα or ge, inf. 
ἰέναι, palit. ἰών, to go. 1]. 
477, a; G. 127, IL, &. 2. 
Bupa, -as, door, gate. 
ἀπ-αιτέω, -ἦσω. ἀπ-ήἥτησα, de- 
mand back. 
ἐλπίς, -idos, ἡ. hope, promise. 
δι-άγω, -déw, lead through; of 
time, continue. 
δῆλος. -η, -ov, evident. 
ἀνιάω, iow, fo grieve; fr. avia, 
as. grief. 
ἀπο-δίδωμι, -δώσω, ἀπ-έδωκα., to 
give back, ὁ pay. See 109. 
γυνή, -αικός, ἡ woman, wife. 
στρατια. -as army. 
τέτταρες, -a; gel. των, four. 
φύλαξ. -axos, guard. 
ὁδός. -od, ἡ. way, road. 
κρήνη. -ns, spring, fountain. 
οἶνος, ov. for Foivos, L. v:- 
num, WINE. 
κεράννῦμι, κεράσω, ἐκέρασα, lo 


mix, mingle. 


2. ἐπι- δείκνυμι. -δείξω, ἐπ-έδειξα, 


to show forth, exhibit. See 28. 


323. νόμος. -ov, /aw, custom. 
324. τάττω. τάξω, ἔταξα, (o arrange, 


order. 


325. ἵστημι, στήσω. ἔστησα, trans., 


to make to stand (station, 
halt, etc.); 2 aor. ἔστην, pf. 


ἕστηκα, plupf. ἑστήκειν (oF 











CHAPTER II. 303 


εἷσ-), intrans., to stand. 
See 113. 

326. συν-τάττω, -ξω, fo arrange to- 
gether, draw up. See 324. 

327. δεξιός, a, dv, right; ἐν δεξιᾷ, 
on the right. 

5328. εὐώνυμος, -ov, left. 

329. πρῶτος, -n, -ov, first; πρῶτον, 
adv., first, at first. 

330. παρελαύνω, -ελῶ, -ἤλασα, to 
ride along. 

331. ἴλη, -ns, troop (of horse). 

332. τάξις, -ews, ἡ, order (esp. in 
milit. sense, array, rank; 
company, etc.). See 324. 

333. εἶτα, then. 

334. ἅρμα, -aros, τό, chariot. 

335. dpp-duata, -ns, carriage (cov- 
ered). 

336. κράνος, -ους, τό, helmet. 

337. χαλκοῦς, -ἢ, -οὖν, copper, 
bronze. 

338. χιτών, -avos, 6, tunic. 

339. φοινικοῦς, -7, -odv, purple (cf. 
Φοίνικες, Phoenicians, first 
to discover its use). 

340. κνημίς, -idos, ἡ, a greave. 

341. ἀσπίς, (dos, ἡ. shield. 

342. ἐκ-καλύπτω, -ψω, lo uncorer. 

343. ἐπειδή, when, since; stronger 
than ἐπεί. See 72. 

344, πρό, with gen., before; in be- 
half of. 

345. φάλαγξ, -ayyos, ἡ, phalanz. 

346. ἑρμηνεύς, -éws, 6. interpreter. 

347. προ- βάλλω, -βαλῶ, 2 aor. 
ἔβαλον, tv throw before; 
mid., of arms, fo present. 
See 45. 














348. ἐπι-χωρέω, -ἥσω, io advance. 
See 283. 

349. ὅλος, -η, -ov, whole, all. 

350. mpo-cirov, 2 aor. of προ- 
λέγω, to speak forth, pro- 
claim. 

σαλπίζω, «ἰγξω ἐσάλπιγξα, to 
sound the σάλπιγξ or trum- 
pet. 

O2. ἔπ-ειμι, impf. ἐπ-ήειν, to go (or 
come) on, forward or against. 
See 306. 

353. πρό-ειμι, to go forward. 

304. κραυγή, -ῆς, shout. 

305. αὐτόματος, -ον, of one’s own 
accord, deriv. AUTOMATON. 

356. δρόμος, -ov, a running. 

357. σκηνή, -ῆς, a lent. 

358. φόβος -ov, fear. 

909. κατα-λείπω, -ψω, 2 aor. κατ- 
έλιπον, to leave behind, leave. 

900. ava, -ων, τά, wares. See 
767. 

361. γέλως, -wros, 6, laughter. 

362. ὁράω, impf. ἑώρων, fut. ὄψο- 
pat, 2 aor. εἶδον, to see. 

363. λαμπρότης, -ητος, ἡ, splendor 
(fr. adj. λαμπρός, bright). 

364. θαυμάζω, dow, to wonder at, 
admire. 

365. ἥδομαι, pass. dep., ἡσθήσομαι, 
ἥσθην, to be pleased. 

366. ἐπι-τρέπω, -ψω, -έτρεψα, turn 
over to, entrust, permit. 

367. δι-αρπάζω, -dcoua, to plunder 
(thoroughly). 

368. πολέμιος, -a, -ov, hostile; οἱ 
πολ.. the enemy. 

309. συμ-πέμπω, -ψω, fo send with. 









































304 
370. 
371. 


372. 
373. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


Φφοινικιστής, -ov, purple-wearer 
(see 339), courtier (rare). 
βασίλειος. -a ov, royal. See 

80. 
ἕτερος, -a, -ov, other (of two) 
τὶς, τὶ. some Or any one, a 


certain. 


. ὕπ-αρχος, -ov, an under com- 


manider, lieutenant. 


. δυνάστης, -ov, powerful man, 


chief. See 68. 


. αἰτιάομαι, ἄσομαι, lo accuse. 
. εἰσ-βάλλω, fv throw into~ of 


an army, fo enter; of a 


river, 10 empty. 


. εἰσ-βολή. -ἧς, entrance. 
. ἁμαξιτός, dv, for or belonging 


See 787. 


to a wagon. 


. ὄρθιος, -a, -ον 8166}. 
. ἰσχυρῶς, mightily, ΞΞ very as in 


colloq. Eng. 


. ἀμήχανος, -ov impracticable. 


. εἰσ-έρχομαι, 2 aor. εἰσ-ῆλθον, 


to go into, enler. See 58. 


. κωλυνυυ, -ὕσω, fo hinder. 


. ἄκρος, -d, -ον, 


ἄκρα. the heights. 


. διό (= & 6), wherefore. 


. werepaios, -a, -ον. following ; 


τῇ ὑστεραίᾷ, on the following | 


day. 


. ἄγγελος. -ov, messenger. 


. λείπω, -ψω, 2 aor. ἔλιπον, to 


. εἴσω, 


leave. 
within; τὸ 


inner. 


. ὄρος. -ους, τό, Mountain. 


. τριήρης, -es; gen. τους, ἐγὶ- 


reme. 








highest; τὰ 


εἴσω, the 





| 





THE ANABASIS. 


. περι-πλέω, -πλεύσομαι, to sail 


around. 


. οὕ, where. 


. καταιβαίνω, 2 aor. κατ-έβην, 


to go down, descend. See 34. 


. καλός, τή, -όν; καλλίων, κάλλι- 


. ἐπί-ρ-ρυτος, -ον. 


στος, beautiful. 
over flowed 
(see 264), we/l-watered. 


. δένδρον, - ov, 1766. 


. παντοδαπός, -ἡ, -dv, of every 


kind. 


. σύμ-πλεως, -ων (all) together 


full of, quite full of. 


. ἄμπελος, -ov, ἡ, vine. 
. σήσαμον, -ov, sesame (rare). 
. μελίνη, -ns, panic, kind of 


millet (rare). 


. κέγχρος, -ov, millet (rare). 

. πῦρος. -ov, wheat, usu. plur. 
. KptOy, -ῆς. barley. 

. φέρω, fut. οἴσω. fo bear, carry. 
. περιέχω, fo hold (its way) 


415. | 


416. 


round, surround. 


. ὀχυρός, -d, -όν (tenable, from 


€x-@), strong. 


. ὑψηλός, -ἡ, -dv, lofty. 
. πάντῃ, on every side. 
. ἐλαύνω, fut. ἐλῶ, ἤλασα, drive, 


ride. See 234. 


. ὄνομα, -aTos, τό, Name. 
. ἐκ.λείπω, -ψω, 2 aor. ἐξ ἔλιπον, 


to leave out, behind, desert. 
See 389. 

ἐν-οικέω, -now, ἐν-ῴκησα, to in- 
habit. 

pera, with gen , with; with 
acc. afler; μ. ταῦτα, after 
this. 








417. χωρίον, -ov, place, 


418. 
419. 


420. 


CHAPTER IL. 


esp. a 
stronghold. 

καπηλεῖον, -ov, shop, inn. 

πρότερος, -a, -ov (comp. of 
πρό, see 341), before, sooner. 

ὑπερ-βολή, -ῆς, crossing over, 
cf. 378. 


- λόχος, -ov, company (of 100 


men). 


- ἀπ-όλλῦμι, fut. -ολέσω OF -ολῶ, 


-ώλεσα, to destroy; pass. to 
perish. 


3. ἁρπαζω, -ἄάσομαι, fo seize, plun- 


See 367. 


der. 


. κατα-κόπτω, -Ψψω, 2 aor. pass. 


κατ-εκόπην, to cut down or in 
pieces. 


. ὑπολείπω, -ψω, 2 aor -έλιπον, 


to leave behind. See 414. 


. εὑρίσκω, εὑρήσω, 2 aor. εὗρον, 


to find. 


» 5 
. οὐδέ, nor, not even. 


πλανάομαι, -ἥσομαι, fo wander. 
ἑκατόν, a hundred. 


- ὄλεθρος, -ov, destruction. See 


. συστρατιώτης, 


42. 
-ov, fellow- 


soldier 


. ὀργίζομαι, fut. cotpar, to be 


angry. See 790. 


J. εἰσ-ελαύνω, fo ride or march 


. οὔτε, nor; 


into. See 412. 


fod 
OUTE 
- nor. 


» 
οὔτε, 
neither . . 





435. 
436. 


437. 
438. 


305 


πώ, yet. 

κρείττων, -ov, better, stronger, 
comp. of ἀγαθός. See 107. 

χείρ, χειρός, ἡ. hand. 

ἐθέλω, less often θέλω, fut. 
ἐθελήσω, to be willing, to 
wish. 


. πίστις, -ews, 7, faith, fidelity ; 


pledge. 


. ἀλλήλων, -ors, each other. 
. δῶρον, -ου, gift. 
. τίμιος, -a, -ov, honorable, hon- 


ored. 


- Χρῦσο χάλινος, -ov, with gold- 


(studded) bridle. 


᾿ ΄’ ΄ “4 ‘ 
- στρεπτός, -7, -dv, twisted; as 


subs. necklace. 


- Ψέλιον, -ov, bracelet. 
- ἀκινάκης, -ov (Persian), short- 


sword. 


- στολή, -ῆς, robe. 
- μηκέτι, no longer (with subj., 


imper., etc.). 


. ἀφ-αρπάΐω, -άσομαι, to plunder 


See 423, 367. 


from, 


. ἀνδράποδον, -ov, slave. 
. πού, indef., somewhere, any- 


where. (mov, where ?). 


2. év-rvyxdvw, 2 aor. ἐν-έτυχον, 


to happen upon, fall in with. 
See 19 


. ἀπολαμβάνω, fut. ἀπὸ λήψο- 


μαι, 2 aor. ἀπ έλαβον, to re- 
ceive from or back. See 35. 





: sme etn ta a a AI 









































WORDS OF BOOK I. OF THE ANABASIS. 


CHAPTER 


. πρόσω or πόρρω (III. 12), for- 


ward, further, so εἰς τὸ 1. ; 


with gen. far from (IIT. 12). 


. μισθόω, -ώσω, fo hire. 
. βιάζομαι, -dcoua, mid. dep., 


0 force. 


. βάλλω, βαλῶ, 2 aor. ἔβαλον, 


to throw, hit. 


. ὑπο-ζύγιον, -ov | ζυγόν, YOKE], 


beast of burden. 
pixpos, -a, -dv, lili/e, small. 


0. ἐκ- φεύγω, 2 aor. ἐξ ἔφυγον, to 


flee out or away, escape. 
See 121. 


. κατα-πετρόω, -ὦσω, to stone 


(down) to death. 
ὕστερον, afterwards, adj. 
ὕστερος, -a, -ov, after, later. 


. γιγνώσκω, 2 aor. ἔγνων, to 


know. 


’ 


. συνάγω, 2 aor. συν-ἤγαγον, 


bring together, collect. See 
129. 


5. ἐκ-κλησίᾶα, -as, assembly. See 


209. 


. Saxpiw, -ὕσω. /o weep. 

. Χρόνος, -ov, //me. 

. σιωπάω, -ἥσομαι. [0 be silent. 

. τοιόσδε, -ade, -dvde, such; τοι- 


ade, such as follows. 


. χαλεπῶς, hardly, angrily. 

. ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, /. 

. πατρίς, -idos, ἡ. father-land. 
. Thaw, -ἥσω, fo honor. 

. ἴδιος, -ἃ -ov, own, private. 





475. 


II. 


κατα-τίθημι, -θήσω, to put 
down or away. See 296. 


. καθ-ηδυ-παθέω, -ἥσω, fo squan- 


der in luxury (rare). 


ε 
. ὑμεῖς, Zen. ὑμῶν, you (plur.). 
. Thpwpéw, -ἤσω, 0 arenge; 


mid. avenge one’s self on, 
punish. 
ad-aipéw, fake from, deprive. 


. ἵνα, in order that, that. 


ev, well. 

πάσχω, πείσομαι, 2 aor. ἔπα- 
θον, to suffer; εὖ (or κακῶς) 
π. ὑπὸ —, to be well (or ill) 
treated hy 


. συμ-πορεύομαι, proceed with. 
. ἀνάγκη. -ἡς, necessity ; with or 


without ἐστί, it is necessary. 


. προ δίδωμι, 2 aor. προ-έδωκα, 


give up, betray. See 111]. 


. Φιλία, -as, friendship. 
» Χράομαι, -ἥσομαι, mid. dep. to 


use, With dat. 


. Ψεύδω, Wevow, to deceive (by 


lies); mid. lie, be false. 


δίκαιος, -a, -ον. just. 


. οἶδα, subj. εἰδῶ, opt. εἰδείην, 


imper. tof, inf. εἰδέναι, pt. 
εἰδώς, 2 pipf. nde, to know. 


. aipéw, -jow, 2 aor. εἷλον, fo 


take; mid. to choose. See 


479. 


. οὔποτε, never. See 63. 


3. ἄγω, ἄξω, 2 aor. ἤγαγον, to 


lead, carry. See 464. 





. ὅπῃ, where, whither: 6. ἄν 











CHAPTER III. 8307 


- ἕπομαι, impf. εἱπόμην, to fol- 


low, with dat. 


. σύμ-μαχος, -ov, ally. See 


282. 


? , 
. οἴομαι Or οἶμαι, οἰήσομαι, wn- 


θην, to think. 


. ὅπου, where: 6. ἄν, wherever 


(with subj.). 


. ἔρημος, -ov, barren, desert; 


with gen. deprived of, with- 
oul. 


. ἐχθρός, -ἅ, -dv, hostile: as 


subs, enemy. 


. ἀλέξω, ἀλέξομαι, ἠλεξάμην, to 


ward off: mid. requite. 


7 


wherever (with subj.). 


. γνώμη. -ns, judgment, opinion. 


See 463. 


- σκευοφόρος, -ov, baggage ani- 


mals; plur. usu baggage. 


- στρατοπεδεύομαι, -evooua, to 


encamp. 


. ἀπορέω, -ἥσω, to be at a loss. 
. Auméw, -now, 0 pain, grieve. 
. AdOpa, secretly, without the 


knowledge of. 


. θαρρέω, -ἥσω, be courageous. 
. Set, δέῃ, δέοι, δεῖν, part. δέον, 


it is necessary, there is need. 


- προσέρχομαι, 2 aor. προσ- 


ἤλθον, to come to. See 383. 
ὥσπερ, just as, as. 
ἡμέτερος, -G, -ov, OUT, OUrs. 
γέ, encl. part., at least ; often 
best translated by emphasis 
on the word before it. 
συν-έπομαι, fo follow with, ac- 
company. See 494. 








515. 


516. 
517. 


μισθο-δότης, -ov, paymaster. 
See 178 and 111. 

μέντοι, indeed, yet, however. 

ἀδικέω, -now, to be unjust, 
injure. 


- αἰσχυνω, fo shame; pass. be 


ashamed. 


. σύν-οιδα, 2 pf. am conscious. 


- ἐμαυτοῦ, of myself. 
. ἔπειτα, thereupon, next, more- 


over. 


2. δείδω, epic pres., whence 


ἔδεισα, δέδοικα. and 2 pf. 
δέδια, with pres. sense, fo 


fear. 


23. δίκη, -ns. justice, punishment. 


. ἐπι-τίθημι, pul upon; ἐ. δίκην, 


inflict punishment. 


. ὥρα, -ds, time, season. 
. καθ-εύδω, fo sleep. 


. ἀμελέω, -now, to be careless, 


neglect. Cf. 86. 


- Χρή, inf. χρῆναι it is neces- 


sary, one must. 


. ἕως, while, until. 
. αὐτοῦ, gen. of place, here. 
. σκεπτέος, -G -ov, verb. adj., 


to be considered. 


4 » λῶ td , 
- ἀσφαλῶς, ἐστερον, -έστατα, 


safely. 


3. ἄπ-ειμι, fo go away. See 306. 
. ἐπιτήδειος, -a -ov, suitable; 


Ta €. provisions. 


. ἄνευ, prep. with gen., without. 
. ἰδιώτης, -ov, a private person. 


See 474. 


. ὄφελος, τό, profit. 
. ἄξιος, -a, -ov, worth, worthy. 


See 155. 

















Se een Se τ ὌΣΣΟΙΣ. 


χ τ ΣΊΞΞΞΩΣ 


nce a st 


emo 


a Sap cemeennane meee 



































308 WORDS OF BOOK I. 


. χαλεπός, -7, -dv, HARD, diffi- 
cult, harsh. See 470. 

, welos, -7, -ov, foot-; of π. 
infantry ; πεζῇ. on foot (LV. 
18). 

ἱππικός, -ἡ. -dv, pertaining to 
a horse: cavalry. See 260. 

. VAUTLKOS, -ἦ. -dv, naval. 

. ὁμοίως, in like manner. 

. ἐπίσταμαι, fo know, under- 
stand, 

. κάθημαι, sit down, be en- 
camped. 

ἄριστος, -n, -ov, best. See 
107. 

. ἀν-ίστημι, -corny, ἀνα-στήσω, 
-eotnoa, trans. to raise up; 
2 aor. -έστην, -eornxa and 
mid. intrans , to rise up, 
stand. See 325. 

. ἐγικέλευστος, -ov, urged on. 
See 189, 

. οἷος, -a, -ov, Of what sort; 
τοιόσδε Οἱ τοιοῦτος such, 
οἷος as. 

. ἀπορία, -as, difficulty. See 505. 

. προσ-ποιέομαι, fo make or 
claim for one’s self, pretend. 
See 26. 

552. σπεύδω, σπεύσω, to hasten. 
553. ἀπ-γω, to lead back or away. 
See 464, 495. 

. ἀγοράζω, -άσω. to buy. See 
302. 

. συ-σκευάζω, fo make ready 
(by putting) together, lo pack 
up. See 232. 

. ἀπο-πλέω, -πλεύσομαι, to sail 
away. 











OF THE ANABASIS. 


. ἡγεμών, -ovos, leader. 
. Φίλιος, -a, -ov, friendly. 


μήδε, nor, not even (with subj., 
imper., etc., H. 1018, G. 
283). 


. προ-κατα-λαμβάνω, -λήψομαι, 


lo seize beforehand. See 35. 


. φθάνω, φθάσω, ἔφθασα, to be 


first, anticipate. 


. μήτε. .. μήτε, neither . 


nor. See 5a9. 


3. kara-AapBave, 2 aor. -έλαβον, 


to seize. 


. ἀν-αρπάζω, -dow, snatch up, 


carry off. See 423. 


. τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο, 


such (as precedes). 


. τοσοῦτος. τοσαύτη. τοσοῦτο, 80 


much, so great; (in plur.) 
so many. 


. στρατηγέω, -ἥσω, to be gen- 


eral, command. See 27. 


708. orparnyla, -as, generalship, 


command ; military plan. 


. μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, no, no 


one, none (with subj., im- 
per., etc.). 


. ἐν-οράω, ἐν-όψομαι. [0 see in or 


therein. See 362. 


. ποιητέος, -a, -ov, verb. adj., 


to be made or done. See 26. 


2. δυνατός, -7, -ov, able, possible. 


See 638. 


3. ἄνθρωπος, -ov, man. See 103. 
. εὐ-ἤθεια, -as, simpleness, folly. 
. εὐήθης, -es, simple, foolish. 

. λυμαίνομαι, λῦμανοῦμαι, to 


mal rea’, mar. 


. πρᾶϊις -ews, 7, doing, business. 











CHAPTER IV. 309 


578. ὀκνέω, -ἥσω, shrink from, hesi- 
tale. 

519. ἐμ-βαίνω, -βήσομαι, to go into, 
embark. See 34. 

580. κατα-δυω, fo sink (down). 
D81. φοβέω, -ἤσω, to frighten; 
mid. fear. See 358. 

[582. οἷός τε, ofa re, οἷόν τε, such as 
to (with infin.), able. See 
549. ] 
083. ἐξέρχομαι, 2 aor. -ῆλθον, to go 
out or forth. See 383. 
584. ἄκων, ἄκουσα, ἧκον, unwilling. 
See 165. 
585. φλυαρία, -as, nonsense, folly. 
586. épwrdw, -ἥσω, 2 aor. ἤρομην, 
to ask. 
087. τίς, ri, gen. τίνος, who? which? 
what ? 
588. παρα-πλήσιος, -a, -ov, sumilar 
fo or like. See 989. 
589. οἷος-περ, οἴᾶ-περ, olov-rep (περ 
intens.), just such as, just 
as. See 549. 
κακός, -7, -ov, bad, cowardly. 
συν-ανα Baivw, 2 aor. συν-αν- 
ἐβην, 10 yo up with. See 34. 
φαίνω, φανῶ, ἔφηνα, fo show; 
mid. and pass. appear. 








. ἐπί-πονος, -ov, toilsome. See 
694. 
. ἐπι-κίνδῦνος, -ον, dangerous. 
See 941. 
ἀφ-ίημι, -now, -ῆκα, -εἴκα, let 90, 
send away. 
996. πρό θῦμος, -ov, eager, zealous 
(θυμός, -od, heart, mind). 
597. ἀν-αγγέλλω, -ελῶ, fo report 
(back). See 388. 
598 δεῦρο, hither. 
599. ἀπο-κρίνομαι, -οῦμαι, to an- 
swer. See 840. 
600. ἀπ-έχω, fo hold off, intrans. 
be away, be distant. See 88, 
601. ἐκεῖ, there. 
602. xpyfo, chiefly in pres., to 
want, desire. 
603. aiperds, -7, -ov, verb. adj., 
chosen. See 491. 
604. ὑπ ola, -as, suspicion. See 11. 
605. ὅμως, nevertheless. 
606. προσ-αιτέω, io ask further or 
in addition. See 174. 
607. ἡμι-όλιος, -a, -ov, a half + the 
whole, a half more. 
608. ἡμι-δᾶρικόν -ov, half-daric. 
609. φανερός, -a. ov, plain, mani- 
fest. See 592. 





CHAPTER IV. 


. στάδιον, -ov, plur. -o1, stadium, 
Furlong (606 ft.). 

. πεντε-καί-δεκα. fificen. 

. wats, νεώς 7, ship. See 542. 

. vav-apxos, -ov, admiral. 





614. συμ-πολεμέω, fo join in war 
with. See 87. 

615. μετά-πεμπτος, -ov, sent afler. 
See 20. - (dred. 


616. ἑπτακόσιοι, -a, -a, seven hun- 
























































310 


617. 
618. 


619. 


620. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


ὁρμέω, -now, fo anchor. 

μισθο-φόρος -ov, piy-receiv- 
ing, a mercenary (soldier). 

τετρακόσιοι, -al, a, four hun- 
dred. 

συ στρατεύομαι, (0 join in 
a campaign or expedition. 
See 123. 

πύλη, -ns, gate. 


. τεῖχος, -ους, τό, wall. 


ἔσωθεν, within; τὸ ἐ., the 
inner. 


. ἔξω, without ; τὸ é., the outer. 
. ἅ πᾶς, ἅ-πᾶσα, ἅ-πᾶν, all to- 


gether, all, 


. παρ-έρχομαι, 2 aor. παρ ἤλθον, 


to go or pass by. See 173. 


. Bid, -as, force. (LL. vis.) 
. πάρ-οδος, -ov, way-pasl, a pass. 


See 315. 


. στενός, -ἤ, -όν, narrow. 


. καθ᾿ ήκω, /o come down, reach. 


See 203. 


. ὕπερθεί(ν), from above. See 


159 


. πέτρα, -ds, rock. See 461. 
. ἠλίβἄᾶτος, -ov (poet.), s/eep, 


said of bare, jagged cliffs. 


. ἐφ-ίστημι, ἐπι- στήσω, -έστησα, 


trans., fo set up, upon or 
over, to set=halt; ἐφ-έστηκα, 
2 aor. ἐπ-έστην, intrans., 
to be set over, stand by or 
near, See 113. 


. ἕνεκα, with gen., on account 


of. 


. dro-BiBato, dow, causal of 


απο-βαίνω, make go off, dis- 
embark, 





OF THE ANABASIS. 


637. ὅσ-περ, ἥπερ, ὅ-περ, the very 


one who or thing which. 
See 25. 


. ἀνα-στρέφω, -ψω, fo turn back, 


to retreal, to rally. 


. ἀπ-ελαύνω, -ελῶ, fo drive away, 


march away. See 412. 


. μῦριάς, δος, ἡ, α myriad 


(10,000). 


. ἐμπόριον, -ov, trading port 


(emporium). 


. αὖτσθι, here, there. 


ὁλκάς, -ddos, 7, merchant 
vessel, 


. ἐν τίθημι, -θήσω, -έθηκα, to put 


inoron See 296. 


. φιλο-τιμέομαι, -ἡσομαι, to love 


honor (τιμή), be jealous. 


. ἐάν, impf. εἴων (-ds, -@), ἐάσω, 


elaca, to permit. H. 389, 
G. 104. 


. ἀφανής, -és, unseen, invis- 


ible. 


. Sv-épxopar, 2 aor. d:-7AGov, to 


go through, to spread. See 
626. 


. λόγος, -ov, word, speech; ru- 


mor. See 270. 


. διώκω, -ξω, fo pursue. 
. εὔχομαι, impf. εὐ- or ἡυχόμην, 


-ξομαι, to pray, vow. 


. δειλός. -7, -dv, cowardly; v. l. 


δόλιος, -a, -ov, treacherous. 


. οἰκτείρω, -epa, fo pily. 
. ἁλίσκομαι, ἁλώσομαι, ἑάλωκα, 


2 aor. ἑάλων, to be taken, 
seized. 


. συγκαλέω, “ἔσω, to call to 
gether. See 209. 














CHAPTER IY. 311 


ἀπο-λείπω, -ψω, -λέλοιπα, 2 
aor. -έλιπον, to leave behind, 
abandon. See 389. 


. ἀπο-διδράσκω, -δράσομαι, -δέ- 


ὃρᾶκα, 2 aor. -edpav, to run 


away (esp. by stealth). 


. οἴχομαι, to be or have gone. 


H. 827, G. 200, n. 3. 


- ἀπο-φευγω, -ξομαι, 2 aor. -ἐφυ- 


γον, to siee from, escape (out 
of reach). See 121. 


. θεός, -οὔ, guu. 
1. ἐπειδάν, whenever (with subj., 


H. 913, G. 231, n.). 


. κακῶς, -iov, -εστα, badly, ill. 
. ἀπο-σύλαω, to strip off, τοῦ. 
. καίτοι, and yet. 

. τέκνον, -ov, child. 

. Φρουρέω, fo guard, watch. 


στερέω, -now, to deprive ; pass. 
στέρομαι and στερίσκομαι. 


. ἀρετή. -ῆς, goodness, excellence. 
. ἄθῦμος, -ον, disheartened. 


See 596. 

ἀνάβασις, -ews, ἡ, yoing up 
(into Persia), expedition, 
whence the name Anabasis. 


. ἡδύς, ἡδεῖα, ἡδύ, sweet, pleas- 


ant. See 216. 


. ly Bus, -vos, ὁ fish. 
3. πράος, -εἴα, mpaov, mild, gentle. 
. περιστερά, -as, dove. 
7D. κώμη, -ns, village. 
}. σκηνόω, -ώσω, fo encamp: 


-€w, to be encamped. See 
357. 


. ζώνη, -ns, girdle; eis τὴν C, 


Jor pin money. 


. πάνυ, very. 





679. 


680. 


681. 


φύω, φίσω, ἔφυσα, to produce ; 
φύσις, ews, nature. 

ἐκ-κόπτω, -ψω, fo cut out, off, 
or (of trees) down. See 424. 

κατα-καίω, Att. -κάω, -καύσω, 
to burn down, 


- ἀνα πείθω, (0 persuade (up 


to), induce. See 50. 


3. ἀπαγγέλλω, -ελῶ, fo report 


(from), announce. See 597. 


- χαλεπαίνω, -avd, to be severe, 


angry. See 539. 


. πάλαι, Jong ago. 
. πατήρ, πατρός, father. See 


$72. 


. ἀργύριον, -ov (dim. of dpyv- 


pos.-ou, silver), piece of silver 
(silver), money. 


. μνᾶ, -as, mina (100 drachmae 


> ’ = > ‘4 
. ἐπὴν or ἐπᾶν, whenever, when 


(with subj. See 661). 


. ἐντελής, -ἐς, at its end, full, 


complete. 


. μέχρι, until, as fur as, 


πότερον, whether. 
χωρίς, apart, without. 


’ ΄ ’ ld 
. πονέω, -now, to tuil; πόνος, 


-ov, toil. 


. προ Tipaw, -ἥσω, to honor be- 


fore (another). See 473. 


. viv, now. 
- Ψηφίζομαι, -εοῦμαι, to vote (by 


ψῆφος, a pebble), to resolve. 


. αἴτιος, -a, -ov, responsible, the 


cause ; τὸ αἱ., the cause. 

χάρις, “TOS, 7s grace, favor, 
gratitude; χάριν εἰδέναι, to 
be grateful. 















































312 


WORDS OF BOOK IT. 


. ἀπο-ψηφίζομαι, /o vole other- 


wise or against. 


. ἔμ-παλιν, τὸ ἔμ. Or rovp., Lack- 


ward, back. 


. μόνος, -n, -ov, alone. 
. πιστός, -ἡ, -dv, faithful: τὰ 


πιστά, tokens of good faith, 
pledges. See 439. 


. φρούριον, -ov, garrison. See 


666. 


. Aoxayid, -as, caplaincy. 
. ἐπ-αινέω, -ἔσομαι, -yveca, 10 


praise, commend, 


. μέλει, μελήσει, impers. with 


dat., it is a care to; p. pos, 1 
take care. 


. εὐτυχέω, -ἡσω (τύχη. furtune), 


lo be fortunate. 


. μεγαλο-πρεπῶς (adj. -ns, -és, 


befitting the great), magnifi- 
cently. 


CHAPTER 


. τόπος. -ov, place. 

. ὁμαλής, -és, even, level. 

. ἀψίνθιον, -ov, wormwood, 

. ἔν-ειμι, impf. ἐν ἣν, to be in or 


therein. See 60. 


. ὕλη, -ης, wood, copse. 
. κάλαμος, -ov, reed (L. cala- 


mus'. 


. εὐώδης, -es, sweet-smelling, 


Sragrant. 


. ἄρωμα, -aros, τό, spice (Eng. 


aréma). 
παντοῖος -a, -ov, of every kind. 








THE ANABASIS. 


βρέχω, ἔβρεξα, ἐβρέχθην, lo wet. 

μαστός, -ov, breast. 

οὐπώ-ποτε, not yet at any 
time, never before. 


. δια-βατός, -7, -dv, to be crossed, 


passable. See 247. 


. θεῖος, -a, -ον, of or from god 


(Oeds), divine. 


. σαφῶς, clearly ; from σαφής, 


-€s, clear. 


. ὑπο-χωρέω, -ἥσω, to go back 


(Jit. under), withdraw. See 
283. 


. ἐννέα, nine. 

. πεντήκοντα, fis y. 

. μεστός, -7, -όν, full. 

. σῖτος, -ov, pl. τὰ σῖτα, grain, 


provisions. 


. érvotrifopar, -covpat, fo pro- 


vision one’s sel/, lay in pro» 


visions. 


¥. 


. ὄνος, -ov, ass. 
, “ ἊΝ « 
. στρουθός, -ov, sparrow; ἢ σ. 


μεγάλη, the ostrich. 


. ὠτίς, -idos. ἡ, bustard. 
. δορκάς, ados, ἡ ἰδέρκ-ομαι, fo 


see}, gazelle (deriv. Dorcas). 


. ἐνίοτε, sometimes. 
. προ-τρέχω, 2 aor. mpo-edpapor, 


to run forward or before. 


. τρέχω, δραμοῦμαι, 2 aor. ἔδρα- 
μον, forun. See 356. 
. πλησιαζω, -άσω, to draw near. 


See 990. 




















CHAPTER V. 913 


739. δι-ίστημι, trans., fo set at 


intervals ; intrans., to stand 
at intervals or apart. See 
25. 
. Onpdw, -ἄσω, fo chase, hunt. 
See 259. 


. δια-δέχομαι, -foua, to receive 


(through a line or) in suc- 
cession, succeed. 


. κρέας, gen. κρέως, plur. κρέα, 


κρεῶν, τό, flesh. 


. ἐλάφειος, -ον, of deer; τὰ ἐ., 


venison. 


. ἁπαλός, -7, -όν, tender. 
. ἀπο-σπάω, -ἄσω, to draw off or 


away. 


. πτέρνξ, -vyos, 7, wing. See 


749. 


. αἴρω, ἀρῶ, ἦρα, to raise. 
Ρ : 
. ἱστίον, -ov, sail. 
. πέτομαι, πτήσομαι, 2 aor. 


ἐπτόμην, to fly. 


- βραχύς, -εἴα, -v, short; βραχύ, 


a short distance. 
πέρδιξ, -ixos, ὁ. partridge. 
ἀπ-αγορεύω, chiefly in pres. 
and impf., to speak from or 
against, renounce; to give 
out, fail. 


. πλεθριαῖος, -a, -ov, of a pleth- 


ron (in size, length, etc.). 


. περι-ρ-ρέω, -ρεύσομαι, to flow 


around. See 264. 


. κύκλος, -ov, circle. 

. tTpro-Kal-Sexa, thirteen. 

. ἐνενήκοντα, ninety. 

. λιμός, -οὔ, hunger, famine. 
. Χόρτος, -ov, grass, fodder. 
. Ψιλός, -7, -dv, bare. 





. ἀλέτης, -ov (ἀλέω, fo grind), a 
grinder; ὄνος a., α mill- 
stone. 


- ὀρύττω, -ξω, to dig. 
3. πωλέω, -ήσω, to sell. 
(64. ἀντ-αγοράζω, to buy in exz- 


change. See 554. 


. {dw, impf. ἔζων, ζήσω, to live ; 


ζωή. -ἧς; life. 


. ἐπι-λείπω, -ἁψω, 2 aor. ἐπ- 


ἔλιπον, tv leave behind, to 
fail. See 656. 


- ὠγέομαι, impf. ἐωνούμην, 2 


aor. 
ἐπριάμην, to buy. H. 39, 
G. 104. See 360. 


8. καπίθη, -ns, a kupithe (Per- 


sian), about 2 quarts. 


. ἄλευρον, -ov, chiefly in plur., 


wheat flour. 


. ἄλφιτον, -ov, chiefly in plur., 


barley-meal. 


. σίγλος, -ov, siglos, shekel, = 


τὰ Attic obols or 25 cents. 


. 6Bodos, -ov, obol, Attic coin, 


= 34 cents. 


- ἡμι-ωβόλιον, τό, a half-obol. 
- χοῖνιξ, -ixos, ἡ, choenixz, = 


about a quart. 


D. χωρέω, -now, to make place 


(χώρα) for, and so, to con- 
tain. See 283. 


. ἐσθίω, 2 aor. ἔφαγον, to eat. 
. δια-γίγνομαι, io go (lit. be- 


come) through; to pass, to 
live (of time, etc.). See 
179. 


. μακρός, -d, -dv, long. 
. ὕδωρ, ὕδατος, τό, water. 
































314 


780. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


δια-τελέω, -€ow Or -@, bring to 
an end (τέλος), complete 
(e. g. a distance). 


+ χῖλος, -οὔ, Sodder. 


. ποτέ, encl., at any time, at 


some time (πότε, when ?). 


J. στενο-χωρία, -as, α narrow 


place. See 629. 


. πηλός -ov, mud. 
. δυσ-πόρευτος, -ov, difficult to 


pass. See 198. 


. στρατός, -vd, army. 
. συν-εκ-βιβάξω, fo join (σύν) in 


bringing out. See 636. 


. ἅμαξα, ns, wagon. 
. σχολαίως, /eisurely; from 


adj, σχολαῖος, leisurely, 
slow. 


. ὀργή, -7s, anger. 
. κράτιστος, -7, -ov (from κρά- 


tos, strength), best (as super. 
of ἀγαθός), strongest. See 
107. 


+ συν-επι- σπεύδω, (0 join (σύν) 


in hastening on. See dd2. 


. ἔνθα, there, then. 
. μέρος. -ovs τό. part, portion. 
. εὐταξία, -as, good order, dis- 


cipline. 


. Oedopar, ἄσομαι, fo behold 


(deriv. theatre). 


. ῥίπτω, -ψω, to throw. 


. πορφυροῦς, -a, -οῦν, purple. 
. κάνδυς, -υος (Persian), over- 


coat, caftan (rare), 


. type, ἥσω, fea, eixa, to send, 


let go; mid., send one’s self, 
hasten. See 595. 


. when, -ns, victory. See 272. 





OF THE ANABASIS. 


802. 


πρᾶνης, -ἐς (or πρηνής, L. 
pronus), headlong ; steep 
(of a hill). 


3. γήλοφος, -ov, ὁ (γῆ + λόφος, 


crest), hill. 


. πολν-τελής, -€s, very expensive. 
. ποικίλος, -n, -ov (cf. L. pic- 


tura), many-colored. 


. ἀναξυρίδες, -ων, af (Persian), 


breeches, trowsers. 


. ἔνιοι, -at, -a, some. 
. τράχηλος, -ov, neck. 
. εὐθύ 5), adv. (from adj. εὐθύς, 


straight), immediately. 


. εἰσ-πηδάω, fo leap into. 
. μετέωρος. -ov, in mid air, raised 


alofi (deriv. meteor). 
ἐκ- κομίζω, -εῶ, fo carry out. 


3. δια-τρίβω͵ -ψω, ἰο rub away ; 


of time, waste, delay. 


. ἐπισττισμός -od, provisioning 


(one’s self). See 720. 


. ἀναγκαῖος, -a, -ον, necessary; 


oi a , relations, cf. L. neces- 
sarii. 


- καθ-ἐζομαι, ἐκαθεζόμην, to sit. 
. μάχομαι͵ -οῦμαι, ἐμαχεσάμην, to 


fight. See 282. 


- guv-ayelpw, -ayep@, to gather 


together, collect. 


. συν-εἶδον, 2 aor. of συν-οράω. 


to see together or in one view. 
προσ-έχω, fo hold to; π. τὸν 
νοῦν, turn one’s attention to. 


. wots, νοῦ, ὁ, mind. 
2. πλῆθος, -ους, τό, multitude, 


extent, number. 
ἰσχυρός, -d, -dy, strung. See 
381. 








CHAPTER Υ. 315 


. μῆκος, -ους, τό, length. 
. δια-σπάυ, -dow, fo lear asunder, 


separate. 


. ἀσθενής, -es, weak. See 10. 

. πόλεμος, -ov, war. See 87. 

. πέραν, beyond, across. 

. σχεδία -as, raft. 

. διφθέρα, -as, a (tanned) skin 


(deriv. diphtheria). 


. στέγασμα, -aros, Td, ἃ covering 


(for tents). 


. πίμπλημι, πλήσω, ἔπλησα, to 


fill. 


3. κοῦφος, light; κοῦφος χόρτος, 


hay. 


. συσπάω, -dow, to draw to- 


gether. See 825. 


. ἅπτω, dw, to fusten; com- 


monly mid. fusten one’s self 
to, touch. 


. κάρφη, -ns, hay (rare). 


. βάλανος, -ov, 7, an acorn (or 


similar fruit; in V. 10= 
date). 


. φοῖνιξ, -ixos, ὁ, date-palm. 
. ἀμφι-λέγω, to talk about, dis- 


pute about, wrangle. 


. κρίνω, κρινῶ, expiva, to judge. 


. πληγή, -ἧς, blow, πλήττω, 


πλήξω, to strike. 


2. διά βασις, -ews, crossing(place, 


act, or means). See 670. 


. κατα-σκοπέω, -σκέψομαι, -εσκε- 


Wapnv, to view closely, in- 
spect. 


. ἀβ-ιππεύω, to ride away or 


back (on horseback). See 
229. 


. προσ-ελαύνω, -ελῶ, fo drive, 





ride, march up or to. See 
412, 


. οὔπω, not yet. 
. ξύλον, -ov, wood; in X. 12 α 


pole. 


. σχίζω, σχίσω, fo split (deriv. 


schism). 


. διελαύνω, -ελῶ, to ride or 


march through. See 234. 


. ἀξίνη, -ns, axe. 
. ἁμαρτάνω, -τήσομαι, 2 aor. 


ἥμαρτον, to miss, to fail. 


. λίθος, -ov, sfone. 
. κατα-φεύγω, 2 aor. -ἐφυγον, to 


flee for refuge. See 689. 


. γόνυ, γόνατος, τό, L. genu, 


E. (cog.) ΚΝΕΚ. 


. τετταράκοντα, forly. 
. ἐκ-πλήττω, -ξω, to strike out, 


drive out (esp. of one’s 
senses). See 841. 


. πρόσ-ειμι, impf. mpoo-new, to 


go to, approach. See 3d3. 


. ὀλίγος, -ἡ. -ov, small in num- 


ber; plur. few. 


. κατα-λεύω fo stone down or to 


death. Cf. 461. 


. πράως, mildly. 
. πόθος, -ους, τό, suffering (de- 


riv. sym-pathy). See 482. 
ἐξ-ίστημι, trans. (pres., impf., 
f., and 1 aor.), to set out; 
intrans. (2 aor., pf., and 
mid.), to stand oul. See 634. 
πυνθάνομαι, 2 aor. ἐπυθόμην, 
learn (by inquiry). 


. παλτόν, -ov, javelin. 
. συν-άπτω, -άψω, to join. See 


835. 

















316 


866. 


867. 
868. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


OF 


CHAPTER 


ἴχνος. -ovs, τό, OF ἴχνιον, -ov 
(dim. ouly in form), a 
track or trace. 

κόπρος, -ov, dung. 

εἰκάζω, -dow, ἰο conjecture. 


19. ortBos, -ov, Leuten path, track. 
. κἄω, OF καίω, to burn (deriv. 


caustic). 


. χρήσιμος, -ov, useful. See 


457. 


. γένος, -ous, τό, birth, race. 


ὃ. Mpoo-nkw, am come to, reach 


oor extend ; commonly, be- | 


long to; part., related to. 
See 630. 


. κατ-αλλάσσω, -ξω, 0 change 


. πρὸ κατα-κάω (Or -καίω), to | 
burn up before others. See | 


or exchange, esp. from en- | 


mity, fo reconcile. See 390}. 


651. 


. κατα-καίνω, 2 aor. κατ-ἕκανον; 


. ἐν-εδρεύω (ἐν edpa, silting in | 


. διαγγέλλω, -ελῶ, (0 carry 


= κατα κτείνω. to kill. 
ambush), to lie in ambush. 


word through, announce. 


See 683. 


. ὠβέλιμος, -ov, helpful. See 


161. 


. ἕτοιμος. -ἡ (or -os), -ov, ready. 


. γράφω, -ψω. fo write. 


ἐπιστολή, -ῆς, a letter. 


- pale, φράσω, to tell (deriv. 


PHRASE). 











881. 


}. ἀνα-γιγνώσκω, -γνώσομαι, 2 


THE ANABASIS. 


VI. 


ὑπο-δέχομαι, -δέξομαι, to re- 
ceive under (one's protec- 
tion), receive kindly. See 
741. 


. ὑπό-μνημα, -aros, τό, reminder. 


4) 


aor. ἀν-έγνων, to know again, 
flo read. See 463. 


. τρισχίλιοι, -at, -a, three thou- 


sand. 


. παρα-καλέω, -καλῶ, fo call (to 


one’s side) in, invite; ez- 
hort. See 209. 


. σύμ-βουλος, -ov, counsellor. 


See G1. 


. ἐξιαγγέλλω, -ελῶ, to report 


oulside, bring out news. See 
878. 


. κρίσις, -ews, ἡ. Judgment, trial. 


See 810. 


2. ἀπό-ρ-ρητος, -ov, not (ἀπό) fo 


be told, secret. 


3. πράττω, -ξω, to do, perform; 


with adv. (ed, καλῶς, κακῶς, 
etc.), to fare (well, ill, etc.). 


. ἐμός, -ἡ, -dv, my, mine. 
. ὑπήκοος, -ον ( ὑπ-ακούω, (0 


hearken to), obedient, sub- 
ject. See 230. 


. προσ-πολεμέω, -now, fo war 


against. See 614. 


. οὐκοῦν, not therefore? not 


then? nonne? 


. Gporoyéw, -naw, fo speak to- 


gether, to agree. 








CHAPTER VII. 517 


. σεαυτοῦ, -ῷ, of thyself. 


. βωμός, -οὔ, altar. 
. μετα-μέλει, -μελήσει, if concerns 


one differently (pera), it re- 
pents one (dat.). See 707. 


. τρίτος, -n,-ov, third. See 176. 
. ἄδικος, -ov, unjust. See 523. 
. ἡ, truly, cerily. 

. ἀπο-φαίνω, -pavds, to show 


JSorth. See 592. 


. ἐκποδών, out from one’s feet, 


out of the way. 


. σχολή, -ῆς, leisure. 
. ἐθελοντής, -οὔ, volunteer; as 


adj., willing. See 438. 


. προσ-τίθημι, fo put to, add; 


mid., add one’s self to, 
agree. See 296. 

θάνατος. -ov, death. 

ovy-yevys, -ἐς, kindred. See 
152. 





912. ἐξ-άγω, -atw, to lead oul. See 
464, 553. 

913. προσ-τάττω, -ἕω, fo give an 
order to one, to enjoin, com- 
mand. See 326. 

προσ-κυνέω, -ἥσω, do obeisance 
to. 
- καίπερ, although. 
. εἰσ-άγω, -afw, fo lead into. 
See 553. 
. σκηπτοῦχος, -ov, sceptre-bearer. 
» θνήσκω, chiefly in pf. τέθνηκα; 
other tenses fr. ἀπο-θνήσκω, 
-θανοῦμαι, 2 aor. -έθανον, to 
die, be slain. See 910. 
πώποτε, ever yet. 
ὥλλως, in another way, other- 
wise. See 132. 
tapos, -ov, burial, a grave; 
θάπτω (-- ταφ-τω), to bury 
(deriv. epi-taph). 


CHAPTER VII. 


2. wig, νυκτός, 7, L. nox, E. 
NIGHT. . 
23. ἕως, Ew, ἡ. dawn, morning. 

. κέρας, κέρως, τό, horn; wing of 
an army. 
. δια-τάττω, -fo, to draw up, 
arrange. See 326. 


. αὐτό-μολος, -ov (μολεῖν, fo go), 


deserter. 


. Aox-dyos, -ov, leader of a 


λόχος. captain. See 421. 


. wae, how ? 





929. παρ-αινέω, impf. παρ-ήνουν, 
-έσομαι (αἰνέω, commend), to 
recommend, exhort. See 706. 

930. θαρρύνω (θάρρος, -ους, cour- 
age), to encourage. 

- ἀμείνων, -ov (compar. of dya- 
O05), better. See 107. 
. προσ-λαμβάνω. 2 aor. -έλαβον, 
to take in addition. See 51. 
. ἐλευθερία, -as, freedom. 
. κτάομαι, -ἥσομαι, acquire, 
gain; pt. κέκτημαι, to possess. 

















318 


935. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


εὐδαιμονίζω, fo account évdai- 
pov (happy), congratulate. 
See 250. 


. πολλαπλάσιος, -d, -ov, many 


times as many, manifold 
more. 


. διδάσκω, -άξω, fo teach. 
. dv-éxw, -€£ or -σχήσω, 2 aor. 


“ἔσχον, hold up; mid. en- 
dure, restrain one’s self. 


See 600. 


. εὔττολμος, -ov (τολμάω, (to 


dare), courageous. 


. ζηλωτός, -7, τόν, verb. adj., 


. κίνδῦνος, 


to be envied; ζηλόω, vie 
with, envy. 

“Ov, danger. See 
59. 


. μιμνήσκομαι, μνήσομαι, to re- 


mind one’s self of; μέμνημαι 
(as pres.), to remember. 


. πατρῴος, -a, -ov, paternal, 


hereditary. See 686. 


. μεσημβρία, -as, mid-day; south. 
. καῦμα, -aros, τό, heat. See 


870. 


. ἄρκτος, -ov, 7. bear, Great 


Bear, the north. 


χειμών, @vos, ὁ. winter, cold. 


. σατραπεύω, -evow, to be sat- 


rap (of or over). See 25. 


LJ ͵ὕ . 
. €y-Kparis, -ἐς, in power over, 


master of. 


. στέφανος, -ov, crown (deriv. 


STEPHEN). 


. εἴσ-ειμι, impf. elo-yew, to go 


into. See 352. 


. Kparéw, -now, 10 overpower, 


conquer. 





OF THE ANARBASIS. 


953. 


ἐμ-πίμπλημι, πλήσω, to Sil 
(in) full; here, satisfy (rare 
sense). See 832. 


. παρα-κελεύομαι, fo urge on, 


See 189. 


exhort. 


. ὅσοσ-περ, -ἡ-περ, -ον-περ, just 


as much, great, or many as. 


See 30. 


. διαλέγομαι, fo converse with. 


See 270. 


. ὄπισθε(ν), behind. 
. καιρός, -οὔ, time, esp. fit time. 
. πώς, encl. somehow or some- 


where; ὧδέ πως, about as 


Sollows. 


. wh, affirm. part. of swearing, 


by, yes by. 


. εἴ-περ, if indeed. 
. Gpaxel, without a battle. See 


282. 


. ἐξοπλισία, -as, act or process 


of arming. See 1007. 


. δρεπανη-φόρος, -ov, scythe-bear- 


ing. 


5. ἑξακισχίλιοι, -ar, -a, siz thou- 


sand. 


. ὕὑστερέω, ow, to be (behind), 


later than. See 462. 


. ἀγγέλλω, -ελῶ, ἤγγειλα, to an- 


nounce, bring tidings. 


. αὐτομολέω, -now, to desert. 


See 926. 


τάφρος, -ov, ἡ. ditch. 
ὀρυκτός, -7, -dv, dug. See 
762. 


1. βαθύς, -eta, -v, deep. 


. ὀργνιά, -as (ὀρέγω, to stretch 


out the arms), a fathom. 


3. βάθος, -ovs, τό, depth. 





. πλησίον, near. 
. μέλλω, μελλήσω, ἐμέλλησα, to 








CHAPTER VIII. 319 


κι ΄ 
. παρα-τείνω, -τενῶ, -έτεινα, τέ- 


Taka, -μαι, -ετάθην, to stretch 
along. 


. διῶρνξ, -vyos, 7, canal. 
- Gtr-aywyds, -οὔ, grain-carry- 


ing. 


. δια-λείπω, to leave (a space) 


between, be or stand apart. 
See 766. 


- μεταξύ, between (with gen.). 
. ἔρυμα, -aros, τό, defence. See 


266. 


. μάντις, -ews, ὁ (μαίνομαι, rare, 


der. MANIA). prophet, sooth- 
sayer. 


. ἑνδέκατος, -η, -ov, eleventh. 


CHAPTER 


- πλήθω, chief. in pres. part. ; 


pass. of πίμπλημι (see 832), 
to be full. 
See 738. 


be about, intend. 


. ἡνίκα, when. 
. προ-φαίνω, act. to show forth ; 


mid. to appear before or in 
Jront. See 592. 


. ἀνά, prep. with ace., up, 


up along; a. κράτος, with 
all (lit. up to) one’s 
might. 


- κράτος, -ους, τό, might, power. 
. ἱδρόω, -ώσω, to sweat. 
. Bodw, -ἥσομαι, ἐβύησα, to 


shout (βοή, -ἧς, shout). 








982. 


983. 


984. 
985. 


dpa, postpos. illative particle, 
then. 

ἀληθεύω, -εύσω, to speak the 
truth. 

τάλαντον, -ov, a talent, $1125. 

ἀπο-γιγνώσκω, -γνώσομαι, 2 
aor. -έγνων, -έγνωκα, to de- 
cide (lit. know) against or 
abandon the idea of. See 
40... 


. ἡμελημένως, adv., carelessly. 


See 527. 


. πορεία, -ds, journey, march. 


See 198. 


. ἀνα-ταράττω, -déw, to stir up, 


999. 


1000. 


1001. 
1002. 


1003. 


confuse. 


Vill. 


998. 


βαρβαρικῶς, in barbarian 
(language). 

παρα-σκευάζω, -dow, to pre- 
pare. See 232. 

τάραχος -ov, confusion. See 
988. 

αὐτίκα, αἱ once, immediately. 

ἄτακτος, -ov, disarranged, in 

See 324. 

ἐπι-πίπτω, -πεσοῦμαι, 2 aor. 
-έπεσον, to fall upon. See 
130. 

κατα-πηδάω, -joqua, to leap 
down. See 810. 

θώραξ, ἄκος, 6, breastplate. 

év-Suvw, or -dveua, 2 aor. 
-ἐδῦν, to enter; of clothes, 
etc., to pul on. 


disorder. 





ne em -ς 


— 





“ae ct RR: SO ee 


een 
Sana a NR NN 











320 


1007. 


1008. 
1009. 


1010. 
1011. 
1012. 
1013. 
1014. 


1015. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


ἐξιοπλίζω, -ὥ, fo arm com- 
pletely. See 963. 
σπουδή, -ῆς, haste. See 552. 
πελταστικός, -7, -dv, consist- 
ing of targeteers. See 222. 
ἑξακόσιοι, -at, -a, six hundred. 
ὁπλίζω, -εῶ, fo arm. 
mapapnplita, -ων, τά, thigh 
(unpds) pieces of armor. 
κεφαλή, -ῆς, head. 
δια-κινδυνεύω (v. ἰ.), -εύσω, fo 
pass through (διά) or tneur 
danger. See 59. 
προμετωπίδιον, -ov (μέτ-ωπον, 
the space between the 
eyes (ὦψ), forehead), a 
frontlet. 


. προστερνίδιον (πρό + στέρνον, 


breast), breastplate (for 
horses). 


. μάχαιρα, -as, a short sword. 


See 817. 


. καταφανής, -és, clearly vts- 


ible. See 592. 


. SefAn, -ἡς, afternoon. 
. κονιορτός, -οὔ (κόνις, dust; 


ὄρ-νῦμε, to raise), cloud of 
dust, 


. ψεφέλη, -ns, cloud. 
. λευκός, -ἤ, -όν. white. 
. συχνός, -7. -όν, considerable ; 


συχνὸν, sc. χωρίον, at a 


considerable distance. 


. μελανία, -as. blackness (μέλας, 


black). 


. ἐγγύς, -vrepov, -τατα, near. 
. τάχα, quickly. 

. χαλκός, -od, copper, bronze. 
. ἀστράπτω, fo lighten, flash. 





OF THE ANABASIS. 


1029. 
1030. 


1031. 


1032. 
1033. 
1034. 
1035. 
1036. 


1037. 
1038. 


1039. 


1040. 
1041. 


1042. 


1043. 
1044. 


1045. 


1046. 


1047. 


1048. 


1049. 


1050. 


λόγχη. -ys, lance. 

λευκο-θώραξ, -dxos, adj., wear- 
ing wh ie breastplate. 

γερρο-φόροι, -ων (carrying 
the γέρρον, wicker-shield), 
soldiers with wicker-shields. 

ποδ-ήρης, -<s, reaching to the 
feet. See 269, ‘ 

ξυλινός, -ή, -dv, wooden. See 
847. 

ἔθνος, -ovs, τό, nation. 

πλαίσιον, -ov, a square. 

δρέπανον, -ov, scythe. See 
964. 

ἄξων, -ovos, ὁ, axle. 

πλάγιος, -a, -ov, slanting; 
eis w., obliquely. 

ἀπο-τείνω, -rev@, to stretch 
out, extend. See 974. 

δίφρος, -ov, chariat-board. 

βλέπω, -youa, ἔβλεψα, fo 
look. 

διακόπτω, -κύψω, fo cul 
through or intwo. See 680 

σϊγή, -ῆς, silence. 

ἀνυστός, -ὧν (verb. of ἀνύω, 
accomplish), practicable. 

ἡσυχῇ, quietly (ἥσυχος, 
quiet). 

ἴσος, -y, -ov, equal, even ; ἐν 
ἴσῳ. in even (line). 

βραδέως, slowly (βραδύς, 
slow). 

στῖφος, -ouvs, τό, α (dense) 
mass or body. 

περί-ειμι, impf. -ἣν, to le 
ahove or superior. See 725. 

κυκλόω, -ὦσω, fo encircle. 
See 790. 














CHAPTER VIII. 321 


. ἑκατέρωθεν, on each side. 
. ὁμαλῶς, evenly. See 723. 
. κατα-θεάομαι, -ἄσομαι, to look 


down upon. See 796. 


. ἑκατέρωσε, to each side. 
. ἀπο-βλέπω, to look (from all 


else at) intently. See 1041. 
πελάζω, approach. 


, συν-αντάω, -ήσω, fo meet with. 
. ἱερά. -@v, τά, omens (iepds, 


sacred). 


. σφάγιον. -ου, victim (σφάττω, 


to slay). 


. θόρυβος, -ov, a (confused) 


noise, tumult. 


. σύντθημα, -aros, τό, thing 


which is agreed upon 
(συν - τίθημι, to agree), 
watchword. 


. δεύτερον, a second time (dev- 


Tepos, second). 

σωτήρ, -ῆρος, savior. 

δέχομαι, -ξομαι, fo receive, 
accept. 

οὐκέτι, no longer. 

δι-έχω, impf. -εἶχον, to hold 
apart; oftener intrans. be 
apart or distant. See 600. 

παιανίζω, -icw Or -εῶ, fo sing 
the paean or war song. 

προ-έρχομαι, fo go forward. 
See 383. 

ἀντίος, -a, -ov, opposiie, 
against. 

ἐκ-κυμαίνω, ἰο swell out (κῦμα, 
wave). 

θέω (chief. in pres. and 
impf.; for other tenses 
see 737), fo run. 





φθέγγομαι, -ἔομαι, to shout, 
cry out (der. di-PHTHONG). 
. ἐλελίζω, fo raise the war-cry 


(ἐλελεῦ). 


4. δόρυ, δύρατος, ro, spear. 


. δουπέω, -σω, to make a sound 
(δοῦπος, a dull sound). 


. τόξευμα, -aros, τό, thing 


which is shot, an arrow. 


. ἐξ-ικνέομαι, come forth to, to 


reach. See 78. 


. ἐκ-κλίνω, -ὦ, -ἐκλῖνα, to bend 


out (of line), give way. 
κενός, -7, -dv, emply (with 
gen.). 


. ἡνίοχος (ἡνία, reins; ἔχω, 


hold), charioteer. 
προ-εἶδον (pres. mpo-opdaw), 
to see before, foresee. 
ἱππό-δρομος, -ov, horse-race 
(deriv. HIPPODROME). 
τοξεύω. -evow, fo shoot (with 
a τόξον. bow). See 1076. 
ὥς thus. Note the accent. 
συ-σπειράομαι, to be drawn 
up (lit. rolled) closely. 
ἀσφαλής. -€s, safe. See 552. 
ἰσχύς. -vos, ἡ. strength, force. 
ἥμισυς, -era, -v, half. 
ἔμπροσθεν, in front. See 
185. 
ἐπι-κάμπτω, -κάμψω to bend 
Sorward. 
κύκλωσις, -ews, 7, encircling ; 
eis x., in order to encircle. 


See 1050. 


φυγή. -ῆἢς, flight. See 121. 
τρέπω, τρέψω, fo turn. See 


366. 











322 


1094. 


1095. 


1096. 
1097. 


1098. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. 


τροπή, -7s, (urn, rout (of an 
enemy). See 1093. 

δια. σπείρω, -σπερῶ. fo strew, 
fo scatter. 

σχεδόν. nearly, almost. 

ὁμο-τράπεΐζος, -ov (at table 
(τράπεζα) with), messmate. 

καθ-οράω, κατ-όψομαι, 2 aor. 
κατ εἶδον, to look down upon, 
observe. See 362. 


. παίω, παίσω, to strike, smite, 


chief. poet. for τύπτω. 


. στέρνον. -ov, breas’. 
. τιτρώσκω, τρώσω, ἔτρωσα, Lo 


wound, 


. ἰατρός, -οὔ, physician. 
. ἰάομαι, ἰάσομαι, fo heal. 
. τραῦμα, -ατος, τό, wound. 


See 1101. 


. ἀκοντίζω, -ίσω or -1@, fo shoot 


with a javelin (ἄκων). 





OF THE ANABASIS. 


1106. 
1107. 
1108. 
1109. 
1110. 


1111. 


ὀφθαλμός, -ov, eve. 

βιαίως, forcibly. See 627. 
ἑκάτερος, -a, -ov, each (of two). 
κεῖμαι, impf. ἐκείμην, to lie. 
θεράπων, -ovros, servant, at- 

tendant. 

πίπτω, πεσοῦμαι, πέπτωκα, 2 
aor. ἔπεσον, to fall. See 


1003. 


. περι-πίπτω (see 1111), fo 


Jall around, embrace. 


. ἐπι-σφάττω, -σφάξω, to slay 


upon. See 1089. 


΄ , My 
. σπάω. σπάσω, εσπασα, (oOo 


draw. See 834. 


. φορέω, -now (cf. φέρω), to 


wear. 


. εὔνοια, -as, goud will. See 


90, 821. 


. πιστότης, -nros. ἡ, faithful- 





ness. See 703. 


CHAPTER IX. 


. βασιλικός, -7, dv, kingly, 


royal. See 80. 


. πεῖρα, -as, lrial, experience. 


See 128. 


. παιδεύω, -evow, to train, edu- 


cate. See 3. 


. σωφροσύνη. -ns, prudence ; 


self control. 


. κατα-μανθάνω, -μαθήσομαι, 2 


aor. -ἐμαθον, to learn thor- 


oughly. 





1123. 


αἰσχρός, -d, dv; comp. ai- 
oxtwv, super]. αἴσχιστος, 
shameful, disgraceful. See 
518. 


. μανθάνω, μαθήσομαι, 2 aor. 


ἔμαθον, to learn. 


25. αἰδήμων, -ov, modest (αἰδώς, 


modesty). 


. ἡλικιώτης, οὐ. an equal in 


age (see 1134), a com- 
rade. 





CHAPTER IX. 323 


., ὑπο-δεέστερος, wanting some- 


what, inferior. See 183. 


. φίλ-ιππος, -ov, fond of horses 


(deriv. Purp). 


. ἔργον. -ov (for Fepyov), WORK. 


deed. 


. τοξικός, -ἡ. -dv, of a bow: 


ἡ τοξική (τεχνή), archery. 
See 1083. 


- ἀκόντισις -ews, ἡ, throwing 


the jarelin. See 1105. 


- Φιλο-μαθής, ἐς fond of learn- 


ing. 


’ P 4 , Φ 
. μελετῃρός, -d, -dv, studious 


(μελετάω, to study, prac- 
lise). 


. ἡλικία, -as, age, time of life. 


See 1126. 


+ πρέπει. it becomes, is fitting. 


φιλό Onpos. ov, fond of the 
chase (Onova). 

φιλο-κίνδῦνος, -ov, fond of 
danger. 

ἐπι-φέρω, bring up or against ; 
mid. rush upon or against. 
See 407. 

tpéw, fo tremble, flee from. 

συμ πίπτω, 2 aor. συν-έπεσον, 
to fall together, grapple 
with. See 1003. 

κατα-σπάω, fo draw down. 
See 831. 

ὠτειλη. -ῆς, wound, scar. 

τέλος. -ovs, τό, end; often as 
adv., finally. 

κατα-κτείνω, 2 aor. -έκανον, 
to kill. See 52. 

Bon θέω, -r0@, to aid, assist 
(with dat.). See 1071. 





1146. 


1147. 


1148. 


. σπονδή, 


μακαριστός. -ἡ. -όν (verb. adj. 
οὗ μακαρίζω, ἰο deem μάκαρ 
or blessed). 

κατα-πέμπω, -ψω, fo send 
down. See 55. 

σπένδω. σπείσω, to pour a 
libation ; mid. fo pour a 
libation with another, 
make a treaty. 


. συν-τίθημι, -θήσω, put to- 


gether ; mid. agree (make 
an agreement, IX. 7). See 
1061. 
-ns, @ _ libation; 
plur. treaty, truce. See 
1148. 


- To-yap-otv for indeed then, 


therefore. 


. προΐημι, -ἤσω, -ῆκα, €ika, 


-eipat, send before or away ; 
chief. in mid. let go, give 
up. See 800. 

ἅπαξ, once. 

μείων, -ov, /ess, smaller, used 
as comp. Of pixpds. 

εὐχή. -ἧς, prayer, vow. 

ἐκ-φέρω, -oicw, to bring out 
or forth; to report. See 
1138. 

ἔστε, until. 

ἐπι-θυμέω, -ἥσω, to set one’s 
heart (θῦμός) upon, desire. 
See 596. 

σῶμα, -aros, τό, body. 

κακοῦργος, -ov, evil-doer. See 
1129. 

κατα-γελάω, ἄσομαι, to laugh 
(down) at, deride. See 
361. 





WORDS OF BOOK I. OF THE ANABASIS. 


. ἀ φειδής, -ἐς ; -έστερος, -έστα- 
τος. unsparing (φείδομαι, to 
spare). 

1163. στείβω, fo tread. See 869. 
1164. ἀ-δεῶς, fearlessly (δέος, fear). 
1165. ὅποι, whither. 


1166. προ-χωρέω, -ἥσω. go on, ad- | 


vance; beofuid. See 348. 

1167. δια-φερόντως, exceedingly 
(δια-φέρω, differ, excel). 

1168. κατα-στρέφω, turn down, 
overturn, subdue. 

1169. δοῦλος, -ov, a slave. 

1170. dpOovia, -as (ἄ φθονος, not 
grudged), abundance. 

1171. μήν, certainly, assuredly ; ye 
μήν, assuredly, at least, 
moreover. 

1172. δικαιοσύνη, -ns, justice. See 
489. 

1173. πλούσιος, -a, -ov, rich. 

1174. φιλο-κερδέω, -now, fo be fond 
of gain. See 1181. 

1175. δικαίως, justly. 

1176. δια χειρίζω. -a, fo have in 
hand (χείρ), to manage. 

1177. ἀληθινός, -7, -dv, true (to 
name), genuine. See 983. 

[1178. πλέω, πλεύσομαι, ἔπλευσα, 
to sail. See 393. ] 

1179. κερδαλέος, ἃ -ov. gainful. 

[1180. πειθ-αρχέω, -now, [ο obey au- 
thority ἀρχή); to obey.) 

1181. κέρδος, ους, τό, gain, profit. 
See 1174. 

1182. ὑπ-ηρετέω, -now, fo be a ser- 
rant (ὑπηρέτης) to serve. 

1183. ἀ-χάριστος, -ov, thankless, 
unthanked. See 699. 





1184. 


| 1185. 


| 1186. 


προ-θυμίᾶ, -ds, zeal. See 
596 

ὑπ-ηρέτης, οὐ, an under 
rower (ἐρέτης), @ servant. 
δεινός, -7, -dv, fearful, ter- 
rible, mighty; clever. See 
§22. 


. olxo-vopos, -ov, house-stewurd, 


manager. 


. κατα-σκευάζω, dow, prepare 


or equip fully (to manage 
well, IX. 19). See 999. 


. mpda od0s, -ov, ἡ. coming to, 


approach, revenue. See 
318. 


. ἀεί, always. 
. προσ-δίδωμι, -δώσω, fo gire 


in addition, add. See 
485. 


. θαρραλέως, boldly (θαρραλέος, 


bold). See 508. 


. πάομαι, chief. in pf. and 


plpf. πέπαμαι, ἐπεπάμην, 
have gotten, possess. See 
934. 


. ἥκιστα. least, least of all. 
. φθονέω, -ἡσω (φθύνος, envy), 


fo envy. 


φανερώς, manifestly. See 609 


. πλουτέω, -now, to be rich. 


See 1173. 


. ἀπο-κρύπτω, -ψω, /o hide 


from or away. See 93. 


. εὔνους, -ouvv, well-disposed. 


See 90. 


. σύν-εργος, -ov, fellow-worker. 


See 1129. 


. κατ-εργάζομαι, fo work out, 


accomplish. See 1129. 

















CHAPTER IX. 325 


1202. θεραπεύω, -evow, to serve, at- 
tend. See 1110. 

1203. δια-δίδωμι, -δώσω, to give to 
different ones, distribute 
See 1191. 

1204. σκοπέω (in pres. and impf.), 
σκέψομαι (from σκέπτομαι), 
ἐσκεψάμην, to look at, ob- 
serve. 

[1205. κόσμος, -ov, order, adorn- 
ment}. 

1206. καλλωπισμός, -od, adorn- 
ment (κάλλος. beauty; ody, 
Jace). 

1207. κοσμέω -now, to adorn. 

1208. θαυμαστός, -7, -dv, wonder- 
Jul. See 364. 

1209. ἐπι-μέλεια, care, attention. 
See 86. 

1210. προ-θυμέομαι, fo he zealous, 
eager. See 596. 

. Χχαρίζομαι. -ίσομαι Or -codpat. 

See 699. 
. ἀγαστός, -ἡ. -dv, admirable. 
See 153. 
3. Bios, -ov (Semitic), wine- 
jar (rare). 

. ἡμι-δεής, -ἐς (δέω, to lack), 
half-lacking, half-full. 

. ἐπι-τυγχάνω, 2 aor. -έτυχον. 
to happen upon, meet with. 
See 452. 

. τήμερον, OF σήμερον, to- 
day. 





1217. ἐκ-πίνω, f. -πίομαι, 2 aor. 
-ἔπιον, to drink off or up. 

. χήν, χηνός, 6, 9. goose. 

. "pl-Bpwros, -ov, halfeaten. 
See 1214. 

. ἄρτος, -ov, loaf, bread. 

221. ἥμισυ, -εος, τό, a half. 
22. ἐπι-λέγω, -λέξω, fo say fur- 
ther or in reference to. 

. γεύω, fo give a taste; mid. 
to taste (with gen.). 

. σπάνιος, -a, -ov, Scarce, rare. 

. δια-πέμπω, -ψω, fo send 
in different directions or 
around. See 1147. 

. πεινάω, -now, to be hungry. 

. προσ-καλέω, -έσω, fo call to, 
summon. See 209. 

. σπουδαιολογέομαι, fo talk 
earnestly. See 1008. 

. Sydow, -ὦώσω, fo make evi- 
dent, show. 

. τεκμήριον, -ov, sign, proof. 

. ἐπιιχειρέω, -ἤσω, to take in 
hand (χείρ), attempt. See 
1176. 

. ἀγαπάω, -now, to love (ἀγάπη, 
love). 

tty, -ἧς, honor. 

ὀρθῶς, rightly. 

βέβαιος, -a, -ov, firm, stead- 
fast. 

συντράπεΐζος, -ov, mess-mate. 


See 1097. 





1239. 
1240. 
1241. 
1242. 
1243. 
1244. 
1245. 
1246. 
1247. 
1248. 


1249. 


1250 


1251. 
1252. 


WORDS OF BOOK I. OF THE ANABASIS. 


CHAPTER 


. ἀπο-τέμνω, -τεμῶ, 2 aor. 


-έταμον, to cut off. 


. εἰσ-πίπτω, -πεσοῦμαι, 2 aor. 


-έπεσον, to fall into. See 
1003. 
στρατόπεδον -ov, camp. See 
504. 
ἔνθεν, thence, whence. 
παλλακίς, idos, 7, mistress. 
σοφός, -7, -dv, skilled, wise. 


γυμνός, -7, -dv, naked (X. 3, 


lightly clad). 


ἀντι-τάττω, -afo, fo draw up 


against. See 326. 

σώζω, σώσω, fo save, rescue. 
See 1063. 

évros, within, adv. with 
gen. 

ἀρήγω, -ξω, to aid, suc- 
cor. 

στρέφω, -ψω, 2 aor. p. ἐστρά- 
φην. to turn. 

ἀνα-λαμβάνω, 2 aor. -ἐλαβον, 
to take up. See 8]. 

σύν-οδος, -ov, ἡ. coming to- 
gether, meeting (derivative, 
synop). See 1189. 

φρόνιμος, ov, prudent. 

ἀπ-αλλάττω, -ἕω. to change 
from or off, to set free; 
mid. and pass. be set free, 
depart. See 874. 


. συν-τυγχάνω, 2 aor. -έτυχον, 


to meet with. See 1215. 


. ὁμοῦ, adv., logether. 





1255. 


1256. 


X. 


προσ-άγω, -άξω, to lead to or 
towards (with obj. omit- 
ted, approach). See 464. 

περι-πτύσσω, -ξω, to fold 
around, outflank. 


. Gpdhorépobev, from or on both 


sides. See 16. 


. ἀνα-πτύσσω, -ξω, fo unfold 


or fold back. 


. παρ-αμείβομαι, fo change (to 


pass on, to pass by). 


. σχῆμα, -aros, τό, form (deriv. 


SCHEME), 


. σύν-ειμι, impf. -ἥειν, fo go or 


come together, to meet. See 
352. 


. παρα-τάττω, -ξω, fo draw 


up beside. See 326. 


. αὖθις, again, back. 
. ἐπι- διώκω, -ξω, to pursue afler. 


See 650. 


. λόφος, -ov, crest, hill. 

. σημεῖον, -ov, sign, standard. 
. ἄετός, -ov, eagle. 

. πέλτη, -ns, crescent shield. 


ava-relvw, -reva@, stretch up or 
out, extend. See 974. 


. ἀθρόος, -a, -ov, in crowds, in 


a body. 


1. ἄλλοθεν, from another place. 


. Ψιλόω, -ώσω, to make bare, 


strip. 


. ἀνα-βιβάΐω, fo make go up, 


lead up. See 636. 


. ἥλιος, -ov, sun. 











CHAPTER X. 397 


- δύνω or δύομαι, fo enter; 


sink into (the sea), set. 
See 1006. 


» ΄ 
. ἀνα-παύω, 10 make to cease or 


rest; mid. to rest. See 
214. 


. οὐδαμοῦ, nowhere. 
. προ-λαύνω, -ελῶ, fo drive or 


ride forward. See 845. 


. δορπηστός, -οὔ, supper time. 





- σιτίον, -ov, chief. in plur. 


grain, food. See 720. 


. ποτόν. -ov, drink. See 1917 


. σφοδρός, -a, -dv, excessive. 


violent. 


. ἔνδεια, -ᾶς, want. See 183. 
. ἄδειπνος, -ov, without dinner 


(δεῖπνον). 


- ἄν-αριστος, -ον, without break- 


Jast (ἄριστον). 




















VOCABULARY. 





&, ἅ-περ. See ὅς, ὅσ-περ. 

ἀγάγω, ἀγαγών. See ἄγω. 

ἀγαθός, -7, -5v, good, brave. 

ἄγαμαι, admire. 535,14; 329.2 

ἀγαπάω, -ἤσω, love, am pleased. 

ἀγαστός, -ἡ, -όν, admiruble, praise- 
worthy. 

ἀγγέλλω, announce. 329. 

ἄγγελος, -ov, ὁ, messenger. 

ἀγορά, -ds, ἡ, assembly; place of as- 
sembly, market-place ; market, pro- 
visions on sale, 

ἀγοράζω, buy; mid., buy for one’s 
self. 

ἄγριος, -ia, -ov, wild. 

ἄγω, lead, lead on, bring, convey. 
508, 6; 330. 

ἀγών, -Gvos, 6, game, contest. 

ἄ-δειπνος, -ov, supper-less. 

ἀδελφός, -οὔ, ὁ, brother. 

ἀ-δεῶς, fenrless/y. 

ἀδικέω, be unjust, act unjustly; harm, 
wrong, injure. 

ἄ-δικος, -ον, unjust, bad; περί τινα, 
against any one; τὸ ἄδικον, in- 
justice. 

ἀεί, always. 

ἄετός, -οὔ, ὁ, eagle. 

᾿Αθηναῖος, -ov, ὁ, Athenian. 

ἄθλον, -ov, τό, prize in a contest. 


A. 


ἀθροίζω, collect, muster troops; mid., 
come together, assemble, collect. Cf. 
517, 1; εἰκάζω, 338. 

ἀθρόος, -a, -ov, toyether, in ὦ body. 

ἄ-θυμος, -ov, spirit-less, disinclined ; 
πρὸς ἀνάβασιν, toward, ete. 

ai, at, ais. See ὁ, ὅς. 

Αἰγύπτιος, -ia, -ov, Egyptian. 

αἰδήμων, -ov, gen. -dvos, modest, re- 
spectful, 

Aivdy, -dvos, ὁ, Aenidnian. The 
Aenianians lived in Thessaly, occu- 
pying the valleys of the Spercheios. 

aiperds, -ἡ, -όν, taken, chosen; oi 
aiperoi, the delegates. 

aipéw, take, scize, capture ; mid., take 
for one’s self, choose. 539, 1; 
330. 

alpw, raise. 518, 2; 330. 

αἰσϑάνομαι, perccive, become aware of 
orthat. 522, 1; 330. 

αἰσχρός, -d, -dv, disgraceful, base. 
ass; $72, 1. 

αἰσχὕύνω, disgrace, shame; mid., be 
ashamed; ὅτι, because. Cf. 519, 3; 
330. 

αἰτέω, ask, ask for; mid., ask for 
something as a favor, entreat, 
beg. 

αἰτιάομαι, blame, accuse, charge. 








1 References in this heavy type are to sections in Hadley’s (Allen) Grammar, 
2 References in this type are to pages in Goodwin’s Grammar. 














αἴτιος 330 


αἴτιος, -id, ov, chargeable with; re- 
sponsible; being or acting as the 
cause of. 

ἀκινάκης, -ov, ὁ, Persian dugger, short 
and straight. 

ἀκοντίζω, hurl a javelin, hit or 
wound with u javelin. 

ἀκόντισις, -εως, ἡ, use or hurling of 
the javelin. 

ἀκούω, hear, hear about or of. 507, 1; 
330. 

ἀκρόπολις, -ews, ἡ, the highest part of 
a city, citadel, 

ἄκρος, -d, -ov, highest; τὸ ἄκρον, top ; 
τὰ ἄκρα, heiyhts, hills. 

ἄκων, τουσα, -ον, gen. -ovTos, -ούσης, 
un-willing , Κύρου ἄκοντος, against 
the will of Cyrus. 

ἀλέξω, ward of; mid., ward off from 
one’s self, defend one’s self, repel, 
punish. 510, 1; 331. 

ἀλέτης, -ov, ὁ, grinder; as adj., dvos 
ἀλέτης, grinding mill, grindstone. 

ἄλευρον, -ov, τό, flour, wheat-flour, 
usually plur. 

ἀληθεύω, speak or tell the truth. 

ἀληθινός, -ἡ, -dv, true, trusty, genuine. 

ἁλίσκομαι, be taken, captured, taken 
as prisoner. 533, 1; 331. 

ἀλλά, but; ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως, but yet; at the 
beginning of a speaker’s words, wn- 
translated, or like the Eng. well ; 
ἀλλὰ δέχομαι, well, 7 accept it. 

ἀλλήλων, one another, each other. 

ἄλλος, other, rest of, another: ὁ ἄλλος, 
the rest, the other; τὰ ἄλλα ἐτίμησε, 
in other respects than what imme- 
diately follows; τὶ καὶ ἄλλο (ὕλης), 
any other kind of; ἄλλοι ἄλλως, 
some in one way, others in another; 
ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν, in various directions. 

ἄλλως, differently. See ἄλλος. 

ἄλφιτον, -ov, τό, grains, groats; bur- 
ley-grains, barley-meal; usually 
plur. 





ἀναγκαῖος 


GAG, ἁλώσομαι. See ἁλίσκομαι, 

ἅμα, at the same time, together with; 
dua τῇ ἡμέρᾷ, at daybreak. 

ἅμαξα, -ης, ἡ, wagon, heavy wagon for 
hauling freight. 

ἁμαξιτός, -dv, fur wagons, fit for 
wagons. 

ἁμαρτάνω, miss, Sail, err. 522, 2; 
331. 

d-paxel, without resistance or Sighting. 

᾿Αμβρακιώτης, -ov, ὁ, an Ambraciot 
or Ambracian. Ambracia was a 
city of Epeiros, about 80 stadia, or 
7 miles, north of the gulf named 
after it the Sinus Ambracius. 

ἀμείνων, -ov, gen. -ovos, comp. of 
ἀγαθός. better, superior. 

ἀμελέω, be negligent or careless of. 

ἀ-μήχανος, -ov, in-expedient; imprac- 
ticable ; insurmountable. 

ἄμπελος, -ov, ἡ, vine. 

ἀμφί, about, around. 

ἀμφι-λέγω, dispute, quarrel with 
words. 

᾿Αμφιπολέτης, an Amphipolite. Am- 
phipolis was a city of Thrace on 
the river Strymon. 

ἀμφότερος, -d, -ov, both; τὼ παῖδε 
ἀμφοτέρω, both the sons. 

ἄν. Cf. 857; 207. 

av, for édy, if. 

ἀνά, wp, opp. to κατά ; ἀνὰ κράτος, 
up to one’s strength, at full speed. 

dva-Balvw, yo or march up, ascend, 
embark, proceed from the coast into 
the interior. 519, 7; 333. 

ἀνάβασις, -ews, ἡ, upward march or 
expedition, ascent, 

ἀνα-βιβάζω, ead up. 

ἀν-αγγέλλω, report, bring back word. 
See ἀγγέλλω. 

ἀνα-γιγνώσκω, recognize, read. 531, 
4; 335. 

ἀναγκαῖος, “a, -ον, necessary; τὶ ἀναγ- 
καῖον, some necessity, 


ἀνάγκη 331 ἀπό 


ἀνάγκη, -η5, ἡ, necessity; ἀνάγκη 
ἐστίν, it is necessary. 

ἀνα-γνούς. See ἀνα-γιγνώσκω. 

ἀνα-λαμβάνω, take up, take up with 
one, rescue. 

ἀναξυρίδες, -ων, αἱ, trousers, such as 
were worn by the Persians. 

ἀνα-παύω, mid., rest one’s self; take, 
or go to, rest. 

ἀνα-πείθω, persuade, induce. 

ἀν-ἄριστος, -ov, without breakfast. 

ἀν-αρπάζω, snatch up, carry off. 

dva-ords. See ἀν-ίστημι, 

dva-orpépw, turn back or around, 
retreat, advance. 508, 26; 355. 

ἀνα-σχέσθαι. See ἀν-έχω. 

ἀνα-ταράττω, 5{17 wp, confuse. 

ἀνα-τείνω, stretch or hold up, raise. 

ἄνδρα, ἀνδρός. See ἀνήρ. 

ἀνδράποδον, -ου, τό, 5Ἰαῦο, captive. 

ἀν-έβην. See ἀνα-βαίνω. 

ἄνευ, without. 

ἀν-έχω, hold up, sustain; mid., en- 
dure. 

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ, man, meaning about 
the same as the Lat. vir. 

ἀνθ᾽, by elision, for ἀντί. 

ἄνθρωπος, man, homo; human be- 
ing; sometimes used in a con- 
temptuous sense. 

ἀνιάω, trouble, annoy. 

ἀν-ίστημι, raise or start up; mid., 
rise, stand up. 

ἀντ᾽, by elision, for ἀντί. 

ἀντ-αγοράζω, buy in return or ex- 
change. 

ἀντί, against, over against, instead 
of, in return for. 

ἀντίος, -id, -ov, opposite; d. ἱέναι, go 
against, 

ἀντι-παρα-σκευάζομαι, make counter 
preparations, 

dvri-wépas, opposite. 

ἀντιστασιώτης, political opponent or 
adversary. 





ἀντι-τάττω, draw up or set in line 
against. 

ἄντρον, -ov, τό, cave. 

ἀνυστός, -όν, practicable, possible. 

ἄνω, upwards, high up, into the in- 
terior (from the sea-coast). 

ἀξίνη, -ns, ἡ, are. 

ἄξιος, -ia, -ov, worth, worthy. 

ἀξιόω, consider as proper, ask for as a 
proper thing. 

ἄξων, -ovos, ὁ, axle. 

ἀπ-αγγέλλω, bring back tidings from 
a place or person, report. 

ἀπ-αγορεύω͵ refuse, give up, give out 
through exhaustion, am futigued. 

ἀπ-άγω, bring or lead away or back. 

ἀπ-αιτέω, ask for or demand as one’s 
right. 

ἀπ-αλλάττω, get rid of, remove; 
mid. and pass., be freed from ; 
withdraw. 514, 1; 331. 

ἁπαλός, -7, -dv, soft, tender. 

ἅπαξ, once. 

ἀ-παράσκευος, wn-prepared. 

ἅπας, -aca, -av, entire, all without 
exception. 

ἀπ-ἔδωκα. See ἀπο-δίδωμι. 

ἀπ-έθανον. See ἀπο-θνήσκω. 

ἄπ-ειμι, go from or away, depart, 
desert. 

ἀπ-ελαύνω, drive away, ride or march 
away, retreat, 521, 1; 338. 

ἀπ-ελθών. See ἀπ-έρχομαι. 

ἀπ-έρχομαι, go away, come from, 
withdraw, desert. 539, 2; 340. 

ἀπ-έχω, be away from, be distant ; 
refrain from. 

dm-hyayov. See ἀπ-άγω. 

ἀπ-ἤήειν. See ἄπ-ειμι. 

ἀπ-ἤλαυνον. See ἀπ-ελαύνω, 

ἀπ-ῆλθον. See ἀπ-έρχομαι. 

ἀπ-ηλλάγην. See ἀπ-αλλάττω,. 

ἀπ-ιέναι͵ ἄπ-ιμεν. See ἄπ-ειμι. 

ἀπό, with the gen., from, from off, 
away from; by means of. 























ἀποβιβαΐω 


ἀπο-βιβάζω, cause to go of or away 
Srom, disembark (trans.). 424. 

ἀπο-βλέπω, look away, look uway 
toward. 508, 8; 334. 

ἀπο-γιγνώσκω, decide negatively, re- 
linguish or abandon a thought or 
purpose. 531, 4; 335. 

ἀπο-δέδρακα. See ἀπο-διδράσκω. 

ἀπο-δείκνυμι, show ; appoint. 528, 3; 
336. 

ἀπο-διδράσκω, run off or away; 
sneak away; escape. 530, 2; 337. 

ἀπο-δίδωμι, give back, return what is 
due ; pay. 

ἀπο-δοῦναι͵ ἀπο-δώσω. See preceding. 

ἀπο-κρίνομαι, rep/y. 519, 2; 345. 

ἀπο-κρύπτω, hide away, conceal ; 
mid., hide for one’s self; hoard 
money. 513, 10; 345. 

ἀπο-κτείνω, kill, put to death; de- 
liver to the executioner. 519, 4; 
345. 

απο-λαμβάνω, tate back, receive back. 
523, 5; 346. 

dtro-heltrw, Jeave, leave behind; de- 
sert. 511, 7; 346. 

ἀπο-λήψομαι. See ἀπο-λαμβάνω. 

ἀπ-όλλῦυμι, mid., be destrvyed, perish, 
die. 528, 8; 349. 

᾿Απόλλων, -wvos, ὁ, Apollo. 

ἀπο-πέμπω, send away or back ; τοὺς 
δασμούς, remit, etc. 508, 21; 351. 

ἀπο-πλέω, sail away or back, sail 
homeward. 512, 3; 352. 

ἀπορέω, be in distress or without re- 
source, be perplexed. 

ἀπορία, -ids, ἡ, distress, difficulty. 

ἀπό-ρ-ρητος, -ον. secret. 

ἀπο-σπάω, draw away from, from 
one’s pursuer, hence ovtstrip. 

ἀπο-στῆναι. See ἀφ-ίστημι. 

ἀπο-συλάω, strip off, despoil, rob. 

ἀπο-τείνω, stretch away, extend. 519, 
5; 356. 

ἀπο-τέμνω, cut off. 521, 8; 356. 





332 ἀσφαλής 


ἀπο-φαίνω, show, reveal; mid., show 
one’s self, appear, show for one’s 
self, express an opinion. 518, 19; 
358. 

ἀπο-φεύγω, flee away, run away. 
511, 15; 358. 

ἀπο-χωρέω, go away, retreat, return. 

ἀπο-ψηφίζομαι, vote against. 

ἅπτω, mid., touch. 513, 1; 332. 

ἀπ-ωλόμην. See ἀπ-όλλῦμι. 

dpa, inferential, therefore, then; prob- 
ably 

ἀργύριον, -ov, τό, si/ver money, money. 

ἀρετή, -ἧς, ἡ, virtue, goodness; good 
service. 

ἀρήγω, succor, render aid. 

ἀριθμός, -οὔ, ὁ, number, enumeration, 
total amount. 

” 

ἄριστον, -ov, τό, breakfast. 

ἄριστος, -7, -ov, best, best in rank, 
noblest ; most advantageous. 

᾿Αρκάς, -ddos, ὁ, Arcadian, native of 
Arcadia, 

ἄρκτος, -ov, ἡ, bear, Great Bear, 
north. 

ἅρμα, -aros, τό, chariot for war. 

dppdpata, -ns, ἡ, covered carriage. 

ἁρπάζω, seize, carry away; plunder. 
517. 1; 333. 

"Aprepis, -ἰδος, ἡ, Artemis, the Lat. 
Diana. 

ἄρτος, -ov, ὁ, bread. 

ἀρχαῖος, -a, -ov, old, ancient; rd 
ἀρχαῖον, formerly. 

ἀρχή, -ἢς, ἡ, beginning, rule, govern- 
ment, province. 

ἄρχω, begin, command. 508, 7; 333. 

ἄρωμα, -aros, τό, spice. 

ἀσθενέω, am sick or feeble, 

ἀσθενής, -és, feeble. 

ἀσπίς, -ἰδος, ἡ, large oval shield of 
the heavy-armed soldiers. 

ἀστράπτω, gleam, flash. 

ἀ-σφαλής, -és, firm, safe; ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ, 
in a safe place, 


ἀσφαλῶς 


ἀ-σφαλῶς, safely. 

ἄ-τακτος, -ον, disarranged, in dis- 
order. 

Gt pate, dishonor. 

"Arties, -%, -όν, Altic, Athenian. 

αὖ, wyuin. 

αὖθις, ayain. 

αὕτη, αυται. See ovros. 

αὐτίκα, iminediately, at once. 

αὐτοϑι, there, in this or that place. 

αὐτόματος, -ἡ, -ov, self-moved; ἀπὸ 
or ἐκ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, voluntarily, 
of one’s own accord. 

αὐτομολέω, desert. 

αὐτόμολος, -ov, ὁ, deserter. 

αὐτός, -7, -6, ipse, se/f; ὁ αὐτός, 
idem, same ; in oblique cases it is 
the ordinary pron. 3d pers. 

αὐτοῦ, in this or thut place, here, 
there. 

αὑτοῦ. See éavrod. 

ἀφ᾽, for ἀπό when o is elided before a 
rough breathing. 

ἀφ-αιρέω, seize or take away, rob; 
usually mid. 539. 1; 330. 

ἀ-φανής, -és, wnsecn, out of sight, 
gone. 

ἀφειδῶς. 

ἀφ-ειστήκειν. See ἀφ-ίστημι. 

ἀφθονίᾶ, -ds, ἡ, abundance. 

ἀφ-ἔημι, send away or off, dismiss, re- 
lease. 534, 3; 342. 

ἀφ-ικνέομαι, arrive, come to. 524, 2; 
342. 

ἀφ-ιππεύω, ride away on horseback. 

ἀφ-ίστημι, mid., stand of or away, 
revolt. 534, ὅ ; 342. 

᾿Αχαιός, -d, -όν, Achaean. Achaia 
was a portion of the Peloponnesus, 
bordering on the Corinthian Gulf. 

ἀ-χάριστος, -ov, without thanks, un- 
rewarded, 

ἄχθομαι, dep., be displeased. 510, 2; 
333. 

ἀψίνθιον, -ov, τό, wormwood. 





βωμός 
B. 


Βαβυλάν, -dvos, ἡ, Babylon. 

Βαβυλώνιος, -d, -ov, Babylonian. 

βάθος, -ous, τό, depth. 

βαθύς, -εἴα, -v, deep. 

βάλανος, -ov, ἡ, nt. 

βάλλω, throw, hit. 518, 4; 334. 

βαρβαρικός, -7, -όν, barbaric, bar- 
barian. 

BapBapikas, in a barbarian way; in 
the burbarian tongue. 

βάρβαρος, barbarian; οἱ βάρβαροι, 
people who were not Greeks, bar- 
barians. 

βασιλεία, -ds, ἡ, kingdom. 

βασίλειος, -ov, kingly, royal ; τὰ Ba- 
gihea [δώματα), royal rooms or 
residence. 

βασιλεύς, -έως, ὁ, king. 

βασιλεύω, am king. 

βασιλικός, -ἡ, -dr, kingly, royal. 

βέβαιος, -a, -ov, firm. 

βελτίων, -ov, better, βέλτιστος, -n, -ov, 
best. 

Bla, -as, ἡ, force. 

βιάζομαι, wse force, compel. 

βιαίως, forcibly, violently. 

Bikos, -ov, ὁ, pitcher. 

βίος, -ov, ὁ, life. 

βλέπω, look; of objects, pointed or 
directed towards. 508, 8; 334. 

Bode, shout out, cry aloud. 

βοηθέω (βοή, shout; θέω, run), hasten 
with help, bring aid. 

Βοιωτός, -oi, ὁ, Boeotian. Boeotia 
lay northwest of Attica. 

βουλεύω, plan, counsel; mid. de- 
liberate, consult. 

βούλομαι, wish. 510, 4; 334. 

βραδέως, slowly. 

βραχύς, -εἴα, -v, short; βραχύ (adv. 
acc.), short distance. 

βρέχω, wet, moisten. 508, 9. 

βωμός, -οὔ, ὁ, altar. 









































334 διακινδυνεύω 


r. 


yap, postpos., for; καὶ yd, etenim, 
Jor. 

γέ, postpos. and enclitic, at least, you 
see, you know. 

γεγένημαι, yéyova, See γίγνομαι. 

γέλως, -wros, ὁ, laughter. 

γενέσθαι, γενοίμην. See γίγνομαι. 

γένος, -ous, τό, birth. 

᾿ γερρο-φόρος, -ov, ὁ, soldier with or 
carrying a wicker-shield., 

γεύω, mid., taste. 

yédipa, -ds, ἡ, bridge. 

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ, earth, Jand. 

γή-λοφος, -ov, ὁ, hill. 

γίγνομαι, become, am born; result. 
506, 1; 335. 

γνοίην, γνώσομαι. See γιγνώσκω. 

γνώμη, -ης, ἡ, opinion, plan, expecta- 
tion. 

γόνν, γόνατος, τό, knee. 

γράφω, write. 508, 11; 335. 

γυμνάζω, exercise. 

γυμνής, -ῆτος, ὁ, light-armed soldier. 

γυμνός, -ἡ, -όν, half-dressed, naked, 
exposed to danger. 

γυνή, γυναικός, ἡ, woman, wife. 


Δ. 


δ᾽, by elision, for δέ. 

δακρύω, weep. 

δαπανάω, -ἥσω, spend or squander 
money. 

Sapexds, -οὔ, ὁ, daric. <A Persian 
gold coin, worth about $4.00. 

Sacpds, -οὔ, ὁ, tax, revenue. 

δέ, postpos., but, for, frequently and. 

δεδιώς, δέδοικα. See δείδω. 

δέδο-μαι, See δίδωμι. 

δεηθῆναι, δεῖ. See δέω. 

δείδω, fear, be afraid. 490, 5; 336. 





δείλη, -η;, ἡ, afternoon, evening. 

δειλός, -7, -όν, cowardly. 

ϑεινός, -ἡ, -όν, terrible ; able, skilful ; 
τὸ δεινόν, danger’. 

δεῖται. See δέω. 

δέκα, fen. 

δένδρον, -ουὅ, τό, tree. 

δέξομαι, See δέχομαι. 

δεξιός, -d, -dv, right; ἡ δεξιά (χείρ), 
right hand, pledge; ἐν δεξιᾷ, on the 
right (hand). 

δέρμα, -aros, τό, the skin as removed 
from the body, hide. 

δεῦρο, hither. 

δεύτερος, -d, -ov, second; τὸ δεύτερον, 
second time. 

δέχομαι, receive, accept. Page 357; 
336. 

δέω, need; mid., want, desire, beg; 
δεῖ, it is necessary; τὸ δέον, the 
desired thing. 

δή, postpos., a strengthening particle, 
verily, indeed, just ; in questions, 
pray. 

δῆλος, evident ; δῆλον ὅτι, evidently. 

δηλόω, show, make manifest. 

διά, with gen., through ; διὰ ταχέων, 
quickly ; with acc. on account of. 

δια-βαίνω, go through, cross. 519, 7: 
333. 

διάβασις, -ews, ἡ, place of crossing, 
Jord. 

διαβατός, -ἡ, -ὁν, forduble. 

δια-βάς, δια-βῆναι. See δια-βαίνω. 

δι-αγγέλλω, bring word through, re- 
port. G. 329. 

δια-γίγνομαι, come through, subsist ; 
continue, pass time. 

δι-άγω, lead through; continue; pass 
time. 

δια-δέχομαι͵ receive through or in a 
line, relieve. 

δια-δίδωμι, distribute. 

δια-κινδυνεύω, run all risks, make a 
desperate attempt. 





διακόπτω 835 δῶρον 


δια-κόπτω, cut or break through, cut 
to pieces. 

διακόσιοι, -αι, -a, two hundred. 

δια-λέγομαι, converse, confer with. 

δια-λείπω, leave between, stand at 
intervals. 

δια-πέμπω, send around or among. 

δι-αρπάζω, p/under. 517, 1; 333. 

δια-σπάω, draw apart, separate, 
scatter. 

δια-σπείρω, scatter ; mid., intrans. 

δια-στάς. See δι-ίστημι. 

δια-τάττω, arrange or draw up in 
line of battle. 514, 9; 356. 

δια-τελέω, finish anything, as a dis- 
tance. 

δια-τίθημι, dispose, handle or treat 
persons. 534, 1; 356. 

δια-τρίβω, wear away, waste time. 
508, 3; 357. 

Sia-hepdvrws, differently, pre-emi- 
nently. 

δια-χειρίζω, manage, control, ad- 
minister. 

διδάσκω, teach, instruct, inform. 
533, 8; 337. 

δίδωμι, give. 534, 4; 337. 

δι-έβαινον, δι-ἐβην. See δια-βαίνω. 

δι-ελαύνω, drive or ride through. 

δι-έρχομαι, come or go through; λόγος 
διῆλθε, α rumor spread through (the 
army). 539, 2; 340. 

δι-έχω, have between, be apart or 
distunt. 508, 16; 340. 

δι-ἤλασε. See δι-ελαύνω. 

δι-ῆλθον. See δι-έρχομει., 

δι ίστημι, set apart; mid., stand 
apart; open the ranks. 534, 5; 
342, 

δίκαιος, -d, -ov, just; ἢ. pl., justice. 

δίκη, -ns, ἡ, justice. 

διό, = δι᾿ 8, on account of which, where- 
Sore. 

δισ-χίλιοι, -αι, -a, ἔσο thousand. 

διφθέρα, -ἀς, ἡ, tanned skin; bag. 





δίφρος, -ov, 6, wagon or chariot 
seat. 

διώκω, pursue, chase, rout an enemy. 
494. 

διώρυξ, -vyos, ἡ, trench, canal. 

δοθῆναι, δοίην. See δίδωμι. 

δοκέω, think, suppose ; δοκεῖ, it seems, 
seems best; τὰ δόξαντα, the things 
which seemed best or were determined 
upon. 509, 3; 337. 

Δόλοψ, -οπος, ὁ, Dolopian. The 
Dolopes lived in the southwestern 
parts of the Pindus range. 

δόξας, δόξω. See δοκέω. 

δορκάς, -άδος, ἡ, gazelle. 

δορπηστός, -οὔ, ὁ, supper-time, even- 
ing. 


| δόρυ, -aros, τό, spear used by the 


Greek hoplite. 
δοῦλος, -ov, ὁ, slave. 
δοῦναι, δούς. See δίδωμι. 


| δονυπέω, -ἥσω, rattle, clash. 


| δρεπανη-φόρος, -ον, scythe-bearing. 


| 


| 














δρέπανον, -ov, τό, scythe. 

δρόμος, -ov, ὁ, a run, race; δρόμῳ, 
with a run, at full speed. 

δύναμαι, am able, can (ws μάλιστα 
ἐδύνατο, as much or as well as he 
could); be worth, valued at. 535, 
5; 887. 

δύναμις, -ews, ἡ, force, ability; mili- 
tary force or strength. 

δυνάστης, -ov, ὁ, man in power, 
officer. 

δυνατός, -7, -όν, able, possible ; 7 
δυνατὸν μάλιστα, as much as pos- 
sible. 

Siw, δύσω, enter; of the sun, set. 
507, 3; 337. 

δύο, two. 

δυσ-πόρευτος, -ov, hard or dificult to 
pass through or along. 

δῶ, δώσω. See δίδωμι. 

δώδεκα, twelve. 

δώρον, -ου, τό, gift. 












































336 ἐκπίπτω 


E. 


édv, if; followed by the subj. 

éavrod, -ἢς, sui, of himself. 

ἐάω, ἐάσω, permit, allow. 

ἐγγύς, comp. ἐγγύτερον or -répw, near. 

ἐγενόμην, ἐγιγνόμην. See γίγνομαι. 

ἐγ-κέλευστος, -ον, bidden, instructed. 

ἐγ-κρατής, -ἔς, in power or powerful 
over. 

ἔγνων. See γιγνώσκω. 

ἐγώ, J. 

ἔγωγε, J for my part, equidem. 

ἔδει, ἐδεῖτο. See δέω. 

ἔδεισαν. See δείδω. 

ἔδωκα. See δίδωμι. 

ἔζων. See ζάω. 

ἐθελοντής, -ov, 6, volunteer; as adj. 
willing. 

ἐθέλω, am willing, choose, desire. 
510, 10; 337. 

ἐθέμην. See τίθημι. 

ἔθνος, -ους, τό, tribe, nation; Kar 
ἔθνη, tribe by tribe. 

el, if, whether; εἰ μή, unless; εἰ δὲ 
μή, but if not. 

ela, εἴασα. See ἐάω. 

εἰδέναι. See οἶδα. 

εἶδον. See ὁράω. 

εἰδῶ, εἰδώς. See οἶδα. 

εἴην, εἴησαν. See εἰμί, 

εἰκάζω, liken unto, conjecture, suppose. 
G. 338. 

εἴκοσι(ν), twenty. 

εἱλόμην, εἷλον. See aipfw. 

εἰμί, am, exist » ἔστι(ν), it is possib’e ; 
ἔστι δ᾽ ὅστις. somebody. 537, 1; 
338. 

εἶμι, go, come. 536, 1; 338. 

εἶπον. See φημί. 

εἴ-περ, if really. 

εἴρηκα. See φημί. 

els, into, against ; with num. as much 
as, about. 

els, ula, ἕν, one. 





εἰσ-άγω, bring into. 

εἰσ-βάλλω, throw into, make an en- 
trance tnto ; of rivers, etc., empty 
into, 

εἰσ-βολή, -ἢς, ἡ, entrance. 

εἴσ-ειμι, come or yo into or in. 

εἰσ-ελαύνω, ride or march into, enter. 

εἰσ-ελθεῖν. See εἰσ-έρχομαι. 

εἰσ-έρχομαι, come into, enter. 

εἰσ-ἤἥειν. See εἴσ-ειμι. 

εἰσ-ήλασα. See εἰσ -ελαύνω. 

εἰσ-ἤχθην. See εἰσ-άγω. 

εἴσομαι, -erat. See οἶδα. 

εἰσ-πηδάω, -ἥσομαι, leap into. 


| εἰσ-πίπτω, fall upon; of an army, 


enter, invade. 

εἴσω, within. 

εἶτα, then, in the next place, thereupon. 

εἶχον. See ἔχω. 

εἴων. See ἐάω. 

ἐκ. See ἐξ. 

ἕκαστος, -7, -ov, each; plur., several. 

ἑκάτερος, -ἃ, -ov, either, each. 

ἑκατέρωθεν, on either or both sides. 

ἑκατέρωσε, in both directions. 

ἑκατόν, one hundred. 

&-BadrAw, throw or drive out, expel. 

ἐκ-δέρω, -depd, skin, fluy. 

ἐκεῖ, there, in that place. 

ἐκεῖνος, -7, -0, that, that one; he, she, 
it. 

ἐκ-καλύπτω, wicover. 

ἐκκλησίᾶ, -as, ἡ, assembly. 

ἐκ-κλίνω, bend out of position; give 
way, flee. 

éx-Kopitw, bring or fetch out. 

ἐκ-κόπτω, cut out, destroy by cutting 
out, 6. 4. trees. 

ἐκ-κυμαίνω, -avd, bend (in any direc- 
tion) like a wave. 

ἐκ-λείπω, leave, abandon, forsake. 

ἐκ- πεπτωκώς. See ἐκ-πίπτω, 

ἐκ-πίνω, drain, drink up. 

ἐκ- πίπτω, fall out, am banished; οἱ 
ἐκπεπτωκότες, the exiles. 





ἐκπλαγείς 337 


ἐκ-πλαγείς. See ἐκ-πλήττω. 

ἐκ-πλήττω, strike owt of one’s senses ; 
terrify, amaze. 

ἐκ- ποδών, out of the way. 

ἐκτώμην. See κτάομαι. 

ἐκ- φέρω, bring out, publish, report. 

ἐκ- φεύγω, fice out of danger, escape. 

ἑκών, -οῦσα, -dv, williny, of one’s own 
accord. 

ἔλαβον. See λαμβάνω. 

ἐλαύνω, drive, ride, march. 

ἐλάφαιος, -ov, of or belonging to a 
deer. 

ἑλεῖν, ἑλέσθαι. See aipéw. 

ἐλελίζω, raise the war-cry. 

ἔλεξα, ἐλέχθην. See λέγω. 

ἐλευθερία, -as, ἡ, freedom. 

ἐλήφθην. See λαμβάνω. 

ἐλθεῖν, ἐλθών. Sve ἔρχομαι. 

ἝΙλλάς, -άδος, ἡ, Greece. 

"EdAny, -nvos, 6, Greek. 

“EdAnvexes, -4, -ὄν, Grecian. 

Ἑλληνικῶς, in the Greek way, in 
Greek. 

“EdAnorovtiaxds, -%, -dv, Helles- 
pontic. 

ἕλοιμι, -oluny, -dpevos. See aipéw. 

ἐλπίς, -idos, ἡ, hope; ἐλπίδας λέγων, 
expressing hopes. 

ἐλῶν. See ἐλαύνω. 

ἐμαυτοῦ, -ῆς, of myself. 

ἐμ-βαίνω, go into, embark. 

ἐμ- βάλλω, throw into; of rivers, flow 
into, empty; ἐ. πληγάς, inflict blows, 
thrash; ἐ. xidév, give fodder (to 
horses); in battle, charge, fall 
upon. 

ἔμεινα. See μένω. 

ἐμός, -ἡ, -dv, my. 

ἐμοῦ. Sve ἐγώ. 

ἔμ-παλιν, backwards, back again. 

ἐμ-πίπλημι, fill, satisfy. 

ἔμ-πλεως, -ων, full. 

ἐμπόριον, -ov, τό, port of trade, 
market. 








ἐξελαύνω 


ἔμ-προσθεν, before, in front. 

ἐν, in, on; ἐν τούτῳ, at this time. 

tv, ἑνός. See εἷς. 

ἔνδεια, -as, ἡ, want, need, lack (of 
provisions). 

ἑν-δέκατος, -7, -ov, eleventh. 

ἐν-δύω, mid. and perf. act., put upon 
one's body. 

év-€Badov. See ἐμ-βάλλω. 

ἐν-εδρεύω, lic in ambush. 

ἔν-ειμι, am tn or on; am in a place, 
am there. 

ἕνεκα, ἕνεκεν, on account of, for the 
sake of. 

ἐνενήκοντα, ninety. 

ἐν-ῆν. See ἔν-ειμι, 

ἔνθα, there, here; where ; thereupon. 

ἔνθεν, thence ; ἔνθεν... ἔνθεν, on this 
side... on that side, on all sides. 

ἑνί, évds. See εἷς. 

ἔνιοι, -ar, -a, some. 

ἐνίοτε, sometimes, occasionally. 

ἐννέα, 27700. 

ἐν-οικέω, inhabit; οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες, the 
inhabitants. 

év-opdw, see in a thing, perceive, dis- 
tinguish. 

ἐνταῦθα, here, there; hereupon, then. 


| ἐντελής, -és, full, complete. 
ἐντεῦθεν, thence, thereupon. 

| ἐν-τίθημι, place on, put on board. 

| ἐντός, within. 


ἐν-τυγχάνω, happen upon, find. 
᾿Εννυάλιος, -ov, ὁ, Enydlius, epithet of 
Ares, as god of destructive warfare. 
ἐξ, with gen., out of, forth, from. 
ἐξ-αγγέλλω, bring out word, report. 
&-dyw, bring or conduct out; induce, 
tempt. 
ἐξ-αιτέω, demand as a right, beg off; 
mid., demand, beg for as a favor. 
ἑξακισχίλιοι, -αι, -a, six thousand. 
ἑξακόσιοι, -αι, -a, six hundred. 
ἐξέβαλον. Sce ἐκ- βάλλω. 


ἐξ-ελαύνω, drive out, march. 























ἐξελθεῖν 338 ἔργον 


ἐξ-ελθεῖν. See ἐξ-έρχομαι. 

ἐξ-έλιπον. See ἐκ-λείπω. 

ἐξ-έρχομαι, come or yo owt, escipe. 

ἐξέτασις, -ews, ἡ, review, examination. 

ἐξ-έφυγον. See ἐκ-φεύγω. 

ἐξ-ῆλθον. See ἐξ-έρχομει. 

ἐξ-ήχθην. See ἐξ- ἄγω. 

ἐξ-ικνέομαι, come as jar as, reach. 

ἐξ-ίστη μι, mid., stand out or away 
Jrom. 

ἕξομεν. See ἔχω. 

ἐξ-οπλίζω, arm fully or completely. 

ἐξοπλισία, -ds, ἡ, the arming or 
equipping of so’diers. 

ἔξω, adv., outside; τὸ ἔξω, the outside 
or outer. 

ἔπαθον. See πάσχω. 

ἐπ-αινέω, -έσω, applaud, praise. 

ἔπεί, conj., when, after ; since (causal). 

ἔπειδάν, vonj. with subj., whenever. 

ἐπειδή, when indeed, after. 

ἔπ-ειμι, I Wpon or Over. 

ἔπ-ειμι, come vgainst, attack, advance. 

ἔπεισα, ἐπείσθην. See πείθω. 

ἔπειτα, thereupon, then, afterwards. 

ἐπ-έλιπον. Sve ἐπι-λείπτω, 

ἐπ-επάμην, -το. See πάομαι., 

ἔπ-ἐστην. See ἐφ-ίστημι, 

ἐπ-ἤἥειν, -ἤεσαν. See ἔπ-ειμι (2). 

ἐπ-ἣν. See ἔπ-ειμι (1). 

ἐπ- ἤνεσαν. See ἐπ-αινέω. 

ἐπί, with gen., on, upon; ἐπὶ τετ- 
τάρων, in fours, four deep; ἐφ᾽ 
ἡμῶν, in our time; with dat. αἱ, 
upon, for (purpose); ἐπὶ τούτῳ, for 
that object; ἐπὶ θανάτῳ, to death ; 
ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ, in the power of, οἷο. ; 
with ace. to, against; ἐπὶ πολύ, toa 
great distance. 

ἐπ-ἰασιίν). See ἔπ-ειμι (2). 

ἐπι- βουλεύω, plot against. 

ἐπιβουλή, -ἢς, ἡ, conspiracy, plot. 

ἐπι-δείκνυμι, show, exhibit. 

ἐπι-διώκω, pursue. 

ἐπι-θεῖναι, ἐπι-θῶ. See ἐπι-τίθημι. 





ἐπι-θυμέω, desire or long for. 

ἐπι-κάμπτω, bend or bring (the wings 
of an army) together. 

ἐπικίνδῦνος, -ov, dangerous. 

ἐπι-κρύπτω, rorcr over, conceal. 

ἐπι-λέγω, “ἐμ in reference to or in 
conneciion with a thing. 

ἐπι-λείπω, /eave, fail, forsake. 

ἐπιμέλεια, -ds, ἡ, care, attention. 

ἐπι- μελέομαι, care for, give attention 
to. 


» , 


ἐπίμπλην. See πίμπλημι. 


> , 


ἐπι-πίπτω, fall upon, attack. 

ἐπίπονος, -ov, laborious, difficult. 

ἐπί-ρ-ρυτος, -ov, well-watered. 

ἐπι-σττίζομαι, lay in provisions. 

ἐπι σϊτισμός, -00, ὁ, ὦ laying in of 
provisions. 

ἐπίσταμαι, know, know how. 535, 6; 
999. 

ἐπι-στήσας. See ἐφ-ίστημι. 

ἐπιστολή, -ἧς, ἡ, letter. 

ἐπι-σφάττω, slay upon or over. 514, 
15; 355. 

ἐπιτήδειος, -d, -ov, suitable, fitting ; 
τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, provisions. 

ἐπι-τίθημι, pluce upon; ἐ. δίκην, inflict 
punishment. 

ἐπι-τρέπω, tin or give over to, allow. 
508, 28; 357. 

ἐπι-τυγχάνω, happen upon, find. 
523, 9; 357. 

ἐπι-φέρω, bring upon; mid., rush 
upon, attack. 

ἐπι-χειρέω, undertake, attempt. 

ἐπι-χωρέω, move upon, advance. 

ἐπ-ιών͵ -otoa, -dv. See ἔπ-ειμι (2). 

ἔπλευσα. See πλέω. 

ἕπομαι, fol/ow. 508, 13; 339. 

ἑπτά, septem, seven. 

ἑἕπτα-κόσιοι, -at, -a, seven hundred. 

᾿Επύαξα, -ns, ἡ, Epijaxa. 

ἐπυθόμην. See πυνθάνομαι. 

ἔργον, -ov, 75, work, action: τὰ εἰς 
τὸν πόλεμον ἔργα, the deeds of war. 





νὰ 839 ζώνη 


ἐρεῖ. See φημί. 

ἔρημος, -ov, deserted, desert ; deprived 
of, without. 

ἐρίζω, strive or contend with. 

ἑρμηνεύς, -έως, ὁ, interpreter. 

ἔρυμα, -ατος, τό, defence, protection. 

ἐρυμνός, -ἡ, -όν, fortified, strong (asa 
fort). 

ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι, 2 aor. ἦλθον, 
come, go. 539, 2; 340. 

ἐρωτάω, -ήσω, ask. 

ἐσϑίω, ἔδομαι, 2 aor. ἔφαγον, eat. 

ἐσοίμην, ἔσται, ἐστέ, ἐστί(ν). See 
εἰμί, 

ἔστε, conj., witil. 

ἕστηκα, ἑστώς, ἔστην. See ἵστημι. 

ἔσχατος, -ἡ, -ov, last, farthest. 

ἔσχον. See ἔχω. 

ἔσωθεν, within; τὸ ἔσωθεν, the inner. 

ἔσωσα. See cafe. 

ἔταξα, érdxOnv. See τάττω. 

ἕτερος, -d, -ov, one or other of two, 
another of two; plur., one or other, or 
another of two divisions, parties, etc. 

ἐτετιμήμην. See tipda. 

ἔτι, yet, yet more; hereafter, after- 
wards, sitll, 

ἕτοιμος, -7, -ov, ready. 

ἔτρωσα. See τιτρώσκω, wound. 

ἔτυχον. Sve τυγχάνω. 

εὖ, adv., well/. 

εὐδαιμονίζω, congratulate. 

εὐδαίμων, -ov, fortunate, prosperous. 

εὐήθεια, -ἄς, ἡ, folly. 

εὐήθης, -ες, foolish. 

εὐθύς, immediately ; εὖ. παῖδες ὄντες, 
immediately from childhood, from 
very chi/dhood. 

εὔνοια, -as, ἡ, good-will. 

εὐνοϊκῶς, with good-will; ev. ἔχειν, 
be we'l disposed, affectionate. 

εὔνοος, -ov, contr. to εὔνους, -ουν, of 
good mind or feeling, well disposed. 

εὑρίσκω, find. 533, 5; 340. 

εὖρος, -ovs, τό, width, breadth. 





εὐταξία, -as, ἡ, good order, arrange- 
ment, discipline. 

εὔ-τολμος, -ov, bold, courageous. 

εὐ-τυχέω, be successful. 

Εἰὐφράτης, the Euphrates. 

εὐχή, -ῆς, ἡ, prayer, wish. 

εὔχομαι, pray, wish earnestly. 

εὐ-ώδης, -es, fragrant. 

εὐ-ώνυμος, -ov, left, left side, left wing 
of an army. 

ἐφάνην. See halve. 

ἔφασαν. See φημί. 

Ἔφεσος, Ephtsus; in Asia Minor at 
the mouth of the Cajster. 

ἐφ-ειστήκεσαν. See ἐφ-ίστημι, 

ἔφην, ἔφη. See φημί. 

ἐφ-ίστημι, ἐπι-στήσω, place or set 
upon or tn ; ἐ. τὸν ἵππον, check, etc. ; 
mid., stavd by or over. 

ἔφυγον. See φεύγω. 

ἐχθρός, -οὔ, 6, personal enemy, foe. 

ἔχω, impf. εἶχον, ἕξω, 2 aor. ἔσχον, 
have, hold; εὐνοϊκῶς é., be kindly 
disposed ; οὕτως €., be so, be in the 
same condition; κακῶς ἐ., be in ἃ 
bad condition, go badly ; ἐχόμενος, 
mid., hold one’s self to, come net. 
508, 16; 340. 

ἕψομαι. See ἕπομαι. 

ἑώρων, ἑώρα. See ὁράω. 

ἕως, ἕω, Attic decl., dawn. 

ἕως, conj., while. 


Z. 


Law, ζήσω, live. 412; 341. 

Levyvipr, fevéiw, join. Lat. jungo. 
528, 5; 341. 

Ζεύς, Διός, Zeus, the king of gods and 
men. 

tiv. See ζάω. 

ζηλωτός, -%, -dv, enviable, one to be 
envied, 

ζώνη, -ns, ἡ, zone, girdle, belt; εἰς 
ζώνην, for pin-money. 





ἤ 940 θνήσκω 


Η. 


is « αι δεν... 

ἤ, than. 

ἢ, veri/y, certainly. 

ἧ. See 6, ἡ, τό. 

q See ὅς ἥ, ὅ. 

q See εἰμί, 

ἠγάσθην. See ἄγαμαι. 

ἡγεμών, -όνος, ὁ, leader, guide; com- 
mander. 

ἡγέομαι, -ἥσομαι, lead, command ; 
think, deem. 

ἤδειν. See οἶδα. 

ἡδέως, sweetly, gladly. 

ἤδη, now, already, at length. 

ἡδύς, -εἴα, -ύ, comp. ἡδέων, sweet. 

ἥδομαι, ἡδήσομαι, ἥσθην, am pleased. 

ἤειν, ἤεσαν. See εἶμι, go. 

ἤθελον. See ἐθέλω. 

ἥκιστα, adv., least, least of all. 

ἥκω, ἥξω, am come, have arrived. 

HAaca, ἤλαυνον. See ἐλαύνω. 

ἦλθον. See ἔρχομαι, 

ἠλί-βατος, -ov, impassible, precipitous. 

ἡλικία, -ds, ἡ, time of life, age. 

ἡλικιώτης, -ov, ὁ, an equal in years ; 
companion. 

ἥλιος, -ouv, ὁ, sawn. 

ἡμεῖς, plur. of ἐγώ, we. 

ἠμελημένως, careless’ y. 

ἡμέρα, -as, ἡ, day. 

ἡμέτερος, -d, -ov, our. 

ἡμί-βρωτος, -ov, half-eaten. 

ἡμι-δάρεικόν, -οῦὔ, τό, half-daric. 

ἡμι-δεής, -ἔς, half-empty, half-full. 

ἡμι-όλιος, -d, -ον, as substant., one 
and one-half, a half more. 

ἥμισυς, -εἰα, -v, ha/f; as substant., a 
half. 

ἡμι-ωβόλιον, -ov, τό, a half obol. 

hv, = ἐάν, if, with subjunct. 

ἦν. See εἰμί. 

ἠνεσχόμην. See ἀνέχω. 

ἡνίκα, conj., when. 


jvl-oxos, -ov, ὁ, driver of a wagon or 
chariot. 

ἥξειν, ἥξοιμι. See ἥκω. 

ἧπερ. See ὅσπερ. 

ἠρξάμην, ἠρχόμην. See ἄρχω. 

ἠρόμην, ἠρώτων. See ἐρωτάω. 

ἦσαν. See εἰμί, 

ἠσθανόμην, ἠσθόμην. See αἰσθά- 
νομαι. 

ἥσθην. See ἥδομαι. 

ἡσυχῇ, Quietly, nvise/essly. 

ἡττάομαι, -ἥσομαι, be conquered. 

ηὐχόμην. See εὔχομαι. 

ηὗρον. See εὑρίσκω. 


9. 


θ᾽, for τέ, by elision before an initial 
rough vowel. 

θάλαττα, -ης, ἡ, sea. 

θάνατος, -ου, 6, death. 

| θαρραλέως, boldly, fearlessly. 
Bappéw wm of good courage, have no fear. 

| Oapptve, give encouragement, cheer. 

| θάττων, comp. of ταχύς, which see. 

| θαυμάζω, -άσομαι, wonder, admire. 

θαυμαστός, -7), -dv, wonderful. 

Θαψακηνός, -of, ὁ, inhabitant of 
Thapsacus. 

θεάομαι, -dooua, behold, see, view. 

θεῖν. See θέῳ, run. 

θεῖος, -a, -ov, miraculous, marvellous. 

θέμενος, θέντες. See τίθημι. 

θεός, -οὔ, ὁ, deity, god. 

θεραπεύω, serve, provide or care for. 

θεράπων, -ovros, ὁ, servant. 

θέσθαι. See τίθημι. 

Θέτταλος, -ov, ὁ, Thessalian. 

θέω, run. 

θεωρέω, view, review, e.g. an army. 

θηράω, -dow, hunt wild animals. 

θηρεύω, go on a hunt, hunt. 

| θηρίον, -ov, τό, wild animal. 

| θνήσκω, dic. 530, 4; 342. 











ϑόρυβος 841 κακός 


θόρυβος, -ov, ὁ, noise. 

Θρᾷξ, Θράκός, 6, Thracian. 

θύρα, -ds, 7, gate, door. 

θύω, θύσω, sacrifice. 504, 2; 342. 
θώραξ, -axos, ὁ, breastplate. 


i 


Ldopat, -dooua, dress or heal a 
wound, 

larpds, -o0, ὁ, physician. 

ἰδεῖν, ἰδών. See dpaw, see. 

ἴδιος, -ὦ, -ov, private; els τὸ ἴδιον, for 
private use. 

ἰδιώτης, -ov, ὁ, a@ private person, pri- 
vate soldier. 

ἱδρόω, sweat. 

ἴεμαι, ἵεντο. See ἴημι. 

ἰέναι, ἴω, ἰών. See εἶμι. 

ἱερός, -d, -dv, sacred; τὰ ἱερά, the 
omens indicated by the sacrifices. 

ἵἴημι, send, throw; mid., send one’s 
self, rush. 534, 3; 342. 

ἱκανός, -7, -dv, enough, able. 

᾿Ικόνιον, -ov, Iconium, a city of 
Phrygia. 

ἔλη, -ns, ἡ, troop, chiefly of horse, 
probably sixteen front and four 
deep. 

ἵνα, conj., with subj. or opt., in 
order that. 

ἰόντος, ἰόντων, etc. See εἶμι. 

ἱππεύς, -έως, ὁ, horseman ; plur., cav- 
alry. 

ἱππικός, -ἡ, -ὄν, of cavalry; τὸ 
ἱππικόν, the cavalry. 

ἱππό-δρομος, -ov, ἡ, horse-race. 

ἵππος, -ov, ὁ, horse; ἀπὸ ἵππου, on 
horseback. 

ἴσος, -ἡ, τον, equal; ἐν ἴσῳ, in an 
even line, with equal step. 

Ἴσσοί, -ῶν, ol, Jssus, in eastern 
Cilicia, at the northeast corner of 
the Mediterranean. 








| ἴστε. See ofSa. 


ἵστημι, set, make stand, halt, stop; 
mid. and 2 aor, act., stand. 534, 
5; 342. 


| ἱστίον, -ov, τό, sail. 


loxupds, -d, -dv, strong. 

ἰσχυρῶς, mighti/y, very. 

ἰσχύς, -vos, ἡ, Vis, strength. 

ἰχθύς, -vos, ὁ, fish. 

ἴχνος, -ous, τό, trace, track. 

*Iwvid, -as, ἡ, Jonia, the most central 
part of Asia Minor. 

᾿Ιωνικός, -7, -dv, Jonian. 


K. 


καθ᾽, by elision for κατά, before a 
rough vowel. 

καθ-έζομαι, impf. ἐκαθεζόμην, sit down, 
halt, rest. 

καθ-εύδω, lie down, sleep. 510, 8; 
343. 

καθ-ηδυ-παθέω, squander or waste in 
luxury. 

καθ-ήκω, come down, extend down; 
belong to as a duty. 

κάθ-ημαι, sit down, sit; of an army, 
am stationed. 537, 2; 341 (Fuac). 

καθ-ίστημι, set down, place, arrange, 
of forces; mid., with 2 aor. act., 
take one’s place, be established, be 
settled. 534, 5; 342. 

καθ-οράω, κατ-εἶδον, see fully, ex- 
amine, 5530. 4; 350. 

καί, que, and, even, also; with 
partic., although; καί. .. καί, τέ 

. kal, both. . . and. 

καί-περ, with partic., although. 

καιρός, -o0, ὁ, occasion, particular 
moment. 

καί-τοι, conj., and assuredly, and 
yet. 

καίω, κἄω, burn. 520, 1; 348. 

κακός, -7, -όν, bad, base, cowardly. 











κακοῦργος 


κακοῦργος, -ov, ὁ, evil-duer. 

κακῶς, badly, i/l; x. mo:éw, harm, 
wrong; Kk. ἔχω, am in a bad con- 
dition ; x. πράττω, fure bud Ye 

κάλαμος, -ov, ὁ, reed. 

καλέω, cull, name, call to one’s self, 
summon, 504, 5; 343. 

καλλωπισμός, -οὔ, ὁ, ornament, adorn- 
ment, 

καλός, -7, -dv, beautiful ; of omens, 
Javorable. 

καλώς, beautifully, well; x. πράττω, 
succeed ; x. ἔχω, am all right, 

kav, by crasis for καὶ dv. 

κάνδυς, -vos, ὁ, a Persian coat, of wool 
or silk, purple-colored, buttoning 
over the breast, and furnished with 
loose sleeves, reaching to the 
fingers. 

καπηλεῖον, -ov, τό, booth, shop. 

καπίθη, -ns, ἡ, cupithe, a Persian 
measure, equal to 24 choenics or 
2.3 litres. 

Καππαδοκία, -ds, ἡ, Cappadocia, a 
province of eastern Asia Minor, 
north ef the Taurus mountains. 

κάρφη, -ης, ἡ, hay. 

κατά, with gen., down from, down ; 
with acc., down along, «along, 
against ; κατὰ γῆν, by land; κατ᾽ 
ἔθνη, nation by nation; κατὰ χώ- 
pav, in the proper place. 

κατα-βαίνω, come or go down, descend, 
dismount. 519, 7; 333. 

κατ-αγάγοι. See kat-dyw. 

κατα-γελάω, laugh at, mock ; exrit. 

κατ-άγω, 2 aor. κατ-ἤγαγον, Jevd or 
bring down or back. 508 6: 330. 

κατα-δύω, sink (trans.). 507, 3; 337. 

κατα-θεάομαι, -ἄσοιαι, gaze down 
upon, look out towards. 

κατα-καίνω, -xavd, slay, put to death. 
518, 7; 343. 

κατα-καίω or -κάω, burn down, de- 
stroy by fire. 520, 1; 343. 


54 





ye κατιδεῖν 


κατα-κεκόψεσθαι. See κατα-κόπτω. 

κατα-κόπτω, cut down, cut to picces. 
513, 9; 344. 

κατα-λαμβάνω, seize, take possession 
of, catch. 523, 5; 346. 

kata-Acitrw, dewve Lehind, leave. SII, 
7; 346. 

κατα-λεύω, s/one to death. 

κατα-ληφ-, -ληψ-. See κατα-λαμ- 
βάνω. 

κατα-λιπών. See κατα-λείπω. 

κατ-αλλάττω, reconcile ; pass , am rec- 
onciled. 514, 1; 331. 

κατα-λύω, of an army, break ranks, 
rest, halt; x. πρός, break up hostili- 
ties, make peace with. 

κατα-μανθάνω, learn well. 523, 7; 
347. 

κατα-νοέω, consider or watch carefully. 

κατα-πέμπω, send down, i.e. from 
the interior to the sea-coast. 

κατα-πετρόω, stone to deuth. 

κατα-πηδάω, -ἥσομαι, /eap down. 

κατα-πράττω, do well, accomplish. 
514, 6; 353. 

κατα-σκέπτομαι, vic’, examine. 513, 
15; 354. 

κατα-σκευάζω, fit vut, equip, improve. 

κατα-σπάω, -σπάσω, draw down. 

κατα-στήσομαι, -cw. See καθ- 
ίστημι. 

κατα-στρέφω, over-iurn, subdue. 508, 
26; 355. 

κατα-τίθημι, lay down, deposit, put 
away, 6. g. a treasure. 

κατα-φανής, -és, gen. -οὖς, visible. 

κατα-φεύγω, flee for refuge. 511, 15; 
358. 

κατ-έβην. See κατα-βαίνω. 

κατ-εθέλμην. See κατα-τίθημι. 

κατ- ἐλήφθην. See κατα-λαμβάνω. 

kat-epyafouat, do thoroughly, ἀοου,ι- 
plish. 359; 339. 

κατ-έστην. See καθ-ίστημι, 

κατ-ιδεῖν. See καθ-οράω. 











καῦμα 343 λέξων 


καῦμα, -ατος, τό (καίω), heat. 

Kavorpov πεδίον, pluin of the Cay- 
ster, 2 populous spot in Phrygia. 

Kdw. See kalo. 

κέγχρος, -ov, ὁ, panic, a small grain 
valued as a food. 

κεῖμαι, lie, lie fallen. 482; 178. 

κέκτημαι. See κτάομαι. 

Κελαιναί, -ὧν, ai, Celéne, in 
Phrygia. 

κελεύω, order, bid, command. 

κενός, -ἤ, -dv, empty; foll. by gen., 
without. 
Κεράμων ἀγορά, -as, ἡ, Ceramon 
agora, a market-town in Phrygia. 
κεράννυμι, mix, usually wine and 
water. 525, 1; 343. 

κέρας, -a7os, or -ws, τό, horn, wing of 
an army. 

Kepdadéos, -ἄ, -ov, gainful. 

κέρδος, -ous, τό, gain; pay, wages. 

κεφαλή, -ἧς, ἡ, head. 

Κιλικία, -ds, ἡ, Cilicia, the south- 
eastern province of Asia Minor. 

Κιλιξ, -ἰκος, ὁ, a Cilician. 

Κίλισσα, -ης, ἡ, Cilician woman. 

κινδυνεύω, crcur danger. 

klySwvos, -ov, ὁ, danger. 

κνημίς, -ἶδος, ἡ, greave, leggin, worn 
to protect the lower part of the leg, 
and made usually of metal lined 
with some soft material. 

Κολοσσαί, -ῶν, ai, Colossae, in Phry- 
gia, seat of the church to which 
Paul wrote the ‘‘ Epistle to the 
Colossians.” 

κονι-ορτός, -οὔ, ὁ, cloud of dust. 

κόπρος, -ov, ὁ, dung. 

Koo péw, -ἥσω, arrange, adorn. 

κόσμος, -ov, ὁ, arrangement, adorn- 
ment, 

κοῦφος, -7, -ov, light, 7. ὁ. not heavy. 

κράνος, -ous, τό, helmet. 

κρατέω, -ἥσω, am superior, conquer. 

κράτιστος. See κρείττων. 





κράτος, -ous, τό, strength, power ; 
κατὰ κράτος, with all one’s strength. 

κραυγή, -7s, ἡ, shout. 

κρέας, κρέως, τό, flesh, meat. 

κρείττων, κράτιστος, comp. and sup. 
of ἀγαθύς, superior, better, stronger, 
higher in rank. 

κρεμάννῦμι, hang wp, suspend. 525. 
2; 345. 

κρήνη, -7s, ἡ, spring of water; foun 
tain. 

Κρής, Κρητός, ὁ, a Cretan. 

Kpt6n, -ἧς, 7, usually plur., barley. 

κρίνω, judye. 519, 2; 345. 

κρίσις, -ews, ἡ, trial. 

κρύπτω, hide, conceal. 513, 10; 345. 

κτάομαι, acquire. 465, a; 345. 

κύκλος, -ου, ὁ, circle. 

κυκλόω, encircle, surround. 

κύκλωσις, -Ews, ἡ, ὦ surrounding, an 
encircling. 

Kipevos, -a, -ov, Cyréan, belonging to 
Cyrus. Ὁ 

κωλύω, prevent, hinder. 

κώμη, -η5, ἡ, village, 


A. 


λαβεῖν, -o1, -dv. See λαμβάνω. 

λαθεῖν. See λανθάνω. 

λάθρα or λάθρᾳ, secretly, without the 
knowledge of. 

«Λακεδαιμόνιος, -ov, ὁ, Spartan. 

λαμβάνω, take, captwre, obtain. 523, 
5; 346. 

λαμπρότης, -ητος, ἡ, brightness, splen- 
dor. 

λανθάνω, escape the knowledge or 
notice of; toll. by suppl. partic. 
523 6; 346. 

λέγω, sry, speak 508 190; 346. 

λείπω, Jerve. £41, 7; 346. 

λέξων, fut. act. part. of λέγω. 








λευκοθώραξ 344 


λευκο-θώραξ, -ἄκος, ὁ, having a white 
breast-armor or corselet. 

λευκός, -ἡ, -dv, bright, white. 

ληφθῆναι, λήψομαι. See λαμβάνω. 

λίθος, -ov, ὁ, stone. 

λῖμός, -οὔ, ὁ, hunger. 

λόγος, -ου, ὁ, word, rumor, argument. 

λόγχη, -η5, ἡ, spear-head, spear. 

λόφος, -ου, ὁ, hill, height. 

Aoxayld, -ds, ἡ, a captaincy. 

Aox-ayds, -οῦ, ὁ, captain. 

λόχος, -ov, ὁ, company of soldiers, 
consisting of 100 men. 

Λυδία, -ds, ἡ, Lydia, the west cen- 
tral province of Asia Minor. 

Λύδιος, -d, -ov, Lydian. 

Λύκαια (ἱερά), the Lycian rites, 
celebrated by the Arcadians each 
spring in honor of Zeus, on the 
Lycian range. 

λυμαίνομαι, λύμανοῦμαι, ruin, spoil. 

λυπέω, pain, grieve. 


M. 


pa, nay, surely; μὰ τοὺς θεούς, nay, 
surely, by the gods, 

Μαίανδρος, -ov, ὁ, the Maeander river. 

μακαριστός, -7), -dv, made happy; en- 
viable. 

μακρός, -d, -dv, long. 

μάλα, comp. μᾶλλον, sup. μάλιστα, 
very, exceedingly ; comp. rather ; 
sup. most especially, most, best. 

μανθάνω, learn. 

μάντις, -ews, ὁ, prophet, soothsayer. 

Μαρσύας, -ου, ὁ, Marsyas, the Mérsyas 
river. 

μαστός, -οὔ, ὁ, the breast. 

μάχαιρα, -ds, ἡ, dagyer, with only 
one edge sharp, the dull edge being 
straight, the sharp one curved; 
this weapon was worn at the belt. 





μεταπέμπω 


μάχη, -ης, ἡ, battle, fight. 

μάχομαι, fight, fight with. 510, 11; 
347. 

μέ, μ᾽, μοῦ, μοί. See ἐγώ. 

μεγάλη. See μέγας. 

μεγαλο-πρεπῶς, in a courtly or mag- 
nificent way. 

Μεγαρεύς, -éws, ὁ, a Megarian. 

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, great, large; 
τὸ μέγιστον, chiefly. 

μεθ᾽, by elision for μετά, before a 
rough vowel. 

μείζων, larger, greater ; comp. of μέγας. 

μεῖναι, aor. inf. act. of μένω. 

μείων, comp. of pixpds, less, worse; 
μεῖον ἔχειν, be worsted. 

μελανία, -ds, ἡ, blackness, black object. 

μέλει, fut. μελήσει, it is a care, it con- 
cerns ; ἐμοὶ μελήσει, it will be my 
care. 

μελετηρός, -c, -dv, assiduous or studi- 
ous in practising. 

μελίνη, -ης, ἡ, millet, panic, usually 
plur. 

μέλλω, intend, am likely, am about to. 

pév, postpos. particle, on the one 
hand, indeed ; reg. foll. by an ad- 
versative dé. 

pév-ror, but yel, however. 

μένω, aor. ἔμεινα, remain. 

μέρος, -ous, τό, part, portion. 

μεσ-ημβρία, -as, ἡ, mid-day ; south. 

μέσος, -ἡ, -ov, middle; τὸ μέσον, the 
middie. 

μεστός, -ἡ, -dv, full. 

μετά, with gen. or acc.; with gen., 
with; μετὰ ἀδικίας, with, by means 
of, injustice ; with acc., after. 

μετα-μέλει, poenitet, it repenis; μ 
σοι, you repent, 

μεταξύ, between. 

μετά-πεμπτος, sent after. 

μετα-πέμπω, send after; mid., send 
after to come to myself. 508, 21; 
351, 











μετέωρος 945 ὀβολός 


μετέωρος, -ov, in mid uir, raised from 
the ground. 

μέχρι, up to, as fur as, until. 

μή, as conj., with subj. or opt., chat 
not, lest; as adv., not ; ὅποι μή, ex- 
cept where ; εἰ μή, unless. 

μηδέ, nor, ne... quidem, not 
even. 

μηδείς, not even one, no one. 

Μηδία, -as, ἡ, Media, the country 
lying north and east of the Tigris 
river. 

μη-κ-έτι, not again, no longer. 

μῆκος, -ous, τό, length. 

μήν, adv., vero, in truth, however, 
yet, 

μήν, μηνός, ὁ, month. 

μή-ποτε, 7,-ἐ 7. 

μήτε, and not; μήτε. .. μήτε, neither 

. 207°. 

μήτηρ, -τρός, ἡ, mother. 

Μίδας, -ου, 6, Midas. 

μῖκρός, -d, -dv, small; μῖκρόν, adv. 
acc., narrowly. 

Μιλήσιος, -fa, -ον, Milesian. 

Μέλητος, -ov, ἡ, Milétws, an Ionian 
city. 

μιμνήσκω, remind; perf. mid., re- 
member. 530, 6; 348. 

μισθο-ϑότης, -ov, ὁ, pay-giver, pay- 
master. 

μισθός, -οὔ, ὁ, pay, wages. 

μισθο-φόρος, -ου, ὁ, serving for pay, 
mercenary. 

μισθόω, hire. 

μνᾶ, -ἂς, ἡ, mina, = 100 drachmae, 
εἰς of a talent, a little less than 
$20. 

μόνος, -7, -ov, alone, only. 

pupids, -ddos, ἡ, myriad, 10,000. 

μύριος, -d, -ov, 10,000. 

Micros, -d, -ov, Mysian. Mysia lay 
in the northwest part of Asia Mi- 
nor. 

Muesds, -οὔ, ὁ, same as the preceding. 





N. 


vav-apxos, -ov, ὁ, ship commander, 
admiral. 

ναῦς, ve-ws, ἡ, παν δ, ship. 

γαντικός, -7), -dv, naval. 

νέος, -d, -ov, NOVUS, young. 

γεφέλη, -ης, ἡ, cloud. 

νεώς, νεῶν. See ναῦς. 

νή, adv., of swearing, yea by; νὴ Δία, 
yea, by Zeus. 

vij-es. See vais. 

vikdw, conquer. 

νίκη, -ἡς, ἡ, victory. 

νομίζω, suppose, believe, think. 

νόμος, -ov, ὁ, custom. 

νόος (νοῦς), -dov (-00), ὁ, mind. 

νύκτ-ες, etc. See νύξ. 

νῦν, nuNC, vow. 

νύξ, νυκτός, ἡ, niyht; μέσαι νύκτες, 


midnight. 


ἘΞ 


"Ξενίας, -ov, ὁ, Xénias. 

ξενικός, -%, -όν, of τπεγοοπαγίεβ ; τὸ 
£., the mercenary army. 

ξένος, -ov, ὁ, guest-friend, mercenary. 

ἘΞενοφῶν, -Gvros, ὁ, Xénophon. 

ξύλινος, -7, -ov, wooden. 

ξύλον, -ov, τό, wood, piece of wood. 


O. 


ὃ, 4, τό, the article, the; ὁ μὲν. .. 
ὁ δέ, he (this) on the one hand... 
he (that) on the other ; ὁ δέ, he, how- 
ever; freq. poss., 6.9. πρὸς τὸν 
ἀδελφόν, before his brother; freq. 
— those who, e.g. τοὺς ἐκπεπτωκότας, 
THOSE WHO had been exiled. 

&. See Ss. ὅτι. See ὅστις. 

ὀβολός, -ov, ὁ, obol, about 34 cents. 











ὅδε 


ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, this. 
ὁδός, -οὔ, ἡ, way, route, journcy. 
ὅθεν, whence. 
oi, the; seed. οἵ, see ὅς. ol, encl., 
see ov. 
οἶδα, 7 know; perf. with a pres. 
meaning ; χάριν οἶδα, am grateful. 
491 ; 178. 
οἴκαδε, homeward. 
οἰκέω, inhabit ; πόλις οἰκουμένη, a city 
well-inhabited. 
οἰκο-δομέω, build (house, palace, ete.). 
οἴκοι, at hoine ; οἱ οἴκοι, those at home. 
olko-vdpos, -ov, ὁ, housekeeper, stew- 
ard, 
οἰκτείρω, pity. 
οἶμαι, think ; often parenthetic, me- 
thinks. 
οἶνος, -ov, ὁ, vinum, WINE. 
οἴομαι, think, suppose. 510, 16 ; 349. 
οἷος, -d, -ov, qualis, of whut or which 
kind or nature. 
οἷοσ-περ, -ἅ-περ, -ov-rep, of just 
which kind or nature. 
oitives. See ὅστις. 
οἴχομαι, am youe. 5:0, 17; 349. 
éxvéw, hesitute, am reluctant. 
ὀκτακόσιοι, -ai, -a, eiyht hundred. 
ὀκτώ, eiyht. 
ὄλεθρος, -ov, ὁ, destruction. 
ὀλίγος, -n, -ov, small, little (in quan- 
tity) ; plur., few; ὀλίγου (δεῖν), al- 
most. 
ὁλκάς, -ddos, ἡ, freight-vessel, mer- 
chantman. 
ὅλος, -η, -ov, whole, entire. 
ὁμο-τράπεζος, adj. used as noun, 
του, ὁ, table-companion. 
ὁμοῦ, together. 
ὅμως, οἱ the same time, nevertheless. 
ὅν. See ὅς. 
ὄνομα, -ατος, τό, name. 
ὄνος, -ov, 6, ass; ὅ. ἀλέτης, mill- 
stone. 
ὄντ-ος, -es, etc. See εἰμί. 





346 ὅτι 


ὅ- πῃ, whither, in what way or diree- 
tion. 
ὄπισθεν, from behind, in the rear. 
ὁπλίζω, arm, put on armor. 
ὁπλίτης, -ov, ὁ, heavy-armed soldier, 
hoplite. 
ὅπλον, -ov, τό, plur. τὰ ὅπλα, armor, 
arms, 
ὁπόσος, -ἡ, -ov, how large soever ; 
plur., how many soever. 
ὁπότε, whenever, when (indefinite). 
ὅπου, wherever ; ὅπου μή, except where. 
ὅπως, conj., in order that ; adv., in 
whatever way. 
δράω, sec. 539, 4; 350. 
ὀργή, -ἢ 5, ἡ, anger, 
ὀργίζω, make angry. 
ὀργνιά, -ds, ἡ, futhom, six Jeet. 
ὄρθιος, -id, -ov, steep, 
ὀρθῶς, right! y. 
ὁρμάω, start, rush; mid., start, set 
out from. 
δρμέω, lie at anchor. 
ὄρος, -ous, τό, mountain. 
ὀρυκτός, -%, -Ov, dug. 
ὀρύττω, dig. 514, 4; 350. 
᾿Ορχομένιος, -ov, ὁ, Orchomenian. 
, Orchomenos was located in the east 
part of Arcadia. 
ὅς, 4, 8, who, which; οὗ, as adv., 
where; ἣ δυνατὸν μάλιστα, as well 
or strictly as possible. 
ὅσος, -7, -ον, quantus, how much or 
great; plur., as many as; πάντες 
ὅσοι, all who; with numerals, ὅσον, 
just about. 
ὅσοσ-περ, -η-περ, τον- περ, just as 
much or many as. 
ὅσ.-τις, ἥ-τις, ὅ-τι, whoever, which- 
ever, whatever. 
ὅταν, whenever. 
ὅτε, when. 
ὅτι, conj. that, because; with the 
superlat., intensive, e.g. ὅτι πλεί- 
στους, as many as possible, 














6 τι 84 


ὅτι, ὅτου, ὅτῳ. See ὅστις. 

οὐ, οὐκ, οὐχ, not (denying a fact) ; οὐκ 
ἔφασαν ἰέναι, they refused to go. 

ov. See ὅς. 

οὗ, ol, & encl., sui, sibi, se, of him- 
self or herself, etc. 

οὐδαμοῦ, nowhere. 

οὐδέ, οὐδ᾽, and not, nor; =ne... 
quidem, not even. 

οὐδ-είς, οὐδε-μία, nobody, no (adj.), 
οὐδ-έν, nothing. 

οὐκ. See ov. 

οὐκ-έτι, no longer. 

οὐκοῦν, nonne, not therefore ? 

οὖν, accordingly, however, be that as 
it may. 

οὔ-ποτε, 2-cver. 

οὔ-πω, not yet. 

οὐ-πώ-ποτε, not yet at any time, never 
before. 

ots. See ὅς. 

οὖσα, οὖσιν. See εἰμί. 

οὔτε, nor; οὔτε. .. οὔτε, neither... 
ἸΟΥ͂, 

οὗτινος. See ὅστις. 

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, this, that; καὶ 
ταῦτα, and that too. 

ottoo-t, this... here. 

vita(s), thus. 

ὀφείλω, owe; pass., owed, due. 518, 
12; 350. 

ὄφελος, τό, use, advantage. 

ὀφϑαλμός, -οὔ, ὁ, eye. 

ὀχυρός, -d, -dv (ἔχω), tenable; of a 
stronghold, fortified. 


II. 


παθεῖν. See πάσχω. 

πάθος, -ους, τό, treatment. 

παιανίζω, sing a paean or war-song. 
“παιϑδεύω, educate. 

mais, παιδός, ὁ or ἡ, child; boy, girl. 


ι 





πάρειμι 


παίω, strike. 505, 12; 350. 

πάλαι, long ago. 

πάλιν, back, again. 

παλλακίς, -idos, ἡ, mistress. 

παλτόν, -οὔ, τό, javelin, Persian spear, 
light and easily handled 

πᾶν. See πᾶς. 

παντά-:. ἄσιί(ν), wholly. 

πάντῃ, on all sides, altogether. 

παντοδαπός, -7, -dv, of every kind. 

παντοῖος, -a, -ov, of every kind, va- 
rious, manifold. 

πώνυ, wholly, very. 

παρά, BESIDE: (a) with gen., from 
(beside); (2) with dat., beside, at ; 
(c) with acc., fo (the side of) ; 
against, ὦ. 6. contrary to, 6. (. 
περὶ τὰς σπονδάς. 

παρ-αγγέλλω, pass the word along, 
order, summon. 

παρα-γίγνομαι, become by the side of, 
arrive. 

παράδεισος, -ov, ὁ, park (Persian). 

tmap-atvéw, advise ; exhort. 

παρα-καλέω, call to my side, invite. 

παρα-κελεύομαι, bid, urge, encourage. 

παρ-αμ-:ίβω, change; mid., change 
(a line of battle) for one’s self. 

παρα-μηρίδιον, -ov, τό, adj. used 
subst., thigh-piece (of armor). 

παρα-πλήσιος, -id, -ov, OF -ος, -Ὸν, 
similar. 

παρασάγγης, -ov, ὁ, perasang (Pers.), 
= 30 stadia, 54 kilometers, a little 
more than 3 miles, league. 

παρα-σκευάζω, mid., prepare, make 
ready. 

παρασκευή, -ἧς, ἡ, preparation. 

παρα-τάττω, arrange in line (for 
battle). 

παρα-τείνω, stretch along, extend. 

παρ-εγενόμην, -ετο. See mapaylyvo- 
par. 

πάρ-ειμι, am by or on hand, am 
present ; arrive. 




















παρελαύνω 948 πιστός 


παρ-ελαύνω, march or drive by or 
past. 

παρ-έρχομαι͵ go along, past or through. 

map-erérato. See παρα-τείνω. 

παρ-έχω, furnish ; cause. 
παρ-ἤλασα. See παρ-ελαύνω. 
παρ-ῆλθον. See παρ-έρχομαι. 
παρ-ἣν. See πάρ-ειμι. 

πάρ-οδος, -ov, ἡ, way by passage, 
pass, 

Παρράσιος, -ov, ὁ, Purrhasian. Par- 
rhasia was in southwest Arcadia. 

παρ-ών. See πάρ-ειμι. 

πᾶς, every, all, 

πάσχω, suffer; εὖ π., enjoy. 533,11; 
351. 

πατήρ, -τρός, ὁ, father. 

πατρίς, -idos, ἡ, father’and. 

πατρῷος, -d, -ον, paternal, hereditary. 

παύω, stop; mid., cease. 505, 17. 

πεδίον, -ov, τό, plain. 

melds, -7, -όν, of infantry; subst. 
Joot-soldier, plur. infantry ; πεζῇ, 
on foot. 

πείθω, persuade ; mid. and pass., be- 
lieve, obey. 511, 8; 351. 

πεινάω, am hungry. 

πεῖρα, -ds, ἡ, experience, acquaintance. 

πειράω, -dow, mid., try. 

πείσας, πεισθείς. See πείθω. 

πείσομαι. See πάσχω and πείθω. 

πελάζω, draw near, approach. 

Πελοποννήσιος, -d, -ov, Pelopon- 
nesian. 

Πελοπόννησος, -ov, ἡ, Peloponnese, 
that part of Greece which is south 
of the Isthmus of Corinth. 

πελταστής, -ov, ὁ, peltast, a soldier 
armed with a spear (ἀκόντιον) about 
44 feet long, a sword, and a small 
wooden shield (πέλτη) covered 
with leather. 

πελταστικός, -%, -dv, of peltasts ; 
subst., force of peltasts, targeteers. 

πέλτη, -75, ἡ, pelta. See πελταστής. 





πέμπω, send. 508, 21; 351. 

πεντακόσιοι, -αι, -a, five hundred. 

πέντε, five. 

πεντε-καί-δεκα, fificen. 

πεντήκοντα, fifty. 

πέπτωκα, -κώς. See πίπτω. 

πέραν, on the other side, across. 

πέρδιξ, -ixos, ὁ, partridge. 

περί, around ; with gen., about, con- 
cerning ; π. παντός (or πολλοῦ) ποι- 
εἶσθαι, to consider as all (or very) 
important; with dat., about, with 
the idea of place where ; with ace., 
about, concerning. 

περι-γίγνομαι, become around, pre- 
vail over. 

περί-ειμι, get the upper hand, surpass. 

περι-έχω, surround. 

περι-ἣν. See περί-ειμι. 

περι-πεσεῖν. See περι-πίπτω, 

περι-πίπτω, full round about, em- 
brace. 

περι-πλέω, sail arownd. 

περι-πτύσσω, fold round about, sur- 
round, enfold. 

περι-ρ-ρέω, flow round about. 

περιστερά, -ἂς, ἡ, dove. 

Πέρσης, -ov, 6, a Persian. 

Περσικός, -ἡ, -όν, Persian. 

πέτομαι, fly. 508, 23; 351. 

πέτρα, -ds, ἡ, rock, rocky cliff. 

πηγή, -7s, ἡ, source, of a river. 

πηλός, -οὔ, ὁ, mud. 

πιέξζω, press, bring into distress. 

πίμπλημι, pleo, fill. 534, 7; 352. 

πίπτω, fall. 506, 4; 352. 

Πισίδης, -ov, ὁ, a Pisidian. Pisidia 
was a district of Asia Minor, south 


of Phrygia, and bordering on the 
7D ᾽ δ ᾿ 


Mediterranean. 
πιστεύω, trust, have confidence in. 
πίστις, -ews, ἡ, trust, confidence, 
pledge. 
πιστός, -ἡ, -dv, trusty; τὰ πιστά, 


pledges. 

















πιστότης 


πιστότης, -ητος, ἡ, fuithfulness. 

πλάγιος, -ἰὰ, -ov, ob/ique; εἰς πλάγιον, 
obliquely, sideways. 

πλαίσιον, -ov, τό, rectangle ; square. 

πλανάομαι, wander. 

πλεθριαῖος, -id, -ov, of a plethrum 
(100 feet) in length or width. 

πλέθρον, -ov, τό, plethrum, 30.83 me- 
ters, a little more than 101 feet. 

“πλείων, πλέων, πλεῖστος. See πολύς. 

πλέω, sail. 512,8. 352. 

πλέων, πλέον. See πολύς. 

πληγή, -75, ἡ, Plaga, blow. 

πλῆθος, -ovs, τό, multitude, extent, 
number. 

πλήθω, am full; ἀγορὰ πλήθουσα, 
market-time. 534, 7. 

πλήν, prep., except; conj., except 
that. 

πλήρης, -ες, full. 

πλησιάζω, come near, approach. 

πλησίον, adv., near. 

πλοῖον, -ov, τό, bort, large or small ; 
the larger boat propelled by banks 
of oars is called ναῦς or τριήρης. 

πλούσιος, -ia, -ov, rich. 

πλουτέω, am rich. 

ποδ-ήρης, -es, reaching to the feet. 

ποδός, ποδών. Sve πούς. 

ποιέω, make, do. See εὖ, κακῶς, περί. 

ποιητέος, -d, -ον, faciendus, must be 
made or done. 

ποικίλος, -7, -ov, many-colored, em- 
broidered. 

πολεμέω, make or carry on war. 

πολέμιος, -id, -ov, hostile; subst., an 
enemy ; τὰ πολέμια, military affairs. 

πόλεμος, -ov, ὁ, war. 

πολι-ορκέω, besiege. 

πόλις, -ews, ἡ, city. 

πολλάκις, often. 

πολλα-πλάσιος, -id, -ov, manifold, 
many more. 

πολύς, comp. πλείων, sup. πλεῖστος, 
much, plur. many, τὸ πολύ, the 





349 προδραμών 


greater part ; διὰ πολλά, for many 
reasons; πλεῖον, πλέον, plus, more. 

πολυ-τελής, -és, costly. 

πονέω, labor, toil. 

πορεία, -as, ἡ, journey. 

πορεύω, mid., proceed, march, jour- 
ney. 

πόρρω, far away, far from. 

πορφύρεος (-ots), -éa (-8), -eov (-obr), 
purp’e. 

ποσί. See πούς. 

ποταμός, -οὔ, 6, river. 

ποτέ, at some time, once. 

πότερον, utrum, whether. 

ποτός, -ἡ, -dv, drinkable; ri ποτόν, 
anything to drink. 

πού, anywhere, perhaps. 

mous, ποδός, ὁ, foot. 

πρᾶγμα, -aros, τό, affair, deed ; plur. 
business ; trouble. 

πραέων. See πρᾶος. 

πρανής, -ἔς, steep. 

πρᾶξις, -ews, 7, business, undertaking. 

πρᾶος, -ela, -ov, mild, tame. 

πρᾶττω, do, perform; κακῶς π., fare 
badly, am unsuccessful. 514, 6; 
353. 

πράως, mildly. 

πρέπω, become, suit. 

πρέσβυς, -ews, comp. -ὕτερος, o/d. 

πρίασθαι (see ὠνέομαι), buy, 539. 7 ; 
164, 165. 

πρίν, conj., before, freq. with πρόσθεν 
preceding. 

πρό, before, with gen.; in front of, 
before (temporal); in behalf of. 

προ-αισθάνομαι, perceive in advance 
or beforehand. 

προ-βάλλω, throw before; mid., throw 
before one’s self; προβάλλεσθαι τὰ 
ὅπλα, present arms. 

προ-δίδωμι, prodo, give up, betray. 

mpo-Sots, προ-δόντα. See προ- 
δίδωμι. 

προ-δραμών. See προ-τρέχω. 














προεῖπον 950 πώς 


προ-εἶπον, announce beforehand or in 
the presence of others. 

προ-ειστήκειν. From προ-ίστημι. 

προ-ελαύνω, ride forward. 

mpo-yev. From πρό-ειμι, 

προ-θυμίομαι, am eager or zealous. 

mpo-Oupia, -ds, ἡ, eagerness, zeal. 

πρό-θυμος, -ov, euyer. 

προ-θύμως, eagerly. 

προ-ίδοιμι. From προ-οράω. 

προ-ιέναι. From πρό-ειμι. 

προ-ΐημι, throw away, desert, aban- 
don. 

προ-ίστημι, place in command, set in 
charge. 

Tpo-kata-Kdw, burn in advance of or 
before others. 

προ-κατα-λαμβάνω, seize in advance 
of or before others. 

προ-μετωπίδιον, -ov, τό, protection for 
the head, head-piece. 

πρό-οιτο. See προ-ΐημι. 

προ-οράω, sce beforehand or in front. 

πρός, at, by; with gen., in front of ; 
προς θεῶν, in the sight of the gods ; 
πρὸς τοῦ τρόπου, in accord with the 
character ; with dat., at, in addi- 
tion to; with acc., to, towards; 
with reference to, 

προσ-άγω, lead on or forward, ad- 
Vance. 

mpoc-aitéw, ask in addition, ask 
besides, 

προσ-δίδωμι, give in addition, give 
besides. 

προσ-έλαβον. See προσ-λαμβάνω. 

πρόσ-ειμι, come towards, advance. 

προσ-ελαύνω, ride or march towards, 
advinee. 

προσ-έρχομαι, come towards, ap- 
proach. 

προσ-ετάχθη. See προσ-τάττω, 

προσ-έχω, hold to, apply; τὸν νοῦν 
προσέχω, give attention. 

mpoc-yev. See πρόσ-ειμι. 





προσ-ήκω, come or extend towards, 
pertain to, am related to. 

προσ-ἤἥεσαν. See πρόσ-ειμι, 

πρόσθεν, before; π.. .. πρίν, before 
that; ὁ πρόσθεν, the previous. 

προσ-θέσθαι. See προσ-τίθημι, 

προσ-ιών. See πρόσ-ειμι. 

προσ-καλέω, ca/l towards, summon. 

προσ-κυνέω, do reverence, bow down 
before. 

προσ-λαμβάνω, take in addition or 
besides. 

πρόσ-οδος, -ov, ἡ, return, revenue, gain. 

προσ-ποιέω, pretend. 

προσ-πολεμέω, make war against. 

προσ-τάττω, lay a command or duty 
upon, command. 

προ-στερνίδιον, -ov, τό, breast-pro- 
lector, breastplate, 

προσ-τίθημι, place by or beside, add ; 
mid., concur. 

πρόσω, forward. 

πρότερος, -d, -ov, prior, before, sooner. 

mpo-tipdw, honor or esteem before 
others. 

προ-τρέχω, run before, outrun. 

προ-φαίνω, mid., appear in front or 
in the distance. 

πρό-φασις, -ews, ἡ, pretext. 

Tpo-xwpéw, advance, help, be for one’s 
convenience. 

πρῶτος, -y, -ov, first; πρῶτον, adv., 
primum, first. 

πτέρυξ, -vyos, ἡ, wing. 

πύλη, -ἡς, ἡ, gate. 

πυνθάνομαι, inquire, learn by inquiry. 
523, 8; 353. 

πυρός, -o0, ὁ, chiefly plur., wheat. 

πώ, yet, up to this or that time. 

πωλέω, 567], 

πώποτε, ever yet, ever, up to this or 
that time. 

πῶς, how ? 

πώς, encl., somehow ; ὧδέ πως, about 
as follows, 








ῥέω 951 στρατός 


P. 


péw, flow. 512, 5; 353. 
ῥΐπτω, throw. 513, 13; 354. 


=. 


σαλπίζω, blow the trumpet. 398, ὃ ; 
354. 

Σάμιος, -ov, ὁ, Samian. Samos was 
a very important island, lying off 
the west ventral part of Asia Minor. 

Σάρδεις -εων, ai, Sardis, on the 
river Pactdlus; the capital of Lydia. 

σατραπεύω, am satrap or ruler over. 

σαφῶς, clearly. 

σεαντοῦ, σαυτοῦ, of thyself. 266; 80. 

σημεῖον, -ov, τό, sign, standard. 

σήσαμον, -ov, τό, sesame, a seed 
largely cultivated in Persia for the 
oil it furnishes, and for its excel- 
lence as a food. 

σϊγή, -ἢς, ἡ, silence. 

σίγλος, -ov, ὁ, shekel, ΞΞ 71 obols, 25 
cents. 

σϊτ-αγωγός, -dv, grain-carrying. 

σϊτίον, -ov, τό, bread, food. 

σῖτος, -ov, ὁ, grain. 

σιωπάω, am silent. 

σκεπτέος, -a, -ov, to be considered. 

σκέπτομαι, specio, /ook at, examine, 
consider. 513, 15; 954. 

σκευο-φόρος, -ον, bagyage-carrying ; 
subs., neut. plur., pack-animals, 
σκηνέω, crcamp. 

σκηνή, -7s, ἡ, tent. 

σκηπτοῦχος, -ov, ὁ, sceptre-bearer. 

σκοπέω. See σκέπτομαι. 

cola, -cas, ἡ, wisdom, (musical) skill. 

σοφός, -7, -dv, wisc, accomplished, 
skilful. 

σπάνιος, -id, -ov, scarce, rare. 

σπάω, draw. 503, 4; 355. 





σπένδω, pour, make a libation ; mid., 
make a libation (hence treaty), with 
some one. 463, c; 355. 

σπεύδω, hasten. 

σπονδή, -ῆς, ἡ, libation ; plur. treaty. 

σπουδαιο-λογέω, talk earnestly or on 
weighty topics. 

σπουδή, -7s, 7, huste. 

στάδιον, -ov, τό, plur. τὰ στάδια or οἱ 
στάδιοι, stadium, little less than a 
JSurlong, = about 606 feet. 

σταθμός, -00, 6, stupping place, station, 
day's journey, about five parasangs, 
or fifteen miles. 

στέγασμα, -aros, τό, covering. 

στείβω, stipo, tread, press; ὁδὸς στει- 
βομένη, trodden way, highway. 
511, 9; 355. 

στενός, -7), -dv, NATTOW. 

orevo-xwola, -as, ἡ, narrow place. 

orepéw, deprive ; pass., στέρομαι. 533, 
6; 355. 

στέρνον, -ov, τό, breast. 

στέφανος, -ov, ὁ, crown. 

στῆναι, στήσας. See ἵστημι. 

στίβος, -ov, 6, path, track. 

στῖφος, -ous, τό, (dense) mass or body. 

στλεγγίς, -idos, ἡ, strigil, flesh-comb, 
scraper. 

στολή, -ἧς, ἡ, dress, robe. 

στόλος, -ov, ὁ, military preparation, 
expedition. 

στράτευμα, -ατος, τό, army. 

στρατεύω, engage in war, am in the 
field. 

στρατηγέω, am general, command, 
lead, 

στρατηγία, -as, ἡ, military com- 
mand, 

στρατηγός, -οὔ, ὁ, general. 

στρατιά, -ἂς, ἡ, arn. 

στρατιώτης, -ov, ὁ, soldier. 

στρατο-πεδεύω, mid., encamp. 

στρατό-πεδον, -ov, τό, camp, 
στρατός, -οὔ, ὁ, army. 

















στραφείς 35 


στραφείς. See στρέφω. 

στρεπτός, -ἡ, -όν, twisted ; ὁ στρεπτός, 
necklace. 

στρέφω, turn; mid., turn or face 
about. 508, 26; 355. 

στρουθός, -οὔ, ὁ, ἡ, ostrich. 

σύ, thou. 261; 79. 

συγ-γενής, -és, akin; subst., relative, 
kinsman. 

συγ-γίγνομαι, come into intercourse or 
acquaintance with, associate with. 

συγ-καλέω, convoke, call together. 

συλ-λαμβάνω, apprehend, arrest. 

συλ-λέγω, collect. 

συλ-λογή, -ἢς, ἡ, collection, levy (of 
soldiers). 

συμ-βάλλω, mid., contribute. 

συμ-βουλεύω, counsel with, advise ; 
mid., confer with. 

σύμ-βουλός, -ov, ὁ, counsellor. 

σύμ-μαχος, -ov, ὁ, ally. 

ovp-tras, -doa, -av, altogether. 

συμ-πέμπω, send with some one. 

συμ-πίπτω, fall in with, grapple with, 

σύμ-πλεως, -ων, filled with, abounding 
in. 

συμ-πολεμέω, fight with (as an ally). 

συμ-πορεύομαι, proceed with. 

συμ-πράττω, work with another, co- 
operate. 

σύν, with; with dat. 

συν-αγείρω, gather together, collect. 

συν-άγω, bring together, collect. 

συν-αλλάττω, chunge loyether, recon- 
cile. 

συν-ανα-βαίνω, go up with. 

συν-αντάω, meet with. 

συν-άπτω, join together, join. 

συν-εγενόμην. See ovy-ylyvopac. 

σύν-ειμι, come together, mect, en- 
counter. 

συν-εκ-βιβάζω, join in bringing out. 

συν-έλεξα, συν-ελέγετος See συλ- 
λέγω. 

συν-ἐπι-σπεύδω, join in hastening on. 


2 σχολή 





συν-έπομαι, follow with, accompany. 

συν-εργός, -οὔ, ὁ, fellow-worker, helper. 

συν-έσπων. See συ-σπάω. 

συν-ήγαγον. See συν-άγω. 

συν-ῃειν, συν-ἤεσαν. See σύν-ειμι. 

σύν-θημα, -ατος, τό, agreement, watch- 
word. 

συν-θοῖτο. See συν-τίθημι. 

συν-ιδεῖν. See συν-οράω. 

σύν-οδος, -ov, ἡ, meeting, encounter. 

σύν-οιδα, ai conscious, realize. 

συν-οράω, sce together or in one view. 

συν-τάττω, arrange together, draw up 
(forces). 

συν-τίθημι, put together ; mid., agree. 

συν-τράπεϊζος, -ov, ὁ, table companion, 
nessmate, 

συν-τυγχάνω, full in with, meet, find. 

Συρακούσιος, Syracusan. Syracuse 
was the largest city of Sicily, and 
located in its southeastern part. 

Συρία, -ds, ἡ, Syria, that part of west- 
ern Asia lying east of the Mediter- 
ranean and north of Arabia. 

Σύριος, -ia, -ov, Syrian. 

Σύρος, -ov, ὁ, Syrian. 

συ-σκευάζω, make ready ; pack up. 

συ-σπάω, draw together. 

συ-σπειράω, roll or draw closely to- 
gether. 

συ-στρατεύω, mid., join in an expe- 
dition. 

συ-στρατιώτης, -ov, ὁ, fellow-soldier. 

συχνός, -%, -dv, considerable; συχνόν 
(numerous in chap. viii. § 10), at α 
considerable distance. 

σφάγιον, -ov, τό, sacrificial victim ; 
plur., omens from sacrifices. 

σφεῖς, σφίσι. See οὗ, ol, ἕ, 

σχεδία, -ds, ἡ, frame, raft. 

σχεδόν, nearly, alinost. 

σχῆμα, -aros, τό, form, figure. 

σχίζω, split. 

σχολαίως, /eisurely. 

σχολή, -ἢς, ἡ, Jeiswre. 





σώζω 909 


σώζω, save. 517, 5; 350. 

σῶμα, -aros, τό, body. 

σωτήρ, -ῆρος, ὁ, savior. 

σωφροσύνη, -7s, ἡ, temperance, self- 
control, 


T. 


τάλαντον, -ov, τό, talent, about $1125. 

τἄλλα, = τὰ ἄλλα. 

τάξις, -ews, ἡ, order, discipline; line 
or body of soldiers. 

τάραχος, -ου, ὁ, confusion. 

Ταρσοί, -ῶν, οἱ, Tarsus, the capital 
of Cilicia. 

τάττω, arrange, order. 514, 9; 356. 

ταύτῃ, in this or that way or direction. 

τάφος, -ov, ὁ, burial, grave. 

τάφρος, -ov, ἡ, ditch, trench. 

ταχθῆναι, ταχθείς. See TaTTw. 

τάχα, quickly. 

ταχέως, θᾶττον, τάχιστα, quickly. 

ταχύς, θάττων, τάχιστης, quick. 

τέ, both ; and, encl. 

τεθνηκώς, See θνήσκω. 

τεῖχος, -ous, τό, wall. 

τεκμήριον, -ου, τό, evidence, proof. 

τέκνον, -ου, τό, child. 

τελευτάω, finish ; die. 

τελευτή, ἧς, ἡ, end. 

τέλος, -ους, τό, end ; adv. acc., finally. 

τετρ-, τεττ-. See the list of numerals 
in the grammar. 

τεύξεσθε, τεύξομαι. See τυγχάνω. 

τήμερον, to-day. 

Τίγρης, -nros, 6, river TJiyris; its 
course is southerly through the 
countries southeast of the Euxine ; 
it unites with the Euphrates, near 
Babylon, before entering the Per- 
sian Gulf. 

τίθημι, put, place; mid., τίθεσθαι τὰ 
ὅπλα, stand under arms or halt in 
line. 534, 1; 356. 


tipdw, esteem, honor. 





τυγχάνω 


τιμή, -ἧς, 7, honor. 

τίμιος, -id, -ἰον, honorable, honored. 

Tipwpéw, punish. 

τὶς, τὶ, some Onc, Any One, SOME per- 
son or thing. 

tis, τί, who? what? 

τιτρώσκω, wound. 531, 6; 357. 

τοι-γαρ-οῦν, therefore, so then, accord- 
ingly. 

τοιόσ-δε, -dde, -όνδε, of the kind men- 
tioned or about to be mentioned ; 
λέγειν τοιάδε, to speak as follows. 

τοιοῦτος, -αὐτη -οὔτο(ν), such, usually 
referring to what precedes. 

τόξευμα, -ατος, τό, arrow. 

τοξεύω, shoot the bow ; pass., am struck 
with an arrow. 

τοξικός, -7, -dv, relating to the bow ; 
ἡ τοξική, archery. 

τοξότης, -ov, ὁ, bowman. 

τόπος, -ov, ὁ, place. 

τοσοῦτος, -αὐτη, -o0TO(v), so great, so 
much (plur. so many). 

τότε, thei. 

τραῦμα, -ατος, τό, wound. 

τράχηλος, -ov, ὁ, neck. 

τρεῖς, τρία, tres, three. 

τρέπω, turn. 508, 28 ; 357. 

τρέφω, feed, support, nourish. 508, 
29; 357. 

τρέχω, TUN. 530, 53; 357. 

tpéw, tremble; flee. 503, 15; 357. 

τρία. See τρεῖς ; TpidkovTa, Tpra- 
κόσιοι. See list of numerals in tlie 
Grammar. 288; 76. 

τριήρης, -ovs, ἡ, trireme, the Greel 
war-vessel. 

tpto-. See list of numerals in Gram- 
mar. 288; 76. 

τρίτος, -7, -ov, third. 

τροπή, -ἧς, ἡ, a turning, defeat, rout. 

τρόπος, -ov, ὁ, turn, way, manner. 

τροφή, -7s, ἡ, support, nurture. 

τυγχάνω, happen, chance, happen or 
chance upon. 523, 9; 357. 











ὕδωρ φρόνιμος φρούραρχος 300 ὠφέλιμος 





: 


ὕδωρ, ὕδατος, τό, water. 
ὕλη, “18, 1, wood, bush, shrubbery. 


ὑμεῖς, ὑμῶν, ὑμῖν, ὑμᾶς. Sce σύ. 

ὕπ-αρχος, σου, ὁ, officer, liewtenunt. 

ὑπ-άρχω, beyin, ain on hand, aid. 

ὑπ-ελαύνω, ride up to. 

ὑπέρ, super, OVER; with gen., 
over, in behalf of, on account of, 
concerning ; with ace., over, be- 
yond, 

ὑπερ-βολή, -ἧς, ἡ, passage over (e. g. 
mountains), 

ὕπερθεν, from over, over, above. 

ὑπ-εσχόμην. See ὑπ-ισχνέομαι, 

ὑπ-ήκοος, -ov, obedient, subject. 

ὑπ-ηρετέω, render aid. 

ὑπ-ισχνέομαι, promise. 524, 5; 358. 

ὑπό, sub, under; with gen., wader, 
by (of agency, with passive verbs); 
with dat. wnder, at the foot of ; 
with acc., to (a position) under, 

ὑπο-δεέστερος, of inferior origin or 
station, inferior, 

ὑπο-δέχομαι, take or receive under 
protection. 

ὑπο-ζύγιον, -ov, τό, yoke - animal, 
beast of burden. 

ὑπο-κρύπτω, mid., secrete, hide 
away. 

ὑπο-λαμβάνω, fake under protec- 
tion. 

ὑπο-λείπω, Jeave behind. 

ὑπέμνημα, -aros, τό, reminder, re- 
membrance. 

ὑπ-οπτεύω, suspect. 

ὑπο-χωρέω, withdraw, retreat. 

ὑποψία, -ds, ἡ, suspicion. 

ὑστεραῖος, -d, -ov, next (in time), 
Sollowing. 

ὑστερέω, am behind, later than, too 
late for. 

ὕστερος, -a, -ov, later, behind. 

ὑψηλός, -7, -dv, high. 





Φ, 


φαίην. See φημί. 


| φαίνω, show, mid., show myself, ap- 


pear. 518, 19; 358. 


φάλαγξ, -ayyos, ἡ, line or order of 


battle, phalanx, 

φανερός, -d, -dv, apparent, evident. 

pavepas, apparent!y, evidently, openly. 

φασί(ν). See φημί. 

φέρω, bear, bear away, receive ; xa c- 
πῶς p.,amtroubled. 539.6; 358. 

φεύγω, flee; ὁ φεύγων, fugitive. 511, 
15; 358. 

φημί, suy; οὔ φημι, refuse. 535, 1, 
481 ; 358. 

φθάνω, anticipate, 521, 2; 358. 

φθέγγομαι, utier or make a sound, 
shout. 

Pbovéw, begrudge, envy. 

φιλέω, love. 

φιλία, -ds, ἡ, love, friendship. 

φίλιος, -ia, -ov, friendly. 

φίλ-ιππος, -ov, fond of horses. 

φιλό-θηρος, -ov, fond of hunting. 

φιλο-κερδέω, am Sond of gain. 

φιλο-κίνδυνος, -ov, fond of danger. 

φιλο-μαθής, -és, fond of learning. 

φίλος, -ov, ὁ, friend. 

rro-Tipéopar, am piqued or jealous. 
497. (. 

φίλτερος, -α, -ον, comp. οἵ φίλος. 

φλυαρία, -ds, ἡ, folly, nonsense. 

φοβέω, frighten ; mid., fear. 

φόβος, -ov, ὁ, fear. 

φοινίκεος(οῦς)), -éa (ἢ), -εον (-otv), pur- 
ple. 

Φοινίκη, -ns, ἡ, Phoenicia. 

φοινϊκιστής, -οὔ, ὁ, wearer of the 
purple, courtier. 

φοῖνιξ, -ixos, ὁ, palm-tree, espec. 
date-palm. 

φορέω, wear. 

φράζω, fell, declare. 514,17; 359. 

φρόνιμος, -ov, temperate, eool-headed. 





φρούρ-αρχοξ, -ov, ὁ, commander of a 
4 11) } 1897. 

φρουρέω, guard, watch. 

φρούριον, -ov, τό, guard, garrison. 

Φρυγία, -as, ἡ, Phrygia. 

Ppvé, Φρυγός, ὁ, a Phrygian. 

φυγάς, -ddos, ὁ, fuyitive, exile. 

φυγή, -ῆς, ἡ, flight 

φυλακή, -ἧς, ἡ, Vigilia, a guard 
(collective). 

φύλαξ, -xos, ὁ, guardsman. 

φυλάττω, guard. 514, 11; 359. 

φύω, produce. 507, 4; 359. 

Poxdls, -ldos, ἡ, Phocean woman. 


Xx. 


χαλεπαίνω, am angry. 

χαλεπός, -7, -dv, hurd, dificult. 

χαλεπώς, hardly, grievously ; χαλε- 
πῶς φέρω, am troubled, am grieved. 

χάλκεος(οῦς), -€a(f), -eov(otv), brazen, 
of bronze. 

χαλκός, -οὔ, ὁ, bronze. 

Χχαρίζομαι, gratify. 

χάρις, -ἰτος, ἡ, grace, fuvor; x. εἰδέ- 
vat, recognize a fuvor, feel gratefid. 

χειμών, -Bvos, ὁ, winter, cold. 

χείρ, χειρός, ἡ, hand. 

χίλιοι, -αι, -a, one thousand. 

χῖλός, -οὔ, ὁ, hay, fodder. 

χιτών, -Gvos, 6, tunic, the linen gar- 
ment worn next the body. 

χοῖνιξ, -xos, ἡ, choenix, about a litre 
or quart. 

χόρτος, -ov, ὁ, dry grass, fodder. 

χράομαι, wse. 412; 360. 

χρή, ἐ is necessary, one must. 535, 3, 
486; 360. 

χρήζω, desire, wish. 

Χρῆμα, -aros, τό, thing; plur., espec. 
goods, means, wealth. 

XPfivar, see χρή ; χρῆσθαι, see χρά- 
ομαι, 





χρήσιμος, -ἡ, -ον, useful. 

χρόνος, -ου, ὁ, time. 

χρύσεος(οῦς), -éa(H), -εον(οῦν), yo'den. 

χρυσίον, -ov, τό, gold picce, yold 
NLONEY. 

χρῦσο-χάλῖνος, -ov, golden-bridled. 

χώρα, -ds, ἡ, α country. 

Xepéw, make room, advance; of ἃ 
measure, contain, hold. 

χωρίον, -ov, τό, stronghold. 

χωρίς, apart from. 


Vv. 


ψέλιον, -ov, τό, bracelet. 
ψεύδω, deceive; pass., am mistaken ; 
mid., deceive, lie. 360. 
ed 
Ψηφίζω, vote. 
Widds, -ἡ, -dv, bare, unprotected. 
Widow, make bare; pass., am cleared 


of. 


02. 


ὧδε, thus (as follows). 

ᾧετο. See οἴομαι. 

ᾧκτειρον. See οἰκτείρω. 

ὠνέομαι, buy, traffic. 539, 7; 360. 

ὥρα, -ds, ἡ, hora, scuson, suitable 
time, hour. 

ὡς, as: (a) with numerals, about ; 
(0) strengthening the superl. ὡς 
τάχιστα, as quickly as possible; 
(c) as a prep., to; (d) with the 
partic., as, on the ground that ; 
(6) how, in what manner; (f) as 
conj., that, in order that, 

ὥς, thus. 

ὥσ-περ, just as, just as if. 

ὥστε, so that (as a result). 

ὠτειλή, -ἧς, ἡ, scar. 

aris, -ίδος, ἡ, bustard. 

ὠφελέω, benefit, assist, aid. 

ὠφέλιμος, -η, -ov, beneficial, 















































* COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 


" Ὁ “tow, or at the 
This book is dre or the date ᾿ 





NT 
































